^ 


■>. 


sm 


'/ 


m 


r 


^>. 


:>5 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1^  1^ 

■tt  Ui   12.2 


I.I 


1.25 


KlUU 

m 

1.4    II  1.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


4r 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


wnjnaiiiiiaiifiM 


4r 


«' I 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIViH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


'jjf 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  MIcroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  iMotes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


H 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommag6e 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurde  et/ou  pellicul^e 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  gdographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 

Rell6  avec  d'autres  documents  : 


D 


D 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  sarrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int6rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajoutdes 
lors  d'une  restauration  upparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  filmdes. 


J3 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppl^mentaires 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mdthode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquto  ci-dessous. 


D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
□ 

n 

D 

D 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  reduction  indlqu6  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaurdes  et/ou  pellicuides 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  d6color6es,  tachetdes  ou  piqu^es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d6tach6es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  indgale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppl^mentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponlble 


^ 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  M  filmdes  d  nouveau  de  fa^on  & 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


26X 


12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


30X 


28X 


32X 


ails 

du 

tdifier 

une 

lage 


^ 


ata 


»iure. 


1 


2X 


ir 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  Iceeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  -^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  y  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

IVIaps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrata  the 
method: 


1 

2 

3 

L'exemplaire  film6  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  6t6  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin.  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetd  de  l'exemplaire  fiimd,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimde  sont  filmds  en  commengant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  fiim^s  en  commenpant  par  la 
premidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  'lernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboies  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  -^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  le 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc..  peuvent  dtre 
film6s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diffdrents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6.  il  est  film6  d  partir 
de  Tangle  sup6rieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  ndcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mdthode. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

No.  99. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS 


FOR 


Nova  Scotia,  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  South  Shore 
OF  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. 


Compiled  by 
E.  H.  ORE,  U.  8.  Hydrographio  Office. 


I. 


By  direction  of 

Lieut.  Commanixer  RICHAEDSON  CLOVEE,  U.  8.  N., 
Hydrographer. 


mi*'^ 


WASHINGTON: 

QOVBBNMBNT  PRINTING  OFPICB. 
1891. 


I  1 


-rfaXJ* 


iH'P 


w1 

r 

i 

r 

]  o 

■   1^' 

vr 

1 

yjl 

I? 

4 


•TTwntr 


ii— >!■■  w"fc'-^»y  ■ 


CONTENTS. 


Preface v 

Note VI 

Index  Chart viu 

CHAPTER  I. 

Qeneral  Remarks— Newfoundland  and  Nora  Scotia  Banks,  Sable  Island,  Car- 
rents,  etc 1 

CHAPTER  II. 

Bay  of  Fnndy,  North  Shore,  Meridian  Point,  Maine,  to  and  inclnding  Cnni- 
berland  Basin 1& 

CHAPTER  III. 
Bay  of  Fandy ,  South  Shore,  Bartiugton  Bay  to  Basin  of  Mines T)! 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Nova  Scotia,  Southeast  Coast,  Port  Latour  to  Sambro  Harbor 78 

CHAPTER  V. 
Nora  Scotia,  Southeast  Coast,  Sambro  Harbor  to  Cape  Canso..... Ill 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Chedabncto  Bay,  Lennox  Passage,  Gut  of  Canso  and  St.  Geor^o  I:  ^ 157 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Northumberland  Strait,  Cape  St.  George  to  Miramiohi  Bay 191 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Prince  Edward  Island  and  Northumberland  Strait 21& 

ADDENDA. 

List  of  :<ights 249 

Coaling  and  Docking  Facilities 269 

Opening  and  Closing  of  Ports 272 

III 


'I 


;i 


1 


* 


•% 


^ 


PREFACE. 


The  following  sailing  directions  for  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  coasts  of  Nova 
Scotia,  and  the  southern  shore  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  commence  at 
Meridian  Point,  on  the  coast  of  Maine,  in  67°  30'  west  longitude,  follow 
the  coast  line  around  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  along  the  SW.  and  SE.  shores 
of  Nova  Scotia,  the  southern  shore  of  the  Galf  of  St.  Lawrence,  to 
Miramichi  Bay. 

In  the  compilation  of  this  volume  the  following  books  and  authorities 
have  been  consulted : 

Southeast  Coast  of  Nova  Scotia  and  Bay  of  Fundy,  1885,  Admiralty. 

St.  Lawrence  Pilot,  Vol.  II,  1881,  Admiralty. 

The  latest  United  States  Hydrographic  OUce  and  British  Admiralty 
charts. 

Office  of  Naval  Intelligence,  Bureau  of  Navigation. 

Port  Charges  of  the  World,  Hunter,  1890. 

BioHABBSON  Clover, 
Lieut.  Oomtnandier,  U.  8.  Navy,  Mydrographer. 

U.  S.  Hydrographic  Office, 

Ifavy  Department,  1891. 


11 


•fljW 


.J 


—  — iw 


•mm    *mipm<  1111,1  I  .1,^ 


1.11  II    III 


NOTK. 

frn^^u^l  and  courses  are  true.  The  direction  of  the  wind  is  the  point 
from  which  It  blows  ;  that  of  the  currents  the  point  towards  which  they 
set.  Distances  are  expressed  in  nautical  miles,  and  the  soundings,  unless 
otherwise  stated,  are  reduced  to  mean  low  water. 

VI 


i  the  point 
'^hioh  they 
igs,  unless 


INDEX    TO    H.  O. 

ALLUDED  TO  IN  PUBLICATK 


^■^^•••p* 


•t* 


MI^^MIIRI^n   II    nil  ll,!!!!! 


>M 


Uv 


.»> 


IHrimion  of  tti.iH  CimMtniitiunGWlxahPutUui.  Animltinl  in  fh„n/f. 


DEX    TO    H.  O.   CHARTS 

i  TO  IN  PUBLICATIONS  NOa99ANDIOO 


'A 


TATREN  CE 


?^Lr:?"i' 


-iwi 


I 


l>w»w.  1;^  ».y>rtwit  JNyrwut  (g-  JL^^onutZ  amd  r.i<XaU 


v  A^,>V«*-,f5H?'-*'     ■ 


LIST  OF  HARBOR  AND  SPECIAL  CHARTS. 


Title, 


I- 


THE  BANKS  OF  NEWFOUNDLAND,  NOVA  SCOTIA,  AND  THE  GULF   OF  MAINE. 

The  Great  Bankd  of  Newfoundland,  with  the  adjacent  coast  from  Cape 
Bona  vista  to  Cape  St.  Mary 

Virgin  Rocks  and  Eastern  Shoals 

Capo  St.  Mary  and  the  Miquelon  Islands  to  Halifax,  with  off-lying  hanks, 
inclnding  Green,  St.  Pierre,  Artimon,  Misaine,  Canso,  Sable  I,  and  Sam- 
bro  banks,  the  Middle  Gronnd  and  Banquereau , 

Halifax  to  New  York,  with  Roseway,  La  Have,  Brown,  and  Georges  banks, 
Cashes  Ledge,  Nantucket  Shoals,  and  the  inshore  banks 


Number 

of 
charts. 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE  AND  ADJACENT  COASTS  AND  ISLANDS. 

River  and  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  Nova  Scotia,  and  adjacent  banks,  with 

plans  of  Georges  Shoals  and  Gut  of  Canso,  Chedabuctou  Bay,  etc 

Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 

Magdalen  Islands,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 

Amherst  and  Grand  Entry  harbors,  Magdalen  Islands 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE— NORTH  AND  WEST  COASTS. 


Newfoundland;  northern  half 

West  coast  of  Nevfoaudland  from  St.  Genevieve  Bay  to  Bonne  Bay,  and 

south  coast  of  Quebec  from  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  to  Cape  MacKinnon 

South  coact  of  Quebec,  Washtawooka  Bay  to  Cape  MacKinnon , 

Anticosti  Island  and  adjacent  coast  of  Qnebeo , 

Anticosti  Island  to  Point  de  Monts 

River  St.  Lawrence;  Point  de  Monts  to  Saguenay  River 

River  St.  Lawrence  ;  Saguenay  River  to  Quebec , 

Quebec  Harbor , 

Bay  ofCbalenrsaud  adjacent  coasts.  New  Brunswick  '.!.. 

Ga8p6  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  coast  of  Now  Brunswick 

Caraquette,  Shippegan,  and  Miscou  harbors,  Bav  of  Chaleurs , 

Mirauiichi  Bay,  New  Brunswick .' , 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND  AND    ADJACENT    COASTS    AND   NEW  BRUNSWICK 

AND  NOVA  SCOTIA. 

Prince  Edward  Island  and  adjacent  coast,  inluding  Northumberland 
Strait  and  northern  approaches  to  the  Gut  of  Canso 

Shediac  Buy  and  Harbor,  New  Brunswick 

Pugwash  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Wallace  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Amet  Sound  and  Anchorages,  Nova  Scotia 

Caribou  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Piotou  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia,  plan  of  entrance  and  bar 

Merigouiish  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Pomquet  Harbor  and  Road  and  Tracadie  and  Little  Tracadie  harbors. 
Nova  Scotia _. 

VII 


980 
863 


198 
941 


16 
1013 
1092 
1107 


581a 

1105 
1108 
1109 
1110 
1111 
1112 
1207 
1067 
1167 
1217 
1179 


1066 
1081 
1094 
1151 
1098 
1140 
1076 
1099 

1148 


■  •,-,-,-, 


VIII 


LIST    OP   HARBOR   AND   SPECIAL   CHARTS. 


Title. 


I'lUNCE  KDWARD  ISLAND. 

Prince  Edward  Islaud  and  adjacent  coast,  including  Northumberland  Strait 
and  the  Northern  Approaclies  to  the  Gut  of  Canso 

Bedeqne  Harbor,  including  Sumineraide  Harbor 

Crapaud  Harbor !.'."!.'." 

Hillsborough  Bajaud  Charlottetown  Harbor ....—...'. 

Murray  Harbor ........'.'.'.'.'. 

Cardigan  Hay,  with  Cardigan,  Montague,  and  Brudenellrive'rs.Panmure 
Island,  and  Georgetown  Harbor ' 


Number 

of 
charts. 


1 


CAPK  BRRTON  ISLAND  AND  ADJACENT  COAST. 

Cape  Breton  Islaud.    Plan  of  St.  Paul  Island 

Port  Hood,  Cape  Breton  Island  

Great  and  Little  Bras  d'Or  lakes.  Cape    Breton  Island  ..'.....' 
Saint  Anne  Harbor  and  Great  Bias  d'Or,  Cape  Breton  Island. . 

Sydney  Harbor,  Cape  Breton  Island 

Scatari  Island  and  Meuadou  Passage,  Cape  Breton  Island.".".. ! 
Louisburg  Harbor,  Cape  Breton  Island 


Gut  of  Canso  with  its  southern  approaches  and  Chedabuctou  Bay 
Gut  of  Canso  and  Chedabuctou  Bay.    (See  plan  on  H.  O.  15) 


Madame  Island  and  Lenox  Passage 
Guysborough  Harbor,  Chedabuctou  Bay. 


NOVA  SCOTIA— EAST  COAST. 


Sanibro  Island  to  Cape  Canso;  Sheet  II 

Canso  Harbor  and  Approaches,  including  Glasgow  Harbor  and" 'Andrew 

Island  and  Passage 

Whitehaven,  Nova  Scotia !."!!.!.!!!  !^i*!!' 

Country  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia ...'.'.'."'.'.......... 

Nicomtau  Bay,  with  adjacent  coast  and  islands,  Nova  Scotia!!."J.. ...!!*! 
Sheet  Harbor  and  adjacent  anchorages,  including  Mushaboon,  Spry,  and 

Pope  harbors,  and  Taylor,  Spry,  and  Tomlees  bays 

Beaver  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia '"\ 

Ship  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia,  and  adjacent  anchorages ...'.'.'.'..'.'."..'.. 

Halifax  to  New  York,  with  Roseway,  La  Have,  Brown,  and  Georges  banks'," 

Cashes  Ledge,  Nantucket  Shoals,  and  inshore  banks 

Halifax  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Capo  Sable  to  Sanibro  Island;  Sheet  I ...........'.'.'.." 

Port  Mouton  and  Liverpool  bays.  Nova  Scotia il""..^!!!   "" 


UAY  OF  FUNDY. 


Bay  of  Fundy,  southern  part 

Grand  Manan  Island  and  adjacent  coast,  flay  of  Fundy  ...'.'.'..'.'..'.'.'.'.'.'.". 

Passaraaquoddy  Bay  and  Approaches .'.'."....!..'. 

L'litang  Harbor  and  Approaches,  with  adjacent  harbors  and  "anchorages", 

including  Bliss  Harbor,  Petite  Harbor,  etc 

Port  St.  Andrews,  Passaniaquoddy  Bay ...'. 

Bay  of  Fundy,  northern  part.    Plan  of  Avon  River ..........'.'.'... ...'.'..'.'. 

St,  John,  Now  Brunswick,  enlarged  plan  of  entrance  to  harbor '.'.'.'.. 


UNITED  STATES— EAST  COAST. 


Passainaquoddy  Bay  and  Approaches,  including  Lepreau  Bay,  Beaver 
Harbor,  L'Etang  Harbor,  Quoddy  Roads,  Cobscook  Bay,  Friar  Roads, 
St.  Andrew  Harbor,  and  the  St.  Croix  River  to  Calais  and  St.  Stephens.. 


10t)6 
1080 
1095 
10b8 
1150 

1077 


611 
1079 
1237 
1134 
1061 
1097 

155 

1236 

15 

1279 

1075 


525 

1074 
1124 
1116 
1139 

1173 
1069 
1135 

941 

147 

524 

1106 


610 
1057 
1247 

1054 

1051 

609 

149 


1247 


1" 


1066 
1080 
1095 
1068 
1150 

1077 


611 
1079 
1237 
1134 
lOtil 
1097 

155 

12:16 

15 

1272 

1075 


525 

1074 
1124 
1116 
1139 

1173 
1069 
1135 

941 

147 

524 

1106 


610 
1057 
1247 

1054 

1051 

609 

149 


ct 


CHAPTER!. 

GENERAL   REMARKS — NEWFOUNDLAND  AND  NOVA  SCOTIA  BANKS. 

The  province  of  New  Brunswick,  which  forms  the  northern  shore  of 
the  Bay  of  Fundy,  limits  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  on  the  west  and 
the  St.  Lawrence  Kiver  on  the  south,  and  has  a  coast  line  of  about 
500  miles,  which  is  only  interrupted  by  the  low  isthmus  which  joins  it 
with  Nova  Scotia. 

New  Brunswick  was  first  settled  by  the  French  in  1639,  and  it  con- 
tinued, in  connection  with  Nova  Scotia,  to  form  part  of  Acadia,  or 
New  France,  till  it  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British  after  the  capture 
of  Quebec  in  1769 ;  it  was  formally  ratified  as  an  English  possession  in 
1763,  and  from  that  period  was  annexed  to  Nova  Scotia  until  1785, 
when  it  became  a  separate  colony. 

Id  1881  the  population  of  New  Brunswick  amounted  to  321,233. 

The  general  surface  of  this  province  is  broken  by  a  series  of  bold 
undulations,  which  do  not,  however,  rise  into  mountains,  and  is  trav- 
ersed by  many  rivers,  the  principal  of  which  is  that  of  St.  John,  which 
flows  into  the  well-known  harbor  of  the  same  name. 

Coal  is  found  in  great  abundance,  and  iron  ore  and  gypsum,  as  well 
as  other  minerals,  are  also  to  be  found  in  considerable  quantities.  A 
great  portion  of  the  country  is  covered  by  dense  forests,  and  the  cut- 
ting and  exporting  of  timber  aifords  remunerative  employment  to  a 
large  number  of  the  inhabitants.  Shipbuilding  is  carried  on  to  a  con- 
siderable extent  throughout  the  province,  but  chiefly  at  St.  John. 

Nova  Scotia,  a  province  of  British  North  America,  is  an  extensive 
peninsula  varying  in  breadth  from  50  to  100  miles,  and  connected  with 
the  continent  by  an  isthmus  only  8  miles  in  width,  having  the  Bay  of 
Fundy  on  the  one  side  and  Northumberland  Strait  on  the  other.  It 
lies  between  latitude  43°  and  46°  N.,  and  longitude  61°  and  67°  W. ;  and 
is  bounded  on  the  north  by  Northumberland  Strait,  which  separates  it 
from  Prince  Edward  Islapd ;  NE.  by  the  Gut  of  Oanso,  lying  between 
it  and  Cape  Breton  Island  (now  a  county  of  Nova  Scotia) ;  south  and 
SE.  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean ;  west  by  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  NW.  by 
New  Brunswick. 

The  soils  of  Nova  Scotia  are  various  along  the  south  shore;  the 

granite  forms  the  basis,  extending  in  many  places  20  miles  into  the 

interior.  This  region  is  the  least  fertile,  and  being  that  which  strangers 

first  see  is  apt  to  create  an  unfavorable  impression  ;  but  there  are  else- 

5314 1  .  1 


i. 


4  GENERAL    REMARKS. 

where  exteusive  alluvial  tracts,  producitig  the  most  abumlaut  crops. 
The  forests  also  abound  in  good  timber,  the  ash,  beech,  birch,  maple, 
oak,  pine,  and  spruce  being  the  most  common  trees  indigenous  to  the 
country. 

The  population  of  Nova  Scotia  is  about  500,000. 

Caution.— In  the  following  pages  will  be  found  the  latest  informa- 
tion respecting  the  approaches  to,  as  well  as  the  appearance  of,  the 
SE.  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  tliough  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that 
peculiar  and  distinctive  features  are  not  easily  recognizable  in  the 
usual  misty  weather  from  distances  at  which,  inconsequence  of  numer- 
ous outlying  dangers,  it  would  be  prudent  for  a  vessel  uncertain  of  her 
position  to  be  kept  from  the  laud. 

Climate. — The  extremes  of  temperature  during  the  year  vary  from 
60  to  80  (F.)  below  zero,  to  80o  above  it ;  the  average  of  the  coldest 
month  being  about  20o,  and  that  of  the  hottest  about  70°.  The  sever- 
ity of  winter  seldom  sets  in  until  the  close  of  December;  frost  gener- 
ally continues  from  Christmas  to  April,  being  followed  by  a  spring  of 
short  duration.  The  cold  weather  is  usUciily  dry,  and  the  summer  beat 
regular  and  temperate;  the  autumn  is,  however,  the  most  eiyoyable 
season. 

The  comparatively  mild  climate  enjoyed  by  Nova  Scotia  seems  to  be 
attributable  in  some  degree  to  the  indueuce  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  which 
prevents  the  harbors  of  the  Atlantic  from  being  frozen  during  the  win- 
ter like  those  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  province. 

The  climate  of  New  Brunswick  is  similar  to  that  of  Nova  Scotia,  be- 
ing subject  to  extremes  of  heat  and  cold.  The  winter  lasts  from  Novem- 
ber to  April,  the  severest  cold  beingexperienced  between  the  third  weeks 
of  December  and  March.  The  prevailing  summer  winds  vary  from 
south  to  WSW.,  when  dense  fogs  are  often  produced  on  the  shores  of 
the  Bay  of  Fuudy,  and  extend  15  to  20  miles  inland. 

Winds.— The  prevailing  winds  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy  during  the  sum- 
mer are  from  south  to  SW.,  and  in  autumn  from  north  to  NE.,  generally 
strong.  Winds  from  south  to  SW.  generally  bring  fogs,  from  west  to 
north,  dry  clear  weather ;  winds  from  NE.  to  SE.  are  generally  accom- 
panied by  rain ;  southerly  winds  veer  to  the  west,  NW.,  and  north. 

Fogs.— The  fogs  frequently  give  but  little  warning,  and  generally  fol. 
low  southerly  or  southwesterly  winds,  which  bring  with  them  heat  and 
moisture  from  the  Gulf  Stream ;  they  chiefly  prevail  during  the  months 
of  July  and  Augast,  and  hang  principally  on  the  coast  between  Cape 
Sable  and  Bryer  Island  and  the  vicinity  of  Grand  Manan  Island. 

On  the  Nova  Sciotia  coast  eastward  of  Bryer  Island  the  fog  generally 
dears  for  a  short  distance  ott  shore  when  the  wind  is  to  the  southward 
of  S  W.,  and  on  proceeding  to  the  eastward  the  belt  of  clear  increases  in 
breadth.  On  the  New  Brunswick  shore  the  fog  generally  clears  with 
the  wind  to  the  ^irestward  of  WNW. 

Smokes. — During  the  summer  mouths  the  haze  occasioned  by  the 
smoke  from  burning  forests  in  the  neighboring  State  of  Maine  is  almost 


1 


I    I 


T 


i 


T 


CLIMATE WINDS — TIDES.  —-'  ^ 

as  bad  as  a  fog,  being  frequently  of  suflBcieut  density  to  obscure  lights 
at  night  when  only  a  short  distance  from  them. 

Fogs,  Winds,  and  Barometer  on  the  SE.  Coast  of  Nova  Scotia- 
Fogs  are  i)revalent  all  the  year  round,  but  during  the  spring  and  sum- 
mer months  dense  fogs  or  rain  almost  always  accompany  all  winds 
from  the  sea,  from  ENE.  around  by  south  to  WSW.  In  winter  the  rain 
is  frequently  replaced  by  snow.  Dui'ing  the  autumnal  and  winter 
months  winds  from  between  north  and  west  become  more  frequent,  and, 
being  ofl"  the  land,  are  always  accompanied  by  clear  weather. 

Strong  gales  of  wind  do  not  often  occur  in  May,  June,  or  July  ;  but 
afler  the  middle  of  August  they  are  often  of  great  strength,  and  it  then 
becomes  essential  to  attend  carefully  to  the  indications  of  the  barome- 
ter. Strong  winds  from  east,  round  by  south,  to  WSW.,  are  always 
accompanied  by  a  falling  barometer;  when,  therefore,  these  winds  be- 
gin to  abate,  and  the  barometer  at  the  same  time  cep  jes  to  fall,  a  change 
of  wind,  more  or  less  sudden,  to  the  opposite  direction  may  be  expected, 
with  a  rising  barometer  and  fine  weather ;  if  it  be  winter  the  change 
will  probably  be  accompanied  by  intense  frost,  coating  the  vessel,  sails 
and  rigging  with  ice. 

Again,  a  high  barometer,  stationary  or  beginning  to  fall,  indicates 
that  a  SE.  or  SW.  wind,  with  accompanying  rain  and  fog,  is  not  far  dis- 
tant; and  if,  at  the  same  time,  there  be  a  bank  of  clouds  rising  abovfj 
the  northwestern  horizon,  the  indication  is  certiiin. 

Caution. — It  is  essential  to  the  safety  of  vessels  to  attend  to  thene 
indications,  for  to  the  neglect  of  such  precautious,  more  especially  of  the 
deep-sea  lead,  no  less  than  to  the  fogs  and  irregular  currents,  the  ship- 
wrecks on  Sable  Island  and  the  SE.  coast  of  Xova  Scotia  are  attribu- 
table. 

All  this  portion  of  the  sea,  from  the  eastern  limit  of  the  bank  of 
Newfoundland,  past  Cape  Race  to  Halifax,  as  well  as  to  Portland,  Bos- 
ton, or  other  harbors  of  the  coast  of  the  United  States,  is  within  sound- 
ings, and  therefore  during  foggy  weather,  or  when  in  doubt  respecting 
the  ship's  position,  frequent  soundings  are  absolutely  necessary,. 

Another  important  point  to  which  due  attention  should  be  paid  is, 
that  in  approaching  the  coast  of  Nova  Scotia  the  variation  of  the  com- 
pass changes  rapidly,  and,  if  not  allowed  for,  might  easily  run  a  vessel 
into  danger. 

Tides. — The  tidal  currents  along  the  shores  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  are 
uncertain  both  in  velocity  and  direction,  and  in  navigating  the  bay 
extreme  caution  is  necessary  when  within  tidal  intluences,  whose  veloc- 
ities have  been  known  to  vary  from  one  to  8  miles  an  hour. 

Gapt.  B.  v.  Hamilton  remarks  that  off  the  Tusket  Islands,  the  tides 
are  strong  and  eddying,  and  that  H.  M.  S.  Sphinx,  though  steaming  at 
the  rate  of  7  knots  an  hour,  was  whirled  almost  completely  round 
against  the  helm. 

The  same  authority  states  that  the  offlng  tides  are  likely  to  mislead, 


d 


4  CURRENTS NEWFOUNDLAND  BANKS. 

and  that  be  was  informed  by  a  flsbermaii  that  the  tidal  current  on  Brown 
bank — olf  Cape  Sable — occasionally  ran  to  the  NE.  for  15  hours  con- 
tinuously at  the  rate  of  2  miles  an  hour  (which  would  account  for  ves- 
sels from  Boston  being  so  frequently  set  up  the  Bsiy  of  Fuiuly),  whilst  at 
other  times  the  set  would  be  as  strong  to  the  SW. 

No  reliance,  therefore,  can  be  placed  either  in  the  rate  or  direction  of 
the  off-shore  tides. 

Currents  on  the  SE.  Coast  of  Nova  Scotia. — The  irregular  cur- 
rents are  said  to  be  one  of  the  principal  causes  of  the  frequent  wrecks 
on  Sable  Island.  The  main  branch  of  the  Labrador  Current,  after  pass- 
ing along  the  eastern  coast  of  Newfoundland,  turns  to  the  westward, 
and  is  joined  by  another  branch  of  the  same  current,  which,  having 
entered  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  through  the  Strait  of  Belleisle,  runs 
out  to  the  southeastward,  between  Newfoundland  and  Cape  Breton 
Island.  These  currents  are  rendered  inconstant  and  irregular  both  in 
strength  and  direction,  by  local  and  distant  winds;  but  the  general 
tendency  is  well  known  to  be  to  the  westward,  for  vessels  find  no  diffi- 
culty in  working  to  windward  in  that  direction,  anywhere  to  the  north- 
ward ot  the  Gulf  Stream;  and  hence  it  is  that  many  of  the  vessels 
wrecked  on  Sable  Island  were  supposed  to  have  been  well  to  the  east- 
ward of  its  position  when  they  ran  on  shore. 


BANKS. 

G-reat  Bank  of  Newfoundland. — This  bank  extends  nearly  300 
miles  north  and  south,  between  the  parallels  of  48°  and  43°  N.,  and  280 
miles  east  and  west,  between  the  meridians  of  48°  and  65°  W.  The 
only  dangers  whose  existence  have  been  verified,  are  the  Virgin  Rocks 
and  banks,  and  the  Eastern  Bocks. 

The  form  of  the  bank  is  irregular,  but  it  reaches  its  most  eastern  limit 
in  the  parallel  of  the  Virgin  Rocks.  South  of  this  it  trends  to  the  south- 
west, and  decreases  in  depth,  so  that  in  the  parallel  of  44°  N.  there  is 
only  a  depth  of  22  fathoms,  sand.  In  the  parallel  of  43°  N.  and  merid- 
ian of  50°  W.  the  bank  falls  into  deep  water,  and  its  60-fathom  edge 
trends  to  the  NW. 

The  Great  Bank  is  separated  from  Ballard  Bank  near  Cat)e  Race  by 
a  channel  about  20  miles  wide,  having  from  80  to  100  fathoms,  mud ; 
but  its  nortliwestern  limit  has  not  yet  been  correctly  defined. 

The  general  depth  of  water  on  the  Great  Bank  varies  from  30  to  45 
fathoms,  and  the  bottom  is  usually  sand,  gravel,  or  broken  shell. 

Virgin  Rocks. — The  bank  (with  depth  of  9  to  20  fathoms)  on  which 
these  rocks  are  situated,  occupies  a  space  6  miles  long  in  a  north  and 
south  direction,  and  one  mile  broad.  The  least  depth  found  on  the  Vir- 
gin rocks  was  3  fathoms,  over  a  small  pinnacle,  on  which  the  sea  breaks 
in  heavy  weather;  from  this  pinnacle,  two  rocks  with  4  and  5^  fathoms 
water  over  them,  lie  respectively  north,  distant  nearly  200  yards,  and 
SW.  4  mile  distant ;  these  rocks  with  surroundiug{shoal  ground  of  less 


.. 


I 


EA8TF.RN    SHOALS — BANK    8T.    PIERRE.  6 

than  20  fathoms,  comprised  within  a  diameter  of  about  1,100  yards,  form 
the  Main  Ledge. 

South  slioal  witli  4;^  fathoms,  the  least  water,  is  situated  south  1}  miles 
from  Main  Ledge,  and  occui)ie8  a  space  1^00  yards  long  in  a  north  and 
south  direction,  with  a  breadth  of  700  yards,  the  depths  being  under  20 
fathoms.  This  shoal  is  reported  by  the  fishermen  to  break  I'.eavier,  and 
to  be  more  dangerous  than  the  Main  Ledge.  Main  Ledge  and  South 
Shoal  are  the  only  dangers  in  ordinary  weather,  but  several  other  parts 
on  these  shoals  are  reported  to  break  in  heavy  gales;  the  foul  ground, 
combined  with  the  tidal  stream,  causing  a  confused  sea  even  in  strong 
breezes. 

Eastern  Shoals.— The  least  water  found  on  these  shoals  was  7  fath- 
oms, about  J  mile  south  of  the  Nine-fathom  Bank  which  lies  near  the 
center  of  a  group  of  shoal  patches  extending  about  3J  miles  in  a  north 
and  south  direction,  with  a  breadth  of  2  miles,  having  depths  on  them 
of  13  to  25  fathoms.  The  Nine-fathom  Bank  is  in  latitude  40°  26'  45" 
N.,  longitude  50°  28'  6"  W. 

Eastern  Shoals  are  the  easternmost  known  to  the  fishermen ;  those 
with  13  fathoms  or  less  over  them  are  reported  to  break  in  heavy  weather; 
with  a  strong  breeze  there  is  a  confused  sea  in  the  locality. 

In  the  immediate  neighborhood  of  the  Virgin  and  Eastern  Rocks  the 
tidal  stream  attains  a  velocity  of  three-quarters  of  a  knot  an  hour,  but 
a  few  miles  from  them  it  is  scarcely  perceptible;  during  the  period  of 
examination  a  slight  southerly  set  was  experienced. 

Oreen  Bank,  on  which  the  least  depth  of  water  is  30  fathoms,  stony 
bottom,  is  in  reality  the  western  extremity  of  the  Great  Bank,  being  only 
partially  separated  from  it  by  a  gully  of  deep  water,  in  about  longitude 
54°  W.,  having  over  60  fathoms  mud  in  it.  Its  western  limit  is  in  lon- 
gitude 55°  W,,  and  its  southern  margin  in  latitude  44°  50'  N.,  and  the 
peculiarity  of  its  western  limit  nearly  coinciding  with  the  meridian  of 
55°  W.  makes  it  of  service  in  verifying  the  longitude.  The  deep  gully 
between  it  and  Bank  St.  Pierre  is  14  miles  wide,  with  70  to  90  fathoms 
mud. 

A  5-fathoms  i)atch  in  latitude  45°  46'  N.,  longitude  54°  20'  W.,  was 
reported  on  Green  Bank  in  1881. 

Bank  St  Pierre  has  its  eastern  limit  nearly  on  the  meridian  of  55° 
20'  W.,  and  attains  its  southern  boundary  in  latitude  45°  N.,  longitude 
66°  W.  Tne  bank  then  trends  about  NW.  for  about  140  miles  to  its 
western  margin,  in  latitude  46°  55'  N.,  longitude  57°  30'  W. 

The  soundings  on  this  bank  vary  from  20  to  45  fathoms,  the  ordinary 
bottom  being  sand  and  broken  shells. 

Nova  Scotia  Banks.— Although  our  acquaintance  with  the  nature 
and  extent  of  the  principaf  banks  which  mark  the  approaches  to  Nova 
Scotia  can  not  yet  be  deemed  perfect,  our  knowledge  of  their  limits  and 
depth  of  water  has  been  greatly  increased  during  la'  ^  years.  Much  use- 
ful information  respecting  the  outer  banks  was  diiias.id  by  the  French 


(: 


6 


NOVA    SCOTIA    BANKS. 


i 


cbHTta  in  185S;  tin*  surveys  of  La  Have  and  Roseway  Ranks  bv  Captain 
Shorthuul,  Royal  Navy,  in  1859,  were  satisfactory  in  every  respect;  and, 
later  still,  the  offsbore  soundings  by  Captain  Orlei)ar,  Royal  Navy,  in 
1804,  aro  valuable  additions  to  our  hitherto  scanty  knowledge  of  the 
inequalities  of  the  various  banks  which  lie  off  the  much-exposed  and 
dangerous  coast  of  Nova  Scotia.  Of  these  banks  the  principal  in  extent 
and  most  important  in  position  are  the  Banquereau  and  Sable  Banks, 
the  former  being  the  easternmost  of  what  may  be  correctly  tiesignated 
the  Nova  Scotia  Banks. 

Banquereau  Bank,  with  15  to  5U  fathoms,  is  an  extensive  plateau  of 
sand,  gravel,  and  shells,  and  is  distinguished  from  contiguous  banks  by 
numerous  flat  sea-eggs  without  prickles  which  are  found  on  the  bottom. 
It  extends  from  about  latitude  44Jo  N.,  longitude  57 4°  W.,  in  a  westerly 
direction  120  miles  to  the  meridian  of  60°  W.  This  bank  is  separated 
from  Bank  St.  Pierre  by  a  deep  gully  50  miles  wide,  having  from  UOOto 
300  fsithoms  muddy  bottom;  and  from  the  NE.  bar  of  Sable  Island  by 
another  gully  of  deep  water  12  miles  across  its  narrowest  part  and  140 
fathoms  deep. 

On  referring  to  the  chart  it  will  be  seen  that  its  shoalest  part,  with 
15  fathoms,  in  latitude  44°  35'  N.  and  longitude  57°  54'  W.,  is  the  apex 
of  a  ridge  (having  less  than  30  fathoms)  upwards  of  40  miles  in  length 
in  a  NE.  and  SW.  direction;  and  that  relatively  with  the  dangers  off 
Sable  Island  it  is  not  only  a  safe  ofling  for  vessels  intending  to  pass  to 
the  northward  of  the  last  named  danger,  but  by  keeping,  if  possible,  in 
the  same  parallel,  the  long  and  continuous  line  of  comparatively  shoal 
water,  would  enable  a  vessel  under  ordinary  circumstances  to  feel  her 
way  with  some  degree  of  confldenco  until  she  has  passed  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  meridian  of  Sable  Island. 

Misaine  and  Canso  Banks. — Misaine  Bank  lies  to  the  northward  of 
Banquereau  Bank,  between  the  latter  and  Scatari  Island,  and  between 
its  NVV.  edge,  with  60  fathoms,  and  a  similar  depth  on  the  outer  edge 
of  a  bank  extending  from  the  shores  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  there  is  a 
deep  gully  20  miles  wide,  with  from  70  to  136  fathoms.  The  least  water 
yet  found  on  this  bank  is  36  fathoms,  the  general  depth  being  more  than 
40  fathoms,  with  a  bottom  of  stones  and  broken  shells.  The  outline  of 
the  bank  is  very  irregular;  its  eastern  limit  is  in  latitude  45°  25'  N., 
longitude  58°  10'  W.,  and  its  western  extremity  is  connected  with  Causo 
Bank  by  the  60- fathom  line. 

The  least  water  on  Canso  Bank  is  35  fathoms,  sandy  bottom  ;  the 
bank  is  separated  from  the  north  end  of  Middle  Ground  by  a  space  of 
deep  water  with  112  fathoms,  and  from  the  bank  extending  from  Cape 
Causo  by  a  narrow  deep-water  channel  with  84  fathoms. 

Artimon  Bank,  situated  at  the  east  end  of  the  deep-water  gully 
separating  Misaine  Bank  from  Ban»iuereau,  is  of  small  extent,  the  least 
water  being  37  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  stones  with  star  fish  and  sea- 
eggs. 


•t 


MIDDLE    GROUND — BROWN    BANK.  7 

Middle  Qround,  about  30  miles  to  tho  northward  of  the  west  end  of 
Sable  Island,  has  been  reported  to  have  as  little  as  10  fathoms,  although 
15  fathoms  was  the  least  water  obtained  on  examination.  The  bank  is 
about  35  miles  in  hMigth  NVV.  and  SB.,  with  depths  varying-  from  15  to 
30  fathoms,  and  is  separated  from  tho  west  end  of  Bautjuereau  Bank 
by  a  gully  3  miles  acToss,  with  100  fithoms.  Its  inner  end  extends  to 
within  35  miles  of  Cape  Canso,  the  distance  between  being  occupied 
principally  by  a  submarine  valley,  having  in  one  locality  a  depth  of  140 
fathoms. 

If  in  foggy  weather,  soundiugs  should  be  struck  within  the30-fathom 
line,  they  will  impart  contldenee  in  making  the  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  as 
the  middle  of  the  bank  is  in  about  the  same  parallel  as  the  entrance  of 
Halifax  Harbor. 

Sambro  Banks  consist  of  two  banks;  the  eastern  is  about  12  miles 
in  length,  within  the  60-fathom  line,  and  lies  SE.  36  miles  from  the 
same  depth  south  of  Sambro  Ledges.  The  western  bank,  with  52 
fathoms,  sand  and  gravel,  is  about  4  miles  in  extent  and  separate  from 
the  eastern  bank  by  a  channel  10  miles  wide,  with  98  to  100  fathoms, 
stones.  These  banks  are  surrounded  by  deep  water,  there  are  other 
detached  patches  of  less  than  60  fathoms  in  the  neighborhood,  not  yet 
accurately  defined. 

La  Have  Bank. — The  northeastern  shoal  plateau  of  this  bank,  with 
from  45  to  50  fathoms,  sand  and  stones,  is  32  miles  in  length  north  and 
south  by  15  miles  broad  ;  the  north  end  being  about  east,  nearly  60  miles 
from  Baccaro  Point.  Another  bank,  with  45  to  50  fathoms,  exists  to  the 
westward  of  the  south  end  of  the  above,  from  which  it  is  only  separated 
by  a  shallow  gully  with  53  fathoms. 

The  60-fathom  boundary  of  the  bank  is  well  defined  all  round,  and 
includes  within  its  limits  Brown  Bank,  described  hereafter. 

Roseway  Bank.— The  shoalest  part  of  this  bank,  with  from  31  to  40 
fathoms,  stones  and  pebbles,  is  about  11  miles  iu  length,  and  its  center 
is  on  the  same  parallel  as  Cape  Sable  light-house  and  the  north  end  of 
La  Have  Bank.  Between  the  60-fathom  lines  of  La  Have  and  Roseway 
Banks  there  is  a  deep  channel  with  from  70  to  100  fatiioms;  whilst  in- 
shore, Roseway  Bank  is  connected  by  a  narrow  neck,  with  the  60-fathom 
line  of  the  bank  extending  along  the  coast. 

Brown  Bank,  within  the  50-f>ithom  line,  is  55  miles  in  length,  with 
an  average  breadth  of  15  miles.  It  lies  to  the  westward  of,  but  con- 
tiguous to,  La  Have  Bank,  and  with  it  forms  an  almost  continuous  bank, 
following  the  line  of  coast  off  Cape  Sable  at  the  distance  of  50  miles  off 
shore. 

Near  the  western  extremity  of  Brown  Bank  is  a  sandy  rise  al)out  10 
miles  long  north  and  south,  with  from  24  to  30  fathoms,  the  center  of 
which  lies  about  50  miles  SW.  of  Cape  Sable. 

Outside  the  .50-fathora  line  of  Brown  Bank  there  is  a  deep-water  chan- 
nel 25  miles  wide,  separating  it  from  the  60-fathom  line  at  the  north- 
eastern extremity  of  George  Shoal,  off  the  Massachusetts  Coast. 


\^ 


8 


8ABLK    ISLAND. 


'if! 


I 


IiiHide  Brown  Bank  there  is  a  narrow  deep-water  clianuel  with  above 
GU  fathouKs,  dividing;  it  from  the  same  depth  ou  the  ed^eof  the  shore 
bank,  which  follows,  about  30  miles  ott",  the  line  of  coast  from  Cape 
Sable  to  as  far  as  Dryer  Island,  abreast  which  the  deep  water  approaches 
within  />  miles  of  thu  shore. 

There  are  many  inequalities  on  the  main  shore  bank,  off  the  SNY.  coast 
of  Nova  Scotia,  which  it  would  be  useless  to  describe  in  detail  in  these 
directions,  inaannich  as  they  are  clem  ly  delineated  ou  the  chart,  by  study- 
ing which  the  navigator  will  have  a  comprehensive  idea,  not  only  of 
the  positions  of  and  dei)ths  upon  the  various  small  patches,  but  also  of 
the  relative  positions  of  the  larger  banks. 

Birds. —The  approach  to  the  banks  is  generally  evidenced  by  an  in- 
creasing number  of  sea  fowl  around  the  vessel.  Hagdowns,  a  species 
of  gull,  heavy  of  tlight,  are  seen  all  across  the  Atlantic,  but  on  the 
banks  they  beconu'  very  numerous,  as  well  as  divers  aud  other  sea  fowl. 

Fish. — All  tho  banks  off  Xewfonndland  aud  Nova  Scotia  abound  in 
cod  and  other  tish,  and  during  the  summer  season  a  large  fleet  of  Ash- 
ing vessels  are  found  at  anchor  upon  them.  The  ordinary  track  of  the 
mail  steam  vessels  is  left  open,  but  north  and  south  of  this  unoccupied 
track  numerous  American,  French,  and  Canadian  vessels  are  employed 
in  the  cod  fishery,  especially  on  the  Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland, 
Bank  St.  Pierre,  Bauquereau  and  Green  Banks,  and  Middle  Ground. 

Sable  Island  is  formed  of  two  nearly  parallel  ridges  of  sand  shaped 
like  a  bow,  concave  to  the  northward,  and  meeting  in  a  point  at  either 
end.  Its  whole  length,  following  the  curve,  and  including  the  dry 
parts  of  the  bars,  is  22  miles,  20^  miles  in  a  direct  line  across  the  curve. 
Its  greatest  breadth  is  exactly  one  mile.  In  some  parts  it  is  wholly  or 
partially  covered  with  grass ;  in  others,  scooped  out  by  the  winds  into 
crater-shaped  hollows,  or  thrown  up  into  sand  hills,  not  exceeding  the 
height  of  75  feet  above  high  water.  Between  these  ridges  a  long  pond 
named  Salt  Water  Lake,  said  to  be  gradually  filling  with  blown  sand, 
but  still  in  some  parts  12  feet  deep,  extends  from  the  west  end  to  the 
distance  of  11  miles;  and  a  low  valley  continues  from  it  6J  miles  m  re 
to  the  NE.  end  of  the  island.  The  entrances  to  this  pond  have  been 
for  some  time  closed,  the  sea  flowing  in  over  the  low  sandy  beach  on  the 
south  side,  and  at  the  west  end  only  in  high  tides  and  heavy  gales. 

When  seen  from  the  north  from  a  distance  of  9  or  10  miles,  the  island 
presents  the  appearance  of  a  long  range  of  sand  hills,  some  of  which 
are  very  white.  From  the  south,  the  range  of  white  sand  appears 
more  coutinuous,  and  very  low  towards  the  west  end.  On  a  nearer  ap- 
proach many  of  the  sand  hills  are  seen  to  have  been  partly  removed  by 
the  waves,  so  as  to  have  formed  steep  cliff's  next  the  sea.  In  other 
parts  they  are  covered  by  grass,  and  defended  by  a  broad  beach,  which, 
however,  can  not  be  reached  without  passing  over  ridges  of  sand  cov- 
ered with  only  a  few  feet  water.  These  ridges,  which  are  parallel  to  the 
shore  at  distances  not  exceeding  J  of  a  mile,  form  heavy  breakers,  and 
are  dangerous  to  pass  in  boats  when  there  is  any  sea  running. 


8AHLE    ISLAND — DESCRIPTION. 


1) 


Productions. — The  amoimi  iiiul  variety  of  vegetation  on  this  gigan- 
tic Hand  bar  i»  extnionlinary.  Be  idea  two  kinds  of  grass,  there  are 
wild  peas  and  other  pla,,! ■4,  affording  subsistence  to  wihl  horses  and 
rabbits,  iis  well  as  to  the  doMM'stJc  cattle  belonging  to  the  establish- 
ment. There  are  no  other  animals  on  the  island,  excepting  rats,  which 
have  come  on  shore  from  -wreclvs.  There  are  also  four  or  ttve  kinds  of 
edible  berries  in  great  abundance,  and  many  (lowers  and  shrubs,  but 
uo  trees. 

Fresh  water  can  be  obtaineil  in  almost  any  part  by  digging  down  a 
few  feet  into  the  sand.  Seals  and  abundance  of  wild  fowl  frequent  the 
island  in  their  seasons. 

The  fisheries  around  the  island  are  exceedingly  valuable,  but  the 
danger  of  remaining  near  its  formidable  bars  has  hitherto  restricted 
the  number  of  vessels  engaged  in  them. 

The  Establishment  on  Sable  Island  for  the  relief  of  shipwrecked 
persons  is  situated  on  the  north  side  of  the  island  between  the  pond 
and  the  sand  hills,  and  consists  of  a  comfortable  house  for  the  super- 
intendent and  his  family,  buildings  for  the  men  and  the  occasional 
accommodation  of  shipwrecked  persons,  for  storing  provisions  and  other 
property  saved  from  wrecks,  workshops,  stabling,  etc. 

The  superintendent  has  under  him  sixteen  men,  who  are  stationed  as 
follows,  viz,  the  superintendent  and  six  men  at  the  main  station  which 
is  at  the  west  flagstatt* ;  at  the  west  end  lighthouse,  the  lighthouse 
keeper  and  bis  assistant;  at  the  east  end,  the  lighthouse  keeper,  his 
assistant,  and  two  boatmen ;  at  the  middle  station,  two  boatmen ;  and 
at  the  foot  of  the  lake  station,  two  boatmen.  In  addition  there  are 
generally  two  or  three  extra  men.  These  stations  are  all  connected  by 
telephones. 

The  staflf,  with  their  families,  number  about  forty-six  persons,  and  no 
one  is  allowed  to  reside  on  the  island  without  the  authority  of  the  ma- 
rine department. 

No  wrecks  can  take  place  on  the  island  at  a  greater  distance  than  6 
miles  from  some  one  of  these  posts ;  and  in  the  event  of  one  occurring 
the  outposts  report  to  the  superintendent  at  the  principal  establish- 
ment. 

Life-saving  Apparatus. — Life-boats  are  stationed  at  the  east  end, 
and  at  the  main  station,  besides  the  surf  boats.  There  is  also  a  rocket 
apparatus  at  the  main  station,  and  a  life  car  at  the  east  end. 

During  fogs  and  snow  storms  mounted  men  patrol  the  beach  to  ascer- 
tain if  any  wrecks  have  taken  place. 

The  West  FlagstaflT,  which  points  out  the  position  of  the  principal 
establisliment,  stands  on  a  sand  hill  40  feet  high,  and  with  its  crow's 
nest,  «r  lookout,  100  feet  above  the  sea,  is  a  conspicuous  object  on  the 
north,  side  of  the  island. 

The  East  FlagstaflT,  40  feet  high,  is  also  a  conspicuous  object,  stand- 
ing on  a  sand  hill  on  the  north  side  of  the  island. 


■^t 


10 


8A1JLE    ISLAND, 


' 


i 

I  ! 


;  y- 


The  Middle  Flagstaff  is  fsirther  inland,  near  the  east  end  of  the 
salt  water  lake,  and  3|  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  East  Flagstaff. 

The  West  Bar  dried  about  3  ""'e  from  the  end  of  the  grassj^  sand 
hills.  There  were  several  patches  nearly  dry  about  a  mile  farther  out, 
and  then  9  miles  of  heavy  breakers,  succeeded  in  bad  weather  by  7 
miles  more  in  which  the  depth  increases  from  5  to  10  fathoms,  and 
where  there  is  usually  a  great  ripple  and  a  heavy  cross  sea.  Since 
1852  the  sea  has  encroached  on  the  land  and  covered  places  where  tie 
grass  formerly  grew.  The  direction  of  this  bar  is  N.  60°  W.  for  the  first 
12  miles,  thence  west  for  the  remaining  distance;  the  whole  extent  of 
the  bar  from  the  end  of  the  grassy  sand  hills  to  the  depth  of  10  fath- 
oms being  17  miles,  bevoud  which  the  water  deepens  gradually  to  the 
westward  for  many  miles. 

The  East  Bar  during  fine  weather  dried  about  4  miles  from  the  end 
of  the  grassy  sand  hills.  At  the  distance  of  If  miles,  a  small  sand  hill 
about  10  feet  high  and  with  some  grass  on  it  has  accumulated  around 
a  wreck  since  1820.  The  4  miles  of  dry  sand  are  succeeded  by  8  or  9 
miles  of  heavy  breakers ;  the  whole  length  of  this  bar,  from  the  grassy 
sand  hills  to  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  being  14  miles.  Since  1852  the 
sea  has  receded,  and  vegetation  now  appears  in  places  which  were  cov- 
ered by  water.  Its  direction  is  N.  40°  E.  for  the  first  7  miles,  beyond 
which  it  curves  gradually,  till  it  terminates  to  east.  The  ridge  of  sand 
with  a  depth  of  from  10  to  13  fathoms  on  it,  and  with  often  a  heavy 
cross  sea,  coutinnes  for  10  miles  farther  to  the  east,  and  then  ends 
abruptly,  the  depth  increasing,  in  a  distance  of  3  miles  farther  in  the 
same  direction,  to  170  fathoms,  in  the  channel  between  Sable  Island  and 
Banquereaa  Bank. 

Vessels  should  be  careful  not  to  be  caught  within  the  crescent  in  a 
strong  gale  from  the  northward,  when  the  accelerated  ebb  tide,  setting 
directly  towards  and  over  the  bars,  would  render  hersituation  extremely 
dmigerous.  Both  the  bars  are  extremely  steep  on  the  north  side,  the 
east  bar  especially  so,  having  30  fathoms  water  close  to  it.  To  the 
southward,  on  tbo  contrary,  the  water  deepens  gradually  for  many 
miles,  and  renders  it  difficult  to  account  for  the  great  number  of  ship- 
wrecks ou  that  side  of  the  island  and  its  bars,  unless  they  are  to  be  at- 
tributed to  the  neglect  of  the  lead. 

Wrecks  on  the  bars  are  of  course  far  more  dangerous  to  life  than  those 
that  take  place  on  the  island,  and  it  is  important  in  such  cases  tokuow 
on  which  bar  the  vessel  is,  and  the  consequent  direction  in  which  to 
seek  for  safety  on  the  island.  This  information,  when  the  island  is  hid- 
den by  <"og  or  the  darkness  of  night,  must  be  sought  by  observing  the 
direction  of  the  line  of  breakers,  which  ou  the  east  bar  is  between  NE. 
by  N.  and  EJfB.  until  near  its  outer  extremity,  whilst  on  the  West  Bar 
it  is  WNW. 

Anchorage.— Off  the  north  side  of  Sable  Island,  excepting  near  the 
east  end,  where  the  deep  water  approaches  too  near  the  shore,  there  is 


a 


i 


A 


TIDES — CURRENTS. 


11 


snd  of  the 
%gstaft'. 
■assy  sand 
,rther  out, 
ther  by  7 
Uoins,  and 
ea.  Since 
where  tl'e 
ir  the  first 
>  extent  of 
>f  10  fath- 
ally  to  the 

in  the  end 
1  Siind  hill 
ed  around 
by  8  or  9 
thegrassy 
)  1852  the 
were  cov- 
38,  beyond 
ge  of  sand 
n  a  heavy 
then  ends 
her  in  the 
Island  and 

escent  in  a 
(le,  setting 

extremely 
li  side,  the 
r.    To  the 

for  many 
dv  of  ship- 
re  to  beat- 

than  those 
ics  to  know 
n  which  to 
land  is  hid- 
lerving  the 
tween  NE. 
}  West  Bar 

ig  near  the 
re,  there  is 


I 


good  anchorage  in  5  to  10  fathoms,  from  one  to  2  miles  oft"  shore.  The 
bottom  is  fine  sand,  and  holds  well,  but  the  sea  is  so  heavy,  excepting 
with  oflfsliore  winds,  that  a  vessel  should  weigh  immediately  on  the 
first  indications  of  a  wind  from  seaward. 

Directions.— In  approaching  the  anchorage  offSable  Island  from  the 
northward  at  night  or  in  thick  weather,  the  lead  should  be  kept  con- 
stantly going;  and  after  passing  the  Middle  Ground,  distant  about  25 
miles  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  great  caution  should  be  used,  and 
the  vessel  should  be  certain  of  her  position ;  for  the  east  end  of  the 
island  and  the  Bast  Bar  are  very  steep  on  that  side. 

Vessels  seldom  anchor  ott"  the  south  side  of  the  island,  because  of  the 
prevailing  heavy  swell  from  the  southward ;  but  they  may  safely  ap- 
proach by  the  lead  on  that  side,  taking  care  not  to  become  becalined  in 
the  heavy  swell,  and  in  the  strong  and  uncertain  tides  and  Ciirrents  near 
the  bars. 

The  landing  is  in  general  impracticable  on  the  south  side,  excepting 
after  a  long  continuance  of  northerly  winds  ;  and  on  the  north  side 
boats  can  land  only  during  southerly  winds  and  fine  weather ;  but  there 
are  surf  boats  at  the  establishment,  which  can  land  when  ordinary  boats 
would  swamp. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  on  the  north  side  of  Sable 
Island  at  7h.  30m.,  and  on  the  south  side  about  an  hour  earlier ;  springs 
rise  about  4  feet.  The  tidal  streams  are  much  influenced  by  the  wind. 
The  ebb  sets  to  the  southward  on  and  over  the  bars,  often  at  the  rate 
of  IJ  or  2  knots  ;  the  flood  at  a  much  less  rate  in  the  contrary  direc- 
tion. 

Currents.— Of  the  great  currents  in  this  part  of  the  ocean,  it  is  gen- 
erally  admitted  that  the  Gulf  Stream,  after  passing  along  the  coast  of 
the  United  States,  is  deflected  to  the  eastward  between  the  parallels  of 
35°  and  40°  N.,  and  continuing  on  in  about  an  ENE.  direction  passes 
south  of  the  tail  of  the  Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland  dnring  the  winter 
months,  but  extends  over  the  south  end  of  the  bank  during  the  summer 
season. 

From  a  combination  of  causes,  such  as  prevailing,  or  lately  prevailing 
winds,  and  the  preponderance  of  polar  or  tropical  waters,  the  Gulf 
Stream  has  been  found  to  have  an  oscillatory  motion,  so  that  it  would 
be  impossible  to  assign  any  definite  limits  to  the  margins  of  this  great 
ocean  river. 

The  velocity  of  the  Gulf  Stream  across  the  south  end  of  the  Great 
Newfoundland  Bank  is  very  variable,  but  at  times  amounts  to  more  than 
a  knot  an  hour  in  an  ENE.  direction.  One  result  of  this  influxof  warm 
water  into  a  cold  atmosphere  is  the  production  of  the  dense  fogs  so  fre- 
quently experienced  on  the  banks,  and  which  materially  embarrass  and 
retard  navigation. 

Although  the  current  between  the  Grand  Bank  and  Newfoundland 
commonly  sets  to  the  SW.,  sometimes  at  a  rate  of  nearly  one  mile  per 


J 


12 


LABRADOR   CURRENT. 


I 

i 


hour,  it  is  not  always  so ;  aud  near  the  shore,  m  "'^^l^'^**^  ^^^^  j!^''^ 
even  changes  with  the  wind.  At  these  times  during  the  flood  it  runs 
toThe  SW.,  and  during  the  ebb  to  the  NE.,  the  former  being  the 

'' T^the  westward  of  Cape  Race,  it  must  also  be  remembered  that  the 
current  so  frequently  setting  to  the  xXW.  one  mile  P^^^^^T^'^j  ';/f;/^ 
is  not  invariable  in  strengtn  or  direction,  but  is  affected  g^eatlj  bj  the 
prevailing  wind.  It  is  observed  generally  to  run  in  upon  the  eastern 
sTde  o  the  great  bays  indenting  the  south  coast  of  Newfound  and  and 
out  on  thei 'western  side.  In  the  offing  it  is  influenced  by  the  winds 
and  near  the  shore  by  the  tides,  so  that  during  springs  the  stream  of 
ebb  runs  weakly  to  the  SB.,  and  the  stream  of  flood  to  the  NW.,  the 
latter  sometimes  2  miles  per  hour  round  the  headlands. 

Admiral  Clone,  of  the  French  Imperial  Navy,  during  his  survey  of 
Banquereau  Bank,  remarks  that  he  observed  the  ^""ents  to  be  very 
irregular  in  strength  and  condition,  for  they  sometimes  change  all  round 
tL  compass  in  24  hours,  and  have  been  known  to  set  in  a  contrary 
direcln'to  the  prevailing  wind.  The  ordinary  strength  of  the  current 
is  about  half  a  knot;  but  it  occasionally  attains  a  vel^'f/Z^^'^^^^^^'i^^ 
2  miles  an  hour.  The  fact  of  the  transportation  of  field  ice  from  the 
north  to  the  latitude  of  42°  N.,  indicates  the  certainty  of  a  current 
ordinarily  setting  to  the  SW. 

Arctic  or  Labrador  Current-In  addition  to  the  warm  waters  of 
thfaulf' Stream  is  the  cold  ice-bearing  current  from  the  Arctic  se^, 
which  passes  to  the  southward,  along  the  coast  of  Labrador,  at  rates 
varving  from  10  to  56  miles  a  day,  and  being  very  much  influenced  near 
the^coast  by  the  winds,  it  is  difficult  to  estimate  the  direction  or  effect 
for  any  particular  day,  but  that  the  general  trend  is  to  the  sou  h ward 
is  shown  by  the  passage  of  many  icebergs;  these,  however,  have  been 
observed  to  travel  north  without  any  apparent  reason. 

Abreast  Labrador  this  cold  current  appears  to  extend  as  far  to  the 
eastward  as  the  meridian  of  40o  W.,  from  thence  in  its  course  to  the 
southward  it  is  met  by  the  northern  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  he  posi- 
tion being  nearly  always  distinguishable  by  the  rips  caused  by  the 
interlacing  of  the  waters  of  the  two  currents. 

A  brallfh  of  the  Arctic  Current  flows  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle 
iuto  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  again  enters  the  Atlantic  in  a  south- 
easterly  direction  between  Cape  Breton  Island  and  Newfoundland. 

This' branch  current  is  retarded  by  easterly  winds  which  sometimes 
cause  it  to  run  in  a  contrary  direction;  it  is  frequently  deflected  to  the 
southward  toward  Cape  Breton  Island  by  those  from  the  northward 
and  indeed  winds  generally  act  so  powertuUy  and  ^"^S^^^'-Jj^'^  *^f. 
rate  aud  direction  of  the  current  and  tides  in  this  entrance  of  the  Gulf 
of  St.  Lawrence,  as  to  render  it  difficult  to  say  anything  respecting  them 
that  is  not  subject  to  exceptions.  •,•„.„  .„„ta 

Vessels  bound  for  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  wishing  to  make 


1 


CURRENTS — BUOYAGE. 


m 


ither,  it 

it  runs 

iug  the 

that  the 
le  offlug 
y  by  the 
easteru 
sind,  and 
e  winds, 
tream  of 
SW.,  the 

uirvey  of 
J  be  very 
all  round 
contrary 
e  current 
nore  than 
>  from  the 
a  current 

waters  of 
^ctic  seas, 
at  rates 
inced  near 
tt  or  eflfect 
southward 
have  been 

far  to  the 

Tse  to  the 

,  the  posi- 

led  by  the 

'  Belle  Isle 
m  a  south- 
idland. 
sometimes 
oted  to  the 
uorthward, 
irly  on  the 
of  the  Gulf 
jctiug  them 

ig  to  make 


the  land  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  should,  if  the  weather  be  foggy,  shape 
a  course  so  as  to  pass  a  few  miles  north  of  Scatari  Island,  and  most 
frequently  after  passing  the  meridian  of  Flint  Island  the  fog  will  clear. 
The  SW.  wind,  which  is  accomp  anied  by  a  dense  fog  at  Scatai  i,  becomes 
clear  and  fine  during  its  piissage  over  the  warm  land. 

When  approaching  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  the 
current  generally  sets  to  the  southward,  on  the  Cape  Breton  Island 
side  of  the  strait,  but  on  the  Newfoundland  shore  it  has  frequently  beea 
found  setting  to  the  northward  about  one  knot  per  hour. 

To  the  eastward  of  Cape  Breton  Island  the  current  intermingles  with 
the  main  branch  of  the  same  current,  which,  after  skirting  the  east  coast 
of  Newfoundland,  turns  to  the  westward  round  Cape  Race,  thence  pass- 
ing along  the  SE.  Coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  continues  on  to  the  southward 
along  the  American  shore  to  Florida,  preserving  in  a  marked  degree 
its  distinctive  character  as  a  cold  current  inside  the  warm  waters  of  the 
Gulf  Stream. 

Along  the  SE.  coast  of  Nova  Scotia  the  offshore  current  generally 
sets  to  the  SW.  at  an  average  rate  of  rather  more  than  h  mile  an 
hour,  but  both  direction  and  strength  are  much  influenced  by  the  wind. 
After  a  continuous  westerly  blow  the  current  will  run  to  the  eastward 
about  ^  knot  per  hour  ;  and  after  a  prevalence  of  easterly  winds,  the 
usual  southwesterly  current  is  accelerated  to  more  than  a  knot  an  hour; 
in  either  case  the  set  will  tend  to  increase  the  vessel's  distance  from 
the  shore. 

Between  Bam  Island  and  Cape  Sable,  wi  thin  8  miles  of  the  shore,  the 
current  is  governed  by  the  Bay  of  Fundy  tidal  stream,  the  flood  setting 
to  the  westward  and  the  ebb  to  the  eastward. 

The  formation  of  the  extensive  banks  of  Newfoundland  and  Nova 
Scotia  is  probably  to  be  attributed  to  th  e  meeting  of  the  above  diverse 
currents ;  for  the  loose  delta  ol  the  numerous  rivers  flowing  into  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  borne  along  in  suspension  by  the  force  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  as  well  as  the  earthy  matter  which  icebergs  are  ever  bringing 
from  the  north,  are  alike  deposited  within  the  comparatively  liihited 
space  where  the  two  streams  come  into  collision. 

A  current  :jetting  to  the  southward  and  southwestward  at  rates 
varying  from  1^  to  3}  knots  an  hour,  and  skirting  the  eastern  edge 
of  the  Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  was  observed  in  December,  1884, 
between  latitude  43°  6'  and  43°  2'*'  N.,  and  longitude  49°  2'  and  49° 
37'  W.,  by  Mr.  Richard  Ladd,  navigating  officer,  telegraph  S.  S.  Minia. 

Uniform  System  of  Buoyage. — The  following  uniform  system  of 
buoyage  is  generally  adopted  in  the  ports  and  channels  on  the  Cana- 
dian coasts: 

Approaching  from  seaward,  all  buoys  on  the  starboard  side  of  a 
channel  are  painted  red,  and,  if  numbered,  marked  with  even  num- 
bers, and  should  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand. 

All  buoys  on  the  port  side  of  a  channel  are  painted  black,  with 
odd  numbers,  if  any,  and  should  be  left  on  the  port  hand. 


1^1 


i 


It 


'\ 


14 


BUOYAGE — ICE. 


Buoys  painted  red  aud  black  iu  horizontal    bauds  mark  obatruc. 
tions  on  middle  grounds,  aud  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 

Buoys  painted  white  and  black  in  vertical  stripes  mark  mulchan- 
nel,  and  should  be  passed  close  to  avoid  danger. 

All  other  distinguishing  marks  to  buoys  are  in  addition  to  the 
foregoing,  and  indicate  particular  spots,  a  detailed  description  of 
which  will  be  given  when  first  established. 

Perches,  with  balls,  cages,  etc.,  will,  when  placed  on  buoys  be  at 
turning  points,  the  color  and  number  indicating  on  which  hand  they 

should  be  left.  , ,     .     ,  „..  i 

The  rule  for  coloring  buoys  is  equally  applicable  to  beacons  and 
other  day  marks,  so  far  as  it  may  be  practicable  to  carry  it  out. 

Ice -One  of  the  most  fruitful  sources  of  danger  to  which  vessels 
are  exposed  are  the  immense  masses  of  ice  in  the  form  of  bergs,  and 
extensive  fields  of  solid,  compact  ice  which  are  released  at  the  break- 
ing  up  of  winter  in  the  Arctic  regions,  and  drifted  down  by  the 
Labrador  Current  across  the  direct  aud  much  frequented  route  between 
the  principal  ports  of  Western  Europe  and  North  America.  In  this 
route  ice  is  more  likely  to  be  encountered  from  April  to  August, 
both  months  inclusive,  although  icebergs  have  been  seen  du"»g  ^11 
seasons  of  the  year  north  of  the  parallel  of  43°  N.,  but  not  oft^n  so 

far  south  after  August.  ,   ^    .  ,  •  u        a  ^e 

These  icebergs  are  frequently  several  hundred  feet  high,  and  ot 
vast  extent;  they  have  occasionally  been  seen  as  low  as  latitude  39o 
IT  and  in  positions  to  attain  which  the  Gulf  Stream  must  have  been 
crossed.  Such  phenomena  have  been  attributed  to  the  warm  waters 
of  the  Gulf  Stream  overrunning  the  cold  Arctic  Current,  whilst  the 
latter,  retaining  its  progress  and  direction  as  a  submarine  curreu, 
transports  the  deeply-immersed  ice  islands  into  ai;d  across  the  Gulf 

^*On"this  subject  an  able  authority  has  remarked:  •'No  impulsion 
but  that  of  a  vast  current,  setting  in  a  southwesterly  direction,  and 
passing  beneath  the  Gulf  Stream,  could  have  carried  these  immeuse 
bodies  to  their  observed  positions  on  routes  which  cross  the  Gulf 
current  in  a  region  where  its  average  breadth  has  been  found  to  be 

about  250  miles."  ,    .    ,.  ^         u„„„ 

In  the  latitude  of  St.   Johns,  Newfoundland,  icebergs  have  been 
fallen  in  with  as  far  east  as  the  meridian  of  *0°W.,  being  the  east 
ern  margin  of  the  cold  Arctic  Current  already  described.     Farther 
south,  between  the  parallels  of  40o  and  45°  N.,  they  have  been  seen 

as  far  east  as  39°  W.  „.        , .  ,        j„« 

From  latitude  38°  40'  N.,  and  longitude  47°  30'  W.-wliich  under 
ordinary  circumstances  may  be  deemed  the  most  southerly  positaou 
in  which  to  expect  icebergs-their  probable  boundary  line  to  the 
westward  would  be  nearly  in  a  straight  line  towards  Ualifax  to  as  far 
as  longitude  61°  W. 


«  4i 


i 


ICE PASSAGES. 


15 


obstrac- 

midchau- 

1   to   the 
iption  of 

oys,  be  at 
laud  they 

icons  and 
it  out. 
ch  vessels 
t)erg8,  aud 
the  break- 
n\  by  the 
te  between 
El.    In  this 

0  August, 
during  all 
ot  often  so 

gh,  and  of 
ititude  390 

have  been 
:irm  waters 

whilst  the 
ae  current, 
IS  the  Gulf 

1  impulsion 
ectiou,  and 
se  immense 
3  the  Gulf 
found  to  be 

have  been 
ng  the  east- 
i.  Farther 
B  been  seen 

;rhich  under 

srly  position 

line  to  the 

ax  to  as  far 


Instances  of  an  exceptional  nature  are  on  record  of  icebergs  having 
been  seen  bordering  on  the  parallel  of  40°  N,,  within  GO  miles  WNVV. 
of  tlio  island  of  Corvo ;  aud  of  another  having  been  passed  in  latitude 
36°  10'  N.  and  longitude  39°  0'  W.  Ice  fields  have  been  fallen  in  with 
in  the  latitude  of  Cai)e  Kace,  on'the  meridian  of  45°  W.,  and  also  in 
latitude  41'°  N.  and  longitude  50°  W. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  the  ice  does  not  reach  so  far  south  as 
Cape  Race  before  April,  so  that  sailing  vessels  leaving  England  in 
March  have  often  entered  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  without  being  im- 
peded by  ice.  When  in  the  supposed  vicinity  of  ice  a  good  lookout  is 
essentially  necessary,  for  even  during  a  fog,  or  the  darkest  night,  the 
position  of  an  iceberg  may  be  ascertained  by  a  peculiar  whitening  of 
the  fog— known  as  ice  blink— vfhich  frequently  renders  them  visible  at 
some  distance. 

Generally  on  approaching  ice  there  is  a  marked  diminution  in  the 
temperature  of  the  air  and  sea,  especially  of  the  latter.  The  indications 
of  the  thermometer  should  therefore  never  be  neglected,  though  it  must 
not  be  assumed  to  be  an  infallible  guide. 

Vessels  should  if  possible  always  pass  to  windward  of  icebergs  to 
avoid  the  loose  ice  doating  to  leeward. 

PASSAGES. 

Southern  Route — Sailing  vessels,  or  steam  vessels  with  small 
power,  leaving  the  English  or  St.  George  Channel,  and  bound  for  Hali- 
fax,  after  making  the  necessary  westing  to  insure  not  being  set  into 
the  B».y  of  Biscay,  should  shape  a  course  for  Madeira,  which  may  be 
passed  at  any  convenient  distance  on  either  side,  except  during  the 
months  of  November,  December,  and  January,  and  when  it  is  prefer- 
able  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  it  on  account  of  the  strong  westerly 
gales  which  prevail,  producing  eddy  winds  and  heavy  squalls  on  the 
east  side  of  the  island. 

After  passing  Madeira  steer  to  the  southwestward  until  within  the 
northern  limit  of  the  NE.  trade  wind  (which  will  be  entered  when  the 
sun  is  near  the  northern  troi)ic,  between  the  parallels  of  31°  and  32°  N. 
and  when  near  the  southern  between  30°  aud  31°  N.),  when  the  course 
should  be  altered  gradually  to  the  westward,  keeping  within  the  limit 
of  the  trade  wind.  , 

Cross  the  meridian  of  40o  W.  in  latitude  26o  N.,  which  parallel  should 
be  preserved  until  the  meridian  of  48o  W.  be  reaehed.when  a  more  north- 
erly  course  should  be  pursued,  passing  about  200  miles  to  the  eastward 
of  Bermuda,  thence  a  course  may  be  steered  for  Halifax,  observing  that 
m  crossing  the  Gulf  Stream  when  between  the  parallels  of  38°  and  42  oN., 
the  current  will  be  found  to  set  about  ENE.  at  the  rate  of  20  to  70  miles 
a  day,  attaining  its  greatest  velocity  when  the  sun  is  far  to  the  north- 
ward, or  on  the  return  of  that  Imly  to  the  equator.  The  color  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  water  is  a  deep  indigo  blue,  and  the  junction  with  ordinary 
sea  water  distinctly  marked ;  on  crossing  the  northern  limit  of  the  stream 
the  temperature  has  been  observed  to  decrease  30o. 


!    ■ 

i 

f 

■i 
.       1 


CHAPTER 

BAY  OF    FUNDY-NORTH  COABT-MKEIDIAN    POINT-MAINE,  TO  AHD 
INCLUDING  OUMBEBLAND  BASIN. 

, t.     mufl  Bav  of  Fundy  is  an  extensive  mm  of  the 

•^rr  ea^trjfJf"^!"".  ALla,  »e/arattaB  tbe  proviuee  of  N.w 

other  bay,  .3  -»  -  ' ^J^l'lAL  ^^^i^^^^^  by  .toogo.of 
SJirrSr.  vro:^n:>to  O-noe,  on  the  o.«h,  and  the 

"1l?Bt'ofF"o';%Td«p!tt-theoav.gati.oi.  r.„de.«i  not  only 
..^alf  Mt  dang"  roo',  by  nameroaaoff-lyiag  da«ger.friDg.«g  the  ap- 
pSXt-  rS  and'olrtaio  tides,  a,  .ell  as  by  the  frequent  oe- 

%aX-wTtrre'xcepti«n  of  St  John  and  St.  Andrews  pno^^^^^^^^ 
po!:fb".  few  at  .arn.o«th,  *- a^  «o  .egn  "  P-  o»^o,  *e^ay  of 
,„„dy.    TheflsherMjand  -»  ersjo^n^^^^^^^^  ^ 

r^STutt  a^nU  r rr -0.1  info^ed^spectm^  the  depth 

ihsr;:;irrc^°:.J:=srsrrndr: 
'B°:::;?::dy™z:r  ro,rSaM  the  .and  ..„„...  .r^.- 

Xt' wLm  Is^^^^^^         approached  within  200  yards,  excepting  m 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  Dark  Harbor. 
16 


SEAL  COVE — BIG  DUCK  LEDGE. 


ff 


,  TO  AKD 

rm  of  the 
ce  of  New 
extending 
;e  breadth 

r  islets,  as 
aoddy  and 
nsiderable 
\  tongne  of 
:)h,  and  the 

d  not  only 
ing  the  ap- 
requent  oc- 

pilots,  and 
the  Bay  of 
aintedwith 
nstomed  to 
g  the  depth 

mthward  of 
nd  between 
[aine.  This 
Jt.  Andrews 

in  the  prov- 
;rance  to  the 
ioi>'  s  gradu. 
tied ;  but  on 
of  which  are 
md  also  the 
excepting  in 


From  SW.  head  the  extreme  dangers  off  Grand  Maiiaii  Ishirid,  viz, 
Old  Proprietor  to  the  SE.  and  Machias  Seal  Island  to  the  SW.,  are 
about  1U4  miles  distant;  whilst  the  outer  of  an  intermediate  cluster  of 
dangers  southward  of  the  island,  known  as  Murr  Ledges,  are  7^  miles 
distant.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  this  extensive  range  of  dangers 
many  of  which  never  uncover,  increases  the  difficulty  and  danger  of 
navigation,  and  renders  extreme  caution  necessary. 

During  fogs,  with  southerly  and  southwesterly  winds,  it  frc([uently 
happens  that  a  clear  space,  a  full  mile  wide,  extends  ott'  the  northern 
part  of  the  island,  a  fact  which  should  be  borne  in  mind  as  it  may  facili- 
tate making  a  good  landfall. 

The  soil  of  Grand  Manan  is  generally  good  and  produces  every  va- 
riety of  tir,  beech,  birch,  aiul  maple  in  size  and  quality  adequate  to  all 
purposes  for  which  they  are  generally  used.  The  eastern  coasts  abound 
with  fish. 

Seal  Cove. -Good  anchorage  may  be  obtained  at  the  head  of  Seal 
Cove,  between  the  southeastern  shore  of  Grand  Manan  and  Big  Wood 
Island,  in  4  to  5  fathoms  over  muddy  bottom.  With  southerly  gales  a 
sea  sets  into  Seal  (Jove  when  vessels  require  a  good  scope  of  cable. 
There  is  also  good  anchorage  under  the  lee  of  Big  Wood  Island  with 
easterly  winds. 

Buck  Rock  is  a  small  rocky  patch  which  uncovers  at  two- thirds  ebb, 
lying  off  the  SE.  point  of  Grand  Manan  Island,  about  i  mile  off  shore, 
►with  deep  water  all  around  it. 

Big  Wood  Rocks  lie  about  i  mile  off  the  NW.  point  of  Big  Wood 
Island,  with  5  fathoms  close  outside  them.  The  inner  rock  generally 
dries,  but  the  outer  has  4  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Seal  Cove  at  lOh.  Sim.; 
springs  rise  20  feet,  neaps  15  feet,  and  at  Grand  Harbor  at  llh.  7m. : 
springs  rise  21  feet,  neaps  17^  feet. 

Grand  Harbor  is  only  adapted  for  vessels  of  small  draft.  Vessels 
drawing  10  feet  can  be  beached  on  the  west  side  of  the  harbor. 

OuU  Cove,  on  the  eastern  shore  of  White  Head  Island,  affords  good 
shelter  from  all  winds  except  those  between  north  round  by  east  to  SE. 

Anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  the  middle  of  the  cove  at  about  300 
yards  from  the  shore  in  5^  fathoms,  sand. 

Big  Duck  Island.— The  anchorage  under  this  island  on  its  western 
side  is  iu  about  3J  fathoms,  mud,  with  the  west  tangent  of  Long  Island 
midway  between  High  and  Low  Duck  Islands,  and  the  south  point  of 
Big  Duck  Island  bearing  H.  88°  E. 

A  fog  horn  is  established  near  the  southern  end  of  Big  Duck  Island. 
It  gives  one  blast  of  6  seconds  duration  every  35  seconds. 

Big  Duck  Ledge.— To  the  southward  of  Big  Duck  Island,  at  the  dis- 

tance  of  J  mile,  is  Big  Duck  Ledge,  the  highest  part  of  which  never 

covers.    This  ledge  should  not  be  approached  on  its  south  side  nearer 

than  J  mile,  nor  should  the  uarrow  passage  between  it  and  Big  Duck 

5314 2 


18 


GRAND   MANAN    ISLAND    AND    BANK. 


t  It 

■   I- 


I    i 


P 


Island  ever  be  atten)i>te«l ;  the  other  sides  of  the  ledge  may  be  ap- 
proaclied  within  200  j'urds. 

Long  Island  Bay. — Oood  anchorage  sheltered  from  h11  except  north- 
erly winds  iMiiy  be  obtained  within  Long  Island  in  about  'i  fathoms, 
sand,  with  tli«%  east  end  of  Fanner  Ledge  in  line  with  the  center  of  High 
Duck  luland  and  the  north  end  of  Long  Island  bearing  N.  30°  E.  Care 
must  be  taken  on  approaching  this  island  to  avoid  a  rock  awash,  which 
lies  about  ^  mile  from  the  north  end  of  Long  Island. 

Flag  Cove,  situated  in  the  northern  part  of  Long  Island  Bay,  affords 
anchorage  in  about  5^  fathoms,  stiff  clay,  protected  from  all  winds  but 
those  between  S.  30°  E.  and  S.  64°  E. 

In  approaching  this  anchorage  from  the  northward  do  not  bring 
Swallowtail  lighthouse  to  bear  eastward  of  N.  37°  E.  until  Low  Duck 
Island  begins  to  open  out  west  of  Long  Island,  in  order  to  avoid  a  clus- 
ter of  rocks  which  uncovers  at  last  quarter  ebb,  at  400  yards  off  Flag 
Point. 

TVhale  Core. — In  Whale  Gove,  near  the  north  end  of  Grand  Manau 
Island,  a  good  temporary  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  about  6 
fathoms,  but  it  is  exposed  to  northerly  winds. 

Dark  Harbor  is  an  inlet,  across  the  mouth  of  which  the  sea  has 
thrown  a  shingle  wall;  near  its  south  end  there  is  a  pier,  and  an  open> 
ing  available  for  small  vessels  at  high  water.  Within  the  basin  there 
is  secure  anchorage  in  5  to  7  fathoms,  mud. 

Bradford  Cove  affords  anchorage  off  a  green  bank  in  8  to  10  fathoms 
water,  about  300  or  400  yards  offshore. 

Grand  Manan  Bank  is  about  6^  miles  long  by  2  miles  broad ;  the 
depths  on  it  being  from  24  to  47  fathoms,  gravel  and  sand,  with  from 
50  to  82  fathoms,  mud  and  sand,  all  around,  though  according  to  some 
fishermen  there  are  only  10  to  16  fathoms  on  its  sboalost  part. 

At  half  flood  the  stream  sets  over  the  banks  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W, 
about  1^  knots  per  hour,  and  during  ebb  attains  an  equal  velocity  in 
the  opposite  direction  ;  it  turns  about  ^  hour  after  high  and  low  water 
at  Seal  Islands,  and  shows  a  tide  rip  of  great  extent. 

There  |ire  two  other  banks  to  the  southward  of  Grand  Manan  Bank, 
the  northern  of  which  is  5  miles  long  and  one  mile  broad,  with  28  to  48 
fathoms  on  it,  and  lies  2^  miles  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Grand  Manan 
Bank ;  the  southern,  2^  miles  long  and  2  broad  with  36  to  50  fathoms 
on  it,  lies  6^  miles  from  the  same  point. 

Steering  for  and  sounding  on  these  banks  gives  confidence  when 
steering  into  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  especially  during  thick  weather. 

Machias  Seal  Island. — The  island  on  which  the  light-houses  stand 
is  the  larger  of  two  islands,  joined  together  at  low  water  by  a  rocky 
ledge ;  and  it  is  the  most  off  lying  of  the  dangers  S  W.  of  Grand  Manan 
Island. 

The  island  is  about  4  mile  long,  has  an  elevation  of  28  feet,  and  near 
its  center  are  the  light-houses,  which  in  line  bearing  N.  63°  W.  lead  4 
miles  seaward  of  Murr  Ledges. 


M 


\i; 


MACHIA8    SEAL    ISLAND — MURR    LEDGES. 


If 


ge  may  be  ap- 

ill  except  north- 
out  'i  fathoms, 
I  center  of  High 
N.30OE.  Care 
ik  awash,  which 

iud  Bay,  affords 
n  all  winds  but 

i  do  not  bring 
until  Low  Duck 
to  avoid  a  clus- 
I  yards  off  Flag 

f  Grand  Manau 
led  in  about  6 

tch  the  sea  has 
>r,  and  an  open- 
the  basin  there 

1 8  to  10  fathoms 

lies  broad;  the 
iand,  with  from 
sording  to  some 
it  part. 

a.  and  S.  by  W. 
qual  velocity  in 
1  and  low  water 

d  Manan  Bank, 
d,  with  28  to  48 
»f  Grand  Manan 
S  to  50  fathoms 

Dnfidence  when 
I  weather, 
ht-houses  stand 
iter  by  a  rocky 
)f  Grand  Manan 

S  feet,  and  near 
L  630  w.  lead  4 


The  fog  signal  is  one  S-second  blast  every  30  seconds. 

A  small  shoal,  with  only  13  feet  water,  lies  |^  mile  S.  09^  E.  from 
the  eastern  lighthouse  ou  Machias  Seal  Island,  with  deep  water  in  the 
channel  i»elween  it  and  the  island.  The  shoal  shows  a  rip  during  the 
strength  of  the  tide,  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather. 

Anchorage  can  be  found  in  the  eddy  on  the  SE.  side  of  the  island, 
and  a  pilot  can  generally  be  obtained  here.  The  St.  Andrews  pilots 
generally  cruise  ott"  these  islands. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Machias  Seal  Island  at 
llh.  5ni.;  springs  rise  18  feet,  neaps  li'<l  feet. 

Southeast  Shoal,  with  only  8  feet  water,  shows  a  rip  during  strength 
of  tide. 

Southeast  Ledge  breaks  during  heavy  weather.  There  is  probably 
less  than  o  fathoms  on  it,  as  the  rock  is  very  abrupt,  and  the  lead  may 
not  have  touched  the  highest  part. 

North  Rock,  about  4  feet  above  high  water,  is  of  small  extent,  and 
from  it  the  eastern  light-house  bears  S.  15°  W.  2J  miles.  There  is  a 
good  passage  between  the  rock  and  Machias  Seal  Islands. 

North  Shoal  shows  a  tide  rip,  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather.  From 
it  the  eastern  light-house  bears  S.  16°  E.  1^  miles ;  North  Rock  N.  60° 
E.  1^  miles. 

Middle  Shoal  has  deep  water  close  to.  It  shows  a  large  tide  rip, 
and  breaks  in  heavy  weather.  From  it  the  eastern  light-house  bears 
S.  49°  VV.  5|  miles,  and  North  Rock  S.  69o  W.  3^  miles. 

Murr  Ledges  lie  to  the  southward  of  Grand  Manan  Island,  and  con- 
sist of  an  extensive  cluster  of  dangers  7  miles  in  length  between  Gan- 
net  Rock  to  the  eastward  and  Bull  Rock  to  the  westward,  and  about 

3  miles  broad  north  and  south. 

Gannett  Rock  is  a  small,  bare  rock,  about  15  feet  above  high  water, 
with  a  landing  place  on  its  northern  side.  Best  time  for  landing  during 
rough  weather  is  at  low  water. 

The  western  side  of  the  rock  can  be  approached  to  within  100  yards, 
but  the  eastern  side  is  rugged,  and  a  detached  rocky  shoal  with  only 
12  feet  water  lies  S.  61°  E.  ^  mile  from  the  light-house.  Vessels  should 
preserve  an  offing  of  at  least  ^  mile.  -  ' 

Half-Tide  Rock  uncovers  at  half  tide,  with  deep  water  all  around 
100  yards  oif.    The  rock  breaks  at  high  water  in  rough  weather. 

St  Mary  Ledge  is  the  southernmost  of  Murr  Ledges,  and  only  cov- 
ers at  high-water  springs,  so  that  its  position  is  almost  always  shown. 
The  rock  may  be  aj^proached  to  within  200  yards. 

Yellow  Ledge  is  always  uncovered.  The  ledge  can  be  approached  to 
within  400  yards  except  on  east  side,  where  there  is  a  rock  with  only 

4  feet  water.    This  rock  breaks  at  low  water,  with  a  moderate  swell, 
and  r,t  high  water  in  heavy  weather. 

Cross- Jack  Ledge,  about  ^  mile  in  extent,  only  covers  at  high- water 
springs,  but  it  should  not  be  approached  within  J  mile. 


i  .ss 


20 


MIIRR    LEDGES— OLD   PROPRIETOR    SHOAL. 


l\ 


t    I 


A  small  rocky  patch,  which  jnst  uiicoveivt  at  low-watev  spriiitfs  and 
breaks  in  ht'uvy  weather,  lies  ^  mile  8.  26<^  \V.  of  Crons-Jack  Ledge. 

Long  Ledge  is  nearly  jj  mile  in  length,  and  has  two  points  ubont  2 
feet  above  iiigh-water  springs.  From  the  i»oint  at  the  northern  extrem- 
ity of  the  ledge  Gannet  Kock  lighthouse  hears  S.  80^  K.  nearly  3^ 
miles,  and  Yellow  Ledge  ^.  7°  B.  a  little  over  1.^  miles.  lietween  Long 
and  Yellow  Ledges  there  is  an  extensive  cluster  of  dangers  almost  con- 
nected with  the  former  ledge,  leaving  a  clear  channel  only  £  mile  wide 
between  Yellow  Ledge  and  the  southern  rock  of  the  cluster,  which  shows 
at  first  quarter  ebb. 

VITest  Ledge,  the  northern  end  of  which  is  just  awash  at  high- water 
springs  and  deep  water  all  round,  lies  with  Gannet  lighthouse  bearing 
S.  85°  E.  4  miles ;  there  is  a  clear  channel  I  mile  across  between  West 
Ledge  and  the  north  end  of  Lo:ig  Ledge. 

Wallace  Ledge,  of  a.,  all  extent,  uncovers  at  half  ebh  and  in  bad 
weather  breaks  at  high  water.  It  may  be  approached  on  either  side  to 
within  200  yards,  and  lies  with  Gannet  lighthouse  bearing  B.  75°  E.  4^ 
miles,  and  the  highest  part  of  West  Ledge  S.  5°  E.  ^  n>ilt- 

Kent  Shoal  lies  N.  9°  E.  2  miles  from  Gannet  lighthouse,  and  al- 
though some  of  the  fishermen  report  iis  little  as  12  feet  on  it,  nothing 
less  than  3^  fathoms  at  low  water  could  be  found  on  its  examination. 

Bull  Rock,  of  small  extent,  with  2  feet  on  it  and  deep  water  all 
round  to  within  ^  mile,  lies  nearly  midway  between  Gannet  and  Macbias 
Seal  Island  lighthouses,  the  latter  being  d'^^ant  6J  miles  S.  88°  W. ; 
Bull  Kock  shows  a  small  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide  and  gener* 
ally  breaks. 

Cautioa — The  soundings  around  Macbias  Seal  Islands  and  Mnrr 
Ledges  are  irregular.  The  principal  shoals  in  their  vicinity  have  been 
described  and  the  others  do  not  amount  to  dangers;  but  it  will  be  pro- 
dent  for  strangeis  to  keep  outside  them.  Should  it  be  necessary,  a 
vessel  may  anchor  between  Murr  Ledges  and  Grand  Manan  Island. 

Old  Proprietor  Shoal,  the  most  oif-lyiugof  the  dangers  SE.  of  Grand 
Manan  Island,  uncovers  at  about  half  tide,  and  from  it  the  south  point 
of  Three  Islands  bears  X.  81°  W.  about  4  miles  distant,  and  Gannet 
Rock  lighthouse  S.  61°  W.  5§  miles. 

The  SW.  head  of  Grand  Manan  Island  seen  optn  south  of  Three  Is. 
lands,  bearing  N.  75°  W.  leads  southwards,  and  Big  Duck  Island,  open 
east  of  Black  Kocks,  bearing  N.  16°  W.,  leads  eastward  of  Old  Proprie. 
tor  Shoal  and  all  the  dangers  in  its  vicinity.  Strangers  should  care, 
fully  avoid  getting  within  the  above  leading  marks. 

Beacon. — On  Old  Proprietor  Shoal  is  an  iron  spindle  painted  red, 
and  surmounted  by  a  cage  31  feet  above  high  water.  It  should  be  vis. 
ible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  8  to  10  miles. 

The  Foul  Qround  to  the  westward  of  Old  Proprietor  Shoal  is  an 
irregular  shoal,  about  ij  of  a  mile  from  north  to  south  ;  on  its  northern 
end  a  rock,  which  lies  N.  61°  W.  4  mile  from  Old  Proprietor  Shoal,  is 
jUst  awash  at  low  water  springs. 


r^Sii 


L. 

ev  »\mngH  and 
lack  Le<l};e. 
pointH  about  2 
rtlicrii  extrem- 
'  K.  nearly  3i 
HetwiHMi  Lonjf 
ITS  almost  cou- 
ily  ^  mile  wide 
r,  wliicb  shows 

I  at  high- water 
I  house  bearing 
between  West 

i)h  and  in  bad 
n  rither  side  to 
IB  S.  750  E.  4i 
t. 

ihonse,  and  al- 
on  it,  nothing 
ixauiination. 
leep  water  all 
etand  Macbias 
les  S.  88°  W. ; 
bide  and  gener- 

ids  and  Murr 
lity  have  been 
it  will  be  pro- 
necessary, a 
lan  Island. 
sSE.  of  Grand 
he  south  point 
t,  and  Oannet 

h  of  Three  Is. 
c  Island,  open 
f  Old  Proprie. 
8  should  care. 

e  painted  red, 
should  be  vis. 

•r  Shoal  is  an 
n  its  northern 
ietor  Shoal,  is 


RAN8    SHOAL — HULK    HEAD    RIP. 


21 


Rans  Shoal  is  small  and  rocky  with  only  3  feet  water  on  its  shoalest 
pa  ,  t'roiii  which  the  south  point  of  Three  Islaiul.s  bears  N.  89^  W.  lii^ 
utiles,  and  Gannet  Uock  li);ht house  H.irp  W.  4^  miles. 

Cheneys  house — the  only  one  on  the  larjjest  of  Three  Islaiius — in 
line  with  the  highest  part  of  a  ledge  which  never  covers  bearing  N.  01^ 
W.,  leads  southward ;  and  Mark  Hill  on  Grand  Maiiati  Island  open 
westward  of  (rreeu  Islands  N.  38°  W.,  leads  westward  of  Uaus  Shoal. 

Crawley  Shoal  may  be  considered  to  be  a  continuation  of  the  Foul 
Ground  in  a  northerly  direction.  The  shoalest  part  has  3  fathoms  water, 
and  from  it  the  higher  of  the  two  Black  Uocks  bears  N.  i^  K.  2i{ 
miles,  the  mark  for  it  being  the  eastern  side  of  Hig  Duck  Island  open 
to  the  eastward  of  Prangle  Point  and  over  the  low  part  of  Gull  Kock. 

Outer  and  Inner  Diamond  are  rocky  shoals,  the  highest  i>arts  of 
which  are  Just  dry  at  low  water  springs,  bearing  from  each  other  N.  5<5 
W.  and  S.  5'^  E.  nearly  i  mile  a))art.  From  the  Outer  Diamond  the 
south  point  of  Three  Islands  bears  S.  74<^  VV.,  nearly  2<^  miles,  and  the 
higher  Black  Kock  N.  24o  E.  2^  miles. 

The  house  on  the  northernmost  of  Three  Islands,  open  northward  of 
the  north  point  of  the  easternmost  of  those  islands  bearing  N.  83<^ 
W.  leads  northward  of  the  Inner  Diamond,  between  it  and  Tinker  Shoal. 

Tinker  Shoal  is  about  \  mile  in  length,  and  the  highest  part,  which 
uncovers  at  low  water,  except  at  very  small  neaps,  lies  with  Long 
Point,  White  Bead  Island,  bearing  N.  2°  W.,  upwards  of  a  mile  dis- 
tant, and  the  north  point  of  Three  Islands  X.  86°  W.  2J  miles. 

The  SW.  head  of  Grand  Manan  Island  open  to  the  northward  of 
Three  Islands  leads  northward  of  the  shoals;  and  Mark  Hill  open 
southward  of  Pumpkin  Island,  which  should  be  equidistant  between  it 
and  White  Head  Island,  bearing  N.  50^  W.,  leads  between  the  Tinker 
and  Brazil  Shoals. 

Brazil  Shoal  is  an  extensive  danger,  the  SW.  end  of  which  uncov- 
ers  at  the  last  quarter  ebb,  and  its  NE.  end  just  shows  above  low  water 
springs;  between  these  two  patches,  which  are  distant  from  each  other 
about  i  mile,  the  bottom  is  very  irregular. 

From  the  SW.  patch  Long  Point  bears  N.  41°  W,  one  mile,  and  the 
higher  Black  Rock  N.  43"^  E.  1|  miles.  From  the  NB.  patch  Long 
Point  bears  N.  72°  W.  one  mile,  and  the  higher  Black  Kock  N.  40°  E. 
I  mile. 

Black  Rocks  are  two  in  number,  the  larger  and  northeastern  of 
the  two  being  about  10  feet  above  high  water,  an<l  separated  from  the 
smaller  rock — 4  feet  above  the  same  level — by  a  shoal  passage. 

The  rocks  are  200  yards  apart,  and  bear  from  each  other  N.  38°  E. 
and  S.  38°  W.  They  can  be  safely  approached  on  either  siile  to  within 
200  yards. 

Bulk  Head  Rip  extends  about  2^  miles  in  a  S.  52°  E.  direction 
from  Black  Kocks.  The  rip  is  caused  by  a  sudden  change  in  the 
bottom,  though  there  is  plenty  of  water  through  it. 


22 


ORAM)    MA  NAN    ISLAND. 


Clarks  Qround,  wliicli  has  0  fatlioiuH  on  it,  lies  with  Old  Proprietor 
Shoal  bearing  S.  43°  W.  about  2  miles  ilistuQt,  and  aUu  .shows  a  heavy 
tidal  rip  <m  the  obb. 

Tide*.— About  the  Uaiiuet  Hock  the  tlood  sets  N.  00°  E.,  and  ebb 
8.  0(P  \V.  IVoni  3  to  4  knots  p«r  hour;  but  between  the  Gannet  and 
Mauhias  8(>al  iHlands  both  direction  and  Htreni;th  constantly  vary. 
Near  the  latter  the  tidal  stream  sets  X.  15°  E.  and  S.  15^  W.  with  a 
velocity  of  about  3  knots. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Old  Proprietor  Shoal  the  stream  turns  about  three- 
fourths  of  an  hour  before  hijjh  and  low  water  by  the  shore,  respectively, 
and  runs  with  a  great  Init  variable  velocity,  attaining;  in  .some  places 
during  the  8tren}>th  of  springs  a  rate  of  G  knots.  The  ripples  in  conse- 
quence are  large,  and  cause  the  surface  to  assume  a  boiling  api)earance, 
rendering  the  dangers  indistinct. 

Strangers  are  therefore  strongly  recommended  to  keep  outside  the 
clearing  marks  for  Old  Proprietor  Shoal ;  otherwise  the  best  chan- 
nel is  inside  all  the  dangers,  along  the  coast  of  White  Head  Island, 
which  may  be  approached  on  its  southeastern  side  to  about  \  mile,  ex- 
cept at  Long  Point,  which  should  be  passed  at  twice  that  distance. 

Off  Big  Duck  Island  the  inshore  streams  runs  from  2  to  3  knots  in  a 
direction  parallel  to  the  trend  of  the  coast,  about  N.  18  oW.  on  the  flood 
and  S.  18°  E.ou  the  ebb.  To  the  northward  of  Fish  Head,  as  far  as  Long 
Eddy  Point,  the  stream,  both  flood  and  ebb,  sets  about  N.  30°  W.; 
whilst  further  off  shore  the  direction  of  the  stream  gradually  merges  into 
that  of  the  bar  tide,  with  a  reduced  rate  of  IJ  or  2  knots.  Along  the 
west  side  of  Grand  Manan  Island  the  flood  stream  runs  parallel  to  the 
shore  about  NNE.  and  the  ebb  SSW.  2  knots  an  hour. 

Directions. — Vessels  approaching  Grand  Manan  Island  from  the 
eastward,  and  bound  either  to  Seal  Cove  or  round  SW.  head,  should 
bring  the  latter  open  to  the  southward  of  Three  Islands  bearing  N.  75° 
W.,  in  order  to  clear  Old  Proprietor  Shoal  and  Foul  Ground ;  this  course 
will  lead  in  safety  to  Three  Islands,  which  may  be  passed  at  the  dis- 
tauceof  rj  mile,  and  thence  as  occasion  may  require  to  a  suitable  anchor- 
age in  Seal  Cove. 

If  bound  to  Grand  Harbor,  after  having  passed  Old  Proprietor  Shoal, 
proceed  to  the  southwestward  of  Bans  Shoal  with  Mark  Hill  0|)en  south- 
ward of  Green  Island  bearing  N.  38°  W.,  but  it  would  not  be  advisable 
to  enter  the  harbor  without  a  pilot. 

A  temporary  anchorage  will  be  found  about  i  mile  from  the  NE. 
shore  of  Three  Islands,  in  about  5  fathoms,  sand,  and  safe  from  all 
winds  which  have  no  easting  in  them. 

If  proceedingto  the  anchorage  under  Big  Duck  Island  from  the  south- 
ward, keep  Big  Duck  Island  open  eastward  of  Black  Rocks  bearing 
N.  16°  W.  in  order  to  pass  eastward  of  Old  Proprietor ;  after  passing 
Black  Rocks  at  a  moderate  distance  bring  the  western  tangent  of  Long 
Island,  njidway  between  High  and  Low  Duck  Islands,  bearing  N.  25°  W., 
which  will  lead  nearly  \  mile  outside  the  rocks  off  Prangle  Point. 


■^^h. 


Old  Proprietor 
shows  a  heavy 

IP  E.,  and  ebb 
le  Gaiinet  and 
UHtaiitly  vary. 
15^  W.  with  a 

H8  about  three- 
B,  respectively, 
ill  some  places 
pples  ill  coiise- 
i^ap])earance, 

?p  outside  the 
he  best  cban- 

Head  Island, 
)ut  i  mile,  ex- 
t  distance. 
:o  3  knots  in  a 
W.  on  the  tiood 

as  far  as  Long 
ut  N.  30°  W.; 
ly  merges  into 
s.  Along  the 
parallel  to  the 

land  from  the 
.  head,  should 
(earing  N.  75° 
d;  this  course 
led  at  the  dis- 
litable  anchor- 

prietor  Shoal, 
ill  0|)eu  south- 
t  be  advisable 

from  the  NE. 
safe  from  all 

om  the  south- 
ocks  bearing 
after  passing 
igentof  Long 
ug  N.  250  w., 
)  Point. 


WOLVES — WOLF    ROCK. 


m 


After  passing  these  rocks  bring  the  eastern  points  of  Long  and  Low 
Duck  Islands  in  line  in  order  to  avoid  the  long  rocky  ledge,  mostly  dry 
at  low  war»r.  which  extends  nearly  A  mile  to  tiie  southward  of  Big 
Duck  Island  and  anchor  with  the  west  tangent  of  Long  Island  midway 
between  lligli  and  Low  Duck  Islands,  and  the  south  point  of  IJig  Duck 
Island  bearing  X.  88o  E. 

■  The  channel  between  Orand  Manaii  Island  and  the  coast  of  Maine 
varies  from  10  to  C  miles  in  breadth,  and  in  all  respects  may  be  deemed 
the  safest  passage  up  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  as  it  is  deep  and  clear  of 
dangers,  with  the  shores  on  either  side  steep-t(»,  besides  being  the  most 
advantageous  with  the  preva  ent  winds  which  are  from  the  westward. 

Wolves,  consisting  of  t\y&  islands  thickly  wooded,  are  3|  miles  in 
length  and  lie  8J  miles  N.  15°  E.  from  the  north  point  of  Grand  Manan 
Island.  These  islands  are  from  60  to  100  feet  in  height,  and  along  their 
shores,  which  are  steepto,  temporary  anchorages  may  be  obtained  in 
12  to  20  fathoms. 

The  passage  between  East  VVDlf,  the  largest  and  northeasrernniost 
of  the  group,  and  Green  Wolf  has  deep  water,  and  is  about  600  yanls 
wide;  but  vessels  using  this  channel  should  borrow  on  the  Green  Wolf 
side,  in  order  to  avoid  some  rocks  which  extend  about  GOOyards  ofl"  the 
southwest  shore  of  East  Wolf. 

There  is  also  a  passage  between  Green  and  Flat  Wolves,  but  the 
channel  is  narrowed  to  200  yards  by  some  rocks  off  the  latter  island, 
and  should  not  therefore  be  taken.  The  remaining  two  passages  are 
not  navigable  except  for  boats,  nor  should  any  of  the  channels  between 
Wolves  Islands  be  attempted  by  strangers,  unless  under  unavoidable 
circumstances. 

During  thick  weather,  or  with  light  winds  and  an  adverse  tide,  ves- 
sels may  anchor  between  Wolves  Islands  and  Beaver  Harbor,  in  20  to 
25  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

Whistling  Buoy.~An  automatic  whistling  buoy,  painted  black, 
with  the  name  "S.  Wolf"  in  white  letters,  has  been  placed  southeastward 
of  Southwest  Wolf  Island.  The  buoy  is  moored  in  52  fathoms  of  water, 
with  Southwest  Wolf  Island  light  bearing  N.  41°  W.,  distant  U  miles. 

TVolf  Rock,  small  in  size  and  always  above  water,  lies  about  400 
yards  off  the  north  point  of  East  Wolf,  and  is  separated  from  another 
small  rock  to  the  eastward  by  a  deep  channel  200  yanls  wide.  Both 
rocks  sliould  always  be  passed  on  their  northerij  side,  and  not  within  a 
distance  of  400  yards. 

Coast  of  Maine,  Englishman  Bay.— The  entrance  to  this  bay  is 
between  Cow  Point  on  the  east,  and  Kelly  Point  on  the  west.  These 
points  are  7  miles  apart,  but  the  passage  is  obstructed  by  many  isl- 
ands, among  which  lead  the  different  channels  into  the  bay.  From  a 
line  joining  Kelly  and  Cow  Points,  the  bay  is  5  miles  long  to  the  en- 
trance to  Chandler  liiver,  at  its  northern  end,  and  affords  an  excellent 
anchorage  for  the  largest  vessels,  5  and  6  fathoms  being  found  as  far  up 


'■1 
'1 


M 


aiaipin-. 


24 


ENGLISHMAN    BAY,    MAINE. 


ir^ 


as  Groat  Head.  The  main  entrance  to  Englishman  Bay  lies  between 
Scabby  Islands  and  The  Brothers,  between  which  the  channel  is  IJ 
miles  wide,  and  is  unobstructed  up  to  Shag  Ledge,  which  nuist  receive 
a  good  berth,  owing  to  other  ledges — bare  at  low  water — which  radiate 
in  all  directions  iVoin  the  main  ledge. 

For  vessels  of  light  draft,  there  is  a  good  and  perfectly  safe  channel 
from  the  eastward  between  Foster  and  Ram  Island,  and  many  coasters 
and  fishermen  make  use  of  it  in  preference  to  the  main  channel.  It  is 
almost  unobstructed  uj)  to  Hickey  Island,  the  only  danger  being  the 
ledge  ofl"  the  northern  end  of  this  island. 

In  using  the  main  entrance  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  "Cods 
Heac!  "  a  small  rock — out  at  low  water — which  lies  about  |  of  a  mile  S. 
34°  VV.  from  Mickey  Island,  and  is  not  marked. 

Scabby  Islands,  forming  the  eastern  shore  of  the  main  entrance  to 
Englishman  Bay,  consist  of  two  small  islands  lying  about  N.  11°  E. 
and  S.  11°  W.  from  each  other,  and  close  together.  The  eastern  one  is 
conspicuous  for  a  high  rouud  head  with  one  or  or  two  dead  pines,  look- 
ing like  masts,  on  its  top;  otherwise  it  is  bare.  The  southern  islet  is 
lower  than  the  northern,  and  is  rocky  and  bare,  except  for  a  few  dead 
trees  on  its  western  end. 

The  Brothers,  forming  the  western  shore  of  the  main  entrance  to 
Englishman  Bay,  are  two  rocky  islets,  bearing  about  N.  66°  E.  and  S. 
66°  W.  from  each  other,  with  grassy  surface,  and  with  a  scanty  growth 
of  fir  clinging  to  their  northern  sides. 

Foster  Island,  forming  the  northern  boundary  of  the  eastern  en- 
trance to  Englishman  Bay,  is  bare  and  rocky.  It  was  formerly  wooded, 
but  is  now  cleared  and  covered  with  tree  stumps.  It  is  remarkable  for 
the  bleached  appearance  of  these  stumps,  which  resemble  grave  stones. 

Ram  Island,  forming  the  southern  boundary  of  eastern  entrance  to 
Englishman  Bay,  is  a  low  rocky  islet,  with  a  scanty  growth  of  stunt»'d 
fir  at  its  eastern  end. 

Roque  Island  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  to  Englishman 
Bay,  and  affords  several  excellent  harbors  of  refuge. 

Shorey  Cove  is  a  most  excellent  harbor,  sheltered  from  all  winds, 
with  good  anchorage  in  from  2  to  3  fathoms,  soft  bottom,  and  no  ob- 
structions. 

Roque  Island  Harbor  also  atlbrds  good  anchorage  and  excellent 
shelter  for  vessels.  It  may  be  entered  from  the  westward  through 
lloques  Island  Narrows,  between  Roque  Island  and  Great  Si)ruce 
Island. 

Tijere  is  also  a  passage  from  the  east  between  Halifax,  Anguilla,  and 
the  Sliot  Islands  on  the  south,  and  Lakeman  Island  on  the  nortli,  but 
the  b(;^t  i)as8age  is  that  from  the  southward,  between  the  Shot  and 
Great  Si)ruce  Islands. 

Qreat  Cove,  the  bight  in  the  main  land  just  to  the  eastward  of  Calf 
Point,  aftbrds  good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  all  winds.     In  case  ot 


,„^,MU»mr*mim»>* 


LITTLE    KENNEBEC    RIVER — MACHIA8    BAY. 


25 


Jay  lies  between 
8  cbauuel  is  IJ 
iclj  must  receive 
— which  radiate 

tly  safe  cliannel 

i  many  coaster* 

channel.     It  is 

mger  being  the 

old  the  "Cods 
It  I  of  a  mile  S. 

ain  entrance  to 
ibont  N.  no  E. 
e  eastern  one  is 
ead  pines,  look- 
3Uthern  islet  is 
for  a  few  dead 

in  entrance  to 

J.  66°  E.  and  S. 

scanty  growth 

he  eastern  en- 
cmerly  wooded, 
remarkable  for 
e  grave  stones, 
jrn  entrance  to 
wth  of  stunted 

o  Englishman 

^om  all  winds, 
a,  and  no  ob- 

and  excellent 
ward  through 
Great  Si)ruce 

Anguilla,and 
the  north,  but 
the  Shot  and 

itward  of  Calf 
.    In  case  ot 


southerly  winds  vessels  may  run  well  into  the  cove  and  anchor  under 
the  lee  of  Calf  Island. 

Little  Kennebec  River  is  an  excellent  harbor  of  refuge,  the  anchor- 
age being  about  1^  miles  above  the  Point  of  Main,  and  the  approaches 
l>erfectly  safe. 

Hickey  Island,  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  to  the  Little 
Kennebec,  is  a  low  island,  partly  sand  and  partly  rock,  dotted  )»ere  and 
there  with  spruce  and  flr  and  a  stunted  growth  of  pine.  A  reef,  bare 
at  low  water,  extends  200  yards  from  its  southern  end. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Englishman  Bay  at  llh. 
15m.     Mean  rise  and  fall  of  tides  is  13  feet. 

Ice. — The  bay  is  generally  closed  by  ice  during  a  portion  of  each 
winter.  In  severe  winters  navigation  by  sailing  vessels  is  impossible 
after  the  loth  of  January,  although  steamers  can  usually  keep  running 
until  the  end  of  the  month,  when  the  bay  is  usually  completely  closed, 
remaining  so  until  towards  the  1st  of  March.  The  formation  commences 
in  the  coves  and  sheltered  places  along  shore  and  extends  gradually 
out  into  the  bay. 

Machias  Bay,  just  to  the  eastward  of  Englishman  Bay,  has  a 
length  in  a  north  and  south  direction  of  6  miles  and  varies  between  2^ 
and  4  miles  in  width.  The  main  entrance  to  the  bay  is  between  Cross 
Island  on  the  east  and  Libby  Island  on  the  west. 

The  western  channel,  between  Libby  Island  on  the  south  and  Earn 
and  Stone  Islands  on  the  north,  aflfords  a  good  and  nearly  unobstructed 
passage,  with  good  water. 

There  is  a  good  channel,  though  unsafe  for  strangers,  from  the  east- 
ward, between  Cross  Island  and  the  main  laud,  the  outer  entrance  being 
between  The  Old  Man  and  Wash  Island. 

Cross  Island,  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  Machias  Bay,  is  a 
remarkable  looking  island,  crowned  with  a  thick  growth  of  sickly  and 
stunted  flr.  A  reef  makes  out  from  its  southwestern  end  about  IJ  miles 
in  a  westerly  direction ;  otherwise  the  southern  and  western  shores  are 
remarkably  bold  and  steep-to. 

Libby  Islands,  forming  the  western  side  of  the  main  entrance  to 
Machias  Bay.  consist  of  two  rocky  islands,  which,  at  low  water,  are 
nearly  joined  by  the  intervening  reefs.  The  larger  (western  island)  is 
entirely  bare  of  trees,  but  has  two  houses  on  its  summit,  near  its  north- 
ern end.  The  eastern  islet  has  a  few  dead  flr  and  spruce  near  its  north- 
ern end,  but  is  otherwise  rocky  and  bare  of  vegetation. 

Stone  Island,  about  one  mile  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  Libby 
Islands,  is  a  barren,  rocky  island  of  moderate  height,  covered  with  a  thick 
growth  of  small  flr,  except  at  its  southern  end,  where  is  a  remarkable 
round  bluff  head  with  a  white  face,  called  Stone  Head. 

Yellow  Island,  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel  to  the  upper 
bay,  is  remarkable  for  being  composed  of  nearly  white  rocks.  At  its 
eastern  end  is  a  high  head  called  Y'ellow  Ilead,  which  is  bare  except  on 
top,  where  grow  a  few  stunted  flr  trees. 


26 


MACHIAS   BAY. 


T«i?T-         ?•*•  ^''"^  J"''^  ^"^  **•«  northward  and  westward  of  Yellow 

Island,  IS  made  conspicuous  by  two  round  bare  rocky  heads  risVnrfrom 

he  beach,  the  northern  of  which  is  high  and  precipi'Lus    the   outlern 

oases,  ihe  rest  of  the  island  is  low  and  rock  fringed  excent  »t  it- 
northern  end,  where  there  is  a  grove  of  small  fir  ^ 

Chances  Island,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel  into  the  upper 
bay,  IS  a  round,  wooded  island  of  moderate  height. 

Averys   Rock,  lying  exactly  in  the  middle  of  the  channel  to  th« 

anHr t"  '"'";  '"'■''^^"•^'  '^^«  "'^  ^««^^'  '-^^""^  2S  ?ern  height 

ward     it  is  aZ     T  "w"  "'''  ''''  ^"'^  ^«"'^  *«  P'^^^  ^o  the  east- 
ward.    It  IS  always  steered  for  in  coming  up  the  bay 

erlffnd^^SHl"i'«"'P'r''"'  ^*''  '^"^  ^^^^'  ^""^^^  Wuff  head  at  its  east- 

Smin  of  the  f  1         h"^  "^r^'  '""^  *"  ^'«  «'^^««'  «"^^  ^^^^^  i«  ^  small 
group  ot  the  trees  on  the  eastern  end  of  the  head. 

Round  Island  is  rocky  and  of  moderate  height,  and  is  covered  with 
a  thick  growth  of  spruce  and  fir.  Its  eastern  end  is  a  ro^d  iTredp? 
tons  head,  also  thickly  wooded.  '  '''^^'^'P*- 

Holmes  Bay,  a  wide  and  deep  bay  just  to  the  northward  of  Spragues 
Neck  ,s  so  obstructed  as  to  make  directions  useless.  It  is  never  uZ 
except  by  the  small  fishing  boats  belonging  there. 

Sanborns  Cove,  to  the  northward  of  Larrabees  Cove,  from  which 
t  ,s  separated  by  Birch  Point,  is  a  large  and  deep  cove,  affirdrglxcel- 
lent  anchorage  for  coasters  in  from  2  to  3  fathom  ,  water 

Machias  IWver,  the  entrance  to  which  lies  between  Birch  Point  ou 
the  west  and  Holmes  Point,  the  next  point  west  from  Long  Po h,t  "s 
difficult  of  navigation  and  unsafe  for  strangers  without  a  pilSt.  ' 

iulwf^ufa'^H"'  '"  '"''"'"'  l^^rbor  of  refuge,  with  good  anchorage 
H  from  3  to  0  fathoms  water,  makes  oif  from  the  western  side  of  Machias 
Bay,  with  ,ts  entrance  between  Bar  Island  ou  the  north  and  Bucks 
Head  on  the  south,  and  which  is  about  300  yards  wide 
Bucks  Head  is  a  thinly  wooded  head  of  moderate  height,  descend-' 

hea  1  on  that  side  will  be  found  very  abrupt  and  bold.     A  small  rocky 

itLvL^iroroirr  s. "-"  "'^  - "-  °'- ""-  ^-'-  -  ''• "» 

Bar  Island,  a  high  rocky  island  covered  with  small  pine  and  spruce 
rees,  has  very  precipitous  faces,  except  at  its  southeas  ern  end,  where 
It  descends  into  a  low,  rocky  point. 

nff^r^'^^M**^  ^*^' ""  ^^*"**'""'  nnobstrufited  cove  with  deep  water,  makes 
w!r  :;  Po'irof T"''  of  Machias  Bay  about  1^  milel  to  .ui  JZ 
waul  of  loint  ot   Mam,  extending  in  a  northerly  directiou  about  J 


m 


LITTLE    MACHIAS    BAY. 


2T 


ird  of  Yellow 
8  rising  from 
the  southern 
fv  about  their 
>xcept  at  its 

to  the  upper 

inual  to  the 
t  in  height, 
I  to  the  east- 
is  excelleut 
the  coasters 
It  Island  on 

1  at  its  east- 
'e  is  a  small 

jvered  with 
nd,  precipi- 

>f  Spragues 
never  used 

'rom  which 
ding  excel- 

h  Point  ou 
g  Point,  is 
ot. 

anchorage 
i)f  Machias 
iind  Bucks 

',  descend- 
I  arbor,  the 
lall  rocky 
>of  it,  lies 

nd  spruce 
ud,  where 

i^'3r,  makes 
iUo  liorth- 
I  about  ^ 


mile.  It  is  unfortunately  unprotected  from  southerly  and  southeasterly 
winds.  If  obliged  to  anchor  in  this  bay,  vessels  should  lie  in  close 
udder  the  eastern  shore  where  a  small  cove  makes  in,  affording  good 
shelter  from  easterly  and  southeasterly  winds. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Machias  Bay  at  lOh. 
47  m.    Mean  fise  and  fall  is  18  feet. 

Little  Machias  Bay. — Just  to  the  eastward  of  Machias  Bay,  and 
separated  from  it  by  a  promontory  averaging  about  1 J  miles  in  breadth, 
Little  Machias  makes  in  about  2J  miles  to  the  northward.  Its  breadth 
varies  from  f  mile  at  its  mouth,  to  1^  near  its  head.  It  is  of  little 
importance,  although  it  has  good  water,  as  its  navigation  is  rendered 
dangerous  by  the  ledges  and  rocks  off  its  mouth,  and  it  is  open  to  south- 
erly and  southeasterly  winds.  The  entrance  lies  betweeii  Dennisons 
Point  on  the  east,  and  Davis  Point  on  the  west,  but  the  channel  is 
much  obstructed  and  very  unsafe  for  strangers.  When  in  the  bay  the 
best  anchorage  will  be  found  on  the  western  shore  in  from  2  to  5  fath- 
oms, but  it  is  unsafe  ground  on  account  of  being  open  to  the  southward. 

Ice. — Little  Machias  Bay  is  usually  closed  to  navigation  during  the 
winter,  and  in  severe  winters  remains  closed  from  December  to  April. 
For  ice  in  Machias  Bay,  see  "Ice  in  Englishman  Bay." 

Little  River. — Two  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Little  Machias  Bay  lies 
the  entrance  to  Little  Ei^er,  which  forms  one  of  the  best  and  most  fre- 
quented harbors  of  refuge  between  Englishman  Bay  and  Eastport. 

The  Coast  between  Little  Machias  Bay  and  Little  River  runs  in  a 
general  ENE.  and  WSW.  direction,  and  is  generally  high,  rocky,  bar- 
ren, and  steep-to. 

Little  River  has  a  length  from  its  entrance  to  the  head  of  the  river 
of  IJ  miles,  having  a  general  westerly  direction,  but  is  navigable  only 
to  the  town  of  Cutler  on  its  northern  bank  and  just  above  its  mouth. 
It  affords  excellent  anchorage  for  vessels  in  all  winds,  in  from  2  to  5 
fathoms,  with  a  bottom  of  stiff"  gray  mud. 

Little  River  Island  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  to  Little 
River.  It  is  small  and  rocky,  and  is  covered  with  a  thick  growth  of 
stunted  fir. 

Little  River  Entrance  lies  between  Eastern  Knubble  ou  the  north 
and  Little  River  Head  ou  the  south.  There  are  two  channels  ;  one  be- 
tween Eastern  Knubble  and  Little  River  Island,  called  the  Main  Chan- 
nel, and  one  between  the  island  and  Little  River  Head  called  the  West- 
ern Channel.    The  latter  is  shoal,  but  has  no  obstructions. 

Eastern  Knubble  is  a  high,  precipitous,  rocky  head,  covered  with  a 
few  spruce  and  fir  trees.  To  the  eastward  of  it  will  be  seen  a  high, 
square,  tower-like  head,  called  Great  Head,  which  is  a  good  landmark  if 
approaching  the  coast  in  tiiick  weather  and  the  lighthouse  can  not  be 
seeii. 

Little  River  Head,  forming  the  southwestern  side  of  the  entrance  to 
Little  River  is  of  moderate  height.     With  the  exception  of  its  northern 


'if 


28 


LITTLE    RIVER — PA8SAMAQU0DDY   BAY. 


bluft",  which  is  wooiled  with  a  small  growth  of  tir,  the  surface  has  been 
cleared  aud  the  stumps  of  trees  left  standing. 

These  stumps  serve  to  mark  the  head  with  certainty,  as  thoy  have 
become  so  whitened  by  exposure  as  to  present  the  appearance  of  grave- 
stones. 

On  the  southern  and  eastern  faces  of  Little  River  Head  large  white 
spots  have  been  i)aintea  on  the  rock  just  below  the  tops  of  the  clitt's  to 
enable  vessels  to  recognize  the  entrance. 

The  northern  banks  of  the  river  are  all  high  and  rocky,  while  the 
southern  shores  are  lower,  covered  with  bushes,  and  here  and  there 
groups  of  houses  close  to  the  shore  line. 

Just  to  the  westward  of  Eastern  Knubble  is  Eastern  Head,  high,  pre- 
cipitous, and  crowned  with  trees.  About  100  yards  to  the  southward 
of  Eastern  Bead,  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  river,  is  Eastern  Head 
Ledge,  to  avoid  which  great  care  must  be  takeu  when  entering  by  the 
eastern  or  main  channel.  It  lies  about  NW.  and  SE.,  is  50  yards  long, 
and  uncovers  at  low  spring  tides. 

If  entering  by  the  western  channel,  look  out  for  Long  Ledge,  making 
out  a  considerable  distance  from  the  southern  shore,  opposite  Little 
River  Island,  aud  is  for  the  most  part  dry  at  low  water. 

Ice  in  Little  River.— The  harbor  is  unobstructed  by  ice  even  in  the 
severest  winters,  aud  is  accessible  at  all  times  by  both  sailing  and 
steam  vessels. 

Between  Little  River  and  West  Quoddy  Head  the  coast  has  a  general 
NE.  and  SW.  direction,  covering  about  14  miles.  It  is  generally  high, 
rocky,  and  barren,  and  quite  bold.  The  few  coves  and  harbors  to  be 
found  in  this  stretch  are  of  no  importance  whatever  as  harbors  of 
refuge,  being  generally  badly  obstructed  by  ledges,  aud  affording  pro- 
tection only  from  northerly  winds. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  West  Quoddy  Head  at 
lib.  12  m. ;  springs  rise  21  feet,  neaps  17  feet. 

Sail  Rocks,  so  called  in  consequence  of  their  bearing  some  resem- 
blance to  a  ship,  lie  about  J  mile  S.  41<>  E.  from  the  light-house  on  West 
Quoddy  Head. 

Outside  them  to  the  eastward  is  a  heavy  race,  so  that  when  passing 
this  locality  it  would  be  advisable  to  keep  an  offlng  from  J  to  §  mile 
from  lite  rocks. 

Passamaquoddy  Bay  is  an  extensive  inlet,  about  10  miles  deep, 
common  to  the  State  of  Maine  and  New  Brunswick.  On  the  western 
side  of  the  bay  is  the  river  St.  Croix,  being  the  natural  boundary  be- 
tween United  States  territory  and  British  America. 

The  bay,  which  is  never  closed  by  ice,  affords  excellent  shelter,  with 
a  sufficient  depth  of  water  for  vessels  of  heavy  draft,  whilst  its  waters 
swarm  with  tish,  comprising  herring,  cod,  and  mackerel. 

Across  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  about  10  miles  wide,  are  numerous 
islaruls,  rocks,  and  shoals,  between  which  are  three  channels,  viz  :  the 


^fci««,» 


CAMPOBELLO    ISLAND — FRIAR    ROAD. 


29 


:e  bas  been 

thoy  have 
ie  of  grave- 
large  white 
the  cUtt'8  to 

,  while  the 
I  aud  there 

1,  high,  pre- 
southward 
steru  Head 
ring  by  the 
yards  long, 

ge,  making 
osite  Little 

even  In  the 
iailiug  and 

8  a  general 
jrally  high, 
bors  to  be 
harbors  of 
trdiug  pro- 

ly  Head  at 

»me  resem- 

se  on  West 

en  passing 
1^  to  §  mile 

ailes  deep, 
lie  western 
iindary  be- 

elter,  with 
its  waters 

numerous 
is,  viz :  the 


southern,  the  middle  or  ship  channel,  and  the  northern,  known  as  Le- 
tite  passage.  The  first,  barely  200  yards  wide  across  the  narrows,  is 
that  between  Canipobello  Island  and  the  mainland  to  the  SW. ;  the 
ship  channel  lies  between  Canipobello  and  Deer  Islands,  and  though 
the  most  circuitous,  is  the  broadest,  deepest,  and  best;  whilst  Letito 
passage,  betweeu  Macniaster  Island  and  the  Xew  Brunswick  sliore,  is 
alike  narrow  and  dangerous,  being  only  available  with  local  knowledge 
and  during  slack  tide. 

Campobello  Island  has  several  fine  harbors,  especially  that  of  De 
Lute,  on  its  NW.  shore.  The  island  is  separated  from  the  mainland  by 
a  narrow  channel,  for  which  at  all  times  local  knowledge  is  necessary. 

With  the  exception  of  the  SW.  shore,  the  salient  points  of  the  island 
are  steep-to  and  may  be  safely  approached.  CJn  the  eastern  coast  Her- 
ring Bay,  Schooner  and  Mill  Coves  are  well  adapted  for  temporary 
anchorage ;  but  when  making  for  the  latter  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid 
a  three-quarter  fathom  patch  about  400  yards  off  the  north  shore  of  the 
cove. 

Head  Ha:  jor  is  formed  between  the  island  of  that  name  and  an  in- 
dentation in  the  land  at  the  NE.  end  of  Campobello  Island,  and  though 
small,  is  safe,  easy  of  access,  and  without  detached  dangers. 

De  Lute  Harbor,  on  the  west  side  of  Campobello  Island,  is  well 
adapted  for  anchorage,  though  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  Racer  Rock, 
about  200  yards  in  extent,  and  with  only  9  feet  water ;  it  lies  a  little  to 
the  eastward  of  the  line  between  Man-of-War  Head  and  the  nearest 
point  to  the  northward,  and  is  about  400  yards  distant  from  both. 

Strangers  should  anchor  to  the  westward  of  the  line  between  the  be- 
fore-mentioned points,  or,  if  wishing  to  go  farther  in,  the  services  of  a 
pilot  should  be  obtained. 

Friar  Bay,  also  on  the  west  side  of  Campobello  Island,  is  an  inden- 
tation between  the  village  of  Welchpool  and  Friar  Head  about  a  mile 
distant. 

Here  good  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  about  10  fathoms  in  the 
line  with  Mark  Island,  just  open  of  Friar  Head,  and  as  near  as  conveni- 
ent to  Welchpool,  off  which  the  5-fathom  line  is  only  100  yards  distant. 
Vessels  of  moderate  draft  may  lie  alongside  Queen  Wharf. 

The  Main  Entrance  to  the  harbor  of  Eastport  is  by  the  ship  chan- 
nel, between  Campobello  and  Deer  Islands.  The  entrance  by  Quoddy 
Roads  and  Lubec  Narrows  is  suitable  only  for  small  vessels. 

Friar  Road,  known  as  the  summer  harbor  of  Eastport,  affords  good 
anchorage  for  vessels  in  summer  time.  The  water  is  deep,  however, 
ranging  from  12  to  50  fathoms,  except  near  the  shore,  and  the  tide  runs 
strong.  The  road  is  also  exposed  to  the  full  sweep  of  the  NE.  winds, 
and  in  the  winter  season,  or  in  time  of  heavy  gales,  the  anchorage  is 
untenable.  Vessels  then  seek  shelter  in  Eastport  Harbor  proper,  known 
as  Broad  Cove,  which  is  commodious,  and  affords  excellent  shelter  and 
anchorage.    It  is  perfectly  safe  for  strangers  to  enter  at  any  time. 


r 


f  I 


t  I 


30 


PA88AMAQUODDY   BAY. 


White  Horse  Island  is  a  bare  rocky  islet,  68  fo,et  high,  of  a  whitish 
appearance,  about  2^  miles  N.  29°  E.  from  Campobtllo  lighthouse ;  and 
as  the  small  islands  in  the  neighborhood  are  covered  with  trees,  White 
Horse  Island  is  easily  distinguished  and  serves  as  a  beacon. 

East  Rock,  with  only  one  foot  of  water,  lies  about  300  yards  off  the 
east  end  of  White  Horse  Island  with  the  northern  tangents  of  White 
and  White  Horse  Islands  in  line. 

Oampobello  lighthouse,  open  to  the  northward  of  White  Horse,  clears 
East  Rock  on  its  north  side;  and  White  Island,  open  iwuth  of  White 
Horse  Island,  clears  the  danger  on  its  south  side. 

North  Rock,  with  one  foot  wat«r,  lies  N.  27°  W.  i  mile  from  the 
west  end  of  White  Horse  Island,  with  Adam  and  Barn  Islands  appar- 
ently just  touching,  and  has  deep  water  close  around. 

Casco  Island,  of  an  irregular  shape,  nearly  ^  mile  in  length,  lies 
8.  85°  W.  from  Campobello  lighthouse.  Its  southern  short  may  be  ap- 
proached to  200  yards,  but  within  it  to  the  westward  are  two  detached 
ledges,  nearly  equidistant  from  the  west  end  of  Casco  Island,  the  depth 
in  the  channel  between,  about  600  yards  across,  being  very  irregular. 

The  clearing  mark  to  pass  westward  of  these  ledges  is  the  renter  of 
White  Horse  Island,  seen  between  Spruce  and  Sandy  Islands  bearing 
N.  54°  E. 

Gull  Rock,  of  small  extent,  is  always  visible,  and  lies  800  yards  N. 
57°  B.  from  the  NE.  point  of  Gasco  Island.  This  rock  may  be  safely 
approached  to  100  yards,  but  the  NE.  point  of  Oasco  Island  should  not 
be  neared  within  300  yards,  in  order  to  avoid  a  rocky  ledge. 

Pope  Island,  about  300  yards  in  length,  lies  nearly  in  mid-channel 
between  the  shores  of  Campobello  and  Deer  Islands  and  nearly  a  mile 
from  Casco  Island.  In  this  latter  channel  is  Green  Island,  as  well  aA  a 
large  ledge  which  uncovers ;  these,  with  the  ledges  west  of  Casco  Island, 
contract  the  navigable  passage  to  about  400  yards,  and  thus  render  it 
difficult  for  a  stranger. 

Pope  Shoal,  a  small  detached  spot  with  11  feet  water,  lies  about  200 
yards  S.  64°  E.  of  the  south  point  of  Pope  Island.  A  safe  clearing 
mark  is  White  Horse  Island  open  to  the  southward  of  Casco  Island. 

Chocolate  Shoal,  with  10  feet  on  it,  is  of  small  extent,  with  deep 
water  close  around ;  it  lies  midway  between  the  north  point  of  Pope 
Island  and  the  south  point  of  Chocolate  Cove  in  Deer  Island.  Deer 
Point  open  west  of  Indian  Island  clear  of,  but  close  to,  this  danger  on 
its  western  side ;  whilst  the  west  ends  of  Bouen  and  Cherry  Islands  in 
line  leads  between  the  shoal  and  Pope  Island. 

Indian  Island  is  narrow  and  about  1^  miles  in  length,  with  an  eleva> 
tion  of  90  feet  near  its  north  end ;  it  is  partially  cleared  of  wood  and 
may  be  approached  to  300  yards  all  around.  The  island  lies  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  south  point  of  Deer  Island,  the  narrowest  part  of 
the  channel  between  the  two  islands  being  nearly  ^  mile. 

Vessels  to  or  from  Passamaquoddy  Bay  may  pass  on  either  side  of 
Indian  Island  in  deep  water. 


DEER    ISLAND — PORT    ST.    ANDREWS. 


31 


;b,  of  a  whitish 

B^hthouse;  and 

;h  trees,  White 

cou. 

•0  yards  off  the 

feuts  of  White 

e  Horse,  clears 
9uth  of  White 

mile  from  the 
I.slands  appar- 

iD  length,  lies 
ort  may  be  ap- 
I  two  detached 
and,  the  depth 
ry  irregular. 
)  the  renter  of 
lands  bearing 

J  800  yards  N. 

may  be  safely 

tnd  should  not 

ige. 

1  mid-channel 

nearly  a  mile 
id,  as  well  a»  a 

Oasco  Island, 
thus  render  it 

lies  about  200 
L  safe  clearing 
300  Island, 
mt,  with  deep 
point  of  Pope 
Island.  Deer 
;his  danger  on 
rry  Islands  in 

with  an  eleva> 

of  wood  and 

id  lies  on  the 

rowest  part  of 

either  side  of 


Deer  Island  is  GJ  miles  in  length  with  an  extreme  breadth  of  2^ 
miles;  it  is  thickly  wooded,  and  in  some  parts  attains  an  elevation  of 
300  feet.  From  Little  Harbor  on  its  eastern  shore  round  by  south  to 
Doyle  Passage  at  its  northern  end  the  shore  is  steep-to,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached to  300  yards,  with  the  exceptiou  of  the  northern  shore  of 
Nortli  Harbor,  where  a  small  cluster  of  rocks  lie  about  that  distance 
off  the  high-water  line;  but  the  remainder  of  the  coast,  viz,  from  Lit- 
tle Harbor  to  the  point  of  Deer  Island,  is  studded  with  dangers,  and  its 
navigation  should  on  no  account  be  attempted  by  strangers,  more 
especially  as  the  ai)proaches  are  also  difficult. 

Northwest  Harbor,  on  the  east  coast  of  Deer  Island,  is  a  narrow 
indentation  with  deep  water,  but  is  only  adapted  tor  small  vessels,  and 
even  these  should  moor,  as  the  distance  between  the  5-fathom  lines  is 
only  100  yards.  When  oft"  the  entrance  of  this  harbor  the  center  of 
White  Horse  Island  seen  between  Spectacle  Islands  beariugN.  81°  B. 
leads  into  the  anchorage. 

Little  Harbor  beiug  small  and  very  shallow  is  only  adapted  for  boats 
or  very  small  vessels. 

Clam  Cove,  on  the  west  side  of  Deer  Island,  affords  good  anchorage 
with  all  winds  excepting  from  south  to  west,  in  about  9  fathoms,  with 
Floss  Island  on  with  rocks  oft"  North  Poiut  of  the  cove,  and  about  equi- 
distant from  the  points  of  the  cove  and  the  small  islands  within. 

North  Harbor,  although  temporary  anchorage  may  be  obtained 
oft"  its  entrance  in  about  10  fathoms  midway  between  the  NB.  rocks 
and  the  SW.  poiut  of  the  harbor,  it  is  inferior  in  every  respect  when 
compared  with  Clam  Cove,  only  IJ  miles  distant. 

Port  St  Andrews.— The  town  of  St.  Andrews  is  situated  near  the 
extremity  of  a  promontory  forming  the  eastern  point  of  the  river  St. 
Croix.  The  whole  town  is  commanded  by  an  elevation  at  the  back  of 
the  town,  on  which  stands  the  fort  and  barracks. 

The  port  is  a  tidal  harbor,  formed  between  the  town  and  Navy  Isl- 
and, very  limited  in  extenfand  shallow,  the  deepest  water  being  from 
12  to  14  feet  at  low  water,  iu  a  space  not  exceeding  200  yards  in  extent; 
whilst  its  only  channel,  with  one  foot  water,  is  less  than  100  yards 
across  at  low  water. 

Oft"  the  south  point  of  the  promontory  on  which  the  town  is  built,  a 
rocky  ledge— which  dries— extends  to  the  southward  about  J  mile,  its 
outer  end  beiug  marked  by  a  wooden  beacon  which  shows  above  the 
high-water  level  from  4  to  5  feet ;  this  beacon  is  the  type  of  all  the 
others  in  the  vicinity  of  the  port. 

Navy  Island,  upwards  of  a  mile  in  length  and  with  an  extreme 
breadth  of  about  600  yards,  lies  within  J  mile  of  the  main  shore,  the  in- 
tervening space — with  the  exception  of  the  narrow  channel  alluded  to- 
being  occupied  by  flats  of  stones  and  bowlders,  which  dry  at  low  water 
extending  from  the  island  and  main  shore. 

The  south  end  of  the  island,  terminating  in  an  abrupt  white  cliff. 


I    ! 


-f    ? 


r   t 


\\ 


32 


PA88AMAQIJODDY    BAY. 


appears  like  a  wedge,  and  although  only  37  feet  high  it  becomes  a  con- 
spicuous object  when  approaching  from  the  southward  or  eastward. 
The  SW.  side  of  the  island  may  be  neared  to  300  yards,  b:M  from  its 
northern  point  a  spit  runs  out  and  is  nearly  connected  with  the  low- 
water  line  of  the  mainland  NVV.  of  the  town. 

Tongue  Shoal  is  the  outer  extremity  of  the  shoal  ground  extending, 
to  the  southeastward  of  St.  Andrews  Promontory,  and  at  low  water 
dries  J  mile,  its  highest  part  being  about  18  feet  above  low-water 
springs.  A  beacon  stands  near  its  outer  end,  from  which  the  east 
beacon  bears  N.  83° W.  ji  mile  and  the  south  spar  buoy  S.  73°  W. 
nearly'  a  mile. 

Northwest  Shoal.— This  danger,  about  300  yards  in  extent,  dries 
from  one  to  3  feet  at  low  water,  and  from  the  beacon  which  marks  its 
center  the  NW.  end  of  Navy  Island  bears  S.  72°  E.,  a  long  j^  mile,  and 
the  north  spar  buoy  is  in  line  with  the  Roman  Catholic  church. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Port  St.  Andrews  at 
10th,  50m.;  springs  rise  24  to  26  feet  and  neaps  20  to  22  feet. 

The  main  stream  of  flood  sets  from  between  Grand  Manan  Islands 
and  the  coast  of  Maine  in  a  direct  line  towards  Cape  Lepreau,  and  the 
ebb  in  a  contrary  direction ;  whilst  the  western  branch,  after  passing 
along  the  shore  of  Campobello,  is  divided  at  its  northern  point,  a  por- 
tion taking  an  easterly  trend,  whilst  the  remainder  passes  into  Passa- 
maquoddy  Bay  through  the  various  channels.  In  the  Main  or  Ship 
Channel  the  stream  attains  in  some  places  a  velocity  of  nearly  5  miles 
an  hour,  but  after  passing  Deer  Island  it  becomes  lost  in  the  wide  ex- 
panse of  the  bay,  and  is  scarcely  perceptible  until  it  enters  the  Hvpt 
St.  Croix,  where  it  runs  about  2  miles  an  hour,  and  increases  its  rate 
in  the  branch  of  the  river  leading  to  St.  Stephen  to  between  3  and  4 
knots. 

Directions.— The  usual  difficulties  attending  navigation  are  much 
increased  in  the  Bay  of  Pundy,  where  the  mariner  must  expect  to  en- 
counter  frequent  fogs  of  long  duration,  rapid  and  uncertain  tides,  and 
experience  a  difficulty  in  obtaining  anchorage  on  account  of  the  depth 
of  water;  these  causes  render  the  most  unremitting  attention,  neces- 
sary  when  frequenting  this  locality,  in  order  to  avoid  the  numerous 
dangers  which  mark  the  approaches  to  the  bay. 

Vessels  bound  to  ports  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  bay  are  recom- 
mended to  use  the  channel  west  of  Grand  Manan  Island  rather  than 
the  passage  on  the  eastern  shore,  for  the  coast  of  Manan  is  not  only 
bold  and  without  off-lying  dangers,  but  during  the  summer  months  the 
atmosphere  is  goerally  clear  on  the  United  States  shore,  whilst  the 
coast  of  Nova  Scotia  and  the  greater  part  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  are 
enveloped  in  fog. 

Vessels  bound  to  Passamaquoddy  Bay,  after  passing  through  the 
Grand  Manan  Channel,  should  keep  a  .uoderatc.  distance  from  the  east- 
ern shore  of  Campobello  Island,  and  after  rounding  the  northern  point 


i  I 


-'"m''^*miv'mii^umAm:^~miSim 


DIRECTIONS — CHAMCOOK    HARBOR. 


33 


iccomes  a  coii- 
i  or  eastward. 
,  b^it  from  its 
with  tbe  low- 

lul  extending, 
at  low  water 
)ve  low-water 
hicli  tbe  east 
oy  S.  730  W. 

extent,  dries 
[icb  marks  its 
i]g  ^  mile,  and 
burch. 

t.  Andrews  at 
feet. 

lauan  Islands 
)reau,  and  tbe 
after  passing 
I  point,  a  por- 
es into  Passa- 
Main  or  Sbip 
learly  5  miles 

tbe  wide  ex- 
ters  tlip  rivPT 
Bases  its  rate 
ween  3  and  4 

ion  are  much 
expect  to  en- 
ain  tides,  and 
of  tbe  depth 
ention.  neces- 
trbe  numerous 

ay  are  recom- 
1  rather  than 
n  is  not  only 
)r  months  the 
•e,  whilst  tbe 
)f  Fundy  are 

through  Ihe 
rom  the  east- 
ortbern  point 


steer  to  pass  midway  between  the  western  shore  of  tbe  islands  and 
Gasco,  Pope,  and  Indian  Islands,  taking  care  on  approaching  Pope 
Island  to  keep  White  Horse  !••'  jd  open  east  of  Casco  Island,  in  order 
to  avoid  Pope  Shoal. 

Having  rounded  Cherry  Island,  steer  for  a  mid-channel  course  be- 
tween Deer  Point  and  Dog  Island,  iiud  after  passing  Kendall  Head,  tbe 
NE.  point  of  Moose  Island,  either  borrow  on  the  Deer  Island  shore  or 
bring  tbe  English  redoubt  over  Eastport  in  line  with  Kendall  (lead  in 
order  to  clear  Floss  Ledge;  a  closer  mark  to  clear  tbe  same  ledge  is 
Point  Pleasant  Cburch,  apparently  touching  the  eastern  tangent  of 
Pleasant  Island.  Beyond  this  there  are  no  dangers  until  approach- 
ing Navy  Island,  off  Port  St.  Andrews;  and  in  case  of  necessity  good 
anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  any  part  of  Passamaquoddy  Bay,  in 
muddy  bottom. 

The  best  anchorage  outside  Port  St.  Andrews  is  to  tbe  NW.  of  Navy 
Island,  in  about  10  fathoms,  clay,  with  the  block  house  on  Joe  Point 
bearing  N.  2°  W.  and  the  NW.  beacon  in  line  with  the  north  eud  of 
Navy  Island  S.  69°  E.  When  approaching  the  NW.  shoal  keep  the 
south  point  of  Navy  Island  well  open  to  the  SW.  shore  of  the  island 
until  the  NW.  beacon  is  in  line  with  the  Kirk  spire  bearing  N.  51°  E.^ 
or  do  not  shoal  less  than  10  fathoms. 

River  St  Croix. — Abreast  Joe  Point  the  river  is  nearly  a  mile  across, 
and  thence  it  runs  iu  a  N.  30°  W.  direction  about  7  miles,  where  it  turns 
abrni^tly  to  the  westward,  leading  to  Calais. 

Dochet  Island  Shoal  extends  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of 
Dochet  Island.  Two  red-spar  beacons  mark  this  danger,  tbe  one  on  its 
southern  extremity  and  tbe  other  off  the  east  end  of  Dochet  Island ; 
both  beacons  should  be  left  to  the  westward. 

As  vessels  navigating  the  river  St.  Croix  should  always  be  in  charge 
of  a  pilot,  it  is  unnecessary  to  describe  its  shores  in  detail. 

Chamcook  Harbor  lies  on  the  eastern  side  uf  the  promontory  on 
which  the  town  of  St.  Andrews  stands,  and  is  formed  between  Minister 
Island  and  the  mainland.  Tbe  entrance  on  the  north  side  of  tbe  island, 
though  marked  by  buoys,  is  only  about  150  yards  broad  between  the 
rocky  ledges  on  either  side  of  the  entrance ;  and  having  as  little  as  9 
feet  wate  i  only  available  for  vessels  of  large  draft  at  a  certain  time 
of  tide,  although  when  inside  there  is  good  anchorage  in  a  limited  space 
in  7  to  8  fathoms. 

Dock. — At  the  head  of  an  inlet  on  the  north  side  of  the  harbor  is  a 
wet  dock  sufficiently  large  to  admit  vessels  of  31  feet  beam,  and  a  vessel 
drawing  16  feet  may  pass  over  the  sill  of  the  dock. 

Hardwood  and  Hospital  Islands  lie  to  the  eastward  of  Cham- 
cook  Harbor  and  off  the  entrance  to  Bocabec  Bay ;  togtuiher  they 
occupy  a  mile  in  length  nearly  east  and  west,  and  within  them  on  their 
northern  si<le  good  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  about  6  fathoms,  with 
the  south  end  of  the  Minister  Island  in  line  with  tbe  east  end  of  Hos- 
5314 3 


34 


BAY  OP  FUNDY — NORTH  C0A8T, 


i  •' 


il 


pital   iHlaiid,  and  iMiJic  Bluff  api>arently  touching  the  north  end  of 
Hardwood  Island. 

At  low  water  a  shoal  extends  250  yards  NE.  from  the  light-house  on 
Mijic  Bluff. 

In  the  bays  and  amongst  the  islands  anchorage  is  to  be  found,  but  this 
locality  is  only  frequented  by  vessels  taking  in  cargoes,  and  on  such 
occ  4Hioiis  they  should  be  under  the  charge  of  a  native  pilot. 

L'Etang  Hnrbor  aff.)rd8  most  excellent  anchorage  under  all  circuui. 
stances;  it  has  two  entrances,  and  area  sufficiently  large  to  accommo- 
date a  large  number  of  vessels  and  is  always  open  during  the  winter 
months,  though  loose  ice  is  occasionally  to  be  met  with  in  the  narrows, 
but  never  in  sufficient  quantities  to  prevent  ingress  or  fjgress. 

The  depth  of  water  in  L'Etang  Harbor— as  well  as  in  the  adjoining 
anchorage  known  as  Bliss  Harbor— is  sufflciontforves'^els  of  the  great- 
est draft,  whilst  the  tenacity  of  the  holding  ground  is  unusually  great. 
As  the  rise  and  fail  of  tide  is  great  vessels  should  moor  slack.  The  town 
stands  on  a  tongue  of  land  known  as  L'Etang  peninsula  ;  supplies  can 
not  be  obtained,  the  principal  trade  being  in  making  casks  for  fish. 

Bliss  Island,  off  the  entrance  of  L'Etang  Harbor,  is  IJ  miles  in 
length,  about  50  feet  high,  and  very  irregular  in  outline  ;  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  island,  between  it  and  Cailitt' Island,  is  Bliss  Harbor,  a  safe 
and  commodious  anchorage,  where  vessels  may  ride  securely  with  every 
wind. 

Off"  the  western  end  of  Bliss  Island  a  rocky  tongue  extends  300  yards 
from  the  shore,  and  off  its  northern  end  very  shoal  water  runs  off"  to 
nearly  the  same  distance. 

Mink  Island,  a  small  rocky  islet  about  70  yards  in  extent  and  20  feet 
high,  lies  about  200  yards  off  the  NE.  end  of  Bliss  Island ;  it  is  moder- 
ately steep-to  on  its  northern  side,  but  should  not  be  approached  nearer 
than  200  yards  on  its  eastern  side. 

Mare  Rock,  which  dries  at  half  tide,  lies  400  yards  off  the  eastern 
shore  of  Bliss  Island,  and  is  all  but  connected  with  the  rocky  spur 
extending  to  the  8E.  of  Mink  Island. 

Colt  Rock  also  uncovers  at  half  tide,  and  lies  200  yards  south  of 
the  Mare  Rock,  and  about  400  yards  from  Bliss  Island.  The  Colt  and 
Mare  Rocks  are  both  steep-to  on  their  eastern  sides;  there  is  no  avail- 
able passage  within  them  to  the  westward. 

Green  Island,  a  small  islet  about  50  yards  in  extent  and  about  20 
feet  high,  stands  near  the  extremity  of  a  rocky  ledge  extending  from 
the  SE,  side  of  Bliss  Island,  and  forms  an  excellent  mark  tor  clear- 
ing  the  ledge  on  which  it  stands ;  it  should  not  be  passed  within  200 
yards  on  its  eastern  side. 

Pain  Island,  on  the  NW.  side  of  the  western  entrance  into  Bliss  har- 
bor, is  about  400  yards  in  extent,  109  feet  high,  and  very  steep-to  on  its 
Bontheru  side. 

Man-of-War  Rock.— The  only  danger  to  be  avoided  when  using  the 
western  entrance  is  an  extensive  ledge  400  yards  in  length,  and  its 


L'ETANO    HARBOK. 


S5 


B  north  eiul  of 

•  liglit-liouae  ou 

!  found,  but  this 
N,  and  on  such 
|)ilot. 

nder  all  circum- 
[;e  to  accouuno- 
ing  the  winter 
in  the  narrows, 
igress. 

I  the  adjoining 
els  of  the  great- 
musually  great, 
lack.  The  town 
I. ;  supplies  can 
sks  for  fish, 
is  1^  miles  in 
i ;  to  the  north- 
s  Harbor,  a  safe 
irely  with  every 

tends  300  yards 
ter  runs  ott'  to 

tent  and  20  feet 
d ;  it  is  moder- 
>roached  nearer 

off  the  eastern 
he  rocky  spur 

yards  south  of 
The  Colt  and 
ere  is  no  avail - 

and  about  20 
extending  from 
mark  tor  clear- 
sed  within  200 

into  Bliss  har- 
steep-to  on  its 

rhen  using  the 
length,  and  its 


highest  part,  which  uncovers  at  half-tide,  lies  one-third  of  the  way 
acro8H  from  Maii-of-War  Island  to  liliss  Island ;  this  ledge  narrows  the 
main  channel  on  Bliss  Island  side  to  about  200  yards,  and  great  pre- 
caution is  necessary  when  this  passage  is  taken  by  a  stranger,  as  the 
leading  marks  through  are  not  very  direct.  The  center  of  Mink  Island 
apparently  touching  the  northwestern  point  of  Bliss  Island  leads  through 
in  mid-obannel,  and  by  keepingWhite  Horse  Island  shut  in  by  theliigh- 
water  mark  of  Bliss  Island  leads  clear  of  the  ledge ;  the  Bliss  Island 
shore  may  be  ajjproached  close- to. 

There  is  a  passage  carrying  4  fathoms  to  the  northward  of  Man-of- 
War  Island  and  Boat  Bock  which  may  be  used  by  vessels  of  light 
draft,  and  a  narrow  channel  with  3^  fathoms  between  Man-of-War 
Island  and  Rock.  The  south  2)oint  of  Adam  Island,  seen  midway  be- 
tween the  high  water  of  the  Pain  Island  and  the  islet  next  to  the  NE., 
leads  through  this  latter  channel. 

Pea  Island,  nearly  200  yards  in  length  and  about  25  feet  high,  lies 
close  off  a  peninsula  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  eastern  entrance  into 
L'Etang  harbor ;  rocks  dry  off  to  the  SW.  100  yards,  and  at  the  dis- 
tance of  250  yards  SE.  of  the  island  and  the  same  distance  from  the 
shore  is  an  isolated  low-water  rock. 

Halfoide  Rock  is  very  small,  and  lies  250  yards  off  the  pitch  of 
Deadman  Head ;  a  wide  clearing  mark  is  the  western  end  of  McCann 
Island  just  open  of  Pea  Island.    It  is  marked  by  a  black,  spar  buf'y. 

Roaring  Bnll,  a  cluster  of  low-water  rouks  which  just  cover,  lie  to 
the  NW.  of  Pea  Island  nearly  400  yards,  and  narrow  the  channel  of  the 
eastern  entrance  between  them  and  Mare  Bock  to  about  |  mile ;  the 
wharves  at  the  west  end  of  L'Etang  harborjust  insight  west  of  L'Etang 
Head  clears  Roaring  Bull  cluster  on  their  western  side. 

Ice. — During  the  depth  of  severe  winters  ice  has  been  known  to  ex- 
tend down  the  L'Etang  River  as  far  as  the  south  end  of  the  peninsula, 
bat  the  broail  part  of  the  harbor  is  never  frozen,  nor  is  Bliss  harbor. 

Back  Bay  is  an  indentation  formed  between  the  west  side  of  Cailiff 
Island  and  the  main  shore,  but  is  not  adnpted  for  anchorage  save  of  a 
temporary  nature. 

Caili£f  Rocks,  situated  just  within  the  entrance  of  Back  Bay,  about 
one-third  of  the  way  across  from  the  western  shore,  cover  at  half  dide, 
are  detached  and  about  300  yards  in  extent.  The  west  end  of  Bliss 
Island  in  line  with  the  south  point  of  Pain  Island  leads  southward,  and 
the  east  end  of  Barn  Island  bearing  S.  25°  W.  leads  westward  of  Cailiff 
Bocks. 

Black  Bay  is  an  indentation  between  Pea  Point  and  L'Etang  Head, 
and  is  moderately  steep-to  on  its  northern  shore,  but  rocky  spurs  dry 
out  SOOyards  from  the  southern  shore.  Half  a  mile  within  the  entrance, 
and  in  the  center  of  the  bay,  are  two  small  rocks  which  dry  at  three- 
quarters  ebb,  and  vessels  seeking  a  temporary  r^nchorage  should  avoid 
approaching  too  near  them. 


I 


fi: 


I  i 


I 

I  5 


f  '^ 


86 


BAY  OF  FUNDT — NORTH  COAST 


Flea  and  Man-of-War  Islauds  apparently  all  but  touching  lead  into 
the  bay  clear  of  danger,  and  wben  theSE.  point  of  Bliss  Island  appears 
to  toueii  tliesniall  islet  off  tb«  south  point  of  Black  Bay  anchor  in  about 
6  fatboins. 

Deadman  Bay,  on  the  eastern  side  of  L'EtanK  harbor,  is  o.  en  to  the 
SW.,  and  is  only  adapted  for  temporary  anchorage  with  northerly  or 
easterly  winds. 

Directions.— Western  entrance.— Being  to  the  NE.  of  White  Horse 
Island,  do  not  shut  in  Mascabin  Point  with  Pain  Island  until  the  south 
end  of  McCann  Island  is  in  lino  with  the  N\V.  high-water  mark  of 
Bliss  Island,  in  order  to  avoid  the  rocky  spur  off  the  western  point  of 
the  latter,  and  then  steer  for  Man-of-War  Island  until  the  middle  of 
Mink  Island  is  in  line  with  the  NW.  point  of  Bliss  Island,  bearing  N. 
53°  E.,  thence  proceed  with  these  marks  in  line  nearly  in  mid-channel 
south  of  Man-of-War  Rock,  which  will  have  been  passed  when  Boat 
Rock  is  seen  open  eastward  of  Man-of-War  Island. 

After  passing  Manof-War  Rock  anchorage  may  be  selected  either 
on  the  north  or  south  sides  of  Bliss  Harbor,  as  moat  convenient,  in 
order  to  be  beyond  the  influence  of  the  tides.  If  on  north  side,  a  good 
position  is  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  with  Mink  Island  in  line  with  the  west 
end  of  Pea  Island  and  the  south  end  of  Pain  Island  just  shut  in  behind 
the  north  end  of  Man  of- War  Island.  On  the  south  side,  select  a  berth 
about  mid-channel  at  the  entrance  of  Fisherman  Cove,  in  about  8 
fathoms,  with  Pain  Island  just  in  line  with,  or  shut  in  by,  the  west 
point  of  the  cove. 

If  bound  to  L'Etang  Harbor,  after  passing  Man-of-War  Rock,  steer 
for  Flea  Island  until  Pain  and  Man-of-War  Islands  are  apparently 
touching,  and  with  these  marks  in  line  proceed  between  Flea  Island 
and  the  Rocky  shoal  off  the  north  end  of  Bliss  Island.  McCanu  Island 
may  be  approached  close-to  on  the  southern  and  eastern  aides,  but  care 
must  be  taken  to  avoid  a  low- water  rock  off  its  NE.  shore,  and  this  may 
be  done  by  borrowing  on  L'Etang  Head,  which  is  steep-to. 

After  passing  this  latter  danger  select  an  anchorage  where  conven- 
ient; a  good  position  is  about  mid-channel  abreast  Little  Sturgeon 
Cove,  care  being  taken  to  keep  clear  of  a  rocky  patch  200  yards  off  the 
northern  shore. 

Eastern  Entrance.— Bring  Jail  Island,  which  lies  oft"  the  town,  in 
line  with  the  east  end  of  McCann  Island,  bearing  N.  29°  W. ;  this  mark 
will  lead  through  in  mid-channel  clear  of  all  dangers  up  to  McCann 
Island,  after  which  proceed  as  before  directed;  or  bring  the  wharfs  at 
the  west  end  of  the  town  of  L'Etang  Head,  bearing  N.  23°  W.,  and 
these  marks  will  alao  lead  through  in  deep  water  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  channel  up  to  L'Etang  Head;  after  which  proceed  to  the  anchorage 
as  previously  directed. 

If  wishing  to  anchor  in  Bliss  Harbor,  steer  with  either  of  the  forego- 
ing markf^  on,  and  when  Pain  Island  is  seen  open  north  of  Mink  Island 


HEAVER    HARUOIt — MACES    HAY. 


37 


h\u^^  lead  into 
Hlaiid  appears 
iiuhor  in  about 

,  is  (>,  iMi  to  the 
li  northerly  or 

)f  White  Horse 
until  the  Houth 
water  mark  of 
•stern  point  of 
the  middle  of 
ud,  bearing  N. 
in  mid-chaunel 
sed  when  Boat 

selected  either 
convenient,  in 
•th  side,  a  good 
)  with  the  west 
shut  in  behind 
,  select  a  berth 
,6,  in  about  8 
1  by,  the  west 

ar  Bock,  steer 
ire  apparently 
Flea  Island 
ilcCanu  Island 
sides,  but  care 
,  and  this  may 
o. 

wliere  conven- 
ttle  Sturgeon 
0  yards  off  the 

the  town,  in 
.V. ;  this  mark 
ip  to  McOann 

the  wharfs  at 

23°  W.,  and 

jastern  side  of 

the  anchorage 

of  the  forego- 
f  Mink  Island 


steer  for  Flea  Island  until  Pain  and  Manof-War  Islands  are  appar- 
ently toucliing,  bearinj^  S.  M^  W.;  thenue  steer  with  these  niark.s  on, 
and  select  an  anchoni;;e  where  convenient  according  to  previous  direc- 
tions. 

Beaver  Harbor,  i  of  a  mile  broad  between  the  entrance  points  and 
upwards  of  a  mile  «leep,  is  open  to  the  southward,  and  can  not  be 
deemed  safe  during  strong  wituls  from  that  cpiarter.  Vessels  should 
pass  in  and  anchor  on  the  western  shore,  in  order  to  avoid  a  patch  with 
2^  fathoms  near  the  center  of  the  harbor.  Small  vessels  may  anchor 
in  a  bay  on  the  western  side  of  the  harbor  opposite  the  village  in  2^ 
fathoms  clay,  where  they  will  be  almost  landlocked. 

The  vicinity  of  Bliss  and  L'Etang  Harbors  will  prevent  Beaver  Har- 
bor being  frequented,  save  as  a  place  of  temporary  anchorage. 

Anchorage. — There  is  guod  anchorage  betwv^eu  the  lighthouse  and 
a  buoy,  bearing  N.  58°  E.  from  it. 

Maces  Bay  is  an  extensive  bight,  lying  between  Seeley  Point  and 
Poiut  Lepreau,  the  latter  being  distant  from  the  former  nearly  8  miles 
8.  85°  B.,  and  from  the  line  between  the  two  entrance  points  the  bay 
is  nearly  5  miles  deei>,  the  coast  line  being  broken  into  a  series  of 
smaller  indentations,  all  of  which  afford  anchorage  for  vessels  taking 
in  cargo,  but  only  during  flue  weather,  as  the  entire  bay,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  Seeley  Cove,  on  its  western  side,  is  exposed  to  the  full  force  of 
southerly  and  southwesterly  winds. 

Seeley  Cove. — The  coast  between  Beaver  Harbor  and  Seeley  Point 
may  bid  safely  approached  to  a  distance  of  400  yards.  Seeley  Point  may 
also  be  rounded  close  to,  and  a  good  anchorage  from  westerly  and  south- 
westerly winds  may  be  obtained  on  the  south  side  of  the  cove  in  about 
5  fathoms.  Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  northern  point  of  the  cove, 
from  n'hence  low-water  rocks  extend  nearly  J  of  a  mile  in  a  southerly 
direction. 

Red  Head,  a  clitfy  wooded  point  on  the  western  side  of  Maces  Bay, 
lies  N.  01°  B.  3  miles  from  Seeley  Point,  the  intervening  coast  being 
irregular,  and,  in  addition  to  Seeley  Cove,  forming  several  small  inden- 
tations; the  cove  uex*;  west  from  the  head  being  clear  of  danger,  with 
a  moderate  depth  of  w.iter,  is  well  adapted  for  temporary  anchorage. 

Mink  Bay,  on  the  vestern  side  of  Maces  Bay,  lies  between  lied 
Head  and  Cranberry  Point,  and  atfords  temporary  anchorage  on  the 
NE.  and  NVV.  sides  of  Mink  Island. 

Pope  Logan  Islet,  4  "I'l^  iQ  length  and  65  feet  high,  lies  to  the 
eastward  of  Hed  Head,  and  from  its  northern  poiut  a  rocky  ledge  ex- 
tends 300  yards,  leaving  a  channel  of  the  same  breadth  with  2  fathoms 
water  between  it  and  the  lower  water  of  the  mainland.  From  the  south 
point  a  rocky  tongue  extends  to  the  SW.  nearly  in  the  direction  of  Red 
Head. 

Mink  Ledge,  an  extensive  rocky  patch  to  the  eastward  of  the  above 
islet,  has  a  small  portion  on  its  eastern  end  which  never  covers,  and 


0»  BAY  OF  FUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 

thus  forms  a  natural  beacou ;  it  lies  with  the  southern  point  of  Pope 
Islet  in  line  with  the  tangent  of  Red  Head,  and  from  it  a  series  of  rocky 
patches  extend  ^  luile  in  aN.  43°  W.  direction. 

Mink  Island,  about  J  mile  across  and  104  feet  high,  lies  i  mile  to  the 
westward  of  Cranberry  Point  and  the  same  distance  from  the  shore  of 
Mink  Bay,  the  greatest  depth  in  the  latter  channel  being  3  fathoms. 
Outside  the  island  a  cluster  of  detached  shoals  extend  J  mile  to  the 
southward,  whilst  off  its  western  point  there  is  a  detached  ledge,  which 
dries  at  the  distance  of  J  mile  in  the  direction  of  Mink  Ledge. 

Lepreau  Bay,  on  the  northeastern  side  of  Maces  Bay,  lies  between 
Cranberry  Point  and  the  shore  north  of  Point  Lepreau,  and  runs  in 
to  the  northward  to  a  shallow  bight,  where  small  vessels  occasionally 
anchor  beyond  the  reach  of  any  very  heavy  sea.  The  only  danger  on 
the  western  sideof  the  bay  is  off  Cranberry  Point,  from  whence  a  clus- 
ter of  low-water  and  sunken  rocks  extend  out  300  yards. 

The  Brothers  are  two  small  islets  connected  at  low  water,  and  form 
the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  of  Lepreau  Bay.  The  larger  island  is 
78  feet  high,  and  is  distant  from  the  nearest  part  of  Cranberry  Point  J 
mile. 

Lepreau  Ledges  extend  from  about  a  mile  below  Lepreau  Basin  to 
the  SW.  for  a  distance  of  2  miles,  and  terminate  in  a  point,  which  dries 
18  feet  at  low  water,  at  a  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  eastern  shore  of 
Maces  Bay.  A  good  clearing  mark  for  all  the  dangers  on  the  eastern 
side  of  the  bay  is  the  tangent  of  Lepreau  Bay,  opposite  Stay  Point, 
seen  just  open  west  of  the  Brothers. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Lepreau  Bay,  llh.  18m.; 
springs  rise  24J  feet,  neaps  21  feet. 

Directions.— Vessels  from  the  westward  intending  to  use  any  of  the 
anchorages  in  Maces  Bay  should  avoid  shutting  in  the  northern  point 
of  Seeley  Cove  with  Red  Head  until  past  Pope  Logan  Islet,  and  (If 
making  for  the  western  side  of  Mink  Bay)  when  Notch  Hill  bears  N.  2°  B. 
steer  for  it,  and  by  so  doing  the  dangers  inside  Mink  Ledge  and  off 
Mink  Island  will  be  avoided,  and  an  anchorage  may  be  selected  in 
about  5  fathoms,  with  Point  Lepreau  shut  in  by  Mink  Island,  or  oft' 
the  western  bight  in  3  fathoms,  with  Red  Head  midway  between  Pope 
Logan  Islet  and  the  western  shore,  and  Cranberry  Point  just  shut  in  by 
the  south  end  of  Mink  Island. 

If  intending  to  anchor  on  the  NE.  side  of  Mink  Island  continue  to 
keep  the  north  point  of  Seeley  Cove  just  opt'ii  of  Red  Head  until  Notch 
Hill  is  seen  over  the  east  end  of  Mink  Island,  when  all  the  shoal  water 
off  Mink  Island  will  have  been  cleared;  when  the  sawmill  bears 
north,  steer  for  it,  and  anchor  in  about  5  fathoms,  with  Red  Head 
shut  in  by  Mink  Island  or  in  3J  fathoms,  with  Cranberry  Point  in  line 
with  the  middle  of  the  larger  of  the  Brothers,  and  the  middle  of  Pope 
Logan  Island  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  Mink  Island. 

If  making  for  Lepreau  Bay,  continue  with  the  north  point  of  Seeley 


MACES  BAY MUSQUASH  HARBOR. 


39 


a  point  of  Pope 
1  series  of  rocky 

ies  ^  mile  to  the 
om  the  shore  of 
oing  3  fathomsi. 
d  i  mile  to  the 
led  ledge,  which 
Ledge. 

ay,  lies  between 
>aa,  and  runs  in 
els  occasionally 
only  danger  on 
1  whence  a  olus- 
s. 

water,  and  form 
larger  island  is 
an  berry  Point  J 

epreau  Basin  to 
»int,  which  dries 
eastern  shore  of 
}  on  the  eastern 
jite  Stay  Point, 

Bay,  lib.  18m.; 

use  any  of  t  he 
northern  point 

I  Islet,  and  (if 

II  bears  N.  2°  E. 
Ledge  and  off 
be  selected  in 

k  Island,  or  off 
'  between  Pope 
just  shut  in  by 

ind  continue  to 
jad  until  Notch 
;he  shoal  water 
sawmill  bears 
ith  Red  Head 
y  Point  in  line 
niddie  of  Pope 

point  of  Seeley 


Cove  just  open  of  Red  Head  until  Notch  Hill  comes  over  the  east  end 
of  Mink  Island,  thence  steer  for  Stay  Point,  and  when  Cranberry  Point 
and  the  north  end  of  Mink  Island  are  in  line  the  shoal  ground  off  the 
former  will  have  been  passed,  and  a  course  should  be  steered  into  the 
bay,  bearing  in  mind  that  the  square  house  at  the  head  of  the  bay  open 
west  of  Stay  Point  clears  Hunter's  Patch,  southward  of  Stay  Point, 
after  which  anchorage  may  be  selected  where  most  convenient  in  about 
2^  fathoms. 

A  temporary  anchorage  for  large  vessels  may  be  obtained  in  about  5 
fatho.nis,  with  the  north  end  of  the  larger  Brother  bearing  S.  33°  W., 
and  Cranberry  Point  in  line  with  the  south  end  of  Mink  Island. 

Dipper  Harbor  affords  good  shelter  for  small  vessels,  with  winds 
from  S\V.  round  by  north  to  cast;  vessels  should  anchor  rather  on  the 
western  shore,  as  some  ledges  extend  off"  the  eastern  side. 

Plumper  Rock,  lies  about  midway  between  Point  Lepreau  and  Dip- 
per Harbor,  but  close  inshore,  and  m.iy  be  avoided  by  keeping  J  mile, 
off  shore. 

Little  Dipper  Harbor  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot,  as 
there  are  numerous  dangers  to  be  avoided.  The  place  is  only  adapted 
for  small  craft. 

Chance  Harbor  is  about  J  mile  broad  at  the  entrance,  by  about  a 
mile  in  depth  in  a  northerly  direction,  and  is  easy  of  access.  A  flat 
rock,  which  dries  at  low  water,  lies  lOU  yards  east  of  the  western  point, 
and  may  be  cleared  on  its  northern  side  by  keeping  Beldon  house  (near 
the  beach  at  the  head  of  the  cove)  open  north  of  the  south  point  of 
Beldon  Cove.  Further  in,  uea-ly  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor,  there  is 
another  rock,  which  dries  at  half  tide.  Beldon  house  seen  open  south 
of  the  north  point  of  the  cove  leads  south  of  this  rock. 

The  best  anchorage  for  small  vessels  is,  in  about  2J  or  3  fathoms,  in 
Beldon  cove;  but  this  harbor,  like  the  two  former,  affords  but  little 
shelter  from  winds  from  SE.  round  by  south  to  SVV. 

Little  Chance  Harbor  is  a  convenient  place  for  small  vessels  to  an- 
chor when  waiting  tor  the  tide,  but  affords  no  shelter  whatever  with 
the  wind  between  SE.  and  SW.  It  is  about  J  mile  wide  between  the 
points  of  entrance,  and  about  H  mile  broad  in  a  northerly  direction. 
The  western  point  of  entrance  should  not  be  approached  on  its  eastern 
side  nearer  than  400  yards,  but  the  eastern  point  may  be  rounded  at 
200  yards  distance. 

Little  Musquash  Harbor,  in  all  respects,  is  similar  in  character  to 
and  adapted  to  answer  the  same  purpose  as  Little  Chance  Harbor.  The 
entrance  is  about  ^  mile  broad ;  but  a  mid-channel  position  should  be 
maintained,  as  rocks  dry  off  from  either  shore  a  considerable  distance 
to    which  no  good  clearing  marks  can  be  given. 

Musquash  Harbor,  situated  2  miles  east  of  Little  Musquash  Har- 
bor, is  nearly  a  mile  broad  at  the  entrance,  and  about  2  miles  deep, 
though  but  little  of  this  space  is  available  for  vessels  of  moderate 
draft. 


40 


BAY  OP  FUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 


Hi 


Musquash  Head,  on  its  eastern  side,  is  steep-to  and  80  feet  high ; 
but  Western  Head,  which  attains  an  elevation  of  139  feet,  has  a  small 
detached  rock,  with  only  3  feet  of  water,  about  100  yards  from  its 
northern  horn.  Within  this  horn,  to  the  westward  about  400  yards,  a 
rocky  spur  extends  in  a  northeasterly  direction  for  the  distance  of  300 
yards. 

This  harbor  should  be  carefully  avoided  by  large  vessels,  excepting 
as  a  temporary  anchorage,  though  vessels  in  charge  of  a  pilot  might  in 
case  of  necessity  obtain  shelter  in  the  5-fathom  hole,  about  2i  miles  up 
the  river. 

Split  Rock,  nearly  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Musquash  Harbor,  is  35 
feet  high. 

The  Coast — From  Split  Rock  to  Negro  Head  the  coast  is  bold,  with 
higli  rocky  clifts  covered  with  wood;  and  from  Negro  Head  the  laud 
to  (he  northward  forms  a  bay,  in  which  there  is  good  anchorage  for  a 
small  craft  or  vessels  waiting  tide.  Partridge  Island  light-house  is  dis- 
tant  5J  miles  N.  47°  E.  from  Negro  Head ;  and  by  steering  on  that 
course  from  a  small  offing  off  the  head  a  vessel  will  pass  outside  Meog- 
enes  Islands,  which  lie  midway  between  and  clear  of  danger. 

Whistling  buoy.— A  black  whistling  buoy  is  moored  in  about  16 
fathoms  off  Black  Point,  with  Partridge  Island  light  bearing  N.  26o  W., 
distant  3^  miles. 

St.  John  Harbor  lies  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  into  which  falls  St. 
John  River,  the  largest  in  New  Brunswick.  The  bay— upwards  of  3 
miles  deep—lies  between  Meogenes  Island  and  Mispeck  Point,  the  latter, 
being  distant  from  the  former  5  miles  N.  87°  E.  The  harbor  is  safer, 
commodious,  and  always  accessible;  and  in  consequence  of  the  great 
rise  and  fall  of  tide,  added  to  the  velocity  of  the  stream,  its  navigation  • 
even  during  the  winter  months  is  never  impeded  by  ice. 

The  soundings  for  several  miles  to  the  southward  of  Partridge  Is- 
land range  from  7  to  15  fathoms,  and  the  bottom  being  muddy  is  ad- 
minibly  adapted  for  anchoring  whilst  waiting  for  the  tide.  On  the  bar 
of  the  main  channel,  east  of  Partridge  Island,  the  depth  is  about  2^ 
fathoms ;  but  within  the  harbor  off  the  city  there  is  anchorage  in  from 
7  to  20  fathoms. 

A  breakwater  runs  out  in  an  easterly  direction  from  the  south  end  of 
the  city  peninsula  for  the  purpose  of  protecting  the  harbor  from  the 
violence  of  the  sea  during  the  prevalence  of  southerly  gales. 

The  city  of  St.  John,  the  most  important  in— though  not  the  capital  of 

—New  Bruuswick,contains  a  population  of  about  50,000,  and  is  regularly 
laid  out  on  the  rugged  and  uneven  ground  of  a  rocky  peninsula  project- 
ing into  the  harbor  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  St.  John,  and  from  the 
sea  presents  an  imposing  appearance. 

On  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  stands  the  town  of  Carletou 
included  in  tlie  municipality;  and  a  little  more  than  a  mile  above  the 
city  are  the  falls,  a  narrow  channel  about  80  yards  wide  by  about  400 


ST.    JOHN    HARBOR. 


41 


80  feet  high; 
3t,  has  a  small 
artls  from  its 
ut  400  yards,  a 
listauce  of  3U0 

els,  excepting 
pilot  might  iu 
ut  2J  miles  up 

Harbor,  is  35 

It  is  bold,  with 
[  ead  the  laud 
ichorage  for  a 
t-bouse  is  dis- 
ering  on  that 
outside  Meog- 
iger. 

d  in  about  16 
iug  N.  260  W., 

hich  falls  St. 
upwards  of  3 
int,  the  latter, 
vrbor  is  safer, 
e  of  the  great 
its  navigation  - 

Partridge  Is- 
muddy  is  ad- 
I.  On  the  bar 
b  is  about  2^ 
9rage  in  from 

i  south  end  of 

bor  from  the 

es. 

the  capital  of 

d  is  regularly 

isula  project- 

and  from  the 

1  of  Garletou 
le  above  the 
>y  about  400 


in  length,  where  at  low  water  the  level  of  the  river  water  is  from  11  to 
15  feet  above  the  sea,  and,  as  the  ordinary  tides  flow  from  23  to  27  feet, 
tho  sea  level  at  high  water  is  from  8  to  12  feet  higher  than  the  waters 
of  the  river. 

Thus  there  are  two  falls  during  every  tide,  viz,  one  outward  and  one  in- 
ward, and  vessels  can  only  pass  when  the  waters  of  the  ocean  and  the 
ri verare  on  a  level,and  this  occurs  only  for  the  space  of  about  10  minutes 
during  each  ebb  and  flow  of  the  tide;  at  all  other  times  it  is  either  im- 
passable or  extremely  dangerous.  During  great  freshets,  which  gener- 
ally huppen  between  the  beginning  of  April  and  the  middle  of  May 
from  the  melting  of  the  snow,  the  falls  are  absolutely  impassable  to 
vessels  bound  up  the  river,  as  the  tide  does  not  rise  to  the  river  level. 

There  is  sufficient  depth  of  water  for  large  vessels  as  far  as  the  falls, 
and  beyond  them  the  river  St.  John  is  navigable  tor  small  vessels  as  far 
as  Fredericton,  the  capital  of  the  province.  Immense  quantities  of 
timber  are  rafted  down  from  the  forests  of  the  interior  to  the  city  of  St. 
John,  which  is  also  an  entrepdt  of  the  agricultural  and  mineral  products 
of  a  wide  extent  of  country. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  for  vessels  of  war  in  St.  JohnHarbor  is 
oi;  '■^r  west  side,  a  little  north  of  Sandy  Point ;  in  this  part  a  vessel  will 
bi  Co  "f  the  strength  of  the  tides,  and  will  not  swing  to  the  flood  until 
the  .  c  1  the  harbor  has  risen  to  the  level  of  the  water  in  St.  John 
Rivt.  .  »oout  3  hours  after  the  commencement  of  the  flood.  In  this 
berth  ihe  traffic  of  steam  vessels  and  rafts  will  be  avoided. 

Time  Signal.— A  time  ball,  painted  black,with  a  gold  band,  is  dropped 
daily,  except  on  Sundays,  at  the  observatory  on  the  northern  tower  of 
the  new  custom  house,  112  feet  above  the  ground  and  123  feet  above 
high  water.  The  ball  is  hoisted  half  mast  at  Oh.  46m.  p.  m.,  close  up  at 
Oh.  59m.  and  dropped  at  Ih.  Om.  p.  m.  according  to  the  mean  time  kept 
at  St.  John. 

Fog.— From  observations  taken  from  1865  to  1885  it  appears  that 
the  fog  signal  at  the  entrance  to  St.  John  Harbor  was  sounded  during 
a  total  average  annual  period  of  180  hours  in  July  and  the  same  time 
in  August ;  during  144  hours  in  June  and  96  hours  in  September.  In 
the  winter  months,  from  October  to  April,  the  average  time  the  signal 
was  in  operation  was  about  70  hours  for  each  month,  including  the  time 
sounded  during  falling  snow. 

Ice.— The  navigation  of  St.  John  Harbor  has  never  been  known  to  be 
impeded  by  ice,  nor  does  field  ice  drift  into  the  entrance  of  the  harbor 
from  tlie  Bay  of  Fundy. 

Coal.— About  8,000  tons  are  usually  kept  in  stock.  Vessels  are  coaled 
slowly  by  lighters,  but  withont  interruption  from  weather. 

Railway  and  Telegraph — St.  John  is  connected  with  Halifax  and 
Quebec  by  the  Intercolonial  Railway ;  with  Fredericton,New  Brunswick, 
and  the  United  States  by  other  lines;  a  railway  is  also  in  course  of 
construction  which  will  give  a  shorter  route  to  Quebec  than  the  Inter- 


42 


BAY  OF  rUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 


i   /I 


colonial  Railway.    St.  John  is  connected  by  telegraph  with  all  parts  of 
Canada  and  the  United  States. 

Steam  Communication. — St.  John  has  constant  steam  communica- 
tion with  the  United  States. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 

Partridge  Island.— Partridge  Island  is  about  \  mile  in  length  and  80 
feet  higii ;  it  is  distant  i  mile  from  Negro  Point  on  the  mainland,  there 
being  as  little  as  4  feet  in  mid-channel  between. 

Should  the  bell  buoy  off  the  NE.  end  of  Partridge  Island  be  gone, 
Wesley  chapel,  in  line  with  the  middle  of  the  stone  barracks,  bearing 
N.  12°  W.,  clears  the  foul  ground  off  Partridge  Island. 

Charges — Harbor  dues  for  vessels  of  500  tons,  and  upwards  $3.50, 
and  25  cents  for  every  50  tons  such  vessel  may  measure  over  that. 
Pilotage,  inward,  varies  between  $1.25  and  $2.80  per  foot;  outward, 
$1.60  to  $2.50,  according  to  distance.  Anchorage  dues,  from  50  to  100 
tons  $1,  and  25  cents  for  each  50  tons  additional.  Health  fees,  2  cents 
per  ton.  Ballast,  discharging,  per  ton,  40  cents.  Ballast,  free  on  board, 
per  ton,  80  to  90  cents.  Cost  of  water,  1  cent  per  gallon ;  cost  of  vessel 
stores  are  regulated  by  the  market  at  New  York.  Towage  for  vessel  of 
250  tons  $15;  $5  for  each  100  tons  or  part  of  same  additional. 

Shag  Rocks,  which  dry  at  low  water,  are  J  mile  in  extent,  and  their 
outer  end  lies  about  4  mile  from  the  shore  between  Sheldon  and  Negro 
Points;  near  their  outer  end  a  small  rock  dries  6  feet  at  low  water. 
These  rocks  can  scarcely  be  described  as  dangerous,  inasmuch  as  they 
lie  within  the  lino  joining  Sheldon  Point  and  the  north  end  of  Part- 
ridge Island. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  St.  John  Harbor  at  llh. 
21m. ;  springs  rise  27  feet,  neaps  23  feet. 

The  great  volume  of  water  which  runs  through  St.  John  Harbor  dur- 
ing the  fresliets  from  the  melting  of  the  ice  and  snow  in  April  and  May 
causes  a  continued  superficial  ebb,  the  velocity  of  which  varies  from  2J 
to  5  knots;  underneath  this  outset— sometimes  5  fathoms  deep— the 
tides  ebb  and  How  regularly.  Abreast  the  city  the  tidal  stream  runs 
in  an  hour  after  the  time  of  high  water  by  the  shore,  in  cousequeuoe  of 
the  difference  of  level  already  allude  I  to;  here  also  as  a  rule  the  flood 
is  weak,  but  the  ebb  runs  rapidly  down  past  Meogenes  Island, 

Directions. — Unless  in  case  of  necessity  strangers  should  never 
attempt  to  enter  St.  John  Harbor  without  the  assistance  of  a  pilot,  for 
the  narrow  and  intricate  channel  is  bordered  with  sharp  rocks,  and 
numerous  accideuts  have  occurred  to  vessels  attempting  the  navigation 
without  local  knowledge. 

To  enter  the  harbor  on  the  east  side  of  Partridge  Island,  steer  so  as 
to  pass  close  to  the  eastward  of  the  bell  buoy  off  that  island  in  order 
to  clear  the  ledges,  and  when  Carleton  Church  comes  in  line  with  Cliff 
end  steer  for  them  until  Stone  Church,  with  a  conspicuous  square 
tower,  comes  in  line  with  the  end  of  the  breakwater,  bearing  N.  15°  VV., 


■* ■■ 


8T,    JOHN DIRECTIONS — PILOTS. 


4S 


h  all  parts  of 

I  commuuica- 

lousul. 

length  and  80 
linlaud,  there 

ind  be  gone, 
icks,  bearing 

jwards  $3.50, 
e  over  that, 
ot;  outward, 
:oin  50  to  100 
fees,  2  cents 
"ree  on  board, 
cost  of  vessel 
}  for  vessel  of 
lal. 

int,  and  their 
n  and  Negro 
t  low  water, 
nuch  as  they 
jnd  of  Part- 
arbor  at  Uh. 

Harbor  dur- 
iril  and  May 
iries  from  2^ 
IS  deep — the 

stream  runs 
iisequiMioo  of 
ale  the  flood 
ind. 

houhl  never 
f  a  pilot,  for 
p  rocks,  aud 
)  navigation 

[,  steer  so  as 
ind  in  order 
ne  with  Oliflf 
10 us  square 
g  N".  15°  VV., 


and  with  these  marks  pass  east  of  the  red  buoy  off  Negro  Point  aud 
proceeds  ou  until  past  the  Beacon  ligbt-honse,  steer  up  the  middle  of 
the  harbor,  aud  anchor  oft  the  wharfs  of  the  city  or  in  the  anchorage 
recommended  for  menof-war. 

Should  the  ebb  have  commenced  it  would  be  improper  to  attempt  to 
gain  the  harbor  until  the  next  half  flood;  under  such  circumtitances  the 
vessel  should  remain  outside  and  not  attempt  to  anchor  in  the  channel, 
where  the  ebb  tide— especially  during  the  freshets  in  the  spring  of  the 
year — is  so  exceedingly  rapid  as  to  prevent  any  anchors  holding. 

Large  vessels  should  not  attempt  to  leave  the  harbor  later  than  H 
hours  after  high  water,  as  it  is  the  latest  time  that  there  would  be  suffi- 
cient water  ou  the  bar. 

Pilots  are  always  ou  the  lookout,  and  are  sometimes  fallen  in  with 
in  the  vicinity  of  Machias  Seal  Island ;  during  a  fog  by  tiring  a  gun 
occasionally  they  will  generally  tind  the  ship. 

It  is  very  desirable  that  vessels  should  take  a  pilot  before  entering 
St.  John  Bay,  for  instance  at  Point  Lepreau,  if  not  farther  down,  for 
during  thick  weather  the  rapid  tides — particularly  during  the  freshets — 
render  the  navigation  of  tiie  bay  unsafe  to  a  stranger.  Stea  u  tugs  are 
always  available  off  the  harbor's  mouth,  and  occasionally  off  Point 
Lepreaa. 

Cape  Spencer,  a  bold  headland,  from  400  to  600  feet  high,  with  steep 
rocky  cliffs,  is  thickly  wooded,  aud  lies  about  3  miles  from  Mispeck 
Point,  with  a  bay  between,  which  only  affords  shelter  witli  uortherly 
winds. 

In  the  bay,  however,  there  are  several  creeks,  the  largest  of  which, 
Ball  Creek,  about  150  yards  broad,  enables  small  vessels  to  ascend  dur- 
ing the  flood  and  lie  aground  in  safety  along  the  inner  side  of  a  small 
pier.  On  nearing  the  entrance  of  the  creek  bring  the  end  of  tb  pier 
about  midway  between  the  two  shores,  in  order  to  avoid  a  rocky  spur 
which  runs  off  nearly  200  yards  from  the  eastern  point. 

Black  Rock. — Of  small  size  and  10  feet  high,  lies  :ibout  ^  mile  from 
Oonley  Head,  a  point  in  the  middle  of  tlie  bay  just  described ;  the  rock 
is  steep  to  all  round,  without  off' lying  dangers. 

The  Coast — From  Cape  Spencer  to  Cape  Enrag6,  ou  the  north  side 
of  Chiguecto  Channel,  the  la?:d  is  bold  and  thickly  wooded,  varying  in 
height  from  400  to  900  feet,  and  divided  into  hills  by  numerous  valleys 
through  which  small  streams  And  their  way  to  the  B.iy  of  Fundy. 

The  mouths  of  these  streams  are  very  similar  in  appearance,  being 
composed  of  a  bar  of  shingle  and  gravel  across  the  entrance,  leaving  a 
narrow  passage  at  one  side  through  which  small  vessels  may  enter  at 
high  water,  and  lay  on  the  mud  at  low  water,  generally  safe  from  all 
winds.  Here  vessels  load  with  timber  sawn  by  mills  near  the  entrance, 
from  logs  brought  down  the  streams. 

The  shore  between  Cape  Spencer  and  Black  River  is  steep-to,  ex- 
cepting in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  a  point  about  3^  miles  to  the  west- 


44 


BAY  OF  FUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 


i    Jk. 


ward  of  Black  River,  where  rocks  dry  off  200  yards  frotu  the  shore. 
There  are  also  somo  rocks  exteudiug  400  yards  S.  58°  W.  from  the 
point  next  east  of  Black  River. 

McCoy  Head,  about  8  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Gape  Spencer,  is  a 
rounded  point  about  200  feet  high,  and  thickly  wooded ;  the  coast  be- 
tween the  two  points  forms  a  considerable  indentation,  at  the  head  of 
which  is  Black  River,  which  dries  across  its  entrance,  but  is  accessible 
at  certain  times  of  tide  for  small  vessels,  though  it  is  said  to  be  unsafe 
at  high  water  during  heavy  southwest  gales. 

Sisters  consist  of  a  small  cluster  of  rocks  about  f  nile  from  the  shore 
near  Entmersou  Creek,  and  about  2^  miles  to  the  westward  of  McCoy 
Head.  The  outer  rocks  of  the  cluster  uncover  at  2  hours  ebb,  but  the 
inner  rock,  about  200  yards  further  in  shore,  only  shows  at  low  water. 
There  is  deep  water  between  these  rocks  and  the  shore. 

Red  Head  is  composed  of  red  cliffs  about  50  feet  high.  Just  within 
McCoy  Head  to  the  eastward,  good,  temporary  anchorage  may  be  ob- 
tained from  northerly  and  westerly  winds,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  with  Rog- 
ers and  Red  Heads  just  in  liife.  The  entrance  of  Tynemouth  Creek  lies 
about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Red  Head. 

Rogers  Head  is  about  400  feet  high,  thickly  wooded  and  steep-to, 
with  high  perpendicular  cliff's  on  its  western  side,  and  a  steep  slope  to 
the  southward. 

Quaco  Head,  250  feet  high,  is  about  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Rog- 
ers Head,  being  separated  therefrom  by  a  valley  clear  of  trees,  and  by 
a  sharp  trend  of  the  land  to  the  northward  which  forms  the  western 
side  of  Quaco  B^y. 

Bell  buoy. — A  bell  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  14  fathoms, 
southeastward  of  the  shoal  ground  off  Quaco  Head,  with  Quaco  Head 
light-house  bearing  N.  42°  W.,  distant  about  ^  mile.  This  buoy  is  re- 
moved during  the  winter  months. 

Quaco  Shoal,  on  which  there  is  as  little  as  9  feet  water,  is  about  a 
mile  in  length  NNE.  and  SSW.,  and  occupies  a  considerable  portion  of 
Quaco  Bay.  A  can  buoy  marks  the  southern  end  of  the  shoal.  It  is 
removed  and,  if  possible,  replaced  by  a  spar  buoy  during  winter. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Quaco  Bay  at  llh. 
35  m. ;  springs  rise  30  feet,  neaps  25  feet.  With  the  exception  of  the 
first  hour  of  Hood,  the  tide,  both  flood  and  ebb,  sweeps  round  Quaco 
Bay,  from  the  eastward,  inside  Quaco  Shoal. 

Anchorage.— Vessels  wishing  to  obtain  temporary  anchorage  under 
Quaco  Head  should — on  approaching  the  light-house  from  the  west- 
ward— keep  McCoy  Head  open  of  Rogers  Head  until  the  Roman 
Catholic  church  tower  of  Quaco  is  seen  open  eastward  of  the  northern 
cliff'  of  Quaco  Head,  in  order  to  clear  the  outer  end  of  the  ledge. 

There  are  no  good  leading  marks  into  the  anchorage,  which  is  in  5  or 
0  fathoms,  mud,  with  the  light-house  bearing  S.  2°  W.  distant  about  ^ 
mile.    The  anchorage  is  unsafe  with  winds  from  XE. — round  by  east — 


;'^il*B^-5fe-j 


QUACO    LODGE — SALISBURY    BAY. 


45 


>ui  the  shore. 
W.  from  the 

Speucer,  is  a 

the  coast  be- 

t  the  head  of 

t  is  accessible 

I  to  be  uusafe 

Tom  the  shore 
ird  of  McCoy 
3  ebb,  but  the 
at  low  water. 

Just  withm 
e  may  be  ob- 
ns,  with  Bog- 
ith  Greek  lies 

and  steep-to, 
teep  slope  to 

ward  of  Bog- 
trees,  and  by 
1  the  western 

14  fathoms, 
Quaco  Head 
s  buoy  is  re- 

r,  is  about  a 
>Ie  portion  of 
shoal.  It  is 
iviuter. 
Bay  at  llh. 
ptiou  of  the 
ouud  Quaco 

lorage  under 
m  the  west- 
the  Boman 
the  northern 
ledge. 

ich  is  in  5  or 
taut  about  ^ 
id  by  east— 


to  south.  i\long  Quaco  Head  many  vessels  are  built  as' well  as  in  some 
of  the  creeks  along  shore.  These  and  timber  are  the  only  exports  from 
this  part  of  the  coast. 

Quaco  Ledge  is  a  most  dangerous  ridge  of  rugged  rocks  about  J 
mile  in  length,  witii  deep  water  close  to  around ;  the  highest  part  un- 
covers half  hour  after  half  ebb,  and  dries  13  feet  at  low  water,  and  shows 
a  heavy  tide  rip  when  covered.  This  danger  lies  8'^  miles  S.  57°  E. 
from  Quaco  lighthouse,  and  S.  87°  W.,  U^  miles  from  the  western  end 
of  Isle  Haute.  The  tidal  current  runs  about  2  knots  in  the  vicinity  of 
this  danger.  A  red  b.  "I  V  is  moored  in  10  fathon"  nhopt  200  yards 
NW.  of  the  ledge. 

Found  Head.— From  McCumber  Point,  on  the  nortli  shore  of  Quaco 
Bay,  the  shore  between  it  and  Found  Head  is  clear  of  danger.  Found 
Head  is  distinguished  by  its  perpendicular  red  cliffs,  from  300  to  400 
feet  high. 

Tuft  Point,  also  known  as  Long  Beach,  lies  about  5  miles  to  the 
eastward  of  Pound  Head,  and  is  formed  by  an  earthy  bank  from  30  to 
50  feet  high  partially  cleared.  About  If  miles  westward  of  the  point 
is  Salmon  Biver,  and  between  the  two,  the  5-fathom  line  extends  up- 
wards of  3  mile  off  shore,  whilst  the  low-water  line  of  the  beach,  just 
west  of  Tuft  point,  extends  nearly  ^  mile  off. 

St.  Martin  Head,  about  8J  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Tuft  Point,  is  a 
small  bare  hillock  100  feet  high,  connected  with  the  main  shore  by  a 
narrow  causeway  of  gravel  and  sand  J  mile  long.  When  seen  from  a 
distance  the  head  makes  like  an  island ;  it  may  be  approached  within 

J  mile,  save  on  its  western  side,  where  there  is  a  small  patch  of  rocks 

which  dry  5  feet  at  low  water — i(  mile  off  shore,  S.  53=^  W.  To  the 
westward  of  St.  Martin  Head,  as  far  as  Wolf  Creek,  and  to  the  east- 
ward as  far  as  Goose  Creek,  the  5-fathom  line  extends  §  mile  from  the 
shore. 

Matthews  Head  is  a  bold  rounded  point  150  feet  high,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  10^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Martin  Head.  Matthews 
head  is  partially  cleared,  but  within  it  the  land  rises  to  an  elevation  of 
700  feet,  and  is  thickly  wooded.  Between  the  two  heads  there  are  no 
less  than  Ave  creeks,  but  no  off-lying  dangers,  and  the  shores  may  be 
approached  to  J  mile. 

Salisbury  Bay. — Between  Matthews  Head  and  Cape  Enrage,  the 
land  recedes  and  forms  Salisbury  Bay,  3  miles  in  depth ;  one  of  the 
salient  points  of  the  coast  line  of  the  bay  is  Owls  Head,  which  is  700 
feet  high,  and  thickly  wooded.  Midway  between  Owls  Head  and  Cape 
Enrag^  is  Bed  Head,  composed  of  earthy  cliffs  from  50  to  100  feet  high. 

Salisbury  Shoal,  about  If  miles  in  length  between  the  5.fathom 
lines,  lies  §  mile  within  the  line  between  Matthews  Head  and  Cape  En- 
rag6,  with  3J  fathoms  on  its  shoalest  part  near  the  center,  and  can  not 
therefore  be  deemed  a  danger  to  vessels  of  moderate  draught.  Within 
it  there  is  a  c^iannel  a  mile  wide,  having  from  5  to  7  fathoms.    The 


Ti 


li  I  I 


3  ; 


If 


46 


BAY  OP  FUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 


d^futhoui  patuh  lies  S.  87°  W.,  3^  miles  from  Cape  Enrag^  light- 
house. 

Anchorage. — During  the  summer  mouths  vessels  may  anchor  along 
the  whole  length  of  the  coast  from  Cape  Spencer  at  a  moderate  distance 
from  the  shore,  the  best  place  for  shelter  from  the  prevailing  westerly 
winds  being  Quuco  Bay. 

Salisbury  Bay  is  unsafe,  in  consequence  of  the  frequency  of  westerly 
and  southwesterly  winds  to  which  the  bay  is  exposed,  and  of  the  sad* 
den  shifting  of  the  wind  to  these  quarters.  The  tidal  stream  generally 
sets  towards  Giipe  Enrag6  light-house. 

Cape  Enrage  is  composed  of  perpendicular  rocky  cliffs  about  100 
feet  high,  and  thickly  wooded,  excepting  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
the  light-house,  which  stands  close  to  the  extremity  of  the  cape. 

From  Cape  Eurag6  a  rocky  spur,  which  dries  at  low  water,  extends  in 
a  southwesterly  direction  J  mile. 

Chignecto  Channel  divides  the  shores  of  New  Brunswick  and  Nova 
Scotia  at  the  head  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  leads  into  Oumberland 
Basin  and  the  river  Petit  Goudiac ;  it  is  free  from  off-lying  dangers, 
and  even  in  thick  weather  the  gradual  decrease  of  soundings  on  either 
side  is  sufficiently  well  defined  to  insure  safe  navigation. 

Abreast  Grindstone  Island  Gape  Maringonin  divides  the  water  into 
two  branches,  the  northern  of  the  two  running  in  that  direction  towards 
the  months  of  Petit  Goudiac  and  Memramcook  rivers,  and  the  other 
flowing  into  Cumberland  Basin. 

The  laud  on  the  New  Brunswick  shore  is  moderately  high,  thickly 
wooded,  and  intersected  by  numerous  valleys ;  the  south  shore  is  not 
80  elevated,  and  the  thick  woods  which  generally  prevail  are  interspersed 
•with  cranberry  barrens  which  abound  with  deer. 

Horton  Flats. — The  shores  on  either  side  of  Ghignecto  Channel  may 
be  safely  approached  to  ^  mile,  excepting  in  the  vicinity  of  Horton  flats, 
about  7  miles  to  the  northeastward  of  Gape  Enrag^.  Between  this  po- 
sition and  Cape  St.  Mary,  flatt.  extend  in  a  straight  line  a  considerable 
distance  off  the  high  line,  which  here  forms  a  bay. 

Grindstone  Island. — Grindstone  Island,  nearly  ^  mile  in  length,  lies 
on  the  northeast  side  of  Chignecto  Channel,  and  about  a  mile  eastward 
of  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  southern  point  of  entrance  to  Shepody  River. 

Grindstone  Shoal,  with  10  feet  of  water,  is  the  shallowest  part  of 
a  narrow  bank  of  sand  and  mud,  nearly  4  miles  in  length.  The  shoal 
spot  lies  -1^0  mile  S.  6°  E.  from  Grindstone  light-house,  with  a  passage 
between  ;  the  high  line  of  the  south  side  of  Grindstone  Island  may  be 
approached  to  200  yards. 

St  Mary  Ledge  extends  oft'  Gape  St.  Mary  f  mile  N.  42°  E. ;  its 
highest  point  covers  at  four  hours  flood,  and  when  uncovered  may  be 
approached  to  200  yards  on  its  SE.  side. 

Shepody  River. — This  river  falls  into  Chignecto  Channel  immedi- 
ately to  the  northward  of  Gape  St.  Mary,  between  which  and  Stiles 
landing,  on  the  northern  side,  the  distance  is  2^  miles ;  but  the  river  is 


CHIGNECTO    CHANNEL — TIDES 


47 


Enrag6  light- 
anchor  along 
erate  distance 
iliug  westerly 

ay  of  westerly 
[1  of  the  sad- 
aam  generally 

iffs  about  100 
ate  vicinity  of 
e  cape. 
ber,  extends  in 

rick  and  Nova 

Oamberland 

ring  dangers, 

ings  on  either 

;he  water  into 
ctiou  towards 
lud  the  other 

high,  thickly 
I  shore  is  not 
a  interspersed 

Channel  may 

^Horton  flats, 

}ween  this  po- 

considerable 

in  length,  lies 
nile  eastward 
)ody  Biver. 
owest  part  of 
t.  The  shoal 
ith  a  passage 
sland  may  be 

f.  420  E.;  its 
ered  may  be 

anel  rmmedi- 
sh  and  Stiles 
at  the  river  is 


not  accessible  except  at  certain  times  of  tide,  and  not  even  then  except 
by  experienced  local  pilots. 

The  Coast— From  Cape  Chignecto  to  Squally  Point  the  shore  is 
steep  to  and  without  detached  dangers ;  but  from  tlieuce  as  far  us  Apple 
Head  light-house  tlie  shore  should  not  be  neared  within  J^  mile. 

Spicer  Cove  is  a  slight  and  shallow  indentation  immediately  within 
Squally  Point,  but  is  only  adapted  for  temporary  anchorage  for  small 
vessels. 

Apple  River,  2  miles  larther  on,  dries  a  little  within  its  points  of 
entrance,  which  are  ^  mite  apart. 

Althougii  several  indentations  occur  along  this  line  of  coast,  none  are 
available  for  vessels  save  at  certain  times  of  tide.  At  the  South  Jog- 
gins  there  are  several  seams  of  coal,  but  the  quality  is  inferior  and  not 
adapted  for  either  steaming  or  domestic  purposes.  There  are  also  some 
grindstone  quarries  along  this  coast,  as  well  as  on  the  Grindstone 
Island ;  and  at  Cape  St.  Mary  good  building  stone  is  to  be  obtained. 

Tlie  anchorage  off  the  coal  wharf  at  South  Joggins  is  bad  and  unsafe 
with  westerly  winds,  especially  during  the  ebb. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Spicer  Cove  at  llh. 
35m  ;  springs  rise  37  feet,  neaps  30^  feet.  At  Grindstone  Island  at  llh. 
47m. ;  springs  rise  41  feet,  neaps  34J  feet. 

From  Cape  Spencer  the  flood  tides  set  to  the  eastward,  generally 
parallel  to  the  shore  as  far  as  Grindstone  Island,  at  the  average  rate 
of  about  2  knots,  the  ebb  running  in  a  contrary  direction  to  the  west- 
ward ;  several  eddies  are  formed  behind  the  salient  points  of  this  coast. 
In  the  vicinity  of  Cape  Spencer  the  tidal  stream  changes  its  direction 
about  2  hours  before  high  and  low  water  by  the  sbore ;  but  farther  east, 
oft"  Qnaco  Head,  this  difference  is  reduced  to  three-fourths  hour.  Off 
shore  the  stream  continues  to  run  from  one-fourth  to  three-fourths  hour 
after  the  time  of  high  and  low  water. 

Off  Cape  Spencer  a  rip,  which  is  very  heavy  with  westerly  winds,  is 
formed  on  the  ebb ;  it  is  caused  by  a  strong  eddy  sweeping  round  to 
the  bay  to  the  westward  of  the  cape,  and  impinging  on  the  ebb  tide  at 
right  angles.  A  similar  rip  occurs  off  Quaco  Head,  occasioned  by  the 
tide  sweeping  round  the  bay  to  the  southward,  and  meeting  the  main 
streams  of  flood  and  ebb  off  the  lighthouse.  Off  Grindstone  Island  the 
tidal  current  runs  from  2  to  4  knots  an  hour. 

Cape  Maringoiiinis  the  southern  termination  df  a  promontory  divid- 
ing the  northeastern  arm  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  into  two  branches, 
viz,  the  river  Petit  Condiac  to  the  north  and  Cumberland  Basin  to 
the  east.  The  cape  attains  an  elevation  of  220  feet,  and  from  it  an  ex- 
tensive bank,  formed  by  the  d<^bris  of  the  two  branches,  extends  in  a 
southwesterly  direction ;  the  3-fathom  line  being  1 J  miles  from  the  cape. 

Makingoviin  Shoal  is  a  sandy  knoll  with  only  a  foot  of  water,  and 
lies  near  the  eastern  edge  of  the  above  bank,  about  a  mile  from  the 
shore  of  the  cape.    From  it  the  east  and  west  tangents  of  Cape  Marin- 


48 


BAY  OP  FUNDY — NORTH  COAST. 


goiiin  bear  N.  o'P  E.  and  N,  'J9°  W.,  respectively,  and  (rrindstone  Islaud 
light  houNt'  N.  76°  W.  4  miles. 

River  Potit  Coudiac. — Abreast  Folly  Point  tlie  Coudiac  is  alwut  a 
mile  across,  and  from  tbencie  it  trends  in  a  general  westerly  direction 
for  a  distance  of  15  miles,  to  abreast  the  town  of  Moncton,  after 
which  it  takes  a  sudden  bend  to  the  westward,  and  so  continiu.'s  for  a 
distance  of  12  miles  as  far  as  the  town  of  Salisbury.  The  eastern  shore 
of  this  river  is  moilerately  high  and  well  wooded,  ami  between  the 
northern  point  of  She|)ody  River  and  Oape  Demoiselle  on  the  western 
shore,  a  narrow  strip  of  marshy  ground  fringes  the  high  land,  which 
arises  abruptly  to  the  well-wooded  Shepody  Hills,  the  highest  of  which 
attains  au  elevation  of  l,()oO  feet. 

Maringouin  Flats  on  the  north  side  of  Cape  Maringonin  are  covered 
at  ordinary  low  water;  the  outer  flat  is  about  1}  mile  long,  nearly  par- 
allel to  the  shore,  aM<l  from  it  the  outer  edge  is  distant  about  '^  mile  ; 
the  water  shoals  gradually  off  it,  and  the  danger  may  be  avoided  by 
careful  attention  to  the  lead. 

Qrande  Ansa  Ledge. — The  western  end  of  this  ledge  is  rather  more 
than  a  mile  from  the  eastern  shore  at  the  distance  of  4  miles  from  Oape 
Maringouin,  The  ledge  covers  at  half-tiood,  after  which  it  becomes 
dangerous ;  the  eastern  tangent  of  B'olly  Point  open  westward  of  Coles 
Head,  and  bearing  N.  9°  W. ,  clears  the  ledge  on  its  western  side. 

Middle  Ground.— This  danger  dries  for  about  2^  miles  in  a  north 
direction,  its  greatest  breadth  being  about  :^  mile ;  its  highest  point 
near  the  center  being  about  6  feet  above  low-water  springs.  The 
southern  end  lies  4^  miles  N.  33°  E.  from  Grindstone  Island,  and  its 
northern  edge  bears  from  Cape  Demoiselle  N.  50°  B.,  rather  more  than 
a  mile.  The  houses  on  Dorchester  Island  shut  in  by  Coles  Head,  the 
latter  bearing  N.  6°  E.,  clears  the  Middle  Ground  on  its  eastern  si<le; 
by  careful  attention  to  the  lead  this  bank  can  .always  be  avoided. 

Calhoun  Flats  dries  for  nearly  %  mile  from  the  high  line  with  4 
fathoms  at  200  yards  off  its  outer  edge. 

Memramcock  Spit  consists  of  long,  rocky  ledges  extending  off'  Coles 
Head,  and  must  be  carefully  avoided ;  on  the  outer  end  the  highest  part 
of  the  spit,  which  uncovers  during  the  last  quarter  ebb,  lies  J  mile  from 
the  Coles  Head  shore  and  1 J  miles  S.  25°  E.  from  Folly  Point. 

The  church  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Petit  Coudiac  above  Folly  Point, 
open  westward  of  Folly  Point  and  bea.'ing  N.  34°  W.,  clears  this  danger 
on  its  western  side. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  •hange,  at  Folly  Point  at  llh.  49m. ; 
springs  rise  45  feet,  neaps  38  feet.  In  the  vicinitj''of  the  point  the  tide 
stream  runs  from  3  to  4  knots  an  hour. 

Directions. — When  off  Cape  Spencer  and  bound  to  the  eastward, 
keep  close  to  the  cape  if  on  the  ebb,  and  avoid  the  tide  rip  already 
described,  by  passing  either  inside  or  outside.  If  bound  through 
Ohignecto  Channel  care  must  be  taken  not  to  pass  within  ^  mile  of  the 


■Mm 


CHIGNECTO    CHANNEL — MEMRAMCOOK    RIVER. 


49 


ftone  Islaud 

c  is  al>out  a 
•ly  direction 
iictoii,  after 
tinm.'s  for  a 
tsterii  shore 
tetween  the 
the  western 
land,  which 
ast  of  which 

I  are  covered 

nearly  par- 

l)out  !{  mile  j 

I  avoided  by 

rather  more 
58  from  Cape 
1  it  becomes 
rard  of  Coles 
rn  side. 
)s  in  a  north 
ghest  point 
rings.     The 
and,  and  its 
»r  more  than 
)s  Head,  the 
lastern  side; 
poidod. 
ine  with  4 

iug  off  Coles 

highest  part 

^  mile  from 

int. 

'oily  Point, 

this  danger 

It  llh.  49ra. ; 
oint  the  tide 

le  eastward, 
rip  already 
md  through 
mile  of  the 


light-house  on  Cape  Biirag^  when  on  a  N.  125^  E.  bearing,  in  order  to 
avoid  the  rocky  ledge  whicli  extends  off  in  a  8SW.  direction. 

In  malting  either  for  Cliignecto  Ciianiiel  «>r  CapeiJhigiiecto  cure  must 
be  taken  to  make  full  allowance  for  the  effect  of  the  tides,  which  will 
considerably  modify  the  course.^  obtained  from  the  chart. 

Anchorages. — Temi>orary  anchorage  may  bn  obtained  in  moderate 
weather  along  the  whole  ♦•xtent  of  coast  betwuen  Capes  Spencer  and 
St.  Mary,  but  when  the  winds — to  which  the  coast  is  exposed-— blow  with 
any  force  the  anchorage  is  bad,  especially  in  localities  where  the  strength 
of  tide  is  great. 

There  is  an  anchorage  to  the  north  and  west  of  Grindstone  lalaud, 
between  it  and  the  mouth  of  Shepody  Uiver,  but  it  is  somewhat  difilcult 
of  approach  by  a  stranger  j  to  enter  it  from  a  safe  otHiig  off  Cape  Enrag^, 
steer  to  bring  Grindstone  Light-house  to  bear  N.  39°  E.,  until  about  a 
mile  distant,  when  haul  a  little  to  the  northward,  taking  care  not  to 
shut  in  Cape  Enrag6  Light-house  with  Cape  St.  Mary,  nor  ai)proach 
Grindstone  Island  nearer  than  800  yards.  When  Grindstone  Light- 
house bears  S.  48°  E.,  St.  Mary  Ledge  will  have  been  passed,  and  the 
vessel  may  be  hauled  up  for  the  Shepudy  Mountain  ;  anchor  clear  of 
the  shoal  ground  north  of  the  light-house,  with  the  latter  bearing  about 
S  20°  E.,and  Cape  St.  Mary  S.  36°  W.;  here  there  will  be  4  fathoms, 
but  the  holding  ground  is  not  good. 

Another  anchorage  to  the  northeast  of  Grindstone  Island  which  is 
frequently  used  is  in  about  3  fathoms  mud,  about  ^  mile  N.  36°  E.  from 
the  eastern  point  of  the  island. 

Vessels  in  moderate  weather  may  anchor  anywhere  off  the  mouth  of 
the  river  Petit  Coudiac  below  Folly  Point  according  to  their  draft 
of  water,  but  the  best  anchorage  is  between  Folly  Point  and  Stone 
Wharf,  which  is  as  high  as  vessels  of  any  size  can  lay  afloat  at  low 
water.  Here,  in  about  3  fathoms  mud,  vessels  may  anchor  with  Folly 
Point  bearing  N.  64°  E.,  and  Indian  Church  K  21°  W.,  but  as  the  tide 
current  runs  from  t>  to  4  knots,  there  is  a  disagreeable  sea  when  the 
wind  is  against  the  stream,  and  if  intending  to  s^cp  louder  than  a  tide, 
it  is  necessary  to  moor  in  order  to  avoid  fouling  the  anchor. 

Pilots. — If  intending  to  proceed  farther  up  the  river  the  services  of 
a  competent  pilot  must  be  obtained,  as  the  direction  of  the  narrow  shal- 
low channel  is  frequently  changed.  Though  there  are  no  regular  pilots, 
men  can  be  procured  from  Hillsborough  who  are  acquainted  with  the 
river. 

River  Memramcook. — The  western  shore  is  of  a  moderate  eleva- 
tion and  covered  with  trees,  whilst  its  eastern  shore  is  partially  cleared. 

There  is  a  small  hole  with  9  feet  water  to  the  SW.  of  Dorchester 
Island,  but  even  small  vessels  should  be  moored,  if  it  be  intended  to  re- 
main afloat. 

Cumberland  Basin  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  Cape  Mariugouin,  be- 
tween which  and  Boss  Point  the  entrance  is  1}  miles  across ;  from  this 
5314 i 


n 


:  I 


I     11 


60 


BAY  OF  FUNDY NORTH  COAST. 


position  the  channel  is  straight  and  navigable  for  a  distance  of  8  miles 
to  a  little  beyond  Woody  Point,  on  the  northern  shore,  where  anchorage 
may  be  obtained  In  the  narrow  channel  in  4  fathoms  about  J  mile  ofiF 
the  northern  shore.    This  is  known  as  Sackville  Anchorage,  where  ves 
sela  should  moor,  and  their   position  be  selected  by  means  of  the  lead. 

Anchorage.— There  is  also  another  anchorage  eastwanl  of  Peck's 
Point,  on  the  north  shore  of  the  entrance,  in  about  5  fathoms  mud,  with 
the  8R.  extreme  of  Cape  Maringouin  open  of  Peck's  Point,  bearing  S. 
33°  W.,  and  the  end  of  the  wharf  in  Peck's  Cove  S.  78°  W. 

Vessels  may  anchor  anywhere  between  the  above  places,  excepting 
during  strong  westerly  winds,  which  frequently  occur,  when  the  ebb 
stream,  which  attains  a  velocity  of  4  or  5  knots  an  hour,  causes  a  very 
disagreeable  sea.  It  is  advisable  to  moor  at  auy  of  the  anchorages, 
especially  with  southwesterly  winds  and  an  ebb  stream.  Above  Sack- 
ville Anchorage  only  small  vessels  can  lie  afloat  at  low  water,  but  trad- 
ing craft  lie  aground  on  the  mud. 

In  Cumberland  Basin  there  is  a  profitable  shad  fishery,  which  com- 
mences in  June.  The  exports  are  coal  from  the  South  Joggins  and  river 
Eebert,  as  well  as  some  agricultural  produce,  and  a  few  small  vessels 

are  built. 

Tidea.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Cumberland  Hasin  at 
11  h.  55ra. ;  springs  rise  45J  feet,  neaps  38  feet.  The  rise  and  fall  being 
so  great,  the  velocity  of  the  tide  is  very  great. 

Directiona. In  running  for  Cumberland  Basin  care  must  be  taken 

on  approaching  the  entrance  to  open  Minudie  Point  to  the  southward 
of  the  east  tangent  of  Cape  Maringouin,  bearing  N.  47°  E.,  in  order  to 
clear  Maringouin  Shoal,  after  passing  which  a  course  should  be  steered 
to  pass  the  east  extremity  of  Cape  Maringouin  and  Peck's  Point  not 
less  than  J  mile,  to  which  distance  both  can  safely  be  approached. 

If  intending  to  proceed  beyond  Pecks  Anchorage,  keep  the  east  tan- 
gent of  Cape  Maringouin  open  of  Pecks  Point,  bearing  S.  44°  W.,  and 
with  these  marks  astern  a  vessel  will  be  kept  in  the  deep-water  channel 
to  abreast  of  Minudie  Point,  after  which  a  more  northerly  course  should 
be  steered,  in  order  to|avoid  the  mud  bank,  which  dries  at  low  water 
and  extends  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the  southern  shore. 

Amherat,  in  the  NE.  part  of  Cumberland  Basin,  is  the  southern 
terminus  of  the  ship  railroad  running  through  to  Bay  Verte,  which  is 
uow  nearly  completed.  The  distance,  about  17  miles,  will  be  traversed 
at  the  rate  of  10  miles  an  hour,  the  maximum  weightcarried  to  be  about 
2,000  tons.  The  receiving  docks  at  each  end  are  about  the  same  size,  500 
feet  long,  300  feet  wide,  and  will  hold  from  6  to  10  vessels.  The  lifting 
docks,  which  communicate  with  the  receiving  docks,  are  250  feet  long 
and  60  feet  wide. 


icu  of  8  miles 
?re  anchorage 
luut  H  mile  off 
(je,  wliere  ves 
8  of  tli»  leiul> 
,\rd  of  Peck's 
ms  mud,  with 
iiit,  bearings. 

ses,  excepting 
?hen  the  ebb 
causes  a  very 
e  anchorages, 
Above  Sack- 
ater,  but  trad- 

:,  which  com- 

gins  and  river 

small  vessels 

land  Hasin  at 
and  fall  being 

must  be  taken 
the  southward 
E.,  in  order  to 
uld  be  steered 
jk's  Point  not 
iroached. 
)  the  east  tan- 
5.  44°  W.,  and 
water  channel 
course  should 
3  at  low  water 
t  shore. 

i  the  southern 
erte,  which  is 
11  be  traversed 
led  to  be  about 
I  same  size,  500 
s.  The  lifting 
3  250  feet  long 


CHAPTER   III.  '  " 

BAY     OP     PlTNDy-SOUTII     SHORE-nABRrNOTON     BAY   TO  BASIN   OV 

MINES. 

Harrington  Bay  has  for  its  points  of  entrance  Baccaro  Point  of  the 
east  and  Capo  Sable  on  the  west.    Near  its  head  is  an  anchorage  a-^ces- 
sible  by  two  channels,  viz,  east  and  west  of  Sable  Island,    i'he  western 
channel  must  be  considered  impracticable  to  a  stranger,  in  consc.aence 
ot  extensive  Hats  and  numerous  dangers,  which  narrow  the  channel  and 
render  the  navigation  always  difficult  and  most  frequently  dangerous 
Bamngton.— At  the  head  of  theinJat,  and  extending  a  conr'  '*>rable 
distance  along  the  shore,  is  the  straggling  township  of  BaiWi.^ton 
winch  exports  flsh  ;  but  few  supplies  of  any  other  kind  can  l^e  p/ocured' 
Directions—By  referring  to  the  chart  the  position  of  the  various 
shoals  in  Barringtoa  Bay  will  be  seen,  and  the  seaman  must  depend  on 
his  intelligence  to  avoid  dangers,  which  it  would  be  useless  to  describe 
in  the  absence  of  good  landmarks. 

Approaching  from  the  southward  and  being  a  mile  west  of  Bantam 
Rocks  (marked  by  a  bell  buoy) ;  a  N.  22°  W.  course  will  lead  up  the  bav 
to  a  mid-channel  position  abreast  Clam  Point,  from  whence  Light- 
house  Rock  should  be  seen,  and  by  steering  for  it  on  a  N.  48o  w  be-ir 
nig  anchorage  will  be  found  in  about  6  fathoms,  with  the  NE.  point'of 
Cape  Sable  Island  bearing  S.  77°  W. 

On  approaching  the  anchorage  care  m ust  be  tak.  ^n  avoid  the  exten- 
sive  sand  flats  which  surround  Beach  Point.  Tho  ^  .^t  course  to  pur- 
sue  when  steering  for  Lighthouse  Uock  will  be  to  borrow  slighthon 
the  island  shore,  towards  which  the  water  shoalr.  gradually,  and  keen 
in  about  5  fathoms,  so  that  by  porting  the  hela  the  water  will  deepen 
A  heavy  sea  sets  into  Barrington  Bay  when  blowing  hard  from  between 
south  and  SE.,  and  renders  the  anchorage  unsafe. 

There  is  room  for  a  vessel  to  turn  into  this  anchorage  by  the  eastern 
passage,  and  by  paying  careful  attention  it  may  be  done  without  a  pilot 
Cape  Sable  Island,  about  7  miles  in  length  and  of  an  irregular 
form  ,8  only  separated  from  the  mainland  by  J  mile.  The  island  is 
thickly  wooded,  singularly  flat,  and  surrounded  by  dangers,  especially 
on  Its  south  and  western  sides.  "      '     *  j 

Cape  SaLle,  at  the  south  end  of  the  island,  is  also  the  southwestern 
extremity  of  the  province  of  Nova  Scotia,  and  is  the  outer  end  of  a  small 

61 


I 


62 


NOVA    SCOTIA — S.    W.    COAST. 


?     I 


;,     ( 


island  whose  hillocks  of  blown  sand,  varying  from  15  to  28  feet  high, 
are  continually  shifted  by  hard  gales. 

Columbia  Rock  is  a  small  pinnacle  with  7  feet  water ;  it  waa  dis- 
covered bj'  Her  Majesty's  surveying  vessel  (Jolumbia  touching  on  it,  and 
lies  S.  37°  E.  one  mile  from  Cape  Sable  light-house.  Beyond  this  rock, 
in  a  southerly  direction  for  a  distance  of  %  mile  are  the  continuations  of 
the  rocky  ledges  which  extend  from  Cape  Sable;  over  these  are  heavy 
tide  rips  during  the  strength  of  the  tides,  caused  by  the  stream  rushing 
over  the  uneven  rocky  bottom. 

Horee  Race,  a  rocky  patch  with  2  fathoms  water,  lies  4  mile  within 
Columbia  Rock,  and  causes  a  heavy  tide  rip. 

Southwest  Ledge,  so  named  from  its  relative  position  to  Cape  Sable, 
is  about  J  mile  in  length,  i^ear  the  northern  end  are  two  rocks  which 
generally  uncover  at  low  water,  and  J  mile  further  out  is  a  rock  on  which 
the  sea  generally  breaks ;  this  rock  nearly  uncovers  at  low- water  springs. 

From  the  latter  Cape  Sable  light-house  bears  N.  55"  E.  If  miles,  and 
beyond  it  for  the  distance  of  nearly  a  mile  in  a  seaward  direction  heavy 
tide  rips  rush  over  the  rocky  tail  of  the  ledge,  though  with  6  and  7  fath- 
oms water  on  it. 

Tides. — Strong  northwesterly  winds  lower  the  surface  of  the  water, 
and  southeasterly  winds  have  a  contrary  effect,  though  the  times  of 
high  and  low  water  are  not  materially  affected  by  either. 

At  Brazil  Bock  the  stream  turns  about  half  an  hour  before  high  and  low 
water  at  Cape  Sable,  towards  which  the  flood  stream  runs  about  2  knots 
an  hour ;  but  seaward  of  Brazil  Bock  the  rate  diminishes  in  proportion 
as  the  distance  from  the  shore  increases,  whilst  over  the  rock  the  tides 
rush  with  great  rapidity  and  create  a  considerable  rip. 

Inshore  around  Baccaro  Point  and  over  Bantam  Bocks  the  flood  sets 
strong,  and,  from  the  point,  trends  towards  Stony  Island  (on  the  east 
shore  of  Cape  Sable  Island),  where  the  stream  divides,  the  northern 
branch  setting  round  Clam  and  NB.  Points,  and  thence  to  the  south- 
ward along  shore  towards  Cape  Sable,  whilst  the  southern  branch 
trends  along  the  eastern  shore  of  Cape  Sable  Island  towards  the  same 
point. 

Outside  Bantam  Bocks  the  flood  sets  towards  Cape  Sable,  round 
which,  for  a  distance  o&3  miles  off  shore,  it  attains  a  velocity  of  fully  4 
knots  during  its  strength.  After  rounding  the  cape  the  flood  stream 
sets  towards  Seal  Island,  passing  it  and  through  the  various  channels 
to  the  northward  between  it  and  To-sket  Island,  in  a  general  NW.  direc- 
tion, at  rates  varying  from  about  2^  to  4  knots  an  hour.  The  flood  as- 
sumes a  more  northerly  trend  along  the  main  shore.  The  direction  of 
the  ebb  stream  is  nearly  opposite  to  that  of  the  flood,  and  runs  with 
equal  velocity. 

Seal  Island,  about  17  miles  west  of  Cape  Sable,  is  about  2|  miles  in 
length,  low,  thickly  wooded,  and  is  the  most  off-lying  in  a  southerly 
direction  of  a  cluster  of  islands  extending  from  Frenchman  Point.   The 


"91 


mm 


SEAL    ISLAND — MUD    ISLANDS. 


53 


0  28  feet  high, 

sr ;  it  waQ  (lis- 
iiiug  ou  it,  and 
ond  this  rock, 
•utinuatioiis  of 
lese  are  lieavy 
itream  rushiug 

3  J  mile  within 

to  Cape  Sable, 
vo  rocks  which 
I,  rock  on  which 
■water  springs. 
3.  If  miles,  and 
direction  heavy 
ith  6  and  7  fath- 

se  of  the  water, 
jh  the  times  of 

)re  high  and  low 
IS  about  2  knots 
5S  in  proportion 
e  rock  the  tides 

IS  the  flood  sets 
nd  (on  the  east 
)8,  the  northern 
ce  to  the  south- 
outhern  branch 
wards  the  same 

po  Sable,  round 
jlocity  of  fully  4 
he  flood  stream 
;'arious  channels 
iieral  NW.direc- 
r.  The  flood  as- 
The  direction  of 
,  and  runs  with 

ibout  2|  miles  in 
5  in  a  southerly 
man  Point.  The 


island  is  surrounded  on  its  east,  south,  and  west  sides  by  shoals  of  a 
very  dangerous  description,  and  when  navigating  in  their  vicinity  great 
prudence  is  required. 

Purdy  Rock  is  of  small  extent,  with  2^  fathoms  on  it  and  deep 
water  all  round,  but  it  shows  a  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide,  and 
breaks  in  heavy  weather.  From  it  Seal  Isiaud  lighthouse  bears  N.  78° 
W.  2J  miles. 

Blonde  Rock  is  about  J  mile  in  length,  and  a  small  portion  near  the 
middle  uncovers  about  2  feet  at  low  water  springs  ;  this  part  lies  with 
Seal  Island  light  house  bearing  N.  22°  W.  3i  miles. 

Tide  Rip. — About  a  mile  westward  of  Blonde  Rock  is  a  heavy  break- 
ing rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tidal  stream,  but  a  sufficient  depth 
of  water  was  found  through  it. 

Elbow  Shoal,  about  a  mile  in  length,  has  on  its  shoalest  part  only 
5  feet  water  on  it,  from  which  Seal  Island  lighthouse  bears  N.  G^  W. 
IJ  miles,  and  the  eastern  tangent  of  Seal  Island  is  just  in  line  with  the 
rock  on  its  south  point. 

Zetland  Shoal  was  reported  to  have  only  17  feet  over  it,  but  on  ex- 
amination nothing  less  than  21  feet  was  found.  It  breaks  in  heavy 
weather,  and  is  marked  by  a  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide ;  from 
Seal  Island  light-house  it  bears  S.  25°  W.,  upwards  of  1^  miles. 

Devil's  Limb  is  a  small  rocky  islet  about  10  feet  above  high  water 
springs,  distant  1^  miles  from  Seal  Island  lighthouse  in  a  X.  69°  VV. 
direction.  About  \  mile  south  of  the  islet  is  a  rocky  shoal  which  un- 
covers at  low-water  springs,  and  uf.med  Loch  Foyne. 

Limbs  Limb,  upwards  of  a  mile  northward  of  Devil's  Limb,  shows 
one  hour  after  high  water,  and  is  steep-to  on  its  western  side. 

There  is  a  passage  inside  the  Limb  shoals  for  vessels  of  moderate 
draft,  but  it  should  only  be  attempted  by  those  well  acquainted. 

Anchorage.— There  are  temporary  anchorages  on  both  sides  of  Seal 
Island,  but  as  the  bottom  is  rocky,  tides  strong  and  irregular,  anchors 
are  liable  '.ofoul;  these  anchorages  should  never  be  used  unless  the 
wind  be  off  the  island. 

Mud  Islands  are  situated  2^  miles  northward  of  Seal  Island,  and 
consist  of  four  small  islands,  named  Nodtly,  Mud,  Round,  and  Flat;  of 
these,  Mud  and  Round  Islands  may  be  approached  within  a  moderate 
distance  on  their  eastern  side,  but  Noddy  Island  should  not  be  ap- 
proached within  ^  mile. 

From  the  northern  end  of  Flat  Island  a  shoal  extends  off  j^  mile,  ter- 
minating in  a  rock  with  only  7  feet  water,  over  which  the  tide  causes 
a  considerable  rip.  Between  Seal  and  Noddy  Islands  there  is  a  safe 
deep  water  channel,  but  one-third  of  the  way  across  from  Noddy  Island 
is  a  shoal  reported  to  have  18  feet  water,  but  ou  examination  nothing 
less  than  oj  fathoms  could  be  found. 

The  flood  stream  sets  strong  through  this  channel  at  a  rate  of  nearly 
4  knots  in  a  NW.  direction,  the  ebb  running  to  the  SE.  attains  the 


li 


r 


r  i  I 


54 


NOVA   SCOTIA — S.    W.    COAST. 


same  velocity.  When  using  the  channel  in  thick  weather  it  is  better  to 
borrow  on  deal  Island  shore,  but  as  a  rule — during  fogs — it  is  advisable 
to  pass  southw^ard  of  Blonde  Rock.  If  from  the  southward,  with  Blonde 
liock  in  sight,  Flat  Island  seen  just  open  east  of  Seal  Island  will  lead 
between  Blonde  Rock  and  Elbow  Shoal. 

Anchorages. — Temporary  anchorage  may  be  obtained  on  the  east 
side  of  Mud  Island  in  about  8  fathoms,  with  the  east  end  of  Mud  Island 
in  line  with  the  middle  of  Round  ^sland,  and  the  SE.  end  of  Mud  Island 
in  line  with  the  middle  of  Noddy  Island. 

A  vess'^1  may  also  anchor  on  the  NW.  side  of  Flat  Island,  but  it  must 
be  distinctly  understood  that  the  anchorages  around  these  islands  are 
not  recommended,  and  should  only  be  resorted  to  as  a  matter  of  con- 
venience in  fine  weather,  or  when  driven  by  necessity  during  bad 
weather. 

Black  Ledge,  nearly  a  mile  west  of  Mud  Island,  is  always  visible, 
excei)t  at  high- water  springs,  when  its  position  is  marked  by  a  breaker. 

Mud  Island  Shcal,  which  is  ^  mile  in  length,  should  be  avoided  by 
vessels  of  large  draft,  because  the  bottom  being  irregular  it  is  prob- 
able the  least  water  has  not  been  obtained.  From  the  depth  of  4 
fathoms  on  the  eastern  end  of  the  shoal  Seal  Island  lighthouse  is  seen 
just  open  west  of  Division  Point  bearing  S.  15°  E.  5  miles ;  and  the 
south  end  of  Mud  Island  S.  89°  E.,  a  little  over  2  miles. 

In  steering  between  Noddy  and  Seal  Islands  a  vessel  should  pass 
southward  of  this  shoal. 

Soldier  Ledge  is  a  datigeroas  patch  of  rocks  about  2|  miles  N.  56° 
W.  of  the  north  point  of  Flat  Island ;  the  passage  between,  though 
available,  is  not  recommended,  as  it  is  possible  shoals  may  exist  in  the 
parts  only  partially  examined.  A  portion  of  the  ledge,  about  4  mile 
long,  uncovers  about  2  hours  after  high  water  and  is  very  daugeroust 
but  it  generally  breaks  when  covered. 

The  SE.  extreme  of  Frenchman  Island  seen  open  north  of  Bald  Tus- 
ket  Island  bearing  N.  23"^  E.  leads  westward  of  Soldier  Ledge. 

Stoddart  Cove  lies  just  within  the  north  point  of  Stoddart  Island, 
which  is  2^  miles  from  the  west  head  of  Cape  Sable  Island  ;  the  cove  in 
which  there  is  not  less  than  14  feet  water  affords  good  anchorage  in 
all  weather  *br  small  vessels.  In  entering  keep  on  the  Stoddart  Island 
shore,  in  order  to  avoid  a  rock  awash  at  low  water  springs  about  350 
yards  off  the  west  ,()int  of  Prospect  Island. 

Shag  Harbor,  between  Bon  Portage  Island  and  the  main,  is  adapted 
for  vessels  of  any  draft,  and  though  open  to  the  southward,  is  said  to 
be  sheltered  from  any  heavy  sea  by  the  ledges  off  Cape  Sable.  In  1805 
her  majesty's  ships  SplUn.v  and  Oannet  used  an  anchorage  west  of  Pros- 
pect Island  in  about  8  fathoms,  with  the  western  tangents  of  Green  and 
Stoddart  Islands  in  line,  and  the  Baptist  church  of  Shag  Harbor  vil- 
lage in  line  with  the  north  end  of  Prospect  Island  bearing  NE.  This 
position  is  to  the  eastward — and  beyond  the  influence — of  the  strength 


"^ 


~«^MVS3^S^iSSMi 


8HA0    AND    PUBNICO   HARBORS. 


55 


is  better  to 
8  advisable 
7ith  Blonde 
lid  will  lead 

on  the  east 
Mud  Island 
Mud  Island 

but  it  must 
islands  are 
tter  of  con- 
luring   bad 

ays  visible, 
r  a  breaker, 
avoided  by 
r  it  is  prob" 
depth  of  4 
tuse  is  seen 
!8 ;  and  the 

ihould  pass 

Diles  N.  56° 
sen,  though 
exist  in  the 
boat  4  mile 
daugerousi 

if  Bald  Tus- 

Ige. 

lart  Island, 

the  cove  in 

ichorage  in 

dart  Island 

■8  about  350 

,  is  adapted 
1,  is  said  to 
le.  In  1805 
est  of  Pros- 
r  Green  and 
Harbor  vil- 
:NE.  This 
he  strength 


of  the  tidal  streams,  and  the  holding  ground  is  laore  tenacious  tiian 
nearer  the  shore,  but  not  being  good,  a  long  scope  of  cable  should  be 
given;  the  best  holding  ground  is  said  to  be  above  Conquer  All. 
Southerly  winds,  though  blowing  hard  at  Cape  Sable  and  Seal  Island, 
did  not  blo^v  home  in  September  and  October,  1805,  though  aground 
swell  was  experienced  at  the  anchorage. 

When  making  the  harbor  from  the  southward  or  westward  in  toler- 
ably clear  weather  the  entrance  is  easily  distinguished,  as  Bon  Portage 
Island  makes  out  well,  the  white  beach  on  the  south  point  being  con- 
spicuous under  tiie  dark  trees.  In  entering  with  the  floo«l  a  wide  berth 
should  be  given  to  the  south  point  of  the  island,  as  the  tide  sets  di- 
rectly for  it  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour. 

Cockerwit  Passage.— At  the  entrance  of  Cockerwit  or  Wood  Har- 
bor and  between  it  and  the  Mutton  Islands,  there  is  a  good  anchorage 
in  5  to  ")^  fathoms,  mud.  In  the  passage  to  this  anchorage  there  is  a 
rock  which  uncovers  at  low  springs,  having  deep  water  close  to.  Rob- 
inson Ball  station  (built  of  stone)  in  line  with  the  center  of  Little  Stony 
Island  leads  on  this  rock ;  but  a  house  standing  on  the  northern  end  of 
Stoddart  Island  seen  just  open  eastward  of  a  detached  rock  oflf  Pros- 
pect Point  leads  eastward.  Cockerwit  Passage  can  only  be  used  by 
vessels  drawing  8  to  9  feet  water,  and  steered  by  experienced  persons. 

St.  John  Ledge,  a  dangerous  shoal  3  mile  in  extent,  has  near  its 
center  a  patch  which  generally  shows  except  at  high  water  springs. 
Pubnico  Lighthouse  open  to  the  westward  of  St.  John  Island  bearing 
N.  17°  E.  leads  westward  of  the  ledge. 

A  red  bell  buoy  is  moored  in  21  fathoms  about  IJ  miles  southwest- 
ward  from  St.  John  Ledge  with  Pubnico  Light-house  bearing  N.  10°  E. 
distant  0.^  miles. 

Directions.— Pubnico  Harbor  affords  safe  anchorage  to  ships  of  large 
draft,  and  from  tlie  comparative  absence  of  dangers  at  the  entrance  is 
accessible  at  all  times. 

On  api)roaching  the  harbor  with  a  leading  wind,  after  passing  St. 
John  Island,  bring  the  light-house  to  bear  Jf.  39°  E.,  bearing  in  mind 
that  shoal  water  extends  off  St.  Ann  Point  to  the  distance  of  J  mile; 
pass  200  yards  from  the  lighthouse,  and  steer  to  pass  close  on  the  east- 
ern side  of  tlie  white  spar  buoy,  marking  the  outer  sxtremity  of  a  rocky 
ledge — which  uncovers  at  low  water — extending  from  the  western  shore 
a  little  within  Beach  Point.  After  passing  the  buoy  haul  a  little  to  the 
westward,  and  steer  for  the  church,  a  conspicuous  object  on  the  west- 
ern shore,  in  order  to  clear  a  shoal  on  the  eastern  shore  with  11  feet 
water  (but  on  which  it  is  possible  there  may  be  a  less  depth,  as  the 
bottom  is  sharp  and  irregular),  and  when  the  lighthouse  bears  south 
steer  north  and  anchor  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  mud,  abreast  the  wharves 
near  Meres  house,  inclining  a  little  to  the  western  side  of  the  harbor. 

Caution. — Vessels  bound  to  Pubnico  should  be  careful  to  keep  well 
outside  St.  John  Ledge,  as  the  current  sets  directly  over  it,  sometimes 
very  strong. 


■BBB 


i    £ki» 

1 

M 

ii 

1 

1 

1  Wi 

'    J:^  »     HI 

\ 

56 


NOVA    SCOT'A — 8.    \V.    COAST. 


IVater. — A  fresh-water  spring,  close  to  the  southern  wharf,  affords 
about  4  tons  of  good  water  daily. 

St  Ann  Shoal,  I  mile  in  length,  with  2j  fathoms  on  it,  lies  with  St. 
Ann  Point,  hearing  S.  62°  K.  Ij^  miles,  and  the  southern  Twin  Island  N. 
22°  E.  upwards  of  IJ  miles. 

Nearly  abreast  St.  Ann  Shoal  is  a  rocky  spit  with  2^  fathoms,  extend- 
ing ^  mile  from  the  main  shore.  The  passage  between  these  dangers 
is  deep  and  §  mile  broad.  The  Twin  Islands  in  line  bearing  N.  13°  B. 
leads  in  mid-channel  between  the  spit  and  St.  Ann  Shoal. 

Twin  Islands,  about  J  mile  from  the  shore  and  the  same  distance 
apart,  are  very  small  in  size,  with  shoal  water  around  them,  leaving 
only  a  narrow  deep  water  channel  between.  Off  the  northern  Twin  are 
two  small  detached  shoals,  one  with  2^  fatlioms  bearing  N.  74°  W.  J 
mile,  and  the  other  with  7  feet  water  N.  23°  W.  nearly  ^  mile. 

Within  Twin  Islands  there  is  a  narrow  channel  with  upwards  of  5 
fatiioms. 

Abbott  Harbor,  with  3J  fathoms  water,  is  formed  by  the  narrow 
channel  between  Abbot  Island  and  the  main  shore,  and  though  only 
200  yards  across  at  its  entrance,  is  well  adapted  for  vessels  of  small 
draft,  being  easy  of  access  and  completely  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

Argyle. — The  scattered  township  of  Argyle  lies  on  the  main  land  to 
the  nortb-rard  of  Abbott  Island.  Off  its  shores  are  several  anchorages 
but  the  channels  leading  to  them  are  too  intricate  to  be  entered  without 
a  pilot. 

White  Head  Island,  the  southeasternmost  of  the  numerous  islands 
in  the  upper  part  of  the  bay  between  Abbott  Harbor  and  Frenchman 
Point  is  situated  5  miles  north  of  St.  Ann  Point;  the  island  is  about  J 
mile  in  length,  and  conspicuous  by  earthy  cliffs  of  a  reddish  color, 
nearly  70  feet  in  height  on  its  southward  side. 

TVhite  Head  Ledge,  about  ^  mile  in  length,  uncovers  near  its  cen- 
ter at  low  water,  and  after  half  ebb  the  position  of  the  shoal  is  marked 
by  kelp.  From  the  part  which  dries  the  south  end  of  White  Head 
Island  bears  S.  76°  W.  ^  mile. 

West  Shoal,  about  ^  mile  in  length,  has  only  12  feet  water  near  its 
southern  end,  and  from  it  the  south  end  of  White  Head  Island  is  dis^ 
taut  ^  mile  S.  02°  E. 

Jones  Ledge,  nearly  ^  mile  in  length,  dries  near  its  center,  from 
which  the  south  end  of  Jones  Island  bears  N.  9°  W.  if  mile. 

OuU  Island,  a  low  green  island  situated  2  miles  westward  of  White 
Head  Island,  should  not  be  approached  on  its  southern  side  within  J 
mile.  From  its  northern  end  a  long  narrow  stony  bar,  which  dries  at 
low  water,  extends  §  mile. 

Midway  between  Gull  and  Eastern  Bar  Islands  is  a  rocky  patch  400 
yards  long  having  only  4  feet  on  ltd  southern  end. 

Gull  L''ilge  lies  2  miles  S.  6°  E.  of  Gull  Island  and  has  only  5  feet 


"aAm^- 


JONES    ANCHORAGE TU8KET   RIVER. 


57 


[arf,  affords 

ie8  with  St. 
u  Island  N. 

tns,  extend- 
86  dangers 
g  N.  13°  B. 

ne  distance 
Mn,  leaving 
•n  Twin  are 
r.  74°  W,  J 
le. 
•wards  of  5 

the  narrow 
hongh  only 
sis  of  small 
II  winds, 
lain  land  to 
anchorages 
red  without 

ous  islands 
Frenchman 
1  is  about  ^ 
Idish  color, 

)ar  its  cen- 
,1  is  marked 
nnte  Head 

ter  near  its 
land  is  dis* 

lenter,  from 

d  of  White 
le  within  J 
ch  dries  at 

y  patch  400 

only  5  feet 


on  its  shoalest  part,  from  which  the  large  barn  on  Sheep  Island  is  on 
with  the  western  high  water  line  of  Gull  Island. 

Southwest  Shoal  is  small,  with  2A  fathoms  and  deep  water  close 
to.  From  this  shoal  the  west  end  of  Gull  Island  bears  N.  0^°  E.  one 
mile. 

Jones  Anchorage — In  case  of  emergency  Jones  Anchorage  may 
be  rendered  available  by  proceeding  as  follows,  viz:  Steer  for  White 
Head  Island  on  a  N.  5°  E.  bearing,  and  keep  along  its  eastern  shore, 
with  the  center  of  Lear  Island,  60  feet  high,  bearing  N.  3°  W. ;  this 
course  will  lead  between  White  Head  Island  and  ledge,  and  also  nearly 
in  mid  channel  between  Pumpkin  Island  and  Pumpkin  Ledge;  tiie  lat- 
ter has  only  2  feet  on  it,  but  is  marked  at  half  tide  by  kelp. 

When  abreast  the  north  end  of  Pumpkin  Island,  or  with  the  w.'st 
ends  of  Thrum  and  Hog  Islands  in  line  bearing  N.  23°  W.,  alter  course 
for  the  east  tangent  of  Jones  Island,  and  steer  along  its  ea»t  shore 
about  300  yards  oft",  where  good  anchorage  will  be  found  in  about  6 
fathoms,  mud,  with  the  center  of  Ram  Island  in  line  with  the  south  end 
of  Lear  Island. 

To  pass  west  of  White  Head  Island,  bring  the  east  end  of  Thrum 
Island  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  Pumpkin  Island  bearing  N.  11°  E., 
this  mark  will  lead  midway  between  White  Head  Island  and  West 
Shoal.  After  passing  along  the  west  of  Pumpkin  Island  steer  for  the 
channel  between  Thrum  and  Jones  islands,  and  proceed  as  before 
directed. 

Big  Fish  Rocks  consist  of  a  small  cluster  of  rocks,  which  uncover 
at  low  water,  about  i  mile  NW.  of  Big  Fish  Island,  with  3^  fathoms 
in  the  channel  between.  From  these  rocks  the  SW.  tangents  of  Big 
Fish  and  Eastern  Bar  islands  are  in  line,  and  the  large  barn  on  Big 
Sheep  Island  open  of  north  tangent  of  Big  Fish  Island. 

Tusket  River— Eastern  ChanneL— Tusket  River  should  not  be  at- 
tempted at  low  water  by  vessels  over  15  leet  draft ;  it  affords  safe  an- 
chorage, but  the  two  approaches,  being  narrow  and  beset  with  dangers, 
require  great  caution  when  entering. 

If  from  the  southward.  Gull  Ledge  may  be  cleared  by  bringing  the 
large  barn  on  Sheep  Island  well  open  of  the  west  end  of  Gull  Island,  or 
just  open  to  the  east  eml  of  Gull  Island.  After  passing  the  ledge  keep 
to  the  NE.  until  Big  Fish  Island  light-house  is  in  line  with  the  north 
end  of  Eastern  Bar  Island,  bearing  N.  47°  W.,  and  by  steering  this 
course  the  shoal  water  off  Gull  Island  and  the  half-tide  rock  off  Sheep 
Island  will  be  avoided.  On  nearing  Eastern  Bar  Island,  when  the  east 
end  of  Sheep  Island  bears  N.  19o  W.,  keep  carefully  on  this  course  and 
steer  through  the  narrows  between  Wilson  Point  and  Eastern  Bar 
Island  as  far  as  the  south  point  of  Tucker  Island,  when  alter  course  to 
bring  Wilson  Point  astern,  bearing  S.  32°  E.,  and  anchor  in  about  6 
fathoms,  mud,  off  the  west  end  of  Sheep  Island. 

Western  Channel.— After  passing  Gull  Ledge,  open  Tucker  Island 


t 

ft 
i 


.1 


memim 


58 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    W.    COAST. 


%^:. 


west  of  Inner  Fisb  Island,  bearing  north,  which  is  a  good  luarlf  for 
clearing  the  SW.  shoal,  and  after  passing  it  keep  to  the  NW.  until 
Big  Fish  Island  light-house  bears  N.5o  B.,  when  continue  on  that  course 
until  the  south  end  of  Eastern  Bar  and  White  Head  Islands  are  in  line ; 
then  steer  N.  38°  \V.  for  a  short  distance  until  the  east  end  of  Mike 
Island  is  apparently  just  touching  the  west  end  of  Tucker  Island,  bear- 
ing N.  120  E. ;  steer  with  these  marks  on,  passing  200  yards  west  of  Big 
Fish  Island,  until  little  Fish  Island  apparently  just  touches  Big  Fish 
Island,  when  by  keeping  these  marks  astern  a  vessel  will  clear  Big 
Fish  Rocks  on  their  eastern  side,  and  avoid  the  shoal  ground  north  of 
Big  Fish  Island. 

When  Inner  Fish  Island  is  seen  open  east  of  Big  Fish  Island,  alter 
course  for  Pinch  Gut  Island  N.  9°  E.,  which  should  lead  iu  deep  water 
between  Tucker  Island  and  its  ledge  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel,  and 
when  Wilson  Point  appears  to  touch  the  north  side  of  Tucker  Island  a 
vessel  will  be  clear  of  the  shoal  ground  north  of  Tucker  Island,  and 
might  steer  to  the  eastward  and  anchor  as  before  directed  off  the  east 
end  of  Sheep  Island.  Vessels  should  not  proceed  beyond  this  anchor- 
age without  local  knowledge,  as  the  channel  is  intricate  and  tide  rapid. 
In  the  narrows  abreast  Plymoutli  settlement  the  stream  during  the 
atrength  of  springs  runs  about  5  kn(»ts,  and  in  the  vicinity  of  Pinch  Gut 
Island  2  knots  an  hour. 

Old  Woman  is  the  name  given  to  a  rock  near  the  center  of  a  shoal 
about  800  yards  long  north  and  south,  which  uncovers  at  2  hours'  ebb. 
Big  Fish  island  light-house,  bearing  N.  5°  E.,  leads  eastward  of  this 
danger,  as  well  as  all  the  shoal  patches  and  ledges,  on  the  western  shore 
of  the  western  entrance  to  Tusket  River. 

Old  Man  is  the  largest  of  a  small  cluster  of  rocks  which  uncover  about 
an  hour  before  low-water  springs,  and  from  it  Bald  Tusket  Island  bears 
S.  47°  W.  one  mile.  Owls  Head,  seen  open  east  of  Allen  Island  bear- 
ing N.  36°  W.,  leads  eastward. 

Bald  Tusket  Island  is  about  400  yards  in  extent,  50  feet  high,  and 
bare  of  trees ;  it  is  the  most  off-lying  and  conspicuous  of  the  Tnsket 
Group,  but  should  not  be  approached  on. its  north,  west,  and  south  sides 
nearer  than  i^  milt,  in  consequence  of  shoal  water. 

Little  Bald  Tusket  Shoal,  with  9  feet  water,  lies  with  the  east  end 
of  Marks  Island  apparently  touching  the  south  end  of  Pease  Island, 
bearing  N.  12°  E.,  and  the  north  end  of  Inner  Bald  Island  S.  50°  W. 
about  J  mile.  , 

Harriet  Ledge  occupies  a  central  position  on  a  rocky  shoal  i  mile  in 
length  ;  the  ledge  is  about  200  yards  long,  covers  at  a  third  flood,  and 
during  the  run  of  the  tide  shows  a  considerable  tide  rip. 

From  the  ledge  Holmes  Island  is  seen  just  open  north  of  Spectacle 
Island,  and  the  south  point  of  Pease  Island  apparently  touching  the 
uorth  point  of  liittle  Half  Bald  Island. 
Cleopatra  Shoal  is  a  dangerous  detached  shoal  400  yards  in  length, 


PEASE    ISLAND    LEDGE — SCHOONER    PASSAGE. 


59 


mark  for 
Jf  W.  uutil 
iiat  course 
,i-e  ill  liue ; 
I  of  Mike 
aud,  bear- 
est  of  Big 

Big  Fish 
clear  Big 
i  north  of 

land,  alter 
[eep  water 
annel,  and 
!r  Island  a 
sland,  and 
ft'  the  east 
lis  anchor- 
tide  rapid, 
luring  the 
Pinch  Gut 

of  a  shoal 
lours'  ebb. 
Til  of  this 
item  shore 

over  about 
ilaud  bears 
iland  bear- 

t  high,  aud 
;he  Tusket 
south  sides 

le  east  end 
ise  Island, 
i  S.  50°  W. 

%\  ^  mile  in 
[  flood,  and 

f  Spectacle 
luching  the 

s  in  length, 


with  12  feet  on  its  shoalest  part,  which  is  marked  at  low-water  springs 
by  a  few  long  pieces  of  kelp.  This  danger  has  deep  water  all  round  it, 
and  shows  a  rip  daring  the  run  of  the  tide.  Half  Bald  Island  seen  ojjcu 
east  of  Bald  Tusi^et  Island  leads  eastward,  and  open  west  leads  west- 
ward, of  Cleopatra  Shoal. 

Shoals — Between  Cleopatra  Shoal  and  Bald  Tusket  Island  there  are 
two  small  shoals  with  2J  and  3  fathoms,  respectively,  both  being  marked 
by  rips  during  the  strength  of  the  tides  ;  there  is  a  deep  channel  ^  mile 
broad  between  them  and  Bald  Tusket  Island,  and  a  similar  deep  water 
passage  between  them  and  Cleopatra  Shoal. 

Pease  Island  Ledge,  about  200  yards  in  extent ;  covers  at  one-third 
flood ;  it  is  about  4  mile  from  the  eastern  point  of  Pease  Island,  with  a 
deep-water  channel  between.  The  south  point  of  Spectacle  Island  open 
of  south  point  of  Pease  Island  bearing  S.  84°  W.  leads  to  the  southward 
of  the  ledge. 

Marks  Island  Ledge  uncovers  at  low-water  springs  and  lies  300 
yards  off  the  west  side  of  Marks  Island;  it  shows  a  considerable  rip 
during  the  strength  of  the  tide,  which  runs  over  it  with  great  velocity. 

Allen  Rock  lies  300  yards  off  the  south  end  of  Allen  Island  and 
shows  a  whirl  in  the  strength  of  the  tide. 

Schooner  Passage  Rock,  with  9  feet  water,  lies  nearly  midway  be- 
tween Owls  Heatl  and  Turpentine  islands,  with  a  deep-water  channel 
on  either  side. 

Bird  Rock,  at  the  outer  end  of  a  reef  extending  from  the  south  end 
of  Owls  Head  Island,  always  shows. 

Spectacle  Ledge,  about  400  yards  long  and  very  narrow,  has  11  feet 
on  it,  and  is  marked  by  a  large  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide. 
From  the  shoalest  spot  Spectacle  Island  south  end  bears  N.  5°  E.  up- 
wards of  J  mile. 

Tides. — The  tide  turns  a  little  after  high  and  low  water  respectively, 
and  runs  rapidly  through  the  Tusket  Island  passages,  the  tide  rips  being 
numerous  and  heavy.  Its  general  set  is  to  the  NW.  and  SB.,  but  this 
is  modified  by  the  position  and  shape  of  the  islands,  which  form  con- 
siderable eddies,  and  by  the  main  land,  in  the  vicinity  of  which  the 
tide  follows  its  direction.  The  average  rate  is  from  2  to  4  knots,  and 
round  some  points  its  rate  probably  exceeds  the  latter;  off"  the  north- 
eastern iioint  of  Ellenwood  Island  the  stream  runs  4  knots,  and  in 
Schooner  Passage  3  knots,  per  hour. 

Directions  for  Schooner  Passage.— To  run  through  Schooner  Pas- 
sage from  the  eastward  keep  Owls  Head  open  of  Allen  Island  bearing 
N.  350  W.,  which  will  lead  eastward  of  Old  Man  aud  Little  Bald  Tusket 
Shoals,  and  when  the  barn  of  Ellenwood  Island  appears  to  touch  the 
NE.  end  of  Pease  Island  alter  course  immediately  to  keep  these  marks 
on  III  order  to  pass  westward  of  Pease  Island  Ledge,  which  should  be 
rounded  close-to  on  the  flood,  as  it  setsi  strong  towards  the  south  point 
of  Pease  Island. 


'■i 


yf 


RSIBSPV 


1    t  I 


60 


NOVA    SCOTTA — 8.    W.    COAST. 


Having  passed  the  narrows,  bring  Candlebox  Island  midway  between 
Allen  and  Haymaker  Islands,  and  steer  for  it,  this  course  will  lead  clear 
of  Haymaker  Ledge  and  Allen  Rock,  and  after  passing  Allen  Island 
keep  to  the  westward  until  the  east  end  of  Murder  Island  is  shut  in  by 
Candlebox  Island,  in  order  to  pass  west  of  Schooner  Passage  Rock. 

Pass  Candlebox  Island  close-to  on  its  west  side,  and  steer  out  through 
the  narrows  of  the  northern  entrance,  with  the  south  point  of  Candlebox 
Island  apparently  just  touching  Tur|)entine  Island,  until  Owls  Head 
appears  just  to  touch  the  tangent  of  Haymaker  Island,  and  with  these 
latter  marks  on  steer  out  between  Murder  Island  Shoal  and  the  shoal 
spit  extending  from  the  N\V^.  point  of  Murder  Island. 

For  EUenwood  Passage.— If  intending  to  proceed  through  Ellen- 
wood  Passage,  after  passing  Pease  Island  Ledge  keep  the  barn  on 
EUenwood  Island  just  open  south  of  Allen  Island  bearing  N.  57°  W.  to 
clear  Allen  Rock,  and  after  i)assing  it  keep  in  mid-channel  between 
Marks  and  Allen  Islands,  altering  course  to  pass  between  Bird  Rock 
and  EUenwood  Island.  After  passing  this  rock,  bring  it  in  line  with 
the  east  point  of  Marks  Island,  which  will  lead  through  the  deep  water 
channel  of  the  sand  narrows,  continue  on  until  Owls  Head  and  the 
western  tangent  of  Haymaker  Island  are  apparently  just  touching, 
when  steer  out  with  these  marks  on  as  before  directed. 

Anchorages.— Good  anchorage  will  be  found  in  Schooner  Passage 
ott'  the  north  end  of  Allen  Island  in  5  to 9  fathoms,  mud;  and  there  is 
also  good  anchorage  to  be  obtained  in  Ellen  wooil  Passage  off  the  barn, 
about  300  yards  to  the  northward  of  Bird  Rock,  in  about  5  fathoms, 
gravel  and  sand.  Care  should  be  taken  to  anchor  out  of  the  strength 
of  the  tide  in  EUenwood  Passage  on  the  following  bearings:  Bird 
Rock  S.  68°  B.,  and  barn  on  EUenwood  Island  S.  72°  W. 

To  approach  this  anchorage  from  the  S  W.  keep  the  cliff  on  the  south- 
western point  of  EUenwood  Island  open  east  of  Spectacle  Island  bear- 
ing north,  in  order  to  clear  Spectacle  Ledge,  taking  care  not  to  open  out 
Holmes  Island  until  past  Harriet  Ledge. 

When  the  south  end  of  Pease  Island  is  in  line  with  the  north  end  of 
Half  Bald  Island  steer  for  the  south  end  of  Marks  Island,  and  passing 
it  on  its  eastern  side  steer  through  EUenwood  Passage  to  the  anchorage 
before  described. 

Gannet  Rock,  barely  400  yards  in  length,  is  a  narrow  rocky  ridge, 
having  near  its  southern  end  apeak  resembUng  a  sugar  loaf,  50  feet 
high,  with  a  lump  on  its  northern  end  of  almost  equal  elevation.  From 
the  peak  Yarmouth  light-house  bears  N.  4°  W.  nearly  9^  miles,  and 
Seal  Island  light-house  S.  23°  E.  15|  miles;  both  will  be  in  sight  in 
clear  weather. 

North  Rock,  of  very  small  extent,  shows  about  half  tide,  and  lies  4 
mile  N.  12°  W.  from  Gannet  Rock. 

South  Rock,  also  small  and  showing  at  half  tide,  lies  more  than  §ot 
a  mile  fr«»m  Gannet  Rock  ia  a  S.  12°  B.  direction. 


ELLENWOOD    PASSAGE — JEBOGUE   LEDGE. 


61 


y  between 
lead  clear 
en  iHland 
»hut  in  by 
I  Rock, 
it  through 
'andlebox 
>wl8  Head 
Rrith  these 
1  be  shoal 

igh  Ellen- 
e  barn  on 

57°  W.  to 
1  between 
Bird  Rock 
I  line  with 
leep- water 
[1  and  the 

touching, 

sr  Passage 
nd  there  is 
f  the  barn, 
5  fathoms, 
le  strength 
ngs :   Bird 

the  south- 
slaud  bear- 
,0  open  out 

orth  end  of 

nd  piivssing 

anchorage 

ocky  ridge, 

>af,  50  feet 

ion.     From 

miles,  and 

in  sight  in 

5,  and  lies  4 

re  than  §  ot 


Sootheast  Rock  lies  nearly  1^  miles  8.  31°  E.  from  Gannet  Rock, 
and  shows  two  distinct  breaks  in  heavj'  weather  and  a  considerable  rip 
during  the  strength  of  the  tide.  It  is  steep  to  on  its  cast  and  west 
sides,  and  from  it  Yarmouth  light-house  appears  just  touching  the  east- 
ern tiingent  of  Green  Island. 

Q-annet  Sooth  Shoal  lies  4^  miles  in  a  southerly  <lirection  from  Gan  • 
net  Rock,  the  least  water  found  being  4  fathoms ;  it  shows  a  tide  rip, 
and  breaks  in  heavy  weather.  From  it  the  outer  high  lump  of  Cape 
Fourchu  is  just  open  of  the  east  tangent  of  Green  Island. 

Gannet  Southwest  Shoal  bears  from  Gannet  Rock  S.  S°  W.  3 
miles,  and  has  only  3  fathoms  water;  it  extends  |  mile  north  and  south, 
shows  a  tide  rip,  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather.  Green  Island,  just 
open  west  of  Gannet  Rock,  leads  over  the  shoal. 

Qannet  Dry  Ledge  uncovers  at  2  hours'  ebb,  and  generally  breaks 
at  high  water;  it  bears  from  Gannet  Rock  peak  S.  30°  W.  1'^  miles. 

Jacko  Ridge  consists  of  two  rocky  patches  about  1^  miles  in  extent, 
with  '27  feet  over  the  shoalest  part,  which  is  distant  13  miles  S.  5°  W. 
from  Jebogue  Point. 

Q-reen  Island,  about  is  mile  long  and  50  feet  high,  is  distant  2^  miles 
S.  22°  W.  from  Jebogue  Point.  It  would  be  advisable  to  give  the  south 
point  of  this  island  a  berth  of  at  least  ^  mile. 

Caution. — The  foregoing  shoals  and  ledges  being  very  uneven,  it  is 
highly  probable  that  when  examined  the  least  water  might  not  have 
been  discovered. 

Reef  Island  Ledge,  oft'  the  entrance  of  Jebogue  River,  uncovers  at 
quarter  ebb,  and  is  shoal  all  round  for  a  considerable  extent ;  between 
it  and  Reef  Island  there  is  u(  safe  channel,  whilst  to  the  southward 
shoal  water  extends  to  the  distance  of  a  mile.  From  the  center  of  the 
ledge  Jebogue  Point  bears  N.  51°  W.  one  uule,  and  the  south  end  of 
Reef  Island  east,  ^  mile. 

Reef  Shoal,  about  ^  mile  long,  has  only  12  feet  on  its  shoalest  part, 
and  causes  a  tide  rip;  although  there  is  deep  water  on  either  side,  the 
shoal  had  better  be  passed  on  its  western  side. 

From  the  west  end  of  the  shoal  Yarmouth  lighthouse  is  just  shut  in 
with  Jebogue  Point,  and  the  south  end  of  Reef  Island  bears  N.  56°  E. 
1^  miles. 

Yarmouth  lighthouse,  open  west  of  Jebogue  Point,  bearing  N.  22°  W., 
clears  this  reef  close-to  on  its  western  side,  and  also  leads  through  the 
inner  channel. 

Jebogue  Point  Shoal  is  an  extensive  patch,  with  14  feet  water  about 
4  mile  oft'  the  pitch  of  Jebogue  Point,  with  3^  to  5  fathoms  in  the  chan- 
nel between. 

Jebogue  Ledge,  about  ^  mile  in  extent,  has  only  2  feet  on  its  shoal- 
est part,  from  which  Jebogue  Point  is  distant  one  mile  N.  37°  E. ;  it  is 
very  dangerous,  shows  a  tide  rip,  and  breaks  with  an  ordinary  swell. 
There  is  a  good  channel  between  this  danger  and  Green  Island. 


i  V: 


62 


NOVA    SCOTIA 8,    VV.    COAST. 


Foul  Qround,  iibout  ^  mile  in  len^fth,  with  only  9  feet  wat^r,  lies 
wirli  the  .soiitii  ••ikI  of  Keef  ImIhiuI  in  line  with  Jebogue  Point  bearing 
S.  0'-'^  E.,  the  latter  point  bein?  1.^  miles  distant. 

Roaring  Bull  is  a  small  rock,  which  nncovers  nboiit  3  feet  at  low- 
water  sprin^js,  about  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  in  the  direct  line 
between  (Jreen  Islnnd  and  Yarmouth  lijjht-honse;  from  it  Jeboi^jue 
Point  bears  8.  51^  E.  li{  miles.  The  rock  shows  a  tide  rip,  aiul  breaks 
with  an  ordinary  swell.  A  red  bell  buoy  is  moored  1^  miles  S.  50^  W.  of 
this  rock  and  serves  as  a  ^uide  to  vessels  seeking  the  entrance  to  Yar- 
mouth. 

Jebogue  River. — The  appro<aches  to  Jebogue  Uiver  are  studded  with 
dangers  for  which — especially  in  hazy  weather — no  good  clearing 
marks  can  be  given,  and  a  bar  extends  across  its  entrance  having  iu 
one  part  only  1 1  feet  v/ater. 

There  is,  however,  a  safe  anchorage  inside  the  entrance  of  the  river, 
and  in  cases  of  necessity  it  may  be  used  by  vessels  of  moderate  draft. 

Directions. — A  vessel  from  the  SW.  and  in  the  vicinity  of  Green  Is- 
land should  steer  a  course  to  pass  westward  of  Keef  Shoal,  and  when 
the  west  end  of  Perry  Island  appears  to  touch  the  sandy  spit  opposite 
Fox  Island  bearing  N.  11°  E.  steer  for  it  on  that  bearing  over  the  bar, 
and  pass  about  midway  between  Fox  Island  and  the  spit. 

Good  anchorage  iu  smooth  water,  though  iu  a  limited  space,  may  be 
obtained  in  16  feet  water  about  250  yards  within  the  north  point  of  Fox 
Island,  care  being  taken  tokeepGanuet  rock  in  sight  in  the  middle  of  the 
entrance  in  order  to  avoid  the  mud  bank  on  the  western  shore  and  two 
small  mud  banks  in  the  middle  of  the  channel  at  its  bend.  Good,  fresh 
water  can  be  obtained,  the  supply  being  about  3  tons  per  tide. 

yarmcath  Sound  is  available  as  an  anchorage  with  all  winds, 
excepting  those  between  south  and  west,  wlien  it  is  dangerous  with 
strong  winds.  Tlie  best  anchorage  is  about  20  feet,  over  sandy  bottom, 
with  the  light-house  bearing  west,  distant  about  J  mile.  The  shore 
inside  the  lighthouse  should  not  be  approached  within  200  yards,  as 
several  detached  rocks  lie  off  it. 

Heu  and  Chickens  consist  of  a  cluster  of  rocks  extending  about 
400  yaids  from  the  shore  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  sound  opposite  the 
lighthouse,  from  which  they  bear  east.  The  rocks  begin  to  uncover 
about  two-thirds  ebb,  and  a  good  mark  for  clearing  them  on  their 
western  side  is  the  Independent  Church  spire  at  Yarmouth  in  line  with 
the  middle  of  low  beach  at  the  head  of  the  sound. 

Dangers. — The  principal  danger  outside  the  beacon  at  the  extremity 
of  Bunker  Island  Ledge  is  a  rock,  with  only  one  foot  water,  lying  350 
yards  from  Ship's  steru ;  whilst  the  most  important  danger  inside  the 
beacon,  at  the  distance  of  600  yards,  is  a  rock  in  the  middle  of  the 
channel,  having  only  3  feet  over  it. 

Tides. — The  tidal  stream  changes  its  direction  a  little  after  high  and 
low  water  by  the  shore  respectively.    From  Ellenwood  Island  to  Yar- 


YARMOUTH    ilAKHOR. 


fi3 


mouth  the  flood  stream  runs  between  the  ledges  inside  Green  Islund 
about  3  knots  daring  its  strength,  with  a  aijort  interval  of  shick  water. 
The  flood  sets  strong  round  Cape  Fourehn  to  the  northward,  so  that  a 
vessel  nmking  for  Yarmouth  Sound  should  haul  up  immediately  she 
has  cleare<l  Roaring  Bull  Kock. 

Yarmouth  Harbor.— The  town  of  Yarmouth  is  of  considerable  ex- 
tent, being  upwards  of  2  miles  in  lengtii  in  a  continuous  line  ;  it  exports 
a  large  amount  of  flisli,  and  supplies  can  generally  be  obtained.  Fresh 
water  can  be  procured  from  wells;  that  from  the  Inke  is  not  good,  and 
difficult  to  obtain.     It  has  a  population  of  5,000. 

Charges. — Pilotage,  as  per  agreement,  about  $2  per  hundred  tons. 
Sick  mariners  fund,  3  cents  per  ton.  Tugboat  charges,  about  4  cents 
per  ton  inward  and  outward.  Discharging  ballast,  10  cents  per  ton. 
Cost  of  stone  ballast,  10  cents  per  ton.  Loading  general  cargo,  about 
30  cents  per  ton. 

The  channel  leading  to  the  anchorage  ottthe  town  is  well  marked  by 
beacons  and  buoys ;  and  when  above  Battery  Point  with  red  i)osts  on 
the  starboard  hand  and  black  on  port.  The  rock  near  Bunker  Island 
Ledge  is  marked  by  a  red  spar  buoy,  whilst  the  danger  inside  the  bea- 
con is  marked  by  a  black  buoy. 

The  anchorage  within  Bunker  Island  is  safe  from  all  winds,  but  the 
channel  leading  to  it  is  narrow,  circuitous,  and  being  studded  with 
dangers  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot,  whose  services  can 
be  procured  by  making  the  usual  signal  when  off  the  light-house.  In 
the  event  of  a  vessel  being  caught  in  the  sound  during  a  southwest 
gale  and  compelled  to  run  for  the  inner  anchorage,  the  following 
directions  may  prove  serviceable : 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent  and  vice- 
consular  agent. 

Directions. — If  from  the  sound  anchorage  steer  to  the  NE.,  inside 
the  Hen  and  Chickens,  until  the  north  end  of  Ship's  stern  bears  N.  IT^ 
W.,  \»  hen  it  should  be  steered  for,  keeping  about  200  yards  from  its 
east  side,  and  passing  on  the  western  side  of  the  beacon  about  the  same 
distance.  After  passing  the  beacon  steer  to  pass  about  400  yards  from 
the  Bunker  Island  shore;  about  250  yards  to  the  northward  of  Battery 
Point  good  anchorage  will  be  found  in  5^  fathoms. 

Lurcher  Shoal  consists  of  two  shoal  patches,  distant  from  each 
other  2|  miles  N.  31°  E.  and  S.  31°  W.,  having  between  them  a  deep- 
water  channel  with  7  to  17  fathoms.  The  SW.  shoal  is  the  larger  and 
shoaler,  having  only  9  feet  water,  and  shows  a  considerable  rip  during 
the  strength  of  the  tidal  stream;  it  bears  N.  80°  W.,  14^  miles  from 
Yarmouth  li?ht-house,  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather. 

The  NB.  shoal  has  5  fathoms  on  it,  and  shows  a  good  tide  rip. 

Automatic  buoy. — An  automatic  buoy,  painted  red,  with  the  letter 
L  in  white,  and  sounding  a  10-inch  whistle,  is  moored  iu  13  fathoms 
water  ^  mile  west  of  Lurcher  Shoal. 


raso 


wtiM 


\\ 


i!    I 

■i 


1^ 


I 


m 


64 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    W.    COAST. 


Tides. — At  the  NE.  Lurcher  Shoal  the  ebb  Htreain  commences  at 
lb.  3Uiii.  after  the  time  of  liigh  water  at  Yarmouth;  at  ueap  tides  it 
attains  si  velocity  of  2^  knotM,  the  averaf^e  set  being  9^  miles,  in  a 
HOdtiierly  direction.  The  tlood  sets  in  an  opposite  direction,  its  greatest 
rate  at  neai>H  being  2\  miles  and  its  average  set  8  miles.  The  slack  is 
full  one  hour  in  duration. 

Coast. — From  Cape  Fourchu,  in  the  immediate  vicinity  ofYarmoutb 
Coast,  as  far  as  Cape  St.  Mary,  a  distance  of  17^  miles,  the  coast  line  is 
of  an  undulating  character,  varying  in  elevation  from  20  to  100  feet,  and 
Willi  tiieexceptionof  one  off-lying  danger,  viz, Trinity  Ledge,  is  remarka- 
bly exempt  from  danger;  and  as  a  rule  may  be  safely  approached  even 
by  large  ships  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile. 

Trinity  Rock  consists  of  three  small  heads  close  together,  all  of 
which  uncover  at  low  water  springs,  the  highest  being  2  or  3  feet  above 
the  water,  and  the  others  just  seen.  This  danger  bears  S.  33<=>  W.  6f 
miles  from  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  N.  31°  W.  13.J  miles  from  Cape  Fourchu; 
it  causes  a  great  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide,  and  breaks  heavily 
in  bad  weather ;  the  rock  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  ^  mile. 
The  western  side  of  the  rock  is  marked  by  a  red  bell  buoy. 

The  tidal  stream  runs  with  great  streugth  at  the  rock,  attaining  a 
velocity  of  2  knots ;  the  ebb  sets  about  S.  30°  E.,  and  the  flood  N.  30°  W. 

St.  Mary  Bay  is  of  peculiar  formation,  its  western  shore  consisting 
of  a  mere  strip  of  laud,  upwards  of  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  forming  a 
natural  breakwater  for  adistauce  of  30  miles,  with  a  varying  elevation 
between  430  feet  at  its  neck  and  100  feet  on  Bryer  Island.  Through 
this  natural  barrier  are  two  narrow  navigable  channels,  known  as 
Grand  and  Petit  Passages,  through  which  the  tide  rushes  with  great 
velocity ;  the  latter  is  the  shortest  route  between  St.  John  and  Cape 
Fourcliu,  and  being  entirely  free  from  danger  is  available  for  steam 
vessels,  or  sailing  vessels  with  favorable  wind  and  tide. 

The  St.  Mary  shore  of  Long  Island  is  bold  to,  and  a  vessel  can  pass 
tolerably  close  along  it,  except  in  rounding  Dartmouth  Point,  off  which 
some  ragged  rocks  lie  nearly  300  yards  distant. 

After  passing  Petit  Passage,  the  western  coast  of  St.  Mary  Bay  is 
generally  bold  and  straight ;  it  may  safely  be  approached  to  200  yards 
as  far  as  4  miles  beyond  East  Sandy  Cove;  after  which  the  water  gradu- 
ally  shoals  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 

The  princii)al  trade  at  St.  Mary  Bay  is  in  ship's  and  cord  wood. 

St  Mary  ShoaL — To  the  northeastward  of  East  Sandy  Oove  lies 
St.  Mary  Shoal,  which  is  the  onlj'  detached  danger  in  the  bay.  It  is  of 
large  extent,  and  has  a  deep  channel  on  both  sides.  A  rock  with  only 
5  feet  water  rises  from  the  shoal  about  a  third  of  the  distance  across 
the  bay  from  the  western  shore,  and  from  it  the  east  point  of  East 
Sandy  Oove  bears  8.  62°  W.  3  miles,  the  NW.  point  of  Gilbert  Cove 
S.  75°  E.  2^  miles,  and  the  south  tangent  of  the  remarkable  red  cliff  at 
the  bead  of  the  bay  N.  48°  E.  6  miles. 


8T.    MARY    BAY — ANCHORAGE. 


65 


ences  at 
tides  it 
les,  iu  a 
greatest 
»  slack  is 

armouth 
St  line  is 
feet,  and 
reraarka- 
hed  even 

er,  all  of 
aet  above 
13°  W.  6J 
Foarchu ; 
:8  heavily 
an  ^  mile. 

staining  a 
N.  30°  W. 
sonsisting 
forming  a 
elevation 
Through 
cnown  as 
ith  great 
and  Cape 
for  steam 

can  pass 
off  which 

try  Bay  is 
200  yards 
ber  gradu- 

'ood. 

Cove  lies 
It  is  of 
with  only 
ice  across 
It  of  East 
>ert  Cove 
ed  cliff  at 


TiAe*. — At  tiie  head  of  the  bay  tlid  hei;j;lit  of  tlui  tide  is  affected  by 
the  winds ;  tliose  from  the  8VV.  keeping  the  water  above  its  mean  iieight, 
and  ttiose  from  the  NE.  below  that  point.  The  stream  sets  parallel  to 
the  yoast  from  a  half  to  two-thirds  of  a  knot  per  hour. 

DirectionB. —  When  off  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  bound  up  the  bay,  the 
coast  may  be  approached  within  ^  mile  until  near  Moiitej^an,  wiiere  it 
becomes  low ;  beyond  this,  rocky  ridges  extend  off  the  coast,  as  far  as 
Como  wharf;  and  the  shore  should  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  a  mile. 
Beyond  Como  wharf  the  shore  becomes  cleaner,  until  within  a  short 
distance  of  the  entrance  of  the  iSissibou  River,  where  a  shoal  extends 
off.  Keep  about  a  mile  off  shore,  and  when  the  remarkable  notch  iu 
Kast  Sandy  Cove,  on  the  Digby  Neck  shore,  shows  open,  steer  towards 
the  entrance  of  the  river  where  good  anchorage  will  be  obtained  in  about 
oj  fathoms,  mud,  about  ^  mile  from  the  shore. 

Sisaibou  River  can  only  be  entered  by  boats  at  low  water,  when  only 
small  vessels  can  lie  afloat  in  it.  About  4  miles  NE.  of  the  river  is 
Gilbert  Cove,  affording  the  best  anchorage  in  the  bay,  and  the  coast 
between  can  be  approached  to  about  ^  mile,  except  at  a  point  which  lies 
1^  miles  southwestward  of  Gilbert  Point,  where  a  shoal  extends  nearly 
^  mile  from  the  shore  ;  a  road  from  the  interior  to  the  shore  points  out 
the  direction  of  the  shoal.  After  passing  this  shoal  a  vessel  may  steer 
towards  Gilbert  Point,  beyond  which  good  anchorage  will  be  found  in 
about  4  fathoms,  over  muddy  bottom.  Fresh  water  can  be  obtained 
fh)m  a  stream  running  over  the  rocks  near  an  old  mill.  Beyond  Gilbert 
Cove  the  water  shoals  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 

Anchorage. — Large  vessels  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  St.  Mary  Bay 
between  East  Sandy  Cove  and  Sissibou  River,  in  10  to  12  fathoms  water, 
and  with  good  ground  tackle  may  ride  out  any  gale,  as  the  sea  at  this 
anchorage,  even  with  southwesterly  winds,  to  which  it  is  exposed,  be- 
comes exhausted. 

There  are  three  auc!xorages  on  the  western  shore  of  the  bay,  viz.  Lit- 
tie  River,  Mink  Cove,  and  East  Sandy  Cove;  the  last,  being  the  largest 
and  most  sheltered,  is  most  frequented.  In  it  vessels  of  12  feet  draft 
can  hud  good  shelter  from  all  winds  between  south  roand  by  west  to 
NNE.,  and  if  distressed  by  a  southeasterly  wind  they  can  find  security 
by  running  on  the  mud.  Fresh  water  can  be  obtained  at  the  head  of 
the  cove  when  the  tide  is  up,  except  during  dry  seasons. 

Bryer  Island  Southwest  Ledge  has  only  13  feet  on  its  shoalest 
part,  which  lies  with  Dartmouth  Point,  seen  just  open  westward  of 
Gull  Rock,  and  is  distant  from  the  latter  nearly  2  miles  S.  45°  W.  Be- 
tween this  ledge  and  Gull  Rock  there  is  a  channel  1^  miles  wide,  and 
the  rock  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile  on  its  sea  side. 

Bryer  Island  Northwest  Ledge  is  of  large  extent,  and  lies  to  the 
NW.  of  Bryer  Island,  with  deep  water  close  to  its  N  W.  side.   There  is  a 
good  passage  between  it  and  Rryer  Island,  the  northwestern  shore  of 
which  may  be  approached  to  J  mile. 
5314 5 


"^-KSt&hf^KC... 


66 


NOVA   SCOTIA — S.    \V.    COAST. 


Northwest  Rock  is  small  with  ouly  6  feet  water,  and  from  it  Bryer 
Island  light-house  bears  S.  8°  E.  nearly  'k\  miles.  Mourilyan  mark  (a 
lar^e  granite  bowlder)  on  a  bill  on  Long  Island  in  line  witb  tbe  north 
point  of  Bryer  Island  bearing  S.  50°  E.  leads  northward  and  eastward 
of  tbt8  ruuk,  and  tbe  whole  ledge.  A  bell  buoy  painted  red  and  black 
in  vortical  stripes  lies  400  yards  N.  47°  W.  of  this  rock. 

Beatson  Rocks  consist  of  tvro  small  rocks,  200  yards  apart,  with  12 
and  13  feet  water.  The  northeastern,  with  12  feet,  lies  with  the  North- 
west Bock,  bearing  N.  51°  E.  one  mile  (the  passage  between  having  not 
less  than  C  fathoms) ;  and  Bryer  Island  light-house  3.  21°  E.  3^  miles. 

The  Northwest  Ledge  extends  some  distance  southward  of  Beatson 
Rocks ;  during  the  strength  o*"  the  tide  it  shows  a  heavy  tide  rip  along 
its  whole  length,  and  breaks  h«.  ivily  on  its  shoal  parts  when  there  is 
much  sea. 

Gull  Rock,  seen  well  open  of  Whipple  Point  bearing  S.  18°  E.  leads 
SW.  of  Beatson  Rocks  in  10  fathoms,  and  Gull  Rock  in  line  with  Whip- 
ple Point,  bearing  S.  14°  E.,  leads  between  Beatson  and  Northwest 
Rocks. 

Frenchman  Elbovr  is  a  long  rocky  strip,  having  on  its  shoalest  part 
5^  fathoms;  and  lies  between  Northwest  Rock  and  the  north  point  of 
Bryer  Island,  being  about  one  mile  distant  from  the  former. 

Tides. — The  tidal  stream  runs  very  strong  over  the  Northwest  Ledge, 
the  ebb  taking  a  southerly  and  the  flood  a  northerly  direction,  at  the 
rate  of  about  4  knots  at  half  tide.  The  stream  changes  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  after  that  in  Grand  Passage,  or  nearly  about  the 
time  of  high  and  low  water  there. 

Oral  id  Passage  and  Westport.— Grand  Passage,  between  Bryer 
and  Long  Islands,  is  narrow  and  contains  several  dangers,  but  the  prin- 
cipal difficulty  connected  with  its  navigation  is  the  great  velocity  of 
the  tidal  streams  through  the  channel. 

Supplies. — Wet^tport  carries  on  a  considerable  trade  in  fish,  and  from 
it  limited  supplies  may  be  obtained.  A  small  supply  of  fresh  water  may 
also  be  procured  from  wells. 

Pilots. — Pilots  for  St.  John,  New  Brunswick,  can  be  obtained  at  West- 
port. 

Passage  Shoal,  with  5  feet  of  water,  shows  a  tide  rip;  it  lies  in  the 
middle  of  the  passage,  N.  14°  W.  from  the  light-house  on  Peter  Island, 
and  ^  mile  from  its  nearest  shore. 

Cow  Ledge  extends  300  yards  ott'  the  Long  Island  shore  of  the 
northern  entrance  of  Grand  Passage ;  its  highest  part  uncovers  soon 
after  high  water. 

Cow  Ledge  Shoal,  with  14  feet  water,  lies  4  m'.lo  northward  of  the 
highest  part  of  Cow  Ledge,  and  S.  67°  E.  600  yard^i  from  the  north  point 
of  Bryer  Island. 

Tides. — The  stream  commences  running  to  the  southward  full  half 
an  hour  before  high  water  by  the  shore,  and  runs  with  great  velocity 


PETER    ISLAND — DIRECTIONS. 


67 


m  it  Bryer 
,n  mark  (a 

the  uorth 
I  eastward 

aud  black 

irt,  with  12 
the  North- 
haviug  not 
E.  3%  miles, 
of  BeatsoQ 
le  rip  along 
an  there  is 

8°  E.  leads 
with  Whip- 
Northwest 

hoalest  part 
th  point  of 

west  Ledge, 
tion,  at  the 
kbout  three- 
y  about  the 

ween  Bryer 

mt  the  prin- 

velocity  of 

sh,  and  from 
li  water  may 

led  at  West- 

t  lies  in  the 
*eter  Island, 

shore  of  the 
icovers  soon 

iward  of  the 
B  north  point 

ard  full  half 
;reat  velocity 


through  Grand  Passage,  especially  through  the  two  channels  at  its 
southern  entrance,  where  it  attains  a  rate  of  from  4  to  5  knots  per 
hour. 

Directions.— West  of  Peter  Island.— At  the  southern  end  of 
Grand  Passage  there  is  a  channel  on  each  side  of  Peter  Island,  the  one 
on  its  western  side  being  the  shorter  and  narrower  of  the  two,  with  16 
to  20  feet  water  and  clear  of  danger.  If  making  for  the  western  entrance, 
keep  in  mid-channel,  and  if  the  flood  be  running  bear  in  mind  that  the 
tide  sets  with  great  strength  directly  on  the  south  point  of  Peter 
Island. 

The  anchorage  off  the  town  of  Westport  is  in  5  to  7  fathoms  water, 
with  the  Episcopal  church  bearing  S.  33°  W.  and  the  Baptist  chapel  S. 
760  w. 

If  bound  through  Grand  Passage,  after  passing  through  the  western 
entrance,  avoid  opening  Dartmouth  Point,  east  of  Peter  Island,  until 
the  Episco))al  church  bears  S.  31°  W.,  when  a  course  may  be  steered  for 
the  northern  entrance,  through  which  Peter  Island  light-house  bearing 
S.  2°  E.,  or  with  the  island  open  its  own  breadth  west  of  Sand  Point, 
leads  in  the  deep-water  channel  west  of  Cow  Ledge  and  Cow  Ledge 
Shoal. 

When  the  north  point  of  Bryer  Island  bears  K  75°  W.  the  vessel 
will  be  clear  of  Cow  Ledge  Shoal,  and  by  keeping  Peter  Island  light- 
house in  sight  will  pass  a  long  way  to  the  eastward  of  Northwest  Ledge. 
After  passing  Cow  Ledge  Shoal,  Long  Island  may  be  approached  to  200 
yards,  but  the  north  point  of  Bryer  Island  should  not  be  rounded  within 
.  J  mile. 

East  of  Peter  Inland.— On  nearing  the  passage  give  Dartmouth 
Point  a  berth  of  J  mile  and  pass  along  the  east  shore  of  Peter  Island, 
which  may  be  safely  approached  to  within  200  yards.  When  Peter 
Island  light-house  bears  S.  2°  37'  B.  follow  directions  already  given  for 
northern  entrance. 

If  intending  to  anchor  at  Westport,  after  passing  Peter  Island,  steer 
sharp  round  the  north  end  of  the  island  when  the  Episcopal  church 
bears  S.  67°  W.  and  pass  between  the  shoal  spit  off  the  north  end  of 
the  island  and  Passage  Shoal,  on  which  the  flood  sets  with  great 
strength. 

Caution.— The  foregoing  directions  for  entering  Grand  Passago  from 
the  southward  are  adapted  for  flood  tide  and  a  leading  wind,  and  any 
departure  therefrom  must;  be  contingent  on  the  state  of  the  tide  and 
direction  of  wind. 

Strangers  should  not  attempt  the  anchorage  off  Westport  without  the 
assistance  of  local  knowledge,  as  the  tides  in  the  entrance,  with  a 
velocity  of  5  or  6  knots  an  hour,  form  eddies  and  whirlpools  likely  to 
bring  a  vessel  round  against  her  helm  and  cause  her  being  stranded. 

Petit  Passage,  between  Long  Island  and  Digby  Neck,  though  nar- 
row, is  available  for  steam  vessels,  and  for  sailing  vessels  also,  if  the 
latter  have  a  favorable  wind  aud  tide. 


68 


BAY  OF  FUNDY — SOUTH  COAST. 


The  passage  forms  the  shortest  route  between  St.  John  Harbor  and 
Gape  Fouruhu,  and  is  almost  entirely  free  from  dangers,  the  exception 
being  a  small  rock,  with  8  feet  water,  lying  N.  U°  E.  from  the  light- 
house, nearly  400  yards  from  the  nearest  part  of  Boar  Eead.  There  is 
a  passage  with  4  fathoms  between  the  shore  and  this  rook,  which  shjows 
a  tide  rip  during  the  strength  of  the  tide  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather. 

On  the  western  shore  of  the  passage  an  eddy  is  formed  to  the  north- 
ward of  Eddy  Point,  where  small  vessels  may  anchor  close  inshore,  but 
they  require  to  be  moored  head  and  stern. 

Tides. — The  stream  runs  through  the  i)as8age  at  the  rate  of  6  or  7  miles 
an  hour;  the  ebb  from  the  northward  and  the  flood  from  the  southward. 

Directions. — When  entering  the  passage  keep  a  mid-channel  course 
until  approaching  Eddy  Point,  which  projects  into  the  passage,  when 
close  the  western  shore,  which  is  sieeper-to  tban  the  eastern  side  in  the 
vicinity  of  Sandy  Poi)it.  OS  the  south  point  of  Digby  Neck  are  some 
rocks  which  cover  at  half  flood  and  extend  about  200  yards  offshore  in 
a  southerly  direction. 

When  off  Cape  St.  Mary  and  running  for  Petit  Passage  on  the  ebb, 
steer  for  the  middle  of  Long  Island  until  the  strip  of  tide  running  from 
the  passage  towards  the  cape  is  passed;  and  when  within  it  a  feeble 
eddy  will  be  found  on  the  Long  Island  shore  setting  towards  the  pas- 
sage, increasing  in  strength  and  decreasing  in  breadth  as  it  nears  the 
passage,  where  it  extends  as  far  as  Eddy  Point. 

When  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy  and  wishing  to  enter  Petit  Passage  on 
the  ebb,  make  the  Digby  Neck  shore  to  the  eastward  of  the  passage, 
and  skirt  it  along  until  in  the  passage  in  order  to  avoid  being  swept ' 
past  the  entrance.    The  Digby  Neck  shore  is  steep-to,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached in  safety  to  400  yards. 

Coast. — The  Bay  of  Fundy  shore  of  Long  Island  is  steep- to  antil 
approaching  Boar  Bead,  when  the  8  foot  detached  rock  already  re* 
ferred  to  must  be  avoided ;  only  small  vessels  or  steam  vessels  with 
local  knowledge  should  attempt  to  pass  inside  it. 

The  land  on  Digby  Neck  is  partially  wooded,  more  thickly  on  the 
side  of  Fundy  Bay  than  that  of  St.  Mary,  and  slopes  gradually  towards 
the  Bay  of  Fundy  shore.  At  West  Sandy  Cove  and  Gulliver  Hole 
there  are  tolerably  high  cliffs,  and  the  hollows  through  the  neck  at  each 
of  these  places  present  a  remarkable  appearance. 

West  Sandy  Cove  affords  good  anchorage,  being  sheltered  from 
all  winds  between  NE.  round  by  south  to  SW.  Care  must  be  taken  to 
avoid  a  ro,ck  with  6  feet  water  lying  N.  28°  E.  600  yards  off  the  western 
point  of  Western  Sandy  Cove,  with  a  deep  channel  between  it  and  the 
shore. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  West  Sandy  Cove  at 
lOh.  47m. ;  springs  rise  23  feet ;  neaps  19  feet. 

Gulliver  Hole  is  free  from  danger  and  also  affords  good  anchorage, 
with  all  winds  from  NB.  round  by  south  to  west. 


mm. 


DIGBY    GUT — DIRECTIONS. 


69 


irbor  and 
jxceptioa 
bhe  light- 
There  is 
ich  shjows 
weather, 
the  north- 
shore,  but 

or  7  miles 
>uthward. 
oel  course 
age,  when 
lide  in  the 
:  are  some 
jftshore  in 

1  the  ebb, 
ning  from 
it  a  feeble 
Is  the  pas- 
nears  the 

assage  on 
e  passage, 
jing  swept  • 
nay  be  ap- 

)p-to  until 
Iready  re- 
issels  with 

kly  on  the 
ly  towards 
liver  Hole 
)ck  at  each 

tered  from 

)e  taken  to 

he  western 

it  and  the 

ly  Cove  at 

anchorage, 


Digby  Gut  is  a  narrow  OT)eniag  J  mile  in  breadth,  with  steep  acclivi- 
ties  on  each  side,  and  a  deep-water  channel  leading  into  Annapolis 
Basin,  ou  the  western  side  of  which  stands  the  town  of  Digby.  The 
inhabitants,  numbering  about  2,000,  are  engaged  in  lumbering  and 
fishing. 

Charges.— Pilotage,  $10  or  $12  according  to  agreement;  hospital 
dues,  2  cents  per  ton;  labor,  $1.50  per  day;  lumber  is  delivered  to 
vessels  loading,  free,  alongside  the  wharf. 
The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Within  Prim  Point,  ou  the  western  shore  of  the  entrance,  is  Man-of- 
war  Eock,  distant  about  200  yards  from  the  high-water  line,  and  steep-to 
on  its  eastern  side. 

Tides.— Along  shore  the  tidal  stream  runs  nearly  parallel  to  its  trend 
at  the  rate  of  ij  to  2  kjiots,  turning  inshore  a  little  before  the  time  of 
high  and  low  water  respectively,  and  offshore  a  little  later. 

Through  the  gut  the  stream  of  ebb  and  flood  sets  with  a  velocity  of 
4  to  5  knots  an  hour,  causing  various  eddies  and  whirlpools  ;  the  truest 
stream  will  be  found  on  the  eastern  side. 

DirectionB. -Vessels  wishing  to  obtain  temporary  anchorage  m^y 
find  it  at  the  entrance  of  the  gut,  on  the  western  side,  about  J  mile 
within  the  light-house.  Here  the  anchorage  is  good  in  about  7  fathoms, 
mud,  about  200  yards  from  the  shore,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds  ex- 
cept  between  WNW,  and  NE.  In  approaching  the  land  in  thick  weather, 
great  caution  is  necessary  when  in  less  than  35  fathoms  water. 

If  proceeding  to  the  anchorage  near  the  town  of  Digby,  steer  a  mid- 
channel  course  through  the  entrance,  and  then  bring  the  eastern  point 
of  entrance  to  bear  N.  lio  w.  and  keep  it  astern  ;  this  course  will  lead 
between  the  outer  shoax  tongue  of  an  exfasive  spit  at  the  extremity  of 
which  there  is  a  black  buoy,  and  the  western  shore,  and  when  Bear 
Island  appears  midway  between  the  points  of  eutram  -  m"  Bear  River, 
anchor  in  6  to  8  fathoms. 

When  proceeding  through  the  narrows  sudden  gust  i  of  wind  are  fre- 
quently experienced,  caused  by  the  almost  precipitous  nature  of  the  hills 
overlooking  the  gut.  Vessels  bound  up  the  river  to  Annapolis  should 
obtain  the  assistance  of  local  pilots. 

Anchorage.- The  anchorage  off  Annapolis  is  bad,  owing  to  the 
numerous  eddies,  which  in  a  short  time  cause  a  ship  fco  foul  her  anchor. 
Vessels  should  moor  with  a  swivel,  or  head  and  stern. 

Pilots.- As  pilots  for  Annapolis  are  difficult  to  obtain,  application 
should  be  made  to  the  comptroller  of  customs  at  Digby. 
The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent 
Coast  from  Digby  Gut  to  Cape  Split — The  land  is  undulating  and 
thickly  wooded,  but  with  partial  clearings,  and  from  the  shore  assumes 
a  gradual  ascent  until  it  attains  an  elevation  of  400  to  COO  feet  at  the 
distance  of  2  or  3  miles  from  the  sea. 

To  the  eastward  of  Chute  Cove  this  regularity  of  formation  is  diver- 


ii 


BAY  OF  FUNDY — SOUTH  COAST. 


sified  by  perpendicular  cliflfd  uboat  100  feet  Uigh,  and  forming  small 
bays,  on  the  points  of  which  settlements  have  been  made,  and  piers  built 
to  frtcilitiite  shipping  cordwood,  which  at  present  is  the  chief  export. 
Small  vessels  can  lay  alongside  the  eastern  side  of  these  piers,  which  act 
as  breakwaters,  where  they  ground  every  tide. 

Water. — The  joast  from  Digby  Gut  to  the  eastward  abounds  with 
fresh  water,  which  runs  in  streams  down  the  slopes  of  the  hills  into  the 
Bay  of  Fundy.  Boats  can  obtain  good  water  from  the  mouths  of  the 
streams  after  half  flood. 

Chute  Cove. — A  pier  or  breakwater  extends  off  from  the  middle  of 
the  cove,  and  there  is  also  a  post-office,  which  is  in  communication  with 
Bridgetown  by  means  of  a  road  by  the  hill. 

St.  Croix  Bay,  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Chute  Cove,  is  sepa- 
rated from  it  by  a  low  green  point;  this  bay  affords  the  best  anchorage 
along  the  coast  eastward  of  Digby  Gut. 

Anchorages. — Off  Chute  Cove  anchor  with  the  breakwater  8.  (54^  B. 
distant  000  yards,  and  about  400  yards  off"  shore,  in  ^  fathoms  mud. 

In  St.  Croix  Bay  anchor  with  its  west  point  bearing  S.  66<^  VV.  at  the 
distance  o[  ^  mile  offshore  in  4  fathoms,  muil. 

Port  George  lies  nearly  5  miles  to  the  eastwart'  of  Marshall  Cove 
and  exports  live  stock,  potatoes,  and  cordwood ;  there  is  a  post-oflflce  at 
this  place. 

Wilmot  Rock  uncovers  at  half  tide,  and  lies  about  250  yards  east 
of  the  small  pier  at  Port  George,  and  300  yards  from  the  high-water 

itoargaretville. — Care  must  be  taken  in  approaching  Margaretville 
to  avoid  a  shoal  a  mile  in  length  and  parallel  with  the  shore,  from 
which  it  is  distant  about  J  mile  ;  the  shoalest  part,  with  2  feet  water, 
lie8§  mile  from  the  small  pier  near  thQ  lighthouse. 

Between  the  west  end  of  this  shoal,  with  2  fathoms,  and  the  break- 
water there  is  a  3fathom  channel  ^  mile  broad. 

Morden  or  French  Cross  may  be  recognized  by  the  square 
tower  of  its  Episcopal  churcii.  There  is  also  a  post-office,  as  well  as  a 
small  pier,  alongside  of  which  vessels  lay  aground,  and  ship  agricultural 
produce  and  cordwood. 

About )(  mile  eastward  of  Morden  Breakwater,  and  400  yards  off- 
shore, there  is  a  small  bank  which  dries  at  low  water.  Vessels  should 
keep  outside  until  there  is  sufficient  water  to  pass  over  it. 

About  a  luile  eastward  of  Morden  is  Joliffe  Head,  a  high  perpendicular 
cliff  of  a  reddish  color,  and  farther  on  are  two  small  piers,  known  as 
Ogilvie  and  Gibbon  Breakwaters,  the  latter  being  6J  miles  from  Mor- 
den. 

Anchorages. — The  best  anchorage  near  Port  George  is  in  about  5 
fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  eastward  of  the  pier. 

Off  Margaretville  vessels  shoidd  anchor  within  the  shoal  in  about  5 


BLACK    ROCK — CAPE    SPLIT. 


71 


Dg  small 
iers  built 
f  export, 
vhioli  act 

iiids  with 
s  into  the 
;h8  of  the 

niddle  of 
ition  with 

;,  i8  sepa- 
luchorage 

8.  64°  B. 
ims  iniul. 
W.  at  the 

hall  Cove 
t-offlce  at 

ranis  eattt 
igh- water 

garetville 
lore,  from 
eet  water, 

he  break- 

le  square 
i  well  as  a 
fricultural 

yards  off- 
jls  should 

i)endioular 
known  as 
from  Mor- 

n  about  5 

iu  about  5 


fathoms,  sand,  at  the  distance  of  {  mile  from  the  shore,  with  tlie  high- 
water  Hue  of  Port  George  in  line  with  Margaretville  Point. 

The  anchorage  near  Morden  is  in  about  6  fathoms  a  short  distance 
eastward  of  the  breakwater. 

Black  Rock,  from  which  the  locality  derives  its  name,  is  21  feet 
above  low-water  springs,  and  covers  about  half  flood  ;  it  bears  fcom  the 
light-house  N,  47°  E.  nearly  J  mile.  At  low  water  the  rock  dries  about 
200  feet  outsiile  its  apex. 

Small  piers  extend  out  abreast  Canada  Creek,  Chapman  Brook,  and 
Hall  Harbor,  all  to  the  eastward  of  Black  Rock  light-house,  from  winch 
they  are  respectively  distant  one,  4,  and  6^  miles. 

Outside  Canada  Wharf,  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  offshore,  is  a  shoal 
spit  having  only  11  feet  water. 

Off  Shoal  Point,  about  1^  miles  east  of  Elall  Harbor,  some  rocks  ex- 
tend offshore  J  mile. 

Anchorages  between  Digby  Q-nt  and  Cape  Split. — Vessels  can 
anchor  all  along  this  part  of  the  NW.  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  with  winds 
from  east,  round  by  south,  to  SW.,  iu  about  12  fathoms  water,  free 
from  rock,  at  distances  varying  from  i  to  ^  mile  offshore. 

In  some  of  the  bays  a  closer  anchorage  may  be  obtained,  with  soft 
bottom  aid  greater  siielter;  but  when  the  wind  is  strong  from  SW.,  or 
more  westerly,  the  ebb  tide,  which  runs  at  the  rate  of  from  2  to  3  knots 
along  shore  to  the  westward  of  Morden,  renders  the  anchorage  along  the 
coast  unfit  for  small  vessels,  and  they  are  advised  to  stand  off  and  or. 
during  the  ebb. 

Scotsman  Bay. — Vessels  bound  to  the  Basin  of  Mines  arriving  off 
Cape  Split  and  unable  to  proceed  through  on  account  of  the  strong  ebb 
tide,  may  anchor  on  the  west  side  of  the  cape,  about  one  mile  from  its 
extremity,  and  400  yards  offshore,  in  about  10  fathoms  ,  with  the  outer 
hill  of  Cape  Split  in  Hne  with  the  nearest  point  bearing  N.  39°  W. 

In  the  fall  of  the  year,  when  gales  frequently  commence  from  the 
eastward  and  suddenly  shift  to  the  westward,  the  anchorage  in  Scots- 
man Bay  IS  dangerous. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Black  Rook  Point  at 
llh.  29ni. ;  springs  rise  36  feet,  neaps  31  feet. 

Isle  Haute,  about  1|  mile  in  length  and  ^  mile  in  breadth,  attains 
an  elevation  of  3 -'0  feet,  is  thickly  wooded,  and  is  surrounded  on  all 
sides,  excepting  the  east  and  west  points,  by  perpendicular  cliffs.  Its 
western  point  is  formed  by  a  steep,  grassy  slope,  and  off  its  eastern 
point  is  a  stony  si)it  which  uncovers  at  low  water  al)out  ^  mile  out. 
Excepting  off"  this  point  :he  island  is  steep-to,  and  may  be  approached 
in  safety  within  J  mile. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  may  anchor  on  the  XE.  side  of  Isle  Haute  in 
about  12  fathoms,  within  the  eddy  about  250  yards  from  the  east  point 
of  the  island. 

Cape  Split  is  the  termination  of  a  tapering  promontory,  forming  the 


72 


BAY    OP    FUNDY — SOUTH   COAST. 


i. 


southern  point  of  eiitraitce  to  the  Basiu  of  Mines,  and  consists  of  per- 
peudicuhir  cliffs  about  200  feet  high,  which  are  divided  by  several  deep 
fissures  or  splits,  hence  the  name. 

Two  small  detached  rocks,  which  just  uncover  at  low-water  springs, 
lie  off  the  ditch  of  Cape  Split  in  a  N.  53°  W.  direction,  at  the  respec- 
tive <listauces  of  ^  and  ^  mile.  There  is  a  passage  between  the  rocks, 
as  well  as  between  the  inner  rock  and  the  cape.  During  the  tidp  a  very 
heavy  tide  rip  extends  considerably  beyond  these  rocks. 

Cape  Chignecto  is  very  conspicuous,  as  the  land  in  its  immediate 
vicinity  attains  an  elevation  between  700  and  900  feet,  being  thickly 
wooded  and  intersected  by  valleys.  On  the  SE.  side  the  high  land  falls 
suddenly,  and  terminates  in  many  places  on  the  shores  of  Advocate 
Bay  in  high  cliff's.    The  shores  of  the  cape  have  deep  water  close-to. 

Cape  D'Or,  a  low  green  point  7§  miles  S.  75°  E.  froo»  cape  Chiy  iiecto. 
Is  the  southwestern  extremity  of  a  high  ridge  of  laiMl,  se|»arated  from 
that  of  Cape  Ohigneato  by  a  deep  valley. 

This  ridge  terminates  on  its  western  side  in  cliffs  200  feet  high,  and 
i'alls  abruptly  towards  the  low  point  of  Cape  D'Or. 
^^  Advocate  Bay  lies  between  capes  Chignecto  and  DXJr,  and  near  its 
Ijrtad  affords  good  anchorage  with  northerly  winds,  but  care  must  be 
taken  to  get  under  way  as  soon  as  the  wind  hauls  round  to  the  south- 
ward, as  in  such  cases  it  frequently  veers  round  to,  and  blows  hard 
from  the  westward. 

Advocate  Harbor. — From  the  middle  of  Advocate  Bay  a  natural 
sea  wall  composed  of  stones  extends  in  an  almost  continuous  manner 
to  the  western  point  of  Cape  D'Or.  This  wall  or  causewskx  is  about  10 
feet  above  high  water,  but  between  it  and  the  shore  of  Advocate  Set- 
tlement— a  distance  of  §  mile — is  a  deep  basin  with  a  muddy  bottom, 
which  only  dries  one  or  2  feet  at  low  water  springs. 

Near  Cape  D'Or  there  is  an  openinr,  through  the  causeway  at  high 
water,  and  vessels  pass  through  into  the  basin  or  harbor  inside,  where 
they  of  course  ground  at  low  water,  but  are  protected  by  the  stony  wall 
outside. 

There  is  a  small  anchorage  near  the  entrance  in  which  small  craft  — 
if  moored — can  lay  afloat  at  low  water.  As  the  passage  into  the  harbor 
frequently  shifts  duriuj  >  estt  •',■'  gales,  no  vessel  should  attempt  to 
enter  without  local  knos\  ;;:dge. 

8hoal. — About  ^  miU:  east  of  Cape  D*"  .  the  shore  trends  to  the 
northward  toward  Horsi  .lioe  (Jove,  and  forms  a  point,  off'  which  lies  a 
detached  stony  shoal  which  dries  at  low  water. 

Cape  Spencer  may  easily  be  recognized  by  a  remarkable  sugar-loaf 
rock  isolated  at  high  water,  above  which  it  rises  20  feet.  The  cape 
should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  400  yards. 

Spencer  Island  is  small,  thickly  wooded,  and  180  feet  high ;  it  is 
separ  ted  from  the  mainland  near  Cape  Spencer  by  a  channel  about- 1 
mile  broad  in  which  there  is  as  little  as  6  feet  water. 


1 


WM 


/^-./•LtL 


ADVOCATE    HARBOR — BASIN    OF    MINES. 


73 


s  of  per- 
)ral  deep 

springs, 

respec- 

lie  rocks, 

dp  a  very 

ttinediate 
J  thickly 
land  falls 
Advocate 
lose-to. 
bignecto, 
ted  from 

liifyli,  and 

d  uear  its 
I  must  be 
;he  south- 
ows  hard 

El  natural 

maimer 

about  10 

Dcate  Set- 

y  bottom, 

y  at  high 
de,  where 
itoiiy  wall 

ill  craft  — 
he  harbor 
tempt  to 

Lis  to  the 
ich  lies  a 

ui  gar-loaf 
The  ca4)e 

i<lli ;  it  is 
about"  J 


TiAes. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  chauge,  at  Spencer  Island,  at  llh. 
4:im. ;  springs  rise  39  feet,  neaps  33  feet.  The  tidal  stream  attains  a 
velocity  of  6  knots  an  hour. 

Anchorage. — To  the  northward  of  Spencer  Island  there  is  good  an- 
chorage safe  from  all  winds  excepting  from  east  to  south,  in  about  5 
fathoms,  mud  and  sand,  with  the  east  end  of  Spencer  Island  bearing  S. 
33°  E.  about  if  mile.  Vessels  tide-bound  can  anchor  anywhere  between 
Spencer  Island  and  Fox  Point,  in  about  5  fathoms  water  and  J  mile  oflf- 
shoi'e. 

Tides  between  Digby  Gut  and  Cape  Split — From  Digby  Gut  to 
the  head  of  Scotsman  Bay  the  tidal  stream  runs  parallel  with  the  shore, 
and  during  the  strength  of  the  tide  attains  a  velocity  varying  from  2 
knot:}  off  Digby  to  about  3  knots  off  Black  liock  lighthouse,  from  whence 
to  the  head  of  Scotsman  Bay  the  rate  again  diminishes. 

From  Cape  Chigueoto  to  Cape  D'Or  the  flood  sets  nearly  straight,  and 
makes  a  long  rip  off  Cape  D'Or  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  in  a  southerly 
direction,  caused  by  meeting  an  eddy  setting  towards  Cape  D'Or,  along 
its  eastern  shore.  Inshore  between  the  above  capes  the  flood  makes  a 
circuit  of  Advocate  Bay ;  but  on  the  ebb  an  eddy  is  formed  to  the  west- 
ward of  Cape  D'Or. 

At  Spencer  Anchorage,  except  about  the  first  hour  of  ebb,  the  set  of 
the  tide  tends  towards  Spencer  Island.  Hound  Cape  D'Or  and  Spencer 
Island  the  tidal  current  runs  from  5  to  6  knots  an  hour,  and  round  the 
end  of  the  rip  off  Cape  Split  it  attains  a  velocity  of  7  or  8  knots. 

Close  inshore  the  stream  of  tide  changes  its  direction  a  little  before, 
and  in  the  oflfing  a  little  after,  the  time  of  high  and  low  water  by  the 
shore.  Between  Digby  and  Black  Rock  lighthouse  it  changes  inshore 
from  15  to  30  minutes,  and  to  the  eastward  of  Hall  Harbor  from  one  to 
2  hours  before  the  time  of  high  and  low  water. 

Directions. — When  approaching  Cape  D'Or  with  a  flood  tide,  keep 
well  off  the  cape,  beyond  the  influence  of  the  tide  rip ;  if  with  an  ebb 
tide  and  a  commanding  breeze  round  Cape  D'Or  close  to,  but  unless  the 
wind  be  fair  and  strong  it  would  be  advisable  to  keep  the  vessel  in  the 
eddy  west  of  Cape  D'Or  until  the  ebb  has  ceased  running. 

Basin  of  Mines. — The  entrance  to  the  Basin  of  Mines  lies  between 
Fox  Point  on  the  north,  and  Cape  Split,  the  distance  between  these 
points  being  3^  miles.  The  length  of  the  basin  in  a  straight  line  be- 
tween Cape  Sjjlit  at  its  entrance  and  the  town  of  Truro  at  its  eastern 
extremity  is  exactly  50  miles,  with  a  varying  breadth. 

The  northern  shore  of  the  basin  between  Fox  and  Economy  Points  is 
high,  aiul  varies  in  elevation  from  260  to  400  feet,  gradually  rising 
within  a  few  miles  of  the  coast  to  a  well-wooded  range  known  as  Co- 
bequiil  Mountains,  being  a  continuation  in  an  easterly  directioi.  of  the 
range  north  of  Cape  Chiguecto. 

This  mouiitainons  range  attains  in  some  places  an  elevation  of  more 
than  800  feet;  it  is  deeply  intersected  by  numerous  valleys,  through 


mi 


...  ^:^    « 


1  Al 


■  i' 


%^^ 


74 


BAY  OF  FUNDY SOUTH  COAST. 


which  small  rivers  deseeud  to  the  sef4,  and  is  also  well  wooded  but  with 
partial  clearings  near  the  shore.  To  the  eastward  of  Economy  Point 
the  shore  gradually  declines  in  altitude  to  tiie  head  of  the  basin. 

The  Basin  of  Mines  receives  the  waters  of  numerous  rivers,  the  prin- 
cipal being  Avon  River  to  the  southwest,  into  which  the  St.  Croix  and 
Kennetcook  rivers  discharge  their  waters,  and  the  Shubeuacadie  River 
near  the  head  of  the  basiu. 

The  southern  shore  of  the  Basin  of  Mines  is  bold  from  Cape  Split  to 
about  2  miles  south  of  Cape  Blumidon,  with  high  precipitous  earthy 
clitt's,  varying  in  elevation  from  'JOO  to  600  feet,  and  thickly  wooded  on 
their  summits.  From  the  above  position  the  high  ridge  over  Cape 
Blomidon  slopes  rapidly  to  the  valley  of  Cornwallis  River,  where  the 
laud  is  well  cleared  and  intersected  by  uumerous  valleys.  ** 

A  ridge,  of  which  Horton  Bluff  is  tlie  eastern  extremity,  separates 
the  valleys  of  Cornwallis  and  Avon.  To  the  eastward  of  Avon  River 
the  laud  is  intersected  by  valleys,  thickly  wooded  in  some  parts,  but 
partially  cleared  in  others. 

Avon  River.— The  approaches  to  Avon  River  are  rendered  diflBcult 
on  account  of  extensive  flats,  which  from  the  nature  of  the  bottom  and 
velocity  of  the  tides  must  be  continually  shifting  their  position  ;  and  as 
the  channels  between  are  narrow  and  circuitous,  without  any  well  de- 
fined leading  marks,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  strangers  should 
obtain  the  services  of  a  local  pilot. 

As  a  detailed  description  of  these  dangers  would  be  of  no  possible 
benefit  to  seamen,  it  will  sufBce  to  give  hereafter  a  few  directions,  in 
case  of  necessity,  for  attaining  the  anchorage  near  Horton  Bluff  at  the 
entianceot  the  Avon. 

Windsor. — The  town  of  Windsor,  and  capital  of  County  Hants, 
stands  at  tlie  contliKMH'.o  of  the  Avon  and  St.  Croix  Rivers;  it  lies  30 
miles  NW.  of  Halifiix,  witii  which  it  is  connwit^d  by  i-ailway. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 

Tides. — It  is  hign  water,  full  and  cluuige,  at  Horton  Bluff  at  Oh. 
30ni. ;  S|»riiig8  rise  48  feet,  neaps  40  feet. 

Hogback  Shoal  is  a  sandy  shoal  iqjwards  of  2^  rriilws  long,  very 
narrow,  and  rniiiiing  parallel  with  the  sliore.  It  dries  on  its  south 
side,  wlii(5li  is  separated  from  Cambridge  Plats  by  a  channel  iic-irly  a 
mile  broad,  having  about  3  fathoms  water,  and  is  distant  from  the 
south  shore  1^  miles. 

Walton  Bar,  composed  of  sand,  lies  a  dhort  distance  eastward  of 
the  town  of  Walton,  and  dries  at  the  distance  of  l\  miles  offshore  ; 
its  outer  tangent  is  in  line  between  the  center  of  the  Hogback  aud 
Burucoai  Head  lightbouse. 

Between  Walton  Bar  and  Burncoat  Head  the  low-water  line  extends 
about  A  mile  offshore. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Noel  Bay,  just  to  the 
eastward  of  Burncoat  Head,  at  12h.  tlm.;  springs  rise  oO.J  feet,  neaps 
43i  feel. 


but  with 
ny  Point 
in. 

tlie  prin- 
'roix  and 
lie  River 

i  Split  to 
IS  eartby 
[)ode(l  on 
ver  Cape 
rhere  the 

separates 
.'on  River 
)arts,  but 

fl  difficult 
)ttom  and 
II ;  and  as 
y  well  de- 
rs  gboald 

>  possible 
ictions,  in 
lufi'  at  the 

ty  Hants, 
it  lies  30 

ul. 

uJi"  at  Ob. 

orijf,  very 

\in  south 

il  tuvirly  a 

from  the 

latward  of 

eft's  ho  re  ; 

[back  and 

le  extends 

just  to  the 
eet,  neaps 


BASIN    OF   MINES — AVON   RIVER. 


75 


Cape  Sharp  derives  its  name  from  a  remarkably  sharp  eminence, 
300  feet  high,  with  which  it  terminates;  it  is  .H  miles  from  Fox  Point, 
and  with  the  shore  of  the  Cape  Split  promontory,  from  which  it  is  dis- 
tant only  2§  miles,  forms  the  narrowest  part  of  the  entrance  to  the 
Basin  of  Mines. 

Black  Rock,  with  an  elevation  of  15  feet  above  high  water,  and  of 
small  extent,  lies  J  mile  from  the  nearest  shore,  and  N.  8(3°  VV.  ^  mile 
from  Cape  Sharp.  A  deep-water  channel  exists  between  the  Black 
Rock  and  the  shore,  but  as  the  streams  of  tide  set  directly  on  the  rock 
this  passage  should  never  be  attempted. 

West  Bay  is  about  2^  miles  across  between  Cape  Sharp  on  the  west 
and  Partridge  Island  on  the  east.  Nearly  the  whole  of  the  bay  is  occu- 
pied by  a  shoal  bank  of  sand  and  gravel,  the  shoalest  part,  having  1^ 
fathoms,  lies  a  little  on  the  east  side  of  the  middle  of  the  bay  and  ^ 
mile  off  shore,  with  Cape  Split  just  shut  in  with  Cape  Sharp. 

There  is  not  less  than  3  fathoms  on  other  parts  of  this  bank,  whilst 
within  it,  about  J  mile  from  the  shore,  is  a  narrow  belt  of  deeper  water 
with  5  or  6  fathoms. 

Anchorage. — West  Bay  affords  good  anchorage  towards  its  western 
side  in  about  6  fathoms,  mud,  with  Cape  Sharp  bearing  S.  40°  VV.  ^ 
mile  distant,  protected  from  all  winds,  save  those  from  NE.  to  south.  The 
tide  current,  except  r  about  one  hour  after  low  water,  sets  towards 
Cape  Sharp. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  West  Bay  at  12)i.  4m. ; 
springs  rise  45  feet,  neaps  35  feet. 

Partridge  Island  attains  an  elevation  of  240  feet,  and  is  connected 
by  means  of  a  gravel  neck  to  the  shore.  The  anchorage  east  of  this 
island  is  not  good. 

Frazer  Head  is  390  feet  high,  and,  with  the  exception  of  tAvo  hard- 
wood trees  close  together,  is  quite  bare;  the  south  rounding  of  the 
head  should  not  be  approached  within  J  mile. 

The  Brothers  are  two  small,  thickly  wooded  islands  about  H  miles 
eastward  of  Frazer  Head,  and  are  both  included  within  tlie  low-water 
line  of  the  main  shore.  A  small  patch  of  rocks,  which  uncover,  lie  S. 
61^  E.  about  J  mile  from  the  south  extreme  of  the  southern  Brother 
Island. 

rive  Islands  extends  in  almost  a  straight  line  S.  76°  W.  from  the 
western  end  of  Fed  Head,  the  westernmost  being  3J  miles  distant.  The 
eastern  island  i^  much  the  largest  of  the  group,  thickly  wooded,  and 
attains  an  elevation  of  350  feet,  with  ateep  earthy  cliffs  on  its  southern 
Hhore;  these  islands  are  nearly  joined  to  each  other  and  tha  main  at 
low  wat^^r.  Between  Five  Islands  ana  Economy  Point  the  cliffs  bor- 
«'ering  the  ««•«  attain  in  some  parts  considerable  heights,  and  are 
remarkable  from  being  red. 

White  Rock,  so  called  from  its  appearance,  is  10  feet  above  high 
water,  and  is  in  line  between  the  eastern  cf  the  Five  Islands  and  the 
SW,  tang^Mt  of  Economy  Point,  being  3^  miles  from  the  latter. 


m  :l. 


76 


BAY    OP   FUNDY — SOUTH    COAST. 


Brick  Kiln  Island,  very  small  in  size  aud  about  50  feet  higU,  with 
red  cliffs,  lies  about  li  luilea  west  of  Economy  Poiut  oa  the  margin  of  the 
low  water  lino. 

Brick  Kiln  Ledges  are  two  in  number,  with  their  centij.vo  bearing 
S.  70°  W.  of  Economy  L'oint,  from  which  the  western  ledge — which  un- 
covers 2  hours  before  low  water — is  3  miles  distant.  Between  tins  ledge 
and  White  liocit  are  numerous  rocks,  and  strangers  are  advised  to  avoid 
their  locality. 

Economy  Point,  on  the  northern  shore,  is  nearly  21^  miles  east  of 
Cape  riiiarp,  aud  4  miles  N.  63°  W.  from  Burncoat  light-house.  Between 
the  liglit-hoiist;  aud  Economy  Point  is  the  eastern  hmit  of  what  may  be 
termed  general  navigation,  nor  shouh.  this  line  be  passed  by  any  vessel 
unless  in  charge  of  a  local  pilot,  as  further  up  the  basin  are  many  shoals 
formed  of  loose  shifting  sarid,  which  are  constantly  altering  their  posi- 
tion. 

Economy  River. — Vessels  of  15  feet  draft  can  proceed  to  the  saw- 
mill in  Elconomy  Kiver  at  high  water  every  day,  and  those  of  19  feet 
draft  at  high  water  spring  tides. 

Tides  in  the  Basin  of  Mines. — As  the  great  rise  and  fall,  as  well 
as  the  velocity  of  the  tides,  form  such  important  elements  in  the  navi- 
gation of  the  Basin  of  Mines,  it  is  essentially  necessary  that  both  should 
be  carefully  studied  by  i^eamen  entering  the  basin. 

In  the  passage  tc  the  Basin  of  Mines  near  the  Cape  Split  shore  the 
tidal  stream  att?,tns  ii  velocity  of  7  to  8  knots  an  hour,  but  in  the  center 
aud  mar  the  uortbora  shore  it  decreases  to  5  or  6  knots.  Between  Gape 
Split  and  lie  head  of  the  basin  the  strength  varies  from  about  3  kaots 
in  the  wider  parts  to  4  knots  where  the  channel  is  contracted,  its  direc- 
tion being  motUfled  by  the  trend  of  the  land. 

Directions.— In  navigating  the  Basin  of  Mines  seamen  must  bear  in 
mind  that  the  various  banks  and  bars  are  as  a  rule  composed  of  loose 
shifting  sand,  and  that  rapid  tides  and  strong  winds  cause  them  to  alter 
their  positions,  especially  after  heavy  gales  and  in  the  spring  on  the 
breaking  up  of  the  ice. 

Vessels  tiesirous  of  reaching  the  anchorage  at  the  entrance  of  Avon 
River  without  the  assistance  of  a  pilot  should  bring  Cape  Blomidon  to 
bear  N.  30°  W.,  and  keeping  it  astern  on  the  above  bearing,  pass  be- 
tween Cross  aud  Western  Bars  (this  course,  however,  will  lead  over  IJ 
fathoms  at  low  water),  until  Horton  light  house  bears  S.  11°  E. ;  then 
steer  for  it  on  tbat  bearing  and  when  the  wooded  point  east  of  Horton 
River  is  in  line  with  the  highest  point  of  Long  Island  anchor  in  about 
7  fathoms. 

From  the  fairway  between  the  tide  rip  off  Cape  Split  and  Pox  Point 
steer  S.  78°  E.  until  abreast  Cape  Sharp,  from  whence  if  bound  to  Parrs- 
boro  River  steer  to  round  Partridge  Island  at  a  moderate  distance; 
keep  Cape  Split  in  sight  until  Parrsboro  lighthouse  bears  N.  22°  W., 
when  steer  for  it,  and  pass  close  round  to  the  eastward  of  the  spit  on 


BASIN    OP    MINES — DIRECTIONS. 


77 


gU,  with 
fia  of  the 

:,  bearing 
vhicb  un- 
this  ledge 
-I  to  avoid 

es  east  of 
Between 
It  may  be 
my  vessel 
,ny  shoals 
;heir  posi- 

>  the  saw- 
of  19  feet 

1,  as  well 

the  navi- 

ith  should 

shore  the 
he  center 
^een  Gape 
It  3  knots 
its  direc- 

st  bear  in 
d  of  loose 
)Qi  to  alter 
Qg  on  the 

e  of  Avon 
omidon  to 
,  pass  he- 
ld over  IJ 
E. ;  then 
)f  Horton 
r  in  about 

Pox  Point 

1  to  Parrs- 

distance ; 

!f.  22°  W., 
he  spit  on 


which  the  light-house  stands.  This  river  can  only  bo  entered  about  one 
hour  before  high  water,  and  when  within  the  lighthouse,  vessels  can  lay 
on  the  mud  at  low  water  in  perfect  safety. 

If  bound  up  the  basin,  after  passing  Partridge  Island  steer  about 
east,  and  when  Parrsboro  lighthouse  bears  N.  72°  W,  keep  it  on 
that  bearing,  and  steer  S.  72°  E.  until  Burncoat  lighthouse  bears  east, 
when  steer  for  it  on  this  bearing— which  will  lead  southward  of  Brick 
Kiln  Ledge— until  abreast  Economy  Point,  beyond  which  the  services 
of  a  pilot  should  be  obtained  for  reasons  already  assigned. 

In  moderate  weather  vessels  may  anchor  iilonjftue  shores  of  the  Basin 
of  Mines,  but  on  the  northern  shore  the  bot»^  is  hard,  and  therefore 
the  anchorage  is  inferior  to  that  on  the  soul  Vessels  may  also 

ascend  various  small  rivers,  but  the  latter  cj'  '.«  entered  at  high 

water,  and  as  a  matter  of  course  vessels  are  lr.\  ..t  low  •/  atar. 

Off  Cornwallis  River  the  best  anchorage  is  in  5  to  6  fathoms,  sand, 
with  Horton  lighthouse  seen  just  open  east  of  Boot  Island  hearings. 
36°  E.  and  the  northern  tangent  of  the  south  point  of  Pereau  Creek  S. 
85°  W.  This  anchorage  may  be  considered  good  with  all  but  north- 
easterly and  easterly  winds,  and  when  approaching  it  care  should  be 
taken  to  avoid  shutting  in  the  west  point  of  Partridge  Island  with  Oape 
Blomidon. 


C  H  APTE  R    IV. 

NOVA  SOOTIA.,  SOUTHEA.ST  OOAST. — POBT  LATOUB  TO  8AMBB0  HABBOR. 

Coast — The  seaboard  of  the  SB.  coast,  between  cape  Sable  to  the 
SW.  and  cape  Ganso  to  the  NE.,  is  no  less  than  230  miles  in  a  straight 
line;  the  general  trend  being  about  NE.  and  SW.  Throughout  the 
whole  extent  of  this  rocky  coast  are  numerous  indentations,  varying  in 
size  and  utility,  from  the  narrow  creek  in  which  boats  seek  shelter  to 
noble  liarbors,  of  which  Halifax  is  the  largest,  most  accessible  and  safest. 

The  coast  is  fringed  by  numerous  islands  and  sunken  dangers  which, 
by  breaking  the  sea,  tend  to  facilitate  the  progress  and  promote  the 
safety  of  the  local  coasting  trade ;  but  to  insure  its  successful  prose- 
cution, local  knowledge  of  the  coast  and  its  dangers  is  indispensable; 
the  more  so  as  the  fogs— of  s>  density  seldom  experienced  elsewhere — are 
very  prevalent  during  the  s^i    iter  ;» '.rt  of  the  year. 

Port  Latour  is  a  bight  opuu  to  the  southward,  but  in  consequence  of 
its  numerous  dangers, sb-'i^w  water,  and  bad  anchorage,  is  only  used  by 
small  fishing  vessels.  I'iiu  only  safe  anchorage  Is  east  of  John  Island, 
but  it  is  small  and  studded  with  rocks,  and  should  not  be  attempted  by 
any  but  those  possessed  of  good  local  experience. 

Baccaro  Outer  Ledge,  about  ^  mile  in  length,  and  3^  fathoms  on  its 
shoalest  part,  lies  with  Baccaro  light-house  N.  66°  W.  nearly  IJ  miles, 
and  Blanche^  Is'Iand  south  point  N.  50°  E.  2^  miles. 

South  Ledge  consists  of  several  rocks,  the  south  westernmost  of 
which  is  always  seen,  and  from  it  the  northern  rock — which  uncovers 
at  a  quarter  ebb — bears  K.  6°  E.  300  yards,  and  Baccaro  light-house  S. 
67°  W.  1^  miles. 

Stone  Horse,  at  the  eastern  end  of  the  South  Ledge,  has  only  4  feet 
water,  and  is  ^  mile  distant  from  the  southern  rock  of  South  Ledge  in  a 
S.  79°  B.  direction. 

North  Ledge,  about  4  mile  iQ  length,  has  on  it"  northern  end  a  rock 
3  feet  above  high  water,  and  on  its  SW.  end  is  a  small  rock  which  is 
awash  at  low  water.  From  the  latter  rock  the  high  water  line  north  of 
Baccaro  Point  is  distant  f  mile,  and  Baccaro  light-house  bears  S.  50° 
W.  1  ,^  miles. 

Cuckold  Rock,  awash  at  low- water  springs,  is  a  small  detached  rock 
between  the  South  Ledge  and  Baccaro  light-house,  which  latter  bears 
from  the  rock  S.  65°  W.  *  mile. 
78 


mm 


O  HARBOR. 


able  to  the 
t  a  straight 
ughont  the 
,  varying  in 
c  shelter  to 
)  and  safest, 
gera  which, 
promote  the 
issful  prose- 
[ispensable; 
I  where — are 

sequence  of 
)nly  used  by 
ohn  Island, 
;tempted  by 

thorns  on  its 
•ly  1 J  miles, 

ternmost  of 
ch  uncovers 
ght-house  S. 

,8  only  4  feet 
h  Ledge  in  a 

n  end  a  rock 
ock  which  is 
line  north  of 
bears  S.  50o 

etached  rock 
I  latter  bears 


^SSSieSSSKIfS 


M?,$;'itt?^--^?ff,';^^taa-iMW^feMaSgK<i'Hy^^^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


I.I 


ti&  Ui  12.2 

Ki  .3.  iiii 

1^1  liii 

^  »*o  12.0 


1.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  145S0 

(716)  872-4S03 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVIicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


m 

ai 
m 

lii 

4 

01 
bi 
F 

Si 

is 
B 

A 

ei 

63 

cl 
ol 
fc 
bi 

ai 
tv 

80 
8l 

i8 

w< 
w 

N 
oi 

811 

b( 
al 

le 
aj 
ar 
hi 

wl 
ni 


mm 


PORT  LATOUR NEGRO  HARBOR. 


79 


Shot  Pouch  is  a  rocky  shoal  400  yards  in  extent,  the  center  being  J 
mile  S.  590  W.  from  Baccaro  light-house. 

Bantam  Rocks,  which  uncover  at  low-water  springu,  are  100  yards 
apart,  and  form  the  liighest  part  of  a  dangerous  rooky  ledge  nearly  i 
mile  in  length.  Prom  the  rocks  which  nearly  always  break,  Baccaro 
ligiithouse  bears  JS".  30°  E.  about  a  mile.  A  red  whistling  buoy  is  moor.'d 
i  mile  S.  270  W.  of  the  rocks, 

Brazil  Rock  is  a  dangerous  oflf-lying  rocky  shoal  having  only  12  feet 
over  it,  with  deep  water  close-to ;  the  sea  breaks  heavily  on  this  rock  in 
bad  weather,  but  during  hue  weather  it  is  only  marked  by  a  tide  rip. 
From  the  rock  Baccaro  lighthouse  bears  N.  12^  W.  oj  miles,  and  Cape 
Sable  light-house  N.  78°  W.  8  miles. 

Boll  Buoy.— A  bell  buoy  painted  with  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes, 
is  moored  in  19  fathoms  water,  about  200  yards  south  of  the  Brazil 
Bock. 

Negro  Harbor  derives  its  name  from  Negro  Island  at  its  entrance. 
At  the  head  of  the  harbor  the  river  Clyde  flows  into  the  inlet ;  here  sev- 
eral  mills  are  established,  from  whence  a  small  quantity  of  lumber  is 
exported.  Water  can  be  obtained  in  small  quantities.  There  are  two 
channels  into  the  harbor,  but  both  are  rendered  difficult  inconsequence 
of  numerous  dangers.  The  anchorage,  however,  is  safe  in  all  weathers 
for  vessels  of  moderate  draft,  and,  though  not  so  accessible  as  Shel- 
burue,  may  be  of  service  to  vessels  requiring  shelter. 

Negro  Island  attains  a  greater  elevation  than  the  adjoining  coast, 
and  is  of  a  somewhat  remarkable  appearance,  being  all  but  divided  in 
two,  the  connecting  link  being  a  low  narrow  shingle  causeway.  On  its 
sourheasteru  end  is  Cape  Negro,  dark  and  rocky,  from  whence  a  barren 
slope  rises  to  a  conspicuous  fringe  of  dark  fir  trees  on  the  summit  of  the 
island. 

Prom  theN  W.  point  of  the  island,  a  long  shingle  spit  expends  in  a  north- 
westerly direction  800  yards;  it  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  has  deep 
water  close  to  its  outer  end.  The  north  tangent  of  the  east  division  of 
Negro  Island,  open  of  the  north  tangent  of  the  wesi,  division,  leads  north 
of  the  spit. 

Oflf  the  SW.  end  of  the  island,  at  the  distance  of  |  mile,  are  some 
small  rocks  which  uncover  at  low  water ;  and  off  the  intervening  point 
between  the  NW.  and  8W.  extremities  of  the  island  is  Mackerel  Rock, 
always  above  water,  and  very  useful  as  a  raai-k  for  the  western  channel. 

The  Salvages,  consisting  of  a  long  line  of  rocks  nearly  2  miles  in 
length  north  and  south,  are  the  southernmost  dangers  to  be  avoided  on 
approaching  Negro  Harbor  from  the  westward ;  and  on  their  SW.  end 
are  two  clusters  of  rooks,  the  highest  parts  of  which  are  10  feet  above 
high  water.  The  east  side  of  this  extensive  group  of  rooks  is  steepto, 
which  increases  the  danger  of  approaching  during  thick  weather  or  at 
night. 


-■  'I 


!l^ 


??5^  r^iWtv,w"  T " ' 


80 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


Lifeboat.-^  lifeboat  has  been  placed  at  BlaacUe  at  the  western 
entrance  to  a.e  harbor  ^^^^^  ^^^^^^  eqimlistaut  frora 

Triangle  Rocks  «^«  ^"™^  j,,  the  western  channel;  the 

each  other,  occupying  a  central  position  in  i 
t.owesternroc.sshowat.w-^^^^^^^^^^^ 

3  feet  over  it,  with  deep  ^*  «^/"  ^^^J"  ^^^^^^^  next  west  the  cape, 
water,  and  steepto  on  it«  ««f ?^;;'^^-        „^^,erally  breaks  with  a  mod- 

attempted  ^y  »  »tmng«r  ^        ^  ___^^^  ^^^^^^  4  „ 

of^SsTrt:  - 'tZge^enterU  tbe  port,  but  too  muoh  rehanoo 

,U„„M  not  be  P>-f-i«  being  i"  'J»  P-  J"-,,,  „,  ,,,  .^,er„  pa. 

There  arc  several  other  dangers  on  mo  .      ^  u>  the  shallow 

»ge,  snob  ^^^J^ZZTl^^LXT^^i--^  --  "' 
rifhVaZrthrwrsSrn'sm:  of  the  entrance,  but  there  are  no  good 

cross  marks  for  f»se  dangers. ^^^ 

Dil.otlon»-Ba.t»m  =»^^°*-, '"  "r^od  „,  Negro  Island  to 

within  200  yards,  alter  whu  g  '"»  "J^"^™;C,ks  fstern.    Tbi. 

rrri:::irmr----BndgetL.and  the  rocks- 

r9'Wgr^«-r=rr:itd^^^^^ 

Bast  Point,  Budget  kock  w m  u.*  route— but  over  a 

be  altered  to  N.  78o  W.,  which  will  »«/j^  ^^^^^^^^^t ;  when  Davis 

3.fatho,n  patch-for  a  g-^l  P^rsteer  fo  t^^^^^^  on  theeast- 

Island  east  Poi"t  bears  N.  40°  W.,  steer  tor  ,t,  a  ^         i^i^^d 

em  shore  in  about  3J  fathoms,  mud,  ^'^htheNE.  point 

apparently  .justtonching,^rs^^^^^^^^ 
We8ternSntrance.--Approachmg  tro  ^^  ^.^^^ 


1 


:  ;-^^^i»siefl^s^sE^^^t^A-5^"-^ 


NEORO  AND  8HELBURNE  HARBORS. 


81 


I  western 

taut  from 
luiel;  the 
1  rook  bas 
hero  rock 
t  the  cape. 
,e  Triangle 
whilst  the 
:  is  about  ^ 

e  nearly  all 
above  high 

(Fith  >i  mod- 
Bast  Point 
the  actual 
90  yards  by 
,  north  side 
Ic  there  is  » 
ending  from 
loald  not  be 

Rock,  and  is 
uch  reliance 

eastern  pas- 
the  shallow 

list  covers  at 
are  no  good 

lay  be  passed 
(gro  Island  to 
astern.  This 
the  rocks  oflf 

last  tangent  of 
course  should 
te— but  over  a 
when  Davis 
or  on  the  east- 
f  Negro  Island 

I  give  the  south 
Boseway  light- 
proceed  on  that 


bearing  until  Purgatory  Point  appears  Ju.st  touching  Mackerel  Rock  N. 
46°  VV.,  when  ateer  on  the  latter  course  until  the  SW.  point  of  Negro 
Island  bears  S.  85°  E.,  then  steer  N.  68°  W.  between  Mackerel  and  Tri- 
angle Rocks,  and  when  Shag  Rock  bears  south, steer  north  until  abreast 
Purgatory  Point,  and  proceed  for  the  anchorage  as  before  directed. 

If  desirous  of  passing  south  of  Triangle  Rocks',  and  having  Cape 
Roseway  light-house  just  open  of  Cape  Negro  as  before,  bring  Shag  Rock 
to  bearN.  79°  W.  and  steer  N.  74°  W.,  which  will  lead  in  inidchanuel 
between  the  southern  Triangle  Rock  and  Shag  Rocks,  and  when  the 
latter  bears  8.  44°  W.,  alter  course  to  N.  18°  W.,  and  proceed  past 
Purgatory  Point  for  the  anchorage  according  to  previous  directions. 

Cape  Negro  open  of  the  high  water  tangent  next  west  the  cape  is  a  good 
mark  for  keeping  south  of  the  southern  rock  of  the  Triangle  group. 

Shelbume  Harbor  lies  6  miles  northward  of  Negro  Harbor.  Be- 
tween the  two  harbors  are  several  indentations,  as  well  as  Grey  Island 
and  Gull  Rock ;  but  they  need  no  description.  It  is  situated  in  the 
eastern  arm  of  an  inlet  to  which  navigable  entrance  lies  between  the 
mainland  and  the  eastern  side  of  McNutts  Island.  The  harbor  is  safe 
and  commodious,  and  being  easy  of  access  is  admirably  adapted  for 
vessels  seeking  shelter.  Fresh  water  of  an  excellent  quality  is  to  be 
obtained. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

McNutts  Island  is  nearly  3  miles  long  by  about  half  that  distance 
wide,  and  near  its  center  attains  an  elevation  of  130  feet.  Between 
the  eastern  side  oJ  the  island,  which  is  steep-to,  and  the  mainland,  is  a 
broad  clear  channel  leading  to  Shelbume  fifarbor ;  but  the  passage  on 
the  western  side  is  rendered  impassable  by  an  extensive  shallow  bar, 
on  which  in  some  places  there  is  only  one  foot  at  low  water. 

Cape  Roseway. — On  the  southeastern  extremity  of  McNutts  Island 
is  Cape  Roseway,  a  remarkable  white  granite  cliff,  on  which  stands  the 
light-house  77  feet  high  (forming  a  prominent  day  mark). 

Jig  Rock,  with  7  feet  water,  breaks  in  a  heavy  swell  and  lie8.|  mile 
S.  20°  £).  from  the  south  point  of  McNutts  Island,  there  being  4  fathoms 
over  rocky  bottom  in  the  channel  between. 

Bell  Rock,  a  few  feet  above  high  water,  lies  with  Cape  Roseway 
light-house  bearing  S.  54°  W.  2^  miles,  and  Blue  Gull  Island  N.  15°  E. 
1^  miles. 

Btraptub  Rock  lies  on  the  south  end  of  a  shallow  spit  extending 
from  Bony  Point  on  the  main  shore.  The  rock  uncovers  at  low  water, 
and  from  it  Bell  Rock  bears  S.  49°  E.  I  mile. 

Adamant  Shoal,  about  j|  mile  in  extent,  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of 
Shelbume  Harbor ;  the  actual  dangers  are  confined  to  two  rocky 
patches,  the  eastern  of  which,  known  as  Adamant  Rock,  has  10  feet 
water,  and  the  western,  or  Man-of-war  Rock,  distant  300  yards  west, 
has  only  4  feet  water. 

Middle  Rock,  with  2^  fathoms  on  its  shoalest  part,  lies  east  |  mile 
5314—6 


mi 


82 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.   E.   COAST. 


from  Surt  Point,  on  which  is  a  remarkable  bowlder,  and  i  mile  from  the 

nearestshoreSW,  of  Sand  Point.  ^.     ,  ,,^        a    «ff  Hnrf 

Hart  Point  Rock,  with  only  9  feet,  lies  about  400  yards  oflf  Hart 

Hero  Shoal,  witli  2*  fathoms  on  it,  lies  on  the  western  shore  near 
the  head  of  the  harbor.  A  white  house  on  an  elevation  NB.  of  tlie  town 
of  Shelburne  on  with  Shelburne  south  church,  leads  200  yards  east- 

ward  of  the  shoal.  , 

Directions—On  nearing  McNutts  Island  steer  along  its eAstern  shore, 
which  is  steep-io,  at  a  uioderate  offing,  and  when  drawing  near  Middle 
Rock  bring  the  NE.  bluff  of  the  island  to  bear  S.  46°  B.,  and  steer  N. 
46°  W.  until  abreast  Surf  Point,  which  can  be  passed  within  200  yards, 
thence  steer  to  pass  in  mid-channel  between  Sand  Point  and  the  land 
on  the  western  shore.  From  this  latter  position,  if  desirous  of  passing 
east  of  Adamant  Shoal,  steer  to  the  northward,  being  careful  on  ap- 
preaching  the  shoal  to  keep  Grey  Island  open  of  Surf  Point  Bowlder 
bearing  S.  10°  B.,  and  after  passing  the  danger  select  an  anchorage  as 
most  convenient  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbor  S.  12°  E. 

If  wishing  to  round  the  Adamant  Shoal  on  its  western  side,  and  being 
in  a  mid  channel  position  abreast  Sand  Point,  steer  along  the  western 
Bbore  with  Surf  Point  Bowlder  apparently  just  touching  the  SW.  high- 
water  line  of  McNutts  Island  bearing  S.  23°  B.,  and  when  Churchover 
church  tower  comes  in  line  with  the  end  of  the  Durphy  Wharf  alter 
course  to  N.  44°  B.,  bearing  in  mind  that  the  white  house  before  alluded 
to  open  SB.  of  the  Episcopal  church  tower  bearing  N.  22°  B.  clears  Hart 
Point  Rock,  and  all  dangets  on  the  western  shore  between  Hart  Point 
and  the  town  of  Shelburne. 

Jordan  River  is  a  deep  indentation  with  a  general  trend  to  the  north- 
ward  and  is  upwards  of  IJ  miles  in  breadth  at  its  entrance.  The  place 
is  easy  of  access  and  comparatively  free  from  danger,  but  can  not  be 
deemed  a  good  anchorage,  in  consequence  of  the  heavy  seas  which  tun 
in  during  southerly  gales.  , .  ^  ^ 

Blue  GuU  Island,  about  i  mile  in  length,  and  45  feet  high,  forms 
the  western  point  of  entrance  to  Jordan  River.  Between  this  island 
and  Jordan  Point  there  are  numerous  rocks,  some  of  which  uncover  at 

low  water.  „    ,  ,  x     i      t>-„.„ 

Green  Island,  which  is  common  to  Green  Harbor  and  Jordan  River, 

is  70  feet  high  and  i  mile  in  length,  and  about  the  same  distance  from 

Patersou  Point,  the  channel  between  carrying  a  depth  of  15  feet  water. 
The  Sisters  are  a  cluster  of  rocks  about  i  mile  from  the  western 

shore.    Two  of  the  rocks  uncover  at  half  ebb,  and  generally  show  a 

break  with  much  sea.  j  i,  •       ^.u 

Directions.— Approaching  Jordan  River  from  seaward,  bring  the 
west  end  of  Green  Island  to  bear  N.  17°  W.,  and  after  passing  it  at  a 
moderate  offing,  steer  boldly  up  in  mid-channel,  by  which  the  Sisters 
Rocks  will  be  avoided,  and  anchor  in  about  3^  fathoms  on  the  western 


1 


RUGOED    ISLAND    HARBOR. 


88 


I  from  the 

off  Hart 

lore  uear 
:  the  town 
jrds  east- 

teru  shore, 
jar  Middle 
d  steer  N. 
200  yards, 
I  the  laud 
of  passing 
)ful  on  ap- 
it  Bowlder 
ichorajje  as 

),  and  being 
he  western 
jSW.  high- 
Uhurchover 
Vharf  alter 
fore  alluded 
clears  Hart 
Hart  Point 

to  the  north- 
The  place 
t  can  not  be 
8  wbiuh  I  an 

high,  forms 
this  island 
uncover  at 

ordan  River, 
istance  from 
6  feet  water, 
the  western 
rally  show  a 

•d,  bring  the 
assing  it  at  a 
the  Sisters 
the  western 


shore,  with  western  head  just  open  of  the  high-water  line  about  Pater- 
son  Point  bearing  S.  40°  E.,  and  Jordan  Point  in  line  with  the  west 
tangent  of  Blue  Gull  Rock  about  S.  12°  E. 

Green  Harbor. — None  but  the  smallest  description  of  vessels  can 
find  shelter  from  southerly  and  southeasterly  gales,  which  send  in  a 
heavy  rolling  sea.  Anchorage  can  be  obtained  witl^  winds  from  west 
round  by  north  to  east. 

Rugged  Island  Harbor  derives  its  name  from  the  rugged  appear- 
ance of  the  coast  in  its  immediate  vicinity.  Black  Point,  on  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  entrance,  is  1^  miles  distant  from  Ram  Island  in  a  west 
direction,  and  between  this  point  and  Western  Head  there  are  numer- 
ous ledges  and  sunken  dangers,  rendering  the  approaches  to  the  har- 
bor difficult  and  dangerous.  This  place  is  seldom  resorted  to,  e:!ccept 
by  fishermen,  although  within  the  harbor  the  anchorage  is  good.  Dur- 
ing southerly  gales  the  uneven  rocky  ground  at  the  entrance  causes 
the  sea  to  break  from  side  to  side. 

Buoy — An  automatic  whistle  buoy,  painted  red,  with  the  letter  L 
in  white  on  it,  is  moored  with  Gull  Rock. light-house  bearing  N.  62°  W., 
distant  3^  miles,  and  eastern  extreme  of  Ram  Island  north.  From  this 
buoy  a  N.  40°  W.  course  leads  nearly  midway  between  Blow  Breaker 
and  the  4^-fathom  patch  sun  th westward  of  it,  thence  to  the  southern  end 
of  Cranberry  Island,  which  can  be  approached  with  comparative  safety, 
with  the  careful  use  of  the  lead  in  foggy  weather. 

Gull  Rock  is  a  small  rocky  ledge  about  15  feet  high  off  the  entrance 
to  Rugged  Island  Harbor. 

Long  Shoal,  with  3^  fathoms,  lies  with  the  highest  part  of  Green 
Island  in  line  with  the  outer  end  of  Western  Head  bearing  N.  50^  W., 
and  Gull  Rock  light-house  N.  24'^  E.  nearly  a  mile. 

Bull  Rock,  the  outer  of  two  dangers  off  Western  Head,  has  only  3 
feet  water,  and  its  position  is  generally  marked  by  a  break.  From  it 
the  western  extremity  of  Western  Head  bears  N.  7°  E.  1^  miles ;  and 
Gull  Rock  light-house  N.  47°  E.  about  2  miles.  Within  Bull  Rock,  \ 
mile  distant,  is  another  detached  shoal,  having  10  feet,  with  deep  water 
between  and  around  the  two. 

Chain  Ledges  consist  of  a  narrow  broken  ridge  of  rocks  nearly  a 
mile  in  length  north  and  south ;  the  highest  part  of  the  ledges  stands 
about  10  feet  above  high  water,  and  on  the  southern  extreme  is  a  small 
rock  which  uncovers  at  low  water,  and  generally  shows  a  break. 

From  this  latter  rock  Gull  light-house  bears  S.  23°  E.  over  f  mile,  and 
the  extreme  of  Western  Head  S.  47°  W. 

The  northern  end  of  the  ledges  terminates  in  a  rock  with  only  3  feet 
water,  at  the  distance  of  a  good  ^  mile  from  the  highest  part  of  the 
ledge ;  and  between  it  and  the  south  end  of  some  rocky  ledges  south  of 
Cranberry  Island  and  Sam  Rock,  detached  with  10  feet  water;  but 
though  deep  water  channels  exist  on  either  side  of  it  they  are  too  nar- 
row to  be  available  for  navigation  except  by  small  coasting  vessels. 


I 


I 
5; 


i  U 

'  It' 

r 


w 


84 


NOVA    SCOTIA — S.    E.    COAST. 


Middle  Ground  is  an  extensive  shallow  spit  studded  with  rocks, 
several  of  which  nncover  at  low- water  springs;  the  shoal  extends  from 
the  west  side  of  Gooseberry  Island,  more  than  lialf  way  across  to  Cran- 
berry  Island  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Rugged  Island  Har- 
bor. A  yellow  house  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  harbor  open  west- 
ward of  Shag  Rpck  bearing  N.  19°  E.  leads  westward  of  the  Middle 

Ground. 

From  the  Middle  Ground  to  the  northward  a  bank  of  3  fathoms  ex- 
tends from  the  eastern  shore  nearly  across  the  harbor,  leaving  only  a 
narrow  channel  about  200  yards  wide,  with  3i  fathoms,  abreast  of  Car- 
ter Island,  thus  rendering  it  unadvisable  to  attempt  the  anchorage 
within  with  vessels  drawing  more  than  15  feet. 

Whale  Rock  is  the  highest  part  of  an  extensive  rocky  shoal  north- 
east of  and  almost  joining  Gull  Rock.  The  shoal  is  nearly  a  mile  in 
length  north  and  south  between  the  5fathom  lines,  but  the  most  dan- 
gerous part  is  the  southern,  where,  i»  addition  to  the  Whale  Rock, 
which  uncovers  at  low  water  and  generally  shows  a  break,  are  several 
sunken  dangers,  the  southernmost  of  which  is  Kelp  Shoal  with  only  3 
feet  water. 

Trinidad  Rock  is  a  small  detached  patch,  with  10  feet  water,  near 
the  north  end  of  the  shoal  of  which  Whale  Rock  is  a  part,  and  from  it 
Gull  Rock  light-house  bears  S.  4°  W.  -^o  mile. 

South  Ledge  is  a  small  detached  shoal  with  3  fathoms  water.  From 
it  Gull  Rock  lighthouse  bears  N.  23°  W.,  the  nearest  point  of  the  rock 
being  J  mile  distant,  and  the  highest  part  of  Blue  Gull  Island  on  with 
the  outer  end  of  Western  Head  bearing  N.  77°  W. 

Eastern  Bull,  known  also  as  Blow  Breaker,  is  a  small  rocky  patch 
with  only  4  feet  water.  From  it  the  north  end  of  Ram  Island  appears 
touching  the  south  end  of  Black  Rock  bearing  N.  52°  E.,  and  a  white 
house  near  Gumming  Point  is  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  Gooseberry 
Island  N.  26°  W. 

Black  Point  Rock  uncovers  at  low  water,  and  is  the  outer  and 
highest  point  of  a  spit  extending  from  Black  Point  in  a  southerly  direc- 
tion. The  white  house  near  Gumming  Point  in  line  with  the  west  end 
of  Gooseberry  Island  bearing  N.  26°  W.  leads  westward  of  Black  Point 
Eock,  and  Black  Rock  its  apparent  length  open  north  of  Ram  Island 
leads  between  the  rock  and  Eastern  Bull. 

Tides. ^The  tidal  current  along  shore  between  Ram  Island  and 

Baccaro  Point  is  governed  by  the  Bay  of  Fundy  tide,  the  flood  setting 
to  the  westward  and  the  ebb  to  the  eastward.  The  velocity  increases 
in  proceeding  westward  .'vom  Ram  Island,  where  the  strength  varies 
from  half  to  one  knot  an  hour. 

There  is  also  a  current  ofif  this  shore,  and  though  the  general  trend 
is  to  the  west  ward,  its  strength  and  direction  are  greatly  influenced  by 
winds.  After  easterly  gales  the  current  increases  its  westerly  set,  and 
it  is  retarded  in  proportion  by  westerly  gales. 


RUGGED    ISLAND    HAKUOR — DIRECTIONS. 


85 


th  rocks, 
luds  from 
to  Cran- 
aud  Har- 
)eii  west- 
e  Middle 

thouiB  ex- 
ng  only  a 
st  of  Car- 
mchorage 

oal  north- 
a  mile  in 
most  dan- 
lale  Rock, 
re  several 
nth  only  3 

Fater.  near 
»nd  from  it 

ter.  From 
)f  the  rock 
nd  on  with 

ocky  patch 
id  appears 
nd  a  white 
Gooseberry 

outer  and 
jerly  direc- 
le  west  end 
Jlack  Point 
tarn  Island 

sland  and 
ood  setting 
increases 
igth  varies 


;y 


neral  trend 
flueuoed  by 
irly  set,  and 


From  the  Westward. — After  passing  Western  Head  at  a  moderate 
distance,  bring  it  in  line  with  Cape  Koseway  lighthouse  aud  continue 
with  these  marks  in  line  until  Gull  Rock  lighthouse  bears  S.  46<^  E., 
when  steer  N.  7°  E.  for  the  west  side  of  Clam  Island.  Rounding  Chim 
Island  at  about  20U  yards  distance,  anchor  in  2,^  fathoms,  mud,  with 
the  west  end  of  Clam  Island  bearing  S.  4°  W.,  where  the  liolding 
ground  is  good  and  the  anchorage  safe. 

There  is  also  fair  anchorage  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay  betwe'^n  Shag 
Rock  and  a  position  ^  mile  south  of  Clam  Island  in  'i^  to  4  fathoms. 
Care  shouUl  be  taken  on  passing  Shag  Rock  to  avoid  a  shoal  with  only 
6  feet  on  it,  about  200  yards  to  the  NW. 

The  anchorage  within  Locke  Island  is  only  adapted  for  vessels  of 
small  draft,  but  it  can  not  be  deemed  secure,  as  the  holding  grouud  is 
bad. 

Directions  from  the  Eastward. — Vessels  with  a  leading  wind  can 
pass  between  Emulous  aud  Farm  Ledges  in  5  fathoms  by  bringing  the 
Gull  Rock  light-house  in  line  with  the  oater  end  of  Western  Head  bear- 
ing 8.  83°  W. ;  or  outside  Farm  Ledge  by  bringing  Government  Point 
at  the  entrance  of  Shelburne  Harbor  in  line  with  the  outer  end  of 
Western  Head  bearing  west. 

With  either  of  the  above  marks  in  line  proceed  to  the  westward  until 
the  white  house  near  Cumming  Point  is  in  line  with  the  west  end  of 
Gooseberry  Island  bearing  N.  27°  W.  (the  marks  for  leading  over  the 
Eastern  Bull),  thence  steer  for  the  south  end  of  Cranberry  Island,  and 
when  the  yellow  house  is  in  line  with  Shag  Island  N.  15°  E.  steer  for  the 
west  side  of  Clam  Island  aboat  N.  7°  E.,  and  proceed  as  before  directed. 

From  Seaward. — Bring  Gull  Rock  lighthouse  to  bear  N.  4°  E.,  and 
on  approaching  it  pass  about  ^  mile  west  of  the  rock,  and  when 
abreast  the  lighthouses  teer  N.  7°  E.  until  approrching  Cranberry 
Island.  When  a  yellow  house  is  in  line  with  Sha\  Rock,  proceed  as 
before  directed. 

Ram  Island,  a  long  ^  mile  in  length,  with  an  elevation  of  21  feet, 
lies  off  the  pitch  of  Hemeon  Head,  from  which  it  is  distant  ^  mile,  but 
the  channel  with  3^  fathoms  is  narrowed  to  the  breadth  of  300  yards 
by  shoal  spits  extending  from  the  island  and  main  shores.  A  dangerous 
rocky  shoal  extends  in  a  southerly  direction  from  the  south  end  of  Ram 
Island  for  the  distance  of  a  mile,  terminating  in  Emulous  Ledge  which 
UL^-overs  at  low  water. 

FaiTn  Ledge  is  a  small  detached  shoal,  with  31^  fathoms  water,  ^ 
mile  outside  Emulous  Ledge,  the  channel  between  having  depths  of  5 
to  7  fathoms. 

From  the  ledge  the  tangents  of  Black  Rock  and  Ram  Island  appear 
nearly  touchiug  bearing  N.  15°  E.  and  the  extremity  of  Western  Head 
just  3hnt  in  by  Gull  Rock.  There  is  also  a  small  patch  with  5  fathoms 
water  at  the  distance  of  i  mile  S.  10°  W.  from  Farm  Ledge. 

Black  Rock,  about  10  feet  above  high  water,  is  divided  in  t«vo,  and 


86 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


at  a  little  distauoe  resembles  two  rocks ;  the  rock  is  about  \  mile  from 
the  shore  of  Hemeon  Head,  with  a  narrow  deep-water  channel  between. 
Bantam  Rock,  of  small  extent,  uncovers  at  low  water,  and  lies  S. 
l6o  W.  I  mile  from  Harding  Point ;  it  is  the  highest  point  of  a  cluster 
of  rocky  patches  which  occupy  a  space  g  mile  in  length  north  and  south. 
From  Bastard  Rock,  the  southeaaternmost  of  the  group,  with  3^  fathoms 
water,  the  summit  of  the  dark  hill  of  Richardson  Head  is  seen  over  the 
high-water  tangent  within  Green  Island,  bearing  N.  30°  B. 

Although  there  is  a  deep-water  channel  between  Bantam  Rock  and 
the  entrance  points  of  Sable  River,  large  vessels  should  keep  outside 
these  patches. 

Sable  River.-— At  the  distance  of  1!^  miles  SW.  of  Green  Island  is 
Harding  Point  at  the  eastern  entrance  of  Sable  River;  but  as  a  bar 
with  only  3  feet  water  (which  breaks  heavily  in  southerly  gales)  extends 
across  the  river  entrance,  none  but  very  small  vessels  in  charge  of  men 
possessing  local  knowledge  can  make  the  navigation  of  this  river 
available. 

Oreen  Island,  about  20()  yards  in  extent  and  45  feet  high,  lies  about 
J  mile  from  the  nearest  shore,  the  passage  between  being  rocky,  shal- 
low, and  uneven. 

Port  Hebert— The  entrance  to  the  port  may  be  easily  recognized  by 
the  dark  hill  of  Richardson  Head,  thickly  wooded  and  about  130  feet 
high,  with  a  very  abrupt  fall  towards  the  east.  Within  Richardson 
Head,  and  stretching  across  the  river,  is  a  bar  with  only  2  fathoms 
water,  which  breaks  in  heavy  weather. 

Hebert  Rocks,  which  uncover  at  low  water  about  J  mile  from  the 
shore,  form  the  outer  part  of  a  spit  extending  from  the  western  point  of 
entrance  to  Port  Hebert. 

Tides.— The  tidal  current  through  the  channel  changes  a  little  after 
high  and  low  water  by  the  shore,  and  during  springs  attains  a  velocity 
of  one  knot  per  hour. 

Directions.— Port  Hebert  affords  safe  anchorage,  but  only  to  small 
vessels  on  account  of  the  bar  and  narrow  channel.  Strangers  should 
never  attempt  the  port  without  a  leading  wind,  and  even  then  the 
services  of  a  pilot  should  be  procured. 

Bring  Shingle  Point  in  line  with  a  white  house  bearing  N.  I  o  W., 
and  when  approaching  Shingle  Point  pass  it  about  100  yards,  and 
anchor  in  4  fathoms  water  off  a  water  course  on  the  south  end  of  a 
shingle  beach  north  of  Shingle  Point,  distant  J  mile. 

Port  Jolie,  an  indentation  5  miles  deep,  is  only  available  for  small 
vessels,  and  even  for  those  there  is  no  safe  anchorage ;  the  so-called  port 
should  be  avoided  by  strangers. 

Little  Hope  Shoal,  distant  2  miles  S.  61°  W.  from  Little  Hope  light- 
house, is  if  mile  long  between  the  5fathom  lines,  and  has  on  its  shoalest 
point  only  10  feet  water,  from  which  Lesser  Hope  Rock,  off  the  western 
point  of  Port  Jolie,  is  in  line  with  Thrum  Point  on  the  eastern  side  of 


PORT    MOUTON — BRAZIL   ROCKS. 


87 


aile  from 
between. 
Dtl  lies  S. 
a  cluHter 
,iid  south. 
I  fatlioms 

1  over  the 

ttock  and 
'|)  outside 

Island  is 

as  a  bar 

i)  extends 

ge  of  men 

this  river 

lies  about 
>cky,  shal- 

agnized  by 
lit  130  feet 
uichardsou 

2  fathoms 

e  from  the 
rn  point  of 

little  after 
i  a  velocity 

ly  to  small 
;ers  should 
1  then  the 

N.  I  o  W., 
^ards,  and 
a  end  of  a 

e  for  small 
called  port 

Hope  light- 
its  shoalest 
;he  western 
ern  side  of 


Port  Ebert  bearing  S.  82°  W.,  and  the  eastern  tangent  of  Jolie  Point 
N.  7°  W.,  the  distance  off  the  pitch  of  the  point  being  1;^  miles. 

Little  Hope  Islet,  15  feet  high,  is  composed  of  small  bowlders,  thrown 
np  by  the  sen,  on  a  rocky  foundation,  and  from  it  in  a  northerly  direc- 
tion shoal  water  extends  ^  mile,  whilst  on  the  south  side  the  5  fathom 
line  is  nearly  J  mile  distant  from  the  shore  of  the  islet. 

A  lino  S.  35°  W.  from  the  south  point  of  Mouton  Island  apparently 
touches  Mouton  Head  and  Jolie  Point  on  the  mainland.  The  distance 
between  the  two  latter  points  is  nearly  3.^  miles,  with  Little  Jolie  and 
Cadden  bays  intervening;  Black  Point,  off  which  sLoal  water  extends 
about  It  mile,  being  common  to  both. 

Port  Mouton. — There  are  two  channels  leading  to  the  anchorage; 
the  one  north  of  Mouton  Island  is  available  for  large  vessels,  but  the 
western  channel  is  narrow  and  difficult,  and  not  adapted  for  vessels 
drawing  more  than  15  feet  water.  The  principal  occupation  of  the  set- 
tlers along  the  shores  of  the  port  is  fishing. 

Mouton  Island,  110  feet  high,  is  2  miles  long  north  and  south,  and 
5  mile  broad.  From  its  north  point  a  spit  extends  nearly  a  mile  in  a 
NW.  direction,  on  the  outer  extremity  of  which  there  is  a  shoal  with 
2f  fathoms;  between  this  shoal  and  a  similar  depth  near  the  island 
there  is  a  channel  over  the  spit  with  3^  fathoms. 

There  is  also  a  detached  shoal  with  3^  fathoms  water  a  short  ^  mile 
N.  24°  E.  from  the  NE.  point  of  Spectacle  Island. 

Lifeboat— There  is  a  lifeboat  at  the  northwestern  end  of  the  island. 

South  Rock  lies  400  yards  off  the  south  point  of  Mouton  Island,  and 
uncovers  at  low  water. 

Bull  Rock,  4  feet  above  high  water,  lies  300  yards  off  Bull  Point  on 
the  mainland  within  Mouton  Island,  and  from  its  position  is  useful  as 
a  guide  for  the  narrows. 

Middle  Rock,  with  7  feet  water,  occupies  a  central  position  in  the 
narrows  of  the  western  channel,  between  Bull  Rock  and  the  rocks  ex- 
tending in  a  southerly  direction  from  Jacket  Island. 

Devastation  Shoal  has  only  2  fathoms  water  on  its  northern  end, 
which  lies  in  an  easterly  direction  f  mile  from  the  south  point  of  Mou- 
ton Island.  There  is  a  deep-water  channel  between  the  island  and  the 
shoal,  and  Round  Rock  bearing  N.  4°  E.  will  lead  through  the  center 
in  5  fathoms. 

Brasil  Rocks  form  a  cluster  about  ^  mile  in  length ;  several  of  the 
rocks  uncover,  but  one  known  as  the  Bound  Rock  is  always  above 
water,  and  is  consequently  of  great  service  in  entering  the  port  by  the 
eastern  channel.  From  the  Roand  Rock  the  north  tangent  of  Moutou 
Island  bears  8.  72°  W.,  and  it  is  distant  from  Halibut  Head  about  a 
mile,  the  channel  between  being  deep  and  free  from  danger.  A  de- 
tached rock,  with  only  3  feet  water,  lies  at  the  distance  of  800  yards  iti 
a  SE.  direction  from  the  Round  Rock. 

White  Point  Rock,  with  2$  fathoms  water,  is  of  small  extent  with 


*; 


88 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


deep  water  close-to;  from  it  White  Point  bears  N.  33°  W.  distant  1^ 
miles,  and  tlie  hi|;liest  Brazil  Hock  in  line  with  Halibut  Head  8. 02°  W. 

White  Point  Shoal,  with  6  fathoms  water,  lias  10  and  13  fathoms 
close  around.  This  shoal  should  be  avoided  by  large  vessels  because 
the  rock  rises  so  abruptly  that  the  lead  may  possibly  have  missed  the 
highet<t  point. 

Jacket  Island,  within  Mouton  Island,  is  steep-to  on  its  northern  and 
western  sides,  but  to  the  southward  the  low- water  line  runs  off  about 
300  yards  in  broken  rocks;  between  Jacket  and  Mouton  Islands  the 
ground  is  foul. 

Spectacle  Island. — Between  the  island  and  the  main  shore  are  nu- 
merous rocks,  and  it  is  also  connectefl  by  a  shallow  rocky  spit  with 
Massacre  Island  a  long  ^  mile  to  the  SK. 

Spe ;  :acle  Rock,  3  feet  above  high  water,  can  always  be  seen;  it 
lies  250  yards  from  the  point  of  Spectacle  Island,  with  a  deep-water 
channel  between. 

Western  Channel. — When  between  Mouton  Head  .viid  the  south 
point  of  Mouton  Island  bring  Ball  Bock  in  line  with  the  east  tangent 
of  Spectacle  Ish.nd  bearing  N.  25°  W.,  and  continue  with  these  marks 
until  approaching  the  rock,  which  should  be  passed  on  its  eastern  side 
about  150  yards  distant,  with  the  ship's  head  towards  Spectacle  Rock, 
and  this  course  should  be  continued  until  the  south  end  of  Jacket  Isl- 
and bears  N.  SH°  E.,  when  anchorage  in  7  fathoms,  mud,  may  be  ob- 
tained north  of  Bull  Point  by  steering  S.  88°  W.,  with  Bull  Rock  in 
line  with  the  south  point  of  Mouton  Island,  and  Spectacle  Rock  just 
open  west  of  Massacre  Island ;  at  this  anchorage  the  holding  ground 
is  good,  but  a  disagreeable  swell  is  experienced  during  easterly  gales. 

Directions. — Eastern  Channel. — Give  White  Point  a  berth  of  about 
i^  mile  and  proceed  to  the  westward,  taking  care  to  avoid  shutting  in 
the  eastern  point  of  Mouton  Island  with  Halibut  Head,  until  the  white 
sand  cliffs  south  of  the  anchorage  open  out  north  of  Spectacle  Island 
bearing  S.  30°  W.,  in  order  to  clear  the  shoal  patch  on  the  outer  end  of 
Mouton  Spit  and  the  adjoining  patch  with  3f  fathoms. 

With  the  above  marks  on  steer  in  about  S.  36°  W.,  and  anclior  in  6 
or  7  fathoms,  mud,  with  White  Point  just  shut  in  by  the  north  end  of 
Spectacle  Island,  and  Massacre  Island  in  line  with  the  south  end  of 
Spectacle  island. 

Coming  from  seaward  and  wishing  to  pass  between  Mouton  Island 
and  Brazil  Rock,  bring  Halibut  Head  in  line  with  the  north  tangent  of 
Spectacle  Island  bearing  N.  85°  W.,  and  proceed  with  these  marks  on 
until  Round  Rock  bears  N.  14°  E.,  when  alter  course  to  N.  62°  W.,  and 
proceed  as  before  directed  to  the  anchorage. 

Coast — From  White  Point  to  Western  Head  the  coast  trends  about 
ENE.  with  Black  Point  and  Gull  Bay  and  Island  in  between. 

LiverpoolBay  isdan^erous — especially  during  the  fall  of  the  year  and 
winter  mouths — for  all  vessels  excepting  those  of  a  sufficiently  small 


LIVERPOOL    BAY — PORT    METWAY, 


89 


Htaut  1:^ 
i.  023  W. 
fathoniH 
because 
HHuil  the 

lieni  and 
)ff  about 
M\i\s  the 

e  are  uu- 
jpit  witli 

8eeu ;  it 
lep- water 

lie  south 
;  tangeut 
lae  marks 
item  side 
jle  Kock, 
icket  [si- 
ly  be  ob- 
I  Rock  in 
Jock  just 
g  grouud 
•ly  gales. 
1  of about 
uttiug  iu 
the  white 
le  Island 
ter  end  of 

s'.ior  iu  6 
;h  eud  of 
h  end  of 

>n  Island 
angent  of 
marks  on 
W.,  and 

lids  about 

a year and 
tlv  s'nall 


draft  to  anchor  in  Herring  Cove.  Front  Eastern  Uead  to  the  westward 
for  the  distance  of  a  mile  the  slioru  is  foul,  and  an  otUng  of  ^  mile  should 
be  maintained. 

The  town  of  Liverpool,  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  is  hidden  from  view 
on  approaching  from  se^iward.     It  carries  on  in  connection  with  Mill- 
town  an  extensive  trade  with   Halifax,  the   United  States,  and  West 
Indies.    The  exports  are  principally  lumber,  cordwood,  fish,  and  farm 
produce. 

Shipbuilding  is  carried  on  to  a  small  extent,  and  a  considerable 
amount  of  tonnage  belongs  to  the  port;  there  is  a  foundry  where  small 
repairs  can  be  effected.     Provisions  and  water  can  always  be  procured. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Automatic  Buoy. — An  automatic  whistling  buoy  painted  black  and 
white  in  vertical  stripes,  is  moored,  in  20  fathoms  water,  in  the  fairway 
to  Liverpool  Bay ;  with  Coffin  Island  light-house  bearing  N.  17°  W., 
distant  IJ  miles;  Fort  Point  light-house N.  68°  W.,  and  Western  Head 
S.  «2o  W.,  2i  miles. 

Fort  Point  Ledge  extends  off  Fort  Point  in  a  NE. direction;  the 
outer  end  of  the  ledge  is  distant  from  the  light-house  200  yards,  and  is 
marked  by  a  buoy  on  its  NE.  end  in  2  fathoms  water. 

Directioiui. — In  proceeding  up  Liverpool  Bay  a  mid-channel  course 
should,  if  possible,  be  preserved.  The  anchorage  mark  in  Herring 
Cove  is  Moose  Point  in  line  with  the  SE.  point  of  the  cove,  in  about  2 
fathoms,  mud;  the  holding  ground  is  good,  but  a  considerable  sea  rolls 
in  during  heavy  gales  between  south  and  east. 

Safe  anchorage  can  be  obtained  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  abreast 
the  town,  but  it  is  only  adapted  for  small  vessels,  as  a  bar  with  4  feet 
water  extends  across  the  entrance ;  the  services  of  a  local  pilot  are 
necessary. 

Coffins  Island,  thickly  wooded,  lies  on  the  north  side  of  Liverpool  Bay. 
The  northern  end  of  the  island  is  distant  §  mile  from  the  mainland, 
and  is  connected  by  a  shallow  bar  on  which  in  some  places  the  depth 
is  only  3  feet. 

Port  Metway. — The  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  consists  of  a  series 
of  small  islands  extending  from  the  mainland  to  a  distance  of  about  3 
miles  in  a  southerly  direction,  and  terminating  in  Frying-pan  Islet,  a 
small  rocky  islet  10  feet  above  high  water. 

In  Port  Metway  safe  anchorage  is  to  be  obtained,  but  in  the  channel 
leading  thereto  are  several  rocks,  which  render  it  difficult  of  access  to 
strangers,  who  should  obtain  the  services  of  a  local  pilot.  Above  the 
town,  to  the  NW.,  are  several  mills  where  lumber  is  sawn ;  this  and  fish 
form  the  principal  articles  of  export. 

Metway  light-house  stands  on  the  shore  of  Metway  Head,  a  dark 
wooded  headland  forming  the  western  point  of  entrance  into  Port  Met- 
way. 

Southwest  Breaker  is  a  dangerous  patch  with  only  6  feet  water,  on 


I 


I 


90 


NOVA    SCOTIA 8.    E.    COAST. 


the  south  euJ  of  a  rocky  shoal  off  the  entrance  of  Port  Metway.  Be- 
tween it  and  Frying-pan  Island  there  is  a  deep-water  channel  nearly  ^ 
mile  broad  between  the  5-fathom  lines.  A  red  bell  buoy,  marked  "  SW. 
Breaker,"  in  black  letters,  is  moored  ^  mile  8.  25°  W.  of  it. 

Stone  Horse  is  a  detachetl  rock  which  uncovers  at  low- water  springs, 
and  from  it  Metway  light-house  appears,  almost  touching  the  south 
tangent  of  Frying-pan  Island  ;  from  the  latter  the  rock  is  distant  about 
^  mile. 

Rugged  Rock  is  a  detached  patch  lying  off  the  extremity  of  a  spit 
extending  from  the  shore  a  little  south  of  Metway  Head.  This  rock  has 
only  7  feet  water,  and  is  marked  by  a  breaker  in  heavy  weather. 

Stony  Ridge,  consisting  of  bowlders,  with  1^  fathoms  on  its  shoalest 
part,  is  distant  about  200  yards  from  the  nearest  high-water  line  north 
of  the  light- house. 

Middle  Island  Rock,  with  9  feet  water,  breaks  in  heavy  weather ; 
this  rock  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel  abreast  Neils  Point. 

Middle  Ledge  is  a  shoal  patch  about  J  of  a  mile  in  length  and  hav- 
ing on  it  several  rocks  which  uncover  at  low  water. 

Nautilus  Rock  is  on  the  outer  end  of  a  large  flat  extending  from  the 
shore  between  Neils  Point  and  the  town  a  distance  of  H  miles  in  aNW. 
direction.  The  flat  extends  upwards  of  J  mile  from  the  shore,  and  is 
connected  by  a  narrow  neck  with  the  shoal  water  on  the  northern  part 
01  the  bay. 

The  south  tangent  of  Bass  Island  apparently  touching  the  outer  wharf 
of  the  town  bearing  S.  78°  W.  leads  over  the  neck  in  about  15  feet  water ; 
and  Bass  Island  north  end  apparently  touching  the  south  end  of  Foster 
Island  S.  75°  W.  just  clears  the  southern  edge  of  the  bank  extending 
from  Foster  Island  in  an  easterly  direction. 

Directions. — Vessels  entering  Port  Metway  should  leave  the  bell 
buoy  ott"  SW.  Breaker  to  the  eastward.  From  it  a  course  N.  17°  W. 
will  lead  up  to  the  iron-can  buoy  oft"  the  flats  northward  of  Neils  Point. 
When  the  northern  wharf  of  the  town  bears  west,  bring  Dry  Ledgo 
to  bear  N.  19^  W.,  in  order  to  keep  well  clear  of  Middle  Ledge,  and 
when  Bass  Island  opens  out  north  of  the  outer  wharf  of  the  town  bear- 
ing S.  79°  W.,  alter  course  to  bring  Bass  Island  in  the  middle  of  the 
opetiing  between  the  outer  wharf  before  mentioned  and  the  south  side 
of  Foster  Island;  with  this  mark  on  proceed,  and  when  the  noith  end 
of  Toby  Island  is  in  line  with  Neils  Point  bearing  S.  60°  B.  anchor  in 
5  fathoms,  mud. 

If  from  the  eastward,  and  wishing  to  pass  between  the  Stone  Horse 
and  Southwest  Breaker,  open  Metway  lighthouse  well  to  the  south- 
ward of  Frying-pan  Island,  and  when  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  68°  W. 
steer  for  it  until  the  bell  buoy  bears  S.  17°  E.  and  proceed  as  previously 
directed. 

O-reen  Bay,  is  about  3^  miles  in  depth,  with  gradual  soundings  and 
sandy  bottom.    The  bay  is  not  a  safe  anchorage,  for  not  only  is  it  ex- 


PORT    METWAY — LA    HiVE    BIVEK. 


91 


itway.  Be- 
lel  nearly  ^ 
irked  "SW. 

ter  springs, 
r  the  soath 
stant  about 

ty  of  a  spit 
liis  rocic  has 
Lther. 

its  sboalest 
r  line  north 

y  weather; 
ils  Point, 
th  and  hav- 

ng  from  the 
es  in  aNW. 
ihore,  and  is 
)rthern  part 

outer  wharf 
» feet  water ; 
id  of  Foster 
i  extending 

ive  the  bell 
e  N.  17°  W. 
Neils  Point. 
Dry  Ledge 
Ledge,  and 
}  town  bear- 
iddle  of  the 
e  south  side 
le  north  end 
3.  anchor  in 

Stone  Horse 
)  the  south- 

8  N.  680  W. 
IS  previously 

uiidings  and 
only  is  it  ex- 


posed to  southerly  winds,  but  is  also  objectionable  during  easterly  gales, 
which  generally  draw  round  by  way  cf  south. 

Anchorage. — Small  vessels  will  find  secure  anchorage  within  the  en- 
trance of  Crooked  Island  Channel,  to  enter  which  bring  the  wharf  on 
Johnsons  Island  in  the  middle  of  the  opening  bearing  N.  53°  E.,  and 
steer  on  this  course  in  the  middle  of  the  channel.  After  passing  the  rocky 
entrance  keep  between  the  mud  banks  on  either  side,  which  may  be 
distinguished  by  the  grass  which  grows  on  the  mud  flats,  and  anchor 
when  about  200  yards  from  the  wharf. 

Qreen  Point  Rock,  a  small  isolated  patch  having  10  feet  water  on 
it,  lies  J^  mile  from  Green  Point  in  a  N.  78°  W.  direction. 

Q-reen  Ledge,  ^  mile  in  extent,  has  a  small  portion  wliich  uncovers 
at  the  last  quarter  ebb;  from  this  part  Long  Point  bears  N.  20°  W.  §■ 
mile,  and  Green  Point  S.  76°  B.  1 J  miles.  Entering  Green  Bay  east  of 
the  Half-way  Bock  and  Green  Ledge,  on  passing  Indian  Island,  avoid 
bringing  the  SW,  end  of  Indian  Island  to  bear  eastward  of  S.  28°  E., 
or  southward  of  S.  12°  E.  in  order  to  clear  Green  Point  Hock. 

Half-way  Rock,  so  called  from  its  being  nearly  midway  between 
Indian  Island  and  Long  Point,  on  the  western  side  of  Green  Bay,  has 
2f  fathoms  on  it,  and  lies  with  Cape  La  Have  a  little  open  south  of 
Green  Point,  the  latter  bearing  If.  81°  E.  IJ  miles  distant,  and  the  SW. 
end  of  Indian  Island  S.  42°  E. 

Indian  Island,  about  ^  mile  in  length,  is  distant  one  mile  south- 
ward from  Green  Point,  with  a  clear,  deep  channel  between,  f  mile 
wide. 

Bantam  Shoal,  a  small  rocky  patch  with  only  3  feet  water,  lies  off 
the  center  of  Bantam  Bay,  and  from  it  Green  Point  bears  N.  87°  W.  J 
mile. 

La  Ha^e  River— From  West  Ironbound  Island  on  the  east  to  Cape 
La  Have,  an  abrupt  cliff  with  a  reddish  face,  95  feet  high,  forming  the 
western  point  of  the  river  entrance,  the  distance  is  4  miles.  From  its 
entrance  the  river  takes  a  general  trend  to  the  northward,  and  is  navi- 
gable for  small  vessels  as  far  as  Bridgewater,  a  settlement  on  the  right 
bank  of  the  river,  nearly  15  miles  from  West  Ironbonnd  Island. 

On  the  inside  shore  of  Cape  La  Have  are  numerous  islets,  which  by 
retaining  the  debris  of  the  river  are  now  connected  with  each  other 
and  the  main  shore  by  a  series  of  shallow  banks,  with  occasional  deep- 
water  holes  and  channels.  A  bell  buoy  is  moored  in  22  fathoms, 
with  West  Ironbound  Island  light-house  bearing  N.  2°  E.,  distance  2|- 
miles,  and  Moshers  Island  light-house  N.  32°  W.,  distant  3  miles. 

Black  Rock,  small  in  extent  and  5  feet  above  high  water,  lies  S.  69° 
E.  one  mile  from  the  pitch  of  Cape  La  Have.  Small  vessels  may  ap- 
proach this  rock  tolerably  near  on  all  sides,  but  large  vessels  should 
not  approach  its  south  side  nearer  than  J  mile,  on  account  of  two  small 
shoals  with  4^  and  4J  fathoms  respectively. 


92 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


The  east  tangents  of  Point  Enrag^  and  West  Ironbound  Island  in 
line  bearing  N.  28°  E.  leads  southward  and  eastward  of  these  shoals. 

Cape  Rock  is  small,  with  3J  fathoms,  J  mile  from  Cape  La  Have  in 
a  southerly  direction,  with  deep  water  all  round. 

Moshers  Island,  135  feet  high,  is  1^  miles  long  east  and  west  and  ^ 
mile  broad,  and  is  connected  with  East  Spectacle  Island  at  J  mile  north 
of  it  by  a  bar  with  general  depths  of  2^  fathoms. 

Shag  Rock,  which  covers  at  high  water,  lies  N.  69°  E.  4  mile  from 
the  north  end  of  West  Ironbound  Island. 

Ironbound  Breaker  is  a  small  rock  on  the  outer  extremity  of  a  spit 
extending  J  jnile  from  the  west  point  of  West  Ironbound  Island.  ' 

French  Rock,  witli  7  feet  water,  and  2  to  3  fathoms  close  around, 
lies  on  the  bar  between  West  Spectacle  and  Moshers  Islands ;  within 
this  bar  there  is  a  safe  anchorage  in  3  to  4  fathoms,  mud.  West  Iron- 
bound  Island  lighthouse,  just  seen  clear  of  the  NE.  end  of  Moshers 
Island,  leads  southward  of  French  Bock. 

Moshers  Ledge,  lying  nearly  midway  between  the  west  end  of 
Moshers  Island  and  West  Spectacle  Island,  has  only  one  foot  water. 

Cockawee  Shoal,  ^  mile  in  length,  lies  between  West  Spectacle 
Island  and  the  western  shore  of  La  Have  River,  and  has  only  4  feet  water 
on  its  shoalest  part.  The  SW.  end  of  West  Ironbound  Island,  appar- 
ently touching  the  NE.  end  of  East  Spectacle  Island  bearing  8. 69°  E. 
leads  SW.;  the  house  in  the  sandy  cove  on  the  NB.  side  of  Moshers 
Island  open  of  East  Spectacle  Island  bearing  S.  37°  E.  leads  eastward ; 
and  the  Episcopal  church  bearing  N.  9°  W.  leads  westward  of  Gocka- 
w«  e  Shoal. 

Ozners  Rock,  which  dries  at  low  water,  is  the  highest  part  of  a 
shoal  extending  olf  Oxners  Head  for  some  distance  along  shore. 

Bull  Rock. — From  the  shore  near  the  Episcopal  church  there  ex- 
tends in  a  southeasterly  direction  a  rocky  shoal,  the  highest  part  of 
which,  known  as  Bull  Bock,  is  just  awash  at  high-water  extraordinary 
springs,  and  is  therefore  generally  visible.  About  200  yards  from  Bull 
Bock,  in  a  SE.direction,  there  is  a  shoal  with  only  one  foot  water;  and 
another  with  3  feet  water  lies  nearly  200  yards  from  Bull  Bock,  in  a  north- 
easterly direction.  Krout  Point  in  line  with  middle  of  Parkes  Island 
N.  5°  E.  leads  eastward  of  the  shoal. 

Directions.— Approaching  La  Have  Biver,  two  passages  are  avail- 
able, one  on  each  side  of  West  Ironbound  Island ;  the  only  danger  to 
be  avoided  on  passing  outside  the  island  is  Ironbound  Breaker. 

The  passage  inside  West  Ironbound  Island  is  narrow ;  Shag  Bock  is 
nearly  always  seen,  but  should  it  be  covered  the  SE.  tangent  of  Cross 
Island  in  line  with  Point  Enrag^  bearing  N.  48°  E.  will  clear  the  Shag 
Bock  and  lead  through  between  the  island  and  Gaff  Point. 

There  are  several  available  anchorages  at  the  entrance  of  and  within 
La  Have  Biver.  With  westerly  winds  vessels  may  anchor  in  safety 
along  the  north  shore  of  Moshers  Island  outside  the  French  Bock,  which 


LA   HAVE  RIVER — DIRECTIONS. 


93 


Island  in 
se  shoals. 
la  Have  in 

west  and  ^ 
mile  north 

mile  from 

ly  of  a  spit 
land.  ■ 
se  aronnd, 
is ;  within 
Vest  Iron- 
)f  Mosbers 

)8t  end  of 
>t  water. 

Spectacle 
:  feet  water 
nd,  appar- 
g  S.  69°  E. 
)f  Mosbers 
eastward ; 

of  Gocka- 

part  of  a 
ore. 

there  ex- 
ist part  of 
raordinary 

from  Bull 
^ater;  and 
in  a  north' 
les  Island 

are  avail- 
danger  to 
er. 

ig  Bock  is 
it  of  Cross 
f  the  Shag 

>nd  within 
•  in  safety 
ock,  which 


may  be  avoids..  i»y  not  shutting  in  Krout  Point  with  the  east  point  of 
East  Spectacle  Island. 

With  easterly  winds  the  anchorage  inside  the  French  Bock  is  prefer- 
able; but  this  position  is  not  attainable  at  low  water  by  vessels  draw- 
ing more  than  14  feet. 

Before  the  east  end  of  East  Spectacle  Island  bears  N.  9°  W.  West 
Ironbound  light-house  should  be  brought  just  open  of  the  NE.  end  of 
Mosbers  Island  bearing  S.  73°  E.,  and  continuing  to  the  N  W.  with  these 
objects  on,  anchor  in  3^  or  4  fathoms,  mud,  with  Fort  Point  and  the 
east  end  of  W^est  Spectacle  Island  in  line  bearing  N.  9°  W, 

To  pass  north  of  French  Bock  proceed  with  the  8W.  tangents  of  the 
two  Spectacle  Islands  in  line  until  the  east  end  of  the  eastern  island 
bears  K  14°  E.,  when  steer  S.81o  W.  and  anchor  as  before  directed. 

Vessels  making  for  the  anchorage  NW.  of  the  Spectacle  Islands 
should  pass  400 yards  from  the  north  shores  of  those  islands,  and  anchor 
in  about  3  fathoms,  mud,  with  Bull  Bock  midway  between  Fort  and  Krout 
Points,  and  the  north  end  of  West  Spectacle  Island  on  with  the  center 
of  the  eastern  island. 

The  safest  anchorage  about  La  Have  is  within  the  river  entrance  to 
the  NW.  of  Fort  Point,  the  deepest  channel  to  which  is  on  the  west  side 
of  Cockawee  Shoal,  though  that  to  the  eastward  is  more  direct  and 
generally  used ;  the  latter  has  sufficient  depth  at  low  water  for  vessels 
of  13  feet  draft. 

Western  Channel— Pass  the  Spectacle  Islands  about  i  mile  distant 
from  their  northern  shores,  and  when  approaching  the  main  shore  keep 
the  SW.  tangent  of  West  Ironbound  Island  in  line  with  the  east  point 
of  Spectacle  Island,  until  the  Episcopal  church  bears  N.  9°  W.,  when 
steer  for  the  church  until  Krout  Point  opens  west  of  Bull  Bock  about 
one-third  the  distance  between  the  rock  and  the  main  shore,  and  then 
steer  IT.  25°  E.  When  the  Episcopal  church  bears  S.  48°  W.  alter 
course  to  N.  48°  E.,  to  avoid  the  south  end  of  Bull  Spit ;  and  when  Krout 
Point  bears  N.  2°  B.  steer  for  it  until  approaching  the  point,  and  then 
alter  course  to  pass  midway  between  Krout  and  Fort  Points. 

After  passing  these  points,  continue  on  a  northerly  course  until  the 
spire  of  the  church  in  BitcyCove  appears  nearly  to  touch  the  south  end 
of  Parkes  Island,  when  alter  course  to  N.  65°  W.,  and  when  the  points 
of  the  entrance  close  bearing  S.  42°  E.  good  anchorage  will  be  found 
in  5^  fathoms,  mud.  Water  may  be  obtained  from  a  stream  opposite 
this  anchorage  on  the  SW.  shore. 

To  pass  eastward  of  Cockawee  Shoal,  avoid  shutting  in  the  house  in 
Sandy  Cove  on  the  NE.  side  of  Moshers  Islaufl,  and  when  Krout  Point 
bears  N.  2°  E.  steer  for  it,  and  on  approaching  the  point  proceed  to  the 
anchorage  as  before  directed. 

West  Ironbound  Island.— West  Ironbound  Island,  nearly  §  mile  in 
length,  with  an  elevation  of  lOo  feet,  may  be  said  to  form  the  eastern 
entrance  point  of  La  Have  Biver. 


fiiii'ffliiiimiiiiii 


«*»■ 


94 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.   COAST. 


Rose  Bay  is  open  to  the  eastward  1^  miles  across,  between  Ovens 
and  Rose  Points.  Shelter  may  be  obtained  in  this  bay  from  northerly 
pr  westerly  winds,  but  is  much  too  exposed  to  afford  safe  anchorage, 
except  of  a  temporary  nature.  Similar  remarks  apply  to  Hartland  and 
Kings  Bays,  SW .  of  Rose  Bay,  for  both  are  exposed  and  unsafe. 

VThistling  Buoy. — A  whistling  buoy  painted  red  and  black  in  alter- 
nate horizontal  stripes  has  been  established  off  the  western  entrance 
to  Lunenburg  Bay,  with  Battery  Point  light-house  N.  42°  W.  distant 
6^  miles. 

Lunenburg  Bay,  about  5  miles  in  depth  and  2|  miles  broad  between 
the  entrance  points,  is  open  to  the  SE.,  but  the  force  of  ^'ales  from  that 
quarter  is  much  lessened  by  the  position  of  Cross  Island,  which  acts  as 
a  breakwater.  At  the  northern  angle  of  the  bay  is  the  town  of  Lunen- 
burg. Nearly  all  the  population  are  the  descendants  of  German  fami- 
lies. 

The  principal  exports  are  fish,  cordwood,  lumber,  and  the  produce  of 
some  good  farms  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  town. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Cross  Island,  94  feet  high,  thickly  wooded,  lies  immediately  off  the 
entrance  of  Lunenburg  Bay,  and  is  the  outer  object  making  the  west- 
ern approach  to  Mahone  Bay. 

Pilots  frequent  the  island. 

Hounds  Ledge,  consisting  of  parallel  ridges  of  rock  nearly  a  mile  in 
length  east  and  west,  lies  off  the  north  shore  of  Gross  Island ;  the  east- 
ern end  of  the  ledge  uncovers  at  low  water.  Green  Island  south  point 
apparently  touching  the  north  end  of  Big  Duck  Island  bearing  N.  63° 
E.  leads  northward  of  this  danger. 

Ovens  Point  Rocks,  off  the  point  of  that  name,  on  the  west  side  of 
Lunenburg  Bay,  generally  uncover  at  low  water,  and  always  break  dur- 
ing strong  winds  from  seaward. 

East  Point  Rock  is  a  small  isolated  patch  with  7  feet  water,  |  mile 
from  the  high  land  of  the  nearest  shore ',  from  it  East  Point  Ledge 
bears  NB.  nearly  \  mile. 

Sculpin  Shoal  consists  of  a  series  of  rocky  ridges  ^  mile  in  length 
S.  60°  W.  and  N.  60°  E.,  and  has  only  3  feet  water  on  its  shoalest  part 
near  the  western  end,  which  lies  midway  between  Blue  Bock  Island 
and  the  cliffs  on  the  north  side  of  Ovens  Point,  and  from  it  the  large 
church  tower  of  Lunenburg  is  seen  through  the  gap  east  of  Battery 
Point  bearing  N.  45°  W. 

Outer  Middle  Rock  has  2^  fathoms  on  its  shoalest  part,  from  which 
the  tangents  of  Ovens  and  Rose  Points  are  in  line  bearing  S.  33<3  E., 
and  Big  Duck  Island  its  apparent  breadth  open  south  of  East  Point 
Ledge. 

Inner  Middle  Rock,  of  small  extent,  has  2\  fathoms  on  it,  and  lies 
with  Battery  Point  bearing  N.  31<3  W.,  and  Big  Duck  Island  south 
point  on  with  East  Point  Ledge. 


LUNENBURG   AND    MAHONE    BAYS. 


95 


reeu  Ovens 
n  northerly 
anchorage, 
irtland  and 
tsafe. 

ick  in  alter- 

rn  entrance 

W.  distant 

ad  between 
!S  from  that 
liich  acts  as 
n  of  Lnnen- 
)rman  fami- 

produce  of 


ktely  off  the 
g  the  west- 


ly  a  mile  in 
i ;  the  east- 
south  point 
-ring  N.  63° 

west  side  of 
s  break  dur- 

ater,  \  mile 
'oint  Ledge 

le  in  length 
tioalest  part 
lock  Island 
it  the  large 
of  Battery 

from  which 

ig  S.  330  E., 

East  Point 

I  it,  and  lies 
sland  soath 


Shingles  is  a  stony  ridge  ^  mile  in  length  NW.  and  SE.,  the  north- 
ern end  of  which  uncovers  at  half  ebb,  and  is  distant  from  Mosers  Head 
^  mile. 

Long  Shoal  is  a  rocky  patch  ^  mile  in  length,  having  as  little  as  4 
feet  on  its  shoalest  part,  from  which  Battery  Point  bears  north  nearly 
j  mile. 

Moreau  Point  Rock  is  a  rocky  split  extending  in  a  SE.  direction 
from  the  point,  and  having  only  3  feet  of  water  on  its  shoalest  part, 
which  is  distant  about  300  yards,  from  the  the  nearest  higii -water  shore. 

Directions.— Lunenburg  Harbor  is  safe  with  all  winds,  but  is  not 
adapted  for  vessels  drawing  more  than  15  feet  water. 

If  from  the  southward,  Koae  Point,  which  is  steep  to,  may  be  passed 
at  a  moderate  offing.  From  a  position  ^  mile  east  of  Kose  Point  steer 
N.  15°  W.  until  Moreau  and  Battery  Points  are  apparently  just  touch- 
ing bearing  N.  51°  \V.,  and  proceed  with  these  objects  in  line  west  of 
Sculpiu  and  east  of  Outer  and  Inner  Middle  Eocks. 

On  approaching  the  lighthouse,  keep  to  the  westward  until  the  lone 
tree  is  seen  over  Moreau  Point,  bearing  N.  43°  W.,  which  will  lead  east 
of  Long  Shoals  and  clear  of  the  split  off  Battery  Point,  after  which 
steer  for  the  town  and  anchor  in  2f  fathoms,  mud,  with  lighthouse  bear- 
ing S.  42°  E. 

Approaching  from  the  eastward,  north  of  Cross  Island,  Lnnenbnrg 
lighthouse  bearing  N.  71°  W.,  will  clear  Hounds  Ledge  and  East  Point 
Eock ;  and  when  the  south  end  of  Big  Duck  Island  appears  to  touch 
the  southern  tangent  of  East  Point,  steer  with  this  mark  on  astern  un- 
til Moreau  and  Battery  Points  aie  apparently  just  touching,  when  steer 
for  them  until  Ovens  and  Eose  Points  are  in  line,  thence  steer  to  the 
westward  until  a  remarkable  isolated  tree  on  the  bare  high  land  west- 
ward of  the  town  is  seen  over  the  eastern  tangent  of  Moreau  Point 
bearing  N.  43°  W.,  and  pioceed  as  before  directed. 

Mahone  Bay  is  separated  from  St.  Margaret  Bay  by  Aspatagoen 
Peninsula,  the  high  lands  of  which  may  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  more 
than  20  miles  in  the  offing. 

The  eastern  shore  of  the  bay  is  steep-to  and  comparatively  free  from 
dangers,  but  on  the  western  side  rocks  and  sunken  shoals  are  almost 
innumerable.  Between  the  east  point  of  Lunenburg  and  Chockle-cap 
Islet  to  the  northward  are  a  series  of  parallel  ridges  lying  east  and  west, 
extending  in  some  places  considerably  beyond  the  general  direction  of 
the  shore,  and  forming  a  confused  mass  of  rocks,  rendering  any  intelli 
gible  description  impossible. 

As  a  detailed  description  of  all  the  dangers  in  Mahone  Bay  would  be 
impracticable,  it  is  intended  to  allude  only  to  those  affecting  the  navi- 
gation of  the  principal  channels,  commencing  with  the  islets  marking 
the  approaches,  and  from  thence  up  the  bay. 

Heckman  Anchorage,  to  the  southward  of  Hobson  Nose,  is  per- 
fectly safe  with  a  good  depth  of  water  over  mud,  but  the  channels  lead- 


96 


NOVA    SCOTIA S.    E.    COAST. 


ing  to  it,  though  deep,  are  rendered  tortuous  by  several  shoals  which 
lay  between  Hobson  Nose  and  the  anchorage ;  and  as  no  direct  leading 
marks  can  be  given,  a  stranger  should  not  attempt  the  anchorage  with 
out  a  pilot. 

Princes  Inlet,  on  the  south  side  of  Harmon  Island,  though  small  Id 
extent,  affords  safe  anchorage  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  mud.  From  an  ofiing 
of  about  ^  mile  north  of  Hobson  Nose,  steer  for  the  south  point  of  Bock- 
man  Island  ;  this  course  will  clear  the  spits  ott'  Bluff  Head  and  Sandy 
Cove.  After  passing  the  latter,  steer  to  pass  midway  between  Bock- 
man  Island  and  the  main  shore,  a^id  on  nearing  Little  Harmon  Island 
borrow  on  the  main  shore,  in  order  to  avoid  shoal  water  oil'  the  latter 
island,  and  anchor  between  Harmon  Island  and  the  main. 

Big  Duck  Island,  about  ^  mile  in  length  and  45  feet  high,  lies  2  miles 
NE.  from  the  east  end  of  Cross  Island ;  the  5-fathom  line  around  this 
island  is  about  ^  mile  off  shore. 

Middle  Ledge  is  composed  of  parallel  rocky  ridges,  and  has  only  3 
feet  on  its  shoalest  spot.  Gross  Island  light-house  seen  open  east  of  Big 
Duck  Island  leads  east ;  and  the  light-house  in  line  with  the  west  end  of 
the  island  S.  21°  W.  J^  S.  leads  west  of  Middle  Ledge.  There  are  no 
good  cross-clearing  marks,  bat  a  vessel  will  be  northward  of  the  danger 
with  the  south  point  of  Green  Island  bearing  S.  88°  E. 

Hobson  Nose  is  a  grass-covered  earthy  mound,  30  feet  above  the 
sea,  on  a  gravelly  spit  which  dries  a  good  ^  mile  at  low  water. 

Mahone  Harbor,  on  the  west  side  of  Mahone  Bay,  affords  secure 
and  well-sheltered  anchorage  in  about  6  fathoms  water,  but,  like  Mar- 
tins Biver  anchorage,  is  difficult  of  access  in  consequence  of  the  numer- 
ous off-lying  dangers. 

The  entrance  to  the  channel  leading  to  Mahone  Harbor  and  Princes 
Inlet  lies  between  Hobson  Nose  on  the  south  and  Haddock  iSboal  on  the 
north,  the  latter  being  the  southern  rise  of  the  shoal  ground  extending 
from  Refuse  to  Mason  Island. 

Martins  River  Anchorage,  on  the  west  side  of  Mahone  Bay,  is  safe 
and  commodious,  with  water  sufficient  to  accommodate  vessels  of  large 
draft,  but  the  approaches  being  narrow  and  circuitous  render  the 
place  difficult  of  access,  and  on  no  account  should  strangers  attempt  to 
enter  this  anchorage  without  the  assistance  of  local  knowledge. 

Fogs. — During  the  fogs  which  frequently  prevail  on  this  coast  during 
July  and  August  when  the  wind  is  to  the  westward  of  south,  the  SW. 
side  of  Mahone  Bay  is  generally  clear. 

Directions. — Vessels  being  off  Hobson  Nose,  and  bound  for  Mahone 
Harbor,  should  bring  the  Grassy  Islet  of  Hobson  Nose  to  bear  8.  71° 
E.,  and  by  steering  N.  71°  W.  will  pass  south  of  tlie  Middle  Patch  and 
north  of  Bookman  Shoal  and  Covey  Ledge. 

When  the  east  point  of  Covey  Island  appears  to  touch  the  west  end 
of  Buckman  Island,  alter  course  to  S.  85°  W.,  until  approaching  West- 
haver  Island,  when  the  channel  south  of  Westhaver  Island  or  north  of 


MAHONE    BAY. 


97 


oals  which 
ect  leading 
orage  with 

;h  small  iD 
m  an  offing 
nt  of  Bock- 
and  Sandy 
reeu  Bock- 
non  Island 
the  latter 

lies  2  miles 
round  this 

has  only  3 
east  of  Big 
west  end  of 
lere  are  no 
the  danger 

above  the 

r. 

rds  secure 

;,  like  Mar- 

the  uamer- 

nd  Princes 
hoal  on  the 
extending 

Say,  is  safe 
sis  of  large 
render  the 
attempt  to 
Ige. 

tast  during 
h,  the  SW. 

br  Mahone 
)ear  8.  71° 
Patch  and 

e  west  end 
ling  West- 
av  north  of 


Ham  Island  must  be  decided  on,  but  if  without  local  knowledge  the 
former  channel  is  recommended  as  being  the  less  circuitous  of  the  two. 
Westhaver  Island  being  steep-to  on  its  west  side  may  be  approached 
close-to,  and  a  good  anchorage  obtained  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  mud,  inside 
Ham  Island  to  the  N  W.  Good  anchorage  may  also  be  obtained  between 
Trappoan  Island  and  the  east  end  of  Harmon  Island  in  7  fathoms,  mud, 
with  the  southern  point  of  Refuse  Island  just  shut  in  with  the  north 
end  of  Trappean  Island. 

Oreen  Island,  about  ^  mile  in  length  and  40  feet  high,  is  distant 
upwards  of  5  miles  from  New  Harbor  Point,  and  lies  with  East  Iron- 
bound  Island  lighthouse  bearing  N.  24°  W.  3J  miles,  and  Cross  Island 
lighthouse  S.  50°  W.  6^  miles. 

Northeast  Shoal,  so  called  in  consequence  of  its  relative  position  to 
Green  Island,  from  which  it  bears  N.  19°  E.  I'i  miles,  is  about  J  mile  in 
extent,  and  from  its  shallowest  part  (near  the  center),  with  only  3  feet 
water,  the  east  end  of  Little  Tancook  Island  is  just  seen  east  of  East 
Ironbound  Island,  the  nearest  part  of  the  latter  being  more  than  2  miles 
distant  bearing  N.  48°  W.,  and  the  north  extremity  of  Cross  Island  just 
in  sight  north  of  Big  Duck  Island. 

Flat  Island.— Flat  Island,  about  §  mile  in  length,  is  somewhat  re- 
markable in  shape ;  on  the  north  end  is  a  narrow  eminence  40  feet  high, 
whilst  the  remainder  of  the  island  is  very  low. 

Bast  Ironbound  Island.— East  Ironbound  Island  is  about  |  mile 
in  length  and  attains  an  elevation  of  60  feet;  it  is  clear  on  all  sides  at 
the  distance  of  ^  mile  oflF  shore. 

Qreat  Tancook  Island  is  about  2  miles  in  length  and  115  feet  high, 
with  an  indentation  on  its  eastern  side. 

West  Shoals,  three  in  number,  lie  on  the  west  side  of  Great  Tan- 
cook Island.  The  southernmost  has  2i  fathoms  on  its  shoalest  part, 
and  deep  water  between  it  and  the  island  shore.  The  north  end  of  East 
Ironbound  Island  in  line  with  the  south  end  of  Great  Tancook  Island 
bearing  N.  85°  E.  leads  southward  of  this  shoal. 

Middle  Shoal,  detached  and  nearly  circular  in  form,  is  J  mile  in 
diameter,  with  less  than  one  foot  water  on  its  shoalest  part,  which  lies 
^  mile  S.  87°  W.  from  the  elbow  of  the  shingle  beach  on  the  west  side 
of  Great  Tancook  Island. 

Star  Island  Ledges.— Star  Island,  small  and  low,  lies  about  J  mile 
off  the  end  of  Great  Tancook  Island,  and  may  be  considered  the  west- 
ernmost of  three  ledges  about  the  same  distance  offshore. 

Little  Tancook  Island,  J  mile  in  length  and  80  feet  high,  occupies 
a  nearly  central  position  between  Great  Tancook  Island  and  Indian 
Point  at  the  S  W.  extremity  of  Aspatagoen  Peninsula.  There  are  avail- 
able channels  on  either  side  of  the  island,  that  on  the  western  side  being 
the  more  direct  of  the  two,  excepting  for  vessels  of  moderate  draft. 

SE.  Shoals  consist  of  a  cluster  of  detached  shoals,  over  which  the 
depths  vary  from  2f  to  5  fathoms ;  the  shoalest,  with  2§  fathoms,  lies 
5314 7 


HMIHI 


filiffiiii^'' 


!i 


98 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST, 


with  the  south  point  of  Little  Tancook  Isiand  bearing  N.  51°  W.  about  J 
mile  distant,  and  Grassy  Island  S.  45°  W.  nearly  IJ  miles.  From  this 
danger  the  center  of  Green  Island  is  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  East 
Iron  bound  Island  bearing  S.  32°  E. 

Bull  Rock  is  a  small  rocky  ridge,  the  highest  part  of  which  uncovers 
at  half  ebb.  It  bears  S.  65°  W.  one  mile  from  the  SW.  end  of  Flat 
Island,  the  channel  between  being  clear,  and  S.  3°  E.  1§  miles  from  the 
SE.  point  of  Great  Tancook  Island. 

The  north  end  of  East  Ironbonnd  Island  seen  open  north  of  Flat 
Island  leads  northward;  East  Ironbound  lighthouse  open  south  of  Flat 
Island  leads  southward ;  and  Little  Duck  Island  apparently  touching 
the  west  end  of  Cross  Island  bearing  S.  14°  W.  leads  westward  of  Bull 
Bock.  The  deep-water  passage  on  the  west  side  of  Bull  Rock  is  the 
main  channel  into  Mahone  Bay,  and  is  about  2  miles  across. 

Refuse  Island. — This  island  and  adjacent  shoals  lie  on  the  western 
side  of  the  main  channel  into  Mahone  Bay,  opposit'"  Great  Tancook 
Island,  and  with  the  west  shoals  of  the  latt<;r  island  the  navigable  chan- 
nel is  narrowed  to  the  breadth  of  one  mile. 

East  Shoal  is  small  and  i  ocky  and  deep  water  all  round ;  from  this 
shoal  the  high  earth  cliff  on  the  SE.  point  of  Refuse  Island  bears  S.  06° 
W.  3  mile. 

Within  East  Shoal  (with  4  fathoms  on  it)  is  a  spit  extending  from  the 
NE.  point  of  Refuse  Island  in  an  easterly  direction  nearly  J  mile;  there 
are  only  2$  fathoms  on  this  spit,  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  high- water 
line  of  Refuse  Island. 

South  ShoaL — From  its  outer  and  southern  end,  with  3  fathoms,  the 
high  cliflf  of  Refuse  Island  (already  referred  to)  bears  N  6°  B.  §  mile. 

Mason  Spit  is  a  stony  ridge  off  the  SE.  end  of  Mason  Island  %  mile 
in  length :  from  it  Haddock  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms,  lies  S.  35°  E.  about 
J  mile. 

Coachman  Ledge  is  ^  mile  long  north  and  south  between  the  5-fathom 
lines ;  its  highest  part  uncovers  shortly  after  half  ebb,  and  at  low  water 
it  shows  about  100  yards  above  water.  The  center  of  this  spot  lies  with 
Star  Island  tree  bearing  8. 14°  W.  nearly  2  miles  distant. 

SW.  Coachman,  a  small  patch  with  4^  fathoms  on  it,  lies  with  that 
part  of  Coachman  Ledge  which  dries  bearing  N.  20°  E.  rather  more  than 
%  mile. 

NE.  Coachman  is  another  small  patch  with  4^  fathoms  water,  firom 
which  that  part  of  Coachman  Ledge  which  dries  bears  S.  11°  W.  upwards 
of  f  mile. 

Middle  Shoal  is  nearly  ^  mile  in  length,  having  on  its  shoalest  part 
3  fathoms  water ;  from  it  the  NE.  point  of  East  Ironbound  Island  is 
apparently  just  touching  the  west  end  of  Little  Tancook  Island  bear- 
ing S.  59°  E.,  and  the  east  end  of  Snake  Island  N.  30°  E. 

Quaker  Shoal,  about  400  yards  in  length,  has  4  fathoms  on  its  shoal- 
est part,  from  which  the  single  tree  on  the  east  end  of  Quaker  Island 


MAHONE    BAY. 


99 


W.  about  J 
From  this 
ucl  of  East 

h  uncovers 
iid  of  Flat 
esfrom  the 

-th  of  Flat 
iithof  Flat 
ly  touching 
ard  of  Bull 
Elock  is  the 

;he  western 
it  Tancook 
^able  chan- 

;  from  this 
jears  S.  06° 

Qg  from  the 
mile;  there 
high- water 

athoms,  the 
E.  %  mile, 
laud  %  mile 
50  E.  about 

he  5- fathom 
It  low  water 
30t  lies  with 

es  with  that 
r  more  than 

water,  firom 
W.  upwards 

hoalest  part 
id  Island  is 
[sland  bear- 
on  its  shoal- 
aker  Island 


a  mile,  and  Round  Island  Nubble  S. 


bears  N.  4°  E.  a  little  more  than 
81°  W. 

Birch  Shoal,  400  yards  in  length,  has  only  2i  fathoms  on  it,  from 
whence  the  south  point  of  Birch  Island  bears  N.  3°  E.,  800  yards  dis- 
tant. 

Lynch  Shoal  has  only  9  feet  water  on  it,  from  whence  the  north  end 
of  Clay  Island  is  apparently  just  touching  the  southern  clitty  point  of 
Quaker  Island,  and  the  south  point  of  Lynch  Island  bearing  N.  50°  E. 
nearly  J  mile. 

Blandford  Shoal  is  a  small  detached  4-fathom  patch  lying  S.  04°  W., 
800  yards  from  Blandford  Head. 

Blandford  Head,  which  is  steep-to,  lies  on  the  south  side  of  Shoal 
Cove  where,  as  the  name  implies,  the  water  is  shoal.  From  Coachman 
Head,  on  the  north  side  of  the  cove,  the  shore  in  a  northerly  direction 
is  clear  of  danger  to  a  point  J  mile  southward  of  Little  East  River ;  from 
this  position  to  Rous  Point  (at  the  western  entrance  of  the  river)  the 
shore  should  not  be  approached  within  J  mile,  in  order  to  avoid  several 
oflf-lyiug  rocks.  The  bay  between  Rous  Point  and  East  River  Point 
should  be  avoided,  in  consequence  of  shoal  water  and  rocks. 

A  description  of  the  dangers  on  the  western  side  of  the  east  branch 
of  Mahone  Bay  will  now  be  necessary,  as  some  of  them  aflfect  the  ap- 
proaches to  Chester  Harbor. 

Mountain  Shoals,  three  in  number,  lie  to  the  southward  and  east- 
ward of  Mountain  Island.  The  outer  shoal  is  a  small  patch  with  4f 
fathoms  water,  and  from  it  the  south  point  of  Mountain  Island  bears 
N.  70°  W.  nearly  one  mile. 

Spectacle  Shoal  extends  oflf  the  eastern  side  of  Saddle  Island,  and 
is  ^  mile  long  in  a  north  and  south  direction,  with  its  center  showing  at 
low-water  springs. 

Snake  Spit  extends  a  short  J  mile  from  the  S  W.  side  of  Snake  Island, 
having  on  its  extremity  only  one  foot  water. 

Graves  Shoal,  nearly  circular  in  form  and  detached,  is  small  in  ex- 
tent, with  only  3  feet  water  on  its  shoalest  part,  from  which  tiie  south 
point  of  Graves  Island  bears  N .  48°  W.  nearly  §  nlile,  and  Lobster  Point 
S.  45°  W.  nearly  one  mile. 

Long  Spit  takes  its  rise  from  the  main  shore  between  Lobster  Point 
and  Graves  Island,  and  is  composed  of  bowlders,  stones,  and  gravel, 
uncovers  as  far  out  as  ^  mile  from  the  shore;  near  the  end  of  the  dry 
part  are  some  large  bowlders,  which  uncover  at  half  ebb. 

Lobsters  Claws  are  two  stony  ridges.  The  eastern  claw  extends 
from  Lobster  Point  in  a  S.  28°  E.  direction  nearly  ^  mile,  a  small  por- 
tion of  which  uncovers  about  400  yards  from  the  point.  The  western 
claw  is  detached,  and  about  ^  mile  in  length,  with  deep  water  all  around. 
From  the  shoalest  spot,  with  If  fathoms.  Lobster  Point  bears  N.  8°  E. 
^  mile. 

Sheep  Ledge  consists  of  bowlders,  the  highest  of  which  only  cover 


I 


100 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


during  extraordinary  spring  tides;  from  this  point  the  ledge  extends 
100  \  aids  northward  and  nearly  400  yards  southward.  From  the  high- 
est i)iirt  of  the  iedge  the  southern  points  of  Birch  and  Quaker  Islands 
are  in  line,  bearing  N.  67°  E.,  and  Bound  Island  Nubble  %  mile  distant 
in  a  S.  9<3  E.  direction. 

Clay  Island  Spit  extends  in  a  southeasterly  direction  from  the  south 
end  of  Clay  Island.  There  are  3J  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  i  mile 
from  the  island,  whence  an  irregular  ridge,  with  4  fathoms  water,  ex- 
tends to  the  NE.  and  joins  the  shallow  water  off  the  N  VV.  end  of  Quaker 
Island,  he  whole  forming  a  crooked  bar  composed  of  sand,  gravel,  and 
bowlders. 

Chester  churches  just  open  east  of  the  peninsula,  bearing  north,  clears 
the  eastern  edge  of  Clay  Spit  in  4  fathoms,  and  the  south  end  of  Woody 
Island  just  open  south  of  Quaker  Island  N.  70°  E.  clears  the  southern 
edge  of  the  spit. 

Big  Pish  Shoal  with  4^  fathoms  on  it,  from  whence  the  south  point 
of  Big  Fish  Island  bears  N.  31°  W.  i  mile. 

Chec;^r  Rock  is  a  small  rocky  patch  with  10  feet  water  lyiug  im- 
mediately off  the  entrance  of  Chester  Creek  and  a  little  outside  the  line 
between  Norse  Point  and  the  neck  of  the  peninsula. 

Oarret  Cove  is  shoal,  and  from  Norse  Point  a  ridge  of  bowlders  ex- 
tends in  a  SB.  direction,  terminating  at  the  distance  of  nearly  200 
yards  from  the  point  in  a  bowlder  with  only  9  feet  water.  Ziak  Point, 
to  the  SE.,  may  be  approached  within  200  yards. 

Chester  Harbor  is  commodious,  safe,  and  comparatively  easy  of 
access.  The  majority  of  the  population  are  engaged  in  the  fisheries  or 
lumber  trade ;  a  considerable  amount  of  farm  produce  is  raised,  and  a 
good  business  is  carried  ou  in  manufacturing  fish  barrels  for  the  out- 
ports. 

There  are  two  channels  into  the  harbor,  the  one  to  the  southward  being 
more  direct  than  that  to  the  eastward,  which  is  narrow  and  somewhat 
intricate. 

Tides. — The  general  surface  of  the  water  is  raised  a  foot  by  south- 
easterly gales  and  depressed  the  same  amount  by  northwesterly  gales. 
In  the  northern  portion  of  Mahone  Bay  the  tidal  stream  is  sluggish, 
but  through  the  eastern  Tancook  Channel  it  runs  at  the  rate  of  one 
knoc  per  hour  during  its  full  strength ;  and  through  the  narrow  part  of 
the  western  Tancook  Channel  the  tide  attains  a  velocity  of  2  miles  an 
hour,  the  ilood  setting  to  the  northward  and  the  ebb  to  the  south- 
ward. 

Directions.— When  approaching  Chester  from  an  offlugeast  of  Cross 
Island  steer  to  pass  at  a  safe  distance  east  or  west  of  Big  Duck  Island, 
and  thence  for  the  channel  west  of  Great  Tancook  Island,  bearing  in 
mind  that  the  middle  of  Little  Duck  Island  in  line  with  Cross  Island 
lighthouse,  bearing  S.  11°  E.,  leads  through  the  middle  of  the  above 
channel,  and  that  any  part  of  Little  Duck  Island  in  line  with  Cross 


MAHONE    BAY — DIRECTIONS. 


101 


ge  exteiida 
a  tbe  high- 
ler  Islands 
aile  distant 

n  tbe  south 
a  of  ^  mile 
I  water,  ex- 
I  of  Quaker 
gravel,  and 

3rth,  clears 
i  of  Woody 
le  southern 

south  point 

ir  lying  im- 
)ide  the  line 

owlders  ex- 

nearly  200 

Zink  Point, 

ely  easy  of 
fisheries  or 

iiised,  and  a 
for  tbe  out- 

ivard  being 
1  somewhat 

at  by  sonth- 
iterly  gales, 
is  sluggish, 
rate  of  one 
trrow  part  of 
)f  2  miles  an 
)  the  south- 
Bast  of  Cross 
Duck  Island, 
i,  bearing  in 
Gross  Island 
if  the  above 
e  with  Cross 


Island  will  clear  tbe  dangers  which  lie  oflf  the  west  side  of  Great  Tan- 
cook  Island  and  tbe  east  side  of  Refuse  Island,  respectively. 

On  approaching  Quaker  Island  keep  2(M)  yards  ott  itn  8\V.  side  until 
Chester  churches  a|)pear  nearly  to  touch  tbe  east  tangent  of  the  penin- 
sula bearing  north,  when  alter  course  for  them  until  thesoutii  point  of 
Norse  Island  opens  to  tbe  northward  of  the  stony  point  on  tbe  north 
side  of  Quaker  Island  bearing  east;  then  keep  to  the  eastwar<l  and 
anchor  in  0  to  8  fathoms,  mud,  with  tbe  north  ends  of  Xorse  and  Monn- 
tain  and  the  west  ends  of  Xorse  and  Quaker  Islands  in  line. 

By  the  Tancook  Channels.— If  from  tbe  eastward  and  clear  ot 
Seal  Ledge,  which  may  be  known  by  bringing  Indian  Point  open  of 
New  Harbor  Point,  proceeding  through  the  Eastern  Channel,  steer  for 
the  north  end  of  Little  Tancook  Island ;  and  when  to  tbe  westward  of 
New  Harbor  Point,  alter  course  to  the  northward,  so  as  to  pass  in  mid- 
channel  between  Little  Tancook  Island  and  Indian  Point. 

By  the  western  channel,  when  clear  of  the  Seal  Ledge  as  before,  pass 
to  the  southward  of  the  SB.  shoals,  which  may  be  done  by  keeping 
SW.  island  open  of  Herring  Point;  when  Green  Island  is  open  its  own 
apparent  breadth  west  of  Bast  Ironbound  Island  the  SB.  shoals  will 
have  been  passed,  and  a  more  northerly  course  may  be  steered  for  the 
channel,  bearing  in  ijiind  that  the  w^st  point  of  Little  Tancook  Island 
may  be  passed  within  200  yards,  but  care  must  be  taken  not  to  near 
tbe  NE.  side  of  Great  Tancook  Island  nearer  than  J  mile. 

From  a  position  between  Little  Tancook  Island  and  Indian  Point,  a 
vessel  making  for  Chester  Harbor  should  steer  N.  40°  W.,  until  the 
northern  points  of  Norse  and  Mountain  Islands  are  in  line,  and  then 
alter  course  so  as  to  pass  off  tbe  north  wid  of  Mountain  Island. 

When  Mark  Island  opens  oat  west  of  Mountain  Island  steer  S.  75°  W. 
to  clear  the  Lobster  Claws,  and  after  passing  them— which  may  be 
know  by  Lynch  Island  opening  out  west  of  Woody  Island— alter  course 
so  as  to  pass  mid-channel  between  Zink  Point  and  Norse  Island,  and 
anchor  as  before  directed. 

A  more  direct  channel  into  Chester  Harbor  is  that  between  Mountaio 
and  Mark  Islands,  and  when  the  north  point  of  Lyncli  Island  appears 
to  touch  the  south  end  of  Woody  Island  bearing  S.  30°  W.,  Mark  Island 
spit  will  have  been  passed,  and  the  course  should  be  altered  to  N.  68o  W., 
so  as  to  pass  midway  between  Norse  Island  and  Zink  Point,  and  anchor 
as  before  directed. 

O-ood  Anchorage  will  be  obtained  inthe  NW.  angle  of  Mabone  Bay, 
to  the  NW.  of  Chester  Harbor ;  the  entrance  to  this  arm  of  tbe  sea  lies 
between  Clay  and  Prog  Islands,  but  there  are  several  dangers  to  be 
avoided,  for  the  positions  of  which  the  mariner  is  referred  to  tbe  chart. 

Being  westward  of  Birch  Island  bring  the  SW.  tangent  of  Great 
TancooV  Island  open  west  of  Birch  Island,  two-thirds  the  apparent 
breadth  of  tbe  latter  island  bearing  S.  40°  B.j  this  mark  will  lead  up 


'-}' 


liiliilHW 


102 


NOVA    SCOTIA — H.    E.    COAST. 


the  NW.  arm  in  safety  between  the  shoals,  and  anchorage  may  be  se- 
lected according  to  circumstances. 

8t  Margaret  Bay  is  a  noble  sheet  of  water  about  25  milen  in  cir- 
cumference, 9  miles  in  depth,  and  upwards  of  2  miles  wide  at  the  en- 
trance, and  compared  with  other  portions  of  this  coast  is  unusually 
I  clear  of  dangers. 

The  distance  between  Dover  Castle  and  Middle  Point  (so  called  in 
consequence  of  its  central  position  between  Peggy  Point  and  Paddy 
Head,  forming  the  eastern  entrance  of  the  bay,  is  about  4  miles,  with  a 
general  trend  to  the  NW. 

Seal  Ledge  consists  of  broken  ridges  of  rocks,  which  cover  at  half 
Hood,  but  generally  shows  a  break.  The  highest  part  of  the  ledge  un- 
covers about  200  yards  at  low  water,  and  lies  nearly  a  mile  8.  73°  E. 
from  Berring  Point  (at  the  southern  extremity  of  Aspatagoen  Penin- 
sula), with  a  deep-water  channel  between,  and  N.  3{P  E.  2  miles  from 
the  etiHt  point  of  East  Ironbonnd  Island. 

The  north  point  of  Little  Tancook  Island,  seen  a  little  open  south- 
ward of  New  Harbor  Point  bearing  N.  82°  W.,  clears  the  ledge  on  its 
south  side. 

Gravel  Island  Shoals  lie  off  the  south  end  of  Gravel  Island,  with 
which  they  are  connected  by  shallow  bars  of  shingle.  The  outer  shoal 
tincovers  at  half  ebb,  and  at  low  water  shows  a  full  J  mile  of  its  length ; 
its  highest  point  is  nearly  J  mile  south  from  the  south  point  of  Gravel 
Island. 

There  are  no  good  nlearing  marks  for  these  shoals,  but  the  east  point 

of  Gravel  Island  kept  to  the  westward  of  N.  31°  W.  will  lead  east ;  and 

the  center  of  Seal  Ledge  (when  showing)  in  line  with  the  west  end  of 

•    Bast  Iron  bound  Island  bearing  S.  47°  VV.  a  little  southerly  will  lead 

south  of  Gravel  Island  Shoals. 

SW.  Island,  J  mile  in  length  and  40  feet  high,  forms  the  salient 
point  on  the  western  side  of  St.  Margaret  Bay.  The  south  and  east 
sides  of  the  island  can  be  approached  to  100  yards,  and  further  to  the 
northward  the  shores  of  Owls  Head  and  Horse  Island  are  steep-to. 

NW.  Cove,  within  Horse  Island,  and  on  the  western  side  of  St. 
Margaret  Bay,  is  not  a  good  anchorage.  If  passing  north  of  Horse 
Island,  care  must  be  taten  to  avoid  the  Horse  Rock,  small  in  extent 
but  with  only^  1 J  fathoms  on  its  shoalest  part. 

Charley  Rock,  small  and  dangerous  with  IJ  fathoms  on  it,  and  deep 
water  all  round,  lies  J  mile  N.  50°  B.  from  the  south  point  of  SW. 
Island. 

Mill  Cove.— At  the  distance  of  2  miles  south  from  Green  Point  is 
Mill  Cove,  which  forms  an  admirable  anchorage  during  westerly 
winds.  Prom  thence  to  the  southward  as  far  as  NW.  Cove  the  coast 
is  bold,  rugged,  and  free  from  danger. 

Green  Point  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water,  lies  400  yards  north 


ST.   MARGARET    BAY. 


103 


may  be  se- 

lilen  in  cir- 

)  at  the  en- 

unusually 

10  called  in 
intl  Paddy 
iles,  with  a 

)ver  at  half 
e  ledge  uu- 
le  8.  73°  E. 
foen  Peuiu- 
niilea  from 

)pen  south- 
ledge  on  its 

slaud,  with 
outer  shoal 
fits  length; 
t  of  Gravel 

&  east  point 
1  east ;  and 
west  end  of 
•ly  will  lead 

the  salient 
th  and  east 
rther  to  the 
teep-to. 
side  of  St. 
th  of  Horse 

11  in  extent 

it,  and  deep 
)int  of  8W. 

)en  Point  is 
ig  westerly 
ve  the  coast 

^ards  north 


from  the  north  extreme  of  Green  Point;  the  shoal  has  deep  water 
around  it,  and  may  consiMjiieutly  be  i>;HN«;d  on  either  side. 

Directions. — li'trom  the  Hoiifhward,  avoid  bringing  the  tangent  of 
Dauphney  Head  to  tli  westward  of  N,  41°  W.,  which  will  clear  Slaun- 
whites  Ledge  on  its  western  side,  and  when  Red  Bank  bears  east  the 
vessel  will  be  abreast  Green  Point  Siioal,  and  from  thence  may  steer 
up  mid-channel,  anchoring  as  convenient. 

Slaunwhites  Ledge  is  a  ridge  of  rocks  and  sand  and  lies  on  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  entrance  into  Hubbard  Cove.  The  actual  rocky  ledge  is 
about  3<)0  yards  in  length,  its  highest  rock  on  the  south  end  only  Just 
covering  at  high  water;  but  it  is  surrounded  by  an  extensive  plateau 
of  shoal  ground  nearly  ^  mile  in  length,  which  terminates  on  its  north 
end  in  a  small  sandy  knoll  known  as  North  Shoal,  which  uucovers  at 
half  tide,  ami  lies  800  yards  distant  from  Green  Point  in  line  with  Bed 
BanR  bearing  N.  64°  E. 

Ingram  River  is  about  ^  mile  across  the  entrance,  from  whence  it 
runs  in  northward  1^  miles  to  its  head,  where  the  waters  of  a  fresh- 
water river  are  received. 

The  western  shores  of  this  indentatiou  are  clear ;  on  the  eastern  side, 
^  mile  from  the  head,  is  some  shoal  ground,  which  will  be  cleared  on  its 
western  side  by  keeping  Wood  Island  well  open  of  East  Head. 

Oroncher  Shoal  is  the  only  danger  off  the  entrance  to  Ingram  River ; 
the  least  water  is  3^  fathoms.  Vessels  may  pass  east  or  west  of  the 
shoal  by  bringing  East  or  West  Heads  to  bear  N.  17°  E.  until  Snares 
Point  is  well  shut  in  behind  Black  Point. 

Head  Harbor  is  alike  capacious  and  secure,  with  a  sufQcient  depth 
of  water  to  accommodate  vessels  of  the  largest  draft.  The  anchorage 
extends  from  within  Strawberry  Island  along  the  northern  shore,  but 
the  best  anchorage  is  within  Clam  Island,  which  is  only  a  little  more 
than  200  yards  in  extent,  with  a  very  shoal  spit  extending  200  yards  to 
the  NE. 

There  is  a  deep-water  channel  on  either  side  of  the  island,  but  the 
one  on  the  north  side,  being  the  wider  of  the  two,  is  to  be  preferred, 
more  especially  for  large  vessels.  From  between  Indian  Point  and 
Oroucher  Island,  which  may  be  considered  the  entrance  points  of  the 
harbor,  the  distance  is  a  little  over  ^  mile ;  within  these  points  there 
are  no  detached  dangers  which  would  affect  vessels  of  small  draft,  and 
bat  few  to  be  avoided  by  large  vessels. 

Sand  Cove  Shoal  is  a  small  detached  rooky  patch  with  4^  fathoms 
water,  and  lies  with  the  south  eud  of  Wood  Island  apparently  touching 
Black  Point  bearing  S.  87°  W.,  and  the  Episcopal  Church  at  Smelt 
Brook  N.  3°  W.,  nearly. 

Strawberry  Island  Shoal  is  a  detached  rocky  patch,  with  4i^ 
fathoTis  water,  having  deep  water  all  round ;  it  is  distant  250  yards 
from  Strawberry  Island  in  a  southeasterly  direction  and  lies  with  East 
Head  just  open  east  of  Strawberry  Island  N.  40°  W. 


I 


-    igaipi 


104 


NOVA   SCOTIA— S.    E.    COAST. 


Croucher  Island  is  the  outermost  and  the  largest  of  three  small 
islets,  almost  connected,  which  lie  oif  the  entrance  of  Head  Harbor,  oc- 
cupying a  space  of  about  ^  mile,  NE.  and  SW. 

The  main  channel  into  the  harbor  is  to  the  southward  of  the  group^ 
but  within  on  the  north  side  there  is  a  narrow  deep-water  passage  200 
yards  across  between  the  5-fathom  lines. 

French  Village  Harbor. — About  f  mile  N.  30°  B.  from  Wedge 
Island  is  Davys  Point,  forming  the  south  point  of  the  entrance,  which 
is  ^  mile  brqad.  Within  the  point  on  the  south  shore  is  an  indentation, 
oft  which  secure  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  about  11  fatiioms,  mud. 

From  abrea-^t  the  anchorage  the  village  is  scattered  along  the  whole 
length  of  the  sciithorn  shore,  upwards  of  a  mile  in  length. 

Ambrose  Rock,  small  in  extent,  with  3^  fathoms  on  it,  and  deep 
water  around,  is  beyond  the  range  of  the  usual  anchorage,  and  lies  with 
the  Episcopal  church  belfry  bearing  S.  57°  E. 

Davys  Rock,  400  yards  in  length,  with  9  feet  water  on  its  shoalest 
spot,  lies  with  Davys  Point  bearing  S.  68°  E.  about  ^  mile,  Indian 
Point  N.  3°  W.  nearly  J  mile.  The  deep-water  channel  ou  this,  the 
northern  side  of  the  shoal,  is  narrowed  to  about  ^  mile  by  a  spit  which 
extends  to  the  southward  from  Indian  Point. 

Middle  Shoal  is  ^  mile  in  length  north  and  south  ;  from  the  shoalest 
part,  with  5  feet  water,  Wedge  Island  bears  N.  30°  E.  one  mile,  and 
Little  Thrum  Island  S.  40°  E.  ^  mile. 

The  green  line  of  the  north  end  of  Luke  Island  open  southward  of 
Little  Thrum  Island,  bearing  S.  54°  E.,  leads  SW.;  and  the  east  end  of 
Clam  Island  in  line  with  the  outer  end  of  the  Indian  Point  N.  25°  B. 
leads  westward  of  Ringdove  Shoal. 

Directions— Inside  Channel — From  about  ^  mile  west  of  the  north 
point  of  Shut-in  Island  steer  north  until  the  west  end  of  the  eastern  and 
larger  lump  of  Indian  Point  opens  outside  Wedge  Island  bearing  N.  13° 
E ;  steering  with  these  marks  on  will  lead  between  Little  Thrum  Spit 
and  Middle  Shoal,  and  when  the  green  line  of  the  north  end  of  Luke 
Island  opens  south  of  the  Little  Thrum  bearing  S.  54°  E.  a  vessel  will 
be  off  the  spit,  and  should  steer  for  McDonald  Point  N.  28°  B.,  which 
will  lead  through  in  the  deep.water  channel  between  Wedge  Island  and 
Hayman  Point.  When  the  latter  point  is  in  line  with  the  stony  tangent 
of  George  Island  bearing  S.  20°  B.  alter  course  to  north,  when  the  ship's 
head  should  be  pointing  between  the  two  lumps  of  Indian  Point,  bear- 
ing in  mind  that  shoal  water  extends  300  yards  in  a  southwesterly  direc- 
tion from  McDonald  Point. 

Proceed  on  the  above  course  until  Church  Point  is  in  line  with  Davys 
Point  bearing  N.58°  B.,  and  immediately  alter  course  for  the  south  tan- 
gent  of  the  peninsula  opposite  Croucher  Point  N.  36°  B.,  and  as  Croucher 
Island  neara  the  outer  tangent  of  Indian  Point  gradually  steer  to  the 
eastward  until  these  objects  are  in  line  bearing  N.  56°  W.,  and  anchor 
in  11  fathoms,  mud,  with  C  hurch  Point  N.  51°  B. 


■tika 


ST.    MARGARET    BAY. 


105 


iree  small 
larbor,  oc- 

tlie  group, 
assage  200 

im  Wedge 
lice,  which 
identation, 
loins,  mud. 
'  the  whole 

,  and  deep 
id  lies  with 

ts  shoalest 
le,  ladiau 
J  tliis,  the 
spit  which 

be  shoalest 
;  mile,  and 

ithward  of 
east  end  of 
t  N.  25°  B. 

f  the  north 
lastern  and 
ring  N.  13o 
brum  Spit 
id  of  Luke 
vessel  will 
'  B.,  which 
Island  and 
my  tangent 
II  the  ship's 
•oint,  bear- 
iterly  direc- 

rith  Davys 
i south  tan- 
>s  Oroucher 
teer  to  the 
>nd  anchor 


Ontside  Channel — After  passing  Shut-in  Island  at  a  safe  distance 
steer  N.  9°  W.  until  Davys  Point  (well  open  north  of  Wedge  Island) 
bears  N.  47°  E.,  then  alter  course  for  the  point,  and  proctied  to  the 
anchorage  as  before  directed. 

Wedge  Island,  about  300  yards  in  length  and  30  feet  elevation,  lies 
J  mile  north  of  Oeorge  Island. 

Long  Cove  is  another  sheltered  spot  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
Luke  anchorage,  and  can  be  entered  from  the  latter  through  the  uar- 
row  channel  east  of  Troop  Island,  bearing  in  mind  that  in  the  middle  of 
its  south  entrance  there  is  a  small  rise  with  3J  fathoms. 

Another  channel  J  mile  broad  lies  north  of  Troop  island,  between  it 
and  George  Island  ;  off  the  south  end  of  the  latter  shoal  water  extends 
nearly  400  yards  in  a  south  direction. 

Little  Thrum  Island.— North  of  Luke  Island  is  a  group  of  several 
small  islets,  the  smallest  and  outermost  being  Little  Thrum  Island^ 
about  100  yards  long ;  from  it  a  shallow  spit  extends  in  a  northwest- 
erly direction  J  mile ;  there  is  also  shoal  water  on  its  SW.  side. 

The  west  tangent  of  the  inner  or  eastern  lump  of  Indian  Point  just 
open  west  of  Wedge  Island  clears  the  west  side  of  Little  Thrum  Spit, 
and  leads  about  mid  channel  between  George  Island  and  Middle  Shoal. 

Luke  Anchorage.— At  1^  miles  to  the  northward  of  Shut-in  Island  is 
Luke  Islet,  40  feet  high :  within  it  there  is  excellent  anchorage  in  8  to  10 
fathoms,  where  vessels  may  remain  in  security  during  gales  from  any 
quarter. 

The  anchorage  is  very  accessible;  if  from  the  southward,  avoid  the 
shoal  water  off  the  SW.  end  of  the  island,  and  when  the  east  end  of 
Troop  Island  opens  east  of  the  SB.  stony  point  steer  for  the  anchorage 
with  the  north  end  of  Shut-in  Island  seen  over  the  SB.  point  of  Luke 
Island,  and  Big  Thrum  Island  midway  between  Troop  Island  and  the 
northern  stony  tongue  of  Luke  Island. 

Shut-in  Island  is  §  mile  in  length,  and  attains  an  elevation  of  20O 
feet.  Although  there  is  a  deep- water  channel  leading  inside  the  island 
there  are  numerous  rocks,  which  render  this  passage  unadvisable  with- 
out the  assistance  of  local  knowledge.  The  rocks  referred  to  will  be 
cleared  by  keeping  Middle  Point  open  of  Paddy  Head. 

The  east  and  west  shores  of  Shut-in  Island  are  steep-to,  but  in  round- 
ing the  north  point  do  not  approach  nearer  than  300  yards ;  within  the 
island  the  holding  ground  is  good,  and  the  place  well  sheltered,  secure, 
and  smooth  during  southerly  gales. 

Middle  Point  Hock,  with  3^  fathoms  water,  lies  NW.  J  mile  from 
Middle  Point.  The  two  tangents  of  Paddy  Head  and  Shut  in  Island 
apparently  just  touching  and  bearing  N.  2°  W.,  lead  about  200  yards 
westward  of  Middle  Point  Rock. 

Crawford  Ledge,  which  is  steep-to  outside,  lies  nearly  40«  yards 
within  Middle  Point  Rock  in  the  direction  of  Jack  Island.    Peggy  and 


% 


106 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


Middle  Points  in  line  bearing  S.  45°  E.  lead  between  Crawford  Ledge 
and  Middle  Point  Book. 

Halibut  Rock  is  small,  and  covers  at  the  first  quarter  flood ;  it  lies 
off  Peggy  Point  200  yards. 

Horseshoe  Ledge  consists  of  ridges  of  rock  which  uncover  at  half 
ebb.  From  the  highest  part  of  the  ledge  East  Ironbouud  Island  light- 
house bears  S.  62°  W.  4f  miles,  and  the  south  point  of  SW.  island  N. 
17°  W. 

Tides.— The  rise  and  fall  of  tide  in  St.  Margaret  Bay  are  regular, 
but  the  tidal  streams  are  very  weak,  excepting  at  the  entrance  between 
Shut-in  Island  and  Peggy  Cove  on  the  eastern  side,  and  from  Owls 
Head  to  SW.  island  on  the  western  side;  between  these  shores  the 
stream  attains  a  velocity  of  about  one  knot  per  hour  in  the  strength 
of  the  tide,  the  flood  running  to  the  northward  and  the  ebb  to  the 
southward,  but  following  the  trend  of  the  shores  on  either  side  when 
closed  in. 

Directions. — From  the  southward  or  westward,  and  being  outside 
Green  Island,  do  not  bring  the  north  point  of  Green  Island  to  bear  south- 
ward of  S.  36°  W.  until  the  whole  of  Little  Taneook  Island  is  open  east 
of  East  Ironbound  Island,  in  order  to  avoid  the  NE.  Shoal. 

To  pass  east  of  the  Borse  Shoe  ledge  bring  Owls  Head  well  open 
east  of  SW.  island  bearing  N.  32°  W.,  and  to  pass  westward  Owls 
Head  should  be  kept  open  west  of  SW.  island  bearing  north,  in  this 
latter  case  when  the  tangent  of  New  Harbor  Point  bears  S  80°  W.,  the 
vessel  will  be  to  the  northward  of  the  Horse  Shoe  ledge  and  a  course 
may  be  steered  for  Shut-in  Island,  taking  care  to  avoid  Charley  Rock 
on  the  east  side  of  SW.  island.  When  Clam  Island,  east  tangent,  is  in 
line  with  the  outer  end  of  Indian  Point  bearing  N.  25°  E.,  the  vessel  will 
then  be  clear  of  Middle  Shoal,  and  may  steer  N.  19°  B.,  rounding  Indian 
Point  200  yards  off  shore,  and  after  passing  the  point  steer  to  the  east- 
ward until  the  western  tangents  of  Wedge  Island  and  Indian  Point  are 
in  line  bearing  S.  6°  W. 

Keeping  the  above  marks  on,  and  steering  N.  6°  E.,  will  lead  in 
midchauuel  between  the  Sand  Cove  Shoal  and  Strawberry  Shoal ;  and 
when  the  north  end  of  Strawberry  Island  and  Black  Point  are  in  line 
bearing  S.  78°  W.  steer  to  pass  north  of  Clam  Island,  taking  care  not 
to  shut  in  Croucher  Island  with  the  south  point  of  Strawberry  Island, 
in  order  to  avoid  Marsh  Gutter  Shoal,  with  3^  fathoms. 

A  good  mark  for  rounding  the  NE.  spit  of  Clam  Island  is  to  bring 
Black  Point,  on  the  northern  shore  of  St.  Margaret  Bay,  in  line  be- 
tween Potato  Point  and  the  main,  and  anchor  in  9  or  10  fathoms  mud, 
with  the  east  end  of  Clam  Island  apparently  touching  the  outer  end 
of  ludiaa  Point,  and  Potato  Island  its  apparent  breadth  open  south  of 
Black  Point. 

Port  Dover.  — A.8  Black  Rock  only  just  covers  at  high-water  springs, 
it  is  very  seldom  that  its  position  can  not  be  identified;  but  on  such  ex- 


PORT    DOVER SHAG   BAY. 


107 


>rd  Ledge 

Dd ;  it  lies 

er  at  half 
land  light- 
.  island  N. 

e  regular, 
le  between 
from  Owls 
shores  the 
i  strength 
)bb  to  the 
side  when 

ag  outside 
3ear  south- 
I  open  east 

I  well  open 
(Fard  Owls 
itb,  in  this 
lOo  W.,  the 
d  a  course 
arley  Rock 
igent,  is  in 
vessel  will 
ing  Indian 
bo  the  east- 
n  Point  are 

ill  lead  in 
3boal ;  and 
are  in  line 
ig  care  not 
irry  Island, 

is  to  bring 
,  in  line  be- 
homs  mud, 
!  outer  end 
3n  south  of 

ter  springs, 
on  such  ex- 


ceptional occasions,  to  pass  east  of  the  rock  bring  the  eastern  tangents 

of  Myra  and  White  Islands  apparently  to  touch,  bearing  N.  16°  E.  until 

Soi  Point  (having  houses  on  it)  opens  east  of  Fleming  Island,  when 

proceed  in  that  direction,  and  on  nearing  Fleming  Island  alter  course 

so  as  to  pass  between  it  and  Fleming  Ledge,  and  anchor  in  9  or  10 

fathoms,  mud,  with  Fleniin<;  Ledge  in  Hue  with  the  south  end  of  White 

Island  and  the  east  end  of  Dover  Castle  touching  the  west  end  of  l^lem- 
iug  Island. 

Leary  Point,  midway  between  the  high-water  lines  of  High  and  White 
Islands,  bearing  N.  30°  E.,  leads  through  in  deep  water  between  Dover 
Castle  and  Black  liock,  as  does  also  Fleming,  Ledge,  seen  just  open  of 
Fleming  Island,  N.  9°  W. 

Cabbage  G-arden  Shoals  consists  of  two  rocky  patches  off  the  en- 
trance to  port  Dover;  the  outer,  about  200  yards  in  extent,  has  10  feet 
water,  and  lies  N.  69°  E.,  a  short  ^  mile  from  the  south  point  of  Flem- 
ing Isiana. 

The  inner  shoal  (of  NW.  the  former)  just  uncovers  at  low-water 
springs,  and  lies  NB.  400  yards  from  Fleming  Island. 

Directions. — Blind  Bay  affords  good  anchorage  north  of  Myra  Dry 
Ledge.  Proceeding  through  the  main  channel  between  the  Black  Rock 
and  Shag  Bay  Breakers,  with  the  two  gull  rocks  in  line,  alter  course 
when  necessary  so  as  to  pass  between  outer  Gull  Rock  and  White 
Island,  or  steer  for  Doyle  Island,  N.  4°  E.;  it  will  then  appear  about 
midway  between  Black  Point  and  Myra  Island.  Avoid  going  to  the 
westward  of  the  line  where  Doyle  and  Myra  Islands  appear  to  touch, 
in  order  to  keep  clear  of  the  Round  Rock  and  Middle  Ground. 

If  the  draft  of  water  renders  it  necessary  to  avoid  a  4-fathom  patch 
about  250  yards  off  the  north  point  of  Mj  ra  Island  in  an  easterly  direc- 
tion, steer  towards  the  eastern  shore  with  Leary  Point  and  White 
Island,  just  open  of  each  other,  until  Myra  Dry  Ledge  is  in  line  with  the 
south  tangent  of  Clarke  Island ;  then  steer  roand  Myra  Dry  Ledge, 
keeping  an  offing  of  200  yards  off  its  eastern  end,  and  anchor  in  about 
6  fathoms,  mud,  in  a  berth  equidistant  from  the  ledge,  Clarke  Island, 
and  the  rock  south  of  Flat  Island. 

Middle  Q-round,  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel  leading  into 
Blind  Bay,  is  about  200  yards  in  diameter,  with  two  rocky  rises  100 
yards  distant  from  each  other  north  and  south.  The  northern  point  is 
just  awash  at  low- water  springs,  the  other  has  3  feet  water. 

Shag  Bay. — Shag  Head  xbrms  the  eastern  entrance  point  common  to 
Shag  and  Blind  Bays.  Shag  Bay,  3j  miles  in  length,  with  a  general 
trend  to  the  NE.,  has  good  anchorage  oft'  a  small  cove  near  its  head 
on  the  western  shore. 

Shag  Bay  Breakers  consist  of  a  rocky  ridge,  ^  mile  in  length  ;  the 
two  shoalest  parts,  wit  h  only  4  feet  water,  are  at  each  extremity  j  and 
Fader  Head,  seen  between  the  two  Gull  Rocks  at  the  entrance  of  Shag 


.,. 


108 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.   E.    COAST. 


Baj-,  bearing  N.  23°  E.,  leads  directly  over  them,  aud  consequently 
over  the  long  axis  of  tbe  shoal.  • 

Green  Shoal,  about  250  yards  in  length,  with  6  feet  least  water,  lies 
eastward  of  Shag  Bay  Breakers,  with  a  deep  water  channel  |  mile  broad 
between  the  5-fathom  lines. 

Onll  Shoal,  small  in  extent,  with  6  feet  water,  is  nearly  equidistant 
from  the  Outer  and  Inner  Gull  Bocks  and  main  shore;  the  passage  be- 
tween it  and  the  latter  being  350  yards  across. 

Frying-pan  Rock,  which  covers  during  lust  quarter  flood,  is  the 
highest  part  of  a  shoal  about  200  yards  in  extent,  and  bears  from  Black 
Point  Ledge  (which  is  3  feet  above  high  water)  8.  49°  B.  about  200  yards. 
From  Frying-pan  Rock,  White  Island,  and  Dover  Oastle  are  apparently 
just  overlapping,  bearing  about  S.  68°  W.,  the  navigable  channel  on  its 
eastern  side  being  200  yards  across. 

Round  Rock,  with  4  feet  water,  is  steep-to  all  round ;  it  lies  300 
yards  oflF  Leary  Point  in  an  easterly  direction ;  from  it  the  Outer  Gull 
Rock  is  on  with  the  north  point  of  Shag  Head. 

West  ChsnneL — A  good  leading  mark  west  of  Shag  Bay  Breakers 
is  the  two  Gull  Rocks  in  line  bearing  N.  38°  E.  On  passing  the  Outer 
Gull  Rock,  keep  about  200  yards  off,  especially  on  the  north  side,  after 
which  close  the  Inner  Gull  to  within  200  yards,  so  as  to  pass  midway 
between  the  Inner  Gull  and  Frying  pan  Rocks,  and  thence  proceed  up 
the  bay  and  anchor  in  about  8  fathoms,  mud,  off  NW.  Cove,  with  Fader 
Head  bearing  S.  13°  W. 

Black  Rock  is  the  outer  of  the  western  dangers,  and  lies  S.  Tl^'  E., 
i  mile  from  a  remarkable  bare  rocky  islet,  40  feet  high,  known  as  Dover 
Castle.  There  is  a  narrow  but  deep  water  ch.^nnel  between  them,  but 
caremust  be  taken  to  avoid  a  3foot  patch  whicl.  lies  100  yards  from  the 
Black  Rock  in  a  northerly  direction. 

East  Channel — Black  Point,  just  open  of  Shag  Head,  bearing  N. 
18°  W.,  leatls  eastward  of  Kittee  Wittee  and  Green  Shoals  and  towards 
Shag  Head,  which  may  be  rounded  close-to.  Immediately  after  passing 
the  head  close  the  eastern  shore  until  Fader  Head  opens  well  out  east 
of  Inner  Gull  Rock,  bearing  N.  18°  E.;  this  mark  will  lead  on  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  Gull  Shoal,  after  which  proceed  up  to  the  anchorage 
south. 

Prospect  Harbor  is  situated  at  the  month  of  an  arm  of  the  sea 
known  as  Prospect  River,  upwards  of  3  miles  in  length,  and  distant 
from  Mars  Head  about  2J  miles  in  a  northerly  direction.  The  anchor- 
age is  within  Heron  Island,  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  river,  where  large 
vessels  may  find  good  shelter,  and  although  there  are  dangers  off  the 
harbor,  they  are  such  as  can  easily  be  avoided  when  once  the  islands 
marking  the  ai>proaches  thereto  have  been  identified. 

The  town  of  Prospect  is  built  in  a  somewhat  straggling  manner  on 
the  narrow  western  point  of  Prospect  River.  The  population  subsist 
on  the  produce  of  adjoining  tisheries;  the  church  (Rom<in  Oa-th  olic)  is 


equeutly 

ater,  lies 
ile  broad 

aidistant 
isage  be- 

l,  is  the 
im  Black 
JO  yards, 
(parently 
ael  on  its 

lies  300 
Iter  Gull 

Breakers 
be  Outer 
ide,  after 
>  midway 
oceed  up 
th  Fader 

3.  71°  E., 
as  Dover 
bein,  bat 
from  tbe 

'aring  N. 
1  towards 
r  passing 
out  east 
the  east- 
liuliorage 

f  tbe  sea 
d  distaut 
le  ancbor- 
lere large 
'S  oft'  tbe 
le  islands 

lanner  on 
HI  subsist 
ktb  olic)  is 


PROSPECT    BAY — TIDES. 


109 


8  conspicuous  object,  and  can  be  seen  from  a  longdistance  at  sea;  tbe 
principal  import  is  tlonr,  and  tbe  only  export  lisb,  as  tbe  soil,  being 
sterile,  would  render  agricultural  pursuits  unproductive. 

Bett7  Island  is  J  mile  long  in  a  nortb  and  soutb  direction ;  tbe 
southern  point,  Brig  Point,  has  a  lighthouse  upon  it.  It  lies  midway 
between  the  entrance  to  Prospect  River  and  Back  Bay. 

SW.  and  Devereuz  Shoals  are  both  isolated  rocky  patches  lying 
off  the  southwest  end  of  Betty  Island,  about  i  mile  off  shore. 

White  Horse  Rock,  with  only  IJ  fathoms  water,  lies  between  Hop- 
son  Island,  83  feet  high,  and  Norris  Bald  Rock,  20  feet  high ;  from  tbe 
latter  it  bears  S.  6lo  E.  about  J  mile;  from  tbe  rock  tbe  soutb  point  of 
Breakiast  Islainl  is  in  line  with  tbe  north  point  of  Shannon  Bald  Rock. 

Heron  Rock  is  small,  detached,  and  shows  at  low  water ;  it  is  steep- 
to  on  its  east  side,  and  lies  about  100  yards  in  au  easterly  direction 
from  the  northeast  end  of  Heron  Island,  there  being  3  fathoms  in  the 
passage  between.  As  this  rock  is  in  close  proximity  to  the  anchorage, 
care  must  be  laken,  on  bringing  up,  to  give  it  a  clear  berth.  From 
the  rock  Burnt  and  Shannon  Islands  are  nearly  touching. 

Kittee  Wittee  Shoal,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  during  bad  weather 
is  composed  of  rock  about  300  yards  in  extent,  thesboalest  part,  with  5 
fathoms  water,  lies  with  the  north  point  of  Burnt  Island,  in  line  with 
tbe  north  end  of  Norris  Bald  Rock  bearing  N.  77°  E.,  the  latter  being 
f  mile  distant. 

SB.  Shoal  is  nearly  200  yards  in  extent,  with  2^  fathoms  water,  and 
breaks  during  an  ordinary  southerly  gale. 

Tides.— In  connection  with  the  tides  along  this  coast  Captain  Short- 
land  remarks  that  winds  influence  the  time  of  high  water,  especially  if 
during  one  of  tbe  rotatory  gales  a  shift  of  wind  occurs  before  high  water. 
At  the  commencement  of  a  SB.  gale  there  is  a  f-^ndency  to  retard  tbe 
time  of  high  water,  and  this  effect  continues  until  the  gale  has  reached 
its  full  height ;  but  as  the  wind  diminishes  in  force  this  principle  ceases, 
and  a  contrary  effect  ensues.  In  extreme  cases  the  time  of  high  water 
will  be  found  to  differ  fully  an  hour  from  undisturbed  periods. 

Western  Channel.— Bring  Norris  Bald  Rock  to  bear  N.  10°  W.  and 
proceed  on  that  course,  rounding  the  rock  on  the  north  side,  which  is 
steep  to;  then  steer  N.  69o  E.  for  the  highest  part  of  Heron  Island, 
taking  care  not  to  approach  the  high-water  line  of  Saul  and  Church 
Points  within  200  yards.  When  the  spire  of  Prospect  Church  is  in  line 
with  Church  Point  alter  course  to  round  Heron  Island,  taking  care  to 
keep  Saul  Point  well  open  of  Heron  Island  until  Burnt  and  Shannon 
Islands  are  seen  open  of  each  other  in  order  to  avoid  Heron  Rock, 
thence  steer  for  the  anchorage  in  7  to  9  fathoms,  mud,  with  Prospect 
Roman  Catholic  Church  in  line  with  the  north  end  of  Heron  Island 
and  midway  between  that  island  and  tbe  main  shore. 

Back  Bay,  a  mile  from  Mars  Head  in  a  northerly  direction,  is  ren- 
dered unserviceable  as  au  anchorage  In  consequence  of  numerous  dan- 


no 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


gets  across  itsentrauce,  in  addition  to  which  the  space  of  available  deep 
water  is  not  only  exposed  to  the  8W.,  but  is  very  limited  in  extent. 

GrampuB  Rock,  with  only  9  feet  water,  is  the  outer  of  several  rocky 
patches  extending  from  Mars  Hea<i  nearly  800  yards  to  the  southward. 
Turner  Bay,  about  2  miles  within  Mars  Head,  and  at  the  northwest- 
ern angle  of  Pennant  Bay,  is  open  to  the  SE.,bat  the  anchorage  is  good 
iu  8  or  9  fathoms,  mud,  midway  between  Cat  Island  and  the  western 
shore,  with  Church  and  Tenant  Points  in  line. 

Directions.— To  enter  Turner  Bay  by  the  western  passage  bring 
Tnruer  Bay  Rock  to  bear  N.  29c  E.  and  steer  for  it,  passing  midway 
between  Broad  Rock,  which  covers  at  high  water,  and  Puffer  Shoal,  on 
which  the  sea  is  said  always  to  break.  Pass  westward  of  Turner  Bay 
Rock,  between  it  and  the  Black  Shoal,  keeping  nearer  to  the  former, 
which  is  quite  bold  on  that  side  ;  from  thence  gradually  steer  to  the 
northward  until  the  south  tangents  of  Seven  Islands  and  Pennant 
Island  are  in  line,  in  order  to  avoid  the  ISfoot  shoal,  which  lies  north- 
ward i  mile  from  Black  Shoal  and  400  yards  from  Tenant  Point.  With 
the  above  marks  on  the  vessel  may  steer  to  the  westward  towards  the 
anchorage. 

Pennant  Bay,  next  west  of  Sambro  Harbor,  lies  between  Pennant 
Point  and  Mars  Head,  the  latter  being  a  rocky  peninsula  about  70  feet 
high.  The  bay  is  3  miles  broad  between  the  entrance  points  and  about 
2  miles  deep;  it  is  thickly  studded  with  rocky  shoals  and  islands,  but 
affords  shelter  to  those  acquainted  with  the  passages  between  them. 
The  land  at  the  head  of  the  bay  is  of  moderate  height,  Hospital  Hill, 
the  highest  part,  rising  250  feet  above  the  sea. 

Pennant  Harbor,  at  the  northeastern  angle  of  Pennant  Bay,  though 
small  in  extent,  has  secure  anchorage  within  several  small  islands. 

DirectionB.— When  rounding  Pennant  Point  be  careful  to  avoid  the 
Broad  Shoal,  which  extends  400  yards  off  it  to  the  southward  and  east- 
ward. Hospital  Hill,  in  line  with  the  western  shoulder  of  Pennant 
Island,  will  lead  well  clear  of  this  danger. 

After  passing  200  yards  to  the  eastward  of  Bald  Rock  steer  N.  23° 
B.  for  Thrumcap  Island  until  the  Seven  Islands  are  seen  open  north- 
wartiof  Pennant  Island,  when  the  Middle  Ground  will  be  passed ;  then 
steer  round  to  the  eastward  and  northward  of  Thrumcap  Island  at  the 
distance  of  200  yards,  to  pass  between  it  and  the  rocky  3-fathom  shoal 
lying  i  mile  northward  from  it.  Having  passed  to  the  westward  of 
this  shoal,  anchor  within  Martin  and  Saddle  Islands,  as  convenient, 
from  200  to  600  yards  from  them,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  w->(\  bottom. 


^fSM.t*ii.-ii.J>*#i  ■  ■ 


able  deep 
ixtent. 
jral  rocky 
mthward. 
lorthwest- 
ge  is  good 
B  western 

age  bring 
g  midway 

Sboal,  CD 
aruer  Bay 
lie  former, 
eer  to  tbe 

Pennant 
lies  nortb- 
nt.  Witb 
wards  tbe 

I  Pennant 
)ut  70  feet 
and  about 
lands,  but 
een  tbem. 
pital  Hill, 

ly,  though 
dands. 
>  avoid  the 
1  and  east- 
f  Pennant 

;eer  N.  23° 
pen  north - 
ised ;  then 
and  at  the 
)bom  shoal 
estward  of 
onvenient, 
ttom. 


CHAPTER   V. 

NOVA  SOOTIA— SOUTHEAST  OOAST— 8AMBE0  HARBOR  TO   OAPE   OANSO 

Sambro  Harbor,  lying  at  the  head  of  the  bay  formed  between  Pen. 
nant  Point  on  the  west  and  Cape  Sambro  on  the  east,  has  anchorage 
within  the  Isle  of  Man.  The  heavy  sea  during  southwesterly  winds  is 
much  broken  by  the  ledges  outside,  but  the  shelter  is  imperfect,  and  the 
dangers  off  and  in  this  harbor  are  so  numerous  that  it  should  never  be 
attempted  by  large  vessels,  excepting  in  a  case  of  extreme  necessity. 

From  the  Westward.— To  enter  Sambro  harbor  from  the  westward 
bring  the  highest  hill  on  Cape  Sambro  over  the  western  rise  of  Inner 
Sambro  Island,  and  with  these  marks  on  proceed  between  Pennant 
Point  and  Bull  Rock.  After  passing  the  latter  at  the  distance  of  300 
yards,  to  clear  the  shoal  water  off  it  to  the  northward,  steer  N.  35°  B., 
or  with  the  east  ends  of  Round  Island  and  Isle  of  Man  in  line,  if  these 
tangents  can  be  distinguished;  if  not,  pass  300  yards  eastward  of  the 
Island  Rock,  and  continue  to  steer  N.  35°  E.  until  Fairweather  Rock  is 
seen  open  southward  of  Inner  Sambro  Island,  which  will  clear  the  Torpey 
Ledge. 

Then,  to  avoid  the  Middle  Ground,  steer  more  easterly,  so  as  to  pass 
not  more  than  200  yards  to  the  northward  of  the  west  end  of  Inner 
Sambro  Island,  which  is  quite  bold,  and  when  the  marks  for  clearing 
Cowley  Rock  come  on,  viz,  Fairweather  Rock  apparently  touching  the 
western  point  of  Inner  Sambro  Island  bearing  8.  13°  W.,  steer  N.  13o 
E.  and  proceed  to  the  anchorage  under  the  Isle  of  Man  in  6  or  7  fathoms 
mud  bottom.  ' 

Fogs.— It  frequently  happens  that  the  weather  is  clear  within  Sambro 
Lighthouse,  although  very  thick  several  miles  without. 

Pilots— Sambro  Island  is  the  resort  of  pilots. 

Sambro  Ledges.— From  Smithson  Rock,  the  outermost  of  the  west- 
ern ledges  with  only  2  fathoms  water,  Sambro  Lighthouse  bears  N.  43o 
E.  2J  miles ;  Pennant  Point  N.  56©  W.  2^  miles.  Gull  Rock,  little  more 
than  its  own  breadth  open  of  White  or  Catch  Harbor  Head,  bearing  N. 
320  E.,  also  leads  over  this  dangerous  rock,  as  well  as  over  Mare  Rock, 
which,  with  6  feet  water,  lies  nearly  ^  mile  further  in. 

Mark— The  west  end  of  Pennant  Island,  on  with  the  tangent  of 
Pennant  Point  N.  38o  W.  leads  §  mile  to  the  westward  of  Smithson 
Rock. 

Whistling  Buoy.— A  whistling  buoy  painted  black  and  white  in 
vertical  stripes  is  moored  in  25  fathoms  near  the  southern  end  of  Sambro 

111 


M 


m 


HHi 


112 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.   E.    COAST. 


outer  bank  with  Pennant  Point  bearing  N.  53°  W.,  distant  7^  miles,  and 
Sanibro  Liglitbouse,  N.  26°  W.,  distant  6J  miles. 

Hennesy  Bank,  Shoal  Qround,  Barae  Ground,  and  Ontar 
Bank.— These  are  rocky  fishing  grounds,  with  depths  varying  from  8 
to  iiO  fathoms,  and  should  be  avoided  by  vessels  during  bad  weather  as 
they  cause  a  heavy  half-breaking  sea. 

SW.  Breaker,  which  almost  always  shows,  lies  li  miles  eastward 
of  Sinithson  Rouk,  and  from  it  Ohebucto  Head  is  seen  over  the  eastern 
extremity  of  Sambro  Island,  the  latter  bearing  N.  21°  E.,  IJ  miles. 

A  black  can  buoy,  with  staflf  and  vane,  and  marked  SVV.  Breaker, 
lies  ill  12  fathoms  water,  nearly  400  yards  south  of  the  S  W.  Breaker. 

The  Sisters  are  the  outermost  of  the  eastern  Sambro  Ledges,  and 
from  the  lighthouse  on  Sambro  Island  they  are  distant  1%  miles.  Their 
position  is  pointed  out  by  Black  Rock,  15  feet  high,  and  from  which 
they  are  distant  i  mile  to  the  eastward.  Several  rocks  of  this  cluster 
uncover  at  low  water,  and  their  position  can  always  be  seen ;  but  the 
Blind  Sister  is  more  dangerous,  having  9  feet  over  it  at  low  water. 

An  iron  bell-buoy,  painted  black  and  surmounted  by  a  cage,  lies  in  26 
fathoms  water,  J  mile  from  the  Blind  Sister  Shoal ;  with  Sambro  Island 
Lighthouse  bearing  S.  87°  W.,  and  Chebucto  Head  Lighthouse  N.  3°  E 

Caution.— In  approaching  Halifax  Harbor  from  the  eastward,  care 
must  be  taken  to  make  allowance  for  a  set  to  the  westward  towards  the 

Sisters  Hocks. 

Clearing  Marks.— Sandwich  Point  in  line  with  Chebucto  Head,  bear- 
ing N.  15°  W.,  will  lead  one  mile  eastward  of  Sambro  Ledges*  By  night 
Sherbrook  Tower  light  on  Maugher  Beach,  just  open  east  of  Chebucto 
Head,  will  clear  all  the  Sambro  Ledges  as  well  as  the  Bell  Rock  and 
Duncan  Reef. 

The  lead  will  give  little  or  no  warning  when  approaching  these  ledges 
from  the  eastward,  on  which  side  the  bank  is  very  steep,  the  depth 
being  45  fathoms  within  less  than  J  mile  from  the  Sisters. 

Catch  Harbor  has  9  feet  water  on  its  bar,  with  16  feet  mud  within, 
where  its  shores  are  occupied  by  the  houses  and  stages  of  fishermen. 
At  the  head  of  the  harbor  is  a  chapel,  as  well  as  a  fine  stream,  the  outlet 
of  the  waters  of  several  small  lakes  which  lie  about  a  mile  to  the  north- 
ward. 

Ede  Rock,  with  9  feet  water  on  it,  lies  nearly  midway  between  the 
Sisters  and  Morris  Point,  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Catch 
Harbor. 

Halifax  Harbor  is  one  of  the  finest  and  safest  in  the  world,  affording 
space  and  depth  of  water  sufficient  for  a  large  number  of  vessels ;  and 
although  the  dangers  off  its'entrance  are  such  as  to  render  great  caution 
necessary— especially  during  the  fogs  which  usually  accompany  all 
winds  from  the  sea— it  is  easier  of  ingress  and  egress  than  any  other 
large  harbor  on  the  coast.  The  entrance,  6J  miles  wide,  lies  be- 
tween Devil  Island  to  the  NE.  and  Chebucto  Head  to  the  SW., 


HALIFAX    HARBOR. 


113 


luiles,  and 

ind  Ontar 

ing  from  8 
weatber  as 

t  eastward 
die  eaateru 
r  miles. 
T.  Breaker, 
Breaker, 
ledges,  and 
les.    Their 
from  which 
bbis  cluster 
D ;  but  the 
water. 
[6,  lies  iu  26 
abro  Islaud 
se  N.  30  E 
tward,  care 
owards  the 

Bead,  bear- 
By  night 
»f  Chebucto 
II  Bock  and 

hese  ledges 
,  the  depth 

nud  within, 
I  fishermen. 
1,  the  outlet 
9  the  north- 

>etween  the 
ce  to  Catch 

d,  affording 
essels;  and 
i-eat  caution 
)mpany  all 
n  any  other 
ie,  lies  be- 
3  the  SW., 


and  from  mid-position  between  these  points  the  general  /jd  of  the 
harbor  is  northward  for  a  distance  of  15  miles,  to  the  head  of  Bedford 
Basin. 

The  city  of  Halifax  is  the  capital  of  the  province  of  Nova  Scotia,  and 
cout  lined  in  1888  about  45,000  inhabitants;  it  is  built  on  the  declivity 
of  a  penin.sula  on  the  western  side  of  the  harbor,  and  8  miles  within  its 
entrance.  Tlie  citadel,  immediately  in  rear  of  tlie  city,  and  in  a  central 
position  between  its  two  extremes,  stands  on  a  commanding  elevation 
227  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water,  and  with  its  flagstaff  forms  a 
leading  mark  easily  recognized  from  a  vessel  off  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor. 

The  harbor  opposite  the  town  is  about  i^  mile  broad,  but  at  the  Nar- 
rows—-ahout  a  mile  above  the  upper  end  of  the  city— it  contracts  to  less 
than  i  mile,  and  then  expands  into  Bedford  Basin,  which  has  an  area 
of  10  square  miles,  and  is  completely  landlocked.  On  the  eastern  side 
of  the  harbor,  and  immediately  opposite  the  Naval  yard,  is  the  town  of 
Dartmouth :  between  it  and  the  city  steam  vessels  ply  continually. 
Eastern  Fort,  with  its  tower,  stands  close  to  the  shore  2  miles  farther 
to  the  southward  on  tne  same  side  of  the  harbor. 

Halifax  Harbor  has  the  advantage  of  never  being  closed  by  ice  ;  for 
although  in  very  severe  winters,  when  the  low  temperature  has  been 
accompanied  by  a  continuance  of  calm  weather,  the  inner  part  of  the 
harbor  has  been  frozen  over,  yet  this  has  occurred  only  at  intervals  of 
many  years ;  and  even  then,  as  the  ice  never  extends  beyond  George 
Island,  there  is  always  a  sufficient  space  of  open  water  between  it  and 
Macnab  Island  in  which  vessels  may  anchor  in  satiety.  Even  when  the 
ice  forms  opposite  the  city,  it  never  remains  long,  for  it  is  broken  up  by 
the  first  southerly  wind  of  sufficient  strength  to  send  a  swell  into  the 
harbor. 

The  smaller  and  landlocked  harbors  of  this  coast  are  in  general  all 
frozen  over  during  the  two  or  three  coldest  winter  months ;  and  so  also 
are  the  larger  harbors,  excepting  for  short  distances  within  their  en- 
trances, which  are  kept  open  by  the  swell  from  the  southward.  The 
coasting  vessels  are  usually  laid  up  in  consequence  from  about  the 
middle  of  December  to  near  the  end  of  March. 

Dock — The  Halifax  Graving  Dock  Company's  dock  is  situated  on 
the  western  shore  of  Halifax  Harbor,  about  J  a  mile  northward  of 
the  Eoyal  Naval  Yard.  It  will  be  600  feet  iii  length  on  the  blocks,  8t> 
feet  wide  at  the  entrance,  with  a  depth  of  36  feet  on  the  sill  at  high 
water,  ordinary  springs.  The  Admiralty  will  have  the  right  of  priority 
of  use  of  this  dock. 

Railways.— Halifax  is  the  terminus  of  the  Intercolonial  railway, 
which  affords  communications  with  all  parts  of  Canada,  via  Quebec 
and  the  United  States,  via  St.  John,  New  Brunswick. 

Telegraphs.— Halifax  is  in  telegraphic  communication  with  all  parts 
5314 8 


114 


NOVA    SCOTIA — a.    E.    COAST. 


of  Caimda,  with  the  United  Kingdom  by  submarine  cable,  and  with  the 
United  States  by  cable  and  laud  lines. 

Mails  and  steam  communication. — The  mails  to  and  from  the 
United  Kin^^dom  and  Canada  are  landed  and  shipped  at  Halifax,  while 
the  (ittW  of  St.  Lawrence  is  closed  to  navigation.  There  is  direct  steam 
communication  between  Halifax  and  the  United  Kingdom,  Newfound- 
land, the  West  Indies,  and  the  United  States,  all  the  year  around. 

Coal. — About  l.'),UO()  tons  (partly  Welsh)  are  usually  kept  in  stock. 
Vessels  are  coaled  rapidly  without  interruption  by  weather,  eitliur 
alongside  wharves,  or  by  lighters  of  about  12U  tons,  or  schooners  of 
from  50  to  200  tons.  About  800  to  3,000  tons  can  be  placed  on  board 
in  one  day,  working  day  and  night  cotitinuously  ;  the  larger  quantity 
by  the  Dominion  railway  depot. 

Time  signal. — A  gun  is  fired  from  the  citadel  at  noon,  mean  time  of 
the  60th  meridian,  equivalent  to  4h.  Om.  Os.  Greenwich  mean  time.  This 
gun  is|fired  for  local  ]>urposes,  and  not  for  rating  chroiiumeters. 

Charges. — Health  dues,  2  cents  per  ton  register;  tugboat  charges,  as 
per  agreement.  Wharfage  per  day  from  $2  to  $3;  signal  tax  for  each 
vessel,  $1 ;  discharging  ballast  per  ton,  20  cents ;  general  cargo  per  ton, 
25  cents ;  ballast,  cost  per  ton,  stone,  35  cents ;  cost  of  loading,  20  cents ; 
coal,  cost  of  trimming  per  ton,  15  cents;  cost  of  supplies,  about  the 
same  as  in  American  ports. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul-general  and  vice- 
consul-general. 

Pilotage. — Vessels  shall  pay  one-half  ctia  tariff  rates  if  spoken  by  a 
pilot,  and  is  not  accepted ;  the  dues  are, 


Vessels  of— 

Inward. 

Outwtrd. 

200  tons 

$8.00 
11.00 
14.00 
1S.0O 
18.00 

«5.0C 
7.00 

200  to  300  tons -. 

300  to40Utons 

0.00 

400  toSOO  tons , 

10.00 

800  to  800  tons 

11.00 

Over  600  tons,  an  additional  50  cents  for  every  100  tons  or  part  thereof 
inwards,  and  25  cents  outwards. 

Automatic  Buoys. — A  buoy  having  a  lO-inoh  whistle  is  moored  in 
36  fathoms,  with  Sambro  light-house  bearing  S.  73°  W.  8^  miles,  and 
Ohebucto  Head  light-house  N.  75^  W.  6J  miles.  At  6  miles  N.  60°  W. 
from  this  buoy  there  is  another  automatic  buoy,  painted  red,  with  a  10- 
inch  whistle,  in  21  fathoms  water.  From  this  buoy  Ghebucto  Head 
beard  S.  32°  W.  1|  miles,  and  Sandwich  Point  N.  32°  VV.  4  miles. 

Western  Shore  of  the  Harbor. — Ghebucto  Head  is  106  feet  high, 
and  consists  of  a  whitish  granite,  ot  which,  together  with  clayslate,  the 
steep  and  barren  western  shore  of  the  harbor  is  composed.  At  the  dis- 
tance of  1|  miles  from  Ghebucto  Head  in  a  northerly  direction  is  Portu- 


t 


HALIFAX    HARBOR. 


115 


with  the 

from  the 
rax,  while 
ect  steam 
[ewfouiul- 
Diiud. 
;  in  stocli. 
er,  either 
looners  of 
.  on  board 
r  quantity 

lan  time  of 
me.  This 
irs. 

jharges,  as 
IX  for  each 
go  per  ton, 
g,  20  cents; 
,  about  the 

and  vice- 

aoken  by  a 


d. 

Uatwanl. 

00 

»9.0C 

no 

7.00 

00 

B.OO 

i  00 

10.00 

.00 

11.00 

1 

>art  thereof 

\  moored  iu 
miles,  and 

s  N.  60°  W. 

1,  with  a  10- 

ibuoto  Head 

miles. 

)6  feet  high, 

ayslate,  the 
At  the  dis- 

on  is  Portu- 


guese Cove ;  and  on  a  hill  J^  mile  in  rear  of  the  cove  stands  Gamper> 
down  HagMtaff,  168  feet  above  the  ciea. 

Ball  Rock,  with  only  7  feet  water,  lies  about  ^  mile  oft'  shore,  with 
Ghebucto  Head,  bearing  N.  2°  E.  one  mile.  A  black  bnuy,  with 
stAff  and  vane,  is  moored  in  18  fathoms  water,  southeastward  of  the 
Rock.  Another  rock,  with  4^  fathoms  water  on  it,  lies  2(M)  yards  N. 
W.  from  the  Bell  Hock;  and  as  Duck  Reef  extends  .'tUU  yards  from  the 
shore  towards  them,  the  channel  between  is  moreover  nearly  overlapped 
liy  Duncan  Ueef;  it  cannot  be  recommentled.  Duncan  Cove,  on  the 
southwest  side  of  Chebucto  Head,  affords  shelter  for  boats. 

Pilots  are  stationed  at  Chebnoto  Head.  Tlio  pilot  sciiooners  carry 
a  ttag  with  two  horizontal  red  and  white  bands,  and  unless  met  with  at 
sea,  vessels  approaching  Halifax  Harbor  should  hoist  their  colors  by 
day  and  at  night,  or  during  foggy  weather  a  gun  should  be  fired. 

Herring  Cove  is  a  secure  harbor  for  small  craft  and  boats,  having 
6  feet  at  low  water  in  its  narrow  entrance,  and  8  feet,  over  soft  mud, 
within.  At  its  head  a  brook  discharges  the  waters  of  a  chain  of  small 
lakes. 

York  Redonbt  light  may  be  easily  recognized  by  its  tlagstatt'  and 
position ;  it  stands  177  feet  above  the  sea,  and  nearly  abreast  the  light- 
house on  Mangher  Beach. 

Pleasant  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Northwest  Arm,  is  1^  miles 
farther  in,  and  will  be  recognized  by  its  batteries  and  by  the  tower  on 
its  summit,  L14  feet  above  the  sea;  George  Island,  also,  which  lies  off 
the  southern  end  of  the  city,  will  be  readily  kuown  by  its  redoubt  and 
tower. 

Prohibited  Anchorage. — Vessels  are  not  allowed  to  moor  in  Hali- 
fax Harbor  westward  of  the  line  of  the  light-houses  on  (George  Island 
and  Sberbrook  Tower  (MacNab  Island)  iu  one,  to  leave  room  for  ships 
going  alongside  the  wharves. 

Eastern  Shore  of  the  Harbor  is  less  rocky  and  barren  than  the 
western,  being  formed  of  ridges  of  drift  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders,  rest- 
ing on  clayslate ;  it  is  inhabited  all  the  way  to  Dartmouth.  At  |  of  a 
mile  to  the  northward  of  Devil  Island  is  Barry  Beach  (of  shingle),  in- 
closing a  shallow  pond,  which  affords  shelter  to  boats. 

Eastern  Passage. — The  entrances  to  the  eastern  passage  lie  on 
either  side  of  Lawler  Island ;  that  to  the  eastward,  between  the  island 
and  the  main,  being  the  deeper,  and  having  10  feet  over  its  bar  at  low- 
water.  Only  5  feet  at  that  time  of  tide  oaa  be  carried  through  between 
Lawler  and  Msi^Nab  Islands ;  there  are  rocks  in  the  entrance  and  off 
the  south  end  of  Lawler  Island,  as  will  be  seen  on  the  chart. 

Macnab  Island. — On  Mangher  beach,  at  the  western  extremity  of 
the  island,  the  light-house — known  as  Sherbrook  tower — shows  out 
as  a  very  conspicuous  object  from  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  The  is- 
land is  well  cultivated,  and  has  hills  of  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders  of  vari- 
ions  elevations,  the  maximum  height  being  152  feet  above  the  sea. 


116 


NOVA    SCOTIA — S.    E.    COAST. 


Ires  Point,  the  NW.  extremity  of  Macnab  Island,  is  a  steep  clay  bank, 
with  a  shingle  beach  cnrviug  oat  from  it  to  the  NE. 

Submarine  Telegraph  Cables. — Two  submarine  telei^raph  cables 
are  landed  at  the  cable  house,  on  the  shore  westward  of  George  Island; 
they  follow  the  direction  of  the  western  shore,  until  «)ff  Chebucto  Head  ; 
thence,  one  is  laid  to  Ballinskellig  Bay,  Ireland,  and  the  other  to  Uye 
Beach,  near  Portsmouth,  United  States. 

Thrumcap  Islet  is  connected  with  the  SVV.  extremity  of  Macnab 
Island  by  long  shingle  beaches,  inchising  a  shallow  poii<l.  It  is  30 
feet  high,  and  30U  yards  long,  but  its  cliff  of  red  sand  and  clay  is  fast 
WBSting  by  the  action  of  the  sea. 

Thrumcap  Shoal  extends  one  mile  to  the  southward  from  the  islet. 
Its  SW.  extremity  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy  lying  in  8  fathoms  water 
with  George  Island  just  open  to  the  westward  of  Ives  Point ;  the  Graham 
Head  (10  miles  to  the  eastward)  seen  well  open  southward  of  Devil 
Island.  Devil  Island  high  light  open  south  of  the  low  light,  leads  south^ 
and  George  Island  light  open  west  of  Sherbrook  tower  leads  west  of 
Thrumcap  shoal. 

Light-house  Bank  extends  i{  mile  to  the  southward  from  Mangher 
Beach.  Devil  Island  light-houses  opens  south  of  Macnab  Island  (seeu 
over  the  shingle  beaches),  bearing  S.  83°  E.,  leads  south  of  the  bank. 
From  the  least  water,  3  fathoms,  the  light-house  on  Mangher  Beach, 
distant  ^  mile,  is  in  line  with  Ives  Point. 

Horseshoe  ShoaL — Shallow  water  extends  westward  and  north- 
ward from  Maugher  Beach  to  the  distance  of  400  yards.  In  Macnab 
Gove  the  anchorage  is  good  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  mud;  the  best  berth 
being  with  Sandwich  Point  seen  over  the  Horseshoe  Shoal,  and  the 
western  sides  of  George  Island  and  Ives  Point  in  line. 

A  red  buoy  is  moored  in  8  fathoms,  near  the  north  side  of  the  Horse- 
shoe Shoal,  with  Sherbrook  Tower  bearing  S.  7°  E.  450  yards. 

Ives  Knoll,  awash  at  low  cpring  tides,  extends  800  yards  from  the 
beach  to  the  northward  of  Ives  Point,  or  towards  George  Island.  A  red 
buoy  is  moored  in  8  fathoms  near  the  western  side  of  this  bank,  and 
distant  200  yards  west  from  the  knoll. 

Rock  Head  Shoal,  the  outer  and  most  dangerous  shoal  off  the  en- 
trance of  Halifax  harbor,  is  about  600  yards  in  length,  and  its  shoalest 
part,  with  3J  fathoms  water,  lies  with  a  tower  of  George  Island  in  line 
with  Ives  Point,  bearing  N.  30°  W. ;  Sambro  Island  in  line  with  White 
Head,  bearing  S.  27°  W.,  the  light-house  on  the  island  being  open ;  and 
Devil  Island  lighthouses  N.  25°  E.,  2^  miles. 

A  buoy,  black  and  white  vertical  stripes,  with  staff"  and  cage,  Is 
moored  near  the  southwest  end  of  this  shoal  in  6j  fathoms,  rocky  bot- 
tom ;  with  the  eastern  end  of  George  Island  in  line  with  Ives  Point, 
and  Sambro  Island  open  of  White  Head,  bearing  S.  30°  W. 

Portuguese  Shoal,  a  small  rocky  path  with  5  fathoms  water,  lies 
S.  47°  W.,  ^  mile  from  liock  Head  Shoal,  and  from  it  the  east  point  of 


HALIFAX    UAKBOK SHOALS. 


117 


!lay  bnr.kr 

[)li  cables 
p^e  Island; 
cto  Head ; 
er  to  Bye 

»t'  IVIaunab 

It  18  30 

lay  is  fast 

1  the  islet. 
)ms  water 
le  Graham 
I  of  Devil 
iads  south^ 
ids  west  of 

I  Maagher 

)land  (seeu 

the  bank. 

ler  Beach, 

ind  north- 
In  Macnab 
best  berth 
al,  and  the 

the  Horse- 

.8. 

Is  from  the 
nd.  A  red 
I  bank,  and 

I  off  the  en- 
its  shoalest 
[and  in  line 
with  White 
■  open ;  and 

nd  cage,  is 
,  rocky  bot- 
Ives  Point, 

s  water,  lies 
ast  point  of 


Georjre  Island  is  iu!«t  touching  the  west  side  of  Sherbrook  Tower,  on 
Mamjher  Beach;  Saiubro  Island  is  concealed  behind  Ohebiicto  Head; 
and  t!ain|terdowri  rtagstaff  bears  S.  OIP  VV.  A  buoy,  with  red  and  black 
horizonfiU  stripes,  is  moored  on  its  western  side  in  «»  fathoms,  with 
George  Island  seen  just  open  westward  of  Sherbrook  tower,  bearing 
N.  24^  V\'. ;  Camperdown  flagstaff  S.  03°  W.;  and  Devil  Island  light- 
houses N. 330  E. 

Neverfail  Shoal,  upwards  of  200  yards  in  length,  has  on  its  shoal- 
est part  4^  fathoms,  an*l  from  it  the  eastern  side  of  George  Island  ap- 
pears in  line  with  the  steeple  of  a  Roman  Catholic  chapel  at  Dart- 
mouth ;  the  tower  on  Pleasant  Point  is  seen  over  the  point  at  York 
Kedoubt;  and  Hartlanil  Point  over  the  northern  point  of  Devil  Island, 
and  in  line  with  the  Thrumcap  Buoy,  which  bears  N.  57°  E.,  distant 
about  one  mile. 

Lichfield  Rock,  of  small  extent,  with  2^  fathoms  c^i  its  shoalest 
spot,  lies  S.  880  w.,  J  mile  from  Neverfail  Shoal.  A  black  can  buoy, 
with  staff  and  cage,  lies  on  its  eastern  side,  with  the  tower  on  George 
Island  in  line  with  Sandwich  Point;  Devil  Island  and  Hartland  Point 
apparently  touching,  bearing  N.  62°  E.;  and  the  steeple  of  the  chapel 
at  Herring  Cove  N.  51°  W. 

George  Island  open  east  of  Sandwich  Point,  bearing  N.  16°  W.,  leads 
eastward  of  the  rock,  and  the  citadal  flagstaff  apparently  just  touching 
Sandwich  Point,  bearing  N.  23°  W.,  will  lead  through  between  it  and 
Neverfail  Shoal,  which  Is  the  most  direct,  and  therefore  the  preferable 
channel,  although  the  deepest  water  is  between  Lichfield  Rock  and  the 
land,  from  which  it  is  distant  jj  mile. 

Mars  Rock,  with  3J  fathoms  water,  is  the  shoalest  part  of  a  rocky 
bank  separated  from  the  shore,  between  Herrin„-  Cove  and  Sandwich 
Point,  by  a  very  narrow  channel.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  in  6  fath- 
oms on  its  eastern  side,  with  the  citadel  flagstaff  just  open  east  of  Sand- 
wich Point,  the  latter  being  distant  J  mile ;  Hartland  Point  open  south 
of  the  Thrumcap  beaches;  and  the  north  side  of  Herring  Cove  bearing 
S.  59°  W. 

Middle  Ground,  a  small  gravel  patch  with  4^  fathoms  water,  lies 
S.  74°  W.,  i  mile  from  the  northern  point  of  Macnab  Cc^e,  and  N.  50" 
W.  5  mile  from  Sherbrook  Tower.  The  steeple  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
<;hapel  at  Dartmouth  in  line  with  the  eastern  side  of  George  Island 
leads  eastward,  and  Chebucto  Head  just  open  east  of  Sandwich  Point 
leads  w«*stward  of  Middle  Ground. 

Pleasant  Shoal,  which  extends  nearly  ^  mile  SE.  from  Pleasant 
Point,  dries  in  some  parts,  and  is  covered  by  only  a  few  feet  of  water 
nearly  out  to  its  edge.  It  is  much  in  the  way  of  vessels,  as  it  diminishes 
the  breadth  of  the  navigable  channel  between  it  and  Ives  Point  to  i 
mile.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  close  to  its  eastern  extremity  in  7^  fath- 
oms, with  Chebucto  Head  just  open  east  of  Sandwich  Point;  and  the 


118 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


north  point  of  Macnab  Island  just  open  north  of  the  bank  of  Ives  Point, 
and  seen  over  its  beach. 

Northwest  Arm.— The  entrance  of  the  Northwest  Arm  is  between 
the  western  side  of  Pleasant  Shoal  and  the  shoals  in  Purcell  Cove.  It 
carries  a  depth  of  8  fathoms ;  and  large  vessels  may  ascend  it  through 
a  narrow  channel  to  within  J  mile  of  its  head,  or  nearly  to  Melville 
Island,  a  distance  of  2^  miles. 

Reed  Rock  lies  1,200  yards  northward  of  the  buoy  on  Pleasant 
Shoal,  on  the  same  side  of  the  channel,  and  400  yards  off  shore.  It  is 
small  in  extent,  with  5  feet  water,  and  its  position  is  marked  by  a  black 
buoy,  moored  in  8  fathoms,  about  100  yards  SE.  of  the  danger.  Che- 
bucto  Head  just  open  of  Sandwich  Point  leads  400  yards  eastward  of 
the  rock. 

Belleisle  Spit  lies  §  mile  farther  in,  and  extends  i  mile  from  the 
shore  to  a  black  buoy  iu  5  fathoms,  from  which  the  SB.  point  of  George 
Island  bears  N.  46°  E.  J  mile. 

Leopard  Spit— About  i  mile  farther  in  is  the  Leopard  Black  Buoy, 
which,  with  Belleisle  Buoy,  marks  the  western  side  of  the  clear  deep 
channel  between  them  and  George  Island,  which  is  250  yards  wide  be- 
tween the  5fathom  lines. 

Dartmouth  Spit.— A  red  buoy  is  moored  in  8  fathoms  off  Dart- 
mouth Spit,  with  the  Roman  Catholic  church  bearing  N.  39°  E.,  Black 
Rock  Point  N.  63^  W.,  and  the  eastern  tangent  of  George  Island  S.  30° 
E.  There  is  also  a  detached  rock  with  3f  fathoms  lying  outside  the 
5-fathom  line,  and  bearing  S.  19°  W.  300  yards  from  the  Ferry  wharf. 
The  points  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Narrows  (above  the  town  of  Dart- 
mouth) iu  line,  and  bearing  N.  61°  W.,  lead  westward  of  this  rock. 

Bedford  Basin.— A  railway  viaduct,  in  which  is  an  opening  for  the 
passage  of  vessels,  has  been  erected  across  the  Narrows.  The  openings 
on  either  side  of  a  swinging  portion,  which  is  on  the  northern  side  of 
the  Narrows,  are  each  80  feet  wide,  the  depth  in  the  southern  channel 
40  feet,  and  in  the  northern  27  feet. 

Immediately  after  passing  Wellesley  Rock  with  13  feet  water,  the 
channel  is  contracted  by  islets  and  rocks  on  either  side,  to  the  breadth 
of  300  yards ;  but  it  has  9  fathoms  in  it,  and  leads  to  a  secure  anchor- 
age off  the  entrance  of  Sackville  River,  in  7  fathoms  mud. 

Navy  Island  Anchorage.— On  the  eastern  side  of  Bedford  Basin^ 
IJ  miles  from  the  Narrows,  there  is  a  small  but  secure  anchorage  within 
Navy  Island.  The  entrance  is  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  and  the 
only  thing  in  the  way  is  an  old  wreck,  over  which  there  is  a  depth  of 
J  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Halifax  dockyard,  at 
7h,  49m.;  springs  rise  6  feet ;  neaps  5  feet.  The  rise  is  greatly  influenced 
by  the  winds,  southerly  winds  causing  high,  and  northerly  winds  low 
tides.  The  ordinary  rate  of  the  tidal  stream  does  not  exceed  half  a. 
knot. 


HALIFAX — DIRECTIONS. 


119 


I  between- 
It 

;  through 
Melville 

Pleasant 
re.  It  is 
)y  a  black 
cer.  Che- 
stward  of 

5  from  the 
of  George 

ick  Buoy, 
dear  deep 
}  wide  be- 
off  Dart> 
E.,  Black 
and  S.  30° 
itside  the 
rry  wharfs 
n  of  Dart- 
8  rook, 
ng  for  the 
» openings 
jrn  side  of 
■u  channel 

water,  the 
le  breadth 
re  anchor- 

brd  Basin, 
age  within 
d,  and  the 
a  deptb  of 

(ckyard,  at 
influenced 
winds  low 

eed  half  a. 


Directions. — The  coast  in  the  vicinity  of  Halifax  is  of  moderate 
height,  the  hills  near  the  shore  being  seldom  200  feet  ab(»ve  the  sea. 
To  the  eastward  of  the  harbor  as  far  as  Jedore,  almost  all  the  head- 
lands present  cliffs  of  reddish  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders  to  the  wasting 
action  of  the  waves;  whilst  to  the  westward,  as  far  as  Mars  Head, 
granite  rocks — nearly  white — predominate. 

The  bank  of  soundings  off  Sambro  Island,  terminating  in  a  point,  at 
the  depth  of  30  fathoms,  5  miles  south  of  the  Sambro  ledges,  offers  con- 
siderable assistance  to  vessels  approaching  Halifax  from  the  westward 
in  the  thick  fogs  which  so  frequently  prevail.  Prom  the  eastward 
the  approach  is  rendered  comparatively  easy  by  the  absenise  of  out- 
lying dangers  after  passing  Shut-in  Island,  and  by  the  soundings 
deepening  out  with  tolerable  regularity  to  30  fathoms,  at  distances 
varying  from  4  to  6  miles  from  the  shore;  but  when  within  two  miles 
of  Chebucto  and  White  Heads,  the  depth  of  30  fathoms  will  be  found 
within  i  mile  from  the  shore.  Attention  to  these  soundings,  combined 
with  the  explosive  signal  at  Sambro  Island  light  house  and  the  fog 
whistles  on  the  automatic  buoys  moored  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor 
and  off  Chebucto  Head,  may  enable  steam  vessels  to  enter  the  harbor 
notwithstanding  the  fog,  though  it  would  be  more  prudent — especially 
in  large  vessels — to  avoid  attempting  it  under  such  circumstances. 

From  the  Westward. — Pass  Sambro  Light-house  at  the  distance  of 
3  or  4  miles,  and  when  Sandwich  Point  is  seen  open  east  of  Chebucto 
Head,  bearing  N.  13°  W.  (the  clearing  mark  for  the  eastern  side  of 
Sambro  Ledges),  steer  N.  10°  W.  or  north  according  to  the  wind,  until 
the  citadel  flagstaff"  is  seen  open  east  of  Sandwich  Point,  bearing  N. 
24°  W.,  which  will  lead  between  Litchtield  and  Neverfail  shoals,  and 
to  Mars  Bock  Buoy,  which  leave  to  the  westward. 

Having  passed  Sandwich  Point,  steer  towards  George  Island,  keeping 
Chebucto  Head  just  in  sight  east  of  Sandwicli  Point,  until  tiie  vessel 
has  passed  close  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground ;  then  open  ont  the 
head  more  to  the  eastward,  so  as  to  leave  the  Pleasant  Shoal  and  Reed 
Bock  buoys  to  tlie  westward. 

If  passing  inside  George  Island,  the  Belleisleand  Leopard  buoys  must 
be  left  to  the  westward,  and  York  Bedoubt  should  be  kept  open  of  the 
wharves,  in  order  to  avoid  a  shoal  spit,  with  14  feet  water,  about  |  mile 
to  the  northward  of  Leopard  Buoy.  Having  passed  the  spit,  anchorage 
may  be  selected  where  most  convenient,  either  off  the  wharves  of  the 
city  or  further  np  off  the  dockyard,  where  the  commissioners'  buoy  will 
serve  to  point  out  the  Dockyard  Shoal. 

By  Night. — Shape  a  course  so  as  to  pass  not  loss  than  3  miles  to  the 
southward  of  Sambro  Island  light.  To  insure  doing  so,  keep  in  not 
less  than  30  fathoms  water,  until  the  above  light  bears  N.  21°  W. 

Having  crossed  the  narrow  bank  which  extends  in  a  southerly  direc- 
tion from  Sambro  Island  into  deeper  water,  haul  up  to  the  northward 
until  Sherbrook  Tower  light  is  seen  open  east  of  Chebucto  Head,  which 


120 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


bearing  N.  10°  W.,  when  steer  for  it,  or  so  as  to  pass  within  a  mile  of 
Oliebucto  Head,  which  is  steep  close  to.  After  having  passed  Ohebucto 
Head,  continue  to  steer  for  the  light,  bearing  between  N.  21°  W.  and 
N.  10°  W. 

Having  passed  Ives  Knoll  the  vessel  may  proceed  in  on  either  side  of 
George  Island,  or  may  anchor  where  convenient  until  daylight,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances.  The  light  on  Maugher  Beach  disappearing  be- 
hind Ives  Point  will  show  the  distance  from  George  Island,  when  pro- 
ceeding to  the  eastward  of  that  island,  through  the  wider — and  conse- 
quently preferable — channel  during  a  dark  night. 

Between  Rock  Head  and  Thmmcap  Shoals,— If  a  NE.  wind, 
or  other  circumstances,  should  vender  the  passage  between  the  Rock 
Head  and  Thrumcap  shoals  preferable,  proceed  as  follows: 

Having  passed  Devil  Island,  keep  Graham  Head  open  south  of  Devil 
Island  the  whole  breadth  of  the  island,  which  mark  will  lead  to  the 
southward  of  the  Thrumcap  Shoal  and  red  buoy,  and  when  Georgp 
Island  is  seen  open  west  of  Sherbrook  Tower,  bearing  N.  24°  W.,  steer 
in  on  this  course,  until  abreast  the  Thrumcap  buoy,  when  proceed  as 
before  directed. 

By  Night. — Having  made  Sambro  Island  light,  and  passed  Shut-in 
Island,  steer  to  pass  not  less  than  ^  mile  or  more  than  one  mile  south- 
ward of  the  lights  on  Devil  Island,  steering  S.  64°  W.  until  the  light  on 
Maugher  Beach  bears  N.  21°  W.,  when  proceed  as  before  directed. 

From  the  Eastward. — Having  passed  Devil  Island,  steer  for  Che- 
bucto  Head,  and  keep  Sambro  Island  open  of  White  Head,  bearing  S. 
29°  W.,  to  pass  southward  of  Rock  Head  aid  Portuguese  Shoals ;  and 
when  George  Island  is  seen  open  west  of  Sherbrook  Tower,  bearing  N. 
24°  W.,  steer  in  on  the  latter  course,  passing  westward  of  the  Portu- 
guese Shoal  and  buoy,  and  between  Never  'ail  and  Thrumcap  shoals. 
Alter  passing  the  red  buoy  marking  the  latter  danger,  steer  over  for 
Sandwich  Point,  until  the  Roman  Oatholic  chapel,  which  is  the  western- 
most of  three  chapels  at  Dartmouth,  is  in  line  with  the  east  point  of 
George  Island,  bearing  N.  19°  W. ;  these  marks  will  lead  clear  of  all 
dangers  up  to  George  Island,  which  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  and 
proceed  as  before  directed. 

By  Night — Apprmching  from  the  eastward  by  night,  and  being  to 
the  westward  of  Jedore  Ledges,  steer  along  the  land  in  a  depth  of  not 
less  than  30  fathoms,  until  Sambro  Island  light  is  seen  ;  then,  if  it  be 
intended  to  pass  southward  of  the  Rock  Head  and  Portuguese  Shoals, 
steer  for  Cliebucto  Head  light  (remembering  that  to  clear  the  Rock 
Head  the  light  ou  Sambro  Island  must  be  kept  wide  open  south  of 
White  Head,  bearing  S.  29°  W.,  and  the  lights  on  Devi!  Island  should 
not  bear  eastward  of  N.  12°  E.)  until  the  light  on  Mr.i|t,her  beach  bears 
N.  21°  W.,  when  it  should  be  steered  for  on  that  bearing  (this  course 
'  leads  close  to  the  inner  automatic  buoy,  which  may  be  passe<l  on  either 
Bide)  and  when  Devil  Island  lights  are  in  line  bearing  N.  60°  E.,  steer 


CAUTION SHUT-IN   ISLAND. 


121 


>  mile  of 
3bebucto 
'  W.  aud 

Br  side  of 
t,  accord- 
Spring  be- 
ben  pro- 
id  conse- 

I E.  wind, 
be  Bocic 

of  Devil 
,d  to  tbe 
1  George 
W.,  steer 
•oceed  as 

I  Shut-in 
lie  Houtb- 
I  light  ou 
cted. 
r  for  Cbe- 
eariiig  S. 
)als;  and 
earing  N. 
be  Porta- 
ip  shoals, 
r  over  for 
I  western- 
.  point  of 
ear  of  all 
side,  and 

being  to 
>th  of  not 
n,  if  it  be 
«e  Shoals, 
the  Rock 
y  south  of 
id  should 
sach  bears 
lis  course 

on  either 
'  E.,  steer 


to  the  westward  until  George  Island  lights  bear  N.  31o  W.,  which  will 
lead  clear  of  tbe  dangers  off  Maugber  Beach ;  close  to  the  east  side  of 
Middle  Ground ;  and  about  mid-channel  between  fteed  Rock  aud  Ives 
Knoll  buoy,  aud  proceed  as  before  directed. 

Caution.— Duriug  a  dark  night  or  thick  fog  do  not  approach  the 
Sambro  Ledges  within  the  SOfatbom  line,  as  a  depth  of  40  fathoms  will 
be  found  J  mile  eastward,  and  one  mile  southward  of  these  dangers. 
For  tbe  remainder  of  the  coast  it  would  not  be  advisable  to  approach 
within  tbe  40-fatboin  line,  but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  this  depth 
may  be  found  within  tbe  distance  of  3  miles  of  some  of  tbe  most  tbr- 
midable  dangers  between  Cape  Canso  and  Halifax ;  as,  for  instance, 
the  Jedore  Ledges. 

Devil  Island,  composed  of  clay  slate,  is  15  feet  high,  ^  mile  in  length, 
and  lies  the  same  distance  from  Hartland  Point,  the  eastern  point  of 
the  main  laud  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  A  reef  connects  this  island 
witb  the  sbore,  and  shallow  water  extends  from  it  t^  mile  seaward. 

Pilots  are  stationed  on  Devil  Island. 

Cole  Harbor  has  a  dangerooe  bar  of  sand,  witb  only  3  feet  at  low 
water,  which  is  covered  with  breakers  whenever  any  sea  is  running. 
It  is  only  during  flue  weather  and  with  a  smooth  sea  that  boats  can 
safely  cross  it  to  tbe  entrance,  which  is  barely  40  fathoms  wide  between 
points  of  shingle  and  sand.  In  this  narrow  entrance  the  depth  is  3 
fatboras,  and  tbe  rate  of  the  tide  stream  from  one  to  2  knots,  but  im- 
mediately within  it  the  depth  diminishes  to  4  or  5  feet,  and  narrow 
channels— between  mud  flats — extend  2  miles  inland. 

Egg  Islet  is  low  aud  narrow  and  connected  with  tbe  shore  by  a 
reef  and  shingle  beach;  shoal  water  extends  600  yards  southward  of 
tbe  islet,  where  it  terminates  in  5  fathoms  nearly  one  mile  from  tbe  . 
main  sbore. 

Lawrenceton  Lake.— The  entrance  of  this  lake— admitting  boats 
only  in  fine  weatber— is  J  mile  to  tbe  eastward  of  Egg  Islet,  and  on  tbe 
west  side  of  Lawrenceton  Head.  This  latter  is  a  peninsula  92  feet 
high,  composed  of  drift  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders,  resting  on  clay  slate, 
and  united  to  the  shore  by  long  beaches  of  stones  or  shingle,  tbe  red 
cliffs  of  which  form  tbe  distinguishing  feature  of  this  part  of  tbe  coast. 

Porter  Lake.— The  entrance  to  this  lake  is  on  the  western  side  of 
Grabam  Head,  a  peninsula  with  red  cliffs  60  feet  high.  The  lake  ex- 
tends 7  miles  to  the  northward,  and  has  in  some  parts  depths  of  4  and 
5  fathoms,  bnt  only  one  foot  at  low  water  in  its  narrow  entrance. 

Shut-in  Shoals.— Are  composed  of  rock,  with  16  feet  least  water, 
and  are  extremely  dangerous.  The  red  cliffs  of  Seller  Head  seen  open 
east  of  tbe  eastern  entrance  point  of  Tbree  Fathoms  Harbor,  bearing 
N.  13°  E.,  leads  SE.,  and  the  light-houses  on  Devil  Island,  bearing  S. 
86°  W.,  leads  southward  of  Shut-in  Shoals. 

Shut-in  Island,  of  low  clay-slate  rock,  is  distant  J  mile  from  Grabam 
Head,  but  united  to  it  by  a  reef  aud  beach  of  shingle.  It  forms  the 
western  side  of  tbe  entrance  to  Three  Fatboms  Harbor. 


122 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


Three  Fathoms  Harbor  is  quite  open  to  the  southward  and  affords 
shelter  only  to  small  vessels  which  can  run  into  the  narrow  channel  east 
of  Ball  Islet  one  mile  within  the  entrance.  The  depth  is  there  3  fathoms, 
mud ;  but  to  reach  it  the  low- water  depth  of  8  feet  (with  a  ^  feet  rise) 
must  be  passed  over. 

Pat  Shoal  is  a  small  rocky  patch,  with  only  4J  fathoms  water,  bear- 
ing N.  01°  B.  nearly  3  miles  from  Shut-in  Island  and  S.  11°  B.  IJ  miles 
from  Story  Head. 

Codray  and  Round  Shoals  lie  nearer  in  shore  and  are  therefore 
less  in  the  way  of  vessels ;  the  least  water  on  them  is  4^  fathoms. 

Chissetcook  Inlet  is  useless  to  shippiuR,  having  only  3  feet  at  low 
water  on  the  bar  of  the  western  and  principal  channel,  which  commences 
i  mile  within  Cape  Bntry  and  continues  to  the  head  of  the  inlet.  Both 
channels  are  very  narrow,  and  wind  through  flats  of  sand,  mud,  and 
weeds  which  dry  at  low  water. 

Perpisawick  Head  from  seaward  appears  like  an  island  of  pyram- 
idal form,  but  from  a  distance  of  3  or  4  miles  it  has  the  appearance  of 
a  brickwork  fortification.  • 

Perpisawick  Inlet  is  J  mile  wide  at  the  entrance,  which  is  on  the 
west  side  of  Perpisawick  Head.  After  crossing  the  bar  of  sand,  about 
a  mile  within  the  entrance  (on  which  there  are  only  6  feet  at  low  water)» 
there  commences  a  narrow  channel,  between  mud  flats  uncovered  at  low 
water,  which  is  navigable  to  the  head  of  the  inlet,  a  direct  distance  of 
6  miles,  for  any  vessel  that  can  cross  the  Ixir. 

Perpisawick  Shoal,  of  rock,  with  5  fathoms  water  on  it,  bears  N. 
77°  B.  5^  miles  from  Shut  in  Island  and  8.  13°  E.  iij  miles  from  Per- 
pisawick Head. 

Musquidoboit  Shoal  is  composed  of  rook  and  is  I,Ji»0  yards  long. 
The  least  water  on  it,  3  fathoms,  is  nearly  in  its  center. 

Musquidoboit  Inlet  contains  many  islands,  and  is  navigable  for 
small  vessels  and  boats  a  distance  of  7  miles,  where  it  receives  the 
waters  of  the  Musquidoboit  River.  Over  the  bar,  at  the  entrance  of  the 
principal  channel,  which  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  inlet,  and  1| 
miles  NW.  from  Jedore  Head,  a  depth  of  10  feet  can  be  carried  at  low 
water ;  but  Dunbrock  Rock,  with  only  3  feet  water  on  it,  lies  directly 
in  the  way,  and  renders  the  entrance  both  difficult  and  dangerous. 

Within  the  bar,  in  a  channel  250  yards  wide,  there  is  a  depth  of  4 
fathoms  between  flats  of  sand,  mud,  and  weeds,  which  uncover  at  low 
water.  At  about  4  miles  within  the  bar  the  channel  becomes  very  nar- 
row, antl  only  7  or  8  feet  deep,  but  small  vessels  and  boats  c-in  ascend 
with  the  tide  to  the  head  of  the  inlet. 

The  most  favorable  time  for  a  stranger  to  enter  this  inlet  is  at  low 
water,  when  the  mud  flats  on  either  side  of  the  channel  become  visible. 
Harbor  Islet  is  small  and  stony,  and  from  it  a  rocky  shoal,  on  which 
are  the  Musquidoboit  Ledges,  extends'  upwards  of  a  mile  to  the  south- 
ward, and  to  within  i  mile  of  the  Musquidoboit  Shoal. 


lemiii^^mit'^o^tpf^^ 


JEDOBE    HARBOR. 


123 


id  affords 

mnel  east 

t  fathoms, 

feet  riae> 

iter,  bear- 
!.  1^  miles 

therefore 
)m8. 

jet  at  low 

)mmeiices 

let.    Both 

mud,  and 

of  pyram- 
jarance  of 

is  ou  the 
ind,  aboat 
ow  water), 
ired  at  low 
Ustauce  of 

t,  bears  K. 
from  Per- 

ards  loug. 

I'igable  for 
ceires  the 
aiice  of  the 
et,  and  1^ 
ied  at  low 
es  directly 
^erous. 
ileptli  of  i 
>ver  at  low 
)s  very  uar- 
Ciin  asceud 

t  is  at  low 
)me  visible, 
il,  ou  which 
}  the  south- 


Tides.— At  the  entrance  of  Gbissetcook,  Perpisawick,  and  Musqui- 
doboit  Inlets  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  7h.  30m. ;  springs  rise 
4J  feet  and  neaps  3  feet.  The  ordinary  rate  of  tidal  streams  In  the  en- 
trance is  from  2  to  3  knots. 

Jedore  Harbor  is  the  first  ship  harbor  eastward  of  Hiilifax.  Its 
entrance  is  850  yards  wide  from  West  Head  to  the  opposite  shore ;  but 
Thorn  Shoal,  with  only  9  feet  water  on  it,  stretches  out  from  the  western 
shore  just  outside  and  across  the  entrance.  The  channel  between  this 
shoal  and  East  Head  is  650  yards  wide  between  the  3-fathom  lines,  and 
carries  a  depth  of  4  fathoms  at  low  water  over  what  may  be  termed  the 
bar. 

'  )n  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbor  and  immediately  within  the  entrance 
is  Bar  P<^nt,  composed  of  shingle  aud  inclosing  a  pond  ;  and  from  it 
Bar  Shoal,  a  continuation  of  the  shingle  of  Bar  Islet,  extends  more  than 
half  way  across  to  the  western  shore,  diminishing  the  breadth  of  the 
channel  to  200  yards,  but  forming  no  bar,  the  depth  there  being  6J 
fathoms.  The  sandy  beach  of  Marsh  Point  will  be  seen  extending  from 
the  western  shore  at  IJ  miles  within  the  entrance.  The  anchorage  is 
secure  within  this  beach  in  7  fathoms,  over  mud,  and  iu  a  channel  300 
yards  wide ;  but  outside  the  bottom  is  of  sand,  and  a  considerable  swell 
rolls  in  with  strong  winds  from  the  southward ;  nevertheless,  the  coast- 
ing schooners  anchor  there  in  fine  summer  weather. 

The  channel,  between  flats  of  mud,  weeds,  and  mussel  beds,  which 
dry  at  low  water,  continues  clear  and  sufficiently  deep  for  tolerably 
large  vessels  to  Bown  Islands,  off  English  Point,  which  separates  the 
eastern  aud  western  arms  of  the  harbor,  4  miles  within  the  entrance. 
Anchorage  can  be  obtained  within  or  to  the  northwest  of  these  small 
islands  ;  but  the  entrances  to  the  arms  are  nearly  closed  by  shoals  which 
leave  only  very  narrow  and  intricate  channels  through  which  there  are 
not  more  than  14  or  15  feet  at  low  water. 

The  arms  are  navigable,  for  any  vessel  that  can  enter  tliem,  nearly 
to  their  heads,  including  Salmon  Inlet  to  the  rapids  at  the  entrance  of 
Salmon  River  which  is  2  miles  above  the  long  wooden  bridge  which 
crosses  the  entrance  of  the  inlet  li  miles  up  the  eastern  arm. 

Supplies.— The  scattered  population  along  the  shores  of  Jedore  Har- 
bor could  afford  only  a  very  limited  supply  of  fresh  provisions  to  ship- 
ping. Water  may  be  obtained  from  a  small  stream  near  Blakeley  Cove, 
on  the  western  shore,  3^  miles  within  the  entrance. 

Jedore  Head  attains  an  elevation  of  200  feet,  on  the  western  side  of 
the  head  are  cliffs  of  red  clay  70  feet  high,  and  on  its  SE.  side  stands 
Jedore  cliffs,  also  of  red  clay,  and  forming  an  excellent  landmark  which 
attains  an  elevation  of  135  feet. 

Dangers  oflF  the  entrance.— To  render  Jedore  Harbor,  with  its  nar- 
row and  crooked  channel,  easy  of  access,  buoys  would  be  required  ou 
Thorn  aud  Bar  Shoals;  meanwhile,  the  following  description  of  the 


124 


NOVA   SCOTIA — S.    E.    COAST. 


■dangers  aad  directions  for  their  avoidance  will  enable  the  intelligent 
seaman  to  use  it  as  a  harbor  of  refuge  in  case  of  necessity. 

Jedore  Rock  of  clay-slate  and  50  feet  high,  has  a  rocky  ledge  ex- 
tending 300  yards  from  its  western  end.  It  bears  from  Jedore  Head 
S.  71°  B  1^  miles,  the  passage  between  being  clear,  with  the  exception 
of  some  patches  of  5  and  6  fathoms,  on  which,  however,  the  sea  very 
rarely  breaks. 

Arnold  Rock  dries  at  low  water,  and  can  almost  always  be  seen ; 
to  pass  westward  of  it,  as  well  as  Arnold  Shoal,  which  lies  J  mile 
farther  to  the  southward,  with  6  fathoms  on  it,  the  harbor's  mouth 
must  be  kept  open  westward  of  Jedore  Rock. 

Old  Man  is  a  small  rock  12  feet  high,  and  lies  with  the  center  of 
Jedore  Rock  in  line  with  Jedore  Head.  It  is  steep-to  on  the  eastern 
side,  but  a  small  sunken  rock,  with  only  4  feet  water,  lies  200  yards 
from  it  S.  12°  VV. ;  the  passage  is  clear  between  it  and  Arnold  and 
Jedore  Rocks.  There  is  also  a  clear  passage  between  Old  Man  and 
Mehanny  Rocks,  some  of  which  are  dry  at  low  water,  and  bear  from 
Old  Man  N.  35°  E.  jj  mile;  and  beyond  them  in  the  same  direction  Gull 
Rock,  together  with  Barren  and  Roger  Islands,  will  be  seen. 

Macdonald  Rock,  with  12  feet  water,  bears  S.  69o  W.  IJ  miles 
from  the  south  point  of  Long  Island. 

Inner  Pollock  is  i  a  mile  in  extent  north  and  south,  having  7 
fathoms  on  its  south  end,  and  the  least  water,  5^  fathoms,  near  its 
northern  extremity ;  from  it  Jedore  Rock  (in  line  with  the  eastern  ex- 
tremity of  Jedore  Cliff)  bears  N.  32''  W.  3  miles,  and  Egg  Island  N. 
58*  E.  5)(  miles. 

Outer  Pollock  has  6  fathoms  on  it,  and  lies  nearly  a  mile  farther  oflF 
on  the  same  line  of  bearing  from  Jedore  Rock,  and  with  Egg  Island 
bearing  N.  fU)°  B.  5^  miles. 

East  Pollock  is  a  sin*ll  pitch  of  7  fathoms,  with  deep  water  all 
around.  Jedore  Olili  seen  open  westward  of  Jedore  Rock,  leads  west- 
ward of  the  Pollocks. 

Hopkin  Rock  has  11  feet  water,  and  from  it  Old  Man  (with  the 
breakers  on  Arnold  Rock  seen  just  open  to  the  southward  of  it)  bears 
S.  63°  W.  I'll  miles.  Both  these  rocks  are  very  small,  with  deep  water 
all  around  them,  and  break  only  in  heavy  weather. 

Southwest  Ledges  are  three  rocky  patches,  which  dry  at  low  water, 
and  cover  a  space  600  yards  long  in  a  S.  30°  W.  direction.  From  the 
northeasternmost  ledge  the  south  point  of  Long  Island  bears  N.  7°  E. 
IJ^  miles,  and  the  passage  is  clear  between  them.  The  south westernmodf 
ledge  is  covered  only  during  spring  tides,  and  can  therefore  almost 
always  be  seen. 

Bull  Rock,  bearing  S.  63°  E.  1,250  yards  from  the  last-named  dan- 
ger, is  one  of  the  most  dangerous  of  the  ledges,  having  only  a  depth  of 
5  feet  over  it  at  low  water ;  during  high  tides  it  is  marked  by  break- 
ers, but  only  when  a  heavy  sea  is  running.    From  it  the  south  end  of 


l«i,lSi|i-i1»1*liir 


JEDORE   HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 


125> 


atelligent 

ledge  ex- 
lore  Head 
exception 
>  sea  very 

be  seen ; 
ies  f  mile 
it's   mouth 

!  center  of 
le  eastern 
200  yards 
mold  and 
Man  and 
bear  from 
Btion  Gull 

,  1^  miles 

having  7 
8,  near  its 
eastern  ex- 
Island  y. 

farther  oflF 
Bgg  Island 

»  water  all 
leads  west- 

n  (with  the 
of  it)  bears 
deep  water 

D  low  water, 
From  the 
irs  N.  7°  E. 
ester  nmoof 
fore  almost 

lamed  dan- 
r  a  depth  of 
i  by  break - 
outh  end  of 


Long  Island  bears  N.  7°  W.  If  miles,  and  Bgg  Island  N.  47°  B.  2 
miles. 

Boll  Shoal,  with 3  fathoms  water,  bears  S.  21°  E.  nearly  §  mile  from 
thesouthwesternmostoftheSouthwest  Ledges.  From  it  Old  Man,  Jedore 
Book,  and  Jedore  Head  are  nearly  in  li  ne.  bearing  N.  70°  W.  It  rarely 
breaks,  and  is  therefore  extremely  dangerous. 

Brig  Rock  has  only  3  feet  at  low  water,  when  its  position  is  usually 
marked  by  a  breaker.  Egg  Island  bears  from  it  N.  55°  E.  3f  miles  j 
Old  Man  Rock,  on  with  the  center  of  Jedore  Cliff,  bears  N.  52°  W. 
about  3  miles. 

Bell  Buoy. — A  bell  baoy,  surmounted  by  a  staff  and  cage,  and  col- 
ored red,  is  moored  500  yards  southward  of  Brig  Rock. 

Brig  Shoal,  with  5  fathoms  on  it,  bears  8.  55°  E.  800  yards  from  the 
Brig  Rock;  from  it  Bull  Shoal,  Bull  Rock,  and  the  south  side  of  Egg 
Island  are  nearly  in  line,  bearing  N.  49°  E.  This  shoal  is  dangerous 
after  very  heavy  gales,  when  it  is  said  to  break  at  irregular  intervals. 

Mark. — The  eastern  extremity  of  Jedore  Cliff  in  line  with  Old  Man 
Rock,  bearing  about  N.  46°  W.  leads  800  yards  westward  of  Brig  Rock 
and  Shoal  and  between  them  and  the  East  Pollock. 

Directions. — Approaching  the  anchorage  in  Jedore  Harbor  from  the 
westward,  pass  midway,  or  nearly  so,  between  Jedore  Head  and  Jedore 
Rock,  so  as  to  keep  outside  Thorn  Shoal,  until  the  steep  bank  (not  the 
sand  beach)  of  Marsh  Point  touches  the  shingle  beach  of  Bar  Point, 
bearing  N.  4°  W.  Steer  with  the  above  marks  on,  until  Roger  Island 
touches  oast  head,  bearing  8.  77°  E. ;  then  steer  N.  32°  W.  to  clear  Bar 
Shoal. 

When  from  200  to  300  yards  from  the  shingle  beach  on  the  western 
shore  of  the  harbor,  steer  along  the  shore  to  the  northward  and  east- 
ward, until  abreast  the  sand  beach  of  Marsh  Point,  which  must  be 
rounded  to  the  northward  at  the  distance  of  200  yards  and  anchor  be- 
tween it  and  Pea  Point  on  the  opposite  shore,  in  about  7  fathoms,  over 
muddy  bottom.  At  or  near  low  water,  when  a  part  of  the  Bar  Shoal  is 
shown  by  breakers,  and  the  steep  mud  flats  are  visible  on  either  side  of 
the  channel,  is  the  most  favorable  time  for  entering  this  harbor. 

In  approaching  the  harbor  from  the  southward,  the  harbor's  mouth 
should  be  seen  br  zen  Old  Man  and  Jedore  Rocks,  or  the  whole  of 
Jedr  re  Cliff  should  be  open  westward  of  Jedore  Rock,  to  pass  westward 
of  Pollocks,  on  which,  however,  no  less  than  5J  fathoms  could  be  found. 
Leaving  Arnold  and  Jedore  Rocks  to  the  westward,  pass  midway  be- 
tween them  and  Old  Man  Rock,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  sunken  rock 
off  the  latter;  or,  if  preferred,  pass  eastward  of  Old  Man  Rock,  which, 
is  steep-to  on  that  side,  and  when  approaching  the  harbor's  mouth  pro- 
ceed as  before  directed. 

Caution. — Vessels  proceeding  along  this  part  of  the  coast  should  pass 
outside  all  the  Jedore  Ledges,  and  at  night,  or  during  foggy  weather,, 
should  not  approach  within  the  depth  of  40  fathoms,  for  the  sound- 
ings are  deep  and  very  irregular  near  them  all. 


k*=j<a^bi-9^~fV»^ 


126 


NOVA  SCOTIA — 8.  E.  COAST. 


Tides.— At  Arnold  Cove,  2^  miles  withiu  the  eatranoe  of  Jedore  Har- 
bor, the  8tream8  change  almost  immediately  after  high  and  Ic  .v  water, 
anil  do  not  exceed  the  rate  of  2  knots.  In  the  entrance  of  the  harbor 
the  times  will  be  a  few  minutes  earlier,  the  rise  2  feet  less,  and  the 
ordinary  rate  of  the  streams  one  knot.  The  in-draft  of  the  flood  tide  is 
felt  several  miles  oflf  this  harbor,  and  off  the  inlets  westward  of  it. 

Clam  Bay.— Immediately  to  the  eastward  of  Jedore  Harbor  are  Ro- 
ger and  Barren  Islands.  Outside  these  islands  are  Gull  and  Mehanny 
Rocks,  and  to  the  eastward  of  them  Middle  Rock,  Spritsail,  Sister, 
Korth  Sister,  and  Siteman  Rocks,  Duck  Island,  with  its  ledges,  rocks, 
andwhoals;  and  the  Sugar  Loaf  and  Goose  Island,  with  its  ledges. 
These  all  lie  across  Clam  Bay,  which  affords  no  safe  anchorage,  and  as 
they  are  out  of  the  way  of  shipping,  the  seamau  is  referr«d  to  the  chart 
for  their  relative  positions.  Long  Island,  f  mile  in  length,  50  feet  high, 
and  bearing  from  the  east  head  of  Jedore  Harbor  S.  77°  E.  4  miles, 
may  be  easily  distinguished. 

Barse  Rock  and  Hurley  Shoal  on  which  the  sea  breaks  during 
heavy  gales  are  small  rocky  patches  with  4  fathoms  on  them  and 
deep  water  all  round.  These  shoals  bear  from  Bald  Rock,  nearly  S.  IQo 
E.  2i  miles,  and  S.  32°  E.  24  miles  respectively ;  and  lie  directly  in  the 
way  of  vessels  proceeding  along  the  coast. 

Flint  Ledge,  about  10  feet  above  high  water  level,  lies  N.  10°  W.  J 
mile  from  Egg  Island,  the  channel  between  being  clear,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  Passage  Rock,  which,  however,  has  4J  fathoms  on  it. 

Between  Flint  Ledge  and  the  south  point  of  Long  Island,  are  Tom- 
fool Shoals,  with  3  fathoms  water  over  them ;  and  within  these  areStod- 
dart  and  Goose  Ledges,  lying  off  the  entrances  of  01am  and  Little  Har- 
bors, which  admit  only  small  craft  and  boats. 

Egg  Island  is  of  rock,  40  feet  high,  and  is  the  outermost  of  the 
numerous  islands  oft"  this  part  of  the  coast.  On  a  rock  near  Egg  Island 
stands  a  conspicuous  red  building. 

Pyche  and  O-rixzle  Rocks.- Outside  Egg  Island,  at  the  distance 
of  4  mile  to  the  southward,  are  the  Transport  Ledges,  always  above 
water,  as  well  as  the  more  dangerous  Pyche  Bock  with  only  3  fathoms 
water ;  it  lies  with  Jedore  Bock  and  Egg  Island  in  line  bearing  S.  89° 
W.,  and  is  f  mile  from  the  latter  island.  The  Grizzle  Rock,  having  4 
fathoms  on  it,  lies  with  the  northeast  points  of  Egg  and  Long  Islands, 
in  line  bearing  N.  55°  W.,  and  is  distant  from  the  former  island  a  little 
more  than  ^  mile. 

Bald  Rock,  about  8  feet  above  high  water,  is  of  small  extent,  and 
Egg  Island  bears  from  it  S.  65°  W.,  2J  miles.  It  is  bold  on  the  north 
and  south  sides,  but  there  is  a  sunken  rock,  with  only  6  feet  water, 
bearing  from  it  S.  58°  W.  ^  mile. 

Owl  Head  Bay  has  a  remarkable  round  mound  and  cliff  at  its  extrem- 
ity, and  is  the  most  prominent  point  on  the  western  shore  of  the  bay, 
14  miles  within  the  entrance.    The  anchorage  has  the  advantage  of 


i 


SHIP   HARBOR. 


127 


edore  Har- 
Ic  .V  water, 
the  harbor 
18,  ami  the 
lood  tide  is 
of  it. 

bor  are  Ro- 
i  Mehanny 
lail,  Sister, 
Iges,  rocks, 
its  ledges, 
ige,  and  as 

0  the  chart 
)  feet  high, 
B.  4  miles, 

iiks  during 

them   aud 

early  S.  10° 

jctly  in  the 

r.  10°  W.  J 

1  the  excep- 

1,  are  Tom- 
se  are  Stod- 
Little  Har- 

Qost  of  the 
Egg  Island 

he  distance 
yays  above 
y  3  fathoms 
iring  S.  89° 
Ic,  having  4 
mg  Islands, 
land  a  little 

extent,  and 

ti  the  north 

feet  water, 

t  its  extrem- 
of  the  bay, 
Ivantage  of 


being  open  and  free  from  ice  all  the  winter,  and  the  best  berth  for  a 
vessel  of  moderate  draft  of  water  is  with  the  east  extreme  of  Shag 
Island  touching  Cable  P  >'  ^ ;  and  Owl  Head  S.  31°  E.  This  will  place 
a  vessel  in  L'4  feet  low  water  springs,  with  good  holding  ground  of 
«andy  mud. 

Directions.— The  greatest  danger  to  be  avoided  in  entering  this  bay 
is  Owl  Rock,  which  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  with  only  9 
feet  water,  and  bears  from  the  south  point  of  Friar  Island  N.  71°  W.  | 
mile.  The  peninsula  of  Wisdom  Point  (at  the  head  of  the  bay)  appar- 
ently touching  Cable  Point,  bearing  N.  42°  W.,  leads  clear  to  the  west- 
ward of  It,  and  also  of  the  reef  which  extends  700  yards  SW.  from 
Friar  Island,  and  which  can  almost  always  be  seen. 

Supplies.— Wood  may  be  obtained  anywhere  round  the  bay,  and 
water,  fresh  provisions,  and  a  few  vegetables  from  the  settlement  at 
Palmer  Cove. 

False  Passage,  between  Nichol  and  Cable  Islands,  on  the  eastern 
side  of  the  bay,  is  only  fit  for  boats  or  small  craft,  4  feet  being  all  that 
can  be  carried  through  at  low  water. 

Ship  Harbor. —The  approaches  to  the  harbor  are  comparatively  bold 
and  steep,  and  lie  between  Charles  aud  Nichol  Islands,  of  gneiss,  and 
barren ;  they  are  amongst  the  largest  on  the  coast,  but  in  no  part  do 
they  exceed  an  elevation  of  100  feet  above  the  sea. 

The  space  between  Nichol  Island  on  the  western  side  and  the  main- 
land is  almost  completely  occupied  by  islands  and  shoals,  which  afford 
shelter  to  Day  Cove,  where  secure  anchorage  for  small  vessels  may  be 
obtained  in  less  than  4  fathoms,  in  which  position  they  will  be  out  of 
the  swell  that  rolls  in  after  heavy  southerly  gales. 

The  western  shore  of  Ship  Harbor  is  well  settled,  and  so  also  is  the 
eastern  shore  as  far  in  as  Salmon  Point,  for  the  hills  of  drift  sand  and 
clay  which  attain  an  elevation  of  more  than  200  feet,  though  abounding 
in  bowlders,  afford  a  sufficiency  of  hay  and  vegetables  fbr  the  support 
of  cattle  and  sheep. 

The  northeastern  shore  within  Newcombe  Brook  is  barren,  the  hills 
being  bare  and  the  extreme  height  240  feet.  Little  River  flows  into  the 
head  of  the  harbor  at  5  miles  from  the  entrance,  and  near  it,  on  the 
wer^-rn  side,  a  larger  and  rapid  stream  discharges  the  waters  of  Ship 
Harbor  Lake.  A  Roman  Catholic  chapel  stands  on  the  western  shore 
at  IJ  miles  within  the  entrance,  and  an  English  Episcopal  church  IJ 
miles  farther  in  on  the  same  side. 

Supplies. — The  best  watering  place  is  a  rapid  brook  on  the  eastern 
shore,  about  J  mile  within  Salmon  Point.  Supplies  of  fresh  provisions 
may  be  obtained. 

Dangers  on  Western  Side.— In  approaching  the  '  trbor  the  princi. 
pal  dangers  lie  outside  the  islands  off  its  entrance-  Friar  Island  and 
Friar  Ledges  lie  on  the  western  side,  and  off  them  Flat  Ledge,  always 
above  water,  from  which  West  Bull  Rock,  with  only  a  fathom  water  on 


fmmm 


128 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


it,  bearfl  S.  55<^  W.  \  mile,  ami  East  Bull  Rock,  with  4  fathoiuH  on  it^ 
N.  71<^  B.  Sm)  yanlH.  Egg  Island  lighthouse,  seen  over  Bald  Rock, 
beHfing  S.  ii'>^  W.,  leatls  nearly  ^  mile  to  the  southward  of  these  dan- 
gers. 

Tlieie  is  also  the  Middle  Ground,  with  4  fothonis  water,  bearing  from 
Flat  Ledge  N.  47°  E.  1,200  yards,  and  the  more  dangerous  NE.  shoal, 
with  2^  fathoms  water,  bearing  from  the  eastern  end  of  Friar  Ledge  N. 
Srp  E.  distant  900  yards,  and  from  Bear  Rock  8.  58°  W.  If  mile.  Far- 
ther in,  the  ro(;kH  and  shallow  water  ofl'  the  eastern  side  of  Nichol 
Island,  including  Pot  Rock  with  4  fathoms  on  it,  will  be  avoided  if  Wolf 
Point  (the  high  northeastern  extremity  of  Nichol  Island)  bo  not  brought 
to  bear  to  the  north  wanl  of  N.  47°  W. 

Oatlying  Dangers. — Little  Rock,  with  4  fathoms,  bearing  from  Flat 
Ledge  S.  43°  E.  about  2  miles ;  Broad  Breaker,  with  4  fathoms,  bearing 
from  Charles  Point  S.  34°  E.  1^  miles;  Silver  Shoal,  with  5  fathoms, 
lies  from  Charles  Point  S.  57°  E.  3'^  miles,  and  from  the  SE.  point  of 
Outer  Island  S.  22°  E.  2  j  miles.  On  all  the  above  shoals  the  sea  breaks 
occasionally  after  heavy  gales. 

Bull  Rock,  with  4  feet  water,  bears  from  Charles  Point  (the  south 
extremity  of  Charles  Island)  S.  63°  E.  1,200  yards,  and,  together  with 
numerous  other  rocks  above  and  under  water,  will  be  cleared  on  the 
south  side  by  keeping  Long  Point  (the  southern  extremity  of  Nichol 
Island)  open  south  of  Bear  Rock,  bearing  S.  75°  W.  The  mark  that 
leads  clear  to  the  westward  of  these  dangers,  including  the  ledges  far- 
ther in  off  the  Western  Islands,  is  Ship  Rock  seen  over  Bald  Island^ 
and  in  line  with  Tucker  Point  bearing  N.  38°  W. 

Bear  Rock,  which  is  small,  rises  4  feet  above  high  water,  and  is  quite 
bold  on  the  eastern  side ;  but  a  reef,  mostly  dry  at  low  water,  extends 
from  it  300  yards  to  the  westward.  It  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the 
entrance  between  the  islands,  with  a  clear  channel  on  either  side. 

From  the  Westward. — In  approaching  Ship  Harbor  from  the  west- 
ward. Ship  Rock  (which  gives  its  name  to  the  harbor)  may  be  easily 
recognized,  being  a  remarkable  cliff  of  clay  slate,  70  feet  high,  on  one  of 
the  islands  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  passage,  and  a  mile  within  Charles 
Island.  When  seen  from  a  distance  at  sea  the  cliff'  resembles  a  ship 
under  sail,  and,  together  with  the  western  extremities  of  Bald  Island 
and  Tucker  Point,  forms  the  leading  mark  for  passing  on  either  side  of 
Bear  Rock. 

Entering  the  harbor  with  the  wind  from  the  westward,  proceed  as 
follows:  To  clear  the  East  and  West  Bulls,  steer  ro  the  eastward  with 
Egg  Island  light-house  and  Bald  Rock  in  line,  or  pass  outside  Flat 
Ledge  (which  can  always  be  seen)  at  the  distance  of  a  third  of  a  mile  or 
more,  and  when  Ship  Rc-k  comea  in  line  with  the  western  point  of 
Bald  Island,  bearing  N*.  27°  W.,  steer  in  with  this  mark  on,  between  the 
NE.  shoal  and  the  reef  off'  Bear  Rock.  Having  passed  the  latter, 
steer  so  as  to  pass  midway  between  Wolf  Point  and  Bald  Island  (fron^ 


SHIP    HARBOR — SHOAL    HAT. 


129 


fatbotuH  on  it, 
ver  Bnld  Kock, 
(1  of  these  dau- 

)r,  beariug  from 
rous  NB.  ahoal, 
Friar  Ledge  N. 
V^.  ^  mile.  Far- 
Hide  of  ^icbol 
avoided  if  Wolf 
be  not  brought 

Ariug  from  Flat 
ithoms,  beariug 
ith.  5  fathoms, 
lie  iSE.  poiut  of 
i  the  sea  breaks 

)int  (the  aontb 
,  together  with 
cleared  ou  the 
imity  of  Nichol 
Fhe  mark  that 
the  ledges  far- 
er  Bald  Islaud, 

:er,  and  is  quite 
water,  extends 
)  middle  of  the 
ther  side, 
from  the  west- 
I  may  be  easily 
high,  on  one  of 
within  Charles 
sembles  a  ship 
>f  Bald  Island 
1  either  side  of 

rd,  proceed  as 
eastward  with 
IS  outside  Flat 
rd  of  a  mile  or 
3tern  poiut  of 
a,  between  the 
ed  the  latter, 
1  Island  (from> 


•either  of  which  the  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  60  fathoms), 
and  thence  for  the  harbor's  mouth. 

Having  arrived  abreast  Passage  Island,  steer  to  the  westward  to- 
wards  DayCove,  until  the  house  on  Bisan  Poiut  is  in  line  with  the  NB. 
point  of  Caroline  Island,  and  seen  over  the  small  shingle  islet  off 
Salmon  Point,  and  appearing  nearly  to  touch  the  clay  cliff  of  the  lat- 
ter, bearing  N.  47°  VV.  Keep  these  marks  exactly  in  line,  and  they 
will  lead  in  past  Black  Rock  (which  lies  outside  Black  Point  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  entrance),  and  O'Brien  Reef,  which  lies  ^  mile 
further  in,  an<l  also  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  narrow  channel. 

After  passing  between  O'Brien  Iteef  and  Beach  Point,  of  shingle 
(where  the  channel  between  the  3  fathoms  line  is  only  70  fathoms  wide), 
steer  more  to  the  westward  and  anchor  midway  between  Salmon  Point 
and  the  western  shore  in  7  fathoms,  or  anywhere  between  Salmon 
Point  and  Whale  Island  in  4,5,or«  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  of  mud 
and  the  shelter  complete.  Caroline  Island  lies  over  on  the  western  side 
of  the  harbor,  a  mile  within  Beach  Point,  and  may  be  easily  recognized 
by  a  round  wooded  hill,  190  feet  high,  near  its  NE.  point. 

Tides.— The  winds  cause  great  irregularities  both  in  the  times  and 
rise.  The  onlinary  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  does  not  exceed  one  knot ;  but 
after  heavy  rains  or  the  melting  of  winter  snow,  as  well  as  after  strong 
souiheasterly  gales  that  have  driven  the  water  into  the  harbor,  the 
ebbing  stream  is  said  to  be  much  stronger. 

Shoal  Bay  is  sufficiently  wide  for  large  vessels  to  work  in  and 
out  of  with  ease,  and  possesses  a  good  depth  of  water  and  excellent 
anchorage. 

Supplies.— The  head  of  Shoal  Bay  is  well  settled,  the  hills  of  red 
clay  affording  a  productive  soil,  but  the  islands  are  almost  everywhere 
barren.  Supplies  of  fresh  provisions,  wood,  and  water  may  be  obtained. 
Anchorage.— Vessels  should  anchor  in  Shoal  Bay,  with  Borgle  Bluff 
and  Outer  Island  in  line,  bearing  S.  69o  E.,  either  midway  between  the 
Middle  Ground  and  the  north  point  of  Charles  Island  in  5^  fathoms, 
sand,  when  Round  Islet  (in  line  with  Tucker  Point)  should  bear  S.  4° 
W.,  distant  400  yards. 

Directions.— The  dangers  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  namely,  the 
ledges  oft"  Charles  Point  and  Borgle  Shoal,  may  be  avoided  by  keeping 
the  red  clay  cliff  at  the  head  of  the  bay  open  of  Borgle  Bluff,  bearing 
N.  410  W.  After  passing  Borgle  Bluff  the  Middle  Ground  will  be 
avoided  by  not  bringing  Borgle  Bluff"  to  the  eastward  of  S.  54o  E. 
until  the  south  sides  of  Mary  and  Tuff  Islands  are  in  line,  bearing  JS"! 
660  E.,  or  until  Hardwood  Island  appears  through  the  Tickle. 

From  this  position  steer  to  the  westward  and  anchor  on  the  line  of 
Borgle  Bluff  and  Outer  Island,  apparently  touching,  bearing  S.  70°  E., 
with  the  whole  of  Hardwood  Island  seen  through  the  Tickle,  bearing 
S.  47^*  W.,  and  in  4^  fathoms,  over  mud.  This  anchorage  is  safe, 
although  some  swell  may  roll  in  during  or  after  heavy  SB.  gales.  On 
5314 9 


130 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


the  eaateru  side  Net  S'loal,  vrbioh  has  3  fathoms  of  water  on  it,  and 
Eve  Led^t),  the  only  other  dant^er  in  the  way  (always  visible),  may  be 
avoideil  by  keepint;  the  red  ulitf  open  to  the  westward  of  Mary  Island, 
bearing  N.  52°  W. 

Tangier  Harbor,  next  west  of  Pope  Harbor,  is  separated  from  the 
latter  by  a  narrow  peninsnla  about  2  miles  long.  The  entrance 
to  Tangier  Harbor  is  not  easily  recognized  from  seaward,  as  the 
land  is  low  and  devoid  of  any  remarkable  features,  and  Tangier  Is- 
land partly  fronts  it.  Between  Tangier  Island  and  Sandy  Gove  Point 
the  passage  is  narrowed  to  5U0  yards  by  a  small  patch  of  18  feet  lying 
northward  of  the  island.  Mason  Cove,  in  the  NE.  part  of  the  harbor, 
2^  miles  from  the  entrance,  is  landlocked,  and  has  depths  of  from  12  to 
15  feet  water  over  muddy  bottom. 

Supplies. — Around  the  head  of  Tangier  Harbor,  and  also  on  the 
point  of  the  main  land  that  separates  it  from  Pope  Harbor,  there  are 
tracts  of  tolerably  good  pasture  laud,  from  which,  together  with  fish- 
ing and  coasting,  the  inhabitants  derive  a  comfortable  subsistence. 
Water  may  be  obtained  from  Tangier  River  at  the  head  of  the  harbor. 

The  Mouseback  Shoal  extends  to  the  southward  ^  mile  from  Outer 
Island,  south  of  Tangier  Island.  Sandy  Cove  Point,  in  line  with  Hog 
Island  Point  and  with  the  east  side  of  Tangier  River,  bearing  N.  iQ° 
W.,  leads  clear  of  it. 

Sandy  Cove  Shoal,  with  15  feet  water  over  it,  lies  on  the  eastern 
side;  farther  north,  in  the  center  of  the  harbor,  about  800  yards  NW. 
from  Porcupine  Poiut,  is  the  Whaleback  Rocky  Shoal,  which  only 
shows  at  low- water  springs  ;  and  at  the  same  distance  to  the  N  W.  from 
its  shoalest  part,  is  Shag  Ledge,  always  above  water.  The  best  chan- 
nel is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Whaleback  Shoal  and  Shag  Ledge. 

Anchorage. — The  best  and  most  secure  berth  is  in  Mason  Cove, 
but  a  more  roomy  anchorage  will  be  found  eastward  of  the  Shag  Ledge, 
where  the  depths  are  from  20  to  23  feet,  and  the  bottom  in  most  places 
mud. 

Directions. — In  running  for  Tangier  Harbor,  which  should  only  be 
done  in  clear  weather,  do  not  approach  the  shore  nearer  than  3  miles, 
until  the  entrance  is  open,  and  Porcupine  Hill  on  its  eastern  side  bears 
N.  32°  W.  Then  steer  for  Sandy  Cove  Point,  keeping  Ironbound  Ledge 
open  on  passing  it  to  avoid  Sandy  Cove  Shoal.  When  Porcupine  Head 
bears  about  N.  35°  B.  steer  N.  10°  W.  until  the  south  end  of  Sandy 
Cove  Beach  is  in  line  with  Porcupine  Head,  then  with  these  marks  on 
steer  N.  44°  W.,  which  will  clear  the  Whaleback  Shoal  and  Shag  Ledge. 
When  northward  of  the  latter  a  vessel  may  steer  gradually  round  Hog 
Island  Point,  giving  it  a  small  berth  for  Mason  Cove. 

Pope  Harbor  has  a  depth  of  water  sufficient  for  vopsels  of  heavy 
draft,  but  it  is  only  secure  within  Harbor  Island,  where  the  space  with 
deep  water  being  little  more  than  200  yards  across,  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  moor.  In  the  bay  outside  a  heavy  swell  rolls  in  during  south- 
erly gales. 


POPE    HAKBOK — SPRY    BAY. 


131 


] 


'  on  it,  and 

lie),  may  be 
lary  IslamU 

ii\  from  the 
le  entrance 
ard,  U8   the 

Tangier  Is- 
f  Cove  Paint 
18  feet  lying 

the  harbor, 
of  from  12  to 

also  on  the 
or,  there  are 
er  with  fish- 
Hubsistence. 
f  the  harbor, 
e  from  Onter 
ne  with  Hog 
aring  N.  46° 

a  the  eastern 
i  yards  NW. 

which  only 
he  NW.  from 
best  Chan- 
ag  Ledge. 
Mason  Cove, 

Shag  Ledge, 
1  most  places 

lould  only  be 
than  3  miles, 
xn  side  bears 
iboand  Ledge 
rcnpine  Head 
ind  of  Sandy 
ese  marks  on 
Shag  Ledge, 
y  round  Hog 

aels  of  heavy 
le  space  with 
>uld  be  neces- 
dariug  south- 


Supplies. — The  shore!*  of  Pope  and  Spry  Harbor,  as  well  as  Taylor 
Bay,  are  mor^  thickly  peopled  than  usual  on  this  coast.  There  are  ex- 
tensive tracts  of  liardwood  land  in  the  vicinity,  furnishing  timber  for 
shipbuilding,  anil  supplies  of  fresh  provisions  and  water  may  be  readily 
obtained. 

Horse  Rock,  with  only  4  feet  water,  lies  the  farthest  out,  and  from 
it  Pope  Kock  is  in  line  with  the  east  end  of  Ironbound  Island,  bearing 
N.  5l'o  VV. 

Pope  Rock  and  Shoals. — Pope  Shoals,  which  are  exceedingly  dan. 
gerous,  exteiiil  more  than  half  way  out  from  Pope  Hock  towards  Horse 
Hock,  and  the  soundings  are  rocky  and  irregular  throughout  the  re- 
maining distance.  Pope  Rock  is  above  water  and  distant  '^  mile  from 
Ironbound  Island,  but  the  passage  between  them  is  rendered  im|)assa- 
ble  to  strangers  by  sunken  rooks,  and  so  also  is  the  passage  between 
the  island  and  the  main. 

Schooner  Rock,  with  only  6  feet  water,  lies  ^  mile  out  from  the  islets 
at  the  entrance  of  Shelter  Cove,  in  which  the  fishing  schooners  lie  land- 
locked in  2  or  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  Black  Rock  lies  ^  mile  further 
in  on  the  western  side,  and  is  always  above  water. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water  in  Pope  Harbor,  full  and  change,  at  7  h.  40 
m. ;  springs  rise  0^  feet,  and  neaps  4^  feet,  but  strong  winds  cause 
great  irregularities.    The  tidal  streams  are  weak  and  irregular. 

Directions. — When  not  less  than  2^  miles  from  the  Outer  Islands 
bring  the  Episcopal  Church  steeple  in  line  with  Gerard  Head  bearing 
N.  42°  W.,  and  these  marks  will  lead  in  between  Phujnix  Island  and 
Pope  Shoals.  As  soon  as  Pope  and  Taylor  Heads  are  in  line  bearing 
N.  74°  E.  alter  course  to  N.  57°  W.,  and  it  will  lead  midway  between 
the  reef  off  Gerard  Head  and  Schooner  Rock,  and  when  the  two  west- 
ern points  of  Harbor  Island  are  in  line,  bearing  X.  38°  W.  (when  they 
should  also  be  in  line  with  the  Roman  Catholic  chapel,  which  is  not 
easily  distinguished),  alter  course  to  N.  49°  W.  (for  the  head  of  the  har- 
bor, so  as  to  pass  midway  between  Harbor  Island  and  Grum  Point), 
until  the  channel  through  the  harbor  and  to  the  northward  of  Gerard 
Island  begins  to  open. 

Then  steer  N.  i3°  E.,  or  for  the  church  steeple,  until  the  points  of  Long 
Island  on  the  norvhern  side  of  the  harbor  are  in  line,  bearing  N.6O0  B. 
which  will  lead  to  the  anchorage  midway  between  Bollong  Point  and 
the  NE.  point  of  Har'uor  Island,  in  4^  fathoms,  mud.  Should  the  wind 
be  from  the  eastward,  the  vessel  may  anchor  outside  on  the  last-named 
leading  marks,  and  in  6^  fathoms  muddy  bottom,  and  may  either  wait 
for  a  fair  wind,  or  warp  into  the  harbor. 

Spry  Bay. — Taylor  Head  is  the  outer  extremity  of  a  narrow  penin- 
aula  which  divides  Mushaboou  and  Spry  Harbors ;  it  is  destitute  of 
trees,  but  being  composed  of  large  white  rocks  is  distinguishable  afar 
off.    Spry  Harbor,  situated  at  the  NW.  end  of  Spry  Bay,  is  suflft- 


1 


132 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.   E.    COAST. 


ciently  commodious  to  accommodate  a  large  number  of  vessels ;  in  7  or 
8  fathoms,  mud,  secure  from  all  winds. 

Redman  Shoal  lies  with  Taylor  Head,  the  eastern  point  of  the  bayj 
bearing  N.  26°  E.,  i/ff  miles;  and  Lawler  Point  (which  ia  an  islet  at 
high  water),  on  the  eastern  side  of  Gerard  Island,  is  seen  just  open 
eastward  of  Maloney  Rock,  bearing  N.  38°  W.  The  fishermen  report 
the  least  water  on  this  shoal  to  be  5  fathoms,  nor  could  any  less  be 
found  by  the  officers  engaged  in  the  Admiralty  survey. 

Mad  Moll  Reef  extends  in  a  westerly  direction  nearly  a  mile  from 
Taylor  Head.  On  it  there  are  two  patches  of  shingle,  which  are  always 
above  water;  and  to  the  northward  of  it  two  rocky  patches  nearly  dry 
at  low  water. 

Herring  and  Maloney  Shoals.— The  latter,  of  considerable  extent, 
with  12  feet  water,  ia  by  far  the  most  in  the  way.  Its  bearing  from 
Maloney  Rock,  which  is  always  above  water,  is  S.  5°  E.,  and  distance 
from  i  to  §  mile.  The  southern  extremity  of  the  dry  shingle  on  Mad 
Moll  Reef  in  line  with  Taylor  Head,  bearing  N.  60°  E.,  leads  i  mile 
southward;  and  Bald  Rock,  seen  just  open  eastward  of  Maloney  Rock, 
bearing  N.  14°  W.,  leads  eastward  of  these  shoals. 

Neverfail  Shoal,  with  17  feet  water,  lies  N.  74°  E.,  i  mile  from 
Maloney  Rock;  and  from  it  Tomlees  Head  and  Leslie  Island  appear 
touching,  N.  16°  W. 

Directions  for  Eastern  Channel. — Pass  westward  of  Redman  Shoal 
and  Mad  Moll  Reef,  and  between  the  latter  and  Neverfail  Shoal,  by 
keeping  the  eastern  side  of  Tomlees  Head  only  just  shut  in  behind  the 
high  bank  on  the  eastern  side  of  Leslie  Island,  bearing  N.  20°  W. 
Steer  with  this  mark  until  Maloney  Rock  and  Pope  Head  are  in  line, 
bearing  S.  58°  W. ;  then  alter  course  to  N.  38°  W.  for  the  western  side 
of  Tomlees  Head,  and  having  pas8e«l  between  Bald  and  Ram  Rocks, 
steer  to  the  westward  round  the  northern  end  of  Gerard  Island,  from 
which  the  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  300  yards,  and  anchor 
in  7  or  8  fathoms,  mud,  with  Taylor  Head  shut  in  behind  the  NE. 
point  of  Gerard  Island. 

Mushaboon  Harbor  scarcely  deserves  to  be  ranked  as  a  harbor,  as 
it  is  exposed  to  the  full  force  of  SE.  winds.  It  affords  indiflferent  shelter 
to  vessels  only  on  the  eastern  side  near  its  head,  where  Gull  Rock  and 
the  shoals  which  nearly  unite  it  to  Malagash  Island  break  off  the  sea. 

Directions. — As  the  harbors  immediately  adjoining  Mushaboon  to 
the  east  and  west  are  so  superior  to  it,  vessels  seldom  require  to  enter 
this  exposed  anchorage ;  but  should  any  wish  to  do  so,  the  safest  course 
for  a  stranger  to  pursue  will  be  to  steer  with  either  of  the  leading  marks 
for  Sheet  Harbor  on  until  Bob  Bluii'  is  seen  well  open  north  of  Pyche 
Island,  bearing  N.  55°  W.;  thence  steer  for  the  bluff  on  this  bearing, 
which  will  lead  well  to  the  eastward  of  the  Pyche  Shoals,  and  vessels 
may  run  up  the  middle  of  the  bay,  steering  N.  50°  W.  for  Yellow  Rock, 
the  channel  between  the  dangers  on  either  side  being  J  mile  wide. 


SHEET   HARBOR. 


133 


jssels  5  in  7  or 

nt  of  the  l)ay> 
is  an  islet  at 
eon  just  open 
herineu  report 
id  any  less  be 

ly  a  mile  from 
ich  are  always 
lies  nearly  dry 

lerable  extent, 
bearing  from 
.,  and  distance 
bingle  on  Mad 
i.,  leatls  i  mile 
Malouey  Rock, 

I.,  4  mile  from 
Island  appear 

'  Bedman  Shoal 
rfail  Shoal,  by 
t  in  behind  the 
ing  N.  20°  W. 
Bad  are  in  line, 
le  western  side 
id  Earn  Rocks, 
rd  Island,  from 
'ds,  and  anchor 
lehind  the  NB. 

as  a  harbor,  as 
liflferent  shelter 
Gull  Rock  and 
lak  ofif  the  sea. 

Mushaboon  to 
eqiiire  to  enter 
le  safest  course 

leading  marks 
north  of  Pyche 
II  this  bearing, 
als,  and  vessels 
►r  Yellow  Rock, 
mile  wide. 


On  nearing  Gall  and  Yellow  Rocks  a  vessel  may  either  pass  be- 
tween them,  disregarding  the  rock  with  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  or» 
passing  to  the  westward  of  Yellow  Rock,  may  steer  to  the  eastward 
towards  Botelier  Island  and  anchor  ofif  it,  northward  of  Gull  Rock,  in  6 
fathoms,  mud. 

Sheet  Harbor,  one  of  the  tiuest  on  the  coast,  derives  its  name  from 
Sheet  Rock,  a  small  islet  outside  the  entrance,  which  presents  to  sea- 
ward a  remarkable  cliff  of  clay  slate,  resembling  a  suspended  sheet. 
The  entrance  between  Western  and  Danberry  Islands  is  ^  mile  wide, 
and  the  anchorage  immediately  within  it  on  the  western  side  is  quite 
safe,  and  sufficiently  commodious  to  accommodate  a  lar^e  number  of 
vessels. 

The  harbor  is  of  considerable  extent,  extending  inland  6^  miles,  and 
is  navigable  for  vessels  nearly  to  its  bead.  There  is  a  mill  at  the  head 
of  the  NW.  and  principal  arm,  the  shores  of  which  are  well  settled. 
There  is  also  a  scanty  population  along  the  NE.  arm  and  eastern  shore 
of  the  harbor;  but  the  western  shore,  from  Mitchell  Point  to  Musha- 
boon Harbor,  is  uninhn,bited. 

Supplies. — Water  may  be  obtained  in  Sheet  Harbor,  either  from 
Watering  Cove  on  the  west  side,  or  Smelt  Brook  on  the  opposite  shore, 
A  moderate  supply  of  fresh  provisions  and  abundance  of  fire- wood  may 
also  be  procured  from  the  inhabitants,  who  derive  subsistence  from 
ship-building,  coasting,  and  farming. 

.  Buoy.— An  automatic  whistling  buoy,  painted  black  and  red  in  ver- 
tical stripes,  is  moored  in  24  fathoms,  with  Sheet  Rock  lighthouse 
bearing  N.  5°  W.,  distant  5^  miles. 

Pyche  Shoals. — The  dangers  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to 
Sheet  Harbor  are  rocky  patches  of  3J  and  4  fathoms  oflF  Taylor  Head, 
and  also  the  more  dangerous  Pj'che  Shoals,  which  are  separated  from 
Pycbto  Island  by  a  narrow  channel  leading  to  the  entrance  of  Musha- 
boon Harbor.  The  least  water  on  these  shoals,  17  feet,  and  their  SE» 
point,  distant  about  a  mile  from  the  island,  is  cleared  by  the  east  points 
of  Guilford  and  Western  Islands  in  line,  bearing  N.  9°  E. 

7ankee  Jack,  a  small  rocky  shoal  with  only  3  feet  water,  bears  from 
Taylor  Head,  S.  51°  E.,  2J  miles.  At  the  distance  of  ^  mile  westward, 
there  is  another  rock  with  12  feet  water. 

Taylor  Qoose. — Tnis  dangerous  rock,  awash  at  high  water,  bears 
from  Taylor  Head  S.  47°  E.,  IJ  miles.  Vessels  may  pass  SE.  of  it  at  the 
distance  of  200  yards,  but  in  the  opposite  direction  the  shoal  extends  J 
mile,  and  is  .just  cleared  on  the  west  side  by  the  east  points  of  Guilford 
and  Western  Islands  in  line,  bearing  N.  9°  E. 

Mushaboon  Shoal,  a  small  rocky  patch  with  'i  fathoms  water,  bears 
from  Taylor  Head  S.  72°  E.,  IJ  miles.  As  the  position  of  this  rock  is 
seldom  shown  by  a  breaker,  it  is  exceedingly  dangerous. 

From  Logan  Rock,  which  is  seldom  marked  by  a  breaker,  Yankee 
Jack  (on  the  opposite  side  of  the  channel)  bears  S.  82°  W.,  the  patsage 
between  them  being  nearly  1^  miles  wide. 


i!' 


134 


NOVA    SCOTIA S.    E.    COAST. 


Gtoddes  Shoal,  with  5  fathoms  on  it,  is  the  outermost  of  the  o£f- 
lying  patches  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance.  From  it  the  eastern 
extremity  of  Western  Shagroost  is  in  line  with  Fishery  Point,  bearing 
N.  2°  E.,  distant  about  2^  miles ;  and  Sheet  Bock  appears  in  the  en- 
trance of  the  harbor,  between  Western  and  Danberry  Islands,  bearing 
N.  22°  W.,  and  distant  about  4f  miles.  The  sea  breaks  over  this  rocky 
shoal  only  after  heavy  gales. 

Monroe  Rock,  with  12  feet  water,  lies  with  the  western  points  of 
Western  Shagroost  and  Sheet  Bock  in  line.  Pumpkin  and  Horse  Is- 
lands apparently  touching,  bearing  N.  38°  E.,  leads  J  mile  south  of 
this  rouk,  and  close  to  the  southward  of  Geddes  Shoal. 

Western  Shagroost,  6  feet  above  high  water,  can  always  be  seen. 
A  reef  partially  dry,  extends  §  mile  from  it  in  a  S.  28°  W.  direction, 
and  has  only  4  feet  on  its  SW.  extremity.  To  the  northward  of 
the  rock  is  the  dangerous  Babiu  Shoal,  the  least  water  on  which  2} 
fathoms,  bears  from  the  Western  Shagroost  N.  47°  W.  IJ  miles,  and 
from  Fishery  Point  (nearly  in  line  with  the  southei'u  extremities  of 
Hardwood  and  Mink  Islands)  S.  43°  W.  1^  miles. 

Eastern  Shagroost  is  a  low  rocky  ledge  barely  5  feet  above  high 
water,  with  breaking  rocky  shoals  on  its  north  and  west  sides,  but 
steep-to  on  its  SW.  side. 

Piimpkin  Island  is  a  steep  rounded  islet  90  feet  high,  bare  of  trees, 
lying  west  1$  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Beaver  Island ;  rocky  ledges 
extend  nearly  ^  mile  from  its  south  point.  i 

Macdonald  Shoals,  the  outermost  patch  of  which,  with  12  feet  water, 
bears  from  Macdonald  Point  S.  43"  W.  J  mile.  The  mark  which  just 
clears  the  western  extremities  of  Macdonald  and  Babin  Shoals,  as  well 
as  the  reef  off  the  Western  Shagroost,  is  Sheet  Bock,  apparently  touch- 
ing the  east  point  of  Western  Island,  bearing  N.  26°  W. 

Tides. — Strong  winds  cause  great  irregularities,  especially  in  the 
rise.  The  diurnal  inequality  is  most  distinctly  shown  in  the  low  waters, 
in  this  and  all  the  harbors  iliat  have  been  surveyed  on  this  coast,  includ- 
ing Halifax.  The  ordinary  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  does  not  exceed  half 
a  knot ;  but  it  is  said  to  be  stronger  after  heavy  rains  or  the  melting  of 
the  winter's  snow,  or  after  long  continued  southerly  gales,  which  have 
previously  forced  the  water  into  the  harbor.  It  is  high  water  about  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  earlier  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  where  the  rise  is 
about  2  feet  less. 

Western  Passage. —Proceeding  for  Sheet  Harbor  by  the  western- 
most passage,  westward  of  Taylor  Goose  and  Mushaboon  Shoals,  and 
between  them  and  the  Pyche  Shoals,  bring  Sheet  Kock  to  apparency 
touch  the  east  point  of  Danberry  Island,  bearing  N.  20°  E.,  and  steer 
with  this  mark  on  until  Bob  Bluff  opens  out  north  of  Pyche  Island, 
when  the  Pyche  shoals  will  have  been  passed,  and  the  vessel  may  be 
kept  a  little  to  the  eastward,  so  as  to  give  a  wider  berth  to  the  reefs  oft" 
Guilford  Island,  which  the  above  marks  only  just  clear. 


SHEET  AND  BEAVER  HARBORS. 


135 


St  of  the  off- 
it  the  easteru 
oint,  bearing 
ars  iu  the  eu- 
uids,  bearing 
er  this  rocky 

tern  points  of 
ind  Horse  Is- 
nile  south  of 

ways  be  seen. 
W.  direction, 
northward  of 
■  on  which  2J 
L|  miles,  and 
ixtremities  of 

it  above  high 
>8t  sides,  but 

bare  of  trees, 
rocky  ledges 

i 
12  feet  water, 

rk  which  just 

hoals,  as  well 

irently  touch- 

Bcially  in  the 
j«?i  low  waters* 
coast,  iuclud- 
ot  exceed  half 
the  melting  of 
8,  which  have 
water  about  a 
lere  the  rise  is 

IT  the  westeru- 
a  Shoals,  and 
to  apparency 
E.,  and  steer 
?yche  Island, 
vessel  may  be 
;o  the  reefs  off 


DiroctionB.— If  a  vessel  be  bound  up  Sheet  Harbor,  the  first  danger 
to  be  avoided  is  White  Bonk,  which  dries  at  low  water,  and  is  distant 
flOO  yards  from  Danberry  Island,  the  west  point  of  which,  apparently 
touching  Sheet  Bock,  bearing  8.  5°  E.,  leads  just  clear  westward  of 
White  Bock.  Sheet  Bock  should  therefore  be  kept  open  to  the  west- 
ward of  Danberry  Island  until  past  this  rock  ;  then  steer  to  the  east- 
ward, 80  as  to  bring  the  western  points  of  Danberry  Island  and  Sheet 
Bock  in  line,  bearing  S.  3°  W.,  and  steer  N.  3°  E.,  or  so  as  to  keep 
those  marks  on  astern,  until  nearly  abreast  Slab  Point,  on  the  western 
shore,  2  miles  within  the  entrance.  Then,  as  those  marks  barely  clear 
Slab  Shoal,  steer  a  little  to  the  eastward  until  it  is  passed,  observing 
that  the  passage  between  it  and  the  reef,  which  extends  300  yards  from 
Salmon  Island,  is  only  400  yards  wide. 

Having  passed  Slab  Shoal,  keep  towards  the  western  shore  rounding 
Olding  Point  at  a  distance  not  exceeding  300  yards  to  avoid  the  shoal 
off  the  shingle  of  Watt  Point,  and  anchor  off  Watering  Oove  on  the 
western  shore  in  7  fathoms,  mud,  with  the  cbapel  at  the  head  of  the 
Northwest  Arm  appearing  nearly  midway  between  Mitchell  and 
^^hurch  Points.    The  vessel  will  here  be  landlocked,  and  secure  in  all 

V    the  navigation  of  the  Arms  the  services  of  a  pilot  would  be  indis- 
P  .  ;able. 

Middle  Passage.— To  pass  between  Yankee  Jack  and  Logan  Bock, 
which  is  the  widest  passage,  steer  with  Sheet  Bock  apparently  touching 
the  western  point  of  Danberry  Island,  bearing  N.  5°  W.,  until  the 
8W.  point  of  Guilford  Island  bears  N.  61°  W.,  when  the  southern 
point  of  Salisbury  Island  will  have  disappeared  behind  it;  then  steer 
to  the  northward  and  westward,  until  the  west  ends  of  Danberry  Island 
and  Sheet  Bock  are  in  line,  in  ortler  to  clear  the  28-foot  shoal  which  the 
former  marks  lead  over,  and  pass  to  the  westward  of  Sheet  Bock. 

Beaver  Island.— Beaver  Island,  40  feet  high,  is  partially  covered 
with  scrubby  trees,  and  its  slate  cliffs  show  white  to  seaward.  On  its 
north  side,  in  moderate  weather,  landing  can  be  safely  effected  at  a 
small  cove  near  the  east  end;  and  in  bad  weather  boats  may  be  saved 
at  high  water  by  entering  the  gully,  which  separates  the  two  parts  of 
the  island. 

Beaver  Harbor.— Notwithstanding  the  numerous  dangers  which 
fringe  the  coast  in  the  vicinity  of  this  harbor,  it  is  easy  of  access  after 
Beaver  Island  lighthouse  has  been  identified,  in  connequence  of  the 
entrance  channel  being  straight  and  deepr  after  passing  400  yards 
eastward  of  Beaver  Island.  The  position  of  this  harbor  is  objectionable 
during  heavy  southerly  winds,  but  under  all  other  circumstances  it 
Affords  an  excellent  refuge. 

The  Beaver  Harbor  of  the  fishermen  is  a  small  cove  situated  NW. 
one  mile  from  Beaver  Point.  It  affords  excellent  shelter,  being  pro- 
tected by  a  reef  of  stones,  partly  dry  at  low  water,  springs,  and  by  a 


^JEmFffW"*™^'*'™^''-  M»»-«i'''-.-'^.^>!m«nv2Fjiai  . 


186 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


spit  of  sand  and  shingle  extending  half  way  across  its  entrance,  withiui 
which  small  vessels  may  lie  secure  from  all  winds. 
Salmon  Ri^er,  at  the  bridge,  affords  good  fresh  water. 
Supplies. — The  inhabitants  along  the  shores  of  Beaver  Harbor  re- 
side principally  at  the  cove  on  its  west  side  and  at  Salmon  River.  Fire- 
wood and  a  limited  supply  of  fresh  provisions  may  be  generally  obtained' 
at  moderate  prices. 

William  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water,  and  only  breaising  occasion- 
ally, is  the  principal  danger  to  be  avoided  in  approaching  Beaver  Island' 
lighthouse.  It  will  be  cleared,  wbou  nearing  it  from  the  southward,  by 
keeping  the  conical  hill  on  Sutherland  Island  open  east  of  Beaver 
Island. 

Mannot  Rock,  the  outermost  danger  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel' 
leading  to  Beaver  Harbor,  is  only  awash  at  low  water,  springs,  and  with 
the  prevalent  SW.  winds  it  seldom  breaks. 

Middle  Shoal  has  2^  fathoms  water  on  it,  and  two  4fathom  patches 
lying  to  the  southward. 

Sutherland  Island,  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel  into  Beaver  Har- 
bor, is  wood,  with  cliffs  of  slate,  and  has  on  it  a  conical-shaped  hill  107' 
feet  high.  i 

Harbor  Rock,  of  bare  slate,  12  feet  high,  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  channel  into  Beaver  Harbor,  and  has  shoal  water  extending  20(V' 
yards  to  the  westward. 

Sandy  Islet  has  a  red  clay  bank,  12  feet  high,  at  its  south  end ;  be- 
tween ir.  and  Harbor  rock  the  ground  is  broken  and  rooky. 

Rocky  and  Hardwood  Islands  lie  ou  each  side  of  the  entrance  to- 
the  Salmon  River  anchorage.  The  former  has  a  rock,  with  only  6  feet 
water  lying  off  its  eastern  end ;  the  latter  is  bold-to,  and  has  red  clay 
banks. 

Balcom  Shoal,  with  10  feet  water,  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  passage 
between  Rocky  and  Hardwood  Islands,  and  narrows  the  available  chan- 
nel into  Salmon  River  anchorage  to  less  than  200  yards ;  but  to  reach 
this  anchorage  local  knowledge  is  necessary. 

Directions  — In  approaching  Beaver  Harbor  from  the  southward  by 
day,  when  about  5  or  6  miles  from  Beaver  Island  bring  the  lighthouse' 
to  bear  N.  50°  W.  and  steer  in  N.  42°  W.,  observing  that  in  passing  the 
end  of  Beaver  and  Horse  Islands  the  dark- wooded  Beaver  Point  is 
open  to  the  eastward  of  Sutherland  Island.  After  passing  200  yards 
to  the  eastward  of  Sutherland  Island  and  Beaver  Point,  keep  the  light- 
house in  sight  astern,  open  eastward  of  Sutherland  Island ;  on  this  line, 
with  the  cross  mark  of  Quoddy  Hill  in  line  with  the  south  end  of  Hard- 
wood Island,  fair  anchorage  can  be  obtained  in  7  fathoms,  muddy  bot- 
tom. 

Anchorage. — If,  however,  better  shelter  be  desired,  a  pilot  should 
be  procured,  and  the  vessel  run  into  Salmon  River  anchorage  or  Mac- 
leod  Cove.  Into  the  latter  a  depth  of  21  feet  may  be  carried,  and  a  laud- 
locked  berth  obtained  in  the  same  depth  over  muddy  bottom. 


iDce,  withiui 


Harbor  re- 
iver. Fire- 
lly  obtained' 

jg  occasion- 
iaver  Island' 
nth  ward,  by 
;  of  Beaver 

the  channel 
gs,  and  with 

lom  patches 

Beaver  Har- 
iped  hill  107 

stern  side  of 
[tending  200- 

ith  end ;  be- 

entrance  to- 
ll only  6  feet 
has  red  clay 

the  passage 
lilable  chau- 
but  to  reach 

juthward  by 
e  lighthouse' 
I  passing  the 
ver  Point  is 
g  20()  yards 
)ep  the  light- 
on  this  line, 
md  of  Hard- 
,  muddy  bot- 

pilot  should 
page  or  Mac- 
1,  and  a  land- 
)m. 


,— »MgBtai^'j>'aiab^3'  ..'Ji  Jr  t.-i'  f^f>ti,-^'i> 


■t 


BEAVER    HARBOR NICOMTAU    BAY. 


13T 


ITewtonquoddy,  an  inlet  to  the  eastward  of  Beaver  Harbor,  will 
admit  schooners  of  small  tonnage ;  but  is  not  much  frequented,  evci> 
by  small  vessels,  on  account  of  the  numerous  rocky  islets  and  shoals 
overlying  its  entrance. 

DirectionB. — The  anchorages  underBrokeuback  Island  and  in  Nicom- 
tau  Bay  are  not  recommended,  but  they  may  prove  useful  in  cases  of 
emergency.  Approaching  the  anchorage  under  Brokenback  Island 
from  the  eastward  or  westward,  do  not  pass  to  the  northward  of  the 
line  between  the  Bassoon  Reefs  and  White  Islands,  until  Baptlste 
Island  (of  red  clay  banks,  70  feet  high,  and  partly  wooded)  is  seen  east 
of  Brokenback  Island.  When  the  highest  part  of  Baptiste  Is'.aiid  is  lit 
line  with  the  east  end  of  Brokenback  Island,  bearing  N.  56°  W.  (which 
mark  leads  to  the  eastward  of  the  Snapper  Shoal),  steer  on  that  line  of 
bearing,  and  giving  Brokenback  Island  a  berth  of  less  than  200  yards, 
anchor  in  10  fathoms,  sand,  with  the  Bird  Islands  open  west  of  Broken- 
back Island,  and  the  northern  Halibut  Island  just  open  south  of  Gold 
Island. 

To  enter  Nicomtau  Bay,  steer  in  with  Harbor  Rock  (of  slate,  30  feet 
high,  and  nearly  bare  of  trees)  in  line  with  the  high  land  on  the  eastern 
side  oCMoser  River  bearing  N.  15°  W.  In  passing  to  the  westward  of 
the  Halibut  Islands  be  careful  that  the  west  end  of  Hartlin  Island  is 
well  open  of  Goose  Island,  in  order  to  clear  Salamander  Rock,  with 
only  a  foot  on  it.  After  clearing  Salamander  Rock,  steer  so  as  to  pass 
200  yards  eastward  of  Harbor  Rock,  and  westward  of  the  Bull  Rock, 
which  uncovers  at  low  water,  and  anchor  in  about  6  fathoms,  mud, 
northward  of  Hartlin  Island. 

In  clear  weather  Pumpkin  Island  may  be  seen  distinctly  when  off 
White  Islands;  and  by  keeping  ic  just  open  north  of  Bea  er  Island 
lighthouse,  bearing  S.  79°  W.,  it  will  lead  to  the  southward  of  all  these 
shoals.  If  not  made  out.  White  Islands  should  not  be  approached 
nearer  than  2  miles. 

Nicomtau  Bay,  the  outlet  of  Moser  River,  a  small  stream  admitting- 
schooners  of  light  draft,  is  the  abode  of  a  few  families  who  cultivate 
small  farms,  and  during  the  summer  months  frequent  the  Halibut  and 
White  Islands  for  the  purpose  of  fishing. 

Halibut  Islands  are  a.  cluster  of  islands  a  mile  in  extent  and  35  feet 
high,  lying  to  the  northwest  of  White  Islands. 

Bassoon  Reefs,  an  extensive  cluster  of  shoals,  lying  2J  miles  to- 
the  SW.  of  Halibut  Islands,  are  composed  of  large  rounded  stones, 
and  are  partially  uncovered  at  low  water.  They  generally  break 
heavily;  but  as  at  high  water,  springs,  with  the  wind  off  shore,  their 
position  is  not  easily  recognized,  it  will  be  well  to  take  care  that  Pump- 
kin Island  does  not  show  open  northward  of  Brother  Islands.  This 
mark  will  lead  ^  mile  southward  of  the  reefs. 

Bird  Islands,  low  and  without  trees,  lie  2  miles  to  the  NW.  of  the 
Bassoon  Reefs. 


'■ 


im 


M-''" 


138 


NOVA   SCOTIA — S.    E.    COAST. 


Bowen  Ledge  U  a  bare  flat  slaty  rook  8  feet  high,  lyiug  ^  mile 
from  the  low  west  point  of  Oamp  Island. 

Horse  Shoe  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water  on  it,  lies  south  nearly  1^ 
miles  from  the  center  of  the  larger  White  Island.  The  west  end  of 
Halibut  Islands  kept  open  west  of  Bowen  Ledge,  leads  SW.  of  it. 

David  Shoal,  with  4  fathoms  on  it,  lies  N.  22°  W.  ^  mile  from  the 
Horse  Shoe  Shoal. 

Lockwood  Rock,  with  3  fathoms  on  it,  lies  with  the  highest  part  of 
Tuffin  Island  seen  over  the  east  point  of  White  Island,  bearing  N.  55° 
W.,  and  is  distant  rather  more  than  2  miles  from  the  latter.  The  whole 
of  TutUn  Island  open  east  of  White  Island  will  lead  eastward ;  and  the 
«ast  ends  of  TutBu  and  White  Islands  in  line  will  lead  westw  ard  of  the 
rock. 

White  Islands,  which  derive  their  name  from  cliffs  of  slate  of  highly 
inclined  strata,  showing  white  to  seaward,  are  wooded,  and  attain  an 
elevation  of  80  feet  at  their  eastern  extreme.  They  are  the  outermost 
ot  a  group  of  isl^ids  and  rocks,  lying  off  the  point  separating  Nicumci- 
gum  Inlet  from  Nicomtau  Bay. 

Nicumcigvun  Inlet  is  the  abode  of  a  few  families  who  earn  a  liveli- 
hood by  net  and  line  lishing  off  the  White  Islands  and  the  cultivation 
of  small  farms. 

Bay  of  Islands  is  the  name  commonly  given  to  the  coast  between 
Mary  Joseph  and  Beaver  Harbors.  The  islands  oft"  this  part  of  the 
coast  are  very  numerous,  and  the  channels  between  them  aie  so  nar- 
row, intricate,  and  beset  with  rocks  that,  although  there  is  sufficient 
4epth  to  admit  schooners  drawing  12  feet  water,  they  are  not  easily  de- 
scribed, and  their  safe  navigation  requires  an  intimate  local  knowledge, 
48uch  as  conld  never  be  acquired  from  the  best  chart.  Ooasters  use 
them  occasionally  to  avoid  the  heavy  swell  in  the  offing.  A  few  know 
the  channel  sufficiently  well  to  run  inside  the  islands  the  whole  distance 
between  Liscomb  and  Sheet  Harbors,  whilst  others  are  content  to 
venture  within  a  few  of  the  most  otf'-lying  of  the  numerous  islands  with 
which  this  [tart  of  the  coast  is  studded. 

Mary-Joseph  Harbor,  secUre  and  well  sheltered,  has  the  advantage 
of  entrances  east  and  west ;  but  the  channels  are  narrow  and  should 
not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot  by  any  vessel  drav.  ing  more  than  9 
feet.  The  inhabitants,  scattered  along  the  shores,  principally  rely  on 
fishing  tor  subsistence,  but  cultivate  the  drift  hills  and  keep  cattle.  A 
church  stands  on  high  ground  in  Smith  Cove,  east  of  the  harbor,  and 
may  be  seen  from  the  sea. 

As  any  attempt  to  convey  an  intelligible  description  of  the  numerous 
off-lying  dangers  would  prove  useless,  the  navigator  is  referred  to  the 
-charts  of  the  harbor  and  adjacent  coasts. 

Supplies. — Water  may  be  obtained  in  Lobster  Oove  in  small  quanti- 
ties, and  fresh  provisions  and  fuel  can  be  bought  at  reasonable  prices 
from  the  inhabitants. 


MARY-JOSEPH    HARBOR. 


139 


l^iug  ^  mile 

th  uearly  1^ 
tvest  eud  of 
of  it. 
ile  from  the 

best  part  of 
iring  N.  55° 
The  whole 
rd;  and  the 
vard  of  the 

.te  of  highly 
id  attaiu  an 
)  outermost 
ng  Nicumci- 

»rn  a  liveli- 
caltivation 

bst  between 
part  of  the 
aie  80  nar- 
is  sufficient 
at  easily  de- 
knowledge, 
loasters  use 
A.  few  know 
ole  distance 
content  to 
slands  with 

ei  advantage 
and  should 
lore  than  9 
ally  rely  on 
[)  cattle.  A 
larbor,  and 

e  numerous 
rred  to  the 

mall  quanti- 
lable  prices 


Smith  Rock,  of  small  extent,  with  12  feet  water,  lies  1,200  yards  to 
the  southwanl  from  the  Gull  Ledge.  West  Black  Ledge,  in  line  with 
the  south  eud  of  Tnffln  Island,  leads  south  of  it. 

Qull  Ledge,  south  1^  miles  from  the  south  part  of  Barren  Island,  is 
composed  of  two  bare  ridges  of  slate  of  30  feet  high,  and  separated 
only  by  a  narrow  gully  just  wide  enough  to  afford  shelter  to  a  boat* 
West  Kock,  with  only  2  feet  on  it,  makes  the  passage  north  of  the  ledge 
dangerous. 

Seal  Ledge  ext*"^  "  1^  miles  from  the  SE.  point  of  Barren  Island. 
Between  this  ig*.  '  Black  Prince  Shoa  .;  '"e  channel,  nearly  a 
mile  wide,  leading  int*.  lary-Joseph  Harbor,  oat  which  on  account  of 
the  dangerous  shoals  on  its  eastern  side  should  not  be  attempted  with- 
out a  pilot,  unless  the  wind  be  fair  and  the  weather  clear. 

The  mark  for  leading  to  the  eastward  of  Seal  Ledge  is  Gravel  Point, 
the  north  extreme  of  Liscomb  Island,  open  of  Liscomb  Point,  bearing 
N.  8°  E. 

Thrumcap  Islet,  not  more  than  15  feet  high,  and  distinguished  by  a 
small  clump  of  trees,  lies  at  the  eastern  entrance  of  Mary-Joseph  Har- 
bor. There  are  some  patches  of  shoal  water  eastward  of  the  islet,  and 
on  its  western  side  is  a  dry  rocky  ledge,  between  which  and  Smith  Point 
is  a  channel  200  yards  wide,  but  not  much  used  or  generally  known. 

The  more  direct  channel  is  south  of  Thrumcap  Islet,  and  this  is  nar- 
rowed to  200  yards  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  (he  islet 
by  a  rovjk  with  only  10  feet  water,  on  the  north  eud  of  Pan  Shoal ;  Turner 
Point  on  Hawbolt  Island,  in  line  with  Smith  Point,  bearing  N.  88° 
W.,  leads  north  of  this  rock. 

Directions  for  Eastern  Entrance. — Being  off  Gull  Ledge,  with  a 
leading  wind,  bring  the  Gravel  Point  of  Liscomb  Island  open  of  Lis- 
comb Point,  bearing  K  6°  E..  the  mark  for  leading  to  the  eastward  of 
the  Seal  Ledge,  and  run  in  on  this  course  until  the  high  barn  on  Haw- 
bolt  Island  shows  north  of  Barren  Island;  then  steer  for  the  church 
steeple  bearing  N.  67°  W.,  and  immediately  Turner  Point  (on  Hawbolt 
Island)  apparently  touches  Smitli  Point,  alter  course  to  west. 

By  carefully  keeping  the  latter  marks  on,  proceed  until  False  Pas- 
sage opens  to  the  SW. ;  then  keep  nearly  a  S.  79°  W.  course,  so  as  to 
pass  200  yards  from  Thrumcap  Islet  and  Smith  Point ;  thence  west 
along  the  north  side  of  the  channel  so  as  to  avoid  Turner  Shoal,  with 
9  feet  water.  The  Middle  Ground,  a  muddy  flat  with  eel  grass,  is 
cleared  by  keeping  Thrumcap  Islet  just  in  sight  over  Smith  Point. 
Good  and  convenient  anchorage  can  be  obtained  in  7  fathoms,  mud, 
abont  half  way  between  Lobster  and  Turner  Points. 

Liscomb  Island,  2  miles  long  and  150  feet  high,  is  wooded,  and 
from  its  position  tends  to  shelter  Liscomb  and  Little  Liscomb  Harbors. 

Crook  Shoals. — From  Crook  Point,  the  east  extreme  of  the  islands, 
the  Crook  Shoals  extend  nearly  a  mile  in  an  easterly  direction.  Wedge 
Island  apparently  touching  Wine  Head,  bearing  N.  31°  E.,  leads  about 
^  mile  S£.  of  the  shoals. 


-^m 


140 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


Mackerel  Shoal,  with  only  2  feet  water,  extends  nearly  400  yards 
from  Cranberry  Point,  tiie  west  extreme  of  Liscomb  Island. 

Channel  Rock,  lying  SE.  2^  miles  from  Crook  Point,  has  3  fathoms 
water  on  it,  and  breaks  when  there  is  much  swell.  Smoke  and  Cran- 
berry Points,  apparently  touching,  bearing;  N.  70°  W.,  leads  westward 
of  it. 

Liscomb  Harbor. — The  entrance  to  this  harbor,  which  is  landlocked 
and  tolerably  smooth  at  all  times,  is  between  Liscomb  Island  and  Lis- 
comb Point.  At  the  distance  of  2  miles  the  channel  is  considerably 
narrowed  by  rocky  shoals,  which  extend  from  the  northern  shore,  after 
which  it  maintains  a  breadth  of  200  yards  up  to  its  head,  where  it  re- 
ceives the  waters  of  Liscomb  River,  a  rapid  shallow  stream  abounding' 
in  trout  and  salmon.  On  the  north  side  of  the  harbor  is  a  large  cove, 
named  Spanish  Ship  Bay,  but  it  is  too  much  encumbered  with  rocks  to 
render  a  description  intelligible. 

Supplies. — Good  water  can  be  obtained  from  a  little  brouk  on  the 
south  shore  of  Liscomb  Harbor,  and  small  supplies  of  fresh  provisions 
and  firewood  may  be  purchased  at  moderate  prices. 

The  population  is  scattered  along  the  shores  of  Liscomb,  Little  Lis- 
comb, and  Jegogan  Harbors  ;  the  people  are  industrious  and  intelligent. 
The  church  with  a  steeple  in  Liscomb  Harbor  forms  a  prominent  object 
from  the  sea,  and  a  useful  landmark. 

Dangers  off  the  Entrance. — Although  the  rocky  patches  off  the 
entrance  of  Liscomb  Harbor  are  numerous,  the  danger  from  them  ia 
considerably  diminished  by  the  fact  that  they  all  lie  nearly  in  the  same 
direction,  viz,  south  from  Liscomb  Point. 

Hawbolt  Rock,  the  most  outlying  danger,  has  4.^  fathoms  water 
and  lies  S.  19°  K.  nearly  4  miles  from  Liscomb  Point.  It  seldom  breaks, 
but  a  vessel  will  pass  to  the  southward  of  it,  by  keeping  Gull  Ledge 
only  touching  the  SW.  side  of  Tuifin  Island. 

Sand  Shoal,  composed  of  rock  and  sand,  with  9  feet  water  on  it,  lies 
S.  17°  B.  3  miles  from  Liscomb  Point.  Gull  Ledge  apparently  touching 
the  north  side  of  Little  White  Island,  which  has  a  wooded  hummock  50 
feet  high,  bearing  S.  73°  W.,  leads  southward  of  this  danger,  and  be- 
tween it  and  Hawbolt  Rock. 

Black  Prince  Shoal,  which  uncovers  at  half  tide,  and  generally 
breaks  heavily,  lies  one  mile  within  the  Sand  Shoal. 

NE.  Breaker  and  Lump  Rock  lie  to  the  northward  of  Black  Prince 
Shoal ;  the  former  has  4  feet  and  the  latter  11  feet  water  on  it. 

Liscomb  Shoal  extends  eastward  ^  mile  from  Liscomb  Point,  and 
tht*  least  water  on  it  is  16  feet.  The  church  steeple,  bearing  N.  33°  W., 
will  clear  this  danger. 

Leading  Mark. — The  lighthouse  on  Liscomb  Island,  bearing  X.  22<^ 
W.,  leads  eastward  of  all  these  outlying  shoals. 

Saddle  Rock,  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel  leading  to  Liscomb 
Harbor,  with  five  fathoms  water,  bears  S.  25°  B.,  from  Crook  Point,  dis- 


400  yards 

s  3  fathoms 
I  and  Cran- 
i  westward 

landlocked 
lid  and  Lis- 
)H8itlerably 
ihore,  after 
vhere  it  re- 
abounding' 
large  cove, 
th  rocks  to 

ouk  on  the 
1  provisions 

,  Little  Lis- 
intelligeut. 
aent  object 

hes  off  the 
)ui  them  is 
in  the  same 

oms  water 
om  breaks, 
Urull  Ledge 

)r  on  it,  lies 
ly  touching 
luminock  50 
fer,  and  be- 

l  generally 

lack  Prince 

1  it. 

Point,  and 
N.  33°  W., 

ring  N.  22^ 

to  Liscorab 
:  Point,  (lis- 


LI8C0MB   AND   JEGOOAN    HARBORS. 


141 


taut  23  miles.  Gull  Ledge  apparently  touching  the  north  side  of  Little 
White  islaiid  leads  southward ;  and  the  church  steeple  in  Lissom b  Har- 
bor  seen  just  west  of  Crauoerry  Point,  leads  westward  of  Saddle  Kock. 
Tides.— The  streams  are  weakaud  irregular,  being  much  affected  bv 
the  winds.  ^ 

l»rectiOAs.— Approaching  the  harbor  from  tlie  westward,  and  being 
outside  Uuwbolt  Kock,  bring  the  lighthouse  on  Cranberry  Island  to 
bear  N.  2-'^  VV.  and  stand  iu  until  the  church  bears  N.  31°  VV.,  steer  for 
it  until  past  Smoke  Point,  thou  alter  course  to  the  westward' so  as  to 
pass  midway  between  Pye  Point  and  the  southern  shore  and  anchor 
in  4J  fathoms,  mud,  with  the  east  ends  of  Lang  and  Pye  Islands  iu 
line. 

From  the  eastward,  bring  Smoke  and  Pye  Points  iu  line,  bearing  N 
560  W.;  run  in  upon  this  mark  till  abreast  ALickerel  Shoal,  then  steer 
N.  340  W.  for  the  church  until  past  Smoke  Point,  when  alter  course  and 
anchor  as  before  directed. 

Little  Liscomb  Harbor.— A  narrow  shallow  passage  separates 
Liscomb  and  Hem loe  Islands;  the  small  channel  between  the  latter 
island  ami  the  maiulaud  being  known  as  Little  Liscomb  Harbor  the 
entrance  to  which  lies  NE.  of  Liscomb  Island,  and  has  fair  anchorage 
but  is  only  adapted  for  small  vessels.  It  may  be  catered  safely  by 
Wringing  Redman  Head  apparently  touching  the  NE.  side  of  Hemloe 
Island. 

Jegogan  Harbor.— This  deep  inlet  is  not  much  frequented  and  has 
but  few  settlers.  Vessels  drawing  12  feet  water  may  anchor  near  its 
iiead,  secure  from  all  winds ;  but  the  narrow  chauuel  leading  to  it,  on 
the  NE.  side  of  Kao  Island,  is  only  100  yards  wide  and  should' not 
be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Tobacc  9  Island,  low  and  wooded,  lies  at  the  entrance  of  Jegogan 
Harbor.  A  vessel  will  pass  southward  of  the  Tobacco  Ledges,  extend- 
ing  one  mile  from  the  south  point  of  this  island  by  not  opening  Pye 
Point  north  of  Liscorab  Island  Bank,  bearing  N.  84°  W. 

Shag  Ledge  is  distinguished  by  a  low  dark  rock,  only  5  feet  above  high 
water,  which  lies  east  distant  1,200  yards  from  Redman  Head,  a  steep 
wooded  bluff  100  feet  high,  forming  the  western  point  of  the  harbor. 
There  are  several  dangers  off  its  west  side,  leaving  a  channel  only  400 
yards  wide  near  Redman  Head. 

Directions— A  vessel  intending  to  enter  Jegogan  Harbor  by  the 
middle  passage,  between  Tobacco  Island  and  Saag  Ledge,  should  bring 
the  NE.  side  of  Hemloe  Island  apparently  touching  Redman  Head, 
bearing  N  5(P  W.,  and  steer  in  with  this  mark  until  Shag  Ledge  is  in 
line  with  Brig  Point  (low  and  wooded,  on  the  west  side  of  Jegogan 
Harbor),  bearing  N.  34o  W.,  then  steer  N.  22o  W.  so  as  to  pass  200  yards 
eastward  of  Shag  Ledge  and  continue  on  the  same  course  to  the  an- 
<ihorage. 

Anchorage— Good  holding  ground  will  be  found  abreast  the  houses 


142 


NOVA    SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


on  the  weot  aide  of  the  harbor,  between  Brig  Poiut  and  Coote  Qead. 
It  shuuhl,  however,  be  borne  in  luiiul  that  a  ISfoot  rock  lies  north  800 
yarilH  from  Brig  Point ;  the  middle  of  the  small  bare  gravel  islet,  united 
at  low  water  to  Tobacco  Island,  in  line  with  the  wooded  part  oftheNE. 
side  of  that  island,  leads  clear  of  this  rock. 

Wedge  Island  is  of  clay,  and  towards  the  mainland  rises  abruptly 
to  the  height  of  5U  feet.  It  is  surrounded  by  rocky  ledges,  and  those 
ou  its  north  and  south  sides  extend  out  to  the  distance  of  nearly  ^  mile. 
Between  it  and  the  mainland,  although  the  passage  is  obstructed  by 
rooky  leilges,  a  depth  of  120  feet  may  be  carried  through,  but  on  uo 
account  should  this  channel  be  attempted  by  a  stranger. 

Band  Shoal,  with  5  fiitiioms  water  on  ii,  lies  S.  34°  E.  1§  miles  from 
Wedge  Island,  and  only  breaks  after  heavy  gales. 

Cape  St.  Mary,  137  feet  high,  is  the  headland  immediately  to  the 
eastward  of  St.  Mary  River,  an«l  on  its  eastern  side  is  Wine  Cove,  af- 
fording neither  shelter  nor  anchorage. 

St.  Mary  River.— The  entrance  is  obstructed  by  a  bar  of  sand  nearly 
4  mile  broad,  over  which  a  depth  of  about  10  feet  may  be  carried  at 
ordinary  low  water,  springs.  The  outer  edge  of  the  bar  lies  between 
Wharf  Poiut  and  Black  Ueml ;  its  inner  edge  being  a  little  below  Shag 
Beef,  which  extends  off  ^  mile  from  the  western  poiut  of  McDiarmid 
Cove. 

For  the  first  ^  mile  above  the  bar  the  channel  of  the  river  is  crooked 
and  dangerous,  running  close  to  Shag  Reef  and  the  east  bank  of  the 
river.  Half  a  mile  within  the  bar,  and  nearly  in  a  central  position  be- 
tween the  shores  of  the  river,  is  Horton  Islet,  between  which  and  the 
eastern  shore  is  the  navigable  channel.  From  the  islet  a  long  spit, 
which  dries  at  low  water,  extends  parallel  with  the  eastern  shore  to- 
wards Shag  Reef,  leaving  a  channel  between,  250  yards  across. 

Sherbrooke. — At  the  head  of  the  u„7igation,  and  on  the  east  bank 
of  the  river,  is  situated  the  village  of  Sherbrooke.  Its  principal  trade 
is  in  firewood,  deals,  and  shipbuilding;  and  it  employs  a  few  schooners 
in  the  Labrador  fisheries.  Below  Sherbrooke,  on  the  east  bank  of  the 
river,  there  is  another  church,  and  a  chapel,  one  of  which,  75  feet 
high,  forms  a  prominent  object,  and  can  be  seen  on  approaching  from 
the  sea. 

Bar. — After  the  continuance  of  southerly  winds  there  is  much  swell 
in  the  bay,  and  the  bar  of  this  river  is  one  mass  of  breakers,  making 
the  entrance  during  any  thai  of  the  tide  very  dangerous,  if  not  im- 
practicable. Black  Head  rnd  Birch  Point  in  line,  bearing  N.  39°  W., 
will  lead  clear  of  the  shoal  off  Barachois  Poiut. 

Pilots. — The  services  of  a  pilot  can  be  obtained  from  McDiarmid 
Cove,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  to  St.  Mary  River,  by  any 
vessel  carrying  the  usual  pilot  signal. 

Directions. — With  the  wind  and  weather  favorable,  steer  for  Wedge 
Island  lighthouse  ou  WNW.  bearing,  so  as  to  open  out  the  entrance  of 


8T.    MARY    RIVER — INDIAN    BAY. 


14a 


Kite  Head. 

i  north  800 

ilet,  united 

of  the  NE. 

)8  abruptly 
and  tboae 
arly  ^  uiile. 
tructed  by 
but  on  no 

miles  from 

tely  to  the 
le  Cove,  af- 

jand  nearly 
(carried  at 
,68  between 
below  Shag 
McDiarniid 

r  is  crooked 
jank  of  the 
position  be- 
eh  and  the 
a  long  spit, 
n  shore  to- 

i  east  bank 
icipal  trade 

V  schooners 
tjank  of  the 
ich,  75  feet 
iching  from 

much  swell 
ers,  making 
I,  if  not  im- 
f  N.  39°  W., 

McDiarmid 
ver,  by  any 

V  for  Wedge 
entrance  of 


the  river.  To  outer  the  river  safely,  through  the  crooked  channel,  a 
pilot  is  requisite;  for  not  only  does  the  bar,  but  the  cross  set  of  the 
tides  upon  Shag  Reef  and  Bridget  Shoal,  render  local  kuowltMlge  abso- 
lutely necessary. 

Vessels  frequenting  this  river  moor  head  and  stern,  or  are  secured  to 
the  wharves,  as  there  is  not  sufficient  width  in  the  channel,  with  any 
scope  of  cable,  to  swing  clear  of  the  mud  ilats.  During  the  summer 
months  vessels  occasionally  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  sand,  in  the  middle 
of  the  bay,  between  Barachois  Point  and  Cape  St.  Mary ;  but  later  iu 
the  season  such  anchorage  is  not  recommended. 

Water  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water,  lies  S.  23^  E.  '^  mile  from  Wal- 
ter  Island.  Wedge  Island  in  line  with  the  east  extreme  of  Liscomb 
Island  bearing  S.  59°  W.  leads  SE.  of  Walter  Shoal. 

Indian  Bay  is  entirely  open  to  the  SE.  and  only  att'ords  some  shel- 
ter  from  S  W.  winds  to  fishing  and  small  coasting  vessels.  The  head  of 
the  bay  receives  the  water  of  a  large  fresh-water  lake,  from  which  it  is 
only  separated  by  a  narrow  beach  of  sand.  The  hills  forming  the 
shores  of  the  lake  and  bay  afford  good  soil,  and  are  carefully  cultivated. 

Walter  Island  is  low  and  wooded,  and  at  low  water  a  beach  of 
sand  and  stones  nearly  unites  it  to  the  main  land  near  Wine  Head,  a 
high  clay  bank  on  the  west  side  of  Indian  Bay.  A  reef  of  rocks  ex- 
tends  to  the  distance  400  yards  from  its  eastern  side,  aflFording  some 
shelter  to  an  insecure  anchorage  in  the  cove  north  of  the  island,  some- 
times used  by  coasting  vessels. 

Rude  Shoal,  composed  of  rock,  extends  J  mile  in  an  easterly  direc. 
tion  from  Wine  Head,  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Indian 
Bay.  Fleming  Cliff,  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  seen  open  of  Eude 
Point,  leads  eastward  of  Rnde  Shoal. 

Hollins  Bay,  the  next  inlet  to  the  eastward  of  Indian  Bay,  is  open 
to  the  SB.,  and  affords  shelter  at  its  head  to  boats  and  small  craft. 
At  its  entrance,  two-thirds  across  towards  Bickerton  Island,  lies  Hollins 
Shoal,  with  only  6  fe<^t  water  on  it. 

Hollins  Head,  the  SW.  point  of  Hollins  Bay,  bearing  from  the 
beacon  on  Wedge  Island,  N.  58°  E.,  6§  miles,  is  a  small  and  remarka- 
ble peninsula,  united  to  the  main  land  by  a  long  beach  of  stones  and 
shingle,  having  on  its  eastern  side  a  clifl"  of  reddish  clay  and  bowlders 
50  feet  high.  At  the  time  of  the  survey  in  1850  it  was  fast  wasting  by 
the  action  of  the  sea. 

Nizonmate  Shoal.— A  reef  extends  to  the  southward  IJ  miles  from 
Hollins  Head,  on  which  the  shoalest  patches  are,  the  Nixonmate  Shoal 
and  Webb  Rock,  distant  IJ  miles  and  800  yards  respectively  from  the 
head,  and  carrying  10  and  6  feet  at  low  water.  There  are  patches  of  15 
and  20  feet  water  between  them.  Castor  Kock  and  Cape  Mocodome  in 
line,  bearing  K  oio  B.,  lead  J  mile  to  the  southward  of  these  dangers  ; 
and  there  is  a  clear  passage  ^  mile  wide  between  them  and  Castor 
Shoals. 


i 


144 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.   COAST. 


I 


Caator  Rook,  Mtnall,  of  dark  alate,  and  4  feet  above  high  water, 
bears  from  the  eaHtern  iioint  of  Bickerton  Islaud  south  1^  miles;  and 
Castor  Siioals,  rocky  patches  with  3,  4,  and  4^  fathoms  water  on  them, 
lie  oft'  it  to  the  eastward,  westward,  and  southward. 

Flook  Shoal,  the  outermost  of  these  patches  with  3;^  fathoms,  bears 
from  Castor  Hock,  8.  5°  W.,  Ij}  miles;  Green  Island  seen  open  8onth> 
ward  of  Pollux  Kock,  bearing  N.  57'^  E.,  leads  southward  of  Fleck 
Shoal. 

The  |)assage  between  Pollux  Kock  and  the  nearest  Castor  shoal  is 
more  than  a  mile  wide.  Harbor  Island,  apparently  touching  Cape 
Mocodome,  N.  28°  E.,  leads  through  it ;  but  the  NW.  extremity  of  the 
island  can  not  always  be  distinguished  trom  the  land  behind. 

Port  Bickerton  is  a  safe  and  convenient  little  harbor  for' small  ves- 
sels. It  has  a  clear  entrance,  carrying  6  fathoms  water,  between  Bick- 
erton Island  and  Barachois  Head,  but  it  is  less  than  400  yards  wide. 
Barachois  Head,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  may  be  known  by 
its  white  clift',  from  which,  as  also  from  the  island,  a  reef  extends  4U0 
feet  to  the  SE. 

Directiona. — ^To  enter  Port  Bickerton  with  a  leading  wind,  being  ^ 
mile  or  more  from  the  entrance,  open  Bound  Island  (small,  with  red 
clay  bank  \  and  one  mile  within  the  harbor),  only  so  far  as  to  appar- 
ently touch  the  NE.  side  of  Bickerton  Island,  bearing  N.  r)6°  W.  steer 
in  with  these  marks  in  line  until  abreast  the  SE.  point  of  the  island; 
then  having  passed  in  mid-channel  through  the  entrance,  avoid  the 
shoal  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor  by  keeping  close  along  the  eastern 
shore  until  abreast  Bound  Island,  where  a  vessel  may  anchor,  within 
the  shoal,  iu  13  or  14  feet  water  over  a  bottom  of  mad. 

If  preferable,  on  entering  steer  to  the  westward  round  Bickerton  Is- 
land at  a  distance  of  300  yards,  so  as  to  pass  between  it  and  the  shoal 
into  the  western  part  of  the  harbor,  where  the  anchorage,  in  12  feet 
over  mud  bottom,  is  sheltered  by  the  reefs  which  leave  only  a  shallow 
boat  channel  between  the  island  and  the  main  land  to  the  westward. 

Fiaherman  Harbor  is  quite  open  to  the  SE.,  so  that  the  only  part 
that  can  be  termed  a  harbor  is  a  cove  on  its  southern  shore,  formed  by 
a  long  beach  of  shingle,  and  in  which  vessels  may  lie  securely  iu  10  to 
15  feet  at  low  water,  over  a  bottom  of  mud.  Outside  the  cove  the 
holding  ground  is  good  in  4  to  7  fathoms,  and  as  the  sea  is  in  some  degree 
broken  by  the  dangers  oft'  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  large  vessels  with  good 
ground  tackle  might  safely  anchor  there  daring  the  summer  months. 

Directiona. — To  enter  Fisherman  Harbor  from  the  southward  witU  a 
fair  wind,  and  being  within  Pollux  Bock,  observe  that  the  marks  which 
just  clear  the  rocks  oft'  Cape  Mocodome  are  Holly  Point  (on  the  wester.i 
side  of  the  entrance  of  Isaac  Harbor),  in  line  with  Country  Harbo.' 
Head,  bearing  N.  5°  W. ;  keep  Holly  Point  only  a  degree  or  two  open 
until  past  Rose  Shoal,  when  the  point  may  be  opened  more,  iu  order  to 
give  tite  rocks  off  the  cape  a  wider  berth. 


)  high  water, 
^  miles;  ami 
ftter  on  them, 

tthoins,  bears 
a  open  sonth- 
'ard  of  Fleck 

istor  shoal  is 

uching  Cape 

remlty  of  the 

ind. 

for' small  ves- 

[)etvreen  Bick- 

yards  wide. 

be  known  by 
'  extends  4U0 

wind,  being  ^ 
iiall,  with  red 
as  to  appar> 
r)6o  W.  steer 
of  the  island ; 
ice,  avoid  the 
g  the  eastern 
pnchor,  withm 

Bickerton  Is- 
and  the  shoal 
ge,  in  12  feet 
)nly  a  shallow 
e  westward, 
the  only  part 
)re,  formed  by 
jurely  in  10  to 
the  cove  the 
n  some  degree 
sels  with  good 
ner  months, 
thward  witU  a 
9  marks  which 
m  the  wester  1 
mntry  Harbo.' 
e  or  two  open 
tre,  in  order  to 


COUNTRV  HARBOR. 


146 


As  soon  as  Dorkin  Island,  at  the  head  of  the  harbor,  opens  out  to  the 

r  iZn  «r     u  ''''°'^'*  ^'^^  ***^  '^«  ««^«  «»  ^''«  ^^''thern  shore,  bear- 
ing  N.  620  W.,  the  vessel  may  steer  to  the  westward  into  the  bay,  wh«re 

the  only  danger  is  a  rooky  shoal,  extending  i  mile  from  the  high  clay 
clift  next  eastward  of  the  cove  jnst  montioned. 

Proceeding  for  the  harbor  from  the  eastward  between  Rose  Shoal  and 
Black  Ledge  the  marks  are  Dorkin  Island  :ind  the  shingle  beach  of  the 
cove  (already  mentioned)  bearing  N.  62°  W. 

Country  Harbor  is  nnequaled  by  any  other  on  the  coast  east  of 
Halifax.  It  may  be  easily  recognized  by  the  three  islands,  Harbor. 
Goose  and  Green,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel  leading  to  it  and 
Isaac  Harbor,  as  well  as  by  Country  Harbor  H  ad,  a  bold  and  rvecini. 
tous  headland  of  clay-slate,  in  nearly  vertical  .trata,  100  fept  high,  ami 
which  may  be  considered  as  the  termination  of  its  western  shore  The 
entrance  is  abreast  Harbor  Point,  3  miles  farther  to  the  non'awestward 
where  the  channel  is  600  yards  wide,  with  a  dep;h  of  11  .  tho.ns 

From  thence  the  harbor,  with  a  varying  depth  from  10  to  6*  t  tl     «ih 
IS  easily  navigable  as  far  as  Stewart  Cove  on  the  eastern  si,  >'r   oil 
which  IS  an  excellent  land-locked  anchorage,  with  4J  to  7  fatho.ns,  mud 
4  miles  from  the  entrance.    Throughout  this  distance  t  .^  ;.nly  danger 
to  be  avoided  is  a  rock,  with  3  feet  of  water,  about  100  yar*;^,  off  shore 
near  the  southern  point  of  Mount  Misery  Peninsula 

From  Stewart  Cove  the  channel  becomes  narrow,  but  continues  navi- 
gable  for  large  ve&sels  2^  miles  above  it  and  for  small  vessels  to  the 
entrance  of  the  river  at  the  head  of  the  harbor,  which  is  distant  7+ 
miles  from  its  entrance  at  Harbor  Point.  Boats  can  as.  on.l  the  river  '' 
miles,  or  to  J  mile  above  the  bridge,  where  the  tide  ends. 

The  shores  of  this  harbor  are  steep-to  on  either  side,  the  summits  of 
the  ridges  being  generally  only  a  short  distance  from  the  shore,  and 
increasing  in  elevation  from  200  feet  at  the  entrance  to  470  feet  near 
Its  head.  The  population  scattered  along  the  thore  are  piincipallv 
occupied  m  lumbering  and  the  fisheries. 

Oreen  Point,  on  the  western  shore,  at  ?  ..-iia  within  the  entrance,  is 
composed  ot  shingle,  inclosing  a  large  pond,  and  f  mile  farther  in,  on 
the  same  side,  is  Mount  Misery,  a  round  peninsulated  hill  140  feet  in 
height,  and  which  forms  the  principa!  leading  mark  for  clearing  the 
dangers  lying  off  the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

oniJ***?*.^!'^®'  ®-  ^1°  *^'  3S  "i'es  from  Cape  Mocodome,  is  a  rock  about 
200  yards  m  length,  which  covers  at  half  tide.  It  is  the  apex  of  a  rocky 
shoal  about  800  yards  loag,  around  which  the  soundings  are  too  daep 
and  irregular  to  afford  much  warning  by  the  lead.  When  the  sea  breaks 
on  this  shoal,  as  it  invariably  does-excepting  with  a  high  tide  accom- 
panied  by  unusually  smooth  water-there  is  no  difficulty  in  passing  on 
either  side  of  the  ledge.  The  nearest  danger  to  the  westward  being 
laylor  Shoal,  which  bears  from  it  S.  80o  VV.  nearly  2  miles,  it  is  onlv 
5314- 10 


146 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.    E.    COAST. 


necessary  when  passing  on  that  side  to  give  the  rock  or  breakers  a  berth 

of  i  mile. 

Pollux  Rock,  small,  and  4  feet  high,  lies  south  2i  miles  from  Cape 
Mocodome,  and  Irom  it  a  reef  extends  800  yards  to  the  NW.  To  pass 
clear  to  the  westward  of  it,  Country  Harbor  Head  must  not  be  opened 
out  farther  than  to  be  only  just  seen  in  line  with  the  bank  or  cliff  off 
Cape  Mocodome,  and  over  the  shingle  beaches  which  form  its  SB. 
extremity. 

Singly  Shoal,  with  2i  fathoms  water  on  it,  lies  N.  68°  E.  J  mile  east- 
ward of  Pollux  Rock.  Taylor  Shoal  has  3  fathoms  on  it,  and  lies  % 
mile  further  to  the  southward ;  the  two  points  on  the  eastern  side  of 
Goose  Island,  in  line  bearing  N.  30°  E.,  lead  to  the  eastward  of  this 
shoal,  but  those  points  are  low,  and  can  seldom  be  distinguisJied. 
These  two  shoals  are  all  the  more  dangerous,  inasmuch  as  they  break 
only  dnriug  a  heavy  sea. 

Rose  Shoal  is  a  rocky  ledge  §  mile  long  on  which  the  least  water  is 
6  feet  I  it  lies  immediately  off  the  pitch  of  Cape  Mocodome,  from  which 
its  outer  or  southern  extremity  bears  S.  51°  E.,  distant  1^  miles.  The 
mark  for  leading  to  the  southward  of  Rose  Shoal  is  Fleck  Point,  on 
the  northern  side  of  Hollins  Bay,  just  open  of  Bickerton  Island,  bear- 
ing N.  79°  W. ;  and  for  leading  to  the  northward,  Barachois  Head  and 
Cape  Rock  in  line,  bearing  west. 

Bull  Rock  is  small,  dries  at  low  water,  and  bears  8.  68°  B.  700 
yards  from  Cape  Mocodome,  off  which  there  are  other  rocks  with  6  feet 
water,  the  outermost  distant  ^  mile  from  the  cape.  These  all  lie  on 
the  rocky  shoal  which  extends  %  mile  out  from  the  cape,  and  are  ex- 
ceedingly dangerous  at  high  water  and  with  a  smooth  sea,  when  they 
are  not  marUed  by  breakers. 

Shoal  Place,  the  most  off-lying  of  the  easternmost  Country  Harbor 
ledges,  bears  from  Green  Island  S.  25°  B.  2J  miles.  It  is  small  and 
rocky,  with  5  fathoms  water,  and  breaks  only  when  a  heavy  sea  is 

running. 

Tomcod  Rock  covers  at  high  water,  and  lies  IJ  miles  south  of  Green 
Island.  When  breaking,  as  it  usually  does,  this  danger  serves  to  warn 
vessels  of  their  approach  tv  the  Tomcod  Shoals,  which  are  small  rocky 
patches  scattered  around  the  rock  in  various  directions. 

Tomcod  Shoals.— The  northernmost  of  these  patches,  named  Gull 
Nest,  with  3  fathoms  water,  bears  from  Tomcod  Rock  N.  8°  W.,  dis- 
tant 800  yards,  and  from  Green  Island  S.  5°  W.  3  mile,  with  a  clear 
passage  between.  But  the  westernmost  patches,  with  2^,  3^,  and  4 
fathoms  water,  are  most  in  the  way  of  vessels  bound  to  or  from  Country 
Harbor.  The  marks  that  lead  close  to  the  westward  of  them  are  Har- 
bor Island,  open  westward  of  the  low,  dry  reef  off  Flying  Point  (the 
south  extremity  of  Goose  Island)  bearing  N.  28°  W.;  or  the  summit  of 
Mount  Misery  in  line  with  Harbor  Point,  bearing  N.  47o  W. 

Black  Ledge,  more  than  a  mile  in  length  in  a  north  and  south  di- 


ifc 


COUNTRY    HARriOR — SHOALS. 


147 


ikers  n  berth 

)8  from  Cape 
V.  To  pass 
jt  be  opeued 
ik  or  cliff  off 
brm  its  SE. 

.  ^  mile  east- 
it,  aud  lies  % 
item  side  of 
ward  of  this 
istingnislietl. 
s  they  break 

east  water  is 
,  from  which 
miles.  The 
ck  Point,  on 
Island,  bear- 
)i8  Head  aud 

5.  68°  E.  700 
rs  with  6  feet 
)se  all  lie  on 
,  and  are  ex- 
»,  when  they 

in  try  Harbor 
is  small  and 
heavy  sea  is 

mth  of  Green 
erves  to  warn 
e  small  rocky 

t,  named  Gull 
f.  80W.,  dis- 
,  with  a  clear 
2i,  34,  and  4 
from  Country 
tiem  are  Har- 
ug  Point  (the 
the  summit  of 
W. 
and  south  di- 


rection, lies  directly  off  the  month  of  Fisherman  Harbor.  The  central 
part  of  it  is  2  feet  above  high  water,  and  in  several  other  parts  it  dries, 
or  nearly  so  at  low  water.  Prom  its  southern  extremity,  which  is 
steep  to  with  only  2  feet  water,  Oapj  Mocodome  (in  line  with  HolJins 
Head)  bears  8. 73o  W.,  and  is  distant  rather  more  than  Due  mile.  The 
head  kept  open  leads  southward,  and  the  summit  of  Mount  Misery  open 
of  Country  Harbor  Sead  bearing  N.  41o  w.  leads  eastward  of  Black 
Ledge. 

The  Marks  to  clear  Middle  Ledge  to  the  eastward  at  the  distance 
of  800  yards  are  the  western  points  of  Goose  Island  in  line,  bearing 
north  ;  and  these  marks  lead  also  over  Jarvis  Bank,  a  fishing  ground 
lying  a  mile  further  out  to  the  SE.,  and  on  which  the  least  water  found 
was  14  fathoms.  The  marks  for  passing  to  the  southward  or  outside 
of  Middle  Ledge  are  Castor  and  Pollux  Rocks  in  line  bearing  N.  79o 
W.,  or  Pollux  Rock  and  Hollins  Head  in  line  N.  760  W.;  these  marks 
also  lead  close  inside  or  northward  of  Taylor  Shoal. 

Green,  Goose,  and  Harbor  Islands  are  formed  of  drift  bowlder 
clay,  resting  on  highly  inclined  clayslate  rock,  and  are  wooded  with 
small  spruce  trees.  They  are  low,  the  highest  hill  on  Goose  Island,  the 
middle  and  the  largest  of  the  three,  not  exceeding  80  feet  above  the 
sea. 

The  nnujerous  off  lying  dangers  in  this  locality  forbid  the  coast  being 
ai)proache«l,  during  dark  nights  or  fogs,  nearer  than  the  depth  of  30 
fathoms,  and  the  constant  use  of  the  lead  should  be  doen.ed  indispen- 
sable,  for  by  it  alone  can  the  position  of  the  ship  be  ascertained. 

White  Rock,  with  10  feet  water,  lies  N.  67°  E.,  one  mile  from  Green 
Island;  J  mile  further  off  on  the  same  bearing  there  is  a  rock,  with  4i 
fathoms  water.  There  are  other  patches  nearer  the  island,  the  south- 
ernmost  of  which,  with  about  2  fathoms  water,  bears  from  its  south  ex- 
treme  N.  72°  E.  ^  mile. 

Ragged  Ledge  extends  nearly  IJ  miles  from  the  east  end  of  Goose 
Island  in  an  easterly  direction,  and  from  its  outer  extremity— which  is 
seldom  entirely  covered— the  whole  of  the  reef  is  partially  dry  at  low 
tides.  There  is  no  passage  for  vessels  between  this  ledge  and  Green 
Island,  or  between  Goose  and  Green  Islands,  the  whole  space  being 
studded  with  rocky  patches  having  10,  12,  and  18  feet  water  on  them 
and  which  break  heavily  in  bad  weather.  ' 

Dutch  Shoal,  is  separated  from  the  shallow  water  extending  froiu  the 
shore  of  Goose  Island  by  a  very  narrow  channel;  aud  its  northern 
edge  is  just  cleared  when  BurUe  and  Beach  Points  (on  Harbor  and  Goose 
Islands  respectively)  are  in  line,  bearing  west,  bearing  in  mind  that  the 
point  of  the  northern  beach  of  Harbor  Island  must  at  the  same  time  be 
well  in  sight  to  the  northward  of  them  both. 

Split  Rock,  small,  and  awash  at  low-water  springs,  lies  near  the 
southern  end  of  a  long  rocky  shoal,  which,  includes  two  detached 
patches  of  3J  and  5  fathoms  water. 


118 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.   E.   COAST. 


ft 


!:4 


VV^ 


m 


Mil 


From  Split  Bock,  which  is  dangerous  at  high  water  and  with  a  smooth 
sea,  Darby  Point,  on  the  main  land  near  Island  Harbor,  appears  just 
open  northward  of  Beach  Point  (the  north  end  of  Goose  Island),  bear- 
ing N.  73°  W. ;  the  south  extremity  of  Green  Island  bears  S.  59°  W. 
2i  miles ;  the  part  of  Brandy  Ledge  that  dries  N.  83°  B.  IJ^  miles ;  and 
the  eastern  side  of  New  Harbor  Head,  N.  33°  B.  2  miles. 

Brandy  Ledge,  the  easternmost  of  the  dangers  oflf  Green  Island,  is 
a  rocky  shoal  if  mile  in  length,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  J  mile  broad. 
Near  the  center  of  the  ledge  is  a  spot  which  only  covers  at  high  water, 
and  from  it  New  Harbor  Head  bears  N.  12°  W.  1§  miles,  the  channel 
between  being  clear. 

Tides. — The  streams  are  weak,  seldom  exceeding  half  a  knot. 
Directions.— Having  passed  Middle  Ledge,  either  by  giving  its  break- 
ers a  sufficient  berth,  or  by  the  aid  of  the  given  leading  marks,  open 
the  summit  of  Mount  Misery  only  just  to  the  eastward  of  Country  Har- 
bor Head,  bearing  N.  41°  W.,  and  steer  in  with  these  marks  on  until 
about  midway  between  Eose  Sboal  and  the  south  point  of  Goose  Island, 
or  until  the  latter  is  abeam ;  then  alter  course  to  N.  23°  W.,  and  when 
the  summit  of  Mount  Misery  is  in  line  with  Harbor  Point  steer  N.  47° 
W.,  or  so  as  to  keep  the  last-named  marks  on,  until  near  the  mouth 
of  the  harbor,  which  enter  in  mid  channel.  Anchor  anywhere  within 
it,  as  there  are  no  detached  dangers  in  the  way,  excepting  the  rock 
already  mentioned,  lying  100  yards  ott'  the  southeastern  point  of  Mount 
Misery  Peninsula.  If  intending  to  proceed  to  Stewart  Cove,  keep  well 
over  towards  the  western  shore,  to  avoid  the  mussel  beds  that  lie  oflf 
the  islet  and  the  points  of  small  coves  on  the  eastern  shore. 

Island  Harbor  lies  between  Harbor  Island  and  the  main  shore,  in 
a  bay  between  two  long  shingle  points  on  the  north  side  of  Harbor 
Island.  Directly  abreast  and  J  mile  distant  is  Drumhead,  a  small 
island,  close  to  the  mainland  and  connected  with  it  at  low  water,  and 
next  eastward  from  it  is  Darby  Point,  both  of  which  are  used  as  lead- 
ing marks. 

Pilots. — During  the  fishing  season  several  families  reside  on  Harbor 
Island,  as  well  as  on  the  opposite  mainland,  from  whence  pilots  may  be 
obtained;  but  they  are  not  much  in  the  habit  of  conducting  vessels 
drawing  more  than  10  or  12  feet  water. 

Tides. — The  flood  stream  runs  from  the  eastward  and  its  rate  is  usu- 
ally less  than  one  knot,  but  it  is  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 

Directions :  from  the  Eastward.— Coasting  vessels  usually  take 
the  inner  route,  especially  late  in  the  autumn  when  northerly  winds 
prevail,  passing  between  Brandy  Ledge  and  New  Harbor  Head,  and 
through  the  Sound,  as  the  passage  between  Goose  Island  and  the  main- 
land is  termed.  Having  passed  New  Harbor  Head  at  the  distance  of 
^  mile,  observe  that  the  marks  for  clearing  the  shoals  off  Coddle  Har- 
bor, Coddle  'sland,  and  Seal  Cove,  are  Darby  Point  and  Drumhead  in 
line,  bearin     west;   therefore  keep  Drum  Head  only  just  open  until 


ISAAC    HARBOR. 


149 


bh  a  smooth 
spears  just 
and),  bear- 
}  S.  59°  W. 
miles ;  and 

in  Island,  is 
mile  broad, 
tiigh  water, 
he  channel 

:not. 

ig  it«  break- 
narks,  open 
)untry  Har- 
[■ks  on  until 
oose  Island, 
.,  and  when 
steer  N.  47° 

the  mouth 
here  within 
ng  the  rock 
nt  of  Mount 
e,  keep  well 

that  lie  oflF 

lin  shore,  in 
B  of  Harbor 
ad,  a  small 
r  water,  and 
ised  us  lead- 

e  on  Harbor 
(ilots  may  be 
iting  vessels 

s  rate  is  usu- 
inds. 

usually  take 
therly  winds 
r  Head,  and 
ud  the  main- 
5  distance  of 
Uoddle  Har- 
Jrumhead  in 
it  open  until 


abreast  Beach  Point  (Goose  Island);  then  bring  Burke  Point  to  bear 
8.  78°  W.,  and  bearing  in  mind  the  mark  for  clearing  Burke  Shoal, 
steer  so  as  to  pass  the  point,  and  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  mud,  just  out- 
side the  line  .joining  the  two  shingle  points  of  the  harbor.  It  is  advis- 
able to  moor  in  this  narrow  channel  with  one  anchor  well  into  the  bay 
to  the  southward. 

A  vessel  wiU  pass  north  of  the  dangers  southward  of  this  route  by 
keeping  both  the  shingle  points  of  Harbor  Island  open  northward  of 
Beach  Point,  bearing  west  until  the  vessel  is  as  far  west  as  Coddle 
Island ;  then  the  course  must  be  more  to  the  north  -^ard  to  clear  the 
shoal  off  Goose  Island,  which  contracts  the  channel  uetween  it  and 
Graham  Shoal,  off  Seal  Cove,  to  the  breadth  of  400  yards. 

From  the  Southward,  having  a  southerly  or  easterly  wind,  enter  the 
channel  between  Harbor  and  Goose  Islands,  steering  north,  and  border- 
ing on  the  Goose  Island  side  of  a  mid-channel  course,  in  order  to  avoid 
the  reef  off  Saliidin  Point  and  the  Middle  Ground.  Having  passed  be- 
tween the  latter  and  the  reef  always  visible  off  Goose  Island,  alter 
course  to  X.  23°  W.,  until  Bed  and  Drum  Heads  are  in  line,  then  steer 
K  t)3o  W.,  keeping  them  in  one  to  clear  Burke  Shoal ;  and  when  Burke 
Point,  which  is  bold  to  the  northward,  bears  S.  78°  W.,  steer  to  the 
westward,  and  having  passed  the  point,  anchor  as  before  directed. 

From  the  Westward,  pass  th«  NW.  point  of  Harbor  Island  at  a 
distance  of  500  yards,  steering  N.  33°  E.  until  Drum  Head  and  Darby 
Point  are  in  line,  bearing  east;  then  keep  to  the  eastward,  and  bring 
Burke  Point  in  line  with  the  remarkable  hill  on  Goose  Island,  bear- 
ing S.  56°  E.,  which  leads  to  the  anchorage. 

Isaac  Harbor  is  separated  from  Country  Harbor  by  Ragged  Point, 
opposite  which,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  is  Red  Head,  a  small 
peninsula  with  red  clay  cliffs,  united  to  the  mainland  by  shingle  beaches, 
inclosing  a  shallow  pond. 

Oft"  the  next  little  peninsula  to  the  northward,  Webb  Reef  extends 
westward  across  the  entrance  to  the  distance  of  450  yards,  leaving  a 
passage  with  7  fathoms  water,  but  only  400  yards  wide,  between  it  and 
Ragged  Rocks,  which  cover  at  high  water,  and  extend  200  yards  from 
the  shore  i  mile  within  Bagged  Point. 

Pilots.— These  dangers,  and  some  shallow  water  within  the  harbor  off 
its  western  shore,  render  a  pilot  necessary  to  a  stranger  entering  this 
harbor,  in  which  vessels  may  anchor  securely  in  3^  to  4  fathoms,  mud. 

Webb  Cove,  in  which  the  fishing  and  coasting  vessels  usually  anchor, 
in  2  fathoms,  mud,  is  on  the  eastern  side,  and  just  within  the  entrance. 
From  it  the  harbor  runs  in  a  northerly  direction  for  a  distance  of  3  miles ; 
at  its  head  is  a  rapid  stream  and  saw  mill.  The  shores  on  either  side 
rise  gradually  to  the  summits  of  hills  of  drift  clay  and  bowlders,  from 
200  to  300  feet  high,  and  are  cultivated  to  some  extent  by  an  indus- 
trious community,  whose  principal  occupations  appear  to  be  coasting 
and  the  fisheries. 


BE" 


150 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.   E.    COAST. 


Supplies. — Fresh  provisions  in  moderate  quantity,  and  water,  may 
be  readily  obtained  '.n  Isaac  Harbor. 

Seal  Cove,  a  small  indentation  immediately  opposite  Ooose  Island, 
dries  at  low  water,  with  tbe  exception  of  a  narrow  channel  only  avail- 
able for  boats. 

Coddle  Harbor,  situated  within  the  island  of  the  same  name,  \w%- 
sesses  secure  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  in  12  to  14  feet  water.  The 
principal  entrance  is  from  the  eastward,  but  as  the  dangers  are  too 
numerous  for  any  written  directions  to  avail,  the  place  should  on  no  ac- 
count be  attempted  by  a  stranger. 

New  Harbor  Cove  is  merely  a  shallow  bay  open  to  the  SE.,  and 
affording  no  safe  anchorage.  At  the  head  of  the  cove  is  the  entrance 
of  St.  Catherine  Biver,  only  one  foot  deep  at  low  water,  and  dangerous 
to*boats  when  there  is  any  sea  running.  For  the  first  5  miles  the  river 
flows  through  a  narrow  inlet,  which  boats  can  ascend  to  its  head ;  the 
stream  then  becomes  rapid  and  unnavigable  for  4  miles  farther,  to  the 
large  lake  from  whence  it  flows. 

Little  Harbor,  a  small  shallow  ind  entation  in  the  coast  next  west  of 
Berry  Head,  is  only  adaped  to  admit  boats  at  high  water.  Haifa  mile 
from  its  entrance,  in  a  iSE.  direction,  is  Net  Kock,  with  about  3  fathoms 
^ater,  and  south  2^  miles  distant  is  a  patch — with  6  fathoms  water — 
known  as  Tufflu  Bank,  on  which  the  sea  is  said  to  break  occasionally 
after  very  heavy  gales. 

Torbay  is  nearly  9  miles  long  east  and  west,  and  4  miles  deep.  On 
its  northern  shore.  Molasses,  Gole,  and  Oharlo  Harbors  afford  secure 
anchorage  for  sn)all  vessels  in  2  to  3  fathoms  water,  but  the  approach 
to  them  all  is  more  or  less  difficult  and  would  require  local  knowledge. 

On  the  shores  of  Molasses  Harbor  is  a  settlement  of  Acadians,  and  on 
an  elevation  IIU  feet  above  the  sea,  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance, 
stands  their  chapel,  a  large  wooden  building  without  a  steeple.  There 
are  settlements  also  at  Gole  and  Gharlo  Harbors,  as  well  as  ou  the  banks 
of  Larry  River  at  the  west  end  of  the  bay ;  and  there  are  chapels  on 
the  eastern  side  of  the  two  last-named  places,  but  they  are  small  wooden 
buildings  undistinguishable  from  others  in  the  vicinity. 

The  Entrance  into  Torbay  is  between  Berry  Head  and  the  small  group 
of  Sugar  Islands,  of  clay  slate  not  exceeding  30  feet  in  height,  which 
stretch  across  the  eastern  part  of  the  bay ;  where  there  is  a  clear  chan- 
nel ^  mile  wide,  with  8  to  12  fathoms  water.  The  anchorage  within  this 
entrance,  off  Webber  Gove,  near  the  western  end  of  the  bay,  is  easy  of 
access  and  secure,  in  6  fathoms,  sand  and  mud  ;  the  only  danger  in  the 
way  being  Webber  Shoal,  with  12  feet  water,  which  lies  off  the  north 
side  of  the  peninsula,  of  which  Berry  Head  is  the  eastern  extremity. 

Berry  Head  is  a  lo\?  rocky  point  at  the  eastern  extremity  of  a 
'.euinsula,  nowhere  exceeding  80  feet  in  height,  and  which  is  united  to 
the  mainland  by  a  beach  and  range  of  sand-hills.  Shallow  water  ex- 
teijds  off  this  peninsula  ^  mile  to  the  southward,  and  off  Berry  Head 


TORBAY — WHITEHAVEN. 


151 


nrater,  may 

oae  Island) 
ouly  avail- 

uame,  pos- 
:ater.  The 
era  are  too 
id  on  no  ac- 

le  SE.,  and 
lie  entrance 
[  daugeious 
es  the  river 
3  head ;  the 
ther,  to  the 

\e\t  west  of 
Haifa  mile 
It  3  fathoms 
>m8  water — 
iccasionally 

s  deep.  On 
lord  secure 
be  approach 
knowledge. 
ian8,  and  on 
he  entrance, 
jple.  There 
)u  the  banks 
)  chapels  on 
mall  wooden 

!  small  group 
eight,  which 
I  clear  chan- 
e  within  this 
ly,  is  easy  of 
anger  in  the 
)ff  the  north 
extremity, 
tremity  of  a 
is  united  to 
)w  water  ex- 
Berry  Head 


there  is  a  reef,  as  well  as  detached  rocks,  with  varying  depths  on  them, 
the  outermost  lying  800  yards  eastward  of  the  head. 

Shag  Rock,  2  feet  above  ordinary  high  water,  lies  S.  55°  \V.,  2J 
miles  from  Berry  Head.  Shallow  water  extends  800  yards  eastward  of 
the  rock,  and  between  it  and  the  shore  there  are  several  rocks  which 
dry  at  half  tide. 

Gull  Rock,  small  and  detached,  with  about  12  feet  water,  lies  S.  30° 
W.  nearly  one  mile  from  Berry  Head,  and  east  IJ  miles  from  Shag  Kock. 
The  Shag  in  line  with  New  Harbor  Head,  bearing  S.  75°  W,,  lea-ls  south- 
ward of  Gull  Rock  and  Tcrbay  Ledges. 

Torbay  LedgQS,  lying  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  are  still 
more  dangerous.  French  Bock,  the  farthest  out,  with  only  10  feet  water, 
lies  with  Topstone  Ledge  off  the  western  extremity  of  the  Sugar  Islands, 
bearing  N.  12°  W.  1^  miles ;  Berry  Head,  N.  85°  VV.  IJ  miles ;  and  the 
Bull  Kock,  with  4  feet  water,  which  usually  breaks,  N.  07°  E.  g  mile. 
The  other  ledges  lie  between  these  and  the  islands,  wi^h  deei)  water 
between  them,  but  so  scattered  as  to  leave  no  safe  passage. 

Hog  Island  apparently  touching  Leblanc  Point,  bearing  N.  33°  B., 
leads  eastward  of  the  Bull  Rock  ;  and  Cole  Harbor  head,  open  westward 
of  Topstone  Ledge,  N.  5°  B.,  leads  westward  of  French  Rock  and  the 
ledges  next  northward  of  it.  but  does  not  clear  Brig  Rock,  the  western- 
most of  the  ledges,  with  9  feet  water,  and  from  which  Topstone  Ledge 
bears  N.  10°  E.  600  yards.  The  soundings  are  so  irregular  around  these 
ledges,  and  the  depth  so  great  (15  fathoms  close  to  them),  that  the  lead 
scarcely  affords  any  assistance. 

Directions. — With  a  fair  wind  intoTorbay,  steer  in  with  the  western 
extreme  of  the  islet,  next  east  of  Topstone  Ledge,  apparently  touching 
Mars  Head,  and  bearing  N.  27°  B.,  or  with  the  eastern  point  at  the  en- 
trance of  Cole  Harbor  open  westward  of  Topstone  Ledge,  the  apparent 
breadth  of  the  latter,  bearing  N.  5°  E.,  whichever  course  the  wind  may 
render  preferable;  and  when  Berry  Head  and  the  points  westward  of 
it  are  in  line,  bearing  S.  01°  W.,  alter  course  immediately  to  N.  46°  VV., 
and  so  continue  until  the  southern  extremities  of  Topstone  and  Green 
ledges  are  in  line,  bearing  N.  89°  B.;  then  steer  S.  89°  VV.,  keeping 
those  nmrks  on  astern,  until  Flat  Point  and  Berry  Head  are  in  line, 
bearing  S.  23°  B.,  then  steer  S.  67°  VV.,  to  the  anchorage,  in  6  fathoms, 
mud,  off  VV' cbber  (^ove,  distant  from  J  to  J  mile. 

Whitehaven  is  a  secure  harbor,  with  suflBcient  space  and  depth  of 
water  for  a  fleet  of  large  vessels  ;  but,  like  most  of  the  indentations  on 
this  coast,  the  entrances,  three  in  number,  are  so  narrow  and  indirect, 
and  the  sunken  rocks  so  numerous,  that  no  large  vessel  could  safely 
attempt  them  at  night  or  in  the  dense  fogs  that  so  frequently  prevail. 

On  the  western  shore  there  are  hills  of  the  drift  bowlder  clay,  afford- 
ing pasture  for  the  catfle  of  the  fishermen,  who  reside  principally  in 
Deliver  and  Marshall  Coves,  but  whose  houses  will  also  be  seen  at 


\m 


162 


NOVA   SCOTIA — S.    E.    COAST. 


«'  4 


ik 


t 


'    I 


iutervals  »ill  tbe  way  to  the  head  of  the  NW.  arm,  distant  7  miles  from 
the  entrance  of  tbe  haven. 

White  Head  Islana,  120  feet  high,  about  ^  mile  long,  north  and 
south  and  \  mile  broad,  derives  its  name  from  tbe  whitish  granite  rook 
of  which  it  is  composed,  and  forms  a  salient  feature  off  the  point  of  land 
east  of  Whitehaven,  its*  inner  or  northern  end  being  about  ^  mile  from 
tbe  main  shore.  The  interior  of  tbe  island  is  wooded  with  dwarf  spruce 
trees. 

SW.  Bull,  with  <>  feet  water,  lies  with  the  lighthouse  bearing  N. 
22°  E.,  distant  1,200  yards.  Rocky  ground,  with  4  fathoms  water,  ex- 
tends from  it  800  yards  to  tbe  westward,  and  there  are  rocky  patches 
with  5  fathoms  between  it  and  White  Head  Island. 

Dover  Head,  open  to  tbe  southward  of  Millstone  Island,  bearing 
N.  56°  E,,  leads  to  the  southward  of  both  the  SW.  and  East  Bull 
Bocks. 

Black  Ledge  dries  at  low  water.  Its  western  eztremity,  from  which 
tbe  lighthouse  bears  N.  75°  B.  rather  more  than  one  mile,  is  cleared  by 
keeping  Doliver  and  Fisherman  Islands  apparently  touching,  and  bear- 
ing N.  9°  W.,  whilst  Bald  Rock  and  Flyinsr  Poir^  in  line,  bearing  N. 
48°  W.,  will  l.-ad  SW.  of  it,  and  SW.  Bull  Rock. 

Shag  and  Rocky  Ledges  are  nearer  tbe  lighthouse,  and  above 
water;  Gammon  Islets,  small  and  of  bare  granite,  will  be  seen  to  the 
northward  of  them.  The  southern  passage  into  Whitehaven  Harbor  is 
to  the  eastward  of  all  these,  including  the  SW.  Bull,  and  between 
them  and  White  Head  Island. 

East  Bull,  one  of  tbe  outer  dangers  off  tbe  eastern  entrance  to 
"Wbitebaven,  is  a  small  detached  rock,  having  only  6  feet  water,  and  lies 
with  tbe  lighthouse  bearing  N.  68°  W.,  distant  1,200  yards.  Half  way 
between  it  and  Wbit«  Head  Island  is  Sculpin  Rock,  dry  at  low  water; 
and  midway  between  it  and  Millstone  Island  there  is  a  rocky  shoal 
carrying  3  fathoms  water.  The  entrance  to  tbe  eastern  passage  into 
Wbitebaven  Harbor  is  between  this  shoal  and  Millstone  Island. 

Three-Top  Island  may  be  easily  recognized  by  the  three  remarkable 
hills,  50  or  60  feet  high,  from  which  its  name  is  derived.  The  channels 
NW.  of  it,  on  either  side  of  Doliver  Island,  are  so  narrow  and  full 
of  rocks  as  to  be  only  available  for  small  vessels  and  boats.  The  ship 
channel  eastward  of  it  is  400  yards  wide  at  entrance  between  Net  Rock 
and  Turtle  Reef,  which  extends  out  from  Spry  Point.  A  short  distance 
within  tbe  entrance,  and  nearly  abreast  the  middle  of  Tree-top  Island, 
there  is  a  rock  with  3^  fathoms  water,  which  reduces  the  breadth  of 
the  channel  between  it  and  the  island  to  300  yards.  Tbe  marks  that 
lead  to  tbe  SW.  of  this  rock  are,  tbe  ends  of  Gammon  Islets  and  White 
Head  Island  apparently  very  slightly  overlapping,  and  bearing  S.  43° 
E. ;  these  .marks  also  clear  the  shoals  farther  in  oft'  Doliver  Island  and 
Deming  I'oint,  on  tbe  western  side  of  the  harbor. 

Inner  and  Outer  Gull  Ledges  and  Bald  Rock  extend  nearly  a 


miles  from 

north  and 
ranite  rook 
)int  of  land 
)f  mile  from 
vavt'  sprnce 

bearing  N. 
3  water,  ex- 
sky  patches 

id,  bearing 
i  East  Ball 

from  which 
I  cleared  by 
i;,  and  bear- 
bearing  N. 

and  above 

seen  to  the 

n  Harbor  is 

[»d  between 

entrance  to 
ter,  and  lies 
Half  way 
low  water; 
rocky  shoal 
lasaage  into 
and. 

remarkable 

lie  channels 

)w  and  full 

.    The  ship 

n  Net  Kock 

»rt  distance 

-top  Island, 

breadth  of 

marks  that 

and  White 

iriiig  S.  4SO 

Island  and 

id  nearly  a 


WHITEHAVEN — DIRECTIONS. 


158 


mile  to  the  southward  from  Deming  Island,  which,  being  united  to  the 
mainland  at  low  water,  forms  the  western  point  of  entrance  to  White- 
haven. ''' lese  ledges  and  rocks  are  all  above  water,  but  there  are  reefs 
between  and  around  them ;  that  most  in  the  way  being  a  rock  with  6 
feet  water  on  the  east  end  of  the  shoal  tongue  extending  from  bald 
Rock,  and  lying  S.  51°  E.  300  yards  from  the  Outer  Gull  Ledge ;  Net 
Rock  (joined  by  a  reef  to  the  SB.  extremity  of  Three-top  Island)  and 
Spry  Point,  in  line,  bearing  N.  4lo  fi.,  leads  clear  to  the  SE.  of  it. 

The  western  passage  into  Whitehaven  Harbor  between  the  Six-foot 
Rock  and  Black  Ledgeis  J  mile  wide.  There  is  little  or  no  warning  by 
the  lead  in  approaching  any  of  these  dangers  from  seaward,  the  de|)th 
exceeding  20  fathoms  a  little  more  than  4  mile  from  them. 

Kelp  Shoal,  with  only  3  feet  water,  lies  directly  in  the  way  of  vessels 
passing  westward  ot  Fisherman  Island.  The  marks  for  proceeding 
through  the  channel  (only  100  yards  wide)  between  Kelp  Shoal  and  the 
island  are  the  western  extreinities  of  Pilot  Point  and  of  Yankee  Islet, 
in  line,  bearing  S.  29°  E.  There  is  also  a  passage  westward  of  Kelp 
Shoal,  between  it  and  the  shoal,  which  extends  300  yards  off  shore  to 
the  southward  ot  Marshall  Cove;  but  the  marks  for  running  through 
it,  namely,  the  western  sides  of  Munroe  Rock,  Three-top  Island,  and 
Shag  Ledgo  in  line,  might  not  easily  be  distinguished  by  a  stranger. 

Tides.— The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  in  the  entrance  seldom  exceeds 
half  a  knot,  unless  it  be  the  ebb  stream,  when  accelerated  by  heavy 
rains  or  the  melting  of  the  snow  in  spring. 

Western  Passage.— Proceeding  into  Whitehaven  Harbor  in  a  steam 
vessel,  or  with  a  fair  wind,  through  the  western  passage  and  Ship  Chan- 
nel,  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  marks  alieady  given  for  clearing  the 
rock  off  the  Outer  Gull  Ledge  on  the  one  side,  and  Bull  Rocks  and  Black 
Ledge  on  the  other.  It  is  seldom  that  the  Black  Ledge  or  the  breakers 
on  it  can  not  he  seen  ;  to  run  in  nearly  midway  between  it  and  the  rock 
off  the  Outer  Gull  Ledge,  bring  Net  Rock  to  bear  N.  22°  E.,  and  steer 
so  as  to  pass  around  to  the  eastward  and  northward  of  it  at  the  distance 
of  200  yards. 

Open  the  lighthouse  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Gammon  Islets,  bear- 
ing S.  510  E.,  and  steer  in  N.  61°  W.  until  the  north  end  of  Three-top 
Island  is  nearly  abeam.  Then  alter  course  to  N.  23°  W.,  taking  care 
to  keep  White  Heat!  Island  open  eastward  of  the  Gammon  Islets,  in 
order  to  clear  the  shoals  oft'  Doliver  Island  and  Deming  Point,  on  the 
western  shore ;  and  the  ligUthouse  oi)en  westward  of  Spry  Point,  to 
clear  Yankee  Island  Reef,  on  the  eastern  shore. 

Anchorage.— Having  passed  this  reef  good  anchorage  may  be  ob- 
tained in  7  to  10  fathoms,  mud,  immediately  within  it,  and  also  oft"  the 
fish  stages  and  houses  on  the  western  shore,  although  some  swell  sets 
in  with  the  strong  southerly  winds.  Small  vessels  anchor  in  Yankee 
Cove,  into  which  3J  fathoms  can  be  carried  through  a  very  narrow 
channel.    The  best  passage  for  a  hirge  vessel  proceeding  tarther  in,  to 


torn 


154 


NOVA   SCOTIA — 8.   E.   COAST. 


the  more  completely  Hheltered  parts  of  the  harbor,  is  eastward  of  Fish- 
erman Island,  where  there  is  a  clear  channel,  200  yards  wide,  wit^h  a 
depth  of  8  fathoms. 

The  Southern  Passage  into  Whitehaven  is  only  200  yards  wide. 
To  pass  eastward  of  the  SW.  Bull,  steer  between  north  and  N.  13°  W. 
for  the  western  side  of  White  Head  Island,  which  should  be  i)a88ed  at 
a  distance  not  exceeding  200  yards ;  open  out  Millstone  Island  until  it 
is  touching  Dogfish  Point,  bearing  S.  77°  B.  Keep  those  marks  astern 
and  pass  southward  of  Turtle  Eock  and  reef  off  Spry  Point.  When 
the  lighthouse  is  seen  just  open  eastward  of  Gammon  Islets,  bearing 
S.  51°  E.,  steer  N.  51°  W.,  and  proceed  as  before  directed. 

Crane.  Raspberry,  and  Wine  Coves  are  small  intricate  indenta- 
tions between  Port  Howe  and  Whitehaven,  abounding  in  sunken  rocks 
and  difficult  of  access.  They  are  adapted  for  small  craft  and  boats, 
but  without  good  local  knowledge  of  the  neighborhood  and  its  numer- 
ous dangers  the  approaches  to  these  places  are  perilous  in  the  extreme. 
Fort  Hoixre,  to  the  westward  of  Dover  Island,  is  small  and  danger- 
ous to  approach  on  account  of  numerous  shoals.  The  entrance  lies 
between  Howe  Point,  to  the  eastward  and  Black  Bock,  4  feet  high,  off" 
Fluid  Point,  on  the  western  shore,  the  distance  across  being  a  good  J 
mile,  but  the  navigable  channel  is  narrowed  by  shoal  ground  to  little 
more  than  300  yards. 

Wiihin  the  entrance  the  shores  are  mostly  steep-to,  and  there  is  suffi- 
cient depth  of  water  lor  the  largest  vessels ;  but  in  the  parts  not  exposed 
to  the  southerly  swell  there  is  barely  room  for  a  vessel  to  swing  at  single 
anchor. 

Avery  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water,  lies  a  mile  to  the  southward  of 
Whale  Island,  with  the  lighthouse  on  White  Head  Island  bearing  S. 
83°  W.  Dover  Head,  seen  open  southward  of  Snorting  Bocks,  bearing 
N.  46°  E.,  leads  southward  of  this  shoal ;  also  of  the  Vache  and  Whalo 
Shoals,  carrying  9  and  18  feet  water,  and  lying  ij  JO  yards  and  l:t  miles, 
re8i)ectively,  farther  NE. 

Dover  Shoals  and  Snorting  Rocks. — Dover  Shoals,  with  4  fathoms 
on  them,  He  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  channel  8.  32° 
E.,  1,100  yards  from  Snorting  Rocks,  which  never  cover.  These  latter 
are  nearly  joined  at  low  water  to  the  south  extremity  of  Dover  Island. 
Sunken  rocks,  with  various  depths  on  them,  extend  J  mile  from  Snort- 
ing Rocks,  and,  together  with  similar  rocks  lying  400  yards  off  Howe 
Point,  must  be  left  to  the  eastward  when  proceeding  into  Port  Howe. 
Directions. — Bring  the  Black  Rock  in  line  with  the  Sugar  Loaf  Hill, 
180  feet  high,  about  a  mile  inland  from  the  entrance  of  Kyak  Brook,  at 
the  head  of  the  harbor,  bearing  N.  32="  W.,  and  steer  towards  them 
until  the  south  extremities  of  Whale  and  Millstone  Islands  are  nearly 
in  line,  bearing  S.  44°  W. ;  then  alter  course  to  pass  200  yards  eastward 
of  Black  Rock. 
If  proceeding  to  the  anchorage  at  the  mouth  of  the  western  arm, 


ard  of  Fish- 
wide,  wifh  « 

yards  wide, 
d  N.  130  W. 
be  ])a8sed  at 
land  until  it 
narks  astern 
)int.  When 
lets,  bearing 

ate  indenta- 
unkeu  rocks 
;  and  boats, 
d  its  nunier- 
the  extreme, 
and  danger- 
tutrance  lies 
feet  high,  off 
ng  a  good  i 
11  ud  to  little 

there  is  suffl> 
I  not  exposed 
ring  at  single 

southward  of 
d  bearing  8. 
)cks,  bearing 
e  and  Whale 
and  l^  miles, 

ith  4  fathoms 
lanuel  8.  320 
These  latter 
)over  Island. 
J  from  Snort- 
ds  off  Howe 
I  Port  Howe, 
^ar  Loaf  Hill, 
ak  Brook,  at 
awards  them 
is  are  nearly 
rds  eastward 

ivestern  arm, 


PORT    HOWE DOVER   BAY. 


155 


endeavor  to  preserve  a  mid-channel  coarse  between  Port  Island  and 
the  western  shore,  anchoring  in  abont  8  fathoms,  mud,  with  the  west 
end  of  Snorting  Bocks  just  open  of  the  po»nt  west  of  Port  Island,  and 
borrowing  on  the  southern  shore  in  order  to  avoid  the  sunken  rock  off 
the  point  which  divides  the  arms.  If  the  anchorage  witliin  Port  Island 
be  preferred,  pass  around  the  NW.  end  of  the  islatid  at  200  yards 
distance,  to  avoid  th«  reef  off  it,  and  anchor  within  il  in  4i  fat)ioms, 
mud. 

Dover  Island  forms  a  salient  point  of  the  coast  between  Dov«'r  Bay 
and  the  indentation  of  Port  Howe.  It  has  an  elevation  of  1)5  feet,  and 
is  separated  from  the  mainland  by  a  narrow,  but  navigable,  channel 
with  12  feet  water,  known  as  Dover  Passage,  which  is  frequented  by 
fishermen  and  small  coasting  vessels;  hut  as  in  the  narrowest  part  the 
passage  is  only  60  yards  across,  it  is  evidently  not  adai>ted  for  either 
large  vessels  or  strangers. 

Dover  Bay  is  2J  miles  wide  at  the  entrance,  from  Dover  Head  east- 
ward to  White  Point,  and  4  miles  deep  to  the  northward ;  but  although 
80  extensive,  it  affords  no  shelter,  being  filled  towards  its  bead  with 
islets  and  rocks  above  and  under  water,  among  which  only  small  ves- 
sels and  boats  could  pass.  Louse  Harbor  on  its  western  shore,  one  mile 
within  Dover  Head,  has  within  it  depth  and  space  sufficient  for  large 
vessels ;  but  its  entrance  to  the  north  of  Louse  Island,  with  3J  fathoms 
water,  is  only  about  30  fathoms  wide.  Little  Dover  Run  is  a  very  uar. 
row  channel  between  White  Island,  forming  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay, 
and  the  mainland,  its  narrowest  part  being  only  about  30  yards  wide, 
with  3  fathoms  w  ter.  It  leads  in  among  the  islets  at  the  head  of  the 
bay,  and  is  frequented  ir  the  season  by  fishing  vessels. 

The  dangers  at  the  month  of  Dover  Bay  are,  a  rock  with  3  feet  water 
on  it,  from  which  Dover  Head  bears  N.  5°  E.  ^  mile;  Blackman 
Shoal,  with  4  fathoms  water,  from  which  Dover  Head  bears  N.  S(P 
W.  ^  mile ;  Bay  Shoal,  with  5  fathoms  water,  lying  nearly  half-way  be- 
tween Dover  Head  and  White  Point,  and  breaking  only  after  heavy 
gales ;  Home  Shoal,  with  3  fathoms  water  lying  nearly  midway  between 
Louse  Head  and  White  Island;  and  Lumsden  Shoal,  with-'  fathoms 
water,  from  which  White  Point  bears  S.  80°  B.,  distant  1,300  yards. 

The  White  Point  Ledges  extend  1,100  yards  to  the  southward  of 
White  Point ;  and  White  Rock,  with  5  fathoms  water,  which  breaks 
after  heavy  gales,  lies  nearly  ^  mile  farther  off,  with  the  point  bearing 
N.  350  W.,  distant  one  mile. 

Gannet  Shoal,  with  9  feet  least  water,  situated  N.  67°  E.,  one  mile 
from  White  Point,  consists  of  several  detached  patches.  There  are 
other  rocks  to  the  northward  of  it  off  Madeline  Point,  and  at  the  en- 
trance of  Little  Dover  Run,  for  which  the  chart  is  necessary  to  insure 
the  safe  guidance  of  a  vessel  in  such  intricate  places. 

Telegraph  Cables.— Six  submarine  telegraph  cables  are  landed  at 
Dover  Bay,  four  in  the  northern  bay  on  the  western  side  of  White  Is- 


||||iKfe*^dttfc|HlM 


166 


NOVA    SCOTIA S.    E.    COAST. 


land,  anil  two  in  the  bay  westward  of  Walsh  Point.  These  cables  are 
laid  iu  directions  between  SW.  and  8E.  from  Dover  Bay ;  one  to  Cape 
Anil,  one  to  New  York,  two  to  the  Land's  End,  and  two  to  Waterville, 
Ireland. 

Andrew  Island,  about  l'^  miles  long  and  1^  miles  broad,  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  iniii aland  by  a  deep  channel  about  ^  mile  wide.  The 
island  is  low,  its  grtniiest  elevation,  35  feet,  being  at  the  south  end.  It 
is  hIso  boggy  and  barren,  with  stunted  spruie  over  its  surface. 

Andrew  Passage,  between  Andrew  Island  and  the  mainland,  and 
leading  to  Glasgow  and  Canso  Harbors,  is  too  intricate  for  a  written 
descrii>tion  to  avail.  It  is  frequented  occasionally  by  fishing  and  small 
coast  vessels,  but  even  with  the  aid  of  a  chart,  local  knowledge  is 
indispensable  for  the  safe  guidance  of  even  a  small  vessel. 

Q-annet  Ledges. — The  outermost  of  these  ledges,  with  only  3  and  4 
feet  water,  extend  eastward  nearly  a  mile  from  Ganuet  Point,  the  south 
extremity  of  Andrew  Island  ;  and  foul  ground,  with  depths  of  6  and  9 
fathoms  extends  a  mile  farther  to  the  SE.  The  S  W.  extremity  of  Dover 
Island  kept  open  southward  of  White  Point,  bearing  S.  63°  W.,  leads 
^  mile  southward  of  these  ledges,  and  the  dangerous  Boom  Kock. 


e  cables  are 
one  to  Cape 
Watervilie, 

>ad,  i8  sepa- 
wide.  The 
ith  eud.  It 
ace. 

riulnnd,  aud 
)r  a  written 
ig  aud  small 
lowledge  is 

>nly  3  and  4 
it,  the  south 
i  of  6  and  9 
ity  of  Dover 
\°  W.,  leads 
Kocti. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

OHEDABUCTO   BAY,   LENNOX  PASSAGE,   OUT   OP   CAN80. 

From  Cape  Canso  to  Gnysborough,  distance  of  lio  miles  in  a 
westerly  diiectiou,  the  south  coast  of  Ohedabucto  Bay  is  composed  of 
primary  rocks  partially  covered  with  drift  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders. 
This  drift  appears  occasionally  in  high,  red  looking  cliffs  on  the  shore. 
When  cleared  of  stones  it  furnishes  a  tolerably  productive  soil,  but  the 
climate  is  not  favorable  to  agriculture,  and  the  large  fishing  population 
obtain  little  beyond  a  few  vegetables  and  food  for  tlieir  cattle.  Drift 
ice  in  the  month  of  May,  and  in  June  the  prevailing  easterly  winds, 
bringing  fog  from  a  cold  sea,  check  vegetation  until  past  midsummer 
and  seldom  allow  of  settled  warm  weather  before  July. 

Cape  Canso  is  a  rocky  islet,  15  feet  high,  joined  to  the  east  point 
of  Andrew  Island  at  low  water  by  a  sandy  neck  about  200  yards  in 
breadth.  Cape  Rock,  small,  and  8  feet  high,  will  be  seen  off  it  250 
yards  to  the  SE.  At  IJ  miles  to  the  NW.  is  Glasgow  Head,  a  remark- 
able  red  clay  cliff  50  feet  high.  An  equal  distance  farther  in  the  same 
direction,  along  an  unbroken  shore,  is  the  town  and  harbor  of  Canso. 

Cranberry  Island  marks  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  chan- 
nel into  Canso  Harbor.  It  is  low,  rocky,  J  mile  long,  and  divided  into 
several  parts  at  high  water. 

Frying  Pan,  Crow,  and  Petit-Pas  Islets.— The  Frying  Pan,  a  low 
islet  of  shingle,  4  mile,  N.  35°  W.  from  the  lighthouse  on  Cranberry 
Island  ;  and  Grow  Islet,  a  low  rock  covered  with  dark  spruce  bushes, 
not  exceeding  20  feet  in  height  and  distant  f  mile  farther  in  the  same 
direction,  will  easily  be  distinguished.  Still  more  remarkable  is  Petit- 
Pas,  a  small,  round,  grassy  islet,  200  yards  in  diameter,  with  a  red  clay 
cliff'  50  feet  high,  and  1  j  miles  N.  66°  W.  from  the  lighthouse. 

Oliver  Island  is  wooded  and  separated  from  the  eaat  eud  of  George 
Island  by  a  narrow  boat  channel.  Its  eastern  extremity,  Lock  Point, 
forms  a  leading  mark  and  bears  from  Petit-Pas  N.  26°  E.  ^  mile. 

arassy  Island,  i  mile  to  the  westward  of  Petit-Pas,  is  a  hill  of 
drift  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders,  J  mile  long  and  60  feet  high.  It  is  cov- 
ered  with  grass,  and  displays  the  only  other  clay  cliff"  besides  that  of 
Petit  Pas  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel  to  Canso  Harbor.  It  is  no 
longer  insulated,  being  now  united  to  George  Island  by  a  bar  of  shingle 
which  is  never  covered.  The  remains  of  an  extensive  redoubt  give  the 
name  of  Port  Point  to  the  high  western  extremity  of  the  steep  grassy 
bank  of  this  island,  which,  as  it  is  used  for  a  leading  mark,  must  be  care- 

157 


"a 


158 


CHEDABUCTO    BAY SOUTH    COa 


I 


fally  (listinKuished  from  the  edge  of  the  shingle  beach,  extending  from 
it  2*)0yiirdH  to  the  NW.,  nud  ulao  used  for  a  leading  mark.  There  is  a 
narrow  cbauuel  for  boatn  between  the  Grassy  Island  beach  and  Piscat- 
i(|ui  iHliind. 

Canso  Harbor  is  formed  by  Pisoatiqui  and  George  Islands  on  the 
east,  and  by  the  mainland  and  Durell  Island  on  the  west.  Cutler 
Island,  together  with  the  shallow  water  between  it  and  Durell  Island, 
shelter  it  from  the  north,  while  Grave  Island  and  the  bar  uniting  it  to 
Lauigun  Beach  protect  it  from  the  SB.  Grave  Island  is  very  small, 
witli  steep  clay  banlcs  fast  wasting  away  by  the  action  of  the  sea  (1860.) 
Tlie  entrance  to  the  harl)or  is  between  the  latter  and  Cutler  Island,  to- 
wards the  wharves  of  the  town,otf  which  the  anchorage  is  quite  secure, 
with  water  for  vessels  of  the  largest  draft;  but  the  Ship  Channel, 
which  runs  through  into  Chedabuoto  Bay,  passes  to  the  eastward  of 
those  Islands,  between  them  and  Piscatiqni.  The  least  water  in  this 
channel,  4  fathoms,  is  on  a  bar  which  stretches  across  from  Grave 
Island  to  Piscatiqui  Island. 

Canso  is  on  the  mainland,  the  more  ancient  part  standing  on  hills 
of  red  sand,  clay,  and  large  bowlders.  The  church,  built  on  the  sum- 
mit of  a  ridge  lOU  feet  high,  is  a  conspicuous  object  seen  over  the 
islands  from  a  great  distance  at  sea.  The  newer  part  of  the  town,  to- 
gether with  the  two  chapels,  are  farther  westward  along  the  shore  of  the 
Tickle,  a  narrow  boat  channel  separating  Durell  island  from  the  main- 
land. The  whole  forms  a  long,  straggling  village,  with  a  population  of 
about  1,20U.  Near  the  north  point  of  Durell  Island,  which  is  1^  miles 
long,  is  Flag  Hill,  105  feet  high,  which  is  used  as  an  important  leading 
mark. 

Western  Side. — Patch  and  Boom  Rocks.— Approaching  from  the 
southward,  the  entrance  of  the  Ship  Channel  between  Cape  Canso  and 
Cranberry  Island  is  a  mile  wide.  The  outermost  danger  on  this  side  is 
Patch  Rock,  with  5  fathoms  water,  but  on  which  the  sea  is  said  to 
break  occasionally;  it  bears  from  Cape  Canso  S.  51°  E.  If  miles. 

Within  Patch  Rock — to  the  westward,  nearly  f  mile — is  Boom  Book, 
with  12  feet  water,  S.  23°  E.,  IJ  miles  from  Cape  Canso,  and  east  1^ 
miles  from  the  south  point  of  Andrew  Island.  The  southwestern  ex- 
treme of  Dover  Island,  open  to  the  southward  of  White  Point  bearing 
S.  03°  W.,  leads  clear  to  the  southward  of  both  these  rocks. 

Cape  Breaker  and  Roaring  Bull  Rock. — Cape  Breaker,  with  2^ 
fathoms  water,  bears  from  Cape  Canso  S.  79°  E.  one  mile  distant* 
Crow  and  Cranberry  Islands,  apparently  touching,  will  lead  200  yards 
eastward  of  Cape  Breaker.  As  it  can  only  be  seen  when  there  is  a 
heavy  sea,  this  rock  is  extremely  dangerous,  and  would  be  still  more 
so  were  it  not  that  Roaring  Bull  Rock,  800  yards  to  the  westward, 
almost  always  shows,  and  therefore  assists  in  indicating  the  position  of 
its  neighbor. 

Keeper  and  Blirby  Rocks,  with  4  and  2^  fathoms  water,  are  dis- 


Lj.ijt-iaJMS'w 


CANSO    HARBOR. 


159 


tiding  from 

There  is  a 

And  Piscat- 

nds  on  tlie 
St.  Cutler 
rell  Island, 
Qiting  it  to 
very  small, 
)  sea  (1860.) 
'  Island,  to- 
uite  secure, 
p  Channel, 
eastward  of 
Iter  in  this 
from  Grave 

Qg  on  bills 
)n  the  sum- 
in  over  the 
le  town,  to- 
sbore  of  the 
n  the  main< 
)pulation  of 
1  is  1^  miles 
;ant  leading 

ing  from  the 
>  Canso  and 
this  side  is 
k  is  said  to 
miles. 

Boom  Bock, 
ind  east  1^ 
western  ex- 
)int  bearing 

ker,  with  2^ 
die  distant* 
d  200  yards 
1  there  is  a 
e  still  more 
)  westward, 
)  position  of 

ter,  are  dis- 


tant i  mile  and  one  mile  respectively,  about  NW.  from  Cape  Breaker 
Kock.  The  steeple  of  the  Uoman  Catholic  church  at  Canso,  seen  open 
NE.  of  Glasgow  Head,  bearing  N.  W.i<=>  W.,  leads  just  clear  to  the  NE. 
of  Cape  Breaker,  Keeper,  and  Kirby  Rocks. 

Black  Rocks  lie  NW.  about  ^  mile  from  Kirby  Hock,  the  puNsage 
Into  Glasgow  Harbor  being  betwenii  them.  They  consist  of  two  masses 
of  trap  rock  about  5  feet  high,  aud  can  therefore  always  be  seen ;  as 
the  shoal  water  extends  from  them  only  200  yards  to  the  eastward, 
they  are  of  great  service  in  pointing  out  the  western  side  of  the  chan- 
nel. 

Bootes  Rock,  with  6  feet  least  water,  and  the  ManofWar  Kock, 
which  covers  at  half  tide,  lie  farther  to  the  northward,  the  latter,  the 
most  distant,  being  a  long  ^  mile  from  the  Black  Rocks.  There  is  no 
safe  channel  for  ships  between  these  three  last  named  dangers,  which 
all  rise  fVom  a  shoal  and  rocky  bank,  which  stretches  across  the  en- 
trance of  Glasgow  Harbor;  but  there  is  a  navigable  channel  between 
them  and  Glasgow  Head,  though  narrow  and  dilBcull:. 

The  Man-of-TVar  Rock  bears  from  Glasgow  Head  N.  40°  E.  about 
i  mile.  It  lies  much  in  the  way,  but  is  usually  shown  by  breakers, 
and  the  marks  for  it  are  distinct  and  good.  The  eastern  ends  of  the 
Black  Rocks  and  of  the  Cape  Rock  when  in  one,  bearing  S.  27°  E.,  lead 
just  to  the  eastward  of  it,  and,  of  course,  clear  the  Bootes ;  therefore  let 
the  Cape  Rock  be  kept  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  Black  Rocks  until 
Man-of-War  Rock  is  past;  which  will  be  the  case  when  Flag  Hill  comes 
in  line  with  the  steep  bank  (not  the  beach)  of  Fort  Point,  bearing  N. 
m°  W. 

The  Mackerel  Rock  lies  ^  mile  farther  to  the  NW.  Having  10 
feet  water,  it  seldom  shows,  and  is  therefore  the  more  dangerous. 
When  on  it  the  eastern  extremes  of  Oliver  Island  and  of  Derabie  East 
Rock  are  in  one,  and  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  Petit-pas,  which  bears 
from  it  N.  20°  E.  800  yards.  The  same  marks  which  clear  the  Mau-of- 
War  Rock,  namely  Flag  Hill  and  the  steep  bank  of  Fort  Point,  as 
above  mentioned,  lead  to  the  NE.  of  this  rock  also,  at  the  distance  of 
100  yards.  There  is  a  clear  channel  on  either  side  of  the  Mackerel 
Eock,  but  that  to  the  northeastward  of  it  has  the  advantage  of  leading 
marks. 

South  Shoal  is  the  last  danger  on  the  west  side  of  the  Ship  Chan- 
nel, until  the  vessel  arrives  at  Grave  Island  and  the  entrance  of  Canso 
Harbor.  It  has  3  feet  least  water,  and  extends  600  yards  off  shore,  or 
half  way  across  toward  the  eastern  extremity  of  Grassy  Island; 
leaving  a  clear  channel  between  it  and  the  Grassy  Reef  of  360  yards 
in  breadth. 

The  shoal  water  extends  only  100  yards  off  Grave  Island,  leaving  a 
channel  between  it  and  Piscatiqui  Island  200  yards  wide,  and  4  fathoms 
in  it  at  low  water. 

Stanley  Shoals  consist  of  four  small  rocky  patches  4  mile  apart. 


160 


CHEDABUCTO  BAY — SOUTH  COAST. 


The  least  water,  4  fathoms,  is  ou  the  northera  and  western  patches, 
and  is  sometimes  shown  by  brealseis. 

The  northern  patch  lies  with  the  northern  of  the  Black  Rocks  in  line 
with  the  north  point  of  Glasgow  Head,  and  Crow  Islet,  seen  half  its 
apparent  breadth,  open  east  of  Cranberry  Island.  Prom  the  western 
patch,  the  eastern  end  of  Crow>  Islet  is  just  shut  in  behind  the  eastern 
extreme  of  Cranberry  Island,  and  the  highest  part  of  Glasgow  Head, 
seen  just  over  the  north  end  of  the  southern  group  of  Black  Bocks. 

The  western  extremes  of  Derabie  and  Cranberry  Islands  in  line, 
bearing  N.  40°  W.,  lead  between  these  shoals  and  Cape  Breaker. 

Nickerson  and  I  ^vid  Rocks. — From  Nickerson  Rock,  which  is 
detached,  with  4  fathon^s  least  water.  Cranberry  Island  lighthouse 
bears  N.  74°  W.  1^  miles.  This  rock  is  less  in  the  way  of  navigation 
than  Stanley  Shoals^  from  which  it  is  distant  about  J  mile.  The  same 
remark  applies  to  David  Rock,  with  13  feet  water,  J  mile  nearer  to  the 
lighthouse,  which  bears  from  it  N.  G5°  W,  J  mile. 

Washball  Rock,  a  rocky  patch,  which  dries  at  low  water,  lies  S. 
4.'i°  VV.  4(»0  yards  from  David  Rock,  and  S.  54°  E.  1,400  yards  from  the 
lighthouse;  ic  forms  the  extremity  of  a  rocky  shoal  extending  from 
Cranberry  Island,  and  occupies  a  position  midway  between  the  light- 
house and  Staidey  Shoals.  As  this  danger  can  almost  always  be  seen, 
it  is  of  great  service  in  guiding  vessels.  These  two  last-named  rocks 
lie  so  near  the  edge  of  Cranberry  Island  Bank,  as  to  leave  no  safe 
passage  between  them. 

Pink  Rock,  with  only  4  feet  water,  lies  ^  mile  to  the  southward  of 
Cranberry  Island  lighthouse;  but  from  it  a  ledge,  with  3  fathoms 
water,  extend  300  yards  in  a  westerly  direction,  and  forms  the  extreme 
southern  etige  of  Cranberry  Ishind  Bank,  from  which  the  lighthouse 
bears  north  J  mile.  Flag  Hill,  and  the  SW.  extremity  of  the  beach  of 
Fort  Point  in  line,  lead  just  clear  to  the  southward  of  this  danger; 
but  as  the  beach  can  not  always  be  made  out.  Flag  Hill  should  be  kept 
about  half  a  point  open  SW.  of  Fort  Point,  until  the  bearing  of  the 
lighthouse  shows  that  the  rock  is  passed. 

Frjring  Pan  and  Pas  Reefs. — The  next  danger  bordering  the  Ship 
Channel  is  the  Frying  Pan  Reef,  running  out  800  yards  from  the  low 
Frying  Pan  Islet,  and  separated  by  a  narrow  channel  from  the  Pas 
Reef,  which  extends  h  mile  to  the  eastward  from  Petit-pas.  From  the 
Pas  Reef  the  edge  of  the  shoal  continues  to  the  westward,  skirting 
Petit-pas  at  the  distance  of  300  yards,  and  then  crossing  the  bay, 
between  it  and  Grassy  Island,  where  it  joins  the  shoal  water  off  the 
latter. 

Grassy  Reef  projects  \  mile  fro  n  the  SB.  extremity  of  Grassy 
Island,  and  diminishes  the  breadth  of  the  deej)  water  between  it  and 
the  equally  dangerous  Mackerel  Rock  to  250  yards,  and  as  the  channel 
is  crooked  there,  as  well  as  narrow,  they  form  a  difficult  pass  for  large 
vessels. 


'u  patches, 

[)ck3  in  line 
en  half  its 
he  western 
the  eastern 
gow  Head, 

Bocks. 
(Is  in  line, 
aker. 

:,  which  is 
lighthouse 
navigation 

The  same 
larer  to  the 

iter,  lies  S. 
is  from  the 
iding  from 
the  light- 
ys  be  seen, 
lined  rocks 
ive  no  safe 

athward  of 
3  fathoms 
he  extreme 
lighthouse 
le  beach  of 
is  danger; 
Id  be  kept 
ring  of  the 

ig  the  Ship 
3m  the  low 
m  the  Pas 
From  the 
d,  skirting 
g  the  bay, 
ter  off  the 

of  Grassy 
reen  it  and 
he  channel 
?8  for  large 


CANSO    HARBOK N.    W.    ENTRANCE. 


161 


Dangers  in  NW.  Entrance  to  Canso  Harbor— The  difficulties  of 
the  NW.  entrance  of  Canso  Harbor  arise  principally  from  the  nar- 
rowness of  the  channel  between  Cutler  or  Hart  and  Piscatiqui  Islands, 
where  the  deep  wat«r  is  less  than  80  yards  wide;  and  from  the  position 
of  the  Starling  Rock  being  so  much  in  the  way.  It  is  a  passage  that 
should  not  be  aitempted  in  a  large  vessel  without  a  fair  and  steady 
breeze;  for  although  the  dangers  about  to  be  described  are  for  the  most 
part  visible,  yet  there  is  no  safe  anchorage  in  the  event  of  the  wind 
failing,  the  bottom  being  of  rock. 

Net  and  Whitman  Rocks.— On  the  western  side  of  this  entrance 
the  dangers  are,  the  'Set  Roeks,  which  dry  at  a  quarter  ebb;  and  the 
Whitman  Rock,  with  2  feet  least  water.  They  both  lie  off  the  east  side 
of  Durell  Island,  at  the  distance  of  400  yards.  The  marks  which  just 
lead  clear  to  the  eastward  of  both  these  rocks,  and  the  shoal  water 
around  them,  are  the  church  steeple  at  Canso,  and  the  western  ex- 
tremity of  Cutler  Island  in  line,  bearing  S.  18°  E. 

Bald  Rock.— On  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  and  distant  300 
yards  from  the  north  end  of  Piscatiqui  Island,  is  the  Bald  Rock,  of  bare 
granite,  UO  yards  long  and  30  feet  high.  It  lies  directly  opposite  to 
the  Whitman  Rock,  and  the  channel  between  them  is  400  yards  wide. 
There  is  a  rock,  dry  at  low  water,  lying  200  yards  to  the  northward  of 
the  Bald  Rock,  and  shoal  water  100  yards  farther  off  in  the  same  direc- 
tiod ;  but  off  the  west  side  the  shoal  only  extends  100  yards,  and  is 
cleared  by  the  above  church  steeple  and  the  house  on  Cutler  Island  in 
line  bearing  S.  15°  E. 

The  only  other  danger,  on  this  side  of  the  entrance,  is  the  reef  off  the 
NW.  point  of  Piscatiqui  Island,  which  is  partly  dry  at  low  water,  and 
extends  150  yards  out  to  the  NW.  This  reef  will  be  cleared  if  the 
church  steeple  be  kept  open  to  the  westward  of  the  house  on  Cutler 
Island;  or  by  Glasgow  Head  and  Piscatiqui  Island  touching,  and  bear- 
ing S.  410  E. 

Starling  Rock  lies  120  yards  off  the  western  shore  of  Piscatiqui  Isl- 
and, and  in  the  very  line  of  the  narrow  channel  between  these  islands, 
with  only  4  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  renders  this  entrance  extremely 
dangerous  to  strangers ;  for  the  channel  between  this  rock  and  the  shoal 
water,  which  extends  250  yards  off  the  south  end  of  Cutler  Island,  is 
only  80  yards  wide. 

Beacons.— To  facilitate  the  navigation  into  Canso  Harbor  by  the 
northern  entrance,  two  beacons  30  feet  high,  with  triangular  beads 
painted  white,  have  been  erected. 

The  south  beacon  stands  on  Lauigan  Hill,  with  the  Roman  Catholic 
church  bearing  N.  77°  W. 

The  north  beacon  on  the  eastern  side  of  Grave  Islet  bears  N.  16o  w. 
from  the  beacon  on  Lanigan  Hill. 

Directions  through  Ship  ChanneL— To  enter  Canso  Harbor  from 
the  southward,  at  any  distance  not  less  than  3  miles,  brine  the  licht- 
5314 11  * 


162 


CHEDABUCTO  BAY SOUTH  COAST. 


f:    ■'  ,i 


house  on  Cranberry  Island  to  bear  N.  41°  W.,  when  Crow  Islet  will 
be  in  one  with  and  seen  over  Cranberry  Island.  Steer  for  the  light- 
house on  that  line  of  bearing,  taking  care  not  to  open  the  whole  of  Crow 
Islet  out  to  the  westward  of  Cranberry  Island  (for  fear  of  the  Cape 
Breaker),  until  the  church  steeple  at  Canso  is  seen  to  the  NE.  of  Glas- 
gow Head,  bearing  N.  63°  W.  As  soon  as  that  steeple  opens  to  the  NE. 
of  Glasgow  Head,  steer  N.  49'-'  W.,  or  so  as  to  make  a  direct  course 
towards  the  S  W.  side  of  Petit-pas. 

Continue  the  course  towards  Petit- pas,  taking  care  that  the  Cape  Kock 
is  kept  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  Black  Rocks,  until  Flag  Hill  comes 
in  line  with  the  steep  bank  of  Port  Point,  bearing  N.  63°  W.  Then 
steer  on  the  last  named  leading  marks,  taking  care  not  to  open  Flag 
Hill  in  the  least  to  the  SW.  of  the  steep  bank  of  Fort  Point  until  the 
eastern  extremities  of  Petit-pas  and  Oliver  Island  come  in  line,  bearing 
N.  27°  B.  Then  alter  course  instantly,  and  steer  S.  88°  W.  for  the  church 
at  Canso,  until  Petit-pas  and  Crow  Islands  are  touching,  and  tlien  X. 
70°  W.,  for  the  SW.  end  of  Grave  Islet,  keeping  Walsh's  house  (on 
Dureil  Island  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  Tickle)  just  open 
to  the  SW.  of  it,  by  which  the  vessel  will  pass  midway  between  the 
Grassy  Reef  and  the  South  Shoal,  and  clearof  the  shoal  water  off  Grassy 
Island.  As  soon  as  the  N  W.  extremity  of  the  beach  of  Fort  Point  bears 
NE.  steer  N.  52°  W.,  or  for  the  wharf  and  stores  on  the  west  side  of 
Cutler  Island  until  the  lighthouse  on  Cranberry  Island  and  the  south- 
ern extremity  of  the  beach  of  Fort  Point  come  in  line.  Then  steer  N. 
75°  W.,  keeping  the  last  named  leading  marks  in  line  astern ,  and  they 
will  lead  clear  of  the  shoal  off  Grave  Islet ;  round  which,  at  any  distance 
from  the  islet  between  120  and  2i0  yards,  the  vessel  may  haul  to  the 
westward  into  the  harbor. 

Through  NW.  Entrance. — Being  outside  the  Net  Rocks,  bring  the 
Roman  Catholic  church  steeple  at  Canso  to  bear  S.  14°  E.,  when  it  will 
be  seen  over  Cutler  Island,  midway  between  the  house  on  the  island 
and  its  western  end.  Steer  for  this  mark,  and  it  will  lead  nearly  mid- 
way between  the  Bald  and  Whitman  Rocks,  and  when  the  red  clay  cliff 
of  Glasgow  Head  to  the  southward  of  Canso  is  seen  through  the  chan- 
nel between  Cutler  and  Piscatiqui  Islands,  bearing  S.  40°  E.,  steer  for 
it,  keeping  In  mid-channel  until  Grave  Islet  Beacon  is  in  line  with 
Lanigan  Beacon  bearing  S.  18°  E. ;  steer  with  these  beacons  in  line, 
and  when  Cranberry  lighthouse  appears  in  one  with  Fort  Point  on 
Grassy  Islands,  steer  to  the  westward  into  the  harbor. 

Tides. — The  duration  of  the  rise  and  fall,  and  still  more  of  the 
streams,  is  influenced  by  winds  or  other  causes ;  but  the  rate  of  the 
streams  in  the  NW.  entrance  of  the  harboi",  where  they  are  strong- 
est, does  not  often  exceed  one  knot.  The  flood  comes  from  the  south- 
ward, the  ebb  from  the  opposite  direction. 

Oflf-ljring  Islands  and  Canso  Ledges.— The  small  islands  lying 
outside  Canso  Harbor,  and  not  previously  mentioned,  have  the  names 


•aHMMMIKi 


Islet  will 

the  light- 
)leofOrow 
'  the  Cape 
a.  of  Glas- 
totheNB. 
•ect  course 

Cape  Rock 
Hill  couies 
W.     Then 
open  Flag 
Qt  until  the 
ine,  bearing 
'  the  church 
ml  then  N. 
s  house  (on 
i)  just  open 
)etween  the 
ir  off  Grassy 
,  Point  bears 
vest  side  of 
d  the  south- 
len  steer  N. 
•n ,  and  they 
any  distance 
haul  to  the 

js,  bring  the 
when  it  will 
n  the  island 

nearly  mid- 
red  clay  cliff 
gh  the  chan- 

E.,  steer  for 
in  line  with 
cons  in  line, 
)rt  Point  on 

more  of  the 
rate  of  the 
y  are  strong- 
m  the  south- 
islands  lying 
ve  the  names 


CANSO    HAHBOR OFF-LYING    ROCK8, 


163 


of  Hog,  Cook,  Welsh,  and  Derabie,  and  with  many  nameless  rocks 
form  a  ciiain  1^  miles  long  in  an  easterly  direction,  termiuatiug  with 
the  East  Bock,  which  is  of  bare  granice,  20  feet  high,  auil  distant  a  long 
J  mile  northward  from  Grow  Island.  Rocks  awash  and  shallow  water 
continue  from  the  Bast  Rock  800  yards  to  the  eastward;  but  on  the 
north  side  these  islands  are  bold  to,  excepting  at  their  west  end,  where 
the  Black  Rock  and  the  shoal  around  it  extend  400  yards  from  Hog 
Island  to  the  northward.  The  Black  Rock,  which  is  seldom,  if  ever, 
entirely  covered,  is  J  mile  NE.  of  the  Bald  Rock,  and  between  them  lie 
the  entrance  to  a  channel  between  the  outer  islands  and  Piscatiqui  and 
George  Islands,  which  is  full  of  rocks,  and  only  navigable  by  boats  and 
very  small  fisiiing  vessels.  The  outer  islands  are  occupied  by  lisher- 
men  during  the  season,  but  the  north  shore  of  George  Island  by  more 
permancMit  residents.  Ail  these  islands  are  formed  of  granitic  rocks, 
excepting  Grassy  Island  and  Petitpas,  and  most  of  them  are  sparingly 
wooded  with  dwarf  spruce  trees. 

The  East  Rock  bears  from  the  lighthouse  on  Cranberry  Island  N. 
25°  VV.  1-^  miles;  and  to  the  east  of  the  line  joining  them  Me  a  nr.mber 
of  dangerous  rocks  witli  deep  water  betw  »en  them.  The  innermost  of 
these,  the  Fanning  and  S(!ott  Rocks,  with  12  and  9  feet  least  water,  re- 
spectivelj'-,  lie  on  the  eastern  edge  of  the  C"anberry  Island  bank,  and 
at  the  distance  of  h  mile  from  the  lighthouse ;  while  Park  Ledge, 
always  above  water,  Crow  Reef,  and  the  Budget  Rock  are  in  like  man- 
ner nearly  united  by  shoal  water  to  Crow  Island.  There  is  a  deei)  chan- 
nel between  tiie  Budget  Rock  and  the  Frying  Pan,  but  it  is  narrow  and 
destitute  of  good  h  ading  marks.  Next,  outside  of  the  dangers  which 
have  been  mentioned,  are  the  Kelp  Rocks,  Inner  Bass,  Middle  Rock, 
and  Broad  Shoal ;  of  these,  the  tirst  and  last  have  12  and  9  feet  least 
water,  respectively,  and  only  show  when  there  I'i  a  sea  running  ;  but 
the  Inner  Bass  is  awash  at  low  water,  and  the  Viiddlo  Rock,  having 
only  4  feet  water,  can  almost  always  be  seen. 

O-rime  and  Bass  Rocks  are  the  outermost  of  the  off-lying  dangers 
known  as  the  Canso  Ledges,  which  render  the  approach  to  the  ship 
channel  between  Cranberry  Island  and  Oa;i;  Canso  extremely  danger- 
ous to  strangers  and  more  especially  so  as  the  locality  is  celebrated  for 
fogs.  Grime  Rock,  which  has  12  feet  least  water,  is  only  marked  by 
breakers  when  the  sea  is  heavy ;  it  is  surrounded  by  various  patches 
with  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  the  outermost  rocky  patch,  with  4^  fathoms, 
being  ^  mile  to  the  eastward.  From  Grime  Rock  the  lighthouse  on 
Cranberry  Lsland  bears  S.  .52^  W.,  distant  2^^  miles;  it  also  lies  with 
the  steeple  of  the  Roman  Oatiiolic  church  at  Canso,  the  southern  ex- 
tremity of  Grassy  Island,  the  northern  end  of  Petit-pas  Island,  and 
Park  Ledge  all  in  line. 

Bass  Rock,  with  0  feet  water,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  freiiuently, 
lies  S,  24°  VV.  7oi»  yards  from  Grime  Rock,  and  N.  55°  E.  2^  miles  from 
Cranberry  Island    Lighthouse;    from   Bass  Rock  the  steeple  of  the 


J 


164 


CHEDABUCTO    BAY SOUTH    COAST. 


Roman  Catholic  church  at  Gaaso,  and  southern  extremity  of  Petit-pas 
Islopd  ai)pear  in  line. 

Automatic  Buoy  oft'  Cape  Canso  is  painted  black,  marked  Cape 
Canso,  and  sounds  a  10  inch  whistle.  The  buoy  is  moored  in  20  fathoms 
water  1^  miles  east  from  Grime  Rock,  and  will  be  kept  in  position  dur- 
ing the  season  of  navigation  each  year. 

Caution.— In  passing  round  these  dangers  in  thick  weather,  great 
caution  and  the  constant  use  of  the  lead  are  indispensable.  If  th€(  ap- 
proach be  from  the  northward,  remember  that  they  lie  only  800  yards 
within  the  ;iO  fathom  edge  of  the  bank ;  it"  from  the  southward  and  east- 
ward, go  into  no  less  than  25  fathoms  until  the  soundings  indicate  that 
the  vessel  is  off  the  bank  to  the  northward ;  and  lastly,  in  clear  weather, 
do  not  haul  to  the  westward  into  Ohedabucto  Bay  until  the  high  IiuhI 
of  Black  Point  opens  to  the  northward  of  Derabie  Island,  beariiiff 
west. 

Fox  Island,  lying  i^  >niles  to  the  westward  of  Canso,  is  granitic,  ^ 
mile  long,  and  40  feet  high.  It  is  connected  with  a  shingle  point  of 
the  mainland,  distant  700  yards,  by  a  bar  of  sand  and  stone  nearly 
dry  at  low  water. 

The  Fox  Rocks  lie  oii  Lazy  Head,  between  Durell  and  E'ox  Islands, 
and  dry  at  low  water;  the  outer  Fox  being  J  mile  off  shore,  and  the 
same  distance  eastward  from  Fox  Island.  The  north  point  of  Fox 
Island  and  the  pitch  of  Black  Point  in  one,. clear  the  outer  Fox  in  5 
fathoms ;  and  also  the  shoal  off  Tickle  Island. 

Half  Island  Cove,  i^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Fox  Island,  affords  a 
small  and  unsafe  anchorage,  being  open  to  the  winds  and  swell  from  the 
north  and  east.  Off  the  small  island,  on  the  west  side  of  this  cove,  there 
Is  a  dangerous  rock,  lying  200  yards  from  it  to  the  eastward. 

Philip  Cove,  2  miles  farther  to  the  westward,  affords  shelter  to 
bolts,  tiie  sea  being  kept  out  by  rocks  iu  the  entrance,  and  which  be- 
comes dry  soon  after  high  water. 

Crow  Harbor,celebrated  for  its  mackerel  and  herring  fisheries,  has 
excellent  holding-ground,  and  water  enough  for  vessels  of  the  largest 
draft;  but  there  is  not  room  for  many  large  vessels  in  the  eastern  part 
of  the  harbor. 

Rook  Island  is  a  rock  200  yards  long,  lying  nearly  in  the  middle  of 
the  entrance;  and  the  Kook  Rock,  with  3  feet  least  v  ater,  lies  70 yards 
oft' the  NW.  extremity  of  the  island,  with  deep  water  close  to.  The 
channel  to  the  westward  of  the  island  has  17  fathoms  water  in  it,  and 
is  GOO  yards  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  Rook  and  Corveau  Rocks, 
which  last  are  dry  at  low  water,  and  form  pari;  of  the  reef  oft'  Lamb 
Point. 

The  channel  to  the  eastward  of  Rook  Island,  between  it  and  the 
Brodie  Rocks,  is  genorally  preferred  with  easterly  winds,  although  hav- 
ing only  23  feet  water,  and  200  yards  wide.  The  Brodie  Rocks,  which 
dry  at  low  water,  form  part  of  the  reef  Thich  extends  450  yards  from 


BBjBiB'/'r'i-niii'vr.irr^. 


of  Petit-pas 

arked  Cape 
t  20  fathoms 
)osition  dur- 

lather,  great 
If  the)  ap- 
ly  800  yards 
ird  and  east- 
indicate  that 
ear  weather, 
e  high  hind 
and,  beariiiff 

is  granitic,  ^ 
gle  point  of 
stone  nearly 

Pox  Islands, 
lore,  and  the 
»oint  of  Fox 
Iter  Fox  in  5 

md,  affords  a 

well  from  the 

lis  cove,  there 

,rd. 

is  shelter  to 

iid  which  be- 

fisheries,  l^as 
f  the  largest 
)  eastern  part 

the  middle  of 
',  lies  70  yards 
slose  to.  The 
iter  in  it,  and 
[)rveau  Rocks, 
reef  oft"  Lamb 

?.u  it  and  the 

although  hav- 

Eocks,  which 

150  yards  from 


CROW   HARBOR GUY8B0R0UGH. 


165 


lazy  and  Brodie  Points  towards  Rook  Island,  giving  security  to  the 
eastern  part  of  the  harbor.  The  mark  for  clearing  these  rocks,  and  the 
shoal  water  within  them  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  harbor,  is  Lamb  Point 
and  the  extreme  of  the  land  to  ihe  westward  in  one.  bearing  N. 
80O  W. 

Directions. — In  the  absence  of  buoys  and  beaconSj  vessels  wishing 
to  enter  Crow  Ilarbor  should,  in  approaching  from  the  eastward  to 
avoid  the  shoal  which  extends  300  yards  oS  Lazy  Poinf,  bring  the  east 
end  of  Rook  Island  to  bear  nothing  to  the  weatv.ard  t»f  S.  3i°  W.,  and 
steer  for  it  untd  within  the  distance  of  400  j-ards,  then  alter  course  to 
the  southward,  to  pass  about  200  yards  to  the  eastward  of  that  island. 
When  the  vessel  has  ran  past  the  island,  the  marks  already  given  for 
clearing  the  Brodie  Rocks,  and  the  shoal  water  on  the  NF.  side  of  the 
harbor,  will  coin«  on,  and  enable  her  safely  to  haul  in  to  the  SB.,  and 
choose  a  berth  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  over  a  mud  bottom. 

Tides — There  is  little  or  no  stream  of  tide  within  the  harbor. 

Coast — At  the  distance  of  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  Lamb  Point  is 
the  tirdt  of  three  remarkable  high  clay  cliffs,  which  point  out  the  posi- 
tion of  Crow  Harbor  from  a  distance  after  which  there  is  nothing 
deserving  particular  notice  along  the  hilly,  bold,  and  rooky  coast  up  to 
the  Salmon  River,  unless  it  may  be  Half-way  Cove,  as  affording  a  land- 
ing place  for  boats. 

The  Salmon  River  is  navigable  for  boats  to  the  distance  of  2  miles 
in  from  its  very  narrow  entrance,  on  the  bar  of  which  the  depth  is  only 
3  feet  at  low  water.  Shoal  water  extends  ^  mile  out  from  the  entrance^ 
and  a  rocky  ridge  with  4  fathoms  least  water  projects  '^  mile  farther  to 
the  eastward.  Bigby  Flead,  a  remarkable  cliff  100  feet  high,  separates 
this  river  from  Toby  Cove,  another  place  for  boats,  with  4  feet  on  its 
bar  at  low  water. 

O-uysborough  Harbor,  at  the  head  of  Chedabucto  Bay,  io  an  exten- 
sive inlet,  running  in  to  the  northward,  with  a  depth  of  water  sufficient 
for  vessels  of  large  draft ;  but  with  such  a  dangerous  bur,  an  entrance 
channel  so  narrow  and  crooked,  and  such  rapid  tides,  that  no  written 
directions  could  be  available.  Tiie  assistance  of  a  pilot  acquainted  with 
every  local  peculiarity  of  the  tides  and  winds  is  indispensable  for  the 
safety  of  a  vessel  even  of  very  moderate  size,  either  in  entering  or  'leav- 
ing this  harbor,  as  will  appear  from  an  inspection  of  the  chart. 

Ouysborough,  the  co'-.aty  town,  is  advantageously  situated  on  the 
western  side  of  the  harbor,  the  deep  water  a[)proaciiin;:f  close  to  its 
wharves.  It  contains  about  1,800  inhabitants,  and  has  2  churches  ;  the 
northernmost  standing  Oo  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water.  Tlie  hills- 
.attain  the  height  of  .500  feet  on  either  side  of  this  beautiful  inlet, 
v,iiich  is  navigable  for  ships  uj)  to  the  Narrows,  where  the  depth  is  8 
feet  at  low  water  at  4  miles  from  the  entrance.  Sm  ill  vessels  may  pro- 
ceed 3  miles  still  farther,  and  bo  its  to  Mie  bridge,  where  the  tide  ends 
at  .S^  miles  from  the  entrance,  and  where  the  Gnysboroiigh  River,  a 


CHEDABUCTO  BAY — NORTH  COAST. 

small  stream,  enters  the  inlet,  flowing  through  rich  meadows  called  the 
Gnysborough  Interval. 

Tides. — The  streams  in  the  narrow  entrance  of  the  harbor  run  from 
4  to  5  knots. 

Outer  Bar. — The  entrance  channel  into  Guysborough  Harbor  be- 
tween Peart  Point  and  Stony  Patch  is  80  yards  wide,  and  carries  5J 
fatiioms  water;  but  farther  out  and  stretching  across  from  Toby  Point 
to  Ha(!ley  Beach  there  is  a  bar  of  sand,  with  17  feet  on  it  at  low  water, 
and  wliieh  is  rendered  impassable  at  times  by  heavy  breakers. 

The  Inner  Bar  lies  across  the  inner  entrance,  which  is  :.'30  yards 
wide,  between  Eliza  Point  and  Hadley  Beach.  The  depth  which  can 
be  carried  over  it  is  L.J  feet  at  low  water,  in  a  channel  only  80  yards 
wide.  Before  arriving  at  this  bar  there  is  room  enough  for  a  vessel  or 
two  to  anchor  in  the  month  of  Ingersol  Ct-eek  out  of  tho  strength  of  the 
tide  and  sheltered  from  the  sea  by  Stony  Patch. 

Directions. — Tlie  course  across  the  Outer  Bar,  in  tlie  deepest  water, 
is  west,  steering  for  the  lighthouse  until  within  ttie  distance  of  200 
yards,  then  curving  gradually  to  the  northward  and  eastward,  as  the 
vessel  passes  the  beach  off  Peart  Point  at  the  distance  of  60  yards,  and 
crosses  the  mouth  of  Ingersol  Creek  to  the  Inner  Bar.  The  course  then 
becomes  N.  45°  E.  for  2'X)  yards  while  crossing  that  bar,  and  then  north- 
erly through  a  clear  and  deep  channel  for  ^  mile  to  the  safe  and  spacious 
anchorage  off"  the  town. 

North  Shore  of  Chedabucto  Bay.— Michauz  Point,  the  NE.  point 
of  Chedabucto  Bay,  is  a  peninsula,  unite<l  to  t^e  mainland  by  a  double 
beach,  inclosing  a  pond  ;  and  Red  Point  and  Red  Island  are  distant  from 
it  2J  miles  to  the  westwar<l.  Off  these  points,  and  extending  across  the 
bay  between  them,  lie  the  Michaux  Ledges,  dry  at  low  water,  and 
usually  shown  by  heavy  breakers.  The  SW.  extremes  of  St.  Peters 
Island  and  Mark  Point  in  one,  lead  close  outside  oi  to  the  southward 
of  them,  in  4  fathoms;  therefore,  in  standing  towards  them,  tack  while 
the  point  is  well  open  to  the  west  of  the  island. 

St.  Peter  Island  lies  3 J  miles  farther  to  the  XW". ;  and  in  the  shoal 
bay  between  it  and  Red  Point  will  be  seen  the  church  steeple  and  the 
village  of  Anl'^ise.  The  island  is  low  and  about  ^  mile  long.  The  cove 
on  its  inner  ^  noitL  side  affords  slielter  to  numerous  small  craft  an«l 
boats,  tills  h 'ing  one  of  the  ,  ncipal  fishing  stations  in  these  parts. 
The  island  it  I'old  to  seaward,  but  off  the  NW.  side  is  the  Haddock  Kock, 
at  a  distance  of  ^  mile;  and  in  the  bay  between  it  and  Mark  Point  there 
is  much  shoal  water,  leaving,  however,  a  clear  channel  within  the 
Horseheads  and  Samson  Rocks  into  St.  Peter  Bay  (page,  174). 

Jeak  Point. — The  eastern  and  southern  shores  ot  Madn'ue  Island 
will  now  be  described,  commencing  at  Beak  Point,  distant  l\  miles 
south  from  Cape  Round.  The  shoal  water  runs  out  otdy  to  the  distance 
of  400  yards,  but  off  it  tiiere  is  much  rocky  and  irregular  ground,  on 
which  the  sea  is  said  to  break  occasionally  in  heavy  gales.    The  least 


rg  called  the 

or  ruu  from 

Harbor  be- 
I  carries  5J 
Toby  Point 
t  low  water, 
3rs. 

I  '/30  yards 
which  can 
ly  80  yards 
■  a  vessel  or 
Migtli  of  the 

}|)!'8t  water, 
iiice  of  200 
rard,  as  the 
)  yards,  and 
coarse  then 
then  north- 
md  spacious 

lie  NE.  point 
by  a  double 
listaut  from 
ig  across  the 
water,  and 
f  St.  Peters 
B  ij^outhward 
,  tack  while 

in  the  shoal 
iple  and  the 
;.  Tbe  cove 
ill  craft  and 
these  parts, 
ddock  Kock, 
;  Point  there 
within  the 

•4). 

lii'ue  Island 
nt  l\  miles 
the  distance 
ground,  on 
i.    The  least 


■3 


MADAME   ISLAND — EAST   COAST. 


167 


water  that  could  be  found  tliere  was  4  fathoms,  which  bears  from  the 
point  S.  fiOo  E.,  and  is  distant  IJ  miles.  Another  rocky  patch,  with  4J 
fathoms,  lies  N.  71°  B.  a  mile  from  the  point.  A  vessel  of  large  draft 
should  pass  outside  this  rocky  ground,  especially  when  there  is  a  heavy 
sea  running. 

Bay  of  Rocks,  lying  between  Beak  Point  and  the  Gros  Nez,  a  rocky 
islet  at  the  NE.  extremity  of  Petitcfegrat  Island,  is  3  miles  wide.  It  is 
a  dangerous  place,  affording  no  safe  anchorage  for  ships,  being  open  to 
all  easterly  winds,  which  send  in  a  heavy  sea.  Bewes  Shoal,  with  20 
feet  least  water,  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and  beside  the  low 
rocky  islets  near  its  head,  there  are  many  other  rocks  around  and  off 
its  shores. 

Red  Head,  the  SE.  extremity  of  Petitdegrat  Island,  is  a  remarkable 
cliff  70  feet  higii.  Shallow  water  runs  out  from  it  ^  mile,  to  clear  which, 
keep  Beak  Point  open  to  the  eastward  of  Plat  Point. 

Green  Island. — Green  Island,  of  slate,  with  precipitous  shores,  90 
feet  hif"!!  and  j^^  mile  long,  lies  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Ked  Head.  It  is 
bold  all  round,  and  there  is  a  clear  channel  5  mile  wide  between  it  and 
Red  Head. 

Orpheus  Rock  (called  Boss  by  the  fishermen)  lies  east  1§  miles  from 
Green  Island.  It  is  awash  at  low  water,  and  the  sea  consequently 
almost  always  breaks  on  it;  otherwise  it  would  be  still  more  dangerous 
than  it  is.  Heath  Head  (the  southern  extreme  of  Petitdegrat  Island, 
and  distant  a  mile  west  from  Red  Head)  will  lead  clear  of  this  rock, 
either  to  the  northward  or  southward,  according  as  it  may  be  kept  open 
to  the  north  or  to  the  south  of  Green  Island. 

Petitdegrat  Inlet,  sejiarates  Petitdegrat  Islet  from  Madame  Island 
by  a  very  narrow  channel,  through  which  boats  may  pass  at  high  water 
into  the  Bay  of  Rocks.  It  is  3  miles  long,  and  has  water  enough  for 
large  vessels,  but  the  rocks  are  so  numerous  and  the  channel  between 
them  so  narrow  as  (o  render  the  aid  of  a  native  pilot  indispensable. 
The  fisheries  are  extensively  prosecuted  from  this  inlet,  and  its  shores, 
as  well  as  almost  every  cove  in  the  island,  are  occui)ied  by  the  fisher- 
men and  th'-ir  employers. 

Cape  Hogan.  the  southern  promontory  of  Madame  Island,  separates 
Petitdegrat  iVom  Arichat.  and  is  a  bold  and  remarkable  headland,  with 
cliffs  100  feet  high. 

Cerberus  Rock,  just  awash  at  low  tide,  with  deep  water  all  around, 
and  lying  directly  in  the  way  of  vessels  to  and  lioiii  the  Gut  of  Oanso, 
is  pxceedingi'-  dangerous  in  dark  nights  and  foggy  weather.  In  the 
daytime  either  breakers  or  a  rippling  over  it  can  almost  always  be  seen. 
A  red  buoy  is  moored  in  15  fathoms  about  100  yards  south  of  the  rock. 

To  avoid  this  danger  in  a  vessel  boun'l  to  the  westward,  i.'P](  some 
part  of  Green  Island  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Hogan  until  the 
easternmost  church  at  Arichat  is  seen  over  the  shingle  isthmus  uniting 


!i 


]68 


CHEDABUCTO   BAV — NORTH   COAST. 


the  two  peninaulas  of  Jerseyinan  Island,  or  until  Arichat  Head  bears 
N.  9°  E. ;  then  the  course  may  be  safely  shaped  for  the  Gut  of  Oanso. 

In  a  vessel  outward  bound,  take  care  that  the  course  made  good  from 
the  middle  of  the  southern  entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Oanso  is  not  more 
to  the  eastward  than  S.  46°  E.  until  Green  Island  appears  to  the  south- 
ward of  Gape  Hogan,  or  until  the  steeple  of  the  Arichat  church  is  seen 
over  the  Jurseyman  Isthmus,  when  the  course  may  be  safely  shaped 
more  to  the  eastward  and  out  to  sea. 

Arichat  Harbor,  capable  of  containing  a  large  number  of  vessels, 
is  sheltered  by  Jerseyman  Island,  vv'hich  stretches  across  the  bay.  It 
has  two  entrances,  of  which  the  western  is  the  least  difficult  for  stran- 
gers, although  only  200  yards  wide.  The  eastern  entrance  is  600  yards 
wide,  but  it  lies  between  shoals. 

The  straggling  town  of  Arichat  extends  nearly  3  miles  along  the  bold 
and  steep  north  shore  of  the  harbor,  where  there  are  many  wharves 
and  stores.  Of  the  two  churches  the  westernmost  is  the  largest,  and 
the  only  other  public  building  at  all  remarkable  is  the  court-house, 
standing  more  to  the  eastward  and  distinguished  by  its  cupola.  It  is 
the  headquarters  of  the  fisheries  in  its  neighborhood,  and  the  most  im- 
portant seaport,  both  in  commerce  and  in  population,  on  the  Atlantic 
Coast  of  Nova  Scotia  eastward  of  Halifax.  The  population  of  the  town 
is  about  1,1200,  and  that  of  the  whole  of  Madame  Island  6,000. 

Water. — The  usual  watering  place  is  at  a  spring  near  Huberts  Wharf, 
where  good  water  may  be  obtained  on  payment  of  a  small  sum.  Water 
may  also  be  obtained  at  Irish  Point,  from  the  outlet  of  the  chain  of 
small  lakes  in  the  rear  of  the  town  {I860). 

Maraohe  Point,  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  Arichat  Harbor, 
is  quite  bold  to  the  westward,  with  the  exception  of  two  small  rocky 
patches  which  lie  off  it  at  the  respective  distances  of  600  and  800  yards 
to  the  N  W.,  and  ou  which  the  least  water  is  4  fathoms.  To  the  north- 
ward of  the  point,  and  for  some  distance  to  the  eastward,  the  shoal 
water  extends  300  yards  offshore. 

a'erseyman  Island,  with  the  Crid  Islands  forming  the  C'rid  Pass, 
in  addition  to  the  liglithouse  on  its  north  point,  has  a  beacon  on  the 
SE.  point,  tor  the  purpose  of  marking  the  Hautfond  ShoaIf<. 

Hautfond  Shoals  are  a  chain  of  rocky  patches,  marked  by  a  red  ca^* 
buoy,  moored  in  6  fathoms,  southward  200  yards  from  the  shoal.  The 
least  water,  10  feet,  is  on  the  outermost  patch,  from  which  Moyac  Point 
'^ears  S.  8;P  E.,  and  Marache  Pcint  N.  19°  E.,  and  the  distance  is  nearly 
a  mile  from  each  of  them.  The  other  patches  lie  in  a  line  from  the 
outer  one  to  the  north  side  of  Forest  Cove ;  the  least  water  on  them  is 
21  feet,  and  there  is  deep  water  between  them,  but  the  safe  channel  for 
ships  is  outside  or  to  the  westward  of  them  all.  The  beacon  on  the 
SE.  point  of  Jerseyman  Island,  in  line  with  the  cupola  of  the  convent, 
which  stands  130  yards  east  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church,  will  lead 
westward  of  these  shoals. 


1 


ARICHAT. 


169 


lead  bears 
of  Oanso. 
good  from 
i  not  more 
the  south- 
rch  is  seen 
)ly  shaped 

3f  vessels, 

le  baj'.    It 

for  stran- 

j  600  yards 

ig  the  bold 
ly  wharves 
trgest,  and 
>urt-house, 
)ola.  It  is 
e  most  im- 
le  Atlantic 
if  the  tow  a 
3. 

irts  Wharf, 
im.  Water 
he  chain  of 

at  Harbor, 
11  all  rocky 
i  800  yards 
the  north- 
,  the  shoal 

t!rid  Pass, 
sou  on  the 

y  a  red  ca" 
hoal.  The 
oyac  Point 
[;e  is  nearly 
e  from  the 
on  them  is 
ihannel  for 
!on  on  the 
le  coriv«*nt, 
1,  will  lead 


Anchorage. — Oapodiette  Bay,  1^  miles  wide,  between  Marache  and 
Eavauagh  Points,  although  open  to  westerly  winds  and  to  the  heavy 
swell  rolling  in  at  times  round  the  point  from  the  southward,  neverthe- 
less affords  a  tolerably  good  occasional  anchorage  in  10  or  12  fiithoins, 
mud  bottom,  the  best  ground  being  in  the  deepest  water. 

Fiddle  Shoal,  with  10  feet  least  water,  lies  at  the  outer  end  of  the 
rocky  bauk  which  extends  to  the  westward  GOD  yards  irom  K;iv;iiia;;h 
Point.  There  is  no  passage  for  large  vessels  between  it  and  the  point, 
which  has  several  dry  rocks  off  it,  and  shoal  water  all  along  its  SW. 
side,  to  the  distance  of  300  yards  offshore.  On  the  north  side  of  the 
point  within  the  harbor,  a  reef,  with  only  3  feet  at  low  water,  runs  oft' 
J  mile,  which  is  half  way  across  to  the  wharves  of  the  town  of  Arichat. 

Henley  Ledges,  which  are  black  rocks,  covered  only  at  high  water 
and  almost  always  shown  by  breakers,  lie  near  the  SW.  extremity  of 
the  rocky  bank  off  Jerseyman  Island,  from  which  they  are  distant 
§  mile.  The  breadth  of  the  deep  water  between  them  and  Marache 
Point  is  ^  mile.  To  seaward  the  shallow  water  extends  from  them  only 
300  yards,  but  there  is  a  rock  awash  )f  mile  from  tliem  to  the  north- 
westward, and  two  others  between  them  and  Jerseyman  Island,  thus 
leaving  no  passage  for  ships.  There  are  no  good  leading  marks  for 
sailing  to  the  SW.  of  these  rocks;  but  vessels  will  pass  well  to  the 
the  SE.  of  them,  if  the  steeple  of  the  easternmost  church  at  Arichat  be 
not  shut  in  behind  the  eastern  extremity  of  Jerseyman  Island. 

Pilot  Rock,  marked  by  a  black  buoy,  is  on  the  NW.  side  of  the  chan- 
nel, and  at  the  extremity  of  the  shallow  water  off"  the  east  end  of  Jersey- 
man  Island,  from  which  it  is  distant  600  yards  to  the  eastward.  It  is 
small,  with  4  feet  least  uter,  and  quite  bold  to  the  southward.  There 
is  no  channel  between  it  and  the  island  for  large  vessels.  The  leading 
mark  to  clear  it  is  De  Carteret's  flagstaff",  near  to  the  east  end  of  Ari- 
chat, seen  over  Kavanagh  Point;  but  this  mark  leads  very  close  to 
the  SE  of  the  rock. 

Poule  Reef,  with  7  feet  least  water,  lies  N.  55°  E.  400  yards  from 
Poule  Islet,  which  is  nearly  united  to  the  east  end  of  Jerseyman  Island 
at  low  water.  There  is  a  narrow  channel,  fit  only  for  small  craft,  be- 
tween the  shoal  and  the  islet;  but  the  ship  channel  to  the  eastward  of 
this  shoal,  between  it  and  the  Fiddle,  is  600  yards  wide,  with  water 
sufficient  for  the  largest  ships. 

Directions. — If  bound  to  Arichat  from  the  eastward,  with  a  leading 
wind,  a  vessel  will  pass  the  Hautfond  Shoals  by  keeping  some  part  of 
Green  Island  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Cape  flogan  until  the  bea- 
con on  Jerseyman  Island  is  in  line  with  the  cupola  of  the  convent  east- 
ward ot  the  Roman  Catholic  church,  and  steer  for  it,  until  the  light- 
house on  Marache  Point  bears  S.  61°  E.;  thence  st  er  N".  63°  E.  so  as 
to  make  a  direct  .jourse  towards  Little  Barachois  at  the  head  of  Capo- 
dietie  Bay;  and  as  soon  as  the  steeple  of  the  westernmost  church  at 
Arichat  opens  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  priest's  flagstaff",  bearing 


170 


CHEDABUCTO    DAY^NORTH    COAST. 


N.  240  \V,,  run  towards  it  until  the  soutbern  extnunity  of  Creightou 
Island  is  seen  throusfh  the  Crid  l'>*ss.  The  vessel  being  then  within 
Poiile  Reef,  may  saf«Iy  haul  to  the  westward  and  select  a  berth  at 
pleasure  in  the  most  roomy  part  of  the  harbor,  :v-tjwhere  to  the  north 
of  the  line  from  l*oule  Islet  to  Beach  Point.  South  of  that  line  the 
eastern  bight  of  .lerseynian  Island  contains  the  Cage  Shoal,  with 
only  7  feet  water,  and  much  foul  ground. 

If  the  vessel  should  have  occasion  to  go  to  the  eastern  part  of  the 
hat  Itor,  she  should  stand  well  over  to  the  north  shore  before  bearing  up 
to  the  eastward,  and  run  along  it  at  the  distance  of  200  yards  from  the 
eiulsof  tiie  wharves,  until  after  Maraohe  Point  has  disappeared  behind 
Kavanagh  Point,  when  si  ■  will  be  to  the  eastward  of  the  reef  off  the 
last-named  point,  and  will  find  bold  shores  and  plenty  of  water  to 
within  250  yanls  of  the  entrance  of  the  cove  at  the  head  of  the  harbor. 

With  local  knowledge  a  vessel  could  i)ass  eastward  of  the  Hautfond 
Shoals  by  steering  for  the  steeple  of  the  westernmost  church  at  Mar- 
ache  Point  in  line,  bearing  N.  2°  E.  until  within  J  mile  of  the  |)oiut; 
then,  after  keeping  away  a  little  to  pass  the  point,  ai  I  the  shoal  water 
mentioned  off  its  north  side,  they  will  have  to  beat  up  Oapodiette  Bay 
until  the  marks  for  running  in,  namely,  the  westernmost  church,  open 
a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  flagstaff,  bearing  N.  24°  W.,  come  on. 

Crid  PasFUge. — In  approaching  Arichatfrora  the  westward,  the  only 
outlying  danger,  besides  the  Cerberus  Kock,  is  the  Creighton  Shoal ; 
and  this:  last  will  be  avoided  if,  alter  passing  the  Peninsula  Shoals 
Bear  Hi-ad  be  not  shut  in  behind  Peninsula  Point  until  the  westernmost 
iihuvcii  at  Aru^hat  is  seen  to  the  southward  of  theCrid  Islands;  a  mark 
whi<  h  also  leads  clear  of  the  Picard  Reef  and  of  all  the  shoal  water  off 
Creighton  Island.  The  Crid  Islands,  which  are  small  and  rocky,  form 
the  iiitrth  side  of  the  Crid  Pass,  the  whole  breadth  of  which  across  to 
Beach  Point  is  about  300  yards,  but  there  are  half-tide  rocks  off  both 
ends  of  those  little  islands  which  reduce  the  navigable  breadth  of  the 
channel  to  200  yards.  The  extremity  of  Beach  Point,  which  is  all  shin- 
gle, may  be  safely  passed  as  near  as  60  yards ;  but  on  the  outside  of  the 
point  the  shoal  water  commences  immediately,  and  continues  increasing 
in  breadth  from  the  shore  to  the  western  extremity  of  the  island,  where 
it  extends  .j  mile  from  the  cliffs. 

With  the  necessary  leading  wind,  bring  the  steeple  of  the  western- 
most church  to  appear  through  the  middle  of  Crid  Pass,  or  a  little  to 
the  northward  of  Beach  Point,  when  it  will  bear  X.  71°  E.  Keep  it  so 
while  running  towards  it,  and  when  the  vessel  has  arrived  within  J  mile 
of  the  point,  if  Robin  wharf  and  stores  (on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor) 
be  not  already  seen  to  the  northward  of  Beach  Point,  steer  a  little  to 
northward  till  they  are  so,  and  then  steer  for  them  N.  83°  E.,  or  so  as 
to  pass  the  point  at  any  distance  between  60  and  200  yards,  into  the 
harbor. 

Tides. — The  stream  of  flood  comes  in  by  the  eastern  entrance,  running 


SSaggTuTmse^saisasMJaBaw 


'  Oreightou 

:tieu  with  ill 

a  berth  at 

0  the  north 
lat  line  the 
ihoal,   with 

part  of  the 
bearing  np 
\\»  from  tlie 
i^rcd  behind 
reef  off  the 
)f  water  to 
the  harbor, 
e  Hautfond 
rch  at  Mar- 
the  |>oiut; 
jtlioal  water 
odiette  Bay 
lurch,  open 
come  on. 
.ni,  the  only 

1  ton  Shoal ; 
sula  Shoals 
resternmost 
ds ;  a  mark 
al  water  off 
rocky,  form 
b  across  to 
iks  off  both 
ladth  of  the 
t  is  all  shin- 
taide  of  the 
i  increasing 
land,  where 

he  western- 
r  a  little  to 
Keep  it  so 
Jithm  ^  mile 
the  harbor) 
r  a  little  to 
E.,  or  so  as 
Is,  into  the 

ice,  running 


ARICHAT    AND    WEST    ARICHAT. 


171 


>t'       id  and  shingle,  with  stores 

ro;i  fshmd.     Vessels  lie  imme- 

n     as  securely  as  in  a  dock, 

ir  of  shinjiiie,  which  <lries 


through  the  harbor  to  the  westward,  and  the  ebb  stream  the  contrary ; 
but  these  streams  are  not  very  regular,  and  seldom  exceeil  the  rate  of 
one  knot. 

TVest  Arichat,  situated  inside  of  Creighton  Island,  is  a  small  luid 
secure  harbor,  where  the  fisheries  are  extensively  j)rosecuted.  The  a|>- 
proii(;li  is  from  the  westward,  and  over  a  bar,  with  17  feet  at  low  water, 
which  exteiuls  across  to  the  northward  from  Arichat  Head,  the  west 
extremity  of  Creighton  Island.  The  entrance  of  the  harbor,  i  mile 
within  this  bar,  is  300  yards  wide  between  Creighton  and  Mosdet 
Points;  the  former  being  a  long  spit 
and  a  wharf,  on  the  north  side  of  Cr* 
diately  within  the  entrance  in  3|  fa: 
the  harbor  being  closed  at  the  east  > 
at  low  water. 

Directions. — Bring  the  wliarf  on  tlie  north  side  of  Bosdet  Point  to 
bear  N.  74°  E.,  and  steer  for  it ;  the  vessel  will  then  pass  the  bar  in 
not  less  than  15  feet  at  low  water.  Continue  the  same  course  until  the 
shingly  tSW.  extremity  of  Bosdet  Point  and  the  NE.  extremity  of 
Creighton  Island  (at  the  east  end  of  the  harbor)  are  touching,  and 
bearing  S.  05°  E.,  when  alter  course,  and  keep  the  last  named  marks 
in  one  exactly  running  towards  them  until  Bosdet  Point  is  300  yards 
ahead ;  then  alter  course  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  l)e  two  thirds  of 
the  distance  over  from  Creighton  Point  towards  Bosdet  Point,  as  the 
vessel  passes  between  them  into  the  harbor. 

Le  Blanc  and  Haddock  Harbors. — Le  Blanc  Harbor  has  its  en- 
trance ^  mile  from  West  Arichat  and  in  the  NB.  corner  of  the  same 
bay.  Six  feet  at  low  water  can  be  carried  in  through  its  very  narrow 
entrance,  and  there  is  much  more  within.  It  is  an  extensive  place, 
containing  a  population  of  fishermen  and  small  farmers. 

At  the  NE.  extremity  of  this  harbor  is  the  Viousselier  Pass,  very 
narrow,  between  mussel  beds,  and  only  one  foot  in  it  at  low  water. 
Boats  pass  through  it  into  Haddock  Harbor,  the  principal  entrance  to 
which  is  from  the  Lennox  Passage,  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  to  the 
eastward  of  Campbell  Island,  but  it  has  20  feet  in  it  at  low  water.  Both 
these  last-named  harbors  are  occasionally  resorted  to  by  small  vessels 
in  the  fishing  season,  but  thej'  are  no  use  to  large  ships. 

In  the  bay  between  Arichat  Head  and  Peninsula  Point  are  Deep 
Cove  and  Janvrin  Harbor  barred  by  Dorey  Leilge,  and  only  useful  to 
small  craft  and  boats.  In  the  entrance  of  Janvrin  Harbor,  and  1 J  miles 
eastward  from  Peninsula  Point,  lies  Delorier  Island,  from  which  extend 
the  rocky  Bentinck  Shoals.  The  least  water  on  these  shoals  is  4  feet> 
but  as  they  lie  in  a  bay,  they  are  not  much  in  the  way  of  vessels  ;  they 
join  the  Peninsula  Shoals  to  the  westward,  which,  with  tiie  southern 
entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Canso,  will  be  described  on  page  172. 

Creighton  Shoal  Buoy  is  rocky,  and  the  least  water,  11  feet,  lies 
with  the  westernmost  church  at  Arichat,  just  shut  in  behind  the  south- 


CHEDABUCTO    BAY — NORTH    COAST. 


t 


ern  extremity  of  Orei(;litoii  [slaiid;  it  bears  S.  70°  W.  au<l  is  distniit  'j 
mile  from  Arichat  Head.  The  marks  for  passing  to  the  northward  of  it 
will  be  useful  to  vessels  bound  to  and  from  West  Arichat,  and  are, 
Bosdet  Point  and  wharf  just  open  to  tl'.e  northward  of  Creightou  Is- 
land, bearing  N.  63°  E.  Bear  Heml  and  Peninsula  point  in  one,  lead 
past  it  at  the  distance  of  )f  mile  to  the  8W. ;  and  the  above  church 
at  Arichat,  open  to  the  southward  of  the  Crid  Islands,  bearing  N.  74° 
E.,  not  onlj'  leads  \  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  Creighton  Shoal,  but 
also  clears  the  Picard  Reef,  which  extends  400  yards  to  the  westward 
from  the  south  point  of  Creighton  Island. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  black,  in  horizontal  stripes,  is  moored 
on  the  center  of  Creightou  Shoal. 

Wasting  Islet  and  Peninsula  Point,  appearing  like  two  small  is- 
lands, on  the  edge  of  the  bank  which  dries  out  from  the  SW.  side 
of  Janvrin  Island,  will  bo  easily  recognized,  the  islet  being  most  to  the 
NW.  They  both  have  low  red  cliffs  to  seaward,  and  long  gravel 
spits  at  their  north  points;  but  a  long  bar  of  shingle  unites  the  penin- 
sula at  its  east  end  to  Janvrin  Island.  The  very  shallow  water  extends 
400  yards  ott'  Wasting  Islet,  with  a  depth  of  4  or  5  fathoms,  for  an  equal 
distance  farther  to  the  SW. 

Peninsula  Shoals  are  much  more  extensive  and  dangerous,  running 
off  both  to  the  south  and  SE.  In  the  latter  direction  the  reef  extends 
out  nearly  ^  milf  Shi.>  Point  and  Bear  Head  in  one,  bearing  N.  04° 
W.,  lead  to  the  • '  V.  i  jhese  shoals  in  6  fathoms  water ;  and  the 
steeple  of  tlve  uhnuel  at  Arichat  and  the  south  extremity  of  Creighton 
Island  in  lin-  'j-jaring  N.  80°  E.,  will  lead  to  the  southward  at  the  dis- 
tance of  i  miie. 

Thomas  Shoals  runs  out  from  Thomas  Head  (the  NW.  point  of 
Janvrin  Island),  J  mile  to  the  westward,  with  rocky  and  irregular 
soundings,  from  11  to  21  feet  at  low  water.  The  clearing  mark  for  its 
western  extremity  is  the  eastern  end  of  Wasting  Islet,  touching  the 
south  end  of  Peninsula  Point,  bearing  S.  50°  E.;  and  for  its  northern 
side  the  two  points  forming  the  north  side  of  Janvrin  Island,  in  one, 
bearing  N.  71°  E.,  when  Campbell  Island  will  appear  just  open  to  the 
northward  of  them. 

The  Janvrin  Shoal,  extending  H  mile  to  the  westward  from  Janvrin 
Point,  is  a  bank  of  sand  and  stones  which  dries  out  half  of  that 
distance,  and  has  a  large  rock  near  its  edge.  At  the  distance  of  1,100 
yards  from  the  point  there  is  another  rock,  with  6  feet  least  water. 
The  SW.  side  of  Wasting  Islet,  in  one  with  the  north  end  of  Penin- 
sula Point,  bearing  S.  72°  E.,  will  lead  200  yards  to  the  SW.  of  this 
dangerous  shoal  in  5  fathoms  water.  On  the  NW.  side,  where  there 
are  no  clearing  marks,  it  should  be  approached  with  great  caution,  for 
che  water  is  too  deep  for  the  lead  to  afford  much  warning. 

From  Cape  Argos  to  Guysborough,  at  the  head  of  Chedalmcto 
Bay,  a  distance  of  12  miles,  the  prevailing  features  are  peninsulated 


Ihiii    1  (W1 


is  (U8taiit  ^ 
:bward  of  it 
,t,  and  are, 
eightou  l8- 
n  one,  letul 
ove  church 
ring  N.  74° 
I  Shoal,  but 
e  westward 

J,  is  moored 

,vo  Fiinall  is- 
10  SW.  side 
most  to  the 
long  gravel 
8  the  peniu- 
ater  extends 
for  an  equal 

QQs,  running 
reef  extends 
,riiig  N.  64° 
)r ;  and  the 
f  Creighton 
d  at  the  dis- 

W.  point  of 
id  irregular 
mark  for  its 
ouching  the 
its  northern 
iland,  in  one, 
open  to  the 

roai  Janvrin 
half  of  that 
mco  of  1,100 

least  water, 
ad  of  Penin- 
I  SW.  of  this 

where  there 
;  caution,  for 

■  Ohedabucto 
peuiusulated 


1 


— ^sijBiaSsgRSgsaE 


^iiJseai^SiiBiWitk'riifiM'i^^^L.-ajWjam^  'mf'if-^--"'*^'''^^^^^'--^^ 


*^.^^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  MIcroreproductlons  /  Instltut  Canadian  da  microreproductlons  historiques 


riifl!; 


■^; 


RAGGED  POINT — HYDRA  ROCK. 


173 


points  of  drift,  sand,  clay,  and  bowlders,  resting  on  sandstone,  and  pre- 
seuting  low  cliflfs  to  the  sea.  These  are  united  to  tbe  mainland  by 
beaches  ot  shingle,  inclosing  large  ponds,  several  of  which  admit  boats 
at  high  waler  when  the  surf  is  not  too  heavy.  In  the  rear  of  these 
ponds  are  the  houses  of  a  scattered  population,  subsisting  by  fishing 
and  fanning  (1860),  and  situated  on  the  southern  slope  of  ridges  rising 
to  the  height  of  200  feet  above  the  sea.  From  Cape  Argos  the  coast 
trends  SW.  2  miles  to  Oyster  Point,  whence  Grady  Point  bears  SW. 
IJ  miles.  The  Murdoch  Ledge,  dry  at  low  water,  and  k  mile  off  shore, 
lies  midway  between  the  two  last-named  points. 

Ragged  Point  is  a  rocky  peninsula,  forming  the  apex  of  a  triangle, 
the  sides  of  which  are  long  shingle  beaches,  inclosing  a  large  pon<I 
with  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  but  boats  can  enter  it  only  at  high  tide  by 
a  narrow  outlet  on  its  western  side.  It  appears  like  an  island  when 
seen  from  a  distance  and  forms  the  eastern  point  of  Moose  Bay,  which 
is  24  miles  across  to  Moose  Point,  in  a  west  direction,  and  J  mile  deep. 
In  shape,  this  bay  is  a  semicircle,  with  shingle  beach,  unbroken,  except- 
ing by  the  shallow  outlets  of  ponds.  It  affords  anchorage  in  from  5  to 
7  fathoms,  sand  and  mud  bottom  ;  but  it  can  be  considered  safe  only  in 
fine  summer  weather,  on  account  of  the  heavy  swell  which  accompanies 
easterly  gales  at  other  seasons.  The  only  danger  to  be  avoided  is  the 
flat  of  sand  which  extends  nearly  J  mile  off  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay. 
In  the  remaining  distance  of  2 J  miles,  from  Moose  Point  to  GuysJbor- 
ough,  all  that  requires  particular  notice  is  a  rocky  bank,  extending  J 
mile  out  from  the  shore  midway  between  them,  and  on  whjch  there  are 
19  feet  at  low  water. 

Hydra  Rock,  one  of  the  greatest  dangers  in  Chedabucto  Bay,  lies 
directly  off  Grady  Point,  from  which  it  bears  S.  52°  E.,  and  is  distant 
IJ  miles.  It  carries  12  feet  least  water.  The  part  of  the  shelf  on  which 
there  are  less  than  3  fathoms  is  only  200  yards  in  diameter ;  but  there 
are  less  than  5  fathoms  over  a  much  larger  space.  The  depth  is  8  or  9 
fathoms  between  it  and  the  land,  and  11  or  12  fathoms  outside  it  at  the 
distance  of  J  mile. 

During  the  heavy  swell  from  the  eastv^ard,  so  frequent  in  this  bay, 
the  position  of  this  rock  is  shown  by  heavy  breakers  ;  at  other  times 
it  is  exceedingly  dangerous,  especially  to  vessels  approaching  it  from 
the  SW.,  as  on  that  side  there  are  no  good  leading  marks.  The 
mark  for  passing  to  the  SE.  of  it  is  Thomas  Head,  N.  15°  E.,  open 
east  of  Cape  Argos. 


% 


?'  . 


to 


LENNOX  PASSAGE. 

Lennox  Passage,  between  Cape  Breton  Island  and  Jauvriu  and  Mad- 
ame Islands,  is  very  intricate,  and  15  miles  in  length,  with  a  low- water 
depth  of  18  or  19  feet  in  the  shallowest  part.  It  is  a  safe  and  conven- 
ient channel  for  coasting  vessels,  avoiding  the  heavy  swell  in  Cheda- 
bucto Bay,  and  affording  them  an  advanced  anchorage,  from  which  to 


■< 


174 


LENNOX    PASSAGE. 


Start  with  a  fair  wind  when  bound  out  to  sea.  These  vessels,  usually 
not  exceeding  the  draft  of  10  or  12  feet,  frequently  run  through  with  a 
leading  wind,  choosing  their  time  of  tide ;  but  large  vessels  seldom  at- 
tempt it,  even  with  the  assistance  of  pilots. 

The  Eastern  Entrance  of  Lennox  Passage,  between  Cape  Itound 
and  Mark  Point,  is  2$  miles  wide.  The  shoals  off  St.  Peter  Bay  occupy 
much  of  that  space,  but  still  leave  a  clear  channel  a  mile  wide  between 
them  and  Cape  Round.  As  this  channel  leads  to  the  only  anchorage 
(either  ott'  the  north  side  of  Bernard  Island,  or  off  the  eastern  entrance 
of  Poulament  Bay,  page  176),  which  a  stranger  could  venture  to  run 
for,  on  the  approach  of  bad  weather  in  this  very  dangerous  neighbor- 
hood, ail  accurate  Icnowledge  of  it  becomes  of  considerable  importance. 

Horsehead  Shoal  is  rocky,  irregular  in  shape,  and  of  great  extent, 
and  the  outermost  danger  off  St.  Peter  Bay.  Besides  several  shallow 
patches  occasionally  shown  by  breakers,  there  are  the  Three  Rocks  near 
its  northern  side  wliic  i  only  just  uncover  in  low  tides,  and  on  which 
the  sea  usually  breaks  heavily.  It  is  marked  by  a  can  buoy,  painted 
red,  at  its  southern  extreme;  by  a  black  spar  buoy  at  its  eastern  ex- 
treme,  another  black  spar  buoy  at  its  northeastern  extreme,  and  by  a 
red  spar  buoy  at  its  northwestern  extreme.  There  can  be  no  occasion 
to  approach  this  dangerous  shoal  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms, 
as  the  channel  between  it  and  Oape  Round  is  a  full  mile  wide  and 
carries  from  5  to  19  fathoms  water. 

Samson  Rocks  lie  Jf.  240  W.  J  mile  from  Horsehead  Shoals.  Two 
of  these  rooks  dry  at  low  water,  and  have  a  considerable  extent  of  shoal 
around  them.  The  shoal  surrounding  Samson  Rocks  is  marked  by  a 
can  buoy,  painted  red,  at  its  southern  extreme ;  by  a  red  spar  buoy  at 
its  northern  extreme ;  and  by  a  black  spar  buoy  at  its  eastern  extreme. 
A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  at  the  west  extreme  of  the  shoal  ground  off 

Mark  Point. 

St.  Peter  Bay,  which  is  2  miles  wide,  opens  Immediately  to  the 
northwaru  of  the  Samson  Rocks  and  Horsehead  Shoals,  and  may  be 
approached  either  ear  or  west  of  those  dangers.  It  has  excellent 
anchorage,  especially  i-ande-greve  on  its  eastern  shore;  but  it  is 

rendered  almost  inaci  oie  by  the  numerous  rocky  shoals  scattered 
over  the  bay.  Red  spar  buoys  are  moored  as  follows,  one  at  the  west- 
ern and  another  at  the  northwestern  extreme  of  the  spit,  %  mile  north- 
westward of  Mark  point ;  and  one  at  the  northern  extreme  of  the  spit 
on  the  western  side  of  Grandegreve.  Black  spar  buoys  are  moored, 
one  on  each  of  the  small  detached  shoals  ^  mile  westward  of  Mark 
Point;  two  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  detached  shoal,  ^  mile  northwest- 
ward of  Mark  Point,  one  at  the  southeastern  extreme  of  the  detached 
shoal  bearing  north  and  one  at  the  eastern  extreme  of  the  shoal  bear- 
ing N.  38°  W.,  both  distant  nearly  a  mile  from  Mark  Point.  A  red 
and  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  on  the  rock  bearing  N.  80°  W.  dis- 
tant 400  yards  from  Jerome  Point  Lighthouse.    The  principal  set- 


ST.   PETER   BAY. 


175 


aela,  usually 
ougU  with  a 
is  seldom  at- 

Oape  Itound 
[•  Bay  occupy 
ride  betweeu 
ly  anchorage 
era  entrance 
suture  to  run 
ms  neighbor- 
!  importance, 
great  extent, 
eral  shallow 
le  Rocks  near 
id  on  which 
luoy,  painted 
J  eastern  ex- 
me,  and  by  a 
e  no  occasion 
■  10  fathoms, 
ile  wide  and 

5hoals.  Two 
ctent  of  shoal 
marked  by  a 
spar  buoy  ac 
;era  extreme, 
al  ground  off 

lately  to  the 
,  and  may  be 
las  excellent 
)re ;  but  it  is 
>als  scattered 
B  at  the  west" 
%  mile  north- 
ae  of  the  spit 
s  are  moored, 
rard  of  Mark 
ile  north  west- 
the  detached 
le  shoal  bear- 
Point.  A  red 
.  80°  W.  dis- 
principal  set- 


tlements are  at  Grande-grfeve  and  along  the  south  side  of  Jerome 
Point,  a  high  headland  projecting  from  the  NE.  side  of  the  bay  ;  and 
rising  to  the  summit  of  Mount  Granville,  on  which  the  remains  of  an 
old  fort  may  be  seen,  190  feet  above  the  sea.  Vessels  usually  anchor  in 
the  NE.  corner  of  the  bay,  within  Jerome  Point. 

St.  Peter  Canal — This  canal  which  connects  St.  Peter  Inlet  with 
the  bay  of  the  same  name  is  a  lock  canal  necessitated  by  the  difference 
of  height  of  the  tides  in  St.  Peter  Bay  and  Bras  d'Or  lake.  Its  length 
is  about 4  mile,  and  has  a  depth  of  18  feet;  the  breadth  at  the  entrance 
is  59  feet  and  in  its  narrowest  part  is  48  feet.  In  entering,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  make  a  sharp  turn;  the  same  in  leaving.  The  canal  has  a  double 
curve, which  increases  the  difficulty  of  passage.  There  is  a  drawbridge 
at  the  nortberii  end  and  a  lock  at  the  southern,  the  length  of  the  lock 
is  200  feet.  The  level  of  the  water  in  the  lock  is  always  less  than  that 
in  St.  Peter  Bay.  The  difference  at  high  water  is  5  feet,  and  at  low 
water  1  foot.  The  sides  of  the  canal  are  cut  in  the  rock  and  supported 
with  joists.  On  each  side  there  is  a  small  path ;  the  banks  of  the  canal 
inclined  and  held  at  an  angle  of  30°.  There  are  mooring  buoys  at  both 
extremities  of  the  canal. 

Bourgeois  Inlet.— Crossing  the  mouth  of  St.  Peter  Bay  several  re- 
markable  cliff's  of  red  clay  will  be  seen  immediately  to  the  westward  of 
it ;  the  westernmost  of  them  are  on  Bisset  Island,  which  forms  the  east 
point  of  the  narrow  entrance  to  Bourgeois  Inlet,  an  extensive  arm  of  the 
sea,  with  12  feet  at  low  water  in  its  mouth.  The  stores  and  wharves  at 
Mr.  Bisset's  establishment,  and  the  chapel  on  the  east  side,  a  short  dis- 
tance witnin  the  entrance,  will  point  out  this  place  to  strangers  (1860). 
The  fisheries,  ship  building,  and  as  yet  limited  agriculture,  give  em- 
ployment to  a  number  of  persons,  principally  Acadians,  who  are  settled 
around  the  inlet. 

Ouetique  Island,  which  lies  one  mile  to  the  SW.  of  Bourgeois  Inlet, 
is  remarkable,  being  small,  precipitous,  dark  looking,  comparatively 
high  (about  50  feet),  and  with  a  few  pine  trees  upon  it ;  the  passage 
between  them  is  full  of  dangers,  amongst  others,  the  Philip  Rocks, 
which  are  almost  always  uncovered. 

Cascarette  Island,  which  lies  a  long  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  Oue- 
tique, is  much  larger,  not  so  high,  wooded,  with  low  cliffs  at  its  NE., 
and  a  sandy  point  at  its  SW.  extremity.  The  shallow  water  does  not 
extend  farther  than  200  yards  from  the  south  point  of  either  of  these 
islands,  but  there  is  a  half-tide  rock  between  them,  from  which  shoal 
water  extends  400  yards  to  the  SW. 

Goillon  Reef  lies  h  mile  SW.  of  Cascarette  Island,  leaving  a  clear 
channel  into  the  extensive  inlet  of  Couteau,  off'  the  mouth  of  which  it 
lies.  This  reef  dries  at  half  tide.  The  mark  for  leading  to  the  south- 
ward of  it  is  to  keep  Moulin  Point  open  to  the  southward  of  Birch 
Point,  bearing  S.  83°  W. 

Indian  Creek  and  Couteau  Inlet. — The  common  entrance  to  Indian 


!  -,  ,., 


176 


LENNOX    PASSAGE. 


Creek  and  to  Coiiteau  Inlet  is  I  mile  wide  between  Cascarette  Inland 
and  the  east  end  of  Birch  Island.  The  inlet  runs  in  3  miles  to  the  NW., 
and  is  navigable  for  large  vessels. 

Birch  Island  forms  the  north  side  of  the  main  passage  for  the  re- 
maining distance  of  a  mile  to  Grandigue,  in  which  interval  the  only 
detached  danger  is  Birch  Shoal,  off  Birch  Point. 

Cape  Round,  the  southern  point  of  the  eastern  entrance  of  Lennox 
Passage,  is  a  remarkable  cliff  of  red  clay  60  feet  high,  forming  the  NE. 
point  of  Madame  Island.  The  shallow  water,  which  here  runs  off  only  i 
mile,  widens  in  proceeding  to  the  northwestward  past  the  long  shingle 
beach  of  Goulet,  and  for  a  large  vessel  must  be  considered  continuous 
to  the  NE.  extremity  of  the  Gabion  Shoal,  distant  2  miles  NW.  from 
Cape  Round. 

Gabion  Shoal  is  rocky,  and  the  least  water,  5  feet,  is  on  the  Morris 

Rock,  near  its  NW.  angle.    The  shoal  is  ^  mil«  ^^  length,  and  so  lies 

.  across  the  extremely  intricate  anchorage  called  the  Goulet,  that  small 

craft  only  can  pass  between  it  and  Goulet  Beach,  from  which  it  is  dis- 

taut  jj  mile  to  the  northward. 

The  marks  for  leading  to  the  eastward  of  the  eastern  end  of  this  dan- 
gerous shoal,  together  with  the  shoal  water  off  Goulet  Beach,  are  the 
chapel  steeple  at  Bourgeois  Inlet  and  the  eastern  point  of  Bisset  Island 
in  line,  bearing  N.  41^  W. ;  Cascarette  and  Ouetique  Islands,  touching 
and  bearing  N.  80°  W.,  clear  its  NE.  point;  and  Eagle  and  Bernard 
Islands  touching,  and  bearing  S.  74o  W.,  will  lead  clear  along  its  north 
side,  but  must  not  be  followed  much  beyond  it  because  of  the  Descousse 
Shoal,  which  is  separated  from  the  Gabion  Shoal  by  a  channel  only  i 
mile  wide.  The  channel,  which  carries  8  or  9  fathoms  water,  leads  to- 
wards  the  Goulet  Anchorage,  and  which,  as  above  mentioned,  lies  to 
the  westward  of  Goulet  Beach,  and  which  is  accessible  to  small  vessels 
only  through  narrow  channels  between  the  shoals. 

The  Descousse  Shoal  extends  ^  mile  to  the  e^tward  of  Bernard  Is- 
land, and  stretches  across  to  Gabion  Point,  so  as  to  form  the  bar  of 
Discousse  Harbor. 

Descousse  Harbor  is  formed  by  Bernard  Island,  the  several  parts 
of  which,  united  by  beaches,  extend  for  nearly  a  mile  along  the  shore 
of  Madame  Island.  The  entrance  from  the  eastward  is  by  a  very  nar- 
ro-w  channel,  with  7  feet  in  it  at  low  water,  and  passes  close  to  the  flag, 
staff',  stores,  and  wharf  at  the  NW.  extremity  of  Gabion  Point. 

The  steeple  of  the  chapel,  and  the  other  buildings  of  the  village  on 
the  shore  opposite  the  island,  will  immediately  point  out  this  place  to 
strangers.  It  is  a  secure  and  very  pretty  little  harbor  for  tho  small 
vessels  by  which  the  fisheries  are  extensively  prosecuted. 

Foulament  Bay  is  a  secure  and  capacious  harbor,  with  three  en- 
trances tbrmed  by  Eagle  and  Crow  Islands.  Poulament  Islet,  small, 
low,  round,  and  wooded,  lies  within  Eagle  Island,  and  together  with 
the  shallows,  divides  the  bay  into  two  parts,  of  which  the  eastern  di- 


POULAMENT    BAY — HAWK    ISLET. 


177 


.rette  Ipland 
I  to  the  NW., 

e  for  the  re- 
val  the  ouly 

je  of  Lennox 
uiug  the  NE. 
aus  off  only  i 
long  shingle 
d  continuous 
es  NW.  from 

jn  the  Morris 
1,  and  so  lies 
8t,  that  small 
hich  it  is  dis- 

jd  of  this  dan- 
teach,  are  the 
'  Bisset  Island 
inds,  touching 
and  Bernard 
ilong  its  north 
the  Descousse 
jauuel  only  i 
ater,  leads  to- 
tioned,  lies  to 
}  small  vessels 

of  Bernard  Is- 
rm  the  bar  of 

)  several  parts 
ong  the  shore 
by  a  very  nar- 
)se  to  the  flag. 

Point. 

the  village  on 
t  this  place  to 

for  tbo  small 

with  three  en- 

nt  Islet,  small, 

together  with 

the  eastern  di- 


vision, leading  to  Poalament  Creek,  containing  most  of  the  houses,  and 
affording  the  most  roomy  anchorage,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  with  mud  bot- 
tom, is  the  most  frequented.  An  equal  depth  might  be  carried  into  the 
bay  if  the  channel  were  buoyed,  but  the  shoals  extending  in  ojiposite 
directions  from  Bernard  and  Eagle  Islands  so  overlap  as  almost  to  form 
a  bar,  over  which  from  13  to  17  feet,  according  as  it  may  be  low  or  high 
water,  are  all  that  can  be  insured  to  a  stranger,  running  in  with  the 
leading  marks  astern;  namely,  Gascarette  Island  and  Cordeau  Point, 
touching  and  bearing  N.  15°  B.  Vessels  drawing  too  much  water,  or 
not  wishing  to  run  in,  may  safely  anchor  in  the  roadstead  outside  the 
bar. 

Hawk  Islet  is  united  at  low  water  to  the  east  end  of  Eagle  Island 
and  forms  the  NW.  point  of  eastern  entrance  to  Poulament  Bay ;  it  is 
bold  to  the  northward,  but  to  the  eastward  a  shoal  runs  off  towards 
Bernard  Island  to  the  distance  of  400  yards. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  are  weak  in  this  bay,  and  seldom  exceed 
a  knot  in  the  channel  off'  its  mouth. 

Directions. — To  the  foregoing  brief  description  the  following  direc- 
tions are  added  for  the  use  of  vessels  desirous  of  shelter  on  the  ap- 
proach of  bad  weather ;  and  especially  at  the  commencement  of  winds 
from  between  the  south  and  east,  as  they  seldom  continue  beyond  a  very 
few  hours  without  bringing  thick  fog  and  rain. 

Pass  Gape  Bound  at  any  distance  between  ^  and  J  mile,  steering 
NW.  until  Onetique  and  Gascarette  Islands  touch ;  then  steer  towards 
those  islands  N.  80°  W.,  or  so  as  to  keep  them  touching,  until  Pou- 
lament Islet  appears  just  open  to  the  northward  of  Bernard  Island ; 
and  then  towards  the  last-named  mark,  keeping  the  islet  just  open  un- 
til the  steeple  of  the  chapel  at  Bourgeois  Islet  comes  in  line  with  the 
eastern  point  of  Ouetique  Island,  bearing  N.  21°  E.  The  vessel  will 
now  be  in  about  9  fathoms,  with  mud  bottom ;  and  if  she  bring  up  with 
the  last- men  tioned  marks  on,  will  be  distant  more  than  200  yards  from 
the  shallow  water  off'  the  north  side  of  Bernard  Island,  and  in  safe  an- 
chorage, being  sheltered  from  SE.  winds  by  the  Descousse  and  Gabion 
Shoals,  and  by  land  in  every  other  direction. 

If  the  anchorage  off  the  entrance  of  Poulament  be  preferred,  then, 
instead  of  anchoring  when  the  steeple  of  the  chapel  at  Bourgeois  Islet 
and  the  eastern  point  of  Ouetique  Island  come  in  line,  alter  course  to 
west,  or  as  may  be  found  necessary  to  open  out  the  north  point  of  Grow 
Island  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Hawk  Islet.  Having  done  so,  run 
towards  them,  S.  77°  W.,  until  thf  steeple  at  Descousse  comes  in  one 
with  the  high- water  western  extremity  of  Bernard  Island  when  the  ves- 
sel will  have  arrived  within  300  yards  of  her  anchorage.  Gontinue  the 
course  until  Poulament  Islet  and  Eagle  Island  close,  and  when  they 
touch  Gordeau  Point  will  either  be  touching,  or  only  just  shut  in  behind 
the  western  end  of  Gascarette  Island,  bearing  N.  15°  E.  Bound  to,  to 
the  southward,  with  these  last-named  marks  on,  and  bring  up,  either  in 
5314 12 


178 


LENNOX    PASSAQE. 


7  fathoms,  with  the  northern  extremities  of  Crow  and  Hawk  Islands  in 
one;  or  a  little  farther  in  with  the  two  points  on  the  north  side  of  Ber- 
nard Island  in  one ;  there  the  depth  viU  be  6  fathoms,  and  the  bottom 
in  both  places  mud. 

If  the  vessel  does  not  draw  more  than  13  feet  water  she  may  safely 
ran  into  Poulament  Bay  by  keeping  the  leading  marks  on  astern  as 
she  rnus  from  them  (namely,  Cordeau  Point  aud  Cascarette  Island, 
tonching  or  very  slightly  open),  and  when  the  south  side  of  Crow  Is- 
land appears  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Eagle  Island  she  will  be 
within  the  bar,  and  may  bring  up  in  4^  fathoms,  mud,  and  in  quite  a 
secure  harbor. 

The  Western  Entrance,  between  Babbit  <nnd  Janvri;^  Islands,  is  a 
mile  wide,  but  the  navigable  breadth  is  reduced  to  ^  mile  by  the  Mac- 
donald  Shoal,  a  bed  of  rocks,  with  5  feet  least  water,  and  extending 
nearly  f  mile  along  the  northern  shore  of  Jauvrin  Island  from  which  it 
is  separated  by  a  narrow  aud  shallow  channel.  This  dangerous  shoal, 
as  well  as  the  reefs  oft'  Turbalton  aud  Thomas  heads,  must  be  carefully 
avoided  in  entering  the  passage.  The  west  end  of  the  shoal  is  distant 
^  mile  north  from  Thomas  Head,  which  in  line  with  Jauvrin  Point  will 
just  lead  clear  of  it  to  the  westward.  These  marks  are  distinct  and 
good;  but  when  they  are  in  line  it  may  be  oJbserved  that  a  small  part 
of  Wasting  Islet  will  be  seen  to  the  westward  of  Janvrin  Point,  and 
must  not  be  mistaken  for  it.  In  standing  towards  the  shoal,  keep  the 
last-named  point  in  sight,  and  there  will  be  no  danger. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  in  this  entrance  of  Lennox  passage  is 
spacious  and  secure,  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms,  anywhere  to  the  northward 
of  the  Macdouald  Shoal ;  but  the  best  berth  is  off  Gary  Passage,  at  the 
east  end  of  Babbit  Island,  in  7  fathoms,  mud,  and  where  the  main  chan- 
nel is  a  mile  wide  and  free  from  danger.  It  is  only  necessary  to  ob- 
serve that  the  shallow  water  extends  200  yards  off  the  south  shore  of 
Babbit  Island  and  400  yards  off  the  east  point  of  entrance  of  Gary 
Passage,  where  there  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  10  feet  least  water  300 
yards  offshore. 

DirectionB. — Entering  Lennox  Passage  from  the  westward,  Gamp- 
bell  Island  will  be  seen  from  the  anchorage  just  mentioned,  and  at  the 
distance  of  1^  miles  to  the  eastward.  The  navigable  breadth  of  the 
passage  is  there  reduced  to  600  yards  by  Fish  Shoal,  which  is  rocky, 
with  10  teet  least  water,  and  lies  J  mile  off  a  small  cove  of  Gape  Breton 
Island.  From  thence  the  passage  becomes  intricate.  The  following 
leading  marks,  with  brief  directions,  will  enable  any  person  who  can 
recognize  the  objects  named  to  take  a  vessel  through  with  a  fair  wind : 

Before  arriving  at  Fish  Shoal,  open  out  Burnt  Poin*;  a  little  to  the 
southward  of  Low  Point,  bearing  N.  63°  B. ;  keep  them  so,  and  they 
will  lead  to  the  southward  of  that  shoal  and  for  a  mile  farther  to  the 
eastward.  When  Thorn  Island  is  just  about  to  disappear  behind  Glas- 
gow Point  alter  course,  and  steer  east,  or  towards  Martinique  Gove,  until 


DIRECTIONS. 


179 


k  Islands  in 
side  of  Ber- 
1  the  bottom 

e  may  safely 
on  astern  as 
rette  Island, 
of  Crow  Is- 
she  will  be 
lid  in  quite  a 

Islands,  is  a 
>  by  the  Mac- 
nd  extending 
from  which  it 
gerous  shoal, 
t  be  carefully 
oal  is  distant 
rin  Point  will 

distinct  and 
t  a  small  part 
in  Point,  and 
loal,  keep  the 

lox  passage  is 
he  northward 
assage,  at  the 
lie  main  chan- 
cessary  to  ob- 
jouth  shore  of 
•ance  of  Gary 
ast  water  300 

itward,  Camp- 
ed, and  at  the 
ireadth  of  the 
hich  is  rocky, 
f  Cape  Breton 
The  following 
jrson  who  can 
;h  a  fair  wind : 
a  little  to  the 
so,  and  they 
farther  to  the 
ir  behind  Glaa- 
que  Cove,  until 


Burnt  and  Seal  Islands  close  and  appear  to  touch,  when  they  will  bear 
N.  60°  E.  These  last-named  points  kept  exactly  touching  will  lead 
through  between  the  shoals  as  far  as  Burnt  Point,  where  the  channel 
tnrus  to  the  NE.,  between  that  point  and  the  Burnt  Islands,  and  where 
the  deep  water  is  only  10:)  yards  wide.  Passing  midway  through  this 
narrow  opening,  and  with  the  aid  of  the  chart,  rounding  the  Burnt  l8- 
lands  to  the  north  and  east,  steer  between  them  and  Seal  Island  until 
the  eastern  point  of  Burnt  Island  comes  in  one  with  Heron  Point,  about 
S.  52°  W. ;  then  alter  course  instantly  to  N.  52°  B.,  keeping  the  last- 
named  points  astern  and  exactly  touching,  and  they  will  safely  lead 
th'ough  between  the  Middle  Ground  and  Seal  Island,  where  the  chan- 
nel ia  again  onlj'  100  yards  wide. 

The  Middle  Ground  is  rocky,  with  4  feet  least  water,  and  when  the 
channel  between  it  and  Seal  Island  is  fairly  entered,  steer  half  a  point 
more  to  the  northward,  N.  46°  E.,  or  so  as  to  keep  Heron  Point  only 
just  shut  in  behind  the  eastern  point  of  the  Burnt  Islands,  until  Gran- 
digue  Point  (the  land,  not  the  shingle  spit)  and  Hawk  Islet  are  touching, 
and  bearing  N.  85°  E.  Now  keep  to  these  last-named  marks,  and  they 
will  lead  to  the  cxooUent  anchorage  otf  the  ferry  ac  Grandigue,  where 
there  is  room  enough  for  the  largest  ships  in  from  5  to  8  fathoms,  mud 
bottom.  The  long  spit  of  shingle,  from  which  the  name  is  derived,  runs 
out  from  Grandigue  Polut  nearly  400  yards  across  the  channel,  and 
shelters  the  anchorage  completely  from  the  eastward.  A  great  part  of 
the  spit  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  can  generally  be  discerned  by 
the  rippliug  of  the  tide.  At  Grandigue  there  are  extensive  gypsum 
quarries,  several  tolerable  farms,  and  the  ferry  by  which  the  mail 
crosses-  the  passage  on  its  way  to  Arichat. 

The  only  other  danger  here  is  the  Ferry  Reef,  which  lies  to  the  NW. 
of  the  spit,  leaving  a  deep  and  clear  char  n el  400  yards  wide.  This 
reef  is  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  and  very  «  > 'b  in  the  way  here,  as  it 
may  be  said  to  extend  halfway  across  the  'assage,  being  separated 
from  the  northern  shore  by  a  channel  so  narrow  as  to  be  only  navigable 
by  boats  or  very  small  craft.  On  the  southern  edge  of  this  reef,  and 
also  on  the  northern  extremity  of  Grandigue  Spit,  Birch  and  Ouetique 
Islands  are  just  touching,  and  bearing  N.  70°  E.;  and  therefore,  to 
clear  the  reef,  keep  Ouetique  Island  open ;  and  to  clear  the  spit,  partly 
shut  in  behind  Birch  Point. 

The  ship  channel,  after  passing  to  the  southward  of  the  Ferry  Reef, 
turns  to  the  NE.,  between  it  and  Grandigue  Spit,  and  then  around 
the  latter  to  the  east  and  south,  forming  a  crooked,  and,  for  a  stranger, 
a  difficult  pass. 

Approaching  the  anchorage  at  Grandigue  from  the  westward,  steer 
with  Grandigue  Point  and  Hawk  Islet  touching,  as  already  directed, 
until  the  south  point  of  Cascarette  Island  opens  out  a  very  little  to  the 
southward  of  Birch  Island ;  and  then  on  this  last-named  mark,  which 
will  lead  well  clear  of  the  Ferry  Reef;  and  when  the  Tickle  Ohan- 


mn 


na^x 


180 


OUT    OF    CAN80. 


nel  to  the  westward  of  Birch  Island  comes  open,  and  bears  to  the 
northward  of  N.  21°  E.,  steer  towards  it  antil  the  southern  extremity 
of  Ouetique  Island  is  seen  over  the  beach  of  Birch  Point,  bearing  N. 
710    ^      Run   towards   the  last-named  marks  till  Grandigue    Spit 
is  nas8ed,which  will  be  when  the  west  end  of  Birch  Island  bears  north  ; 
then  alter  course  instantly  to  SE,  or  so  as  to  make  a  direct  course 
towards  the  middle  of  the  western  entrance  of  Poulanient  Bay,  and 
continue  on  that  line  until  the  north  ends  of  Crow  and  Eagle  Islands 
oomein  one;  then  towards  Ouetique  Island  until  the  steeple  of  the 
chapel  at  Discousse  is  in  line  with  the  NE.  point  of  Hawk  Islet;  and 
lastly,  east,  or  so  as  to  pass  Hawk  Islet  at  the  distance  of  200  or  300 
yards     The  vessel  will  then  have  arrived  at  the  comparatively  wide 
and  open  part  of  the  passage  off  the  eastern  entrance  of  Poulament 
Bay  where  she  may  anchor  or  proceed  to  sea. 

Tides  -It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Grandigue,  in  the  Len- 
nox  Passage,  at  7  h.  55  m.;  springs  rise  6J  feet,  neaps  4^  feet.  The 
tidal  streams  are  often  irregular,  but  when  not  so,  change  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  after  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore;  the  flood 
coming  in  from  the  eastward,  they  are  stronger  round  the  spit  at 
Grandigue  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  passage,  but  their  rate  even 
there  seldom  exceeds  2  knots. 

Gut  of  Caneo.— The  length  of  the  passage  through  the  gut,  from 
the  lighthouse  on  Eddy  Point,  at  the  south  entrance,  is  14^  miles ;  and 
its  least  breadth,  between  Balache  Point  and  Cape  Porcupine,  is  900 
yards  The  depth  of  water  in  the  channel  is  seldom  less  than  15  tatu- 
oms,  and  in  the  deepest  part,  off  Cape  Porcupine,  it  amounts  to  3. 
fathoms.  This  great  depth,  the  strength  of  the  tides,  and  tht  rocky  or 
gravelly  bottom,  render  the  anchorage  unsafe,  excepting  at  the  places 
hereafter  to  be  described. 

Coa8t.-Excepting  at  Ghost  Beach,  and  for  a  short  distance  below 
Port  Hawkesbury,  the  general  character  of  the  shore  on  either  side  is 
high-  the  land  rising  from  it,  more  or  less  abruptly,  to  the  summits  ot 
ridges  of  considerable  elevation.  Cape  Porcupine,  a  precipitous  head- 
land on  the  western  shore,  640  feet  high  above  the  sea,  is  the  most  re- 
markable  feature,  and  the  scenery  in  its  vicinity  is  of  great  beauty. 
There  are  increasing  settlements  on  either  side,  especially  at  the  sev- 
eral anchoring  places,  where  supplies  may  be  obtained. 

Cape  Argos,  distant  2i  miles  to  the  southward  of  Eddy  Point,  will 
be  easily  recognized,  being  a  small  but  high  peninsula,  bare  of  wood, 
with  red  cliff,  and  united  to  the  mainland  by  a  low  isthmus  of  shingle. 
Off  the  point  of  cliff  next  to  the  north  of  the  cape,  and  distant  ^  mile 
from  it,  a  reef  runs  off  towards  the  Argos  Shoal, which  it  so  nearly  joins 
as  to  leave  no  passage  for  vessels  of  large  draft.  Eddy  Point  and  Flat 
Head,  touching  and  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  a  hill  behind  the  latter, 
bearin"  N.  41°  W.,  lead  300  yards  to  the  eastward  of  these  dangers  in 
7  or  8  fathoms.    Flat  Head  is  the  NE.  point  of  Bear  Cove,  and  if  it  be 


EDDY    POINT — PREMIER   SHOAL. 


181 


)ears  to  the 
n  extremity 
,  bearing  N. 
idigue    Spit 
uears  north ; 
Urect  course 
jut  Bay,  and 
agle  Islands 
;eeple  of  the 
j]i  Islet ;  and 
>f  200  or  300 
•atively  wide 
»f  Poulament 

B,  in  the  Len- 
li  feet.  The 
)  abont  three- 
)re ;  the  flood 
1  the  spit  at 
leir  rate  even 

the  gut,  from 
l^  miles ;  and 
cupine,  is  900 
than  15fath- 
mounts  to  32 
d  the  rocky  or 
at  the  places 

listance  below 
I  either  side  is 
he  summits  of 
icipitous  head- 
is  the  most  re- 
great  beauty, 
lly  at  the  sev- 

Jdy  Point,  will 
,  bare  of  wood, 
nus  of  shingle, 
distant  J  mile 
;  80  nearly  joins 
Point  and  Flat 
ihind  the  latter, 
liese  dangers  in 
>ve,  and  if  it  be 


wished  to  pass  outside  of  the  Argos  Shoal  at  greater  distance,  let  the 
above-named  marks  be  kept  proportionally  open. 

Eddy  Point,  the  southern  point  of  entrance  of  the  gut,  is  of  sand 
and  gravel,  inclosing  a  small  pond. 

Eddy  Spit,  of  sund  and  stones,  runs  out  J  mile  to  the  NE.  from  high- 
water  mark  on  Eddy  Point,  and  is  almost  always  shown  by  the  rippling 
of  the  tide.  A  large  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  9  fathoms  at  ihe  east- 
ern extremity  of  the  shoal  oflf  Eddy  Point. 

Martin  Shoal,  li^  miles  from  Eddy  Point,  is  of  rock,  and  extends 
nearly  350  yards  off  shore.  Melford  and  Critchet  Points  in  one,  bearing 
N.  01°  W.,  just  lead  outside  its  edge  in  4  fathoms. 

Bear  Reef  has  from  0  to  9  feet  at  low  water  over  large  rocks,  and 
extends  nearly  300  yards  southward  from  Bear  Island.  Off"  Bear  Head 
also  there  is  shallow  water,  extending  nearly  400  yards  to  the  south- 
eastward. Great  caution  should  be  used  in  approaching  these  dangers, 
for  the  water  is  too  deep  near  them  for  the  lead  to  afford  much  warning, 
and  there  are  no  good  clearing  marks. 

Bank.— Crossing  again  to  the  western  shore  of  the  gut,  at  Critchet 
Cove,  there  is  a  shallow  bank  of  mud  and  sand,  on  which  small  vessels 
frequently  anchor,  but  of  which  vessels  of  large  draft  should  beware. 
Its  outer  edge,  in  5  fathoms,  is  nearly  J  mile  off  shore. 

The  Ship  Rock  has  6  feet  least  water,  and  is  distant  4  mile  north- 
ward from  Ship  Point,  and  140  yards  off  shore.  Ship  Point  and  Bear 
Head  in  line,  bearing  S.  63°  E.  lead  only  40  or  50  yards  outside  of  it, 
and  therefore,  in  standing  towards  it,  tack  before  the  head  and  point 
come  in  line. 

Cahil  Rock  lies  on  the  western  side  of  the  gut,  and  is  distant  J  mile 
to  the  SE.  from  Holland  Cove,  and  120  yards  off"  shore.  It  is  dry  at 
low  water,  but  becomes  dangerous  when  covered.  Roger  Point  in  one 
with  the  NE.  side  of  Pirate  Island  (the  latter  being  seen  over  the  low 
shingle  rock  of  Pirate  Point),  and  bearing  N.  61°  W.,  leads  clear  outside 
of  it  at  the  distance  of  120  yards. 

The  Stapleton  Shoal  is  rocky,  and  extends  from  Port  Hawkesbury 
and  Staploton  Points  300  yards  to  the  westward.  At  that  distance  off 
shore  there  are  only  16  feet  at  low  water,  but  the  depth  increases  almost 
immediately  to  5  fathoms,  the  edge  of  the  shoal  being  very  steep. 

Premier  Shoal,  of  rock  and  sand,with  13  feet  least  water,  is  a  middle 
ground  in  the  entrance  of  Port  Hawkesbury,  marked  by  a  can  buoy 
painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  moored  on  the  center  of  the 
shoal.  Vessels  may  pass  on  either  side  of  it,  but  to  the  northward  is 
the  widest  and  deepest  channel.  Port  Hawkesbury  Point  and  the 
western  extremity  of  Pirate  Island  in  one,  bearing  S.  11°  VV.,  will  lead 
clear  outside  or  to  the  westward  of  this  shoal,  in  5  fathofns;  therefore, 
vessels  standirg-in  towards  Port  Hawkesbury,  or  anchoring  off"  its 
mouth,  should  be  careful  not  to  shut  in  the  whole  of  the  island  behind 
the  point. 


■^  i 


182 


OUT   OF   CANSO. 


The  Dixon  Rock,  reported  to  have  only  6  or  8  feet  over  it  at  low 
water,  but  on  which  not  less  thau  12  feet  could  be  found,  is  distant  140 
yards  from  Makeen  Point,  and  8.  55°  VV.  240  yards  from  the  western 
point  of  Port  Hastings.  This  rock  is  much  in  the  way  of  vessels  ap- 
proachingor  leaving  the  anchorage  off  Port  Hastings.but  will  be  avoided 
if  the  whole  of  the  bridge  over  the  cove  be  not  shut  in  behind  its  west- 
ern point.  '  .     .        „!  •     *i  „ 

Balache  Rock  is  nearly  dry  at  low  tides,  but  as  it  is  within  the 
line  uniting  Balache  an  I  Mackeen  points,  it  is  not  much  in  the  way  of 
vessels.  It  lies  200  yards  eastward  of  the  end  of  Balache  Point,  and 
100  vards  off  shore.  ,      ,         ^   . 

The  Madagascar  Rock,  dry  at  low  water,  lies  directly  abreast  the 
Balache,  and  not  «iuit  <  100  yards  off  the  west  shore  under  the  highest 
part  of  Cape  Porcupine.  The  rippling  of  the  tide  over  this  rock  can  m 
general  be  seen ;  nevertheless  its  situation,  off  a  projecting  point  in  the 
narrowest  part  of  the  passage,  nearly  in  the  full  strength  of  the  tide, 
and  at  a  part  celebrat«Hl  for  -iuddeu  flaws  ot  wind  from  various  direc- 
tions, renders  it  extremely  dange  ous. 

ANCHORAGES  IN   GUT  OF   CANSO. 

Inhabitants  Bay,  situated  to  the  northward  of  the  south  entrance 
of  the  Gut,  is  about  2^  miles  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  Bear  and 
Turbalton  Heads.  In  addition  to  Inhabitants  Harbor  at  its  bead  it 
contains  the  following  useful  anchorages : 

Seacoal  Bay,  IJ  miles  from  Bear  Head,  v^iU  be  readily  known  by 
the  high  cliffs  of  Oarleton  Head,  which  forms  its  NE.  point.  This 
spacious  anchorage,  secure  in  all  winds  excepting  those  from  SE.,  is 
very  convenient  for  vessels  bound  in  through  the  Gut,  and  detained 
by  strong  N  W.  winds.  The  depth  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay  is  5  fathoms, 
the  bottom  of  mud,  and  there  is  no  danger  in  the  way. 

Turbalton  Bay  is  a  small  but  secure  anchorage  to  the  northward  ot 
Turbalton  Head,  and  between  it  and  Evans  Island,     in  approaching 
this  anchorage  the  only  danger  to  be  avoided  is  the  reef  off  Turbalton 
Head,  which  is  partly  dry  at  low  water,  and  runs  out  550  yards  to  the 
westward.    Janvriu  and  Peninsula   Points  in  one,  bearing  S.  41°  h., 
or  the  two  extreme  points  on  the  western  side  of  Evans  Island  in  one, 
bearing  north,  will  just  lead  clear  to  the  westward  of  this  reet  in  4J 
fathoms.    There  is  no  other  danger  in  the  way  excepting  the  shallow 
water  extending  from  the  shore  on  either  side,  and  from  the  small  islets 
in  the  bottom  of  the  bay.    To  avoid  the  latter,  in  a  vessel  of  large  draft, 
go  no  farther  in  than  the  line  of  Turbalton  Head  and  Cape  Argos 
touching  where  the  depth  is  4J  fathoms  at  low  water.    With  the  cape 
a  little  open  to  the  westward  of  the  head  the  depth  is  5  tathoms;  in 
either  case  the  bottom  will  be  of  mud,  and  the  reef  'ftriU  break  off  the 
swell  from  the  southward. 


^S'Vii'.ifcii»' 


rer  it  at  low 
s  distant  140 
tlie  western 
t"  vessels  ftp- 
II  be  avoided 
liud  its  west- 

s  within  the 
n  the  way  of 
le  Point,  and 

y  abreast  the 
r  the  highest 
s  rock  can  iu 
r  point  in  the 
I  of  the  tide, 
?^arious  direc- 


3uth  entrance 
sen  Bear  and 
3,t  its  head  it 

lily  known  by 
.  point.  This 
i  from  SE.,  is 
and  detained 
y  is  5  fathoms, 

)  northward  of 

1  approaching 

off  Turbalton 

0  yards  to  the 
'ing  S.  41°  E., 

Island  in  one, 
this  reef  in  4J 
ig  the  shallow 
the  small  islets 

1  of  large  draft, 
i  Cape  Argos 
With  the  cape 
I  5  fathoms;  iu 
1  break  off  the 


INHABITANTS    DAY    AND    HARBOR. 


Inhabitants  Harbor  is  not  at  present  much  frequented,  being  out 
of  the  line  of  general  navigation,  but  it  has  space  and  de))th  of  water 
sutticient  for  a  large  number  and  any  class  of  vessels,  and  is  (|uite 
secure  at  all  seasons.  The  soutliern  side  of  the  harbor  is  formed  by 
islands  inclosing  the  basin  in  which  vessels  might  securely  winter,  but 
of  which  a  minute  account  would  only  confuse  a  stranger.  The  channel 
leading  into  the  harbor,  between  Long  Ledge  and  Evans  Island,  is 
nowhere  less  than  300  yards  wide  froui  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms  on  either 
side,  and  carries  10  or  12  fathoms  water  with  mud  bottom. 

Inhabitants  River  is  navigable  for  vessels  by  a  narrow  and  winding 
channel  for  several  miles,  while  boats  cau  ascend  to  the  bridge,  a  dis- 
tance of  7  miles.  There  are  some  good  farms  on  the  banks  of  this  river 
but  the  shores  of  tiio  harbor  are  as  yet  very  thinly  settled,  and  present 
a  very  barren  appearance.  There  is  said  to  be  workable  coal  at  Little 
River  just  outside  the  harbor's  mouth. 

Directions. — To  avoid  Long  Ledge,  which  is  distant  about  600  yards 
from  Evans  Island,  and  to  run  into  Inhabitants  Harbor  far  enough  for 
safe  anchorage  proceed  as  follows : 

Approaching  from  the  SW.  through  Inhabitants  Bay,  steer  so  as  to 
pass  the  west  end  of  Evans  Island  at  a  distance  of  400  yards,  or  by  the 
lead  in  6  fathoms  water,  remembering  that  the  bank  on  either  side  is 
very  steep  for  vessels  drawing  more  than  10  feet  water.  Follow  the 
shore  of  the  island  round  to  the  NE.,  but  approaching  it  at  the  same 
time  very  gradually,  so  as  to  pass  Steep  Head,  its  northern  extremity, 
at  a  distance  of  200  or  300  yards.  Having  passed  Steep  Head  the 
vessel  will  be  in  safe  arichorage,  but  she  may  go  farther  in  without 
danger  by  simply  keeping  in  mid-channel  as  she  runs  towards  Bumbo 
Island,  which  will  be  seen  (small,  round,  with  low  clay  cliffs)  bearing 
N.  61°  B.,  and  distant  nearly  a  mile  from  her  track  while  passing 
Steep  Head  as  just  directed. 

As  the  vessel  proceeds,  the  channel  betwt-on  Round  and  Freeman 
Islands,  leading  into  the  Basin,  will  be  passed ;  and  when  she  has  ar- 
rived within  )f  mile  of  Bumbo  Island,  the  main  channel  between  it  and 
Indian  Point,  and  leading  into  the  harbor  to  the  north  and  east,  will 
appear  open,  as  well  as  the  entrance  of  Inhabitants  River,  the  entrance 
to  which  lies  ^  mile  to  the  northward.  The  shallow  water  extends  200 
yards  off  Bumbo  Island,  and  the  main  channel,  which,  passing  to  the 
NW.  of  it  leads  into  the  wide  expanse  of  the  harbor  to  the  eastward, 
may  be  followed  without  difficulty  with  the  aid  of  the  chart.  It  is, 
however,  not  necessary  to  go  beyond  Bumbo  Island  for  good  anchorage, 
as  that  may  be  found  everywhere  in  the  channel ;  and  if  the  depth  of 
water  there  be  considered  inconveniently  great,  the  bight  to  the  south- 
ward of  Bumbo  Island,  between  it  and  Freeman  Island,  affords  a  good 
berth  in  a  moderate  depth  of  water. 

Tides. — The  tides  in  this  harbor  are  weak,  seldom  exceeding  a  knot 
in  the  entrance,  where  they  are  strongest. 


184 


GUT   OP   CANSO. 


Pirate  Harbor.— The  anchorage  at  this  port,  although  deep  enough 
is  inconveniently  small  for  large  ships,  but  safe  and  good  for  small  ves- 
sels.  The  best  berth  for  anything  larger  than  a  fishing  schooner  is  in 
7  or  8  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  with  Pirate  Island  bearing  SE.,  distant 
200  yards.  Vessels  passing  through  are  reported  by  telegraph  from 
Pirate  Harbor. 

Pirate  Island,  small,  rocky,  and  united  to  the  mainland  by  a  beach 
of  shingle,  forms  the  SE.  point  of  Pirate  Harbor ;  and  all  within  it  and 
a  line  drawn  across  to  the  wharves  on  the  NW.  side  is  dry  at  low  water* 
excepting  a  narrow  boat  channel  carrying  3  or  4  feet  water,  which  leads 
to  the  bridge  across  the  cove  at  the  head  of  the  port,  and  about  i  mile 
from  its  entrance. 

Port  Mulgrave.— On  the  western  shore,  and  nearly  opposite  to  Port 
Hawkesbury,  is  an  excellent  anchorage,  especially  in  NW.  winds.  The 
best  berth  is  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  with  mud  bottom,  and  directly  off  the 
mouth  of  the  cove,  Macnair  Point,  in  line  with  Port  Hastings,  should 
then  be  distant  about  400  yards.  There  is  a  good  watering  place  here» 
with  wharves  for  landing  at  all  times  of  the  tide ;  also  a  fine  settle- 
ment, near  which  a  small  English  church  has  been  erected. 

Port  Hawkesbury  is  a  large  cove  terminated  by  a  bridge  nearly  a 
mile  in  from  the  sea.  It  is  completely  open  to  NW.  winds,  which  blow 
directly  through  the  Gut,  causing  at  times  a  heavy  sea,  excepting  when 
well  in  towards  the  head  of  the  harbor,  where  the  anchorage  is  quite 
secure,  out  of  the  stream  of  the  tides,  and  in  3^  fathoms,  mud  bottom. 
There  is  a  fine  settlement  with  two  chapels  on  the  NE.  side  of  the 
harbor,  a  patent  slip  capable  of  taking  vessels  of  1,000  tons,  also  stores 
and  wharves  where  vessels  may  receive  repairs,  or  winter  in  safety. 

Anchorage.— The  roadstead  ofl'  the  mouth  of  this  harbor,  and  out- 
side of  the  Premier  Shoal,  is  much  frequented  by  vessels  detained  by 
SE.  winds,  but  the  riding  is  very  rough  there  in  winds  from  the  oppo- 
site quarter.    The  depth  is  from  7  to  9  fathoms,  over  sand,  gravely  and 
mud  bottom,  and  the  only  direction  necessary  is  to  keep  Pirate  Island 
in  sight  to  the  westward  of  Port  Hawkesbury  Point. 
Steam  vessels  run  twice  a  week  from  Pictou  to  this  port. 
The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 
Directions.— Vessels  of  less  than  12  feet  draft  may  run  in  to  Port 
Hawkesbury  without  difficulty,  passing  over  the  Premier  Shoal  at  all 
times ;  but  vessels  of  larger  draft  should  prefer  the  channel  to  the  north 
of  that  danger. 

Being  outside  the  shoal,  bring  Cavanagh  Point,  composed  of  low  sand- 
stone and  sandy  beach,  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  harbor,  to  bear  S.  63°  E., 
when  a  large  store  built  on  piles,  and  farther  up  the  harbor,  will  appear 
in  line  with  it,  and  the  end  of  the  wharf  will  be  just  in  sight.  Run  in 
with  these  marks  on  until  Port  Hawkesbury  Point  bears  S.  43°  W., 
when  the  vessel  will  be  within  the  Premier  Shoal,  and  may  sheer  to  the 
southward  into  the  middle  of  the  harbor.    The  channel  to  the  south- 


mivi  m'rmAmrmiiwtMntat-^^ 


^i^^dj^^-  fi^u  Jaa:-.-*K-!-?i  :■- 


PORT   HASTINGS. 


186 


deep  enough 
or  small  ves- 
hooner  is  in 
SE.,  distant 
iegrayli  from 

d  by  a  beach 
within  it  and 
it  low  water* 
,  which  leads 
about  4  mile 

(osite  to  Port 
winds.  The 
rectly  off  the 
itings,  should 
g  place  here* 
El  fine  settle- 
d. 

idge  nearly  a 
3,  which  blow 
cepting  when 
orage  is  quite 
,  mud  bottom. 
E.  side  of  the 
ns,  also  stores 
•  in  safety, 
cbor,  and  out- 
8  detained  by 
rom  the  oppo- 
l1,  gravely  and 
Pirate  Island 

?t. 

un  in  to  Port 
r  Shoal  at  all 
el  to  the  north 

id  of  low  sand- 
bear  S.  63°  E., 
or,  will  appear 
sight.  Run  in 
ws  S.  430  W., 
ay  sheer  to  the 
1  to  the  south- 


ward of  the  shoal  is  neither  so  deep  nor  so  wide  as  the  other,  but  it  is 
more  convenient  for  entering  the  harbor  with  southerly  winds. 

Port  Hastings,  on  the  eastern  shore,  will  be  known  at  ouce  by  the 
conspicuous  cliffs  of  white  gypsum,  which  are  120  feet  high  on  the  N  W. 
side  and  a  short  distance  within  the  bridge  near  its  entrance.  The 
head  of  the  port,  which  forms  a  cove,  is  dry  at  low  water. 

The  town,  in  addition  to  the  post-office,  contains  a  large  and  consi)ic- 
uous  telegrai)h  office,  whence  the  electric  cables  cross  the  Gut  to  the 
south  shore.  Boards  of  warning  not  to  anchor  near  the  line  of  the  cables 
are  erected  on  both  shores. 

Anchorage.— The  anchorage  at  Port  Hastings  is  convenient  and  safe 
in  all  winds.  In  northerly  gales  the  swell,  deflected  by  Cape  Porcu- 
pine, causes  rather  uneasy  riding,  but  it  does  not  endanger  vessels  well 
anchored  in  a  clear  berth. 

The  only  directions  necessary,  both  for  avoiding  the  Dixon  Rock  and 
choosing  a  good  berth,  are  to  keep  the  cove  open,  so  that  the  whole  of 
the  bridge  as  well  as  the  white  cliffs  above  it  may  be  seen.  Vessels  of 
large  draft  should  keep  Balache  Point  well  open,  and  go  no  nearer  in 
than  7  or  8  fathoms  water ;  but  smaller  vessels  may  anchor  in  4  or  5 
fathoms,  with  mud  bottom.  The  bottom  is  more  and  more  sandy  farther 
out  towards  the  steep  edge  of  the  bank  in  10  fathoms,  after  which  it  be- 
comes rocky  in  the  deep  water  and  strength  of  the  tide. 

Tides.— The  tidal  streams  at  the  anchorage  are  eddies,  running  often 
irregularly,  but  generally  in  a  contrary  direction  to  the  main  stream  in 
the  channel,  and  at  a  rate  seldom  exceeding  one  knot.  These  eddies 
render  it  advisable  to  moor,  especially  in  large  vessels  having  occasion 
to  remain  some  time  (to  water  for  instance),  in  which  case  one  anciior 
should  be  laid  well  out  to  the  southward  in  9  or  10  fathoms  water. 

Water.— There  is  an  excellent  watering  place  directly  opposite  Port 
Hawkesbury,  in  the  bay  between  Cape  Porcupine  and  Keaton  Point. 

Anchorages.— The  other  anchorages  in  the  Gut  are  less  secure, 
either  from  exposure  to  particular  winds  or  loose  holding  ground.  On 
the  eastern  shore,  off  Madden  Cove,  and  Doolan  Pond,  NW.  of  Bear 
Island,  and  east  of  Bear  Head,  vessels  frequently  anchor  to  wait  for 
wind  or  tide  in  fine  summer  weather ;  as  they  do  also  at  Byers,  Oritchet. 
and  Eddy  Coves,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  channel. 

Vessels  may  anchor  for  a  tide  and  in  fine  weather  near  the  lighthouse 
at  the  north  entrance,  and  also  on  the  western  shore  of  the  Gut  oft' Mill 
Creek,  which  is  another  occasional  stopping  place ;  but  neither  of  these 
can  be  recommended,  since  they  are  both  exposed  to  northerly  winds, 
which  often  commence  suddenly  and  send  in  a  very  heavy  sea.  More- 
over, off"  Mill  Creek  irregular  eddies  render  it  very  difficult  to  keep  an 
anchor  clear. 

Directions  for  the  Out  of  Canso.— With  the  foregoing  description 
of  the  dangers  and  anchorages,  and  the  aid  of  the  chart,  there  will  be 
httle  or  no  difficulty  experienced  in  the  passage  of  the  Gut  of  Canso, 


11 


»;.. 

u 


! 


wm 


iwiiMwroiii^^ 


186 


GUT   OF   CAN80. 


either  with  a  leadiag  or  a  beating  Wmd.  la  the  latter  case,  and  wheu 
bound  to  the  northward  into  the  gulf,  the  aim  should  be  to  gam  the 
anchorage  at  Port  Hastings,  and  to  start  from  thence  with  the  turn  ot 
the  tide,  so  as  to  secure  a  good  offing  in  St.  George  Bay  before  the  ebb 

When  bound  through  the  Gut  to  the  southward,  the  distance  from 
Cape  George  to  the  light  at  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  is  20J  miles. 
The  approach  in  this  direction,  through  St.  George  Bay,  is  unattended 
with  difficulty  or  danger,  excepting  when  fogs  or  snowstorms  hide  from 
view  the  light  which  has  been  judiciously  placed  at  its  northern  entrance. 
The  soundings  are  then  the  only  guides,  and  they  will  be  toured  suffi- 
cient,  iu  all  ordinary  cases,  for  the  safety  of  vessels  prudently  coniucted, 
with  their  leads  going.    In  vessels  so  circumstanced  the  endeavor  should 
be  to  strike  soundings  on  the  bank  oil"  Long  Point,  and  then  to  follow 
its  ledge  along  the  shore  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  in  the  low  water  deptU 
of  10  fathoms,  to  the  entrance  of  the  Gut.    It  is  seldom  so  thick 
especially  in  a  breeze  of  wind,  but  that  some  part  of  the  shore  will  be 
seen  before  the  vessel  has  run  tar  after  entering  so  narrow  a  strait. 
With  a  beating  wind,  she  shouW  board  oflf  and  on  the  same  shore,  until 
soundings  are  struck  (iu  the  board  to  the  westward,  and  after  crossing 
the  deep  water),  on  the  edge  of  the  bank  off  Cape  Jack,  where,  if  it  be 
night,and  the  fog  so  thick  that  the  lightcan  not  be8een,orif  the  tide  be 
nearly  done,  it  will  be  advisable  to  anchor,  and  wait  for  a  change.  The 
ground  there  is  not  good,  but  it  is  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides,  and 
an  anchor  will  hold  in  moderate  weather.    The  anchorage  J  mile  to  the 
SB.  of  the  lighthouse,  and  on  the  same  side  of  the  channel  should  be 
preferred  if  attainable.    There  are  some  spots  of  mud  there,  in  which  an 
anchor  holds  well  iu  7  to  9  fathoms,  and  where  the  strength  of  the  tide 

is  not  great.  -.     ^   ^i  n 

Vessels  outward  bound,  and  proceeding  through  the  Gut  to  the  south- 
ward,  very  frequently  meet  a  south  or  SE.  wind,  with  its  usual  accom- 
paniments of  fog  and  rain ;  iu  which  case  the  roadstead  off  Port 
Hawkesbury  will  be  found  the  most  roomy  and  convenient  anchorage. 
Eddy  Cove,  from  its  more  advanced  position  at  the  entrance  of  the  Gut, 
offers,  to  vessels  sailing  with  the  first  of  a  fair  wind,  a  better  chance  of 
clearing  Chedabucto  Bay  and  the  Canso  Ledges  before  dark ;  but  it  can 
only  be  recommended  in  fine  settled  summer  weather,  for  the  ground  is 
not  good,  and  the  anchorage  is  much  exposed  on  the  occurrence  of  a 
sudden  change  of  wind.  Turbalton  Bay  is  much  more  secure,  but  it  is 
rather  small  for  a  large  and  weakly  manned  vessel  to  weigh  from  in  the 
event  of  a  strong  wind  setting  in  suddenly  from  the  westward. 

Tides  —Ordinary  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet ;  but  extraordinary 
tides  may  rise  6  or  7  feet,  or  only  2  feet,  owing  to  the  irregular  influence 
of  unknown  causes;  probably  strong  winds  at  a  distance.  The  rise 
and  fall  of  the  tides  on  the  shore  usually  continue  through  nearly  equal 
periods  of  time,  but  the  duration  of  the  tidal  streams  (the  flood  being 


a&essSEBSS 


TIDES — DIRECTIONS. 


187 


9,  ftud  when 
i  to  gain  the 
1  the  turn  of 
jfore  the  ebb 

istance  from 
is  20^  miles. 
s  unattended 
ras  hidt)  from 
eni  entrance, 
e  foui'id  suffl- 
ly  conducted, 
ieavor  should 
hen  to  follow 
V  water  depth 
om  so  thick 
shore  will  be 
irrow  a  strait, 
le  shore,  until 
after  crossing 
where,  if  it  be 
r  if  the  tide  be 
k  change.  The 
the  tides,  and 
e  J  mile  to  the 
uel  should  be 
re,  in  which  an 
fth  of  the  tide 

It  to  the  south- 
3  usual  accom- 
(tead  ofif  Port 
eut  anchorage, 
ice  of  the  Gut, 
etter  chauce  of 
irk;  but  it  can 
r  the  ground  is 
ccurrence  of  a 
jecure,  but  it  is 
igh  from  in  the 
tward. 

t  extraordinary 
5gular  influence 
Mice.  The  rise 
;h  nearly  equal 
the  flood  being 


to  the  /thward  aud  the  ebb  to  the  southward)  varies  from  one  to  4 
hours  after  it  is  high  or  low  water  by  the  shore,  even  in  the  fine  weather 
of  summer ;  whilst  in  the  blowing  weather,  so  frequent  on  the  approach 
of  winter  or  in  early  spring,  they  are  reported  to  be  still  more  irregular, 
running  at  times  in  the  same  direction  for  several  days  in  succession  ; 
but  this  never  occurred  during  the  Admiralty  survey. 

The  rate  of  these  streams  off  Cape  Porcupine,  where  it  is  most  rapid, 
is  ordinarily  about  i  kuots ;  but  is  increased  occasionally  to  5  knots  by 
strong  winds.  At  most  of  the  anchorages,  and  under  almost  every 
point,  there  are  eddies,  usually  runniag  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
main  streaui  outside,  but  at  a  much  inferior  rate,  and  they  render  great 
attentioa  necessary  to  insure  a  clear  anchor. 

The  set  of  the  flood  stream  from  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  is 
nearly  towards  Gape  St.  George,  diminishing  rapidly  in  strength  as  it 
expands  in  advancing  to  the  northward.  It  is  weak  in  the  western  part 
of  St.  George  Bay,  sweeping  roand  it  to  the  NW.,  with  slight  indraughts 
towards  Pomquet,  Antigouish,  etc.  The  ebb  stream  will  be  found  set- 
ting in  the  contrary  direction. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  St.  George  Bay  the  flood  stream  from  the  Gut  is 
usually  met  by  a  much  weaker  and  contrary  stream  of  flood,  coming 
from  the  NE.,  along  the  west  coast  of  Cape  Breton.  These  opposing 
flood  streams  will  be  found,  in  general,  to  unite  somewhere  off  the 
Judique  Shoals,  and  then  to  set  towards  the  N  W.  The  two  correspond- 
ing ebb  streams  as  generally  diverge  from  about  the  same  place ;  the 
one  setting  towards  the  Gut,  with  increasing  strength,  as  it  proceeds 
to  the  southward,  and  the  other  in  the  contrary  direction,  towards  Port 
Hood.  All,  however,  that  has  been  said  respecti  ng  these  streams  must 
be  understood  as  of  usual,  aud  not  of  constant  occurrence,  since  they 
must  recessarily  partake  of  the  irregularity  in  the  strength  and  dura- 
tion of  the  tidul  streams  of  the  Gut  of  Canso.  Nevertheless,  it  will  be 
highly  useful,  and  may  materially  aid  the  progress  of  the  vessel,  to  bear 
in  mind  the  usual  set  of  these  streams. 

St.  Q-eorge  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  being  13^  miles  wide  at  entrance, 
between  Cape  St.  George  and  Henry  Island,  and  20  miles  deep,  from 
the  same  cape  to  tlie  Gut  of  Oanso.  It  is  traversed  by  all  the  uumer- 
ons  vessels  which  pass  in  or  out  of  the  Gulf  by  its  southern  entrance, 
and  heuce  its  navigation  assumes  a  more  than  usual  degree  of  nautical 
importance. 

Anchorage. — Malf  a  mile  to  the  SE.  of  the  lighthouse  at  the  north 
entrance,  and  on  the  same  side  of  the  Gut,  tnere  is  tolerable  anchorage 
in  all  but  northerly  winds.    Vessels  frequently  stop  there  to  wait  tide. 

Havre  Bouche  is  a  small  but  convenient  harbor  for  schooners,  lying 
between  Cape  Jack  aud  the  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance.  It  has 
4  teet  at  low  wat^er  in  its  narrow  entrance  between  stony  points,  hav- 
ing no  bar  outside,  and  13  or  14  feet  within.  There  is  a  small  stieam 
at  its  head.    The  shores  and  neighl^orliood  are  well  cultivated,  aud  the 


188 


ST.    GEORGE   BAY. 


church  will  be  seen  near  the  shore,  and  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the 
entrance,  or  half  way  towards  Cape  Jack. 

Jack  Shoal.— Cape  Jack,  a  clift'  of  red  sandstone  45  feet  high,  is 
the  most  prominent  headland  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  Jack  Shoal 
runs  out  from  the  cape  one  mile  to  3  fathoms  water,  and  IJ  miles  to  5 
fathoms.  Between  the  distances  of  J  and  i  mile  off  shore  there  are  two 
large  patches  of  rock,  which  dry  at  half  tide,  leaving  a  passage  carry- 
ing 11  or  12  feet  water  for  small  craft  between  them  and  the  cape. 

Caution.— The  Jack  Shoal  has  often  proved  dangerous  to  vessels  in 
thick  weather,  when  it  should  be  approached  with  great  caution,  espe- 
cially from  the  eastward,  the  soundings  on  that  side  being  irregular 
and  deep  near  the  shoal,  but  nevertheless  q  ate  sufficient  to  insure 
safety  if  the  lead  be  kept  going.  On  the  outer  point  of  the  shoal,  in  3 
fathoms,  the  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Canso  bears 
S.  720  E.  34  miles.  If  the  light  can  not  be  seen  the  shoal  should  not 
be  approached  nearer  than  the  low  water  depth  of  10  fathoms. 

Little  Tracadie  Harbor  has  only  one  foot  at  low  water  over  its  bar. 
Its  entrance  is  in  the  bay  between  Barrio  Head  and  Cape  Blue,  the 
former  being  a  cliflf  of  red  sandstone  110  feet  high;  the  latter  remark- 
able from  being  of  limestone,  and  sheltering  the  entrance  from  NE. 
winds.    The  inhabitants  of  these  small  harbors,  including  Poraquet, 
are  Acadians,  of  French  extraction,  who  live  principally  by  agriculture. 
Tracadie  Harbor,  3J  miles  eastward  of  Pomquet  Island,  has  its 
narrow  entrance  about  J  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Bowman  Head.    It  is 
extensive,  and  has  14  feet  water  in  some  parts  within,  with  many  coves, 
islets,  and  small  streams,  the  principal  of  which,  called  Tracadie  River, 
is  at  the  head  of  the  eastern  arm,  2^  miles  In  firom  the  sea.    The  depth 
over  its  dangerous  bar  of  gravel  and  stones  is  only  2  feet  at  low  water, 
in  a  narrow  and  crooked  channel;  it  therefore  admits  only  boats  or 
very  small  vessels  at  high  water.     The  village  of  Tracadie  and  the 
church  are  situated  about  a  mile  within  the  entrance.    The  church  is 
large  and  can  be  seen  from  a  great  distance  out  at  sea. 

Pomquet  Road.— Poraquet  Island  is  of  red  sandstone,  low,  wooded, 
about  i  mile  long,  and  is  joined  by  a  reef  to  Poraquet  Point,  from  which 
it  is  distant  350  yards.  The  reef  dries  out  from  the  point  more  than 
half  way  over  towards  the  island,  and  leaves  a  passage  with  only  3  or 
4  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

Pomquet  Road  is  considered  safe  during  the  summer  montlis,  but 
where  the  riding  must  be  very  heavy  in  NB.  gales  is  in  the  bay  be- 
tweeu  Pomquet  Point  and  Little  River,  which  last  admits  boats  only 
at  high  water,  and  with  its  church  and  settlement  will  be  seen  to  the 
southward  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  island. 

Anchorage.-Vessels  may  anchor  in  any  depth  from  3  to  6  fathoms 
over  sandy  bottom,  but  the  best  sheltered  berth  is  in  4  fathoms  at  low 
water,  with  the  south  point  of  the  island  bearing  N.  7°  W.,  distant  J 
mile. 


BOWMAN   BANK — ANTIGONISH    HARBOR. 


189 


stward  of  the 

►  feet  high,  is 
Jack  Shoal 
IJ  miles  to  5 
)  there  are  two 
massage  carry - 
the  cape. 
IS  to  vessels  in 
caution,  espe- 
»eing  irregular 
ieut  to  insure 
the  shoal,  in  3 
;  of  Oanso  bears 
oal  should  not 
;homs. 

;er  over  its  bar. 
Dape  Blue,  the 
latter  remark- 
ince  from  NE. 
ding  Pomquet, 
by  agriculture. 
Island,  has  its 
an  Head.    It  is 
ith  many  coves, 
Tracadie  River, 
lea.    The  depth 
et  at  low  water, 
s  only  boats  or 
•acadie  and  the 
The  church  is 

lie,  low,  wooded, 
[)int,from  which 
point  more  than 
;e  with  only  3  or 

ner  months,  but 
8  in  the  bay  be- 
imits  boats  only 
11  be  seen  to  the 

m  3  to  6  fathoms 
I  fathoms  at  low 
7°  W.,  distant  J 


Directions.— To  run  for  this  anchorage  from  the  northward  pass 
the  eastern  shore  of  Pomquet  Island  at  the  distance  of  J  mile,  or  in  not 
less  than  8  fathoms  water,  until  Pomquet  Point  comes  in  sight  to  the 
southward  of  the  island,  when  haul  to  the  westward  into  the  bay. 

The  Bowman  Bank  must  be  avoided  in  approaching  from  the  east- 
ward, either  by  the  lead  or  by  not  bringing  the  north  point  of  the  is- 
land to  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  43°  W.  until  the  north  point  of  the 
bank  is  passed.  The  bank  is  of  great  extent,  running  off  fully  2  miles 
to  the  northward  from  Quarry  Point  and  Bowman  Head,  and  has  rocky 
patches  on  it,  with  13, 16,  and  19  feet  at  low  water,  at  various  dis- 
tances, from  5  to  1^  miles  off  shore. 

Pomquet  Banks  lie  off  Pomquet  Island  to  the  northward,  distant 
from  3  to  6  miles.  The  soundings  on  them  are  rociiy  and  irregular,  the 
least  water,  6  fathoms,  being  on  the  outer  and  smaller  of  the  two  banks, 
with  the  church  at  the  Little  River  shut  in  behind  the  east  side  of  the 
island,  bearing  S.  3°  E.  5^  miles. 

Pomquet  Harbor  has  its  narrow  entrance  at  the  eastern  extremity 
of  a  range  of  low  sandhills  and  sand  beach,  2|  miles  from  Monk  Head, 
and  in  the  bay  between  it  and  Pomquet  Point.  It  is  an  extensive 
place,  branching  into  two  principal  and  many  smaller  inlets,  coves,  and 
islets.  It  is  navigable  for  small  craft  and  boats  nearly  3  miles  in  from 
the  sea,  but  it  is  of  no  use  to  shipping,  having  usually  only  a  depth  of 
2  feet  at  low  water  over  its  shifting  bar  of  sand.  The  principal  settle- 
ments and  the  church  are  on  the  western  shore  of  the  NW.  arm,  and 
the  Indians  have  a  chapel  and  a  reservation  of  land  on  the  eastern 
and  larger  branch,  at  the  head  of  which  is  Pomquet  River,  a  small 
stream  (1860). 

Monk  Head  is  a  cliff  of  gypsum  45  feet  high,  2f  miles  from  the  en- 
trance of  Antigonish  Harbor.  A  rocky  bank,  with  3  fathoms  least 
water,  extends  oiT  it  ^  mile  to  the  eastward,  and  there  are  no  more 
than  ^  fathoms  at  double  that  distance  from  the  shore. 

Antigonish  Harbor,  at  11  miles  to  the  southward  of  Cape  St.  George, 
is  nearly  200  yards  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  low  points  of  sand,' 
from  which  a  dangerous  bar  extends  to  the  distance  of  J  mile.  The  bar 
and  the  deep  water  up  the  harbor  are  marked  by  spar  buoys  on  either 
side.  The  bar  has  a  depth  of  6  feet  at  low  water,  but  both  the  depth 
and  direction  of  the  very  narrow  channel  are  said  to  change  occasionally. 
The  anchorage  oft' the  bar  (rock)  is  not  good,  and  would  be  quite  unsafe 
in  a  gale  from  the  NE. 

The  Harbor  is  of  great  extent,  running  in  6  or  7  miles  to  the  SW. ; 
the  channel,  between  flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  having  in  some  places 
6  or  6  fathoms  water.  There  are  flourishing  farms  on  either  side, 
and  the  village  of  Antigonish,  containing  about  1,500  inhabitants, 
stands  at  the  head  of  the  western  arm,  distant  6J  miles  from  the  entrance. 
Oypsum  abounds  here,  forming,  with  lumber  and  the  produce  of  an  in- 


I 


190 


ST.    GEORGE   BAY. 


T 


creasing  agriculture,  the  cargoes  of  the  schooners  which  frequent  the 

harbor. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Tides.— Northerly  winds  cause  high  tides,  and  southerly  winds  the 
contrary.  The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  entrance  seldom  exceeds  2  knots, 
unless  it  may  be  in  spring  after  the  melting  of  the  winter's  snow. 

Maclsaac  Rock,  with  9  feet  least  water,  is  the  center  of  a  small  de- 
tached  shoal,  distant  nearly  600  yards  from  the  shore,  between  Mac^ 
Isaac  Point  and  a  remarkable  patch  of  white  gypsum  cliff.  This  rock, 
^vhich  is  the  only  danger  on  the  west  side  of  St.  George  Bay,  bears  trom 
the  gypsum  patch  N.  49°  E.  §  mile ;  it  is  distant  2J  miles  to  the  north- 
ward  of  the  entrance  of  Antigonish,  and  is  shown  occasionally  by  heavy 

breakers.  ,    ,,       ,         .. 

Cape  St  aeorge,  the  NW.  point  of  this  bay,  is  a  bold  and  precipi- 
tous headland,  composed  principally  of  slate,  conglomerate,  and  trap 
rocks,  attaining  the  elevation  of  600  feet  above  the  sea.  The  sha  low 
water  does  not  extern^  off  it  beyond  i  mile,  but  as  there  is  a  depth  of 
20  fathoms  at  double  that  distance,  the  lead  affords  but  little  warning, 
and  it  should  therefore  be  approached  with  caution  in  thick  weather. 
A  new  church  has  been  built  to  the  westward  of  the  lighthouse,  form- 
ing a  useful  land  mark.  Off  Ballantyne  Cove,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
cape,  there  is  an  anchorage  in  westerly  winds,  but  the  ground  is  not 
very  good. 


•MlHs 


1 1  nitirtii!v.uiw*Mii*tn 


[^^i^llKV»X^lf:-''V'-' 


T 


frequent  the 


man 


>rly  winds  the 
ceeds  2  knots, 
r's  snow, 
of  a  small  de- 
between  Mac- 
ff.  This  rock, 
ay,  bears  from 
3  to  the  north- 
lally  by  heavy 

d  and  precipi- 
tate, and  trap 
The  shallow 
e  is  a  depth  of 
little  warning, 
thick  weather, 
hthoase,  form- 
tern  side  of  the 
ground  is  not 


CHAPTE  R  VII. 

NORTHUMBERLAND    STRAIT,   CAPE   ST.   GEORGE   TO    MIRAMIOHI  BAY. 

The  Coast  from  Cape  St.  George  to  Merigomish  Harbor  is  bold 
and  free  from  danger.  The  land,  rising  from  the  sea  to  the  sum- 
mit of  a  ridge  2  or  3  miles  iu  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  coast  line,  is 
well  settled,  the  cultivation  extending  occj  sionally  to  the  summit  of 
the  ridge,  which  attains  the  extreme  elevation  of  1,100  feet  above  the 
sea. 

Malignant  Cove  has  a  small  stream  at  its  head,  affording  good  land- 
ing for  boats,  and  will  be  known  by  the  Sugar  Loaf  Hill,  a  mile  in  rear 
of  it,  and  680  feet  high  above  the  sea. 

There  is  no  harbor  in  this  distance,  the  wooden  pier  at  the  village  of 
Arisajg  affording  shelter  only  to  boats  and  shallops  in  easterly  winds, 
but  none  in  winds  from  between  north  and  west. 

The  remarkable  rock  called  the  Baiii  lies  nearly  a  mile  to  the  east- 
ward of  this  pier,  and  J  mile  NE.  from  Arisaig  church. 

Merigomish  Harbor  is  so  intricate  and  difficult  of  entrance  that  no 
directions  would  enable  a  stranger  to  take  his  ship  in  safely,  and  the 
northerly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  over  the  bar  that  to  get  on  shore 
going  in  would  probably  be  attended  with  the  loss  of  the  vessel.  The 
outer  entrance  of  the  harbor  (f  mile  wide)  is  between  King  Head  and 
Merigomish  Point,  the  latter  being  the  west  extreme  of  Merigomish 
Island.  The  bar  is  formed  by  rocky  shoals  running  out  from  these 
points  of  entrance  f  mile  to  the  northward.  The  channel  over  the  bar, 
and  leading  in  from  it  between  the  shoals,  is  more  than  200  yards  wide ; 
but  the  shoals  are  so  steep  that  the  lead  affords  little  guidance,  and 
there  are  no  leading  marks.  The  course  running  in  is  at  first  to  the 
southward,  and  then  by  a  sharp  turn  to  theeastward  close  past  Savage 
Point  (the  sandy  spit  at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Merigomish  Island)  into 
the  harbor.  This  inner  entrance  of  the  harbor,  between  Savage  Point 
and  the  east  end  of  Olding  Island,  is  about  i  mile  wide,  but  the  navi- 
gable breadth  is  reduced  to  100  yards  by  the  shoal  off  Olding  Island, 
and  the  tides  frequently  run  there  at  the  rate  of  5  miles  an  hour. 

This  harbor  is  seldom  visited  by  anything  larger  than  a  coasting 
schooner.    The  pilots  are  therefore  incompetent  from  want  of  practice 
and  the  channel  is  no  longer  buoyed  as  it  used  to  be  formerly.    The 
harbor  is  of  great  extent,  running  in  5  or  C  miles  to  the  eastward,  within 
Merigomish  Island  and  the  sandbar  which  joins  it  to  the  mainland, 

191 


iw 


•:  ! 


I" 


192  CAPE   8T.   GEORGE    TO   MIRAMICHI    BAY. 

and  also  4  miles  to  the  westward,  up  a  bay  full  of  islands,  coves  and 
precipitous  headlands.  Several  small  streams  enter  the  harbor,  of 
whTch  French  River,  opposite  the  east  end  of  Olding  Island,  is  the  prin- 
Tipal  It  IS  approached  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  through  flats  of  mud 
and  weeds,  and  can  be  ascended  by  boats  to  the  bridge,  about  a  mile 

"Meri^omiriri^^  3i  miles  long  andl^  miles  broad,  is  of  clay  and 
sa^stone,  belonging  to  the  coal  formation,  rising  t-  thejietght  of^l50 
feet  above  the  sea.  Thin  Hcams  of  coal  may  be  seen  at  Coa  loint, 
whlre  the  cliffs,  which  form  the  northern  shore  of  the  island,  are  35 
feet  high.  Its  southern  shore  is  broken  intx,  coves,  chfty  islets,  and 
peninsulated  points  similarly  to  the  western  part  of  the  harbor  A 
sandbar  2J  miles  long  unites  the  island  to  the  mainland  to  the  east- 
ward,  excepting  in  unusually  high  tides,  when  the  water  washes  over 

one  part  of  it  into  the  harbor.  •      „  .  .    .    -,^  . 

Tidee-It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Betty  Point  in  Men. 
Romish  Harbor  at  lOh.  6m.;  springs  rise  5i  feet,  neaps  3i  feet,  but  the 
diurnal  inequality  is  strongly  marked  here,  as  ^ »  »«  «f  f  «f "' f  ^""^ 
ing  a  considerable  difference  in  the  times  and  the  heights  of  the  two 

tides  on  the  same  day.  /.^i„„i,«„r. 

Little  Harbor.-In  the  shoal  bay  between  Evans  and  Oolquhoun 
Points,  which  are  distant  5  and  6J  miles,  respectively,  from  the  light- 
houso  n  Pictou  Harbor,  are  two  narrow,  dangerous,  and  intricate  chan- 
„e  s  leading  through  shoals  Into  Little  Harbor.  Of  these  channels  the 
eaten  and  best  turns  sharp  in  to  the  eastward  withinRoy  Island,  and 
close  round  the  sandy  spit  at  its  SW.  extreme.  The  other  has  only  a 
foot  or  two  water,  and  leads  into  the  western  part  of  the  harbor,  which 
s  several  miles  in  extent,  and  broken  into  bays,  coves,  and  picturesque 
points,  but  only  at  for  boats,  being  nearly  all  dry  at  low  water,  except- 
ing  the  narrow  channels.  ^is+u^ 

Roy  Ledge,  a  small,  rocky  shoal,  with  9  feet  least  water,  lies  off  the 
nort^shorrof  Roy  Island,  at  the  distance  of  700  y^^ds  and|  mUe  K 
730  W.  from  Colquhoun  Point.  There  is  also  a  reef  of  sandstone,  in 
great  part  dry  at  low  water,  running  out  from  Colquhoun  Poi-.t  J  mile 
to  the  eastward  5  and  as  all  these  dangers  have  5  fathoms  water  close 
to  them,  vessels  should  be  careful  not  to  stand  into  less  than  6  fathoms 

ftlon?  this  part  of  the  coast.  .     ,.  ,  ^, 

The  Rowing  BuU,  distant  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  lighthouse 
in  Pictou  MK»r,  is  the  cliffy  north  point  (with  a  remarkable  red  patch 
on  it)  of  a  small  peninsula,  united  to  the  mainland  at  its  western  end 
by  a  sandv  beach,  and  having  at  the  other  extremity  the  gully  or  en^ 
trance  to'ohance  Harbor,  dry,  or  nearly  so,  at  low  water.  A  reef  of 
sandstone  runs  out  to  the  NE.  from  the  Roaring  Bull,  600  yards  to  the 
3-fathom  line  of  soundings.  u^..^  «f 

Pictou  Harbor,  in  every  respect  the  finest  on  the  southern  shore  of 
the  gulf,  derives  additional  importance  from  the  coal  mines,  valuable 


Jjigg. 


PICTOU. 


198 


8,  coves,  and 
le  harbor,  of 
d,  is  the  prin- 
h  flats  of  mud 
about  a  luile 

is  of  clay  and 
height  of  150 
t  Coal  Point, 
island,  are  35 
fly  islets,  and 
le  harbor.  A 
il  to  the  east- 
r  washes  over 

?oint,  in  Meri- 
J  feet,  but  the 
b  Pictou,  cans- 
lits  of  the  two 

,nd  Colquhoun 
rom  the  light- 
intricate  chan- 
86  channels  the 
toy  Island,  and 
her  has  only  a 
)  harbor,  which 
,nd  picturesque 

•  water,  except- 

kter,  lies  off  the 
J,  and  5  mile  N. 
>f  sandstone,  in 
an  Poiriii  J  mile 
nis  water  close 
than  6  fathoms 

•  the  lighthouse 
•kable  red  patch 
its  western  end 
the  gully  or  en- 
ater.  A  reef  of 
600  yards  to  the 

outhern  shore  of 
mines,  valuable 


quarries  of  building  stone,  and  finely  settled  country  in  its  neighbor- 
hood. It  is  situated  at  the  bottom  of  a  bay,  which  is  1^  miles  wide  at 
its  entrance,  from  Logan  Point  to  Mackenzie  Head,  and  1^  miles  deep. 
Mackenzie  Head  will  be  recognized  by  its  sharp-pointed  cliff  of  clay  and 
sandstone  40  feet  high,  with  a  small  white  house  on  the  edge,  and  by 
its  bearing  S.  24°  W.  from  Logan  Point. 

Fictou  stands  on  the  north  shore  of  the  harbor,  2  miles  within  the 
lighthouse,  on  the  declivity  of  a  ridge,  which  rises  to  the  height  of  200 
feet  above  the  sea,  at  a  short  distance  in  rear  of  the  town.  A  spur  from 
this  ridge  forms  Battery  Point,  which  shelters  the  place  from  the  east 
winds.  On  Town  Point  has  been  built  the  customhouse,  a  new  brick 
building  faced  with  stone,  and  having  a  square  tower  at  its  south  ex- 
treme. The  most  conspi  -'ous  of  the  new  public  buildings  is  the  Koman 
Catholic  Church,  a  red  brick  edifice  with  a  spire,  situated  near  the  summit 
of  the  eminence  to  the  eastward  of  the  to<vn ;  the  convent,  a  large,  square 
brick  house,  stands  near  this  church.  The  academy  is  a  square  build- 
ii'ig  of  brick,  surmounted  by  a  small  pinnacle,  and  situated  on  the  sum- 
mit of  the  hill  over  the  town.  The  shore  margin  of  the  town  has  been 
improved  by  the  erection  of  new  wharves.  The  population  is  estimated 
at  32,000.  From  Pictou  Landing  a  steam  ferry-boat  plies  at  alternate 
hours  to  and  from  Pictou. 

Telegraph. — Pictou  is  in  telegraphic  communication  with  all  parts 
of  Canada  and  the  United  States.  It  is  connected  with  Halifax,  St. 
John,  and  Quebec  by  the  Intercolonial  Railway,  also  with  Port  Hawkes- 
bury  in  the  Gut  of  Canso.  Passenger  steam  vessels  run  to  all  parts  of 
the  gulf. 

The  shores  of  the  West  Arm  are  well  settled  all  the  way  to  the  head  of 
the  tide,  5  miles  from  Pictou,  and  the  post  road  to  Truro  and  Halifax 
passes  along  the  northern  shore.  Several  of  the  hills  to  the  westward 
of  this  arm  are  of  considerable  height.  Rogers  Hill,  6  miles  from  Pictou, 
is  546  feet,  and  Dalhonsie  Mountain,  3  miles  farther  SW.,  the  highest 
point  of  which  is  950  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water.  West  River, 
above  the  tide  water,  is  a  considerable  stream,  although  shallow  and 
rapid.  It  winds  its  way  through  a  beautiful  and  well-cultivated  valley, 
containing  a  large  population. 

The  Middle  Arm  runs  in  5J  miles  from  Pictou  to  the  SW.,  at  which 
distance  the  tide  ends,  and  the  river  is  rapid  and  fordable  at  low  water. 

The  East  Arm  is  navigable  by  vessels  to  the  distance  of  2^  miles 
from  Pictou,  to  the  coal  loading  place,  or  railway  terminus  from  the 
Albion  Mines.  Its  channel,  which  joins  the  harbor  directly  opposite 
Pictou,  is  of  the  average  breadth  of  180  yards,  and  marked  out  by 
spruce-bush  stakes  driven  into  the  mud  flats  at  intervals  on  either  side. 
Half  a  mile  below  the  loading  place  a  bar  of  hard  ground  with  12  feet 
at  low  water,  crosses  the  channel ;  and  therefore  vessels  must  not  be 
laden  to  draw  more  than  15  feet  in  neap  and  18  feet  in  spring  tides. 
At  a  short  distance  above  the  loading  place  the  channel  is  so  divided 
5314-^ — 13 


O  ! 


—    -mmmm 


wmmm 


HMiiiii 


■H 


MMI  - 


194 


CAPE    ST.   QEOROE   TO   MIRAMICHI    BAY. 


aud  obstructed  by  old  oyster  beds,  that  it  is  difficult  to  carry  the  depth 
of  3  or  4  feet  through  at  low  water;  nud  similar  obstructions  occur  sev- 
eral times  up  to  the  bridge  at  New  Glasgow,  6^  miles  from  Pictou. 

New  Glasgow  is  a  large  towu  on  the  east  side  of  the  river,  owing  its 
existence  to  the  coal  mines  which  are  about  2  miles  higher  up  and  to 
which  boats  can  ascend  with  the  tide.  New  vessels  of  considerable 
burden  are  built  at  the  town  and  are  taken  down  the  river  when  light 
with  the  assistance  of  the  tide. 

SuppUes. -Sufficient  water  maybe  obtained  here  to  supply  the 
largest  ships,  from  a  steam  water  tank.  The  best  watering  place  is  on 
the  south  shore  of  Pictou  Harbor,  J  mile  within  its  mouth  ;  and  there 
is  another  opposite  the  coal  loading  place,  in  the  East  River. 

Charges.— Health  dues,  2  cents  per  ton ;  harbor  dues,  1^  cents  per 
ton.  Tugboat  charges,  inward,  from  3  to  5  cents  per  ton ;  outward,  5 
to  10  cents  per  ton.  Ballast  50  cents  per  ton.  Coal  $2  per  ton.  Pilot- 
age: Vessels  if  spoken  by  a  pilot  shall  pay  half  pilotage  if  services 
are  not  required.    Rates  are  as  follows : 

Inward.  Oatward. 

Vessels  of  80  and  under  140  tons «6.00 $4.00 

Vessels  of  140  and  under  200  tons 10.00 6.00 

Vessels  of  200  and  under  300  tons 12.00  8.00 

Vessels  of  300  and  under  400  tons 14.00 9.00 

Vessels  of  400  and  under  500  tons 15.00  10.00 

Vessels  of  500 and  under  600  tons 16.00  11.00 

Vessels  of  600  and  under  700 tons 17.00 12.00 

Vessels  of  1,000  tons  and  upward,  2  cents  per  ton,  inward. 
Vessels  of  1,000  tons  and  upward,  IJ  cents  per  ton,  outward. 

CoaL— From  1,000  to  2,000  tons  can  be  obtained  immediately. 
Heavy  draft  vessels,  unable  to  cross  the  bar  can  be  coaled  outside  by 

lighters. 
PUots.— The  branch  pilots  of  Pictou  are,  for  the  most  part,  able  and 

experienced  men,  and  are  always  on  the  lookout  for  vessels. 
The  XTnited  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice  consul. 
Mackenzie  Shoal  is  a  rocky  bank  nearly  J  mile  in  diameter,  with 
16  feet  least  water,  and  with  12  or  20  feet  between  it  aud  the  shallow 
water  to  the  westward.    Vessels  of  large  draft  should  not  attempt  to 
pass  within  or  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  it.    Caribou  and 
Doctor  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  41°  W.  will  lead  200  yards  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  shoal;  and  the  tower  of  the  custom-house  in  line  with  the 
north  extreme  of  the  lighthouse  embankment  bearing  S.  68°  W.  will 
lead  to  the  northward.    The  shallow  water  extends  a  long  J  mile  to 
the  northward  from  Mackenzie  Head,  and  its  edge  in  3  fathoms,  trends 
thence  to  the  westward  toward  the  lighthouse,  the  whole  bay  on  that 
side  being  shoal,  with  ridges  of  sand  drying  out  to  a  considerable  dis- 
tance  from  the  shore  at  low  water.    In  the  bay  between  Mackenzie 
Head  and  the  light-house,  and  on  the  west  side  of  Powell  Point,  is  Boat 


uiiiijm  ■ra»MlMfe4it>AiWMa»l8eea«3e8«aa,-«^ 


PICTOU — DIRKCTI0N8. 


195 


•ry  the  depth 
118  occur  sev- 
1  Pictou. 
rer,  owing  its 
ler  up  and  to 
considerable 
p  when  light 

)  supply  the 
ig  place  is  on 
h  ;  and  there 
rer. 

,  1^  cents  per 
1 ;  outward,  6 
ler  ton.  Pilot- 
ge  if  services 

1,  Oatward. 

I $4.00 

► 6.00 

) 8.00 

) 9.00 

)   10.00 

) 11.00 

) 12.00 

d. 

gyrard. 

I  immediately. 

aled  outside  by 

part,  able  and 
sels. 

eice  consul, 
diameter,  with 
lud  the  shallow 
not  attempt  to 
Caribou  and 
irds  to  the  east- 
in  line  with  the 
y  S.  68°  W.  will 
long  J  mile  to 
fathoms,  trends 
lole  bay  on  that 
onsiderable  dis- 
Kreen  Mackenzie 
)11  Point,  is  Boat 


Harbor,  the  entrance  of  an  extensive  inlet  or  lake,  full  of  mud  and 
weeds,  and  which  boats  can  traverse  only  when  the  tide  is  in.  On  the 
opposite  or  rorthern  side  reefs  extend  off  Lo|.'an  Point  to  the  east  and 
SE.,  a  long  ^  mile  to  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings. 

Cole  Point,  which  is  of  clay  and  sandstone  cliff  30  feet  high,  and 
lies  a  short  mile  farther  in  or  to  the  SW.  from  Logan  I'oint,  has  also  a 
reef  stretching  out  to  the  eastward  if  mile,  and  the  shallow  water  contin. 
ues  from  it  westward  to  the  commencement  of  Loudon  Beach  on  the 
north  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Pictou  Bar  and  Road. — The  distance  across  the  harbor's  month  from 
the  li^'.'^honse  on  the  sandy  spit  to  Loudon  Beach  is  about  400  yards, 
and  tliC  greatest  depth  is  7  fathoms  water;  but  the  channel  over  the 
bar  is  much  narrower,  and  has  besides  a  turn  in  it,  which,  together  with 
the  necessity  of  knowing  exactly  the  set  of  the  tides,  renders  a  pilot 
indispensable  in  a  large  ship.  After  passing  the  bar  the  depth  will 
increase  to  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms,  sand. 

Directions. — To  enter  Pictou  Harbor  by  day,  having  a  fair  wind,  and 
being  further  out  than  Mackenzie  Shoal,  the  position  of  which  has  been 
pointed  out,  bring  the  tower  of  the  custom-house  in  line  with  the  north 
extreme  of  the  lighthouse  embankment,  bearing  S.  G9°  W.  This  will 
lead  north  of  Mackenzie  Shoal  and  south  of  the  bank  off  the  marine 
hospital  as  far  as  the  bar,  until  the  first  two  trees  south  of  Boariug  Bull 
Point  are  in  line  with  the  base  of  the  cliff  at  Mackenzie  Head,  bearing 
S.  79°  E.  These  marks  in  line  will  lead  over  the  bar  in  a  depth  of  19 
feet,  the  deepest  water  at  low- water  springtides.  When  the  north  ex- 
treme of  Moodie  Point  (the  first  point  on  the  south  side  within  the  light- 
house)  opens  out  to  the  northward  of  the  Sandy  Spit,  haul  to  the 
westward,  at  first  towards  the  SW.  extreme  of  London  Beach,  and 
afterwards  so  as  to  pass  midway  between  it  and  the  Sandy  Spit  into  the 
harbor. 

By  night — Vessels  entering  the  harbor  should  follow  the  usual  course, 
by  keeping  the  Pictou  Bar  light  in  line  (S.  69°  W.)  with  the  light  on  the 
custom-house,  until  reaching  the  alignment  of  the  Eraser's  Farm  range 
(north  side  of  entrance),  which  should  then  be  held  on  aN.  82°  W.  course 
until  Pictou  Bar  light  is  brought  nearly  abeam,  whence  a  course  S.  62° 
W.  will  lead  to  safe  anchorage  in  the  harbor. 

A  pilot  would  be  indispensable  in  a  vessel  of  large  draft  with 
beating  winds,  and  even  smaller  vessels  must  know  the  tides  and  the 
place  well  to  beat  in  or  out  with  safety. 

Tides. — With  a  good  tide  it  is  possible  to  carry  25  feet  over  the  bar 
and  23  feet  may  generally  be  reckoned  upon ;  the  harbor,  therefore,  is 
capable  of  admitting  vessels  of  large  draft,  but  it  must  be  remembered 
that  the  best  of  the  two  tides  is  always  spoken  of  in  the  24  hours,  for 
the  diurnal  inequality,  iif-the  rise  of  the  tides,  which  occurs  more  or  less 
in  all  parts  of  Northumberland  Strait,  is  very  strongly  marked  in  this 
harbor.    It  may  also  be  added  that  in  the  month  of  August,  when  the 


'W"iMJ":'U^ 


s&.';?v> 


i»«r- 


196 


CAPF    ST.    OEOROE    TO    MIRAMICIII    BAY. 


observations  were  made,  the  a.  m.  tides  were  always  the  highest,  follow- 
ing the  inferior  transit  of  the  moon  with  north  declination  in  the  first 
part  of  the  lunation,  and  the  superior  transit  with  south  declination  in 
the  latter  part. 

Fictou  Island  is  of  clay  and  sandstone,  rising  In  the  central  parts 
to  the  extreme  height  of  15U  feet  above  the  sea.  It  in  wooded  on  the 
northern  side,  but  there  are  settlements  and  farms  along  its  southern 
shore.  Low  cliffs  form  its  outline  with  the  exception  of  several  small 
bays,  and  Kogcr  Point,  on  the  south  side,  which  is  of  sand  and  afl'ords 
the  liest  landing  for  boats. 

West  Point  nuiy  be  ptissed  in  3  fathoms  water  within  ^  mile  ;  but 
on  either  side  of  the  west  end  of  the  island  there  are  rocks,  nearly  dry 
at  low  water,  just  within  the  3  fathoms  line  and  extending  to  the  dis- 
tance of  GOO  yards  off  shore.  The  shallow  water  runs  out  occasioualls' 
to  the  same  distance  off  the  north  shore  of  the  island,  which  should  not 
be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  <S  or  0  fathoms  in  the  night  time. 
The  southern  shore  may  be  approached  to  5  fathoms;  but  at  Bast  Point 
a  dangerous  reef,  in  great  part  dry  at  low  water,  runs  out  ^  mile  to  3 
fathoms,  and  nearly  a  mile  to  the  5  fathoms  line.  There  are  9  fathoms 
not  far  off'  this  reef,  both  to  the  northward  and.  eastward;  it  should 
therefore  be  approached  with  caution  at  all  times,  but  especially  at 
night  and  with  a  flood  tide.  Tliere  is  a  lifeboat  on  the  east  end  of  the 
island. 

Pictou  Island  Bank  extends  from  Pictou  Island  to  the  west  and 
south  3:^  miles,  and  is  of  irregular  outline,  and  of  sandstone  thinly  cov- 
ered with  sand,  gravel,  mud,  and  broken  shells. 

The  Middle  Shoals  are  a  chain  of  rocky  patches,  with  11  feet  least 
water  stretching  across  the  northern  part  of  the  bank,  1:^  miles,  in  a 
southwesterly  direction ;  so  as  to  approach  within  ^  mile  oi  the  Caribou 
Ohannel  on  the  one  hand,  and  within  1^  miles  of  the  west  point  of 
Pictou  Island  on  the  other.  There  is  but  little  doubt  that  at  least  3J 
fathoms  at  low  water  can  be  carried  through  betweeu  these  shoals  and 
Pictou  Island,  although  the  irregular  soundings  forbid  absolute  cer- 
tainty. Roger  Point  and  West  Point  (Pictou  Island),  bearing  east  will 
lead  to  the  northward  of  them  in  4  fathoms,  but  large  ships  had  better 
not  approach  them  on  that  side  nearer  than  7  fathoms. 

Caribou  Harbor,  betweeu  Caribou  and  Doctor  Islands  and  the  main 
land,  is  an  extensive  place,  being  6  miles  long  from  tiie  southern  en- 
trance to  the  West  Gully,  and  in  some  parts  a  mile  wide.  The  whole 
of  this  large  space  is  occupied  by  shallow  water,  excepting  the  narrow 
channel  of  the  harbor,  which  is  deep  enough  for  vessels  of  far  larger 
draft  than  can  pass  the  bar,  but  does  -not  run  through,  being  lost  in 
mud  flats  at  the  distance  of  3^  miles  from  the  southern  eutrance.  The 
West  Gully  is  dry  at  low  walor;  about  a  mil*  within  it  Caribou  River 
enters  the  harbor,  and  is  navigable  for  boats  to  the  distance  of  2  or  3 
miles.    There  are  settlements  and  farms  along  the  southern  shore  of  the 


best,  follow- 
II  ill  the  first 
eoUiiatiuii  in 

leutral  parts 
>u<led  oil  tlie 
ilH  Houthern 
several  sniiUl 
(l  and  aftbrds 

1  ^  mile  ;  but 
8,  nearly  dry 
UH  to  the  dis- 

occasionally 
ch  should  not 
lie  night  time, 
at  Bast  Point 
ut  h  mile  to  3 
are  0  fathoms 
id;  it  should 

especially  at 
ast  end  of  the 

the  west  and 
)ne  thinly  cov- 

h  11  feet  least 
1^  miles,  in  a 
or  the  Caribou 
west  point  of 
hat  at  least  3 J 
ese  shoals  and 
I  absolute  cer- 
taring  east  will 
lips  had  better 

s  and  the  main 
e  southern  en- 
le.  The  whole 
ing  the  narrow 
is  of  far  larger 
I,  being  lost  in 
entrance.  The 
;  Caribou  River 
stance  of  2  or  3 
ern  shore  of  the 


CARIBOU    HAKBOR. 


197 


harbor,  also  upon  the  luuer  ai«le  of  the  islands,  and  a  road  from  the 
former  to  Pictou. 

The  ship  ei  trance  to  iliis  harbor  between  Doctor  8pit  and  Widow 
Point  is  only  !_'.»  yards  wide,  and  Mie  navigable  breadth  is  reduced  by 
the  shallow  water  oil  Widow  Point  to  80  yards.  The  depth  is  here  5 
fathoms,  but  an  abrui>t  turn  and  a  tide  of  4  kiiotH  render  so  narrow  a 
channel  extremely  diflicult.  Outside  the  entrance  the  channel  between 
the  shoals  becomes  wider,  and  the  depth  diminishes  gradually  out  to 
the  bar  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  and  over  which  only  9  feet  can  be 
carried  at  low  water.  The  great  superiority  of  the  neighboring  harbor 
of  Pictou  renders  it  in  the  highest  degree  unlikely  that  ever  this  har- 
bor will  be  much  freipiented  by  shipiting ;  and  its  bar  and  entrance  are 
too  difficult  and  dangerous  to  be  attempted  without  some  special  object, 
and  then  a  pilot  should  be  employed.  Widow  Point,  the  south  or  main- 
land point  of  entrance  of  the  harbor,  is  of  sand  and  shingle;  and  Oak- 
Tree  Point,  a  steep  clay  bank,  with  a  house  and  barn  upon  it,  is  the  first 
point  of  the  mainland  within  the  entrance,  from  which  it  is  distant  ^ 
mile. 

Directions. — To  enter  Caribou  Harbor, — having  a  fair  wind,  and  be- 
ing in  not  less  than  5  fathoms  water, — bring  the  high-water  extremes 
of  Widow  and  Oak-Tree  Points  in  one,  bearing  west,  and  run  towards 
them,  till  the  vessel  has  passed  the  bar  in  the  low-water  depth  of  9  feet, 
and  has  deepened  to  13  or  14  feet.  Then  look  out  when  Caribou  and 
DoctorPointscoiueinoue,  bearing  N.  37°W.,  when  sheer  immediately  to 
the  northward,  suHiciently  to  bring  Oak-Tree  Point  and  Doctor  Spit  in 
one,  bearing  S.  86°  W.  Keep  the  last-named  marks  accurately  in  one, 
or  closely  touching,  until  the  vessel  is  not  more  than  60  yards  from 
the  end  of  the  spit,  when  sheer  to  the  SW.  so  as  to  pass  its  south  ex- 
treme at  the  same  distance  into  the  harbor.  The  channel,  for  the  first 
J  mile  in  from  the  entrance,  is  not  more  than  180  yards  wide,  the  tide 
is  stronger  there,  and  the  bottom  not  quite  so  good  as  farther  in,  where 
the  channel  expands  to  260  yards  in  wid » h,  with  a  depth  of  from  4  to  7 
fathoms  over  mud  '  o«-tom. 

Tides. — The  diunial  inequality  causes  at  times  a  difference  of  nearly 
2  hours  in  the  two  tides  of  the  same  day,  and  also  several  feet  in  the 
height  of  the  water.  The  rise  of  the  highest  of  the  two  ordinary  spring 
tides  of  the  same  day  is  0  feet,  and  of  neap  tides  4  feet. 

Caribou  Channel. — The  safest  mode  of  running  through  this  chan- 
nel to  the  westward  is  to  strike  soundings  in  6  or  7  fathoms  on  the 
edge  of  the  shoal  water  off  Doctor  Island,  and  follow  it  to  the  NW. 
until  Mackenzie  Head  is  just  shut  in  behind  Logan  Point,  bearing 
8. 18°  E.  Then  steer  from  those  marks,  keeping  the  head  just  shut  in, 
and  they  will  lead  across  the  deep  water,  and  afterwards  along  the 
western  edge  of  the  Pictou  Island  bank  out  to  sea.  If  the  wind  were 
strong  from  the  SW.  with  an  ebb  tide,  it  would  be  preferable  to 
keep  on  the  weather  side  of  the  channel,  in  which  case  the  edge  of  the 


fi: 


'!! 


1 


198 


CAPE    ST.    GEORGE    TO    MIRAMICHI    RAY. 


shoal  water  off  Doctor  Island  should  be  followed  farther  to  the  NW. 
until  Logan  Point  is  only  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Doctor 
Point.  Those  points  in  one  lead  along  the  east  side  of  Caribou  Reef, 
and  in  4  fathoms  water.  Keep  Logan  Point  a  little  open,  and  it  will 
lead  clear  out  to  sea  in  not  less  than  4J  fathoms. 

The  same  marks  and  directions,  taken  in  reverse  order,  will  enable  a 
vessel  to  take  this  channel  from  the  northward  o.  westward,  it  being 
only  necessary  to  add  that  she  should  not  haul  to  the  eastward  until 
the  Hawksbill  is  well  shut  in  behind  Caribou  Point,  nor  open  out  the 
former  again  after  having  shut  it  in,  until  the  lighthouse  at  Pictou  is 
open  to  the  southward  of  Cole  Point ;  the  lighthouse  and  Cole  Point  in 
line,  bearing  S.  44°  W.,  being  the  mark  for  clearing  the  south  extreme 
of  the  Pictou  Island  bank  in  5  fathoms. 

Caribou  Reef,  of  large  stones,  which  dry  out  to  the  distance  of  600 
yards  from  the  shore,  is  very  dangerous,  the  deep  water  approaching 
nearly  close  to  its  north  point  and  eastern  side.  It  stretches  out  from 
Caribou  Point  to  the  northward  4  mile  to  the  3-fathoms  and  §  mile  to 
the  5-fathoms  line  of  soundings.  Doctor  Island  lies  to  the  southward 
of  Caribou  Point,  forming  two  entrances  into  Caribou  Harbor,  of  which 
the  northern,  between  two  sandy  spits,  is  800  yards  wide,  but  has  only 
4  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

Doctor  Reef,  also  very  dangerous,  extends  from  Doctor  Point  to  the 
eastward  IJ  miles,  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  shows  rocks  dry  at 
low  water  to  the  distance  of  i  mile.  To  the  southward  of  this  reef,  and 
%  mile  SB.  from  Doctor  Point,  lie  the  Seal  Kocks,  dry  at  low  tide. 

The  CoastfromWest  Gully  of  Caribou  toCape  John,is  nearly  straight, 
unbroken,  and  free  from  danger,  the  shoal  water  nowhere  extending 
beyond  }^  mile  off  shore.  Cliffs  of  clay  and  sandstone,  not  exceeding 
the  height  of  50  feet,  and  in  general  much  lower,  form  the  predomina- 
ting feature;  but  there  is,  nevertheless,  good  landing  for  boats  almost 
everywhere  in  fine  weather.  From  the  Caribou  Point  to  West  Gully» 
tne  coast  is  formed  by  the  northern  shore  of  Caribou  Island,  appearing 
from  a  distance  like  several  islands;  but  on  a  nearer  approach  the 
wooded  parts  are  found  to  be  joined  together  by  sand  bars. 

Amet  Sound  is  very  extensive,  affording  excellent  anchorage  for 
any  number  and  class  of  vessels.  MuUegash  Point  and  Cape  John,  its 
western  and  eastern  points  of  entrance,  are  more  than  4  miles  apart, 
but  there  are  detached  dangers  outside,  or  off  the  entrance,  which  re- 
quire to  be  described  before  directions  can  be  given  for  entering  by 
either  of  the  three  channels  which  they  form. 

Amet  Isle  is  very  small,  and  is  divided  into  two  parts,  of  which  the 
western  is  the  largest,  presenting  clay  cliffs  on  every  side,  excepting 
where  they  are  joined  together  by  a  sandy  neck.  It  is  flat  at  top,  bare 
of  trees,  covered  with  a  coarse  grass,  and  about  20  feet  above  the  sea 
at  high  water. 
This  islet  was  formerly  much  larger  than  at  present,  and  the  cliffs 


to  the  NW. 
d  of  Doctor 
Jaribou  Reef, 
1,  and  it  will 

will  enable  a 
^ard,  it  being 
istward  until 
open  out  the 
e  at  Pictou  is 
Cole  Point  in 
outh  extreme 

stance  of  600 
approaching 
ches  out  from 
and  %  mile  to 
lie  southward 
rbor,  of  which 
,  but  has  only 

>r  Point  to  the 

s  rocks  dry  at 

this  reef,  and 

low  tide. 

early  straight, 

ere  extending 

uot  exceeding 

he  predomina- 

r  boats  almost 

,0  West  Gully* 

md,  appearing 

approach  the 

rs. 

anchorage  for 
Cape  John,  its 
4  miles  apart, 
mce,  which  re- 
ar entering  by 

3,  of  which  the 

side,  excepting 

[at  at  top,  bare 

above  the  sea 

t,  and  the  cliffs 


AMET   SOUND. 


199 


still  continue  to  be  undermined  by  every  heavy  gale  and  high  tide ;  the 
frosts  also  aid  in  the  work  of  destruction,  so  that  the  time  can  not  be 
very  distant  when  thei-e  will  only  remain  a  reef  of  the  highly  inclined 
sandstone  which  at  present  forms  the  base  of  the  islet,  and  dries  out  to 
the  distance  of  about  400  yards,  excepting  on  the  southern  side,  where 
boats  can  generally  land  at  all  times  of  tide  (1860).  Shallow  water  ex- 
tends off  the  islet  600  yards  to  the  westward,  and  will  be  c!eared  in  not 
less  than  3^  fathoms,  if  the  English  church  steeple  at  the  river  John 
be  not  shut  in  behind  the  western  side  of  Cape  John ;  bat  vessels  of 
large  draft  should  stand  in  only  to  6  fathoms,  remembering  that  in 
every  other  direction  shallow  water  extends  from  the  island  to  far 
greater  distances. 

The  Amet  Shoals  are  rocky  with  very  irregular  soundings.  They 
extend  nearly  4  miles  from  the  islet  to  the  eastward,  and  also  to  the 
SE.  2  miles  towards  Cape  John.  In  both  directions  there  are 
rocky  patches,  with  no  more  than  5  or  6  feet  water,  a  long  mile  out  from 
the  islet;  at  a  greater  distance  than  2  miles  there  are  uot  less  than  16 
feet,  but  there  is  a  patch  with  that  depth  fully  3  miles  to  the  eastward 
of  the  islet.  To  clear  the  extreme  east  end  of  the  shoal  in  a  greater 
depth  than  4  fathoms.  Cape  John  must  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  34° 
W.  The  northern  side  of  these  shoals  is  very  steep,  and  should  not  be 
approached  in  a  large  ship,  especially  at  night,  to  a  less  depth  than  10 
fathoms.  Treen  Bluff  and  Saddle  Island  touching,  and  bearing  S.  84° 
W.,  lead  along  the  southern  side  in  2|  fathoms,  but  if  kept  distinctly 
open  will  clear  it  in  3^  fathoms. 

Waiigh  Shoal,  which  from  its  position  and  steepness  is  extremely 
dangerous,  is  a  rocky  bank,  nearly  IJ  miles  long  and  J  mile  broad,  with 
irregular  soundings  from  2  to  5  fathoms.  It  should  not  be  approacbed 
from  the  northward  nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms,  but  in  all  other 
parts  vessels  may  approach  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  NE. 
side  is  just  cleared  in  5  and  6  fathoms,  by  the  western  side  of  Cape 
John  and  the  English,  church  steeple  at  the  river  John  in  lim?,  bearing 
S.  4S°  E.  The  SE.  side  is  cleared  in  4  fathoms,  by  the  eastern  ex- 
tremes of  Mullegash  and  Chamber  Points  in  one,  bearing  S.  UP  W. 
All  these  objects  will  easily  be  made  out  excepting  Chamber  Point, 
which,  being  very  low,  is  at  timea  difficult  to  distinguish  from  the  high 
land  behind  it. 

The  Ea8:t8rn  Passage  into  the  sound,  between  the  Amet  Shoals  and 
Cape  John,  is  ^  mile  wide,  from  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms  water  on  either 
side,  with  irregular  soundings  from  3^  to  6  fathoms,  and  with  rock,  red 
sand,  broken  shells,  and  mud  bottom. 

It  is  difficult  to  carry  more  than  4  fathoms  through  at  low  water.  To 
safely  take  this  passage  from  tlie  eastward  with  a  fair  wind,  bring 
Cape  John  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  34°  W.,  or  bring  that  cape 
and  Brul^  Point  to  touch,  bearing  S.  40°  W.,  and  steer  for  them  till 
Treen  Bluff"  opens  to  the  southward  of  Saddle  Island,  when  alter  course 


L^  'I 


If 


I 


Si*    5 


i 


t' 


200 


CAPE    8T.    GEORQE   TO    MIRAMICHI    BAY. 


to  8.  62°  W.,  which  is  for  the  mouth  of  Tataniagouche  Bay,  and  the 
vessel  will  sail  nearly  through  the  middle  of  the  passage.  There  will 
be  no  danger  from  the  Amet  Shoals  if  Treen  Bluflf  be  kept  open  to  the 
southward  of  Saddle  Island;  nor  yet  from  the  shallow  water  off  Cape 
John,  if  it  be  not  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  4  fathoms,  or  at 
the  utmost  3^  fathoms. 

The  Middle  Passage  into  Amet  Sound  between  the  Waugh  Shoal 
and  Amet  Islet  is  a  long  mile  wide,  and  carries  6  to  10  fathoms  water, 
with  sand  and  mud  bottom.  An  excellent  leading  mark  for  running 
through  this  passage  with  a  fair  wind  is  Conn's  house  and  Brul6  Point 
in  line,  hearing  S.  9°  E. 

The  Western  Passage,  between  Saddle  Island  and  reef  and  the 
Waugh  Shoal,  is  a  mile  wide,  with  irregular  soundings  from  5  to  8J  fath- 
oms, the  lesser  depth  being  to  the  southward  of  Waugh  Shoal,  where 
the  bottom  is  rocky  and  uneven,. whilst  farther  westward  it  is  of  mud. 
If  bound  to  Brul«5  Harbor,  after  rounding  Saddle  Eeef,  steer  for 
Brul6  Point,  or  a  little  to  the  east  of  it,  until  the  mark  for  clearing  the 
NE.  side  of  the  Brul<5  Shoals,  namely,  the  English  church  steeple  in  the 
John  River,  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of  Long  Point  comes  on ; 
then  alter  course,  and  run  towards  those  marks  till  Brul6  Point  bears  S. 
340  W.,  when  haul  in  to  the  southward,  and  run  by  the  lead  along  the 
SE.  side  of  the  Brul6  Shoals  in  from  3J  to  3J  fathoms,  until  the 
anchorage  is  reached.  A  pilot,  or  a  previous  buoying  of  the  channel, 
would  be  necessary  to  take  the  vessel  into  the  harbor. 

If  bound  to  the  anchorage  off  the  bar  of  the  river  John,  it  is  only 
necessary  to  run  up  the  middle  of  John  Bay  till  the  water  shoals  to  3J 
fathoms,  which  is  as  near  as  a  large  ship  should  go,  although  distant  1 J 
miles  from  the  river's  mouth. 

Tides.— The  tidal  streams  are  very  weak  within  the  sound,  setting 
regularly  up  the  bays  and  rivers.  In  the  Western  Passage  both  tides 
in  general  set  fairly  through,  the  flood  about  west,  and  the  ebb  about 
east,  at  rates  never  exceeding  IJ  knots,  and  usually  much  less.  In  the 
Middle  Passage  the  ebb  sets  out  to  the  northward  and  eastward  less 
than  a  knot,  and  the  flood  to  the  westward  at  the  same  rate  over  Waugh 
Shoal.  Ill  the  Eastern  Passage  the  ebb  sets  out  to  the  NB.,  and  the 
flood  in  tlie  opposite  direction,  the  rates  varying  ftom  a  half  to  1^  knots. 
John  Bay  runs  in  nearly  4  miles  to  the  SE.  ftom  Cape  John  to 
Murphy  Point,  which  is  the  sandy  east  point  of  entrance  of  the  river. 
The  bay  is  free  from  detached  dangers,  but  the  shoals  extending  out 
from  its  shores  are  often  very  steep,  and  should  not  be  approached 
nearer  than  the  low- water  depth  of  3^  fathoms,  nor  without  due  can- 
tioa.  Sandy  shoals  o.'oupy  the  head  of  the  bay,  drying  out  nearly  i 
mile,  and  extending  IJ  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  river  to  the 
3-fatlioms  line. 

Cape  John,  the  northern  point  of  John  Bay,  will  be  easily  recog- 
nijsed  by  its  sharp  pointed  cliffs  of  sandstone  40  or  50  feet  high ;  and 


BRUL^  HARBOR  AND  SHOALS. 


201 


Bay,  and  the 
5.  There  will 
>t  open  to  the 
tter  off  Gape 
fathoms,  or  at 

(Vaugh  Shoal 
ithoms  water, 
:  for  running 
d  Brul6  Point 

reef  and  the 
tn  5  toS^fath- 
Shoal,  where 
it  is  of  mud. 
eef,  steer  for 
ir  clearing  the 
1  steeple  in  the 
int  comes  on ; 
Point  bears  S. 
lead  along  the 
ms,  until  the 
f  the  channel, 

hn,  it  is  only 
ir  shoals  to  3^ 
ugh  distant  1^ 

sound,  setting 
age  both  tides 
:he  ebb  about 
hless.  In  the 
eastward  less 
teoverWaugh 
I  NE.,  and  the 
ilf  to  1^  knots. 
Gape  John  to 
le  of  the  river, 
extending  out 
)e  approached 
thout  due  can- 
g  out  nearly  J 
e  river  to  the 

5  easily  recog- 
'eet  high ;  and 


by  two  high  rocks,  always  above  water,  on  the  inner  part  of  the  reef, 
which  extends  from  it  800  yards  to  the  NW.  This  reef  is  very  steep, 
especially  at  its  western  point,  where  there  are  nearly  7  fathoms  at 
low  water  quite  close  to  it,  being  a  greater  depth  than  occurs  anywhere 
else  near.  Off  the  northern  side  of  the  cape  shallow  water  extends 
nearly  ^  mile,  and  as  there  are  only  15  or  16  feet  close  within  the 
S-fathoms  mark,  large  vessels  should  not  approach  uearei  than  the  low- 
water  depth  of  4  or  3^  fathoms. 

The  river  John  has  only  one  foot  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand, 
and  an  irregular  depth,  from  3  to  11  feet,  in  a  very  narrow  channel  up 
to  the  bridge,  a  distance  of  nearly  a  mile.  Several  new  ships  are  built 
here  annually,  and  notwithstanding  the  shallow  bar,  are  taken  out 
Mght  and  moored  outside  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber  which  are 
brought  down  the  river.  The  vessels  lie  off  the  entrance  in  from  2J  to 
3^  fathoms,  over  mud  bottom;  and  although  the  bay  is  completely 
open  to  the  NW.,  are  considered  safe  in  the  summer  months. 

There  are  extensive  and  flourishing  settlements  on  either  side  of 
this  river.  The  English  church  will  be  known  by  its  spire,  about  J 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  bridge ;  and  the  chapel  by  its  cupola,  on 
the  opposite  or  westeru  bank,  J  mile  from  the  bridge  towards  the  river's 
mouth. 

Bruld  Peninsula. — Brul6  Peninsula  is  wooded,  rather  low,  and  united 
to  the  mainland  at  its  SW.  end  by  a  low  and  marshy  isthmus.  Pen- 
insula Point,  its  NW.  extreme,  has  a  reef  extending  from  it  800  yards 
to  the  NW.,  in  great  part  dry  at  low  water,  and  so  bolu  that  therf  is 
little  warning  by  the  lead.  Brule  Point  is  ij  miles  farther  to  the  east- 
ward, the  intermediate  northern  shore  of  the  peninsula  being  nearly 
straight,  and  of  clay  cliffs  8  or  10  feet  high,  the  whole  appearing  to  a 
vessel  in  the  otSug  like  a  low  island  in  the  center  of  Amet  Sound. 

The  Brul6  Shoals,  extending  1^  miles  to  the  north  from  Brul6  Point, 
are  rocky  with  irregular  soundings,  and  there  is  only  9  feet  water  not 
far  from  their  outer  edge.  The  north  and  NW.  sides  of  these  shoals 
should  be  approached  very  cautiously,  for  they  are  there  extremely 
sceep,  having  4  or  5  fathoms  close  to  the  edge,  and  no  good  clearing 
mark.  The  English  church  steeple  at  the  river  John  just  open  to  the 
northward  of  Long  Point,  bearing  S.  70°  E.,  leads  along  their  NE. 
side  in  3  fathoms ;  their  east  and  SE.  sides  may  safely  be  approached 
by  the  lead  to  3^  fathoms. 

Brule  Harbor  runs  in  within  Brul6  Peninsula,  2^  miles,  in  a  SW> 
direction,  and  is  nearly  a  mile  wide,  but  the  far  greater  part  of  this 
large  space  is  occupied  by  flats  of  mud  and  weeds.  There  are  14  feet 
on  the  bar  at  low  water,  and  11)  feet  for  a  short  distance  within,  but  the 
channel  soon  becomes  very  narrow  and  divided  into  several  branches. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  outside  the  bar,  in  3^  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  is  the  best  sheltered  of  any  in  the  sound,  and  a  ship  or  two 
usually  lie  there  to  take  in  lumber  every  year.    In  the  best  berth  Brul6 


is  a 


202 


CAPE    ST.    GEORGE    TO    MIRAMICHI   BAT. 


Point  Will  bear  N.  66°  W.  with  the  eastern  end  of  Saddle  Island  show- 
ing open  one  point  to  the  right  of  it,  and  Gape  John  N.  22°  E. 

Barachois  Harbor,  between  Chamber  and  Peninsula  Points,  is  the 
entrance  to  a  sniull  harbor  called  the  Barachois,  which  runs  in,  within 
Chamber  Point,  SW.  1^  miles,  and  is  then  contracted  to  a  very  nar- 
row channel  turning  to  the  SE.  into  a  shallow  lake  one  mile  long,  with 
steep  banks  and  an  island  at  its  head.  This  place,  which  is  seldom 
visited  by  shipping,  has  12  feet  over  its  bar,  and  14  feet  within  at  low 
water. 

Tatamagouche  Bay,  2^  miles  wide  at  entrance,  between  MuUegash 
Point  and  Brul6  Peninsula,  runs  in  7  miles  to  the  westward,  aiiordiug 
everywhere  good  anchorage  over  a  bottom  of  soft  mud,  but  with  insuffi- 
cient depth  of  water  for  large  ships  far  up  the  bay.  A  stranger  may 
safely  approach  to  the  low-water  depth  of  3  fathoms  in  the  outer  part  of 
the  bay,  and  to  2^  fathoms  farther  in,  but  in  entering  should  keep  well 
over  to  the  northward  to  avoid  the  BruI6  Shoals. 

Anchorage. — In  4  fathoms,  good  holding  ground  (mud),  with  Cape 
Tohn  N.  65°  E.,  Mullegash  Point  N.  47°  W. 

Tatamagouche  River,  in  the  SW.  corner  of  Tatamagouche  Bay, 
and  5  miles  from  its  entrance,  is  approached  by  a  very  narrow  channel 
through  the  flats,  obstructed  by  oyster  beds,  and  only  one  foot  deep  at 
low  water,  in  ordinary  spring  tides;  nevertheless  new  ships  of  consider- 
able burden  are  brought  down  it  occasionally.  The  principal  settlement 
in  the  bay,  containing  Mr.  Campbell's  shipbuilding  establishment,  and 
a  chapel,  stands  on  the  western  bank,  and  there  is  a  bridge  2  miles  from 
the  entrance  of  the  river. 

Several  vessels  visit  this  river  for  lumber  every  year;  they  anchor  off 
it  where  there  are  only  11  or  12  feet  at  low  water,  and  are  suffered  to 
ground  on  the  soft  mud,  as  the  tide  falls,  without  injury. 

Tatamagouche  and  Mullegash  are  now  large  villages. 

Mullegash  Point,  the  north  point  of  Tatamagouche  Bay,  is  one  mile 
to  the  southward  of  Saddle  Island;  shallow  water  extends  from  the 
one  to  the  other,  and  off  the  point  to  the  distance  of  a  long  i  mile. 

Saddle  Island  is  low,  wooded,  and  joined  to  the  shore  by  shoals  at 
low  water. 

Saddle  Reef  runs  out  from  the  east  point  of  the  island  one  mile  to 
the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  is  very  dangerous,  having  on  it  a  round- 
backed  rock  called  the  Wash-ball,  dry  at  low  water,  and  distant  k  »"•« 
from  the  island.  There  are  only  a  few  feet  of  water  much  farther  out. 
In  a]>proaching  this  reef  from  the  northward,  the  soundings  give  little 
warning,  but  an  excellent  leading  mark,  namely,  Treen  Bluff,  just  open 
to  the  northward  of  Saddle  Island,  and  bearing  S.  70°  W.,  just  clears  it 
in  4  fathoms.  The  lead  affords  the  only  guide  for  clearing  it  to  the 
eastward,  where  it  may  be  safely  approached  to  the  depth  of  0  fathoms 
with  care. 


Island  show- 
JOE. 

Poiuts,  is  the 
ana  in,  within 
to  a  very  nar- 
lile  long,  with 
ich  is  seldom 
trithiu  at  low 

en  Mullegash 
ard,  aiiordiug 
tt  with  insnffl- 
stranger  may 
i  outer  part  of 
oald  keep  well 

d),  with  Cape 

agoucbe  Bay, 
irrow  channel 
e  foot  deep  at 
ps  of  consider- 
pal  settlement 
)li8hmeut,  and 
^e  2  miles  from 

hey  anchor  off 
tre  suffered  to 


ay,  is  one  mile 
3nds  from  the 
ig  h  mile, 
e  by  shoals  at 

id  one  mile  to 
on  it  a  round- 
distant  li  mile 
ih  farther  out. 
ngs  give  little 
(luff,  just  open 
■.,ju8t  clears  it 
aring  it  to  the 
h  of  0  fathoms 


WALLACE   HARBOR. 


203 


Wallace  Harbor  is  the  finest  on  this  coast,  excepting  Pictou,  hav- 
ing 16  feet  over  its  bar  at  low  water  in  ordinary  springtides,  which  rise 
8  feet,  so  that  it  is  capable  of  admitting  vessels  of  large  draft.  Its  en- 
trance, 2i  miles  SW.  of  Oak  Island,  and  between  two  sandy  spits, 
named  Palmer  and  Caulfield  Points,  is  nearly  400  yards  wide  and  car- 
ries 6^  fathoms  water ;  but  the  approach  to  this  entrance,  over  the  bar 
and  throagh  the  bay  for  a  distance  of  3  miles,  is  by  a  crooked  channel, 
which,  although  nowhere  less  than  300  yards  wide,  is  difficult  without 
the  aid  of  buoys  or  sufficient  leading  marks.  The  services  of  the  pilots 
of  the  place  will,  therefore,  always  be  necessary  to  insure  safety. 

Wallace  stands  on  the  southern  shore,  1^  miles  within  the  entrance 
of  the  harbor.  The  land  rises  gradually  in  the  rear  to  the  summit  of  a 
ridge  extending  to  the  eastward,  and  attaining  the  elevation  of  400  feet. 
Opposite  Wallace  the  river  is  more  than  ^  mile  broad,  whilst  the  chan- 
nel between  the  flats  is  only  60  or  70  yards  wide,  and  with  5  or  6  fath- 
oms water.  At  the  distance  of  2  miles  higher  up  the  river  is  divided 
into  two  branches,  both  of  which  are  rendered  narrow  and  intricate  by 
oyster  beds  in  the  channel. 

Wallace,  under  the  name  of  Bamsheg,  was  formerly  visited  annually 
by  many  more  vessels  than  at  present,  the  supply  of  lumber  being 
then  much  greater ;  at  present  only  a  few  cargoes  are  embarked  and 
two  or  three  vessels  built  there  every  year.  There  are  no  fisheries  of 
consequence  in  a  commercial  point  of  view ;  the  salmon  and  gasperenx, 
or  alewives,  still  visit  the  river,  but  in  diminished  numbers,  and  a  few 
codfish  are  caught  off  Oak  Island  and  the  neighboring  coast  in  the 
months  of  May  and  June.  There  is  the  same  difficulty  in  obtaining  a 
large  supply  of  fresh  water  at  Wallace  as  at  Pugwash ;  it  is  obtained 
from  wells  and  springs,  .vhich  boats  can  only  approach  at  high  water. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  nn  agent. 

Ship  Channel.— Oak  Island  Bar  is  of  sand,  and  extends  from  Oak 
Island  nearly  2J  miles  to  the  southward  towards  Gravois  Point,  which 
maybe  recognized  by  its  being  the  highest  part  of  the  clay  and  sandstone 
cliffs,  and  by  its  bearing  and  distance  from  the  east  end  of  Oak  Island, 
namely,  S.  *-'8o  E.  3  miles.  Within  or  to  the  westward  of  the  bar  the 
whole  bay  is  shallow,  excepting  the  Ship  or  Wallace  Channel  leading 
to  Wallace  Harbor.  The  outer  or  eastern  side  of  this  bar  may  be 
safely  approached  by  the  lead  tift-  (fhe  depth  of  4  fathoms. 

The  Ship  Channel  is  fully  600  ^l^ds  wide  at  its  entrance,  between 
the  south  point  of  the  bar  and  the  snal  which  stretches  out  800  yards 
from  Gravois  Point,  and  3i  fathoms  i»it  at  low  water.  Froitf  the  en- 
trance the  channel  runs  to  the  northwam  and  westw^ml,  curving  round 
Horton  Shoal,  and  between  it  and  the  shallow  water  to  the  northward, 
which  is  continuous  from  the  bar  to  Mullin  Point. 

The  Horton  Spit,  of  low  sand,  inclosing  a  marsh,  extending  to  the 
northward  from  Horton  Point,  will  easily  be  recognized  by  a  vessel 
entering  the  Ship  Channel.    The  northern  end  of  thisspit  isquite  bold, 


WmfllM»» 


204 


CAPE  ST.  GEORGE  TO  MIRAMICHI  BAY. 


the  cbauiiel  passiug  close  to  it,  aud  tbence  westward  ^  of  a  mile,  to  the 
entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Directions. — Approaching  from  the  northward  pass  Oak  Island  at 
a  distance  of  fully  ^  mile,  or  in  5  fathoms  water,  to  avoid  the  reef  ofif  its 
east  point.  Approaching  from  the  eastward,  Treen  Bluff  (the  cliffy 
point  2^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Gravois  Point)  must  be  passed  at  an 
equal  distance  or  depth  to  avoid  the  Treen  Reef,  which  is  sandstone, 
and  stretches  out  ^  mile  from  the  bluff  to  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings; 
the  north  extremes  of  Saddle  Island  and  Cape  John  in  one,  bearing  S. 
87°  E.,  lead  to  the  northward  of  it  in  4  fathoms.  In  either  case,  ap- 
proach the  shore  about  i  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Gravois  Point,  taking 
care  not  to  bring  the  east  end  of  Oak  Island  to  bear  less  to  the  west- 
ward than  N.  34^  W.,  until  the  south  side  of  Saddle  Island  is  only  one 
degree  open  to  the  northward  of  Treen  Bluff,  bearing  N.  82°  B. 

Steer  now  S.  82°  W.,  taking  all  possible  care  to  keep  the  island  «8 
nearly  as  possible  one  degree  open,*  but  remembering  that  the  lead 
must  be  principally  depended  upon  to  guide  the  vessel  along  the  edge  of 
the  shallow  water  off  the  mainland,  in  SJ  or  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  or  a 
corresponding  depth  at  other  times  of  tide,  until  Smith  Point  (the  east- 
ern extreme  of  the  mainland  outside  or  to  the  northward  of  Oak  Island), 
appears  through  the  middle  of  the  opening  in  the  trees  of  Oak  Island, 
and  over  the  low  and  narrow  neck  which  joins  the  southwestern  part  to 
the  rest  of  the  island,  aud  bearing  N.  31°  W.  Then  alter  course  to  N. 
66°  W.,  and  a  run  of  J  mile  will  place  the  vessel  within,  or  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  south  point  of  the  bar,  in  about  16  feet  at  low  water. 

Let  the  course  be  now  immadiately  changed  to  N.  22°  W.  for  another 
i  mile,  aud  when  Palmer  Poinii:  opens  out  to  the  northward  of  the  Hor- 
ton  Spit,  bearing  west,  steer  N.  70°  W.,  and  the  water  will  soon  deepen 
to  4  and  5  fathoms  with  mud  bottom,  affording  tolerably  safe  anchor- 
age under  shelter  of  the  bar,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  heavy  weather. 
But,  if  it  be  wished  to  proceed  to  the  harbor,  let  the  NW.  course  be 
continued  for  ^  mile,  and  Gauiaeld  Point  will  open  out  to  the  northward 
of  the  Horton  Spit ;  aud,  immediately  afterwards.  Smith  Point  will 
open  out  to  the  westward  of  the  west  extreme  of  the  trees  ou  Oak  Is- 
land, when  the  vessel  must  be  kept  gradually  away  to  the  westward,  and 
towards  Palmer  Point,  so  as  to  run  along  the  northern  edge  of  Horton 
Shoal,  which  can  generally  be  seen  until  off  the  Horton  Spit  at  the  dis- 
tance of  200  yards,  whence  the  course  is  S.  79°  W.  for  f  mile  to  the 
harbor's  mouth. 

In  entering  the  harbor  keep  two-thirds  Oi  t^  e  way  over  towards  the 
northern,  or  Palmer  Point,  which  is  quite  bold,  to  avoid  the  shoal  water 
extending  100  yards  from  Caulfleld  Point. 


•This  mark  is  given  as  only  better  than  none,  for  it  is  not  easy  to  keep  the  island 
ao  nearly  one  degree  open  as  is  required.  If  the  island  and  bluff  be  brought  to  touch, 
the  vessel  will  be  ashore  on  Gravois  Reef,  aud  if  they  be  opened  to  the  extent  of  2 
degrees  only,  she  will  be  on  the  south  point  of  the  bar. 


a  mile,  to  the 

3ak  Island  at 
he  reef  ofif  its 
iflf  (the  cliffy 

I  passed  at  an 
is  sandstone, 
of  soundings; 
le,  bearing  S. 
ther  case,  ap- 
point, taking 

i  to  the  west- 
iid  is  only  one 
82°  E. 

the  island  «8 
that  the  lead 
ag  the  edge  of 
ow  water,  or  a 
oint  (the  east- 
f  Oak  Island), 
)f  Oak  Island, 
estern  part  to 
r  coarse  to  N. 
)r  to  the  west- 
V  water. 
y.  for  another 
fd  of  the  Hor- 

II  soon  deepen 
ly  safe  anohor- 
leavy  weather. 
IW.  course  be 
the  northward 
th  Point  will 
es  on  Oak  Is- 
westward,  and 
dge  of  Horton 
}pit  at  the  dis- 
'  f  mile  to  the 

)r  towards  the 
the  shoal  water 


to  keep  the  island 
brought  to  touch, 
o  the  extent  of  2 


FOX   HARBOR — PUGWA8H   ROAD. 


205 


Anchorage — Anchor  about  500  yards  within  the  entrance,  where 
the  channel  is  300  yards  wide,  and  carries  from  3  to  6  fathoms,  with 
mud  bottom.  On  either  side,  flats  of  stiff  red  clay,  dry  at  low  water, 
extend  to  the  shore,  and  render  the  lauding  difficult  when  the  tide  is 
out.  At  the  distance  of  1,200  yards  within  the  entrance  a  middle 
ground  commences,  and  diminishes  the  breadth  of  the  channel  to  100 
yards.  Nearly  abreast  the  eastern  end  of  this  middle  ground  there  is 
a  narrow  channel  through  the  flats  and  up  Lazy  Bay,  which  runs  in 
more  than  a  mile  to  the  SE.,  and  has,  on  the  southern  shore  near  its 
head,  cliffs  of  gypsum  30  feet  high. 

Tides. — The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  is  greatest  in  the  entrance  of 
the  harbor,  and  there  it  does  not  exceed  IJ  knots  during  the  summer 
months ;  whilst  outside,  in  the  Ship  Channel,  it  is  usually  from  l^  to 
one  knot.  The  ebb,  however,  may  be  somewhat  stronger  m  spring  alter 
the  melting  of  the  winter's  snows. 

Fox  Harbor  runs  in  3  or  4  miles  to  the  NVV.,  with  a  channel 
through  flats  of  tenacious  red  clay  and  weeds,  which  are  nearly  dry  at 
low  water.  There  are  3  or  4  fathoms  water  in  this  channel,  but  a  depth 
of  8  or  9  feet  is  all  that  can  be  carried  over  the  bar  at  low  water  in 
ordinary  spring  tides. 

Oak  Island  is  low,  for  the  most  part  wooded,  and  about  a  mile  long, 
having  Jerry  Island,  small  and  wooded,  a  long  ^  mile  to  the  westward 
of  it.  and  on  the  north  side  of  Fox  Bay,  just  within  Mackenzie  Point. 

The  Coast  from  Mackenzie  Point  to  Pugwash  Point  is  unbroken,  and 
for  the  most  part  composed  of  clay  and  sandstone  cliffs,  of  the  height 
of  50  feet,  from  which  the  land  rises  to  the  summit  of  a  ridge  150  feet 
high.  Mackenzie  Point  is  separated  from  Oak  Island  by  sandbars 
and  a  gully  for  boats  nearly  dry  when  the  tide  is  out. 

Pugwash  Road,  in  the  entrance  of  Pugwash  Bay,  affords  excellent 
anchorage,  in  from  16  to  19  feet  at  low  water,  with  sand  and  clay  bot- 
tom, being  sheltered  by  Phillip  Bar  and  Lewis  Reef  from  westerly,  and 
by  Pugwash  Reef  from  easterly  winds.  This  anchorage  is  exposed  be- 
tween N.  NW.  and  N.  NB.,  but  the  shallow  water  outside  prevents  any 
Hca  from  coming  in  sufficient  to  endanger  a  vessel  daring  the  summer 
mouths. 

Directions. — To  run  for  Pugwash  Road  from  the  northward,  the 
vessel  being  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms  water,  bring  the  English  church- 
steeple  at  Pugwash  so  as  to  be  seen  over  and  only  just  within  the  west 
extreme  of  the  low  cliff  of  Fishing  Point  (the  east  point  of  the  bay) 
bearing  8.  35°  E. 

Run  towards  those  marks,  taking  care  not  to  open  out  the  church  in 
the  least  to  the  westward  of  the  point  until  Bergeman  Point  (the  south 
point  of  entrance  of  the  river  Phillip)  bears  8. 34°  W.,  or  until  the  depth 
decreases  to  3J  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  vessel  will  then  be  close  off 
the  NW.  end  of  the  Pugwash  Reef,  and  must  steer  south  for  f  mile, 
wheii  she  will  be  in  from  16  to  19  feet  at  low  water,  with  clay  bottom. 


206 


CAPE   ST.    GEORGE    TO   MIBAMICIII   BAT. 


Anchorage. — Directly  in  the  line  joining  Bergeman  and  Pugwash 
Points,  and  with  Fishing  Point  N.  85°  E.,  distant  nearly  J  mile.  This 
is  the  best  anchorage ;  but  vessels  may  lie  J  mile  farther  in  to  the  south- 
ward, or  close  off  the  bar,  in  14  feet  at  low  water.  Still  farther  in  the 
bay  is  all  shoal,  excepting  the  narrow  channel,  which  curves  round  its 
eastern  side  and  leads  to  the  harbor. 

To  run  for  Pugwash  Road  from  the  eastward,  the  vessel  being  in  more 
than  the  low-water  depth  of  5  fathoms,  bring  Bergeman  Point  to  bear 
8.  34°  W.,  and  steer  for  it  until  the  church  opens  out  to  the  westward 
of  Fishing  Point,  when  immediately  alter  course  to  south  and,  having 
ran  nearly  J  mile,  anchor  in  the  same  berth  as  before  directed. 

Pugwash  Harbor,  at  the  head  of  the  bay  and  entrance  of  the  river 
of  the  same  name,  is  small  but  quite  secure,  and  has  more  than  sufficient 
depth  of  water  for  any  vessel  that  can  pass  the  bar,  on  which  the  depth 
is  14  feet  at  low  water,  in  ordinary  spring  tides.  The  bar  is  about  i 
mile  within  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  and  a  crooked  channel,  from  100 
to  200  yards  wide,  and  through  flats  of  sand  and  weeds,  for  the  dis- 
tance of  one  mile,  leads  from  it  to  the  harbor's  mouth.  No  directions 
would  avail  for  this  channel,  and  the  assistance  of  one  of  the  able  pilots 
of  the  place  is  indispensable,  and  will  be  readily  obtained  in  answer  to 
the  usual  signal. 

The  town  of  Pugwash,  with  its  wharves  and  small  wooden  English 
church,  stands  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  Imme- 
diately within  there  is  a  fine  little  land-locked  basin,  with  a  depth  of 
nearly  7  fathoms,  in  which  vessels  lie  moored  in  security,  to  take  in 
cargoes  of  lumber  that  are  brought  down  the  river. 

Pugwash  River,  immediately  within  the  harbor,  expands  into  a 
small  lake,  1 J  miles  long  and  one  mile  wide.  On  the  western  side  the 
narrow  channel  of  Lime  Creek  leads  to  quarries  of  limestone,  unfit  for 
building,  but  which  supply  Prince  Edward  Island  as  well  as  the  neigh- 
boring country  with  lime.  The  river  continues  navigable  for  small 
vessels  about  2  miles  above  the  lake,  and  for  boats  to  a  distance  of  7 
miles  from  its  entrance. 

Water. — There  is  no  good  watering  place  at  Pugwash,  the  supply 
from  wells,  or  from  springs  which  are  frequently  dry  in  summer,  being 
too  limited  for  the  wants  of  a  ship  of  war. 

Tides. — The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams,  which  is  greatest  in  the  en- 
trance of  the  harbor,  do3s  not  exceed  2  knots,  unless  it  may  be  the  ebb 
in  the  spring  after  the  melting  of  the  winter's  snows ;  in  Pugwash  Road 
it  seldom  exceeds  a  knot. 

Phillip  River  enters  the  sea  immediately  to  the  southward  of  Lewis 
Head,  and  between  the  latter  and  Bergeman  Point.  Its  mouth  is  f 
mile  wide,  but  a  dangerous  bar  of  sand  and  stones  stretches  across  it, 
80  as  to  leave  only  a  narrow  and  tortuous  channel  of  8  feet  at  low  water, 
through  which  the  new  vessels,  built  up  the  river  and  brought  down 
light,  are  taken  with  difficulty  on  their  way  to  Pugwash,  where  they 


PU0WA8H  HARBOR — BAY  VERTE. 


207 


and  Pugwash 
T  ^  mile.    This 
Q  to  the  south- 
farther  in  the 
irves  round  its 

.  being  in  more 

Point  to  bear 

the  westward 

h  and,  having 

Bcted. 

ce  of  the  river 
than  sufficient 
tiich  the  depth 
>ar  is  about  ^ 
inel,  from  100 
3,  for  the  dis- 
No  directions 
the  able  pilots 
d  in  answer  to 

)oden  English 
arbor.  Imme- 
ith  a  depth  of 
ty,  to  take  in 

xpands  into  a 
estern  side  the 
(tone,  un&t  for 
1  as  the  ncigh- 
bble  for  small 
a  distance  of  7 

sh,  the  supply 
summer,  being 

test  in  the  en- 
lay  be  the  ebb 
?ugwash  Road 

ward  of  Lewis 
[ts  mouth  is  |[ 
<;hes  acrosM  it, 
t  at  low  water, 
brought  down 
ih,  where  they 


take  iu  their  cargoes,  and  where  also  the  lumber  r  ^  produce  brought 
down  this  river  are  taken  to  be  shipiied.  Within  t  ,  bar  a  depth  of  12 
feet  at  low  water  can  be  carried  ui)  the  river  to  the  distance  of  5  miles, 
and  there  are  in  some  places  4  and  5  fathoms ;  the  chuuiiel,  between 
flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  being,  in  some  parts,  not  more  than  40  or  50 
yards  wide.  Boats  can  easily  ascend  about  9  miles,  at  which  distaijce 
the  tide  ends,  and  there  is  a  slight  rapid. 

Pugwash  Reef  extends  ^  mile  to  the  westward  from  Pugwash  Point, 
and  dries  out  about  half  that  distance.  There  are  rocky  patches,  with 
11  and  12  feet  water,  i^  mile  off  the  point  to  the  northward;  and  others 
farther  to  the  eastward,  a  full  mile  out  from  the  shore ;  moreover,  there 
is  uneven  rocky  ground,  with  a  less  depth  than  4  fathoms,  2  miles  off 
shore,  and  which  renders  it  unsafe  for  a  stranger  in  a  vessel  of  large 
draft  to  go  within  the  depth  of  5  fathoms. 

Lewis  Reef  extends  NE.  2^  miles  from  Lewis  Head;  its  outer  part 
is  composed  of  detached  rocky  patches,  on  which  there  are  from  14  to 
18  feet  water,  with  a  greater  depth  between  them;  but  the  inner  part 
is  shallow. 

Bay  Verte  is  9  miles  wide  across  its  entance,  from  Indian  Point  iu 
New  Brunswick  to  Cold  Spring  Head  in  Nova  Scotia,  but  contracts  to 
the  breadth  of  2J  miles  near  its  head.  It  is  11  miles  deep,  and  sep- 
arates the  two  provinces  w  hich  have  just  l>een  named,  their  boundary 
continuing  across  the  isthmus  from  the  head  of  Bay  Verte  to  Cumber- 
land Basin,  a  distance  of  about  11  miles.  This  isthmus  connecting 
Nova  Scotia  with  the  rest  of  North  America  is  low  and  affords  an  ad- 
vantageous level  for  the  construction  of  a  ship  railroad  being  built  from 
Amherst  to  Tignish. 

There  are  thriving  settlements  on  either  side  of  Bay  Verte,  and  espe- 
cially at  its  head,  where  extensive  tracts  of  meadow  land  have  been 
formed  by  diking  out  the  tide. 

The  River  Tignish  is  the  most  considerable  stream  in  Bay  Verte, 
which  it  enters  on  the  south  side,  near  its  head.  It  has  only  3  feet 
depth  of  water,  in  a  very  narrow  channel,  when  the  tide  is  out;  and  it 
is  approached  by  a  narrow  channel,  carrying  3  to  7  feet,  through  flats 
of  mud  and  weeds,  which  dry  out  a  mile  from  its  mouth.  The  spring 
tides  rise  9  feet,  and  the  neap  tides  5  feet. 

Spear  Shoal,  having  a  patch  of  rock  with  10  feet  least  water  near  its 
east  end,  and  from  15  to  18  feet  in  other  parts,  is  a  bank  of  sand  and 
stones,  resting  on  sandstone,  about  a  mile  long,  in  an  east  and  west 
direction,  and  ^  mile  broad.  From  the  shoalest  part  Cape  Spear  bears 
N.  56°  W.  15  miles,  and  Indian  Point  N.  2°  W.  24  miles.  The  lead  gives 
little  warning  in  approaching  this  dangerous  shoal  from  the  eastward, 
on  which  side  there  are  from  3f  to  4J  fathoms  close-to;  but  vessels  will 
avoid  it  by  coming  into  no  less  water  than  4J  fathoms,  as  they  pass  to 
the  southward  of  it. 


208 


CAPE   ST.    GEORGE    TO   MIRAMICHI    BAY. 


Heart  Shoal,  lying  about  a  raile  westward  of  the  Spear  Shoal,  and 
S.  14°  W.  1:^  miles  from  Cape  Spear,  has  9  feet  least  water  and  15  feet 
between  it  and  the  shore ;  but  it  lies  within  the  S-fathoms  line  of  sound- 
ings. 

Laurent  Shoal,  of  rock  and  sand,  with  10  feet  least  wiiter,  is  about 
^  mile  long  by  half  that  breadth.  From  the  shoalesit  part  Cape  St. 
Laurent  bears  N.  57°  VV.  2iJ  miles,  Ephraim  Island  N.  70^  W.,  Indian 
Point  N.  40°  E.,  and  Cold  Spring  Head  8.  5°  W..  This  shoal  is  also 
bold  on  the  east  side,  where  there  are  4^  fathoms  close  to. 

Aggermore  Rock,  with  18  feet  least  water,  an«l  boiring  N. 28°  H.  2f 
miles  from  Cold  Spring  head,  is,  like  the  Laurent  Shoal,  merely  om>  of 
the  shallowest  points  of  an  extensive  rocky  bank,  which  is  thinly  cov- 
ere<l  with  mud  and  sand,  and  which  extends  out  from  Cape  St.  Laurent 
and  Kphraim  Island,  in  a  SK.  direction,  so  as  to  leave  a  deep  channel 
about  2  miles  wide,  between  it  and  Cold  Spring  Head.  At  low  water 
not  more  than  19  feet  could  bo  safely  red  oned  upon,  in  running  be- 
tween the  Aggermore  Rock  and  the  LiiurofH.  «hoal,  or  between  the  lat- 
ter and  the  Ephraim  Banks  extending  oft'  tlie  iiortliern  whore. 

DirectionB.— Vessels  bound  up  the  liny  Verte  should  keei)  the  Nova 
Scotia  coast  aboard,  running  up  in  C^  aiul  7  fatho>iis  water  till  they  ar- 
rive off  Cold  Spring  Head,  where  at  the  distance  of  about  l.V  miles 
from  the  shore  they  will  find  the  water  deepen  to  8  or  9,  and  even  nearly 
to  19  fathoms,  as  they  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  banks  and  shoals 
which  have  been  described.  After  passing  Cold  Spring  ileaa  about  3 
miles  the  depth  of  water  dt !  aases  to  less  than  5  fathoms,  and  con- 
tinues to  shoal  gradually,  with  mad  and  sand  bottom,  to  the  head  of 
the  bay.  The  Boss  Spit,  which  extends  ij  mile  from  the  south  shore  be- 
tween Boss  and  Jackson  Points,  and  3^  miles  to  the  NW.  from  Cold 
Spring  Head,  is  dangerous,  as  it  dries  out  to  its  edge,  and  is  so  steep-to 
that  there  are  17  feet  water  close  to  its  outer  point.  Vessels  should  be 
careful  not  to  go  into  less  water  than  3J  fathoms  until  they  are  past  this 
sand  spit.  Farther  up  the  bay  there  is  nothing  in  the  way,  excepting 
two  patches  of  stone  with  3  and  5  feet  water  at  the  distance  of  J  and  J 
mile  northward  of  Tignish  Head. 

Tormentine  Reefs  are  also  extremely  dangerous,  and  are  rendered 
doubly  80  by  the  strong  tides.  They  extend  off  Indian  Point  rather 
more  than  3  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  there  is  rocky  ground  with  4 
fathoms  fully  a  mile  farther  off  shore.  The  part  of  these  reefs  which 
dries  at  low  water  is  very  small,  and  bears  N.  85°  E.  2^  miles  from  In- 
dian Point  It  lies  about  309  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  line  join- 
ing Cape  Spear  and  the  south  side  of  Ephraim  Island,  and  the  whole 
of  that  island  open  to  the  southward  of  Cape  St.  Laurent  will  lead 
more  than  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it.  The  only  sufficient  guides, 
therefore,  are  the  lead  and  the  chart. 

Caution.— Vessels  running  through  Northumberland  Straifat  night 
or  at  any  time  without  a  commanding  breeze  should  not  approach  this 


)ear  Shoal,  and 
er  and  15  feet 
IS  line  of  sound- 

wiiter,  is  abont 
part  Cape  St. 
70O  W.,  Indian 
in  Hlioal  iH  also 
to. 

iiig  N.  280  H.  2f 
,  niorely  one  of 
h  is  tliiiilj'  cov- 
ape  St.  Lanreut 
a  deep  cliaunel 
At  low  water 
in  riinuiiijj  be- 
)etweeii  the  lat- 
Hliore. 

I  keep  the  Nova 
iter  till  they  ar- 
about  1  .V  miles 
and  even  nearly 
nks  and  shoals 
g  ileaa  about  3 
jhoins,  and  cou- 
,  to  the  head  of 
I  south  shore  be- 
NW.  from  Cold 
rid  is  so  steep- to 
jssels  should  be 
ley  are  past  this 
way,  excepting 
bance  of  J  and  J 

lid  are  rendered 
iiU  Point  rather 
{  ground  with  4 
lese  reefs  which 
f  miles  from  In- 
»f  the  line  join- 
,  and  the  whole 
uirent  will  lead 
ufficient  guides, 

I  Strait'at  night 
>t  approach  this 


BAY    VERTE JOURIMAIN    SHOALS. 


m 


reef  from  any  direction  between  north  and  east  nearer  than  9  fathom- 
water,  for  the  tlood  tide  sets  over  it  to  the  southward,  in  the  Bay  Verte, 
at  the  rate  of  3  knots,  causing  a  great  rippling  over  the  part  that  dries, 
and  generally  indicating  its  position.  Nearly  midway  between  the  dry 
part  of  the  reef  and  Indian  Point  there  is  a  patch  of  rocks  with  7  feet 
at  low  water.  Small  craft  carry  a  depth  of  2^  fathoms  at  low  tide 
through  between  that  and  Indian  Point,  and  ofteu  take  shelter  under 
the  latter  in  northerly  winds ;  but  large  vessels  wishing  to  do  the  same 
must  run  around  outside  the  whole  of  the  reef,  and  will  And  the 
soundings  in  the  chart  a  sufficient  guide. 

Directions.— To  run  through  the  2^  fathom  channel  between  Indian 
Point  and  dry  part  of  the  Tormentiue  Keefs  bring  Indian  Point  and 
Cape  Spear  in  one,  bearing  SVV.,  and  run  towards  them  until  the  east 
extreme  of  Cape  Tormentiue  touches  the  west  side  of  the  outer  Jouri- 
main  Island,  bearing  NW.;  then  alter  course  and  run  to  the  8E.,  with 
thfe  last  named  marks  on  astern,  until  the  water  deepens  to  5  fathoms 
at  low  tide,  when  the  vessel  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  reefs. 

Cape  Tormentine  is  a  name  sometimes  api)]ied  to  the  whole  and 
sometimes  to  different  points  of  the  great  headland  which  forms  the 
eastern  extremity  of  New  Brunswick  within  the  gulf,  and  which  sepa- 
rates  Bay  Verte  from  the  rest  of  Northumberland  Strait.  But  it  is  here 
restricted  to  the  comparatively  high  central  point,  to  which  the  inhab- 
itants  also  seem  to  confine  it ;  and  again,  in  conformity  with  their  usage, 
as  well  as  for  precision  of  description,  the  names  of  Indian  Point  and 
Cape  Jourimain  have  been  adopted  for  the  southern  and  northern 
extremities  of  this  promeutory. 

Jourimain  Shoals  are  extremely  dangerous  to  vessels  running  at 
night  without  their  leads  goiug ;  they  commence  at  Peacock  Cove,  off 
which  there  is  a  patch  of  3^  fathoms  at  2  miles  off  shore.  They  extend 
from  Cape  Jourimain  I J  miles  to  the  NVV.,  and  there  is  a  patch  of  4 
fathoms  1^  miles  north  from  the  same  point.  They  are  of  sandstone, 
thinly  covered  with  sand,  and  their  SB.  point,  a  narrow  ridge  with  only 
6  feet  at  low  water  and  distant  IJ  miles  from  the  shore,  is  the  most 
dangerous,  because  the  boldest  part  of  the  shoals.  It  should  not  be 
approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  in  the  night  time,  but 
farther  westward  the  shoals  may  be  ueared  with  proper  caution  to  6 
fathoms  at  low  water. 

Anchorage.— To  the  southward  of  the  Jourimain  Shoals,  and  between 
them  and  the  Tormentine  Reefs,  there  is  good  anchorage,  with  westerly 
winds,  in  from  5  to  6  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  of  sand,  with  clay 
underneath. 

Little  and  Great  Shemogue  Risers  are  only  fit  for  boats  and  very 
small  vessels,  having  narrow  and  intricate  channels  over  shifting  bars 
of  sand. 

Anchorage.— There  is  good  anchorage,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  sandy  bot- 
tom,  oft"  these  rivers,  in  the  bay  between  Cape  Bald  and  Cape  Bruin. 
5314 14 


210 


CAPE    8T.    OEORGE   TO    MIRAMICIII    BAY. 


Cape  Fillet  Church,  situated  1^  miles  south  westward  of  Cape  Bald, 
and  bearing  S.  58°  E.,di8tant  lllj  miles  from  Cnssi^s  Point  Lighthouse, 
has  a  square  tower,  and  is  a  conspicuous  marlc  from  seaward. 

Kouchibouguet  and  Abouchagan  Rivers,  in  the  sandy  bay  be- 
tween (Jai)e  Bald  and  Bouleaux  Point,  and  «i  miles  eastward  of  Shediac, 
are  small,  and  can  oidy  be  entered  by  boats  at  high  water. 

Off  Bouleaux  Point  a  reef  extends  more  than  a  mile  from  the  shore; 
but  Cape  Bald,  which  is  of  sandstone  cliff,  40  feot  high  and  11  miles 
eastward  of  Shediac  Island,  is  bold,  and  may  safely  be  approached  by 
the  lead  to  the  depth  of  5  fathoms. 

Shediac  Bay.— Shediac  Point  is  a  low  sandstone  cliff,  nearly  4  miles 
to  the  southward  of  Cocagne.  The  Grandigue  Bank,  with  from  l4  to 
18  feet  water,  extends  off  it  to  the  distance  of  ti  miles,  having  the  least 
water  near  its  outer  edge.  Thin  extensive  rocky  bank  is  dangerous  to 
vessels  of  large  draft,  which,  however,  will  pass  outside  it  if  they  do 
not  approach  the  shore  nearer  than  the  depth  of  5  fathoms  at  low  water. 
Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  under  Cassias  Point,  in  north 
and  northwest  winds,  in  17  or  18  feet,  mud.bottom. 

Medea  Rock. —The  Medea  Hock  is  very  small,  with  0  feet  least  water. 
There  are  3  and  4  fathonis  water  around  it  at  the  distance  of  200  yards, 
excepting  to  the  southward,  in  which  direction  there  are  several  rocky 
patches,  with  12  feet  water,  between  it  and  the  shore,  which  is  distant 
from  it  nearly  1^  miles. 

The  can  buoy  on  Medea  Rock  is  colored  red  and  black  in  horizontal 
bands,  and  may  be  left  on  either  hand  in  entering. 

The  Zephyr  Rock  is  also  very  small,  with  9  feet  least  water,'and  lies 
rather  more  than  a  mile  west  of  the  Medea  Rock. 

The  can  buoy  on  Zephyr  Rock  is  colored  red  and  black  in  horizontal 
bands,  and  may  be  left  on  either  hand  in  entering. 

The  marks  used  for  clearing  Medea  and  Zephyr  Rocks  are  the  leading 
lights  and  beacons  on  Shediac  Island  and  on  the  railway  wharf,  Point 
du  Chf'ue,  which  lead  in  13  feet  least  water  to  the  railway  wharf. 
Grandigue  Church,  in  Une  with  north  extreme  of  Shediac  Island,  bear- 
ing N.  54°  W.,  leads  westward  of  Zephyr  and  Medea  Rocks. 

Shediac  Harbor  is  the  easiest  of  access  and  egress  on  this  part  of 
the  coast,  being  the  only  one  which  a  vessel  in  distress  can  safely  ran 
for,  as  a  harbor  of  refuge.  It  is  superior  to  Buctoucbe  and  Cocagne, 
in  the  depth  of  water  over  the  bar,  and  it  is  also  much  more  extensive 
within  than  the  latter ;  the  space  in  which  shipping  may  be  moored,  in 
from  12  to  17  feet  at  low  water,  being  %  mile  long,  and  \  mile  wide. 

The  harbor  is  unsafe  with  the  northeasterly  gales  of  autumn,  in- 
stances having  occurred  when  all  vessels,  whether  at  anchor  or  moored 
to  the  wharf,  were  driven  on  shore ;  but,  except  on  these  rare  occa- 
sions, it  is  a  safe  harbor. 

The  wharf  at  Point  du  Chene  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
another  pier,  making  with  the  old  pier  a  safe  dock,  and  from  the  latter 


of  Capu  Bald, 
t  Li^ht-house, 
rani. 

aiuly  bay  be- 
nl  of  Shediac, 
r. 

0111  the  Hhoro ; 

iind  11  miles 

.pprouched  by 

nearly  4  miles 
ith  from  1 4  to 
iviii^;  the  least 

dangerous  to 
1  it  if  tlioy  do 
s  at  low  water. 
Point,  in  north 

set  least  water. 
e  of  200  yards, 
I  several  rocky 
hich  is  distant 

k  in  horizontal 

water, 'and  lies 

^  in  horizontal 

are  the  leading 
,y  wharf,  Point 
railway  wharf. 
c  Island,  bear- 
>cks. 

on  this  part  of 
can  safely  ran 
e  and  Cocagne, 
more  extensive 
f  be  moored,  in 
mile  wide, 
of  autumn,  in- 
chor  or  moored 
lese  rare  occa- 

the  addition  of 
from  the  latter 


EsaaBMbaiiym 


flllEDIAC — DIRECTIONS. 


211 


a  wharf  has  been  extended  eastward,  alongside  which  vessels  must  dis- 
charge their  ballast. 

Shediac  Village  (locally  known  as  The  Cape),  is  situated  on  the  south- 
western shore  of  Shediac  Bay.  The  village  contains  four  churches, 
the  most  conspicuous  from  seaward  being  the  Episcopal  and  Koinan 
Catholic,  which  are  surmounted  by  spires  and  stan<l  at  the  eastern  end 
of  the  village.  The  Methodist  has  also  a  spire  and  is  situated  in  the 
middle,  while  the  Tresbyterian,  a  white  building  with  a  8<iiiaro  tower, 
is  built  near  the  western  end  of  the  village.  Westward  of  Scoudonc 
River  is  a  HaptLst  church,  a  yellow  building  with  a  small  tower,  but 
like  the  Cape  cii'irch,  it  is  not  visible  from  seawanl.  The  population 
in  1.SS3  was  C},'jm. 

Point  du  Chdne  is  a  terminus  of  the  Intercolonial  Uailway,  and  the 
entrepot  of  trade  to  Prince  Edward  Island,  with  which  there  is  steam 
communicatiun  daily,  except  on  Sunday,  while  navigation  is  oi)en,  A 
small  village  has  been  built  at  Point  du  Cliene  with  a  cons[)icuou3 
hotel,  which  is  surmounted  by  a  tower  and  tlagstatt". 

On  Shediac  Island  there  are  two  conspicuous  trees,  situated  j\  mile 
eastwanl  of  the  beacon  leading  lights  j  these  trees  show  in  misty 
weather  when  the  beacons  are  not  visible. 

The  beacons  on  Shediac  Island  are  difficult  to  distinguish  from  any 
great  tlistance,  and  those  on  the  railway  wharf,  from  which  the  inner 
leading  lights  are  shown,  are  often  hidden  by  the  masts  of  vessels 
lying  there. 

Directions. — Vessels  approaching  Shediac  harbor  should,  for  the 
first  time,  take  a  pilot;  if  one  can  not  be  obtained  the  following  direc- 
tions will  lead  in  by  day  or  night,  but  no  other  route  than  the  one  in- 
dicated should  be  attempted. 

The  light  on  Oassi6s  Point  having  been  sighted,  the  center  of  the  bay 
should  be  steered  for,  and  the  lights  or  beacons  on  Shediac  Island 
brought  in  line,  bearing  8.  84°  W.,  taking  care  to  keep  Cassias  Point 
light  bearing  westward  of  N.  32°  W.,  until  that  leading  mark  is  on. 

Keep  the  Shediac  Island  lights  or  beacons  in  line,  until  nearthe  north- 
ern red  buoy,  when  the  vessel's  course  should  be  altered  to  the  southward 
in  time  to  bring  the  leading  lights  or  beacons  on  the  railway  wharf  in 
line,  bearing  S.  17°  W.  just  before  reaching  the  red  buoy.  This  mark 
will  lead  up  to  the  wharf,  but  if  an  anchorage  is  sought  by  day  bring 
the  clili  of  Cape  Brfde  in  line  with  the  eud  of  the  grasN  off  Point  du 
Oliene,  bearing  S.  78°  E.,  then  sheer  westward  and  let  go  the  anchor; 
by  night  proceed  for  rather  more  than  ^  mile  with  the  railway  wharf 
leading  lights  in  line  S.  17'^  W.,  aud  then  anchor  slightly  eastward  of 
that  line. 

A  place,  locally  known  as  the  Deep  Hole,  with  19  to  20  feet  water,  is 
situated  4  mile  southwestward  of  the  western  red  buoy,  on  the  mark 
of  the  wharf  lights  in  line ;  vessels  anchor  there  to  complete  their 
cargoes,  or  to  wait  until  the  tide  is  high  enough  to  enable  them  to 


MMMM 


212 


CAPE   ST.    QEOBOE    TO    MIRAMICHI    BAY. 


leave.    The  water  shoals  rapidly,  eastward  of  Deep  Hole,  to  10  aud  11 
feet  on  ChOne  Bauk. 

Water  is  very  scarce  at  Shediac ;  it  may  be  bought  from  a  cou- 
tractor.  At  high  water  it  may  be  obtained  with  difficulty  from  Seou- 
done  River,  but  it  is  not  very  good. 

Supplies  of  all  kinds  may  be  obtained  at  Point  du  Ch6ne. 

CoaL — About  GO  tons  of  coal  are  usually  stored  at  Point  du  Ch6ne 
by  the  railway  department,  but  any  quantity  can  be  procured  from 
Pictou  in  about  one  day. 

Charges.— Pilotage  $1.50  per  foot(compul8ory);  harbor  master's  fee 
$4;  health  visit  $5  ;   tonnage  dues  2  cents  per  ton. 

Trade. — The  exports  consist  of  lumber,  salmon,  potatoes,  and  oats. 

Repairs.— There  are  no  means  of  repairing  vessels  at  Shediac. 

Telegraph  and  Railways. — Point  du  Ohene  is  iu  telegraphic  com- 
munication with  all  parts  of  Canada  and  the  United  States.  It  is  con- 
nected with  Halifax,  St.  John,  and  Quebec  by  the  Intercolonial  Bailway ; 
and,  during  the  season  of  navigation,  with  Prince  Edward  Island  by  a 
daily  steam  vessel. 

Tides. — The  tides  in  Shediac  Bay  are  extremely  complicated.  The 
establishment,  at  the  only  full  and  change  period  observed,  was  Oh.  Om. 
The  highest  tides  occur  at  full  and  new  moon,  and  rise  4  feet  above  the 
lowest  water.  At  other  times  the  rise  of  tide  is  about  3  feet.  The  low 
water  occurs  at  intervals,  varying  from  one  to  18  hours  after  high  water, 
aud  ranging  from  3  inches  to  4  feet,  without  any  apparent  law.  The 
streams  generally  are  weak. 

The  country  about  Shediac  is  fertile  and  well  settled,  consisting  of 
undulating  ridges  of  clayey  loam,  attaining  the  extreme  height  of  150 
feet,  and  resting  on  the  sandstone  of  the  coal  formation.  There  is  a 
good  road  across  from  Shediac  to  the  village  of  Moncktou,  at  the  bend 
of  the  Petit  Ooudiac  River,  the  distance  being  14  miles.  Meanwhile  a 
railroad  has  now  been  completed  across  to  Monckton,  and  is  intended 
to  be  continued  until  it  connects  with  other  New  Brunswick  lines,  lead- 
ing  to  St.  John,  etc. 

Cocagne  Harbor  has  its  entrance  to  the  southward  of  Cocagne 
Island,  and  between  it  and  Renouard  Point,  the  latter  being  formed  of 
reddish  sandstone  clitts  5'.*  feet  high.  It  is  a  very  small  harbor,  aud 
the  channel  over  the  bar  of  sand,  gravel,  and  sandstone  is  narrow  aud 
crooked,  with  10  feet  at  low  or  14  feet  at  high  water  in  ordinary  spring 
tides.  Within  the  bar  there  are  from  2 J  to  4  fiithoms,  in  a  very  narrow 
channel,  for  a  distance  of  about  ^  mile.  Farther  iu  the  bay  is  shallow, 
with  oyster  beds  and  mud  flats,  covered  with  from  4  to  G  feet  water. 
To  enter  this  harbor,  hue  weather  and  a  good  pilot  are  absolutely  nec- 
essary. 

Cocagne  River  enters  the  head  of  the  bay  ^  mile  to  the  southward 
of  the  church.  It  is  crossed  by  a  bridge  just  within  its  entrance,  and  is 
navigable  by  boats  for  several  miles.    The  shores  of  the  river  and  bay 


to  10  aud  11 

from  a  cou- 
J  from  Seou- 

ne. 

nt  (ill  Cli6ne 

ocured  from 

master's  fee 

i,  aud  oaca. 
iiediac. 
graphic  com- 
8.    It  is  con- 
lial  Kail  way; 
I  Islaud  \iy  a 

icated.  The 
,  was  Oil.  Om. 
set  above  the 
et.  The  low 
r  high  water, 
ut  law.    The 

consisting  of 
leight  of  150 
There  is  a 
,  at  the  bend 
Meanwhile  a 
1  is  intended 
ik  lines,  lead- 

[  of  Oocagne 
ing  formed  of 
I  harbor,  aud 
)  narrow  aud 
iinary  spring 
I  very  narrow 
vy  is  shallow, 
G  feet  water, 
jsolutely  nec- 

tie  southward 
trance,  and  is 
river  and  bay 


BUCTOUCHE    ROAD. 


213 


are  well  settled  by  families  of  Acadian  and  British  extraction,  engaged 
in  agriculture,  together  with  lumbering  and  shipbuilding  to  a  limited 
extent. 

Buctouche  Road,  ofit'  the  entrance  of  the  Buctoucho  River,  aud  in 
the  widest  part  of  the  channel  within  the  Outer  Bar,  is  quite  safe  for  a 
vessel  with  good  anchors  and  cables,  the  ground  being  a  stiff  tenacious 
clay,  and  the  Outer  Bar  preventing  any  very  heavy  sea  from  coming 
into  the  anchorage.  It  is  here  that  vessels  of  too  great  draft  of  water 
to  enter  the  river  lie  moored  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber.  In  approach- 
ing this  anchorage  there  is  iiuthing  in  the  way  of  vessels  that  do  not 
draw  too  much  water  to  pass  the  Outer  Bar,  excepting  the  North  Patch; 
but  larger  vessels  will  find  more  water  (not  Iriss  than  3J  fathoms)  by 
approaching  from  the  northward,  according  to  the  following  directions. 

Directions. — Bring  Buctouche  steeple  to  bear  to  the  southward  of  S. 
67°  W.,  and  run  in  shore  with  it  on  that  bearing,  in  order  to  pass  to  the 
northward  of  the  North  Patch.  In  running  in,  if  the  weather  be  favor- 
able, Cocagne  steeple  will  be  observed  to  open  out  to  the  westward  of 
Gocagne  Island,  so  as  to  be  seen  between  the  latter  and  the  mainland; 
the  course  must  be  continued  till  the  steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  ex- 
tren:e  of  Dixon  Point,  which  is  a  small,  low,  and  rocky"i)eninsula  of  the 
mainland,  2^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Buctouche  Sand  Bar.  Alter 
course  immediately,  running  with  Cocagne  steeple  and  Dixon  Point  in 
line,  bearing  S.  5^  W.,  and  they  will  lead  close  inside  the  Outer  Bar 
and  clear  of  a  small  shoal,  which  lies  between  it  and  the  shore,  and  on 
which  there  are  not  less  than  2$  fathoms.  Take  care  not  to  shut  the 
steeple  in  behin<l  Dixon  Point,  as  the  vessel  runs  along  the  sand  bar, 
and  immediately  after  Buctouche  steeple  opens  out  to  the  westward  of 
the  small  sandy  islet  which  forms  the  SW.  point  of  Buctouche  Sand  Bar 
two  white  beacons  on  the  mainland  come  in  line  N.  84°  W.,  the  vessel 
will  be  ill  the  best  berth  for  anchoriug. 

Anchorage. — Anchor  with  the  white  beacons  in  line,  bearing  N.  84° 
W.,  aud  Cocagne  steeple  open  about  its  own  breadth  to  thu  eastward  of 
Dixon  Poiu',  in  3,^  or  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  with  excellent  hold- 
ing ground. 

Buctouche  River  enters  the  sea  to  the  SE.,  through  the  shallow  bay 
within  the  Buctouche  Sandbar.  The  two  white  beacons  just  mentioned, 
as  pointingout  the  best  anchorage  in  the  roadstead,  are  in  tended  to  lead 
in  over  the  bar  of  sand  and  flat  sandstone,  in  the  greatest  depth, 
namely,  8  feet  at  low  and  12  feet  at  high  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides. 
But  the  channel  is  so  narrow,  intricate,  and  incumbered  with  oyster 
beds  that  written  directions  are  as  useless  as  the  assistance  of  a  pilot  is 
absolutely  necessary  to  take  a  vessel  safely  into  the  river.  Within  the 
bar  is  a  wide  part  of  the  channel  in  which  vessels  may  ride  safely  in 
2^  and  3  fathoms  over  mud  bottom ;  but  oft"  Giddis  Point  the  channel 
becomes  as  difficult,  narrovv,  and  shallow  as  at  the  bar.  It  is  in  its 
course  through  the  bay  that  the  Buctouche  is  so  shallow  and  intricate  ; 


214 


CAPE    ST.    GEORGE    TO    MIBAMICHI    BAY. 


higher  up  its  cbanuel  is  free  from  obstraction,  and  in  some  places  has 
5  fathoms  water.  Having  crossed  the  bar,  a  vessel  may  ascend  about 
10  miles  farther,  and  boats  13  or  14  miles,  to  where  the  tide  water  ends. 

The  country  on  either  side  of  the  Buctoache  is  considerably  higher 
than  at  Richibucto,  the  ridges  attaining  an  elevation  of  about  200  feet 
above  the  sea.  The  banks  of  the  river  are  well  settled,  principally  by 
Acadians,  and  the  clayey  soil  is  very  fertile.  There  are  saw  and  grist 
mills  at  the  head  of  the  tide. 

Nort^  Patch  of  rocks,  with  12  feet  least  water,  is  small,  with  5  fath- 
oms close  outside  of  it.  It  lies  2  miles  off  shore  on  the  NE.  i>oirit  of  the 
Outer  Bar  of  tlie  Buctouche,  with  Oocagne  steeple  and  the  NW,  ex- 
treme of  Cocagne  Island  in  line,  bearing  S.  8°  W. ;  the  south  end  of 
Buctouche  Sandbar  S.  33°  W. ;  and  Buctouche  steeple  seen  over  the 
sandbar  N.  82°  VV.  Vessels  will  pass  outside  of  it,  if  they  do  not  come 
into  less  than  5  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Outer  Bar  of  Buctouche  River  is  a  long  ridge  of  sandy  and  rocky 
ground,  carrying  2^  to  3f  fathoms  water,  and  extending  from  the  North 
Patch  nearly  to  Cocagne,  a  distance  of  7  miles. 

Richibucto  Head. — Off  Richibucto  Point,  which  is  the  SE.  extreme 
of  the  south  beach,  and  3^  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Richibucto,  a 
reef  of  sandstone  extends  off  shore  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the 
high-water  mark,  and  continues  2  or  3  miles  farther  to  the  southward, 
to  Richibucto  Head,  which  is  of  sandstone  and  clay  cliffs,  50  feet  high. 

From  Richibucto  Point,  the  SE.  extremity  of  the  Buctouche  sandbar 
is  distant  14  V  miles.  There  is  nothing  requiring  notice  in  the  bay  be- 
tween them,  excepting  the  small  Ohockpish  River,  affording  shelter  to 
boats  at  high  water. 

Richibucto  River  is  inferioi'  only  to  the  Miramichi,  either  in  the 
distance  to  which  it  is  navigable  or  in  the  depth  of  water  over  its  bar. 
It  is  annually  visited  by  a  considerable  number  of  vessels  for  cargoes 
of  lumber.  Tiiere  are  nourishing  and  rapidly  increasine;  settlements 
on  its  banks,  as  well  as  on  those  of  its  principal  tributaries,  the  Al- 
douin,  the  St.  Nicholas,  and  the  Molus  or  Molies  Rivers.  The  popula- 
tion, of  English,  Scotch,  Irish,  and  Acadian  extraction,  are  engaged  in 
agriculture,  lumbering,  and  shipbuilding ;  but  they  do  not  i)rosecute  the 
fisheries.  Traces  of  coal  are  reported  to  have  been  found  in  the  sand- 
stone, which  forms  the  substratum  of  this  and  of  ail  the  neighboring 
country. 

The  Aldouin  enters  on  the  northern  side ;  about  2  miles  within  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  and  about  a  mile  higher  up  on  the  same  side, 
stands  the  town  of  Richibucto  (Liverpool),  containing  about  1,000  in- 
habitants. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  ;u  agent. 

The  entrance  of  the  Richibucto  is  aboat  /CO  yards  wide  ;  it  lies  be- 
tween two  sand-bars,  several  miles  in  length,  calloathe  north  and  south 
beaches,  on  which  there  are  sand-hills  as  high  as  30  feet.    Immediately 


Hta 


RICHIBUCTO   RIVER. 


215 


}e  places  has 
ciscend  about 
)  water  ends, 
srably  higher 
kbout  200  feet 
>rinci pally  by 
law  and  ^rist 

I,  with  ofath- 
].  point  of  the 
the  N\V,  ex- 
south  end  of 
seen  over  the 
J  do  not  come 

iy  and  rocky 
•om  the  North 

}  SE.  extreme 
liichihucto,  a 
nile  from  the 
le  southward, 
,  50  feet  high, 
uche  sandbar 
1  the  bay  be- 
ing shelter  to 

,  either  in  the 
r  over  its  bar. 
Is  for  cargoes 
e:  settlements 
aries,  the  Al- 
The  popula- 
re  engaged  in 
I)rosecute  the 
1  ill  the  sand- 
B  neighboring 

les  within  the 
he  same  side, 
bout  1,000  in- 


ide  ;  it  lies  be- 

irth  and  south 

Immediately 


within  the  entrance  there  is  a  wide  expanse  of  mud  and  weeds,  nearly 
dry  at  low  water,  excepting  the  channel  of  the  river.  On  the  northern 
side,  a  shallow  bay  leads,  within  the  north  beach,  to  the  lagoons,  whilst 
on  the  south  side,  within  the  south  beach,  lies  French  Island ;  and  still 
farther  to  the  8E.  French  Creek  and  Low  Village,  where  there  is  a 
church,  visible  in  some  directions  from  the  sea.  Within  the  wide  part 
just  mentioned,  the  breadth  of  the  Richibucto  is  rendered  irregular  by 
numerous  bays  on  either  side.  Just  below  the  town  it  is  above  800 
yards  wide,  but  contracts  to  300  yards  at  Jardine's  establishment,  after 
which  it  expands  again  for  a  considerable  distance,  and  is  nowhere  less 
than  160  yards  broad,  nearly  to  the  end  of  the  navigation ;  although 
the  channel  between  mudbanks,  nearly  dry  when  the  tide  is  out,  is  much 
narrower.  Low  cliffs  of  sandy  clay  are  frequent  on  either  side  of  the 
river;  but  the  adjacent  country,  although  undulating,  is  everywhere  of 
very  small  elevation,  not  exceeding  80,  or  at  the  utmost  100  feet  above 
the  sea. 

The  bar  of  the  Richibucto  is  extremely  dangerous,  especially  to  large, 
deeply  laden,  and  dull  sailing  vessels  outward  bound  in  the  fall  of  the 
year.  Taking  advantage  of  the  highest  spring  tide,  and  sailing  at  high 
water,  if  the  wind  becomes  unsteady  or  too  light,  they  are  almost  cer- 
tain to  be  thrown  ashore  by  the  ebb  tide,  on  the  southeastern  part  of 
the  bar;  and  should  a  NE.  gale  occur,  to  be  destroyed  before  they  can 
be  got  off  again.  To  take  a  ship  in  with  a  leading  wind  and  flowing 
tide,  is  attended  with  no  other  difficulty  than  that  which  arises  from 
the  narrowness  of  the  channel ;  but  in  all  cases  the  assistance  of  a  pilot 
is  absolutelj  necessary,  since  the  bar  is  subject  to  occasional  changes 
from  the  effect  of  heavy  gales.  The  bar  extends  from  the  north  beach, 
for  L'  miles  to  the  eastward,  parallel  to  the  south  beach  ;  there  is  a  rock 
in  the  eastern  part  of  it,  but  the  remainder  is  of  sand,  dry  at  low  water. 
Anchorage- — No  part  of  this  bar  extends  to  seaward  so  much  as  a 
mile  from  the  shore,  and  it  may  be  safely  approached  by  the  lead  to  6 
fathoms  water,  at  any  time  of  tide ;  but  for  the  purpose  of  anchorage 
8  fathoms  is  a  better  depth,  the  bottom  being  there  of  fine  brown  and 
gray  sand,  affording  far  better  holding  ground  than  farther  in-shore. 

The  depth  of  water  over  the  bar  is  11  feet  at  low  water,  or  15  feet  at 
high  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  and  is  grad ually  becoming  deeper ; 
and  there  is  not  a  continuously  greater  depth  for  the  first  mile  in  from 
the  red  buoy,  tlie  channel  being  from  100  to  180  yards  wide,  between  the 
2  fathom  lines,  excepting  at  the  turn  to  thewestward,  which  is  the  narrow- 
est part,  and  only  80  yards  broad.  Farther  in  the  channel  expands  in 
breadth  to  about  370  yards,  increasing  in  depth  to  3J  fathoms.  ll  con- 
tracts again  to  only  100  yards  wide  at  the  north  beach,  where  the  depth 
is  5  fathoms,  and  the  stream  of  tide  strongest,  being  about  2J  knots- 
About  i  mile  within  the  north  beach  the  channel  widens  for  a  short 
distance  to  400  yards,  and  has  3  to  4  fathoms  water  in  it,  with  mud 


BK^&tj 


216 


CAPE    ST.   GEORGE    TO    MIRAMICUI    BAY. 


I 


bottom.    The  depth  increases  farther  in,  and  is  nearly  9  fathoms  in 
some  places. 

Pilots.— The  branch  pilots  of  Bichibucto  River  are  able,  intelligent, 
and  attentive  to  their  duties.  They  keep  a  good  lookout  for  vessels 
from  the  beach  at  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

Directions.— Having  made  the  lighthouse  on  Sichibucto  Head,  look 
out  for  tho  red  buoy,  and  keep  outside  of  it,  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms 
water  until  it  and  the  two  lighthouses  come  in  line,  bearing  about  S. 
51°  W.  Tiien  steer  in  close  past  the  buoy,  keeping  the  two  light- 
houses exactly  in  line,  and  looking  out  for  the  small  red  buoys,  which 
are  placed  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  bar,  and  must  be  left  on  the 
right  hand  going  in.  Having  run  in  about  ^  mile  with  the  two  light- 
houses in  line,  the  vessel  will  be  within  400  yards  of  the  south  beach, 
and  the  small  red  buoys  along  the  south,  or  inner  side  of  the  bar,  will 
be  seen  to  come  in  one  with  each  other.  Haul  up  immediately,  passing 
about  40  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  buoys. 

Having  run  to  the  west,  between  the  bar  and  the  south  beach,  about 
IJ  miles,  the  channel  becomes  again  very  narrow,  and  is  marked  by 
small  buoys  on  either  side,  red  on  the  starboard  hand,  black  on  the 
port ;  but  as  these  buoys  might  not  be  readily  made  out  by  a  stranger, 
bring  the  SW.  point  of  the  north  beach  to  bear  N.  67°  W.,  and  steer 
for  it,  observing  that  the  channel,  which  is  then  only  100  yards  wide» 
passes  close  to  the  north  beach.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  abreast  of 
this  edge  steer  to  SW.  for  ^  mile,  when  there  will  be  plenty  of  room  to 
anchor  in  quite  a  secure  harbor.  The  small  red  buoys  just  mentioned 
are  merely  j)iece8  of  wood  painted  re<J,  and  placed  at  convenient  dis- 
tances, according  to  the  judgment  of  the  pilots. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bichibucto  River  at  3h. 
30m. ;  springs  rise  4  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  river  is  from  IJ 
to  2  knots. 

Konchibouguacsis  River  becomes  rapid,  shallow,  and  consequently 
unnavigable,  above  the  point  reached  by  the  tide.  It  has  saw  and  grist 
mills  and  settlements  of  Acadian  French  on  its  banks.  Of  its  two 
outlets  through  the  sand  bars,  the  most  northern,  3  miles  southward  of 
the  Konchibouguac,  is  only  fit  for  boats,  the  channel  leading  to  it 
through  the  lagoon  having  become  nearly  filled  up  with  sand  and  weeds. 

The  river,  after  entering  the  lagoon  and  running  for  some  distance 
towards  this  outlet,  turns  to  the  southward,  and  continues  its  course 
within  the  sand  bar  for  a  distance  of  3  miles  to  the  southern  and  main 
outlet,  which  is  called  Big  Cove,  and  is  6  miles  south  of  the  Kouchi. 
bcuguac  and  3  miles  north  of  the  Richibucto  River.  The  depth  by 
a  narrow  channel  over  the  shifting  bar  of  sand  is  0  or  10  feet  at 
high  water  in  spring  tides.  There  are  3  fathoms  just  within  the  sand 
bars,  from  one  to  3  fathoms  through  the  lagoon,  and  2  or  3  fathoms  for 
several  miles  up  the  river.  There  is  a  communication  by  boats  at  high 
water  through  the  lagoons  and  within  the  sand  bars,  not  only  between 


9  fathoms  in 

B,  intelligent, 
lit  for  vessels 

:o  Head,  look 
an  5  fathoms 
ring  about  S. 
le  two  light- 
buoys,  which 
i)e  left  on  the 
;he  two  light- 
south  beach, 
the  bar,  will 
lately,  passing 

beach,  about 
s  marked  by 
black  on  the 
>y  a  stranger, 
kV.,  and  steer 
\>  yards  wide» 
is  abreast  of 
ty  of  room  to 
St  mentioned 
inveuient  dis- 

)  River  at  3h. 
■er  is  from  IJ 

consequently 
saw  and  grist 
.  Of  its  two 
southward  of 
leading  to  it 
id  and  weeds, 
lome  distance 
les  its  course 
em  and  main 
r  the  Kouchi. 
l?he  depth  by 
)r  10  feet  at 
thin  the  sand 
3  fathoms  for 
boats  at  high 
only  between 


KOUCHIBOUGUAC   RIVER. 


217 


the  two  rivers  just  described,  bat  also  southward  to  Bichibucto  and 
northward  nearly  to  Marsh  River. 

Kouchibongnac  River,  after  flowing  for  more  than  a  mile  through 
an  extensive  lagoon,  nearly  dry  at  low  water  in  spring  tides,  enters 
the  sea  by  an  outlet  through  sand  bars  about  9  miles  8W.  from  Sapin 
Point.  Its  bar  of  sand  not  unfrequeutly  shifts  in  heavy  easterly  gales, 
and  the  channel  is  at  all  times  narrow  and  intricate.  Large  shiits,  which 
are  occasional!"  built  in  this  river,  are  taken  out  light,  and  towed  by  a 
steamer  to  be  fitted  at  Richibucto  or  Miramichi.  The  banks  of  this 
river  are  well  settled,  and  there  is  a  sawmill  at  the  head  of  the  tide. 

Kouchibouguac  Bay  is  nearly  20  miles  wide  from  Richibucto  [lead  to 
Sapin  I'oint.  Its  shores  are  exceedingly  low,  with  sand  bars  and  beaches 
inclosing  extensive  and  shallow  lagoons,  through  which  the  river  flows 
to  the  sea.  The  shoal  water  (depths  not  exceeding  3  fathoms)  extends 
offshore  to  a  considerable  distance  in  the  northwestern  part  of  this 
bay  ;  and  there  is  foul  ground,  with  as  little  as  3  fathoms  water,  more 
than  2  miles  out  to  the  eastward  from  the  mouth  of  the  Kouchibouguac 
Blver.  Northeast  gales  send  a  heavj'  swell  into  the  bay,  so  that  it  will 
be  prudent  not  to  get  embayed  there,  especially  at  night  or  in  a  dull- 
sailing  vessel. 

The  Sapin  Ledge,  of  sandstone,  and  with  12  feet  least  water,  is  very 
dangerous,  lying  directly  in  the  way  of  vessels  running  along  shore. 
It  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  in 
the  night  time,  and  at  all  times  it  should  be  remembered,  that  the  5- 
fathoms  line  of  soundings  is  distant  from  it  only  about  400  yards.  The 
ledge  is  1^  miles  long,  east  and  west,  and  about  ^  a  mile  wide,  from 
the  depth  of  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms  ;  and  its  eastern  or  outer  extremity 
bears  S.  24°  W.  6  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Escuminac  Point,  and 
K  83°  E.  2^  miles  from  Sapin  Point.  There  is  a  depth  of  3|  fathoms 
between  it  and  the  last-named  point. 


A 


t^  % 


I  11 


I- 


I* 

Si?'       ,f! 


CHAPTER   VIII. 

PRINCE  EDWARD   ISLAND  AND  NORTHUMBERLAND  STRAIT. 

Prince  Edward  Island  is  rendered  extremely  irregular  by  lurge 
bays,  iulets,  aud  rivers,  whicb  penetrate  the  island  so  that  no  part  of  it 
is  distant  mure  than  7  or  8  miles  from  navigable  water.  Its  shape  is  an 
irregular  crescent,  concave  towards  the  gulf,  the  northern  shore  form- 
ing a  great  bay,  91  miles  wide  and  22  miles  deep,  out  of  which  the  set  of 
the  tides  aud  the  heavy  sea  render  it  very  difficult  to  extricate  a  ship 
when  caught  in  the  northeast  gales,  which  frequently  occur  towards  the 
fall  of  the  year,  occasionally  blowing  with  great  strength,  and  at  such 
times  proving  fatal  to  many  vessels. 

In  the  interior  of  the  island,  the  most  elevated  ridges  do  not  exceed 
400  or  at  the  utmost  500  feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  land  is  in  general 
much  lower,  especially  near  the  coast ;  the  prevailing  feature  being 
undulating,  and  the  alternation  of  hill  and  dale  and  inlet  forming  very 
pleasing  scenery.  The  climate  is  less  severe  than  in  Lower  Canada ; 
not  quite  so  cold  in  winter,  nor  so  hot  in  summer,  being  tempered  by 
the  sea  breezes ;  but  on  the  other  hand,  the  advance  of  spring  is  checked 
by  northerly  winds  from  the  gulf,  driving  down  ice  which  sometimes  fills 
the  strait  as  late  as  the  middle  of  May,  so  that  instead  of  the  sudden 
outbreak  of  vegetable  life  whicb  is  observed  in  Canadsi,  it  is  here  fre- 
quently retarded  till  the  mouth  of  June  is  well  advanced,  and  there  is 
seldom  any  settled  warm  weather  much  before  July. 

Fogs. — But  the  most  important  advantage  of  the  climate  to  the  sea- 
man is  the  rare  occurrence  of  the  dense  fogs  which  so  frequently  embar- 
rass him  in  other  parts  of  the  gulf,  and  which  in  Northumberland 
Strait  are  seldom  seen.  It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  prevailing 
SW.  wind  of  summer,  which  in  the  bay  of  Fundy  is  generally  accom- 
panied by  thick  fog,  parts  with  its  moisture  in  passing  over  the  heated 
land  of  Nova  Scotia,  and  becomes  a  hot  dry  wind  off  its  northern  coast. 
It  becomes  tempered  in  its  passage  over  the  water  of  the  strait,  heated 
and  dried  again  in  some  degree  in  passing  over  the  island,  but  acquires 
again  its  moist  and  foggy  character  long  before  it  reaches  the  coast  of 
Labrador,  and  not  unfrequently  before  it  arrives  at  the  Magdalen 
Islands. 

Prince  Edward  Island  is  part  of  the  Dominion  of  Gauada,  but  has  a 
provincial  government  for  administering  local  affairs.  The  seat  of  the 
local  government  is  in  Oharlottetown. 

218 


STRAIT. 

ular  by  large 
t  ?ao  part  of  it 
ts  shape  is  an 
ti  shore  form- 
lich  the  set  of 
:tricate  a  ship 
ir  towards  the 
,  aud  at  such 

do  not  exceed 
is  in  general 
feature  being 
;  forming  very 
ower  Canada; 
tempered  by 
Ing  is  checked 
sometimes  fills 
of  the  sudden 
,  it  is  here  fre- 
il,  and  there  is 

ite  to  the  sea- 
uently  embar- 
)rthumberland 
;he  prevailing 
aeraUy  accom- 
rer  the  heated 
orthern  coast, 
strait,  heated 
1,  but  acquires 
ss  the  coast  of 
he   Magdalen 

tida,  but  has  a 
he  seat  of  the 


WHITE    SANDS — INDIAN    ROCKS. 


219 


In  1881  the  estimated  population  was  110,000.  The  export  trade  of 
the  island  consists  chiefly  of  agricultural  produce,  small  quantities  of 
lumber  being  also  sent  away.  The  fisheries  are  prosecuted  on  the  north 
shore,  but  there  is  not  much  capital  employed  in  the  business.  A  rail- 
way extends  from  Tignish,  at  the  north  end,  to  Georgetown  and  Sonris, 
at  the  east  end,  passing  through  Alberton,  Summerside,  and  Charlotte- 
towii. 

South  Coast— The  shore  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Bear  (the  east 
point  of  the  South  Coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island)  to  White  Sands  is 
formed  of  sandsstone  cliffs,  which  are  in  some  places  40  feet  high,  with- 
out beach  or  landing,  except  at  Guernsey  Cove,  and  from  which  the 
shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  700  yards  except  near  Cape 
Bear. 

Blackrock  and  Guernsey,  points  distant  J  and  2  miles,  respectively, 
to  the  westward  of  Cape  Bear,  have  each  large  rocks  above  water  close 
off  their  cliffs ;  and  so  also  has  Cape  Bear ;  but  the  rock  off  the  cape  is 
much  higher  than  the  others,  its  summit  being  about  12  feet  above  the 
sea  at  high  water,  whilst  Blackrock  is  only  7  feet,  and  the  other  still 
lower. 

White  Sands  is  a  settlement,  receiving  its  name  from  the  sandy 
beach  of  a  small  bay,  9  miles  eastward  from  the  Wood  Islands.  There 
is  a  Siindspit  there,  just  covered  at  low  water,  which  affords  some  shelter 
to  boats,  and  a  sandy  shoal  extending  to  tiio  distance  of  ^  mile  off'  shore. 
From  White  Sands  to  Little  Sands,  6  miles  to  the  westwar.l,  the  sand- 
stone cliffs  are  40  to  50  feet  high  aud  quite  bold. 

Wood  Islands  are  now  only  in  part  covered  with  timber.  They  are 
two  small  islets,  and  with  their  connecting  sand  bars  are  1,400  yards  ia 
length,  parallel  to  the  shore,  from  which  they  are  distant  about  ^  mile. 
The  eastern  or  larger  islet  is  700  yards  long  and  about  50  feet  high. 
They  both  present  cliffs  of  sindstone  to  seaward,  and  are  united  to  the 
shore  by  a  long  sandbar  at  their  western  extremity.  The  space  be- 
tween the  islets  and  the  shore  forms  a  secure  boat  harbor,  having  an 
entrance  from  the  eastward,  but  it  is  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water. 

The  Anchorage  to  the  eastward  of  the  islands,  within  the  distance 
of  a  mile,  and  at  any  depth  from  3  to  9  fathoms,  is  good  in  NW. 
winds,  •^he  Indian  Bocks  breaking  the  sea. 

Indian  Rocks,  nearly  always  marked  by  rippling  on  the  part  that 
dries,  occupy  a  space  1^  miles  in  length,  parallel  to  the  shore,  between 
Bell  Point  aud  the  Wood  Islands,  and  ^  mile  in  breadth.  They  are 
of  sandstone,  dry  to  a  considerable  extent  at  low  water,  and  their 
southern  edge  is  If  miles  off  shore.  The  SE.  point  of  the  Wood  Is- 
lands, not  brought  to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  45°  E.,  will  lead  to  the 
southward  of  their  SE.  extreme,  which  bears  S.  34°  W.  nearly  a  mile 
from  the  west  end  of  the  Wood  Island,  and  Macdougal  and  Pinette 
Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  41°  W^.,  will  lead  at  the  distance  of  J  mile  to 


I  !• 


!    ', 


220 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND SOUTH    COAST. 


the  westward  of  the  western  extreme,  which  bears  from  Bell  Point  S. 
34°  B.  15  miles;  but  Pinette  Point  can  not  always  be  distingnished 

Buoy.— A  whistling  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  westward  of  the 
Indian  Kocks,  with  Bell  Point  bearing  N.  6°  W.,  and  Wood  Island 
lighthouse  N.  72°  E. 

Tides— The  tidal  streams' are  strong  in  the  deep  water  jnst  outside 
the  Indian  Kocks,  frequently  running  at  the  rate  of  3  knots  per  liour. 
It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Ojf  hours  nearly ;  springs  rise  6 
feet,  neaps  4  feet.  ' 

Bell  Point,  a  mile  SE.  of  Stewart  Point,  and  the  extreme  from 
Prim  Point,  is  a  cliflf  of  sandstone  40  feet  in  height.  The  shallow  water 
is  continuons  from  the  Rifleman  Keef  to  this  point,  from  which  it  ex- 
tends a  mile  to  the  3-rathoms  line,  having  9  or  10  fathoms  close  to  its 
edge. 

Rifleman  Reef,  of  sandstone,  extends  to  the  distance  of  2  miles  to 
the  westward  from  Stewart  Point.  On  the  extreme  outer  point  of  this 
reef,  in  3  fathoms,  the  light  on  Prim  Point  bears  N.  51°  W.  8  miles. 
Juiit  within  this  point  of  the  reef  there  are  8  feet  water,  and  half  way 
between  that  and  the  shore  only  5  feet,  while  between  those  and  other 
shallow  patches  there  are  12  feet  at  low  water. 

Caution — The  very  irregular  soundings  ofif  the  Rifleman  Reef,  and 
the  deep  water  close  to  it  (16  fathoms  within  less  than  ^  mile,  while 
there  is  a  much  less  depth  farther  out),  render  it  one  of  the  greatest 
dangers  in  Northumberland  Strait.  The  bearing  of  the  lights  on  Prim 
Point  and  Wood  Islands,  and  the  whistling  buoy  west  of  Indian  Rocks, 
will  greatly  assist  vessels  in  avoiding  it,  but  at  all  times,  either  by  night 
or  by  day,  and  especially  in  thick  weather,  it  should  be  approached 
with  care.  There  are  no  leading  marks  to  clear  its  west  extreme, 
which  has  7  fathoms  close-to,  but  the  soundings  give  better  warning 
there  than  farther  to  the  southward.  The  wooded  point,  within  and 
opposite  the  Wood  Islands,  in  one  with  Black  Point,  the  extreme  to 
the  eastward,  bearin«:  east.,  just  clear  the  southern  side  of  th<-  reef; 
but  the  safest  plan,  when  approaching  it  from  the  southward,  will 
be  to  tack  as  sooti  as  the  extreme  of  the  land  to  the  eastward  ajjpears 
within  the  Wood  Islands,  bearing  N.  81°  E.,  when  the  vessel  will  be 
1:^  miles  from  the  reef. 

Flat  River,  which  is  only  fit  for  boats,  is  3  miles  to  the  SE.  from 
Pinette  Harbor.  Shallow  water  runs  off  Macdongal  Point,  its  eastern 
point  of  entrance,  to  the  distance  of  a  mile. 

Pinette  Harbor  has  only  2  feet  at  low  water  over  its  rocky  and  ex- 
ceedingly dangerous  bar.  It  is  therefore  iit  only  for  small  schooners, 
although  it  has  from  3  to  4J  fathoms  in  its  narrow  channel,  which  runs 
in  several  miles  through  flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  dry  at  low  water,  and 
then  divides  into  several  shallow  bran'-hes.  The  bar  and  the  Pinette 
Shoals  are  very  dange-ous,  and  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than 
the  low- water  depth  of  6  fathoms. 


r. 


HILLSBOROUGH    BAY. 


221 


I  Bell  Point  S. 

distingnished 
istward  of  tbe 

Wood  Island 

Br  jnst  outside 
uots  per  lionr. 
springs  rise  6 

extreme  from 
shallow  water 
1  which  it  ex- 
ins  close  to  its 

of  2  miles  to 
r  point  of  this 
1°  W.  8  miles. 
,  and  half  way 
lose  and  other 

nan  Beef,  and 
^  mile,  while 
the  greatest 
ights  on  Prim 
Indian  Rocks, 
ither  by  night 
e  approached 
Pest  extreme, 
etter  warning 
it,  within  and 
le  extreme  to 
B  of  th<-  reef; 
luthward,  will 
ward  ai)pears 
vessel  will  be 

the  SE.  from 
tit,  its  eastern 

rocky  and  ex- 
ill  schooners, 
1,  which  runs 
[)w  water,  and 
1  the  Pinette 
d  nearer  than 


Hillsborough  Bay,  having  in  it  tbe  principal  harbor  and  capital 
town,  and  being  the  outlet  of  an  extensive  inland  navigation,  is  the 
most  important  as  v  U  as  the  largest  of  any  in  Prince  Edward  Island. 

East  Side  of  Channel— Prim  Point,  the  SE.  point  of  niilsbor^ 
ougb  Baj',  is  low,  with  clitts  of  sandstone  10  to  15  feet  high,  and  may 
be  recognized  by  the  light-house.  Prim  Island,  which  has  also  low 
cliflFs,  is  distant  IJ  miles  NE.  from  the  extremity  of  the  point,  and  is 
united  to  its  north  side  by  sand  beaches,  inclosing  marshy  ponds. 

Prim  Reef,  of  sandstone,  runs  out  to  the  westward,  both  from  the 
island  and  the  point,  so  as  to  form  a  forked  reef  with  very  uneven 
soundings ;  it»i  western  point,  in  3  fathoms,  bears  west  2  miles  from  the 
light-house.  A  buoy,  painted  red,  marks  the  western  extreme  of  Prim 
Beef;  it  lies  with  Prim  Point  light-bouse  bearing  about  east,  distant 
about  2-iV  miles- 
Governor  Island,  lying  in  tbe  middle  of  Hillsborough  Bay,  is  low, 
in  great  part  wooded,  and  based  upon  sandstone. 

The  Governor  Shoals. — Stretching  out  from  the  west  end  of  the 
island,  the  sandstone  reef  is  dry  at  low  water  for  the  first  ^  mile,  and 
has  lens  than  3  fathoms  for  an  equal  distance  farther;  after  which 
rocky  and  irregular  soundings  continue  to  the  west  extreme  of  the 
shoals,  in  5  fathoms,  distant  2  miles  from  the  island.  A  bell  buoy  is 
moored  in  4  fathoms  200  yards  within  tbe  west  extreme  of  the  shoals ; 
with  the  NW.  extreme  of  Governor  Island  and  Pownal  Point  touching, 
and  bearing  N.  68°  E. 

Tbe  Fitxroy  Rock,  w;tb  20  feet  least  water,  lies  about  200  yards  to 
the  eastward  of  the  above  buoy.  The  Huntley  Bock,  bearing  8.  5°  E., 
IJ  mile^  from  tbe  west  end  of  Governor  Island,  has  tbe  least  water, 
namely,  12  feet  at  low  tide ;  but  there  are  others,  with  from  17  to  22 
feet  water,  as  far  out  as  2^  miles,  and  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  shoals 
in  5  fathoms  is  distant  3^  miles  from  tbe  island. 

The  Squaiv  Shoal,  with  10  feet  ?east  water,  approaches  close  to  the 
edge  of  the  bank,  where  it  is  most  steep,  and  is  nearly  opposite  the 
Spitbead  Buoy.  Battery  and  Trout  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  23°  W., 
form  an  excellent  mark  for  this  side  of  the  channel,  leading  along  the 
edge  of  the  bank,  in  4^  fathoms  least  water,  from  near  Trout  Point,  to 
i  mile  beyond  the  Spithead  Buoy  on  tbe  opposite  side. 

West  side  of  channel — St.  Peters  Island,  lying  off  tbe  western 
point  of  entrance  to  Hillsborough  Bay,  is  rather  more  than  3  miles  in 
circumference,  and  of  very  moderate  height,  having  cliffs  of  red  clay 
and  sandstone,  35  feet  high,  along  its  eastern  shore.  There  are  several 
farms  on  either  side ;  but  tbe  central  parts  of  the  island  are  thickly 
wooded.  It  is  joined  to  Bice  Point,  the  western  point  of  the  bay  by 
sands  dry  at  low  water. 

Shallow  water  extends  off  this  island  1^  miles  to  the  SW.  and 
south;  but  the  soundings,  deepening  out  gradually,  afford  ample 
guidance  in  that  part.    Farther  eastward  the  St.  Peters  Shoals  become 


I    H 


1 


jL 


ifW'' 


222 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — SOUTH   COAST. 


much  more  exteusive,  stretching  out  3}  miles  N.  56°  E.  from  the 
NB.  point  of  the  islaud.  For  the  first  2  miles  of  that  distance  St. 
Peters  Spit  of  sand  dries  oat,  att'ording  shelter  to  St.  Peters  Road  fit 
only  for  small  vessels,  having  only  from  9  to  12  leet  at  low  water.  The 
Spithead,  a  rooliy  shoal,  with  8  feet  least  water,  lies  oif  the  end  of 
St.  Peters  Spif,  and  extends  to  within  J  mile  of  the  east  extreme  of  the 
St.  Peters  Sliualu,  where  the  Spithead  buoy  is  moored  in  5  fathoms, 
with  tlio  we«t  side  of  the  government  house  in  Charlottetown  in  line 
with  Battery  Point,  bearing  N.  17°  W. ;  the  north  side  of  St.  Peters 
Island,  S.  59°  W. ;  and  Gallows  Point  just  open  to  the  northward  of 
the  dry  spit  of  Governor  Island,  S.  73°  B. ;  however,  this  dry  spit  can 
seldom  be  seen. 

Caution.— The  5  fathoms  edge  of  the  bank,  forming  the  western  side 
of  the  channel  into  Charlottetown  Harbor,  trends  northward  2|  miles 
from  the  Spithead  buoy  to  about  200  yards  oflF  Blockhouse  Point,  at  the 
entrance  of  the  harbor.  The  edge  of  the  St.  Peters  Shoals  may  be  safely 
followed  by  the  lead  in  5  fathoms  as  far  in  as  the  Spithead  buoy ;  after 
which  the  bank  becomes  steep,  and  mnst  be  approached  with  caution 
in  a  large  vessel. 

The  Trout  Rock,  with  7  feet  least  water,  lies  400  yards  within  the 
edge  of  the  bank,  and  a  long  ^  mile  out  from  Blockhouse  Point,  which 
kept  in  line  with  government  house,  bearing  N.  9°  W.,  will  just  lead 
to  the  eastward  of  the  rock  in  about  14  feet  water. 

Caution. — The  buoys  in  this  harbor  are  freiiuently  out  of  position  ; 
therefore,  in  clear  weather,  use  the  leading  a^jd  clearing  marks. 

Charlottetown  Harbor  is  900  yards  wide  at  entrance,  between  the 
cliffs  of  Blockhouse  and  Trout  Points ;  but  shallow  water,  extending 
from  both  shores,  reduces  the  navigable  width  of  the  channel,  reckon- 
ing from  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  to  about  450  yards ;  and  as  the  shoals 
are  very  steep,  it  would  require  to  be  well  buoyed  before  a  ship  of 
large  draft  could  beat  in  or  out  with  safety.  Cliffs  of  red  sandstone, 
from  10  to  30  feet  high,  form  the  shores  on  either  side,  the  land  rising 
gradually  from  them  in  undulations,  and  being  partly  cultivated  and 
partly  wooded.  The  next  point  of  cliff"  on  the  west  side  of  entrance  is 
Alchorn  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  ^  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse 
are  the  remains  of  Amherst  fort,  on  the  hill,  93  feet  above  high  water. 
On  the  same  side,  north  of  Alchorn  Point,  is  Warren  Cove,  and  lastly, 
Canseau  Point,  with  its  beacon,  a  pole  surmounted  by  a  diamond- 
shaped  frame  1^  miles  from  the  light-house.  Canseau  Shoal  extends  oft' 
Canseau  Point  to  the  distance  of  700  yards.  A  buoy  painted  black 
marks  its  eastern  extreme. 

On  the  opposite  or  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  and  less  than  a  mile 
within  Trout  Point,  is  Battery  Point,  with  its  shoal ;  the  latter  running 
out  400  yards  and  having  on  its  extreme  point  a  buoy  moored  in  3 
fathoms  at  low  water.  Outside  that  depth,  on  either  side,  the  water 
deepens  abruptly,  and  there  are  13  fathoms  in  the  middle  of  the  chan- 


=>  B.  from  the 
t  distance  St. 
*eter8  Road  fit 
w  water.  The 
off  the  end  of 
extreme  of  the 
ill  5  fathoms, 
etown  in  line 
of  St.  Peters 
northward  of 
8  dry  spit  can 

le  western  side 
ward  2|  miles 
B  Point,  at  the 
*  may  be  safely 
d  buoy;  after 
d  with  caution 

rds  within  the 

ie  Point,  which 

will  just  lead 

it  of  position ; 
'  marks. 
e,  between  the 
iter,  extending 
lannel,  reckon- 
1  as  the  shoals 
fore  a  ship  of 
red  sandstone, 
the  land  rising 
cultivated  and 
)  of  entrance  is 
the  lighthouse 
ve  high  water. 
>ve,  and  lastly, 
yy  a  diamond- 
loal  extends  oft' 
painted  black 

iss  than  a  mile 
latter  running 
y  moored  in  3 
side,  the  water 
le  of  the  chau- 


CHARLOTTETOWN. 


223 


Del.  The  belfry  of  St.  Duustan  College  in  line  with  the  tlagatait'  at 
government  house,  leads  clear  of  the  shoal  off  Battery  Point  in  10 
athoms,  and  at  the  distance  of  120  yards. 

Middle  Qround. — Within  the  harbor,  in  addition  to  the  flats  of  mud 
and  weeds  extending  off  shore,  there  is  the  Middle  Ground,  with  17  feet 
least  water.  When  on  this  17foot  ])atch  the  west  turret  of  the  tower 
of  the  Wesleyan  Chapel  (built  of  brick  and  th^  turrets  crowned  with  high 
skeleton  work)  is  just  shut  in  with  the  edge  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church  tower.  The  white  beacon  on  Causeau  Point  and  McKinnon's 
house  in  line  lead  through  midway  between  it,  and  the  fiat  off  the 
southern  shore. 

Rivers. — Of  the  three  rivers  which  unite  in  the  harbor,  the  Hillsbor- 
ough is  the  largest,  being  navigable  for  vessels  of  the  largest  draft  to 
the  distance  of  7  or  8  miles,  and  for  small  vessels  14  miles  above  Char- 
lottetown,  where  there  is  a  bridge  2  miles  from  the  head  of  the  river. 
There  is  a  portage  of  less  than  a  mile  across,  from  the  Hillsborough 
near  its  head  to  Savage  Harbor  on  the  north  coast  of  tho  island.  York 
River,  the  smallest  of  the  three,  is  crossed  by  Poplar  Island  bridge,  2-^ 
miles  from  its  mouth.  Elliott  River  may  be  ascended  4  or  o  miles  by 
large  vessels,  and  9  or  10  by  small  craft  and  boats.  The  shores  of  all 
three  rivers  are  settled,  and  the  country  generally  fertile. 

Charlottetown  is  a  city  advantageously  situated  on  the  north  bank 
of  Hillsborough  River,  a  short  distance  within  the  entrance,  and  at  the 
point  where  the  deepest  water  approaches  nearest  to  the  shore;  the 
whai  ves,  however,  still  requiring  to  be  240  yards  long  to  reach  the  edge 
of  the  channel.  The  city  is  well  laid  out,  with  spacious  squares  and 
wide  streets  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  and  contains  several  fine 
buildings. 

The  Provincial  building  occupies  the  center  of  the  public  square,  and 
is  flanked  on  either  side  by  the  law  courts  and  post-office,  both  sub- 
stantial brick  structures.  The  market  house,  a  large  wooden  building, 
with  a  belfry  at  the  west  end  containing  the  fire  alarm,  is  situated  west 
of  the  postolBce,  while  St.  Paul's  Church,  a  wooden  building  with  a 
spire,  occupies  the  east  eud  of  the  square.  The  new  Presbyterian 
Church,  a  handsome  stone  building,  is  situated  at  the  NW.  end  of  the 
town,  and  a  convent,  built  of  brick  with  a  small  belfry  at  the  top,  is 
conspicuous  from  the  harbor.  The  Roman  Catholic  Cathedral,  a 
wooden  building  with  a  large  gilt  cross  at  the  top  of  the  spire,  and 
Bishop's  palace,  of  stone,  near  it,  also  show  prominently.  The  lunatic 
asylum,  a  fine  building  of  stone  with  a  high  tower,  stands  just  north  of 
Falcon  Point.  The  railway  station  is  at  the  east  end  of  the  town,  and 
may  be  known  by  the  wharf  in  connection  with  it,  on  which  stand  large 
chocolate-colored  warehouses.  St.  Dunstan  College,  a  Roman  Catholic 
seminary,  built  of  brick,  stands  on  a  hill  150  feet  high,  1^  miles  to  the 
northward  of  the  town.    The  telegraph  station  is  situated  in  Queen 


|{ 


ill 


f 


"•      *' 


k       i 


224 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — SOUTH    COAST. 


Street,  which  runs  northward  from  Queens  Whart',  and  is  in  conneotiou 
with  the  AnKlo-American  Telegraph  Company. 

No  part  of  the  city  exceeds  in  elevation  50  feet  above  the  sea  <it  high 
water;  hut  the  land  rises  gradually  behind  it  to  tlui  height  c''  150  feet 
at  the  dlHtiince  of  1^  miles  and  is  well  cultivate^ 

Supplies. — All  kinds  of  supplies  may  be  obtained  at  Gharlottetowu ; 
water  in  large  quantities  from  boats  fitted  as  taulis,  in  lesser  quantity 
from  wells  with  pumps,  which  are  numerous  in  the  town. 

Ooal. — About  (iOD  tons  are  usually  kept  in  stock,  exclusive  of  the 
amount  stored  by  the  railway  department,  wlio  generally  have  about 
1,700  tons. 

Telegraph  and  Railways. — Charlottetown  is  in  telegrai)hic  com- 
munication with  the  principal  towns  and  ports  iu  Prince  Edward  Island, 
also  with  Canada  and  tlie  United  Stares. 

It  is  connected  by  rail  with  Georgetown  and  Souris,  on  the  eastern 
coast  of  the  island ;  with  Cape  Traverse  and  Summerside  on  the  south- 
western coast ;  and  with  Alberton  and  Tiguish,  at  the  northwestern 
point  of  Prince  Edward  Island.  During  the  season  of  navigation  a 
uteam  vessel  runs  to  Pictou,  5  days  each  week,  and  sometimes  there  is 
direct  steam  communication  with  England. 

Ice.— Charlottetown  Barbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  2l8t  Decem- 
ber, and  is  clear  of  ice  about  10th  April,  being  completely  closed  be- 
tween those  dates.  The  first  vessel  arrives  from  sea  about  26th  April, 
and  the  last  vessel  leaves  about  20th  December. 

Charges. — Pilotage  (not  compulsory),  per  foot, 50 cents;  discharging 
ballast,  12  cents  per  ton ;  consul  fees,  1  cent  per  ton  ;  tonnage  dues,  2 
cents  per  ton ;  tugboat  charges  inwards,  $5  to  $10 ;  outwards,  $5  to  $15; 
ballast,  40  cents  per  ton. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 

Tides. — Their  rise  is  considerably  intlnenced  by  the  winds,  so  that 
spring  tides  during  NE.  gales  have  risen  11  feet,  and  neaps  during  SE. 
gales  only  6  feet;  but  these  are  extraordinary  cases.  The  range  of 
the  neap  tides  has  been  at  times  less  than  3  feet.  The  duration  of  the 
two  tides  is  nearly  equal,  and  their  streams  continue  about  a  quarter 
of  an  hour  after  high  and  low  water  by  the  »hore,  running  usnally  at 
the  rate  of  1^  knots  off  the  town,  and  2^  knots  in  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor. 

Directions. — Yesselsenteriug  can  take  the  alignment  (off  Point  Prim) 
of  Haszard  Point  light-houses,  bearing  N.  20°  E.,  and  follow  it,  passing 
west  of  the  bell  buoy  on  Fitzroy  Rock,  until  the  Brighton  Beach  range 
comes  on,  bearing  N.  23°  W.,  when  the  course  mubt  be  changed  and 
t\ie  alignment  kept  until  off  Canseau  Point,  whence  the  course  may  be 
changed  to  the  northward  for  the  town.  The  intersection  of  the  align- 
ments is  about  1,300  yards  8.  60°  E.  of  St.  Peters  Spit  buoy.  On  the 
■two  alignments  nowhere  less  than  5  fathoms  should  be  found. 


II  connectiou 

;  sea  iit  high 
It  C  150  feet 

iirlottetowii; 
Her  quantity 

naive  of  the 
have  about 

raphic  corn- 
ward  Island, 

1  the  eastern 
)n  the  Houth- 
orthwestern 
navigation  a 
mes  there  is 

21st  Decern- 
ly  closed  be- 
t  26th  April, 

discharging 
uage  dues,  2 
[Is,  $5  to  $15; 

e-consul. 
iuds,  so  that 
8  during  SB. 
Ihe  range  of 
ration  of  the 
}ut  a  quarter 
ig  usually  at 
trance  of  the 

r  Point  Prim) 
>w  it,  passing 
Beach  range 
changed  and 
urse  may  be 
of  the  align- 
loy.  On  the 
id. 


ORWELL    BAY — INMAN    ROCK. 


225 


Anchorage. — The  best  anchorage  ground  will  be  found  otf  the  Ferry 
pier  on  the  town  side,  and  in  the  fall  of  the  year  it  is  advisable  to 
moor  NL.  and  SW.  To  the  NI<^.  of  Governor  Island,  under  shelter  of 
the  shoal  sit  its  east  point,  and  off  the  moutli  of  the  shallow  Squaw 
Bay,  then-  is  (food  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  in  from  9  to  12  feet 
with  uiuil  bottom. 

Orwell  Bay,  leading  to  Orwell,  Vernon,  and  Seal  Kivers,  is  2  miles 
wide  at  its  entrance,  between  Gallows  and  i^iicliaiiiin  Points.  In  pro 
ceediug  in  from  I'rim  Island  towards  Orwell,  the  shallow  waterextends 
to  greater  distances  from  the  shore  until  at  last  it  stretrhcs  nearly  half- 
way across  tiie  month  of  Orwell  IJay.  Its  edge  in  li  latlKiins  is  there 
1^  miles  out  from  the  clitt's,  and  has  a  rock  upon  it,  with  9  feet  least 
water,  wliieh  bears  N.  70°  VV.  a  long  mile  from  Buchanan  Point,  and 
south  1^  miles  fiom  (Jallows  Point.  Between  the  sluials  just  mentioned 
and  those  which  stretch  over  to  the  southward  from  Gallows  Point 
the  channel  is  800  yards  wide  and  carries  nearly  5  fathoms  water,  be- 
coming shallower  and  narrower  within  the  bay,  until  off  Mcilnnis  Point 
(li  miles  in  from  the  entrance  and  on  the  northern  shore)  it  suddenly 
contracts  to  less  than  200  yards  in  breadth  and  decreases  in  depth  to 
14  or  15  feet  at  low  water  in  spring  tides. 

Just  within  China  Point  (on  the  northern  shore,  and  2  miles  within 
the  bar)  is  the  continence  of  the  Orwell  and  Vernon  liivers,  and  there 
vessels  may  lie  landlocked,  the  channel  being  170  yards  wide  and  car- 
rying 5  fathoms  water  between  mud  tiats  dry  at  low  tide. 

Fownal  Bay  is  shallow  and  open  to  westerly  winds;  it  artbrds  shel- 
ter to  small  craft  and  boats  near  its  head,  which  dries  extensively  at 
low  water. 

Gallows  Point,  separating  Pownaland  Orwell  Bays,  has  a  long  reef 
of  sandstone  ami  extensive  shoals  oft'  it,  on  which  are  scattered  rocks, 
covered  with  only  a  few  feet  water.  The  shoals  extend  in  the  direction 
of  Governor  Island  to  the  distance  of  2  miles,  and  also  a  long  mile 
towards  Prim  Point.  There  is,  moreover,  a  detached  shoal,  with  13  feet 
least  water,  bearing  S.  73^  W.,  2  miles  from  Gallows  Point. 

Coast — From  St.  Peters  Island  to  Marie  Head,  a  distanceof  9  miles 
to  .the  westward,  the  coast  is  straight  and  unbroken,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached by  the  lead  to  .")  fatlioms  water;  bearing  in  mind  that  that 
depth  is  ot<!asionaily  within  400  yards  of  shallow  water,  extending  in 
some  places  ^  luile  from  the  shore. 

Sable  Cove,  between  the  two  last-named  headlands,  is  nearly  dry  at 
low  water,  and  crossed  by  a  bridge  one  mile  from  its  entrance. 

Marie  Head  has  a  reef  running  out  from  it  nearly  a  mile,  and 
which  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  5  fathoms. 

Inman  Rock,  with  4  feet  least  water,  lies  near  the  outer  point  of 
this  reef,  south  §  mile  from  Brockelby  Head,  and  has  from  13  to  19  feet 
of  water  around  it.    Large  vessels  should  not  approach  it  nearer  than 
the  low-water  depth  of  4i  fathoms. 
5314 15 


^-jan 


226 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND SOUTH    COAST. 


Brockelby  Head  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay  in  which  Brockelby 
River  and  Crapaud  Koad  are  situated.  It  has  clay  cliflfs,  15  feet  high, 
baseil  upon  sandstone,  which  runs  out  a  mile  to  the  southward;  forming 
a  dangerous  reef,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided  by  vessels  approach- 
ing Crapaud  from  the  eastward. 

Crapaud  Road  is  a  small  but  secure  anchorage  oflf  the  mouth  of 
Brockelby  River,  and  between  the  eastern  part  of  theTryon  Shoab  and 
the  land.  Tlie  space  in  which  vessels  may  ride  in  from  12  to  15  feet  at 
low  water  is  about  J  mile  long  and  400  yards  wide;  but  the  anchorage 
for  small  craft,  in  from  7  to  9  feet,  is  more  extensive,  continuing  nearly 
a  mile  farther  to  the  westward  in  a  narrow  channel  or  cove  in  the  sands 
which  dry  at  low  water.  The  entrance  to  this  road  between  the  eastern 
point  of  the  Tryon  Shoals  and  the  shallow  water  off  tlie  shore  to  the 
eastward  is  only  180  yards  wide,  and  carries  9  feet  at  low-water  spring 

tides. 

Buoyage.— A  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  white,  in  vertical  stripes, 
is  moored  with  Brockleby  Head  bearing  N.  84°  B.,  distant  one  mile ; 
also  with  Crapaud  leading  lights  in  line,  bearing  N.  19°  W.  A  smaller 
buoy,  similarly  painted,  is  also  moored  on  the  mark  of  the  leading  lights 
in  line,  distant  'i  mile  from  the  first  buoy.  A  small  cask  buoy,  painted 
black  and  white,  in  vertical  stripes,  lies  N.  76°  W.,  distant  J  mile  from 
the  northern  of  the  above  buoys. 

Channel— A  dredged  channel,  with  a  depth  of  8  feet  in  it,  and 
marked  by  poles,  extends  from  the  western  buoy  to  a  basin,  which  has 
a  depth  of  8  feet,  and  is  300  yards  in  extent,  situated  close  to  the 

bridge. 

DirectiouB.— To  enter  Crapaud  Road  bring  the  leading  lights  in  line, 
bearing  N.  20°  W.,  and  proceed  on  tliat  mark  to  the  northern  buoy  ; 
then  alter  course  for  the  western  buoy,  N.  60°  W.,  for  ^  mile,  or  at  night 
until  the  southern  leading  light  bears  N.  4°  E.,  when  it  may  be  steered 
for  and  the  basin  entered.  No  sea  of  consequence  ever  comes  into  this 
anchorage,  the  sands  outside  being  covered  only  to  a  depth  of  a  few 
feet  at  high  water ;  and  the  shallow  water  to  the  eastward,  off  Inman 
Point  and  Brockelby  Head,  overlapping  the  entrance. 

Tides.— There  is  a  depth  of  from  15  to  17  feet  at  high  water  in  the 
entrance  or  on  the  bar  of  the  road.  The  tidal  streams  are  weak  and 
irregular ;  in  general  their  rates  do  not  exceed  half  a  knot  at  the  anchor- 
age, but  they  sometimes  amount  to  IJ  knots  for  a  short  time  along  the 
edge  of  the  shoals  and  in  the  entrance. 

Tryon  Shoals,  of  sand  upon  sandstone,  dry  out  1^  miles  off  shore, 
between  the  Tryon  and  Brockelby  Rivers,  and  their  SW.  extreme,  in  3 
fathoms,  is  distant  2i  miles  from  Tryon  Head,  the  nearest  part  of  the 

shore. 

Mark.— There  is  an  excellent  leading  mark,  namely,  Cape  Traverse 
and  Carleton  Head  in  line,  bearing  N.  53°  W.,  which  clears  the  SW. 
point  of  the  shoals  in  5  fathoms,  and  at  a  distance  of  a  long  i  niile. 


TRYON    RIVER — 8UMMERSIDE. 


227 


ch  Brockelby 
15  feet  high, 
Fard;  forming 
lels  approach- 
he  mouth  of 
)D  Shoab  and 
i  to  15  feet  at 
he  anchorage 
inning  nearly 
e  in  the  sands 
en  the  eastern 
)  shore  to  the 
r-water  spring 

ertical  stripes, 
mt  one  mile; 
W.  A  smaller 
leading  lights 
buoy,  painted 
at  J  mile  from 

'eet  in  it,  and 
in,  which  has 
I  close  to  the 

r  lights  in  line, 
ortheru  buoy ; 
ile,  or  at  night 
nay  be  steered 
comes  into  this 
lepth  of  a  few 
ird,  off  Inman 

1  water  in  the 
are  weak  and 
t  at  the  anchor- 
time  along  the 

liles  ofif  shore, 
.  extreme,  in  3 
est  part  of  the 

Cape  Traverse 
lears  the  SW. 
a  long  i  niile. 


Farther  eastward  these  shoals  may  be  safely  approached  to  any  con- 
venient depth  by  the  lead,  which  should  never  be  neglected  when  in 
their  vicinity,  for  the  tides  around  the  island  meet  off  them,  causing  vari- 
ations in  the  strength  and  set  of  the  streams,  which  it  would  require 
long-continued  observations  to  understand  or  account  for.  The  stream 
of  ebb  out  of  Bay  Verte  frequently  sets  over  towards  these  shoals,  so 
that  a  vessel  standing  along  the  land  with  a  scant  southerly  wind  will 
often  find  herself  dropping  to  leeward  towards  them  much  faster  than 
her  usual  amount  of  leeway  would  lead  her  to  expect. 

Tryon  River  lies  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Cumoerland  Cove, between 
Tryon  Head  and  Birch  Point,  and  is  approached  by  a  very  narrow 
channel  through  ihe  western  side  of  the  Tryon  Shoals.  There  is  one  foot 
water  over  the  bar  of  this  channel  at  low  water  in  spring  tides.  Small 
schooners  enter  the  Tryon,  with  the  assistance  of  the  tide,  which  rises 
from  0  to  8  feet,  and  there  are  flourishing  farms  on  each  side  of  the 
river. 

Cape  Traverse,  Carleton  Head,  Sea  Cow  Head.— The  points 
between  these  headlands  to  the  SE.  of  Bedeque  are  formed  of  red 
sandstone  and  clay  cliffs,  with  coves  between,  aftbrdingr  shelter  and 
landing  for  boats,  and  also  anchorage  for  small  craft  with  the  wind  off 
the  land  or  in  fine  weather.  The  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond 
600  yards  oft'  either  of  these  headlands,  but  in  the  bays  its  3  fathoms  edge 
is  sometimes  twice  that  distance  from  the  shore,  and  as  the  line  of  5 
fathoms  is  sometimes  quite  close  to  it,  the  general  rule  for  vessels  at 
night  should  be  not  to  approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms. 
In  the  old  charts  a  shoal  with  3  fathoms  water  is  shown  off  Carleton 
Head,  but  a  diligent  search  proved  that  it  has  no  existence. 

In  the  first  4  miles  eastward  from  Cape  Traverse  there  are  three  coves, 
namely.  Provost,  Augustin,  and  Cumberland  Coves,  which  are  sepa- 
rated by  points  of  cliff'  and  are  dry  at  low  water. 

Bedeque  Harbor,  situated  in  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  Sea  Cow 
Head,  runs  in  to  the  eastward  between  Indian  Point  and  Phelan  Point; 
the  tbrnier,  the  south  point  of  entrance,  will  be  easily  distinguished, 
being  faced  by  sandstone  cliff's  25  feet  high,  and  rising  to  double  that 
height  a  short  distance  back  from  the  shore,  whilst  the  other  is  com- 
paratively low  and  wooded.  The  Roman  Catholic  (5hnrch  to  the  east- 
ward of  Phelan  Point  is  very  conspicuous  and  forms  a  good  mark  from 
the  offing. 

Summerside,  a  town  of  considerable  size,  is  situated  on  the  north 
side  of  Bedeque  Harbor.  Several  wharves  extend  from  the  town,  to  one 
of  which  the  railway  runs.  This  latter  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
light  tower  on  a  storehouse  near  the  extreme.  A  large  hotel  has  been 
built  on  Indian  Island,  and  communication  is  kept  with  the  town  by  a 
steam  ferry. 

Buoyage. — A  black  buoy  is  moored  off  the  southwestern  extreme  of 
Miscouche  Spit;  it  lies  with  Indian  Head  bearing  If.  63°  E.,  and  Sea 


III 


h 


mm 


228 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND — SOUTH   COAST. 


Cow  Head  liglit-hoase  S.  50°  E.,  distant  3-,%  miles.  Indian  Spit  Buoy 
is  a  can  buoy,  painted  red ;  Middle  Ground  Buoy  is  painted  black,  and 
Island  Shoal  Buoy  is  a  can  buoy,  painted  red. 

The  north  side  of  the  channel  opposite  Island  Shoal  is  generally 
marked  by  a  stake  with  a  bush  on  the  top. 

CoaL — There  are  usually  1,000  tons  in  stock,  exclusive  of  the  amount 
stored  by  the  railway  department.  Vessels  of  less  than  -'0  feet  draft 
can  coal  alongside  the  railway  wharf;  coal  can  be  lijjhtered  to  larger 
vessels  in  the  harbor,  the  lighters  being  loaded  in  bulk.  The  railway 
department  has  usually  about  1,100  tons  in  stock. 

The  United  States  is  represented  b.v  an  agent. 

Directions. — As  the  assistance  of  a  pilot  is  indispensable  to  entor 
Bedeque  Harbor,  it  would  be  advisable-  to  auchor  in  the  bay  or. road- 
stead outside  until  one  is  obtained.  The  anchorage  in  the  roadstead  in 
22  feet  at  low  water,  sand  and  clay  bottom,  is  quite  safe  during  the  sum- 
mer months,  although  open  to  SW.  wiuds,  the  shallowness  of  the 
water  and  the  land  at  the  distance  of  several  miles  preventing  any  very 
heavy  sea  from  coming  in.  Should,  however,  any  ♦extraordinary  cir- 
cumstances render  it  expedient  to  attempt  running  into  the  harbor,  the 
best  mode  of  proceeding  would  be  to  run  along  the  SE.  edge  of  the 
Miscouche  Shoal,  and  then  eastward  along  the  northern  side  of  the 
channel,  by  the  lead,  in  the  low  water  depth  of  18  feet,  until  Indian 
and  Graham  Heads  come  in  one,  bearing  S.  3®  W.,  when  the  vessel 
should  be  immediately  rounded  to,  with  her  head  to  the  southward,  and 
anchored  in  about  4  fatiioms,  mud  bottom ;  she  will  then  be  aboui  800 
yards  within  Indian  Spit  and  in  safety. 

If  the  vessel  be  api»roaching  from  the  eastward  with  an  easterly  wiud, 
Sea  Cow  Head  may  be  safely  rounded  at  a  distance  of  500  yards.  Gra- 
ham Head  may  be  passed  at  twice  that  distance,  and  then  the  edge  of 
the  shallow  water  off  Salutation  Cove  may  be  safely  followed  by  the 
lead  till  Indian  Point  is  approached,  wliere  the  shoal  becomes  very 
steep,  as  is  also  Indian  Spit,  which,  however,  can  frequently  be  seen, 
being  dry  at  low  water. 

Or  steer  NE.  from  the  bay  for  a  conspicuous  gap  in  the  land  to  the 
westward  of  Phelan  Point ;  having  rounded  the  red  buoy  on  Indian  Spit, 
steer  to  clear  the  black  buoy  off  the  Middle,  when  a  course  for  the  east 
end  of  town  will  lead  in  5  to  7  fathoms  to  the  red  buoy  on  Island  Shoal ; 
thence  anchor  as  convenient  in  2^  fathoms.  The  buoy  on  the  Middle 
occasionally  breaks  adrift. 

Miscouche  Bank  dries  out  to  the  distance  of  1^  miles  from  Mis- 
couche Point,  and  extends  2!J  miles  to  the  southward  to  the  denth  of  3 
fathoms,  sheltering  the  roadstead  in  Bedeque  Bay,  outside  Bedeque 
Harbor,  from  westerly  winds.  The  northern  extremes  of  Indian  Point 
and  Indian  Island  in  one,  bearing  N.  05°  E.,  clear  the  south  point  of  the 
spit  in  1-t  feet  water,  but  the  lead  will  be  a  sufficient  guide  when  a 
greater  depth  is  required. 


I  Spit  Buoy 
il  black,  and 

is  generally 

'  the  aniouut 
.'0  feet  draft 
ed  to  larger 
The  railway 


ible  to  entor 
jay  or.road- 
fOiidstead  in 
iiig  thesnm- 
ness  of  the 
iug  any  very 
►rdinary  cir- 
s  harbor,  the 
edge  of  the 
side  of  the 
mcil  Indian 
in  the  vessel 
ithwai  d,  and 
l)e  about  800 

isterly  wind, 
yards.  Gra- 
I  the  edge  of 
owed  by  the 
ecomes  very 
»tly  be  seen, 

land  to  the 

Indian  Spit, 

>  for  the  east 

siaml  Shoal ; 

the  Middle 

es  from  Mis- 
e  denth  of  3 
ide  Bedeque 
Indian  Point 
)  point  of  the 
tide  when  a 


SUNBURY    COVE — EGMONT   BAY. 


229 


Sunbury  Cove,  9  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Gape  Egmont,  is  an  ex- 
tensive place,  but  nearly  dry  at  low' water,  excepting  a  narrow  channel 
through  the  flats  only  fit  for  boats  or  very  small  craft.  Miscouche  Point 
is  the  eastern  point  of  this  cove ;  and  Miscouche  Church  will  be  seen  to 
the  NE.  of  it,  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles  inland. 

Fifteen  Point.— The  church  and  village  at  this  point  stand  near  the 
shore,  4J  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Egmonr,  and  can  be  seen  at 
great  distances,  either  from  the  eastward  or  westward.  The  Roman 
Catholic  cliurch  may  be  distinguished  by  the  body  of  the  building  and 
spire  being  white,  the  roof  light  brown  ;  a  small  white  nave  with  a  black 
top  is  also  attached.  A  tall,  white  beacon  stands  a  little  to  the  eastward. 
At  the  extremity  of  the  point,  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  church, 
there  I's  a  low  rock  above  water,  called  the  Little  Dutchman,  and  shallow 
water  to  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  otf  shore. 

Egmont  Bank,  of  tine  red  sand,  and  with  4  fathoms  least  water,  is 
very  narrow,  and  2^  miles  long.  Its  northern  end  bears  S.  88°  W.  5 
miles  from  Cape  Egmont,  its  southern  end  S.  59°  W.  4  miles  from  the 
same  heiidland,  and  there  are  as  much  as  8^  fathoms  and  a  clear  chan- 
nel between  it  and  the  cape. 

From  Sea  Cow  Head  to  Cape  Egmont  there  is  a  bank  of  compara- 
tively shoal  soundings,  curving  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  extend  to  the 
distance  of  3^  miles  off  shore ;  its  southern  edge,  in  5  fathoms,  forms  an 
excellent  guide  for  vessels  at  all  times ;  but  if  of  large  draft  they  should 
be  careful  of  venturing  within  that  depth,  since  there  are  only  3^  fath- 
oms, with  rocky  bottom,  in  one  part. 

Cape  Egmont  is  a  remarkable  headland  with  clitt's  of  sandstone  50 
feet  high.  About  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  it  wili  be  seen  the  Dutch- 
man, an  isolated  rock  30  feet  high,  and  lying  close  to  the  shore.  The 
cape  itself  is  quite  bohl  to  the  southward ;  but  to  the  westMtard  there 
is  shallow  rocky  ground  ^  mile  off  shore,  which  should  not  be  approached 
nearer  than  the  depth  of  6  fathoms. 

Egmont  Bay  is  8  miles  deep,  and  affords  excellent  anchorage  with 
offsiiore  winds  in  from  4  to  7  fathoms,  over  sand  and  clay  bottoms ; 
but  vessels  should  not  anchor  in  less  than  5  fathoms  anywhere  except- 
ing on  the  NW.  side  of  the  bay,  because  there  is  rocky  ground,  with 
only  3^  fathoms  water,  off  the  river  at  its  head,  lying  Just  within  the 
5-fathom.s  line,  uud  at  a  distance  of  3  miles  from  the  shore,  whilst  along 
the  eastern  shore  5  fathoms  would  be  too  near  the  edge  of  the  shoals. 

The  church  of  St.  Jacques  is  conspicuously  situated  5  miles  to  the 
northward  of  Cape  Egmont,  having  the  French  or  Acadian  settlement 
along  the  ridge  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  the  small  river  St.  Jacques, 
with  its  sawmills,  ^  mile  from  it  in  the  opposite  direction.  This  church 
has  a  tower  with  a  portico  attached,  and  forms  a  very  useful  landmark. 
Haldimaud  River,  shallow,  and  running  in  to  the  southward  about  2 
miles,  is  about  halfway  between  the  church  and  Cape  Egmont,  and  has 
sand  hills  on  its  west  or  outer  point  of  entrance.    From  those  sand  hills 


;    P 


1 


!BKr?BW»i«".?«i 


230 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND WEST    COAST. 


I 


■ 


hi^i 


a  sand  bar,  dry  at  low  water,  extends  3  or  4  miles  to  the  northward, 
parallel  to  the  shore,  having  very  narrow  channels  through  it,  which 
are  said  to  shift  at  times  during  heavy  westerly  gales.  At  the  time  of 
the  Admiralty  survey  the  principal  channel  was  pointed  out  by  two 
small  beacons  on  the  shore,  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  church. 
The  course  in,  with  those  beacons  in  one,  was  S.  76°  E.,  turning  short 
to  the  southward  within  the  bar  into  a  harbor  for  small  schooners,  with 
5  feet  in  it  at  low  water,  and  extending  to  the  entrance  of  Haldimaud 

Kiver. 

There  is  a  conspicuous  white  house  between  Cape  Egmont  and  Red 
Head  or  DuUihman  Point.  A  village  is  situated  midway  between  Cape 
Egmont  and  the  Roman  Catholic  Cliurch  The  houses  on  the  east  part 
of  the  bay  are  somewhat  scattered. 

West  Point— The  western  point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  consists 
of  sand  hills  12  feet  high.  Excepting  in  the  direction  of  the  spit  the 
shallow  water  does  not  extend  far  from  it,  and  there  is  good  anchorage 
under  it  in  winds  from  between  north  and  east  in  4  fathoms,  flue  sandy 

bottom. 

West  Reef  is  a  narrow  and  rocky  ridge,  with  irregular  soundings 
from  23  to  6  fathoms.  The  least  water,  16  feet,  is  near  the  middle  of 
the  reef,  and  there  are  18  feet  near  its  southern  extreme,  which  bears 
from  West  Point  N.  74°  W.  3J  miles,  and  is  distant  2^  miles  from  the 
nearest  part  of  the  shore.  Its  northern  end  is  3^  miles  offshore  at  the 
highest  part  of  the  cliffs  between  McWilliams  Cove  and  Cape  Wolfe. 

There  are  no  leading  marks  for  this  reef,  and  as  there  are  13  fathoms 
in  one  part  close  to  its  outer  edge,  it  is  very  dangerous  to  ships  rcmnd- 
ing  West  Point,  and  can  only  be  certainly  avoided  at  night  or  in  thick 
weather  by  following  the  edge  of  the  bank  of  soundings  off  the  main 
land  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  which  will  lead  past  it  at  the  distance  of  3 
miles  to  the  westward.  There  is  a  passage  within  the  reef,  between  it 
and  the  West  Spit,  but  it  is  narrow,  with  irregular  soundings  and  strong 
tides,  and  should  therefore  never  be  attempted  in  a  large  vessel. 

Tides.— The  strength  and  direction  of  the  tidal  streams  about  the 
West  Reef  are  very  irregular,  being  influenced  "by  winds,  varying  also 
with  the  time  of  tide,  and  probably  with  the  age  of  .iie  moon.  In  the 
deep-water  channel  passing  close  on  the  outside  of  the  West  Reef  the 
rate  of  the  stream  sometimes  amounts  to  2A  miles  per  hour,  causing  a 
heavy  sea  when  running  against  the  wind. 

West  Spit.— The  West  Spit  of  sand  upon  sandstone,  covered  in  some 
parts  with  only  a  few  feet  of  water,  runs  out  from  West  Pont  3  miles 
to  the  N.  W.,  and  then  trends  N.  B.  within  the  West  Reef,  so  that  the 
latter  overlaps  it  at  the  distance  of  i  mile.  There  is  a  "cul  de  sac" 
between  the  spit  and  the  shore,  open  to  the  northward,  and  in  which 
there  are  from  6  to  4  fathoms  water. 

Miminegash  Reef  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  and 
nearly  a  mile  in  length  parallel  to  the  shore,  from  which  its  outer  edge 


NORTH    POINT, 


231 


1  northward, 
»h  it,  which 
the  time  of 
out  by  two 
f  the  church, 
iruing  short 
looiiers,  with 
'  Haldimaud 

ont  and  Bed 
etweeu  Cape 
the  east  part 

land  consists 
r  tlie  spit  the 
>d  anchorage 
IS,  flue  sandy 

nr  soundings 
the  middle  of 
,  which  bears 
liles  from  the 
Bfshore  at  the 
;ape  Wolfe, 
•e  13  fathoms 
ships  round- 
tit  or  in  thick 
oil'  the  main 
distance  of  3 
if,  between  it 
fis  and  strong 
vessel. 

ins  abour  the 
varying  also 
loon.  In  the 
Vest  Beef  the 
ur,  causing  a 

vered  in  some 
Po-nt  3  miles 
f,  so  that  the 
i"cul  de  sac" 
and  in  which 

)w  water,  and 
its  outer  edge 


is  distant  J  mile.  It  lies  directly  off  the  sandy  beach  and  across  the 
outlet  of  North  Miniinegash  Pond,  which  is  15  miles  from  North  Point. 
There  are  2J  fathoms  water  between  the  reef  and  the  shore,  and  vessels 
have  in  one  or  two  instances  been  moored  there  during  the  summer 
months  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber ;  but  it  is  a  very  unsafe  place. 

North  Point  is  of  low  red  cliffs.  It  has  a  reef  extending  from  it  to 
the  northward  and  eastward  \\  miles  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms;  more- 
over rocky  and  irregular  soundings  from  6  to  7  fathoms  continue  for 
several  miles  farther  out  to  the  NB.,  causing  at  times  a  dangerous  break- 
ing sea,  and  terminating  in  a  small  patch  of  rocks  on  which  there  is  lit- 
tle more  than  4  fathoms  in  low  spring  tides,  and  which  bears  from  the 
North  point  N.  21°  B.  ^  miles.  Fishermen  report  the  existence  of  a 
shoal  of  3^  fathoms,  which  breaks  in  bad  weather  about  8  miles  N.  B., 
which  is  iuost  probably  the  4  fathom  patch.  The  inner  part  of  reef 
dries  out  J  mile  from  the  point,  aflfording  shelter  to  fishing  schooners, 
which  shift  from  side  to  side  as  the  wind  changes. 

The  "West  Coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  from  the  west  to  the  north 
point  is  unbroken,  and  formed  of  red  clay  and  sandstone  cliffs,  with 
intervening  sandy  beaches,  affording  landing  for  boats  in  fine  weather* 
There  are  several  Ponds  where  boats  can  be  secured,  such  as  Nail  and 
Black  Ponds,  and  North  and  South  Miminegash,  but  their  outlets 
through  sandy  beaches  are  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water  and  of  no  use  to 
vessels.  The  shallow  water  runs  out  to  considerable  distances  off  vari- 
ous parts  of  this  coast,  and,  as  a  general  rule,  for  large  ships  it  should 
not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  11  fathoms  at  night  or  in 

thick  weather. 

EAST  AND  NORTH  COASTS. 

Cape  Bear,  the  southern  point  of  the  east  coas  of  Prince  Edward 
Island,  will  be  known  by  the  large  rock,  12  feet  high,  which  lies  close 
under  its  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  ;  and  Murray  Head,  a  mile  farther  to 
the  northward,  by  its  forming  the  extreme  northeastern  point  of  the 
cliffs,  where  they  turn  abruptly  to  the  westward  towards  Murray  Har- 
bor. 

Bear  Reef  runs  out  to  the  eastward  from  between  Cape  Bear  and 
Murray  Head,  and  is  composed  of  sandstone  and  large  stones.  There  is 
but  little  water  over  the  greater  part  of  this  extensive  and  irregularly 
shaped  reef,  which  has  7  or  8  fathoms  close  to  its  edge,  and  is  therefore 
dangerous  to  vessels  rounding  the  cape  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather, 
when  they  should  not  approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms 
either  to  the  eastward  or  southward  of  the  reef. 

Mark. There  are  no  close  leading  marks  for  passing  to  the  eastward 

of  this  reef,  but  Panmure  Head  and  Terras  Point  in  one,  bearing  N.  20<^ 
W.,  clear  it  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  in  that  direction ;  at  night  the 
light  on  Panmure  Head  must  be  kept  open  of  Terras  Point.  Guernsey 
Point  kept  well  open  to  the  southward  of  Black  Rock  Point  will  lead  to 
the  southward. 


■-mm 


232 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — EAST    COAST. 


w 


M^ 


Water. — At  the  dintance  of  700  jards  to  tbe  sontliward  of  Murray 
Head  tliere  is  a  fine  little  stream  of  fresb  water  wortby  of  notice,  because 
tbere  are  so  few  places  on  the  island  where  a  large  ship  can  readily 
water.  Boats  can  land  there  in  westerly  winds,  when  vessels  will  find 
good  anchorage  under  the  head. 

Fishermans  Bank  is  of  sandstone,  thinly  covered  with  stones,  gravel, 
and  broken  hliells.  From  the  least  water,  4  fathoms,  Murray  Head,  tbe 
nearest  land,  bears  west  7^  miles;  and  there  is  another  patch  with  5 
fathoms  3  mile  farther  east.  There  arc  irregular  soundings,  from  10  to 
20  fathoms,  between  this  bank  and  Bear  Reef,  and  in  every  other  direc- 
tion around  it  from  15  to  20  fathoms.  The  steeple  of  the  English 
church  at  Georgetown,  in  line  with  Panmure  Head,  bearing  N.  52°  W., 
would  lead  over  the  bank  in  5  fathoms ;  but  the  church  can  seldom  be 
seen  fr.mi  the  bank,  being  distant  fron)  it  15  miles. 

Murray  Harbor  has  an  exceedingly  dftngerous  bar  of  sand,  over 
which  10  feet  can  be  carried  at  low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides;  but 
strong  easterly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  as  to  render  it  at  times  im- 
passable. 

On  tbe  outer  edge  of  the  bar  a  buoy  is  moored  in  3  fathoms,  witli  the 
white  beacon  on  old  Store  point  (the  sandy  south  point  of  entrance  )  in 
line  with  the  black  ball  on  the  white  gable  of  the  transit  barn,  bt-aring 
8.  54°  W.  The' barn  stands  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  harbor  '^  mile 
within  the  entrance,  and  when  in  line  with  the  beacon  leads  in  through 
the  deepest  water  (1860.)  There  is,  moreover,  an  inn^r  buoy  in  the  fair- 
way, ^  mile  within  the  outerone,  and  which  is  intended  to  enable  vessels 
to  run  in  when  hazy  weather  prevents  the  leading  mark  from  being 
seen. 

Directions. — To  run  in,  look  out  for  the  outer  buoy,  or,  being  in  not 
less  than  5  fathoms,  bring  the  light-houses  or  the  white  beacon  and  the 
black  ball  on  the  white  gable  of  the  transit  barn  in  line,  bearing  S.  •'!4° 
W.,  and  kee|)  them  so  exactly  until  the  vessel  arrives  about  300  yards 
from  the  beacon,  when  haul  a  little  to  the  northward,  so  as  to  pass  Old 
Store  Point  at  the  distance  of  about  50  yards. 

Anchorage — Anchor  within  Old  Store  Point,  or  to  the  west  of  it,  at 
any  distance  not  exceeding  J  mile,  because  farther  in  the  cliannel 
which  ))asse8  to  the  southward  of  all  the  islands  becomes  very  intricate, 
and  would  be  difficult  to  follow  without  a  pilot.  The  depth,  in  the  an- 
chorage recommended,  is  from  3  to  5  fathouis,  with  sand  and  clay  bottom 
and  a  tide  of  2  knots. 

The  entrance  of  Murray  Harbor,  between  Old  Store  Point  and  the 
long  sandy  spit  which  runs  out  to  the  SW.  from  Cody  Point,  is  more 
than  ^  mile  wide,  but  it  is  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  the 
channel  already  described.  Within  this  entrance  the  harbor  is  of  great 
extent,  containing  live  wooded  islands  and  several  rivers  or  sea  creeks 
on  either  side,  besides  the  main  inlet,  Murray  River,  which  is  much 
larger  than  the  rest,  and  navigable  to  the  distance  of  6  miles  from  the 


rd  of  Murray 
)tice,  because 
►  can  readily 
isels  will  fiud 

tones,  gravel, 
ay  Head,  tbe 
patch  with  5 
[s,  from  10  to 
V  other  direc- 
the  English 
g  N.  52°  W., 
\n  seldom  be 

)f  sand,  over 
ig  tides;  but 
D  at  times  im- 

ims,  with  the 
entrance  )  in 
>arn,  bt-aring 
larbor  '^  mile 
is  in  through 
)y  in  the  fair- 
nable  vessels 
k  from  being 

being  in  not 
icon  and  the 
taring  S.  -'4° 
lit  300  >  ards 
1  to  pass  Old 

west  of  it,  at 
the  channel 
ery  intricate, 
bh,  in  the  an- 
i  clay  bottom 

)int  and  the 
3int,  is  more 
scepting  the 
or  is  of  great 
>r  sea  creeks 
lich  is  much 
lies  from  the 


MURRAY    AND   GEORGETOWN    HARBORS. 


233 


entrance,  or  nearly  to  the  dam  which  has  been  constructed  across  it 
near  its  head.  There  are  flourishing  settlements  all  around,  the  prin- 
cipal one  being  at  South  River,  where  the  English  church, distinguished 
by  its  steeple,  will  be  seen  on  the  southern  shore  2  miles  within  the  en- 
trance of  the  harbor. 

Qraham  Ledge.— At  4^  miles  from  Murray  Head  is  Graham  Point, 
from  which  (iraliam  Ledge  runs  out  one  mile.  Tlie  shallowest  part  of 
this  ledge,  with  G  feet  least  water,  bears  N.  45°  E.  800  yards  from  the 
extremity  of  *'"i  point.  There  is  also  a  rocky  shoal  onj  mile  farther  to 
the  n-  w  whiiih  runs  out  g  rail.  ''~t'  between  Terras  and  Smith 
Points,  ctid  fv.  ,'rouud  with  from  4  i  "■  lathoms  at  low  water  extends 
off  the  latter  to  the  distance  of  1^  miles. 

Georgetown  Harbor,  sometimes  called  Three  Rivers,  is  situated  on 
the  SVV.  side  of  Cardigan  Bay,  3  miles  within  Panmure  Head.  It  is 
the  finest  harbor  in  the  southern  part  of  the  gulf,  exceiitinf;^  Charlotte- 
town,  having  depth  of  water  and  space  sufficient  for  the  largest  ships. 
The  rise  of  ordinary  spring  tides  being  only  5  feet  is  a  great  disadvan- 
tage as  compared  with  Charlottetown. 

Coal. — About  300  tons  are  usually  kept  in  stock,  exclusive  of  the 
quantity  stored  by  the  railway  department ;    generally  about  550  tons. 

Vessels  of  less  than  19  feet  draft  can  coal  alongside  the  railway 
wharf.  In  the  summer  mouths,  with  short  notice,  coal  can  be  brought 
alongside  in  schooners  of  30  to  60  tons. 

Telegraph  and  Railway. — Georgetown  is  connected  with  Charlotte-, 
town  by  telegraph  and  railway ;  there  is  steam  communication  with 
Pictou  once  a  week  during  the  summer;  and  as  often  as  possible,  before 
and  after  the  close  of  ordinary  navigation,  by  a  steam  vessel  specially 
constructed  for  breaking  through  ice.  This  vessel  is  usually  unable  to 
make  the  passage  from  Georgetown  to  Pictou  between  the  end  of  Jan- 
uary and  the  end  of  March. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Supplies. — Almost  all  kinds  of  supplies  may  be  obtained  at  George- 
town, but  fresh  water  in  large  quantities  only  from  wells,  as  in  most 
other  parts  of  the  island. 

Panmure  Island  is  in  great  part  wooded,  and  has  cliffs  of  red  sand- 
stone 40  feet  high  along  its  northeastern  shore.  It  is  joined  to  the 
land  to  the  southward  by  a  narrow  sand  bar  always  above  water  and 
more  than  a  mile  in  length.  Within  this  bar  is  St.  Marys  Bay,  and 
farther  westward  Sturgeou  and  Livingstone  Bays,  all  three  having  a 
common  entrance  to  the  NW.  of  the  island,  between  Panmure  Spit 
and  the  shoal  off"  Grave  Point,  and  which,  although  very  narrow,  has 
depth  of  Wiiter  sufficient  for  vessels  of  large  draft. 

Panmure  Ledge  is  of  sandstone,  and  its  outer  extreme  in  5  fathoms 
and  'i  mile  offshore,  will  be  just  cleared  by  keeping  Graham  Point  and 
and  Murray  Head  in  one,  bearing  south. 


i   gi 


a   n 


234 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND EAST   COAST. 


1 


."it 


Fanmure  Shoal. — Paumnre  Sboal  extends  to  the  distance  of  § 
mile  oft'  the  northern  shore  of  Panmure  Island;  and  Paniuure  Spit, 
which  forms  the  western  side  of  the  shoal  and  is  of  sand,  dry  at  low 
water  equally  as  far  to  the  NW.  from  Billhook  Point,  the  NW.  extreme 
of  the  island.  The  buoy  marking  its  northern  edge  is  a  black  can  buoy ; 
and  a  black  spar  buoy  marks  the  shoal  extending'  eastward  from  Grave 
Point. 

Cardigan  Shoal,  stretching  to  the  south  and  east  from  Cardigan 
Point,  which  separates  Cardigan  River  from  the  harbor,  is  an  extensive 
shoai  of  sandstone;  the  least  water  on  it  is  4  feet,  and  it  has  only  6 
feet  at  low  water  ^  mile  out  from  the  shore.  The  red  can  buoy  moored 
on  its  S£.  extreme  in  5  fathoms  is  distant  one  mile  from  the  low 
clift's  at  the  extremity  of  the  point.  From  this  buoy  Panmure  Head 
(distant  IJ  miles)  is  in  one  with  Terras  Point,  bearing  S.  lil°  E.;  and 
French  Point  is  seen  over  the  sandy  spit  of  Aitkins  Point,  and  in  one 
with  its  wooded  extreme,  bearing  N.  85°  W. 

On  the  iSVV.  extreme  of  the  Cardigan  Shoal  a  red  can  buoy  is 
moored  in  4  fathoms  with  Cardigan  Point  bearing  N.  7°  E.;  Brudenell 
Islet  and  Gandin  Point  touching  and  bearing  N.  60°  W.;  and  the  buoy 
on  the  Panmure  Shoal  S.  24°  VV.,  distant  J  mile. 

St  Andrew  ShoaL — A  buoy,  with  only  8  to  10  feet  of  water  between 
it  and  the  shore,  is  moore.d  in  4J  fathoms  east  800  yards  from  St.  Andrew 
light-house. 

The  Knoll,  a  small  sandy  shoal,  probably  based  upon  sandstone,  and 
with  9  feet  least  water,  lies  just  outside  the  entrance  of  Georgetown 
Harbor,  and  directly  in  the  way  of  its  navigation.  There  is  a  red  can 
buoy  on  its  SW.  extreme,  with  the  north  extreme  of  Bough  ton  Island 
and  Cardigan  Point  touching,  and  bearing  N.  64°  E. ;  Grave  Point  S- 
25°  W. ;  the  west  side  of  Thrumcap  Islet  N.  2°  E.  850  yards. 

Thrumcap  Shoal  runs  out  from  the  Thrumcap  (which  is  a  small 
wooded  and  clitt'y  islet  joined  to  the  eastern  point  of  entrance  of  George- 
town  Harbor  by  a  sand  bar)  600  yards  in  a  southwesterly  direction.  On 
its  western  extreme,  in  3  fathoms,  a  red  cask  buoy  is  moored  with  the 
cnpola  and  the  steeple  of  the  churches  in  Georgetown  in  one,  bearing  N. 
15°  W.,  the  NW.  sideof  the  Thrumcap  N.  55°  E.  This  shoal,  which  is 
of  sand,  and  dry  at  low  water  nearly  all  the  way  out  to  the  buoy,  com- 
pletes the  shelter  of  the  harbor,  preventing  any  sea  of  consequence  from 
rolling  in. 

The  entrance,  between  the  Thrumcap  and  St.  Andrew  Point,  on  the 
southwestern  shore,  is  |  mile  wide,  bnt  the  shoals  diminish  the  breadth 
of  the  channel  to  450  yards,  and  it  is  still  narrower  at  the  knoll,  where 
it  is  scarcely  400  yards;  whilst  farther  out  still,  between  the  Cardi- 
gan and  Panmure  Shoals,  it  is  no  more  than  500  yards,  considering 
it  to  be  bounded  by  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  on  each  side.  Within  the 
Thrumcap  the  northern  shore  of  the  harbor  forms  a  bay  J  mile  wide,  the 


\m 


!;it' 


GEORGETOWN    HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 


235 


istance  of  § 
biiiuure  Spit, 
I,  dry  at  low 
'SW.  extreme 
ck  can  bnoy ; 
I  from  Grave 

)m  Gardigau 
an  extensive 
t  has  only  6 
buoy  moored 
rom  tlie  low 
umure  Head 
liio  E.;  and 
t,  and  in  one 

can  buoy  is 
.;  Brudenell 
and  the  buoy 

iiter  between 
I  St.  Andrew 

ndiitone,  and 
Georgetown 
3  is  a  red  can 
ghton  Island 
ave  Point  S- 
ds. 

b  is  a  small 
ce  of  George- 
rectioii.  On 
red  witb  the 
e,  bearing  N. 
lOiil,  which  is 
e  buoy,  com- 
squeiice  from 

Point,  on  the 
1  the  breadth 
knoll,  where 
n  the  Cardi- 
,  considering 
Within  the 
nile  wide,  the 


NW.  point  of  which  is  Gaudiu  Point,  having  a  sandy  spit  running  out 
from  it  J  mile  to  the  SW. 

Anchorage.— The  usual  and  best  anchorage  in  Georgetown  Harbor 
for  large  vessels  is  between  this  spit  and  the  Thrumcap  Shoal,  with 
Doctor  Point  touching  Brudenell  Island,  and  the  shore  end  of  tin-  pier 
in  a  line  with  the  square  tower  of  the  English  church,  good  holding 
ground,  nuul ;  but  smaller  vessels  may  anchor  farther  within  the  bay, 
and  will  And  2^  fathoms  within  the  distance  of  200  yards  trom  the 
wharf  at  the  town. 

Observe  tliat,  in  addition  to  the  aid  afforded  by  the  buoys,  the  light- 
house on  St.  Andrew  Point,  kept  in  line  with  a  mast  i  mile  west  of 
the  light  house,  leads  in  between  the  Panmure  and  Cardigan  Shoals 
nearly  in  mid-channel  until  Brudenell  Islet  and  Doctors  Point  come  iu 
one,  bearing  N.  54°  W. ;  when  the  last  named  objects  kept  touching 
lead  into  the  harbor. 

Approaching  the  harbor  tVom  the  southward,  round  Panmure  Ledge 
by  the  lead  in  7  fathoms,  or  by  keeping  Murray  Head  open  to  the  east- 
ward off  Graham  Point  till  the  north  side  of  Panmure  Island  bears  as 
far  to  the  westward  as  N.  84°  W.,  when  the  vessel  may  haul  in  to  the 
northwestward,  following  the  northern  edge  of  the  Panmure  Shoal  until 
the  light-house  and  mast  bearing  N.  87°  W.  can  be  made  out  aud 
brought  in  one,  as  before  directed.  If  it  should  so  happen  that,  from 
thick  weather  or  other  cause,  this  mark  can  not  be  seen,  the  northern 
edge  of  the  Panmure  Shoal  may  safely  be  followed  by  the  lead,  in  6 
fatho  i>s,  to  within  J  mile  of  the  bnoy,  when  the  shoal  becomes  too  steep 
to  be  safely  followed  farther.  In  like  manner  the  southern  edge  of  the 
Cardigan  Shoal  may  be  followed  from  the  outer  buoy  to  the  inner  buoy 
on  its  SW.  extreme,  and  the  vessel  may  either  bring  np  in  the  outer 
anchorage,  i  mile  within  the  latter  in  a  line  towards  the  Thrumcap, 
or  proceed  into  the  harbor,  as  may  be  expedient.  Between  the  Gau- 
din  Spit  and  Aitkins  Point  the  channel  of  the  harbor  is  only  350 
yards  wide,  from  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms,  and  carries  6J 
fathoms  water;  but  it  expands  again  immediately,  affording  excellent 
anchorage  all  the  way  to  Brudenell  Point,  one  mile  above  the  town. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Georgetown  Harbor  at 
8h.  40m.,  by  the  mean  of  the  morning  and  evening  tides;  the  latter 
being  geuisrally  the  latest  by  about  an  hour  in  the  summer  mouths  j 
springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3i  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  does 
not  exceed  ij  knot. 

Brudenell  and  Montague  Rivers The  former,  the  northernmost 

of  the  two,  is  navigable  for  large  vessels  to  Brudenell  Islet,  l\  miles  up 
and  for  small  craft  and  boats  about  3  miles  farther,  to  the  head  of  the 
tide.  Vessels  of  considerable  burden  can  ascend  the  Montague  nearly 
to  the  bridge,  a  distance  of  4  miles,  and  boats  about  a  mile  farther  to 
where  the  tide  ends.  The  fresh-water  streams  at  the  heads  of  those  sea 
creeks  are  mere  brooks. 


23<; 


PRINCE    EDWAKD    ISLAND — EAST   COAST. 


Cardigan  River,  wliich  with  the  other  two  just  uoticed  has  occa- 
sioned (reorgetown  and  harbor  to  be  called  Three  Rivers,  is  much  the 
largest  of  tiie  three,  being  navigable  for  the  largest  ships  to  the  dis 
tance  of  5  niiles  above  Cardigan  Point;  and  smaller  vessels  can  ascend 
it  2  miles  farther,  or  to  within  ^  mile  of  the  head  of  the  tide,  wjhere  the 
fresh  water  is  iiisigniHcant  in  quantitj'.  This  river,  which  enters  Car- 
digan Bay  on  the  NB.  side  of  Cardigan  Point,  is  rendered  somewhat 
difficult  of  entrance  by  the  Macphee  Shoal  and  the  Maitland  Flat,  which, 
are  very  steep,  and  contract  the  navigable  channel  to  400  yards. 

Cardigan  Bay  is  3:^  miles  wide  at  its  entrance  between  L'amnure 
and  Bonghton  Islands.  It  affords  excellent  anchorage  in  from  0  to  10 
fathoms,  mud  imttom,  with  winds  off  shore,  but  winds  from  NE.  to 
south  send  in  a  heavy  sea. 

Boughton  Island  is  united  on  the  NB.  side  to  Brnce  Point  by  a  dry 
sand  bar  one  mile  in  length,  and  is  divided  into  two  parts,  of  which  the 
aouthern,  ^  mile  long,  is  joined  to  the  remainder  by  a  double  bar  of 
sand  and  shingle  inclosing  a  large  pond.  Boughton  Ledge  runs  out  at 
this  b^ar  to  tlie  distance  of  1,200  yards  to  the  eastward,  and  has  rocks 
uear  its  outer  extreme,  which  always  show.  Boughtoii  Point,  the  south 
extreme  of  the  island,  is  a  cliff'  of  red  sandstone  30  feet  high,  and  has  a 
rock,  which  dries,  off  it,  and  shallow  water  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile. 
Rocky  and  irregular  soundings,  4  to  5  fathoms,  run  out  to  the  eastward 
still  farther,  and  therefore  a  vessel  of  large  draft,  at  night  or  in  thick 
weather,  should  not  round  the  point  in  a  less  depth  than  9  or  8  fathoms. 

Oft"  the  west  side  of  the  island  a  bank,  with  from  3  to  6  fathoms,  ex- 
tends to  the  distance  of  1 J  miles;  and  farther  to  the  westward  there  are 
dangerous  shoals;  which,  together  with  the  Boughton  Spit  and  the 
Mosquito  Sands,  extend  along  the  NE.  shore  of  the  bay  nearly  to  Mait- 
land Point  at  the  entrance  of  the  Cardigan. 

Oft"  Boughton  Sandbar  and  L.uce  Point  the  shallow  water  extends  § 
mile,  and  in  Boughton  Bay  the  line  of  3  lathoms  is  a  mile  out  from  the 
shore. 

Boughton  or  Grand  River  has  a  dangerous  bar  of  sand  one  mile 
out  from  its  entrance,  and  over  which  G  feet,  at  low  water  ordinary 
spring  tides,  can  be  carried  in  a  very  narrow  channel  marked  out  by  three 
buoys.  The  outer  buoy  is  moored  in  3  fathoms,  the  next  in  2  fathoms* 
and  the  inner  one  in  11  feet ;  the  bar  of  6  feet  being  between  the  two 
last.  At  a  short  distance  within  the  inner  buoy,  the  sands  on  each 
side  are  dry  at  low  w.iter,  and  the  channel  can  generally  be  seen  all 
the  remainder  of  rhf  way  to  the  entrance,  where  it  passes  close  round 
the  northern  point  of  the  long  sand-bar  which  stretches  across  from 
the  southern  shore,  to  within  350  yards  of  Banks  Point,  where  there 
is  a  wharf  and  a  ferry. 

Immediately  within  the  entrance  the  inlet  is  a  mile  wide,  but  the  chan- 
nel is  divided,  narrow,  and  intricate,  and  marked  out  by  stakes  between 
sandy  shoals  for  about  one  mile ;  after  which  it  is  clear,  wide,  and  has 


LITTLE    RIVER — EAST   POINT. 


237 


ed  lias  ooca- 
,  is  much  the 
»g  to  the  diS' 
8  can  ascend 
le,  \f:here  the 
I  enters  Oar- 
)d  somewhat 
I  Fhit,  which, 
yards. 

Du  L'iiuinure 
from  0  to  10 
from  NE.  to 

)int  by  a  dry 
of  which  the 
juble  bar  of 
e  runs  oat  at 
id  has  rocks 
nt,  the  Kouth 
h,  and  has  a 
ce  of  ^  mile, 
the  eastward 
it  or  in  tinck 
)r  8  fathoms, 
fathoms,  ex- 
ard  there  are 
pit  and  the 
arly  to  Mait- 

ter  extends  § 
out  from  the 

nd  one  mile 
er  ordinary 
out  by  three 
a  2  fathomS) 
een  the  two 
ads  on  each 
be  seen  all 
close  round 
across  from 
where  there 

luttbechan- 
kes  between 
ide,  and  has 


from  3  to  5  fathoms  water  in  it,  to  the  Narrows,  3  miles  from  tlie  en- 
trance. Boats  can  ascend  3  miles  farther,  or  to  the  bridge.  There  are 
flourishing  settlements  on  each  side  of  this  extensive  inlet,  which,  if  it 
were  not  for  the  shallow  bar,  would  be  a  fine  harbor. 

Little  River,  Fortune  River,  Rollo  Bay,  and  Colville  Bay  and 
River,  occurring  in  onler  in  proceeding  along  the  coast  to  the  NE., 
are  tide  inlets  nearly  barred  up  with  sand,  and  having  small  streams 
at  their  heads  ^  thoy  are  places  only  fit  for  small  craft  and  boats,  having 
firom  3  to  5  feet  over  their  l>ars  at  low  w.iter. 

Colville  Biver,  situated  in  Colville  Bay  between  Sonris  Head  and 
Swaiiton  I*oint,  and  distant  12  miles  NE.  of  Poughton  Point,  is  the 
most  important,  being  the  place  where  the  i)roduceof  the  riiore  eastern 
parts  of  the  island  is  principally  shipped.  Colville  Bay  aflonls  good 
anchorage  with  otl'shor'i  winds,  ami  the  se'tlemeut  of  Sonris,  and  the 
church,  will  be  seen  on  its  eastern  shore. 

Souris  is  a  large  village,  with  a  wliarf  and  3  large  fish-curing  stores 
on  it;  the  eastern  entr<aiice  is  markeil  l)y  a  red  flagstaff,  and  3  black 
buoys  mark  the  passage  up  the  river  for  small  craft.  The  Roman  (,'ath- 
olic  church  is  an  excellent  landmark  ;  Souris  Head  is  blutt'  and  covered 
with  trees,  whilst  the  point  near  it  is  red  sandstone  and  bare. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Coast — Sharp  cliffy  headlands  and  points  of  red  sandstone  separate 
the  bays  in  which  these  rivers  are  situated,  the  clifls  being  from  25  to 
50  feet  high,  and  the  shallow  water  off  them  not  extending  beyond  the 
distance  of  000  yards,  excepting  at  Eglington  Point  (separating  For- 
tune Bay  from  Eglington  Cove),  where  the  reef  extends  a  mile  with  from 
3  to  i^  fathoms  over  rocky  bottom  ;  but  this  is  within  the  line  joining 
Howe  Point  on  Souris  Head,  and  therefore  out  of  the  way  of  vessels 
running  along  the  coast. 

The  coast  to  the  eastward  of  Colville  Bay  is  bold  and  free  from 
danger,  excepting  Hervey  Reef,  which  extends  800  yards  from  Hervey 
Point,  and  has  on  it  the  8hallop  Rn^k,  which  always  shows.  Hervey 
Point  is  5  miles  from  Colville  Bay,  and  will  be  known  bj-  its  being  the 
eastern  point  of  Hervej  Cove,  ;■!  wliluu  there  are  some  remarkable  and 
high  sand-hills.  At  Basin  Head,  one  mile  farther  to  the  eastward,  the 
cliffs  terminate  and  sand-hills  and  sandy  beach  form  the  shore  nearly 
all  the  way  to  East  Point. 

The  East  Lake  is  a  shallow  and  narrow  pond,  within  the  sand-bars, 
extending  from  Basin  Head  to  within  2  miles  of  East  Point,  and  having 
a  narrow  outlet  (2  miles  from  the  head),  which  is  nearly  <lry  at  low 
water.  Boats  and  small  craft  enter  it  for  produce,  the  country  being 
well  settled  along  its  northern  shore. 

East  Point. — The  eastern  point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  is  a  cliflf 
of  red  sandstone  from  30  to  60  feet  high,  from  which  a  reef  runs  out  ^ 
of  mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  not  quite  a  mile  to  5  fathoms. 
In  vessels  approaching  this  reef  at  night,  it  should  be  remembered  that 


«    w 


mm 


238 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — NORTH    COAST. 


tlie  Hood  tide  comes  from  the  northward,  netting  Htrongly  upon  and 
over  it,  and  afterwards  Houth  westward,  between  it  and  tlie  Milne  Bank, 
at  the  rate  of  2^  knots.  There  is  frequently  a  great  rippling  off  the 
point,  hut  the  reef  does  not  extend  farther  than  has  been  stated.  Cau- 
tion is  necessary  when  navigating  in  the  immediate  neighborhood  of 
East  Point,  as  the  tidal  streams  there  are  reported  to  be  irregular  both 
in  direction  and  velocity. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  is  not  good  to  the  northward  of  East 
Point,  the  ground  being  either  loose  or  rocky;  but  to  the  southward  of 
it  there  is  good  riding  with  northerly  winds  as  far  westward  as  the  Gast 
Lake  outlet,  in  a  moderate  depth  of  water,  and  over  a  bottom  of  red 
sand. 

Tides.— The  tides  run  at  the  rate  of  2^  knots  between  the  north  end 
of  Milne  Bank  and  the  point,  but  are  not  nearly  so  strong  farther  to 
the  westward. 

Milne  Bank,  if  considered  to  be  bounded  by  the  depth  of  10  fathoms, 
is  5'i  miles  long  and  1  j  miles  broad  ;  the  bottom  being  sandstone  thinly 
covered  here  and  there  with  red  sand.  The  soundings  are  irregular, 
between  G  and  9  fathoms,  over  the  northern  part  of  the  bank ;  but 
towards  the  southern  end,  and  close  to  the  outer  edge,  there  is  a  shal- 
low -r  part,  1^  miles  in  length,  where  the  least  depth  is  found,  namely, 
4^  fiithoms  at  low  water,  in  spring  tides. 

The  extreme  south  end  of  this  bank,  in  10  fathoms,  bears  S.  24"^  E.  6^ 
miles  from  East  Point;  and  the  north  extreme  N.  88°  E.  2  miles.  Be- 
tween the  northern  part  of  the  bank  and  Bast  Point  there  are  from  10 
to  llj  fathoms,  red  sand  bottom,  the  deepest  water  being  close  to  the 
bank.  The  eastern  or  outer  edge  of  the  bank  is  steep-to,  there  being 
from  12  to  15  fathoms  close  to  it,  and  there  is  frequently  a  great  rip. 
pling  along  it,  caused  by  the  abrupt  opposition  wiiich  it  presents  to  the 
flood  tide  from  the  NE.  The  sea  is  very  heavy  here,  and  also  off  the 
point,  in  strong  NE.  gales. 

The  Coast  from  East  Point  to  St.  Peters  Harbor,  a  distance  of  33 
miles,  is  unbroken,  formed  of  red  sandstone  cliffs,  with  occasional 
patches  of  sandy  beach  at  the  mouths  of  small  streams,  where  boats 
can  land  only  in  fine  weather  or  offshore  winds.  Surveyors  Inlet  will 
not  now  admit  a  boat,  being  closed  with  sand. 

The  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  IJ  mile  anywhere  off'  this 
division  of  the  coast,  and  there  are  in  general  10  fathoms  water  within 
one  mile  of  the  shore  ;  the  bottom  being  of  sandstone,  and  thn  anchor- 
age bad  in  consequence. 

St.  Peters  Bay,  runs  in  7  miles  to  the  eastward,  with  a  depth  in  some 
parts  of  3  fathoms;  nevertheless  it  forms  a  harbor  only  for  smal'  ves- 
sels, there  being  only  10  feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand ;  the  outer 
edge  of  which,  in  3  fathoms,  is  distant  %  mile  from  the  shore.  The  chan- 
nel through  the  bar,  in  which  this  depth  of  10  feet  at  low  water  can  be 
carried,  is  indicated  by  two  buoys ;  it  is  liable  to  shift  in  heavy  gales, 


ly  upon  and 
Milne  Bank, 
pling  off  the 
tated.  Cau- 
fhborbood  of 
•reguliir  both 

ward  of  East 
iouthward  of 
I  a8  the  Oast 
tottoni  of  red 

he  north  end 
ig  farther  to 

f  10  fathoms, 
Istone  thinly 
re  irregular, 
e  bank ;  but 
ere  is  a  shal- 
iind,  namely, 

1  S.  24^-  E.  64 

2  miles.  Be- 
)  are  from  10 

close  to  the 
>,  there  being 
y  a  great  rip. 
eseuts  to  the 
I  also  off  the 

istance  of  33 
th  occasional 
where  boats 
)r8  Inlet  will 

'here  off'  this 

water  within 

tho  anchor- 

lepth  in  some 
)r  smal'  ves- 
td;  the  outer 
!.  The  chan- 
rater  can  be 
heavy  gales, 


ST.  PETERS  BAY CAPE  STANHOPE. 


239 


and  there  is  a  sharp  turn  to  the  eastward  immediately  within  the  en- 
tratu'e;  so  that  altogether  it  is  a  very  ilangerons  place  for  u  stranger 
to  attempt,  or  indeed  for  anyone  excepting  in  tine  weather. 

The  Morrell  River  enters  this  harbor  on  the  8VV.  side  3  miles 
in  from  the  entrance,  and  is  navigable  for  boats  to  the  samedistancte  in- 
laml,  wh«'re  the  piles  which  steady  the  Hoating  bridge  prevent  farther 
a.scenr.  Tliere  ace  several  .smaller  streams  on  the  same  sitle  of  the  har- 
bor, and  at  its  head  St.  Peters  Uiver,  which,  like  the  rest,  becomes  a 
more  brook  at  the  head  of  the  tide. 

The  shores  of  the  harbor  are  well  settled,  and  there  is  a  church  on  the 
eastern  shore  near  its  head,  and  another  with  a  white  steeple  to  the 
westward.  Its  position  will  be  recognized  by  its  magnulcent  range  of 
sand  liills,  which  near  the  entrance  attain  the  elevation  of  70  feet 
above  the  sea,  and  continue  for  sevei.d  miles  to  the  erstward ;  after 
which  there  are  no  more  high  sand  hills  till  we  arrive  it  Surveyors 
Inlet,  within  4  miles  of  East  Point. 

Tides.— The  rate  of  the  tide  streanu.  in  the  ;>arrow  cp^ranct  to  St, 
Peters  Bay  is  nearly  3  kuots(ebb  at  times 4  knots). 

Savage  Harbor,  at  9  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Trac  'i  ,  has  only  2 
feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar,  and  is  therefore  only  tit  iov  boats  or  very 
small  craft.  The  church  here  is  a  good  landr.u  .  Just  to  the  .  est- 
ward  of  its  entrance  there  is  some  compare '^ive,,'  shallow  water,  4^ 
fathoms,  over  rocky  bottom,  at  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  from  the  shore. 
The  distance  across  from  the  head  of  this  harbor  (which  runs  inland  3 
miles)  to  the  head  of  the  Hillsborough  River  is  less  than  one  mile,  and 
there  is  a  road  across. 

Tracadie  Harbor,  or  Bedford  Bay,  is  distan'  4  miles  from  Cape  Stan- 
hope  and  13  miles  from  Cape  Turner.  Its  entrance  is  at  the  western 
extremity  of  a  remarkable  range  of  sand  hills  50  or  60  feet  high.  The 
bar  of  sand,  which  shifts  occasionally  in  heavy  gales,  extends  out  to  the 
distance  of  ij  mile  from  the  entrance,  and  has  a  varying  depth  of  from 
5  to  9  feet  over  it  at  low  water  in  a  channel  only  80  yards  wide  at  the 
time  of  the  survey.  The  place,  ^'erefore,  is  only  fit  for  shiall  vessels, 
and  even  ihey  require  the  assist. i>'  of  buoys  and  favorable  weather 
to  take  the  bar  with  safety.  The  harbor  is  3  miles  wide  within  the  sand 
bar,  an«l  carries  2^  fathoms  water ;  it  sends  oft"  a  branch  to  the  west- 
ward (ailed  Winter  Cove,  a  .-  i  runs  in  4  or  5  miles  to  the  southward, 
approaching  at  its  head  to  vithin  U  miles  of  the  Hillsborough  River, 
to  wliich  there  is  a  good  road  across. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  of  Traca- 
die Harbor  at  7  h. ;  springs  rise  3J  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  The  heights  vary 
according  to  the  direction  of  the  wind.  The  rate  of  the  tide  streams  in 
the  entrance  is  about  2  knots. 

Cape  Stanhope,  on  which  there  is  a  sand  hill  30  feet  high,  J  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  the  entrance  of  Little  Rustico,  has  a  dangerous  reef 
running  out  from  it  ^  of  a  mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  and  one  mile  to 


:! 


240 


PRINCE    EDWARD   ISLAND — NORTH   COAST, 


5  fathoms.  On  some  parts  of  this  reef  there  is  only  one  foot  of  water 
at  the  distance  of  J  mile  from  the  shore.  Between  Cape  Stanhope  and 
Oape  Turner  the  coast  forms  a  curve  or  bay,  in  which  are  situated  the 
entrances  of  the  Rustico  Harbors,  and  where  the  Sfathomc  edge  of  the 
shallow  water  is  seldom  less  than  J  mile  offshore.  Farther  out  the 
holding  grounil  is  bad,  being  of  red  sandstone,  with  an  occasional  thin 
covering  of  sand. 

Little  Rustico  Harbor  has  become  so  shoiil  as  to  be  practically  use- 
less for  general  navigation. 

Q-rand  Rustico  Harbor  has  two  narrow  sandy  entrances  on  either 
side  of  McAuslin  Island,  and  which  are  distant  3  and  5  miles  respect- 
ively to  the  SE.  of  Cape  Turner.  Although  vessels  of  two  or  three  hun- 
dred tons  are  occasionally  built  here  and  floated  light  over  the  bars  in 
fine  weather,  yet  it  is  a  place  only  fit  for  small  vessels;  for  its  shifting 
bars  of  sand  are  extremely  dangerous,  having  a  varying  dei)Mi  of  4  to  6 
feet,  and  extending  out  ^  mile  from  the  shore ;  at  which  distance  there 
are  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  Thelineof  deepest  water  over  each  of  these 
bars  is  pointed  out  by  two  buoys,  the  positions  of  which  are  changed  iis 
occasion  requires. 

Hunter  and  Wheatley  Rivers,  navigable  for  boats  to  the  distance  of 
5  miles  inland,  with  Winter  Creek  between  them,  run  into  this  shallow 
place,  which  extends  5  miles  along  the  coast  within  the  sand  bars  of 
McAuslin  Island  and  Brackley  Point,  which  latter  separates  it  trom 
Little  Rustico. 

There  are  extensive  settlements  here  of  Acadians  and  others.  The 
two  churches  on  the  western  side  of  Winter  Creek  will  be  recognized  by 
their  steeples;  coming  from  the  eastward  these  churches  do  not  open 
oii<-  TOi;y  soon,  but  the  harbor  may  be  recognized  by  the  remarkable 
hummocks  in  its  vicinity.  There  is  also  a  small  chapel  at  the  settlement 
of  New  Glasgow,  on  the  western  side  of  Hunter  River,  but  it  can  not  be 
distinguished  from  the  sea. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Grand  Rustico  H,.rbor 
at  6h  and  40m.;  springs  lise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tide 
streams  in  the  entrances  is  2  knots. 

Cape  Turner  is  the  highest  cliff  on  the  island,  being  of  red  sandstone 
and  conglomerate  120  feet  high. 

New  London  Harbor,  1 J  miles  SE.  from  Cape  Tryon,  bas  its  entrance 
at  the  northwestern  extremity  oJ  a  long  range  of  sand  hills,  the  highest 
of  which  isSo  feet  above  high-water  mark.  The  entrance  of  this  harbor  is 
^  mile  wide,  and  carries  3  fathoms  water,  but  it  is  nevertheless  only  fit  for 
small  vessels,  in  consequence  of  its  dangerous  and  shifting  bar  of  sand, 
over  which,  at  the  time  of  the  survey,  only  5  feet  at  low  water  could  be 
carried  in  a  very  narrow  channel,  indicated  by  two  buoys.  The  bar 
extends  out  to  the  distance  of  f  mile  from  the  entrance,  and  the  shallow 
water  one  mile,  at  which  distance  there  areS  fathoms,  over  sandy  bottom. 

Within  the  entrance,  the  harbor  is  3  miles  wide,  branching  into  two 


CAPE  TRYON — MALPEQUE  HARBOR. 


241 


>t  of  water 
finhope  aucl 
itnated  the 
edge  of  the 
ler  out  the 
isional  thia 

Btieally  use- 

s  on  either 
les  respect- 
r  three  hun- 
the  bars  in 
its  shifting 
th  of4  to6 
tance  there 
ich  of  these 
changed  iis 

distance  of 
his  shallow 
md  bars  of 
tes  it  from 

hers.  The 
'oguized  by 
o  not  open 
•emarkabla 
settlement 
;  can  not  be 

ico  Hrtrbor 
of  the  tide 

[  sandstone 

tsentrauc© 
;he  highest 
is  harbor  is 
only  fit  for 
ar  of  sand, 
>r  could  be 
.  The  bar 
he  shallow 
dy  bottom. 
g  into  two 


principal  and  many  smaller  creeks,  with  small  brooks  at  their  heads. 
Tbe  two  principal  of  these,  namely  Stanley  and  Mill  Kivers,  are  navi- 
gable for  small  craft  and  boats  to  the  head  of  tbe  tide,  a  distance  of  6 
or  7  miles.  There  are  incrersing  settlements  and  a  fertile  country 
around  the  harbor,  the  principal  settlement  being  New  London,  where 
the  English  and  Scotch  churches  are  situated,  on  the  westera  shore,  1^ 
miles  within  the  entrance,  the  former  being  distinguished  by  its  steeple. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Granville  Harbor  at 
6h.  lUm.  Ordinary  springs  rise  3^  feet,  neaps  2  feet,  unless  increased  by 
easterly  winds. 

Cape  Tryon,  1^  miles  NW.  of  New  London  Harbor,  is  a  remarkable 
cliff  of  red  sandstone,  110  feet  high.  The  coast  between  Gape  Tryon 
and  Richmond  Bay  is  nearly  straight,  and  free  from  detached  dangers  ; 
but  the  shallow  water  runs  out  a  considerable  distance,  and  a  large 
ship  should  not  approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms. 

Richmond  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  running  in  about  10  miles  to  the 
southward,  and  crossing  the  island  to  within  2^  miles  of  the  wafers  of 
Bedeque  Harbor.  It  contains  seven  islands,  and  a  great  number  of 
creeks  or  rivers,  some  of  which  are  navigable  for  vessels  of  considerable 
burden,  and  all  of  them  by  small  craft  and  boats.  Grand  '  >er,  which 
is  tbe  principal  inlet,  can  be  ascended  in  boats  to  the  bridge,  a  distance 
of  7  or  8  miles. 

There  are  fine  settlements  at  Grand  Biver,  aud  also  at  Port  Hill,  in 
the  NW.  part  of  the  bay  within  Lennox  Island,  and  where  several 
vessels  load  every  year.  There  is  an  Indian  ciiurch  aud  settlement  on 
Lennox  Island,  but  it  cannot  be  seen  from  the  sea.  There  are  aiso  large 
settlements  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  where  the  churches  of  St.  Eleanor 
and  Miscouche  are  seen  on  the  ridge  which  separates  its  waters  from 
those  of  the  Straits  of  Northumberland. 

Malpeque,  which  has  given  its  name  to  the  harbor,  is  one  of  the 
oldest  settlements  on  the  island,  and,  with  its  church,  an  excellent 
landmark,  and  the  Roman  Gatholic  college,  with  its  two  spires,  to  the 
eastward,  stand  on  the  neck  of  land  between  Darnley  Inlet  and  March 
Water,  2^  miles  south  from  the  entrance  of  tbe  bay.  A  competent 
pilot,  or  a  chart  on  a  large  scale,  could  alone  enable  any  one  to  navigate 
a  ship  through  the  various  channels  and  inlets  of  this  bay. 

Malpeque  Harbor,  which  is  within  the  eastern  entrance  of  Rich- 
mond Bay,  has  15  feet  over  its  outer  bar  at  low  water,  ♦•ogether  with 
depth  and  space  enough  within  for  a  large  number  of  vessels. 

The  principal  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  to  the  southward  of  Billhook 
or  Fish  Island  and  between  it  and  Royalty  Sand,  which  dries  out  a 
long  J  mile  from  Royalty  Point.  The  ground  is  good  in  the  usual 
anchorage,  just  within  this  entrance ;  the  bar  outside  preventing  any 
sea  from  coming  in,  and  the  Horse  Shoe  Sh6als  sheltering  them  from 
westerly  winds  down  the  bay.  The  other  entrance,  to  the  NW.  of 
Billhook  Island,  is  called  the  West  Gully,  and  is  so  narrow  and  in- 
5314 16 


'ii 


mmmwtf 


242 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — NORTH    COAST. 


tricate  as  to  be  only  fit  for  boats  or  very  small  cratt,  although  it  has  a 
depth  of  9  feet  over  its  daugerous  bar  of  sand,  which  is  1^  miles  out 
from  the  shore.  There  will  be  no  probability  of  this  being  mistaken 
for  the  main  entrance,  even  if  the  buoys  were  gone,  if  it  be  remembered 
that  the  main  or  ship  channel  is  to  the  SW.  of  all  the  sand  bars,  in- 
cluding Billhook  Island,  and  between  them  and  the  red  sandstone  clitt's 
of  Cape  Aylesbury,  the  SE.  point  of  the  bay. 

Supplies. — Abundance  ot  fresh  ])rovisions  may  be  obtained  at  Mal- 
peque,  but  water  can  only  be  procured  from  wells,  so  that  it  requires 
considerable  time  and  labor  to  supply  a  ship  for  a  voyage. 

The  Bar  of  Malpeque  Harbor  runs  out  eastward  2^  miles  from  Bill- 
hook Island,  and  then  turns  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  join  the  shore  to 
the  eastward  of  Gape  Aylesbury.  It  is  of  sand,  thinly  and  irregularly 
spread  upon  sandstone,  the  rock  being  in  many  places  quite  bare.  It 
is  exceedingly  dangerous  in  bad  weather,  when  all  signs  of  a  channel 
are  obliterated  by  heavy  breakers.  The  northern  part  of  the  bar,  to  the 
distance  of  1^  miles  out  to  the  eastward  from  Billhook  Island,  is  very 
shallow,  there  being  in  some  places  only  4  feet  at  low  water;  but  the 
extent  of  this  shallow  part  is  well  shown  by  a  good  cross  mark,  namely, 
the  church  of  Malpeque  and  Darnley  Point  in  line,  bearing  S.  11°  W. 

The  narrowest  part  of  the  Ship  Channel  just  within  ortotbe  westward 
of  the  above-named  cross  mark  is  200  yards  wide,  and  carries  4  fath- 
oms water.  Th<,  Inner  Bar,  of  sandstone,  and  with  19  feet  at  low  water, 
is  4  mile  farther  in,  and  has  in  general  a  buoy  upon  it. 

Directions. — Vessels  entering  should  get  Darnley  Point  lights  (about 
^  mile  east  of  Cape  Aylesbury)  in  range  outside  the  bar,  run  in  on  the 
range  S.  21°  W.  until  the  Fish  Island  range  lights  are  brought  into  one, 
when  these  latter  should  be  kept  in  range  on  a  course  N.  85°  W.  until 
the  mid-channel  buoy  is  reached,  when  the  course  of  the  channel  is 
marked  by  the  harbor  buoys. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  may  anchor  outside  the  bar  in  from  5  to  7 
fathoms,  sand  bottom,  to  wait  for  a  pilot ;  and  in  the  event  of  the  wind 
or  tide  failing,  the  anchorage  is  considered  tolerably  safe  between  the 
Inner  Bar  aud  the  entrance,  and  probably  is  so  with  any  wind  that 
would  prevent  a  vessel  from  running  in,  but  the  holding  ground  is  not 
prood  there,  and  should  only  be  trusted  in  fine  summer  weather.  Within 
tiie  harbor  the  bottom  is  of  sand  and  clay,  and  a  vessel  may  choose  any 
depth  from  3  to  10  fathoms,  the  deepest  water  being  close  ofl^"  the  point 
of  the  Royalty  Sand. 

Tides. — The  rise  is  so  irregular,  that  it  would  not  be  safe  to  count 
upon  a  rise  of  more  than  2  feet  on  any  particular  day.  NE.  winds  cause 
high  tides ;  westerly  winds  produce  the  contrary  effect.  The  morning 
tides  are  the  highest  during  the  summer  months.  The  rate  of  the 
tides  is  strongest  in  theentrance  and  off  the  point  of  the  Royalty  Sand, 
running  in  spring  tides  2^  knots.  In  the  Ship  Channel,  from  the  en- 
tk  ■.ice  to  the  bar,  the  rate  is  1^  to  2  knots.  Within  the  bay  the  tides 
a'  .  in  general  much  weaker,  seldom  amounting  to  one  knot. 


■-# 


CASCUMPEQUE    HARBOR. 


243 


lough  It  Las  a 
li  miles  out 
^iiig  mistaken 
je  remembered 
I  sand  bars,  in- 

indstone  clift's 

Uiued  at  Mal- 
fat  it  requires 

lies  from  Bill- 
n  the  sbore  to 
nd  irregularly 
[oite  bare.    It 
of  a  channel 
the  bar,  to  the 
slaud,  is  very 
cater;  but  the 
mark,  namely, 
ng  S.  no  w. 
» the  westward 
carries  4  fath- 
t  at  low  water, 

t  lights  (about 
,  run  in  on  the 
ught  into  one, 
.  850  W.  until 
he  channel  is 

1  from  5  to  7 
nt  of  the  wind 
between  the 
uy  wind  that 
ground  is  not 
ther.  Within 
»y  choose  any 
oil"  the  point 

"lafe  to  count 
.  winds  cause 
The  morning 
rate  of  the 
oyalty  Sand, 
from  the  en- 
Jay  the  tides 
►t. 


Cascumpeque  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  and  broken  into  inlets  or 
rivers,  which  penetrate  the  country  in  variety  of  directions  and  to  the 
distance  of  many  miles.  The  principal  entrance  of  Bichmond  Bay, 
leading  into  Malpeqne  harbor,  is  20  miles  from  Oascnmpeque,  the  inter- 
vening shore  being  formed  exclusively  of  sand  bars  and  sand  beaches, 
from  which  the  shallow  water  extends  §  mile  to  3  fathoms  and  one  mile 
to  5  fathoms.  In  the  above-named  distance  there  are  two  openings 
through  the  sand  bars,  Conway  and  Cavendish  Inlets,  which  afford 
shelter  to  boats,  and  are  distant  7  miles  and  II  miles  respectively  from 
the  lighthouse  at  Cascumpeque. 

Boats  can  enter  Bichmond  Bay  by  Conway  Inlet,  passing  to  the 
westward  of  Lennox  Island,  at  high  water. 

Cascumpeque  Harbor,  sometimes  called  Holland  Harbor,  is 
known  by  theremarkable  high  sand  hills,  3^  miles  to  the  southward  of 
its  entrance ;  these  are  the  remains  of  a  range  of  sand  hills  formerly 
known  as  the  Seven  Sisters,  and  are  50  feet  high.  There  are  no  high 
sand  bills  to  the  northward  of  the  harbor. 

The  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  350  yards  wide,  between  two  sand  bars 
resting  upon  the  sandstone  which  forms  the  Inner  Bar  (marked  by  a 
small  black  barrel  buoy),  over  which  there  are  LO  feet  at  low  water. 
The  Outer  Bar,  of  sand,  lies  1^  miles  out  from  the  entrance,  and  has  a 
depth  of  9  feet  at  low  water,  in  a  very  narrow  channel  indicated  by  a 
black  buoy  which  vessels  must  pass  close  to  the  southward  of.  Two 
lights  shown  from  masts  in  the  town  of  Albertou  lead  over  the  Inner 
Bar  and  up  the  harbor. 

The  channel,  from  the  one  bar  to  the  other,  and  between  sand,  cov- 
ered by  only  a  few  feet  of  water,  is  200  yards  wide,  and  affords  tolera- 
ble anchorage  in  from  2^  to  3^  fathoms  sand  bottom  ;  the  best  berth 
being  just  outside  the  entrance,  where  the  sand  on  each  side  dry  at  low 
water.  The  diminution  of  depth  is  attributed  to  the  opening  of  a  sec- 
ond entrance  into  the  bay ;  the  beach  in  the  sand  bar,  which  was  at 
first  effected  by  the  sea  during  a  heavy  NE.  gale,  having  been  in- 
vTeasing  ever  since.  This  newer  entrance  into  the  bay,  which  has,  at 
present,  5  feet  over  its  bar,  is  about  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  the 
harbor. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Cascumpeque  Harbor 
at  5h.  -lOm. ;  springs  rise  3  feet,  neaps  2  feet;  but  this  is  not  regular. 
Strong  easterly  winds  cause  a  rise  of  a  foot  or  more  in  all  the  harbors 
of  this  coast. 

It  must  also  be  observed  that  the  rise  given  is  always  that  of  the  best 
tide  in  the  24  hours ;  and  that  the  morning  spring  tides  are  the  highest 
during  the  summer  months.  It  frequently  happens  at  or  near  the 
springs  that  the  evening  tides  rise  only  a  few  inches,  and  sometimes 
they  entirely  disappear,  causing  single  day  tides  for  a  short  time. 

At  or  near  the  neaps  the  two  tides  of  the  same  day  become  nearly 
equal  in  time  and  rise  for  a  short  time.   There  is  reason  to  believe  that  the 


U 


244 


i'RINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND — NORTH    COAST. 


diurnal  inequality  of  the  tides  ceases  for  a  time  soon  after  the  equinox^ 
and  that  it  is  reversed  in  winter,  but  the  ice  has  hitherto  prevented  ob- 
servations during  that  season.  These  remarks  apply  to  all  the  harbors  of 
this  island  and  of  the  neighboring  provinces;  their  importance  to  ves- 
sels seeking  refuge  and  taking  the  dangerous  bars  in  bad  weather  will 
be  evident.  The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  in  the  entrance  of  Cascumpe- 
que  Harbor  is  in  general  1^,  but  frequently  over  4  knots. 

Cantion. — As  the  bars  of  Cascumpeque  Harbor  shift  so  much,  a  pilot 
would  be  indispensable  to  a  stranger  visiting  it  for  the  first  time. 

In  strong  easterly  gales  the  bar  is  covered  with  a  continuous  line  of 
heavy  breakers. 

The  best  landmark  in  this  neighborhood  is  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church  at  Tignisb,  the  lofty  spire  of  which  is  distinguished  before  any 
other  feature  of  the  coast  from  the  eastward,  and  is  visible  also  to  ves- 
sels on  the  west  side  of  North  Point. 

Anchorage.-— There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  bar  in  fine  weather 
in  5  or  6  fathoms,  sand  bottom.  Within  the  entrance  the  harbor 
has  plenty  of  water  and  a  clear  channel,  which,  after  running  in  one 
mile  to  the  westward,  turns  to  the  southward  within  Savage  Island 
and  between  it  and  Hill  Point,  where  there  is  a  wharf  at  which  vessels 
generally  load. 

Alberton,  Sk  small  town,  rapidly  rising  in  importance,  is  situated  on 
the  north  shore  of  Cascumpeque  Harbor.  There  is  a  wharf  here  in  con- 
nection with  the  railway.  The  churches,  court-house  and  buildings 
generally  are  of  wood  and  painted  white. 

The  XTnited  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Tignish  River. — From  the  north  point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  to 
Cape  Kildare  there  is  little  requiring  notice,  excepting  the  river  Tig- 
nish, with  only  2  feet  water  in  its  narrow  sandy  entrance  at  low  tide, 
and  affording  shelter  to  fishing  boats ;  and  where  also  there  is  a  settle- 
ment, principally  of  Acadians,  and  two  churches,  the  new  one  of  brick 
(standing  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  old  one),  forming  with  its  spire 
one  of  the  best  landmarks  on  the  island.  About  a  mile  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  entrance  a  rocky  ledge  runs  oft'  to  the  distance  of  1^  miles, 
with  no  more  than  3  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water. 

Cape  Kildare  is  a  cliff  of  red  sandstone  30  feet  high,  with  the  land 
about  it  red  and  surmounted  by  clumps  of  trees,  one  small  knot,  rather 
conspicuous,  being  detached  when  seen  from  the  southward. 

North  Coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island. — The  great  bay  formed 
by  the  northern  coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  and  the  difficulty  of 
beating  a  ship  out  of  it  in  heavy  and  long-continued  NE.  gales,  has 
been  already  mentioned.  That  difficulty  seems  to  be  caused  by  an 
acceleration  in  the  rate  of  the  current  so  frequently  found  running  past 
Cape  Gaap^,  Bonaventure  Island,  and  the  Miscou  Banks,  and  which 
doubtless  continues  farther  south ;  or  it  may  arise  from  an  extension  of 
that  general  set  to  the  southward  so  often  experienced  by  vessels  cross- 


•*"«*?l 


GENERAL   REMARKS. 


245 


r  the  equinox^ 
prevented  ob- 
the  harbors  of 
rtance  to  ves- 
weather  will 
of  Cascumpe- 

mucb,  a  pilot 
rst  time, 
iimous  line  of 

man  Catholic 
ed  before  any 
le  also  to  ves- 

flue  weather 
3  the  harbor 
inning  in  one 
ivvage  Island 
which  vessels 

8  sitaated  on 
f  here  in  con- 
nd  buildings 


ard  Island  to 
he  river  Tig- 
at  low  tide, 
ra  is  a  settle- 
one  of  brick 
vith  its  spire 
to  the  north- 
i  of  IJ  miles, 

ith  the  land 
knot,  rather 
d. 

bay  formed 
difficulty  of 

gales,  has 
lused  by  an 
unning  jiast 
,  and  which 
extension  of 
assets  cross- 


ing from  the  Bird  Island  towards  Auticosti  or  Cape  Rosier,  and  which 
has  been  observed  to  be  increased  by  strong  NE.  winds ;  as  might 
have  been  inferred  from  the  great  rise  of  water  which  they  cause  in  all 
the  (southern  ports  of  the  gulf. 

The  set  of  the  tidal  streams  may  also  at  times  bo  very  unfavorable  to 
a  vessel  under  the  supposed  circumstances,  for  the  stream  of  Hood  is 
known  to  set  to  the  southward  into  the  bay,  in  conformity  with  the 
progress  of  the  reflux  tide  wave,  from  ^N'orth  Point  southeastward  to 
St.  Peters,  whilst  farther  eastward  the  tide  which  comes  from  the 
!NE.,  from  between  the  Magdalen  Islands  and  Cape  Breton,  also  sets 
toward  the  shore,  especially  near  East  Point. 

The  reflux  course  of  the  tide  wave  on  this  coast  has  been  inferred 
from  observations  made  during  the  Admiralty  surveys  of  all  the  liar- 
bors ;  from  which  it  appears  that  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 
change  days  becomes  later  in  succession,  in  proceeding  southeastward 
from  North  Point  to  Cascumpeque,  Malpeque,  Grenville  Bay,  Rustico, 
Tracadie,  and  St.  Peters.  At  St.  Peters,  the  time  of  high  water,  full 
and  change,  namely  8'^  hours,  is  rather  latel^  than  at  East  Point,  and  as 
there  is  also  a  considerable  increase  in  the  rise  of  the  tide,  there  seems 
reason  to  conclude  that  the  two  tide  waves  meet  somewhere  about  this 
harbor,  the  western  being  12  hours  older  than  the  easteijn  wave. 

With  the  exception  of  a  few  places  ott'  the  bars  of  the  harbors  the 
anchorage  is,  generally  speaking,  very  bad  all  along  the  northern  shore 
of  the  island,  the  bottom  being  of  red  sandstone,  thinly  covered  occa- 
sionally with  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shells. 

The  harbors  are  all  of  the  same  character,  having  narrow  entrances 
between  sand  bars,  with  dangerous  bars  of  sand  at  various  distances  from 
the  shore.  They  are  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  with  the  exception  of 
Richmond  Bay  and  Cascumpeque,  and  even  those  could  not  be  safely 
rnn  for  in  bad  weather,  and  with  a  heavy  sea  running,  at  which  times 
the  breakers  on  their  bars  extend  quite  across,  leaving  no  visible 
channel.  New  vessels  are  built  in  these  harbors  almost  every  year,  the 
smaller  for  the  Newfoundland  trade;  and  besides  the  coasting  schooners 
for  produce,  American  fishing  schooners  frequcMtly  call  at  them  for 
wood  and  water  or  shelter  on  the  approach  of  bad  weather. 

Tidal  Streams. — It  will  be  convenient  to  divide  the  strait  at  Cape 
Turmentine  into  two  nearly  equal  portions,  distinguished  by  the  difler- 
entset  of  their  tidal  streams,  and  by  different  tide  waves,  which,  ad- 
vancing from  opposite  directions,  meet  in  the  central  part  of  the  strait. 
The  course  of  these  waves  appears  to  be  as  follows :  The  principal  tide 
wave,  after  entering  the  gulf  between  Cape  Breton  and  Newfoundland, 
sends  off,  laterally,  waves  to  the  SW.,  on  either  side  of  the  Magdalen 
Islands.  The  first  of  these,  the  eastern  wave,  coming  from  between 
those  islands  and  the  western  shore  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  arrives  at 
the  eastern  entrance  of  the  strait  soon  after  8  o'clock,  and  proceeds  to 
the  westward,  making  high  water  later  in  succession  from  east  to  west 


I 


i 


■f 


246 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND. 


as  far  as  Pictou,  which  it  reaches  at  LO  hours.  At  the  same  nominal 
hour,  but  12  hours  later,  the  other  or  western  wave  arrives  at  Cape 
Tormentine,  having  been  retarded  by  the  long  detour  which  it  has  takeik 
to  the  northward  and  westward  of  the  Magdalen  Islands,  and  by  the  great 
extent  of  comparatively  shallow  water  which  it  has  passed  over  in  its 
subsequent  progress  to  the  SW.  This  wave  makes  high  water  later  in 
succession  at  places  along  the  eastern  coast  of  New  Brunswick,  as  we 
proceed  to  the  southward ;  and,  after  entering  the  strait,  from  NW.  to 
SB.,  contrary  to  the  course  of  the  other  or  eastern  wave. 

Thus,  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Miscou  at  about  2^  hours ; 

at  Escuminac  Point,  and  the  North  Point  of  Prince  Edward  Island 

forming  the  western  entrance  of  the  strait,  soon  after  i  hours ;  at  the 

West  Point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  at  0  hours ;  at  Shediac  at  8  hours ; 

and  at  Gape  Tormentine  at  10  hours. 

When,  therefore,  the  eastern  wave  arrives  between  Pictou  and  the 
Wood  Islands,  the  western  part  of  the  precedi  ng  tide  wave  arrives 
between  Cape  Tormentine  and  Cape  Traverse.  They  then  meet  and 
combine  to  make  high  water  at  the  same  hour,  namely  10  hours,  «)r  a 
little  'ater  in  the  harbors,  all  over  the  central  portion  of  the  strait  from 
Pictou  to  Cape  Tormentine ;  causing  also  an  amount  of  rise  of  the  tides 
everywhere  moye  than  double,  and  in  some  of  the  harbors  nearly  three 
times  as  great  as  that  which  occurs  at  either  entrance  of  the  strait. 

The  direction  of  the  tidal  streams  corresponds  generally,  and  in  line 
weather,  with  the  progress  of  the  tide  wave,  but  is  disturbed  occasion- 
ally by  strong  winds.  The  eastern  flood  stream  enters  the  strait  from 
the  NB.,  running  at  the  rate  of  2J  knots  round  the  east  point  of  Prince 
Edward  Island,  but  is  much  weaker  in  the  offing  and  over  towards  the 
southern  shore.  It  runs  round  Cape  Bear,  and  with  an  increasing  rate 
along  the  land  to  the  westward  ;  is  strongest  in  the  deep  water  near  the 
land,  and  runs  at  it«  extreme  rate  of  3  knots  close  past  the  Indian  Kocks 
and  Rifleman  Reef.  Losing  strength  as  it  proceeds  farther  to  the  N  W., 
it  is  quite  a  weak  stream,  when  it  meets  the  other  flt>od  stream  off  the 
Tryon  Shoals. 

This  eastern  flood  stream  is  not  so  strong  along  the  southern  or  Nova 
Scotia  shore,  unless  it  be  in  the  Caribou  Channel  for  a  short  space  near 
the  Caribou  Reef;  and  it  is  weak,  not  generally  exceeding  half  a  knot,  in 
the  middle  of  the  strait. 

The  other  or  western  flood  stream  comes  from  the  northward,  along 
the  west  coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  sweeping  round  West  Point, 
and  running  strongest  in  the  deep  water  near  the  west  reef,  where  its 
rate  is  2J  knots.  Over  toward  the  New  Brunswick  shore  its  rates  sel- 
dom exceeds  IJ  knots,  and  this  is  its  average  speed  as  it  pursues  it« 
course  to  the  SE.,  until  near  Cape  Tormentine,  where  the  strongest 
part  of  the  stream  runs  near  the  Jourimain  Shoals,  and  thence  to 
the  southward  round  and  over  the  dangerous  Tormentine  Reefs  with  a 
great  ripple,  and  at  the  rate  of  3  knots. 


k 


Ti 


TIDES — DIRECTIONS. 


247 


ime  iioininai 
ives  at  Cape 
it  has  takeik 
by  the  great 
over  in  its 
rater  later  in 
[swick,  as  we 
from  NW.  to 

nt  2i  hours ; 

ward  Island 
ours ;  at  the 
c  at  8  hours ; 

ton  and  the 
vave  arrives 
len  meet  and 
i  hours,  or  a 
e  strait  from 
e  of  the  tides 
nearly  three 
:he  strait. 
',  and  in  fine 
)ed  occaHion- 
a  strait  from 
int  of  Prince 
towards  the 
ireasing  rate 
Iter  near  the 
udian  Kocks 
totheNW., 
earn  off  the 

ern  or  Nova 
t  space  near 
If  a  knot,  in 

ward,  along 
V^est  Point, 
f,  where  its 
8  rates  sel- 
pursues  its 
)  strongest 
thence  to 
eefs  with  a 


After  passing  these  reefs,  part  of  it  curves  round  to  the  S\V.  with 
decreasing  strength,  and  unites  with  the  other  flood  stream  in  tiie 
^  y  Verte,  whilst  the  remainder  is  lost  in  the  central  part  of  the  strait. 
The  ebb  stream,  generally  speaking,  pursues  a  contrary  course  to  the 
flood,  and  at  nearly  the  same  rates. 

From  this  account  of  the  tidal  streams  it  appears  that  a  fast  sailing' 
vessel,  under  favorable  circumstances,  might  enter  the  strait  with  the 
flood,  and,  arriving  at  Gape  Tormentine  soon  after  high  water,  might 
there  take  the  ebb,  and  thus  have  the  stream  with  her,  with  but  slight 
interruption,  from  one  end  of  the  strait  to  the  other.  Or,  a  vessel  beat- 
ing with  the  flood  might  so  time  her  arrival  at  the  same  point  as  to  be 
able  to  continue  her  voyage  in  the  same  direction  with  the  ebb. 

The  tidal  streams  were  observed  in  general  to  change  their  directions 
soon  after  it  was  high  water  or  low  water  by  the  shore;  but  not  unfre- 
qnently  there  were  exceptions  to  this  which  it  would  be  difficult  to 
account  for  with  certainty.  Strong  winds  in  the  gulf  greatly  influence 
the  strength  and  direction  of  the  streams  in  the  strait,  as  well  as  tliu 
height  to  which  the  tides  rise ;  moreover,  as  the  two  tide  waves  which 
meet  in  the  central  parts  of  the  strait  are  twelve  hours  different  in  age, 
80  they  are  in  consequence  of  unequal  heights,  owing  to  the  diurnal 
inequality;  each  of  them  being  alternately  and  in  turn  the  highest,  and 
probably  occasioning  the  stror)ger  stream.  . 

But  it  would  require  a  long  series  of  simultaneous  observations  at 
different  points,  and  ccntinued  through  the  different  seasons  of  theyear* 
to  reduce  to  order  or  to  explain  satisfactorily  the  seeming  irregularities 
thus  produced.  Nevertheless,  enough  remains,  of  general  occurrence 
during  the  summer  months,  which  it  is  highly  useful  for  the  seamen  to 
know,  and  which  has  been  stated  in  consequence. 

Directions. — Vessels  bound  to  ports  in  the  eastern  division  of  the 
strdit  enter  the  gulf  either  through  the  Gut  of  Canso  or  by  the  island 
of  St.  Paul.  In  the  first  case,  the  bearing  of  the  light  at  the  northern 
entrance  of  the  Out  will  guide  them  up  to  cape  St.  George,  from  which,  if 
bound  to  Pictou,  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  running  along  the  land  to 
the  westward,  if  due  attention  be  paid  to  the  soundings  in  the  chart, 
and  afterwards  to  the  bearing  of  Pictou  Island  and  Pictou  Harbor 
lights.  If  the  weather  be  thick,  or  the  light  not  seen,  beware  of  the 
reef  off  the  east  end  of  Pictou  Island,  which  should  not  then  be  ap- 
proached nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms,  especially  if  the  flood- 
tide  be  running.  For  the  dangers  around  that  island,  see  pages  192  to 
196;  and  for  those  on  the  opposite  shore  of  Prince  Edward  Island, 
pages  219  and  220. 

Vessels  approaching  from  St.  Paul  Island  and  entering  the  strait  at 
the  east  point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  should  not  approach  the  latter 
nearer  than  the  depth  of  20  fathoms  in  thick  weather.  If  the  night  be 
clear  the  lights  on  Sea- Wolf  and  Chetican  Islands,  East  Point,  and  Gape 
St.  George  will  be  of  service. 


i  . 


248 


PHINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND. 


Dape  Bear  and  its  reef  should  not  be  rounded  in  less  than  15  fathoms, 
Mnder  the  same  circumstances;  regard  being  had  to  the  lighf  on  Pan' 
tnure  Head ;  and  then,  if  bound  anywhere  to  the  westward  of  P.cton, 
the  vessel  should  be  kept  more  over  towards  Pictou  Island  ard  the 
southern  shore,  where  the  soundings  will  guide  her,  till  the  luiilnn 
Rocks  and  Kifleuiau  Reef  are  passed.  The  lights  on  Prim  Point  and 
Wood  Island  will  greatly  assist  in  passing  the  last  named  danger,  after 
which  the  lead  will  again  afford  sufficient  guidance  along  the  Prince 
Edward  Island  shore,  past  the  Tryon  Shoals,  and  through  the  strait  to 
the  northwestward. 

On  the  opposite,  or  Nova  Scotia  shore,  westward  of  Pictou,  the  prin- 
cipal dangers  to  be  avoided  are  the  Middle  Shoals  between  Pictou  Isl- 
aud  and  Caribou,  Amet  Island  and  Shoals,  and  Waugh  Shoal.  The 
approach  to  all  these  is  sufficiently  indicated  in  thick  weather  by  the 
soundings,  and  therefore  a  constant  use  of  the  lead  and  a  careful  ref- 
erence to  the  chart  will  enable  the  intelligent  seaman  to  pass  them  at 
all  times  in  safety ;  and  also  to  conduct  his  vessel  to  any  of  the  harbors 
of  this  coast,  where  pilots  will  readily  be  obtained. 


9\ 

M 

m 
If 


LIST   OF    LIGHTS. 


249 


15  fathoms, 
fhr  on  Pan- 
l  of  Picton, 
rid  arid  the 
the  IuuIhd 
)  Point  and 
mger,  after 
the  Prince 
he  strait  to 

u,  the  prin- 
Pictou  Isl- 
hoal.  The 
ther  by  the 
careful  ref- 
88  them  at 
:he  harbors 


i 

B 


.3 
1 

u 

a 

a 

it 

5 

1 

-■5 

i 

1 

u 

« 

a 

M 

a 

1 

<> 

ai 
S  a  u 

^— .    >    0    Si    C 

^  —  ®  ^  tS  2 

«f^S43 

i! 

11 

•ffi-S 

l?4 

It 

^11 

-5 

11 

•5.' SI 

2'^'^  =  i§i 

•5  -  £  -',i3-3 

?f2 

2fS 

%%% 

5fa 

^■SS 

f^ 

1° 

^9.2 

's  5  5  S—  «H 

h 

Cm 

£ 

h 

(<• 

Ph 

h 

E^ 

■» 

M 
n 
o 

a 
n 

n 

O 

01 

I  § 

p 

» 
(0 

01 

O 

»i 


5 


11 


i 


ll 


250 


LIST   OP    LI0HT8. 


1 

a 


I 


"    1 
"t;.    i 


H 


i 


4S 


>^ 


ml 
m 


m 


1^ 


SS-a  . 

nil 


a 


I 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 


^1 

■■  s 

I* 

o  " 


^-  J-a  B^ 

._  a  «  ^  gns 
•  '"■«£  5  g 
bi"«  3  a  s  ^ 


=3 


1 


.5f!« 


e 

s 

a 
o 

5 


«? 

h 

ji 


^o       S*g 


a 

JS 


o5 


.9  "3 

c  <i^ 

a*  ••= 
O 


^1 


a 

a 


8 


^1 


5  » 
IB 

II 
33 

«  O 

la  . 
it)  01  a 


m 

llll 


a« 
O 


I 


a 
§ 

a 
O 


a' 
o 


a 
■| 

I 

a 

I 

£ 

a 
O 


EC 


S 

e 


a 
s 
o 


I 

a 


i\ 


LIST   OF    LIGHTS. 


251 


i. 

$ 

M 

P 

n 

an 

$S 

i5 

i 

•%* 

a 

«  00 

o 

a 

¥ 

m 

a 
o 


I! 


mm 


262 


LIST   OF    LIOHTS, 


B 

a 


§ 


1  1 

•»  I 

'i  ^ 

I  ^ 

•S  m 

■8 
.8 


•Si 


i 
>5 


II 


t?'-' 


|1 

-  a 


'«ja 


^  cm  F  j3  o  8< 


•a 


« 
» 


..a 


^ 


I 

0 

a 


> 
S 


^•5 


11 


S   .- o 


fi'gS 

3  3.S  » 


n  n 


s 
•a 

a 

f 


.«  ML  .a 
jQ  a  _  o 

O  f*  S  « 

•*    OB 


1 


cis 


S   I 


P^    (It 


-I 

9  i 


I 

.s 


5 


I 


CO      CO 


H 
m: 

a 
c 


I 

•a 

B 

ti 
en 

•e 

c 


I     I 

^    8 


ti   ti 


f] 


LIST    OF    LIOIITS. 


268 


=  s  3 


U   V 


Vi 


111 

.S  w  e 


I'i5.s:s|l 


a 
its 


©5^ 


C/5 


a 


S    3 


§1 


5    s 

I  I 

i"  I 


p^   (It 


a 


gas? 


2      S    3    S 


h 

IS 


I 

1 
1 

o 

I   . 


|i2 

lis 


a  , 
11 


3 


S 
■3 

it 


§"i1  ii 


3f 


1 1 
i  i 

=2*  J? 


Is 

-s 
■as 


■a 
-a 


I 
1 


*  •- 
«  p 

M  eg  S 
■J 


S^ 


r  r 


45 

.2 


11       11 


» »• 

111  If 

"        to  C 

52 


&3.| 
n 


3 
a 

I 


■8 

(D 

I 

a 


1 


ft 


I        I 


h    ^ 


I 


h      h     h 


s 


.a 

o 

I" 


•Si 

S  «| 


eg 

M 


> 
a     CQ 


i 

P4 


IS^ 

5- 

>^ 

.32 

■o  o 

If 

^1 

O-'j 

a<* 

1^ 

o 

ra  *     **-• 


«-         .* 


a     " 


•I 


u 

o 

.1 

o 


^2 

as 
« » 

a  *  o 


■si? 


*■«■  a 
ja  5*0.0 

o  a  «  o 


I    I 
u    8 

II 


1 


«• 
3 


i 

>5 


I 

ID 


^ 

» 


I       1 


» 


a 

o 


I 


n   (I 


EU 


w 

I 
I* 


a 

I 


w 

a 
•g 


I 


a 
I 

u 

•o 
•c 


254 


LIST   OP   LIGHTS. 


"S 

0 

a 

<»^ 

a 

c 

V 

i 

i 

a 

s 

ii 

B 

•2 

a 

I 

■S 

o 

••• 

s 

^ 

rn 

le 

ir, 

••• 

t= 

'Q 

m 

r^ 

n 

^ 

js 

s 

H 

•« 

f^ 

Jt 

f« 

,«?» 

"S' 

I 

s 


PC  o 


^ 


a 
o 
Hi      9S 


o 


ii 


"•a 

■2  ° 


1 


1 


o 
H 


I 


1 

•£ 

^^S 

sS?n 

.Bra 

II 

"Sl!^ 

■cSo 

■3^§ 

JfSS 

.sS^s 

b 

> 

O 


a 


s    5   5 
3    -^    ■- 


1    1 


a 


a  s 

'S    IS 
Is    ^ 


es      S  S  S  a  a 

B     s  3  e  s  B 

cr     o*  c  p*  o*  o^ 

09  to  %  93  to  CO 


,a 
•-W 

a 
to 


1^" 


h^^  G^^  |l|&|^^p4p4pE4 


o1 

a  ° 

1^ 


OO   00 

■a  "J 


8SS 


a 


s 
g 

I 
I 


B 


be 
►,»    -9 

bt    ^ 

B    .5 
2    ■» 


.a 


a 
1:1. 

o 

1 


8 


1 

.a 


o 
,a 


3 


a  V 

St 


^  I  ^ 


tt 


.9 

o 


5 

o 

1:^ 


t  %  i    I 


I     I 


a   o 


^  I  a  I 
I  I  a  I 


.a 

o 

p>4 


■e 


Iss 


EC  Q 

=  2 
a     -o 


o  C^ 

.  S  CO 


•2 '2° 

.s9s 


o 

i 

*3 

A 

I-" 

^ 

a 

fC 

^ 

« 

ii 

s 

2  « 

'^ 

1 

••a 

^ 

^  o 

(•d 

itc 

s 

r 

c? 

LIST   OF    LIGHTS. 


.  .^  at  o 


•    O   «   !<> 

^U  bcs  4^ 

S-tf"  2  £ 

.3  se  o  «•  » 

fa. 


:'2.a 


.a 

i 

s 


is 


I 

5C 


IS 


i 


iill 

LtO** 

Sg^M 

J5.M730 

p  a  K-c 

wooden  t 
ted  by  a 
keeper' 
bed :  bail 
m  red. 

<4  o  C-g  a 

oass^s 

s 

I 


EC 


0*^ 


I 


!^ 


o 


•as 

9  « 


••s§ 


«       3 


O 


O 


p. 


S| 

'^ 

•sg 

§i 

«^' 

^ 

"•SB 

.3 

3SI 

"S  ^ 

O 

CM 

I. 


00  *v 

15 


a 

2 

s 

■5 

a 


I 

■e 
a 

•c 

C6 


e 

I 

I 

En 


a 
g 


I       1 


255 


1° 

•a -3 
"3  a  ^ 


§1- 
rt  ^  «  « 

.y§5  9 

S  eS  V  O 
^  S  u  « 


\'X 


\\ 


Ir. 


256 


LIST    OF   LIGHTS. 


■m 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


257 


CO 

O 


i> 


S      S 


•49 

XI 

^ 

1 

!3 

"S 

^ 

1 

1 

^ 

g 

i 

1 

§-5 

3-S 

ti^ 

a 

eg 

♦*    00 

••0  3 

"go 


a 
eg 

I 

a 


-a   s 


'.Srn 


1 


^ 


5 

^ 

td 

OB 

1 

P 

lfl 

.3 

$■& 

a  e 
58 

'i 

,S^ 

1 

1 

Oft 

SO 

5 

^€ 

^1 

1 

fe§ 

tzi 

M 

S 


a 


I. 

Cm  ,2 


3-? 

2« 

a'" 

la 

S  §  a 

^s'a 


Ed*  ^    > 

5    St 


a 

<3 


H 


.i  o 
a 

■^  a*; 

o  a^ 


Sic 


ua 


a  o 


<1 


•5-,  a 
1  «i« 


so  « 

.  ••'5 
Wat: 


ft  a 


lis 
111 


«  § |-a  « 

3X;S:20  0 

■5  _  c  6r » a 


"0 

i 

1 

0 
o 

49 

-o 

X 

^ 

S 

^i 

t 

-*s 

fi 

,a 

It 
il 

"      1 

ft 

a; 

Si 

ft 

1 

ft 

-    ss 

11 

.1 
ft 

B 

1 

.     ft 

.  1 

.a 

ll 

l| 

1 

■  a. 
••■£ 

1^ 

'J 
11 

ft  M 

»3 

P 

"      t 

1 

'      5 

a 

a 

I 

0* 

o 

1^ 

« 

1, 

(t 

'f 

B 

■SI 

kv 

B 
> 

t 

CI 

\ 

51 

,a 

I 

+ 

II 

B 

«   1 

S 

« 

1 

1 

1^ 

s  oi  ►: 

^ 

< 

^ 

Ph 

^ 

f" 

f". 

P^ 

< 

[1 

&; 

«    Ph 

5  > 

I    .      ° 

•a  I   2 


•S         W 


1^   ^ 


ft 


•« 


to  g 


«  aj 


;3|| 


O 
I 


i-i 


s 


5314- 


5 


I 

a 


^     S 


I 


w 


I 

s 


e 
.a 


a 


1 


QSOH 


258 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


i-l 


»  S  J 


*  9  rt 


s 

« 


.a  a 

a  1* 


fB    00  S^ 

£  e.    ,= 
■E.S  a 

o  a  a  o  J 


-te 


.  *  pi 
.2gi 

gal 


B 

a 
-43 

g 


■2 

d 
a 


H 
O 
O 


4e 


"^ 


a 


•■la 

»  a 

•-i 

..  o 
13 -a 

o  • 


it's 

Of 

II 


2!t 


^ 
? 


3 


It 


■2     S     •« 
I    2     S 


»    ^ 


5 

s 
a 

S 


09 

S 


K     P^     b 


« « ■* « 

3 

0  09  a-e 

'^ 

u    :  ,a 

992 

S'? 

--■^a- 

ji—  Ma 
Ssoo 

1^1 

l^«| 

ii 

3"'  - 

^ 

«  . 
s  a 

00  a> 
o  « 
■Win 


§ 


-J 

S 

1=^ 

t-H 

TS 

ts 

"•^ 

« 

(» 

•vs 

H- 

,-r 

so; 

+; 

c 

OS 

li 

^ 

r^ 

.      tl 

I! 

Jl 

:^^ 

X 

c 

b 

■a 

« 

Rs 

s 

pa 

•/- 

rr. 

1  » 


o 


.5  i 


a 

e 


.2  5 


^  a 

08    i^ 


a 

a 

a! 


(5 


a 


a 
O 


t-  _ 
(S  I 
t 


I      I 

E-         iS         <         ^ 


I 


I 


n 


s 

I 


-'■-■r^:m^- 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


259 


-& 


!s-d 


5S 


II 

9 
-■Ok 

5-  -S 

e  «  3 


S; 


!C'^ 


bt 


o.       .2o- 
T      ®     .2o  5 


.a 
o 


> 
it 

e 

•3 
'S  . 


MM 

H 


P 


S 
a 


s 


5      gg      S 


!9       ? 


I 


-  a  S-c  2 

"x  « "S  .»=  if 

•2  „  »  ^ 

C   _   »  O  4- 

Ills 


I 


CO   go 

"  a 


^ 
* 


5 


s  . 

i"| 


A 
» 


.g*    <i$ 


£ 

a 

o 


■a 


I 

I 

li 


£|   I 


3s 

§3 


5-^ 


N 


I    1 


EC 


"1 

si 

p  CO 

DP, 


S       m       fi^ 


■J    -2 
9  »  ^ 

«■£§ 


h  S 

§5- 

01 


,a 
« 

eg 

(J 


3 

to 


1 


3 

a  . 

Si 


eg" 


3i 


o 

a 


2J 
-I 

.  a 

-« 

o-o 
O 


ll 

is 


' 

O 

1 

■a 
1 

H 

«M 

T 

*f 

o 

0 

•s 

5 

)— 

£ 

« 

u 

M^; 

a 

t 

5  o 

p-> 

?    I 


0 


0-= 


<! 


a 


OS 


>■ 
S 


r/J 


^  s 

8,2 


1 
& 

.9 


^ 


CS    -v 


a  . 

"n 


•sa   s, 


a< 
O 


a 
o 


at 


t 

» 


't. 

■o 
a 


•o 


"2 


« 
I 


o 
H 


a 
S 

B 


O 


1 

•3 


-        ■§ 


I 


% 
I 


'i1iViiri-rtlVr>'iiiiiiiY.'riii 


260 


LISi   OF   LIGHTS. 


I 
I 

o 
o 

1 

s 


•£• 


o 


a  s  o  IS 

.si  ^a 


e 
•5 


S 

S 


9w 
1^ 


■M  00   >   > 


I  fills' 


p  AS 

II  § 
■Si-s 

all 


.•2S 

'I 
ES 

5  St 


■sas 

all 

£  V  S 

!3a  ^ 


.2SS 


*H        iH  CO 


S         So! 


S     S3 


X 


V  A       <D 


,M 

a 
o 

i 
a  . 

k  be 

:..9 
§^ 


^     . '° 

fa  w 

1     P 

*  to 


-.a 
o2 


^ 


I 


§ 


S  it     S  ^ 


£    M         w 


fd 

» 


So 


.a 
§ 


01 

a 
5" 


.» 

O  '" 

5-s 

■"  a 

rS 

s 

ij 

'^i 

ja 

3 

-J 

1* 

-.1 

«t5 

II 


<? 


s 
CO 


0 
a 


U   CkU 

P.  O  ^ 
P.O  0 


73      .5 


3 

.a 


0 
Hi 


I^L 


1 

s 

C 

1 

a 

( 

f1 

& 

0 

b 

0 

a 

K 

^ 

s 

a 

-a 

a 

a 

a 

e 
« 
a 

1 

a 

i             I 

i                   -c 

i 

1 

i     a 

i    1 

1  ^ 

a 
II 

si 


_    ,H  on  * 

=  22  »  a 

■o|sS.8 

-sloe-.  I 
■  -^  a  Hid  i 


a 
5 


am 


I*  a  a 
3  0  » 


^  ^ 


5' 


o 
Ph 

«  S 

B 


a 


cB5 


o£ 
-I 


I 


I 


o 

.0 
1 


MS  c 


U     O4 


I 


&4 


t1| 

f  a  a 
I"' 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


261 


4 

a 


7  c 

MS 


I 
f-l 


ft  u  ?  e 

■^-  a  9 

.Sf'  a  «  ai  » 
?  B  S      » 


«  a.9  2 

^^    X     ^ 

•s  g-52 
■a  „M= 


»  =   -**«  M 


■e-3  « 

§  S  o 
lis  s  -* 
"i  o  B 

-  I  a 

■3  •■  fe  'e 


*''S  6( 


o 


=  0 

.aS^i 

"a 

.£3 

;2iS 

a  ^ 

a   . 

«5s 

|p4 

-uo 

t:s 

.?s 

■=0 

o!s  . 

■S'-  . 

S-ogo 

Ss^^ 

;2§5 

> 

t^ 

S       £       g    S    S 


} 

i 

1 

1 

^ 

o 

■O 

(M 

JD 

43 
08 

J 

» 

40 

2 

2 

■S       ^ 

i    ^" 

•^ 

s 

-3 

:      1 

s 

It 

•^1 

1   : 

09 

la 


,a 


o 

•a 


^d    Si: 


a 

£^ 

(/2 


|3i 

a  e  c3 

Is" 

■g  IS  n 


o2 


2!t. 


,M 


Kg 


11.2 


S    ^s 


,.5       S 


05 


a 


-3 


a^  S 
C  S  d 
s  UP. 


cs  a 

S  a 
—  » 
.D    r 

%^ 


■% 

'^s 

u 

®o 

FN 

» 

« «     a 
o  £    a< 

"3  ^     'C 


P. 


^.^ 


a$     1^     Em 


F->  C  >    .. 

« t:  r  X  X 

•.-   -^  O  W         OJ 


a 


h  « 


s 


i     t 

04      n 


>..S 
.2  5 


O 


I        I 


1.8 

(.■■« 

S5 


a 


■3     *    .3  tj 
'S     •     ft  a 

^     ^     ^ 


-a 

•3 

a 


.23 

n 

i-'-a 


I 


1 


I 


I 


a 

^ 


a 
o 


a 


a 
g 

a 
a? 


.S     > 
g.    g 

■*-*         3 


pa 


% 
i^ 


I 


i  I 


% 
o 


a       2        'W 
^      <§        I 


a 

at 
13 


n   n 


SfldP 


262 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


I 

I 


Of. 


-2 

B 

a 


■25  ■< 

s  S 

~  8 

»  2 


HI'S*  I 


a 
a 

■SfS 


u-a  o 

e9  7  oQ 


I 


"3$ 

2  M 
.a  a 

M-3 


3|« 

eS  el  o 

^  ie»; 
M  o 


•31 

I  SB  O 


^X   00^   KOO 


-I- 

..Is 

■3  3  0 


;? 


t§ 


a  s 


3      ^-d 
•o     e2 

-       -I 


...9 
I" 


If 

t>  « 
Si 

3. 2* 


^ 


.a 


C3 


(A  J,   « 

©  .3 1i 

■S  a  B 

3  B  a 

.5  m'a 


:?  S' 


;2 


•i 


2 
!s 


I 


"S" 


•H  «  t-l 


9S 


o 

St 

a 

e 


»         Jo 
'3         .air- 


's » 

•«  a 


n 


O 


a  -S 


62 


to 


e 


eg 

n 


5 


a 


o 


& 


& 


"2  "« 

I  I 

1  I 

■S  "^ 

I  I 


■a 
I 


I 


y. 


i 


^ 


t§ 


la 


eg 
a 

CO 


u 

Ch     f^     f^ 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


Ifi 


9 

h 

s 

•5.S 

ii 

JS  9 

1 

Igible  from 
Gut  of  Can 
about  3  mil 

In  line  lead  t 
channel  ov 

1 

is 

J 

> 

o 

uS 


.5f| 


263 

I 
I 


S?     5 


•=  a 

5  rt 


a.a 

s 


I 
I 

i 


V 

»^v~ 

;      ; 

"9 

« 

a. 

1 

:   ^ 

It 

:   ? 

s 

:       i 

i     1 

M  f  1 

1'* 

1  3 

it 

i             c 

0                '•         ?> 

0           0-2 

b 

.-S       « 

IS 


s 


IS 

a  t<  ■ 

.a  c 

>S 

..4' 
I"? 

-b 
S.5 


bb 


■« 

£ 

1 

»3 

s 

M 

-M 

o 

D  *a 

H 

«§ 

'S  8 

1 

5 

^'^ 

M 

t 


a 
I 


y3 

^ 

•a 
•3 

1 

a 

s 

^ 

5 

1 
a 
O 

1 

I 

03 

e 


DO 

a  60 


« 

W 


I 

a 
s 


a 


•9 


e 


H 


I 
o 

E 


o 
I 

15 

B 
a" 

i 


•^1  ^  i 


H 
CO 


0< 


a 

0 

t 
il 

00  M 

o 


■i 

o  * 


H 


O 


e.   'E 

5  a 


i 

•3 

M 

B 

2 


I 


a  A 
i  r 
a 


I 


■I 

00 


■■■!!WKISWI<S»tSM-:«B«Wt 


si^^M^sssms 


I 


264 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


IB 


•g 


3 


1 

"• 

'( 

« 

•  . 

« 

^  3 

M 

<«-a 

a 

.| 

n 

m  i9 

»3 

i> 

!       «5 

8-2^  . 

o  i  i  s 

J 

« 

■S'S  S  B 

■  PPo" 

Sfjt 

5     g 

«.Sfo  * 

i  ■»~ja'Z 

ws-i 

1 

g 

•If  c 

3  :8 

$ 

t                                I 

a 

»,-« 

■•     .5  e     j 

^ 

J3'"            : 

:t1 

:       ''S      : 

1        ^^  J 
•5          S-'O     : 

1      2 

©               41   S   —        ' 

s 

k         u  3  a 

09              ca  9  E        : 

k 

a 

1       A 

a         o  a  V     i 

U 

93          CC 

«i 

i 

.e 

b 

w 

5 

•  M 

«d 

u 

(M 

s 

o 

00 

'  1 

1 

j 

s 

ja 

2 

1 

o 

1 

h       h 

<Md 

rH             -H 

O  «a 

II 

'              ^^ 

i  «!« ' 

s     f1^ 

OS 

c 

1    1! 

S        "Sep 

a    < 

a! 
B 

1 

;? 

«. 

•         '0 

■9       "E 

™      2 

B            o 

Pk 

o 

1 

s 


I 


o. 
s 


M*    .a 


3    S 


H 
U 


■•J3 

o2 


*  M    3 


3  I* 


» 


S       S       g 


^1 


o3 
a 


^'       |I4       ><  ^'       e^       pt* 


te-' 

»! 

'O  a  **  B 


I         I 


y. 


M-. 


.-St 


2:3  . 

a  p  M 

a  ?^  a 


I 


I 


1 

I 

I 


3S 


1i 


LIST   OF    LIGHTS. 


1^ 


^=•2 

!?• 

^' 

^^ 

«5<i 

o 

4^  4. 

y 

•^^ 

0  =  oi 

.9 

.S-= 

aa.s 

v^ 

ad 

£  O  B 

M 

Si-. 

^.al 

oB 

»^o 

fj 

H 

J^ 

01C4         r-4e4 


jjN      3    2    3 


3S  S3?!; 


•^3      ^    S    5 


5      fe 


e 

3 


a  c 

.-  *^ 

a  a 
o 


a 


as 


X 
K 


I 


.a 


7~j  '■ 

-J  a 
■ose 

»-3b 


S  o 

h  g       C  01  C 

a       a    a  I;  M 


fa 


I 


-3      .S 

I    <2 

I  I 


I      I 


I 


o 

s 


ai 

it 

a 

I 

a 
e 

Q  o 
■S 

*5 

a  X 


,d 

EC 


.9 


3 


I 

e 
I 


s 
pq 


M 


I 


265 


1 

|o3S 


B  — ■  — 

*2l 


s 
It  g 


a 
o 

8 


a 

ill 

H 


.51 
Us 

«,9   li 


ffl       '.5 


I 


bt 

a 


.■2  c 


B 

a 

B 

w 

>> 

Hi 

(• 

<l 

1 

i    1 
fa    fa 

rH 

w^                l-l 

0            ^ 

« 

p    1 

■| 

1     ' 

^ 

1.  t 

lis 

•^1 1 

-*! 

i 

p.  s 

p. 

•s        * 

i   - 

.    1  ^ 

! 

i      'i    i 

9 

i 

1      £   i 

5  . 

,r 


nil 


LIST    Of    LI0UT8 


«1«5 

(j 

?5 

1 

S! 

S^ 

c4 

If 

ih 

l! 

Cfe 

£'/i 

S. 

:> 

>  a 

o  S 

>5 

six: 

1 

at? 

=  22 

t» 

J 

»-« 

./ 


\" 


2^ 


—  « 

a     _ 

^  s  ^ 
=  2  = 


^ 


212 

-sja3 

«  IP 

if- 

a  s  rt 


"3  « 


s'S 


a  Mi. 

Sen 


>^ 


m 


U 


-iaa»;a^^wa«a'sMJteM>aiiii'#s^ 


I" 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


Hiotpgraphic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


.imi-»ir^  fji.»i^.iMj  jtrt^Ki 


Mi 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historicai  IVIicroreproductions  /  institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


■■'^a»»afe*tB?5«aai>*s?«3^i(iaf^^5^->  >^'*?ipw'^"Jl?^w!SJa«s^ti«?'=Jn'^'*.ii^v■ 


BBS! 


LIST    OP   LIGHTS. 


2G7 


a 

•3  . 

s,  ^ 


I 


a^ 


Las: 

gS  SSto 


aS 

13 


HI'S 

S.S 


e 

—    © 

Is 
«•! 


IT;     *  "^ 


o    >.  * 

X-  a, 

=11 


w  O  CC 


;3S       S    9 


;§     a     s     ss 


i.; 


I 


1 

o 
•a 


^ 


3-3 


1 

■a 


I 


II 
*  5 


■SS    5    « 


II 


a  -'^" 


a   8 


5" 


I 


1 
I 

a 
O 


I 
I 


a 


I 


9   . 

•St:   «> 


!j5 


5*8 


II  II II 


1 

o    -2 


8   I 

I    S 
I  I 


.9 

o 


H 

n 


a 

s 

I 


S  e 

II 

Ill 


iH 


I 

1 


•MM 


iMHib:- 


268 


LIST   OF    LIGHTS. 


S    S       $    ^    3 


X  4 


"•a 

CO 


US 

.  t      « 

"=  a.-  a 

■^  V  e  ^ 


us 

5-3 


,4  O    . 


."^■M  taX  js>  ** 


•^ 


B 

a 


a 
o 
O 


"S> 


5 


oS 


<3  .3 


ce  k  A 


lis 


a 
O 


=3 

1^ 


e^ 


11 


a  s 
<eco 


^ 


h 


S<^ 


«  a 

'  II 

^»     a 

^.5  i 


ll 

n 


(3 

a 
a 


a* 


^ 


5 


H 


1 

W 

U 

9 

M 

'V 

« 

s^ 

i 

1 

'n 

J5 

I 


04 


Ti 


fflf»i- 


(804.)  CANADA.— River  St.  Lawrence.— North  shore.— Leading 
lights  at  Bersimis  river  entrance.— August  24,  1891,  two  leading 
lights  wore  ostablishMl  at  the  mouth  of  the  Bersimis  river,  north  shore 
of  the  river  St.  Lawrence. 

■i  Bersimis  River  lights  are  fixed  white  lights  shown  from  reflector  lau- 
terus  hoisted  on  masts,  situated  on  a  tongue  of  sand  running  out  west- 
wardly  from  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  post  on  the  north  side  of  the 
mouth  of  the  river.  They  should  be  visible,  in  clear  weather,  from  a 
distance  of  6  miles  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  their  alignment. 
The  outer  (front)  range  mast  is  located  on  the  shore  line  near  high-water 
mark.  The  mast  is  20  feet  high  and  has  attached  to  it  a  diamond- 
shaped  slatted  beacon,  10  feet  square,  lacing  the  channel,  to  make  it  more 
conspicuous  as  a  day  mark.     The  whole  is  painted  white.  7/  'IL' 

The  light  is  shown  at  an  elevation  ot  30  feet  above  high  water.      .^^ 
I  Position:  Latitude,  48°  56'  10"  N.;  Longitude,  GS**  38'  28"  W. 

The  rear  range  mast,  30  feet  high,  is  360  feet  J^.  66°  W.  <ra«,  (NW. 
I  N.  mag.),  from  the  front  one,  and  similar  to  it.lii<l  hut^  '«l4  bru!  ,i?/>w 

The  light  is  shown  at  an  elevation  of  40  feet  above  high  wlter.    nil 
;     /This  range  is  intended  to  show  the  best  water  into  the  river,  over  the 
sand  bar,  which  extends  over  a  mile  outside  Bersimis  point,  and  carries 
a  least  depth  of  4  feet  at  low  water.  I't 

Buoys  also  mark  the  channel  from  deep  wa,ter  to  Bersimis  iwint,  as 
follows:  rtf  affiij8  'fto  vHai'iiM^i*',*  >attHp9t  fy  hmi  stii  htm  .iilj^in  m  Joliq 

A  black  can  ouoy  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  outside  the  bar.  ■ 

A  black  can  buoy  on  the  endojC^tl^^^^spi^  running  nearest  to  the  chan- 
nel on  the  west  side, 

A  black  spar  buoy  on  the  end  of  the.  spit  nearest  the  channel  on  the 


sftoai,  n-.  — -  ^         tne  noruiwest  euge  oi  i.e 

""^^Z^  «  Marine™,  No.  »  (168)  oUSWJl^l.aJd,.!  0S«.  nob 


ivatiki  .b(»«uit  of  Prince  Edwai-d  island,  Imve  bceoHtM^M^dvTroin  their 

former  positions  and  are  now  situated  as  followB:      h  i;  r-  'i-^iii 

f»ii>iTiie  front  light  is  shown  from  a  lighthouso  situatcjd  on  the  oiitureUd 

of  tlie  breakwater  on  the  northwest  side  of  entrant*  to  the  harbor/  :   i  ■ 

.The  light  is,  as  formerly, /ared  wAtfe,  catoptric,  and  elevated  241  feet 
-above  high  water. 
i'lThe  upper  part  of  the  wooden  tower  is  inclosed ; and  painted  white; 
I  the  open  posts  and  framework  below  are  brown.      .lavh  ©d*  lo  rlhiofli 
•J" ' 'Position:  Latitude,  46"  31'  10"  N.;  Longitude,  63"  28'  52"  W.  ' 
''■'''The  rear  light,  fixed  red,  catoptric,  is  elevated  45  feet  above  hi^h 
water,  and  shown  from  a  wooden  tower,  with  dwelling  attached,  standing 
up(in  a  ct^bwork  foundation  situated  on  the  beach,  about  1,500  feet  8. 
21°  W.  true^  (SW.  mag.),  fmm  the  front  liijht.     The  tower  and  d Well ihg 
are  paint^  white,  the  lantern  brown.  ^^'^^^  '''■  '*'  ^'"';''*^  ^^  ''     '       ■ 

Tlie  lights  should  be  visible,  in  ftlear  weather, 'ftbm'a  distance  of  7 
lUifes  seawa^d  over  an  arc  of  about  110°  between  Sims  point  on  the 
west  and  the  sand  hills  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor.  The  lights  in 
line  S.  21°  W.  true,  (8W.  nuig.),  lead  in  thelwst  water  over  theibar  at 
Entrance  to  the  harbor,  but  the  rear  light  must  be  opened  to  the  eastward 
of  the  front  one  when  abi^east  Sims  jjoint,  to  clear  the  rocky  shoal  off 
that  point. 

'■  NbTE.--Strangers  should  not  attempt  to  enter  the  harbor  withdut  a 
pilot  at  night,  and  the  lead  is  required,  especially  off  Sims  point,  at  «tll 
timei'.'  '  'xnitnino  odi  lo  obiH  jhsjw  jUj  no  voiin  u.;.  .i  -i;  •    * 

r"''iNoti<ietoMarHners,N6.S^,6tiawci:i89^\  '        '  V'HkJ  ^^^^  W") 

Hydrogbaphic  Office  Charts. 


'h(r  t'/rw  ')!ii  ihi  [■>r 


ailJ 


biiiirtil-i  '-'i!!  t, 


i)'5.v'{^ra!  mi  mi'im:  licht-ti'st.  Vol.  T.  No  5oi  'r,«ii;i. 


I^^q«  Aadii  A 


. .  ^.  ,„,»»«»«  tiMfiln 


m.k  la  S3i09  j^wiwtoa  «flj  mf  iwiooin  -^ofid  «  mmi  Jdail  libs  Hwtk  L 

(805.)  aULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE.  —  Prince  Edward  island.-^ 
North  coast. — Grenville  harbor.— Change  in  position  of  New  Lon- 
don range  lights. — The  range  lights  at  New  London,  Grenville  harbor, 


|^? 


iVidvlfrooi   their 

■    i    U       *±.i'i\ 

0)1  the  oiitur'«tld 
he  harbor,      i 
elevated  241  feet 

1  painted  white ; 
1  9di  lo  ilhiotti 
*  28'  52"  W^'f' 
feet  above  high 
ttached,  standing 
)ut  1,500  feet  S. 
ver  and  dxv'ellihg 

1  a  distance  of  7 
ims  point  01)  the 
\  The  lightB  in 
r  over  the  I  bar  at 
ito  the  eastward 
e  rocky  shoal  off 

liarbor  withxiut  a 
51  ms  point,  at  «fll 

(^.Mj.,4Q,il^l.) 

t'/rw  •n\]  (k'i  I:j0 


il  \ibs  \m^  A 
(firard  ialand.-r> 
>n  of  New  Lon- 
Jrenville  harbor, 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


269 


so""* 


5 


S 


61 

P 


i 


§ 


>a  it    " 


09  eg 


I 

CO 

at 

s 

•a 
.H 


«  09 

I  i 

Mi  a 


r 


m 


tc 

d 
■<1 


■3 
t 

5 


M 

S 


C^ 

el 
e 

.a 


<9 


•5  a     -3 

la-32 


M 

d 


Be     M 
tH  Hi 


n 


270 


LIST    OF    LIGHTS. 


I 


c 
O 

I 

u 

o 

s 

2 


a 


il 

.S-2 


I 
.  a 

3" 

If 
.*• 

U  9 


eg 


a  • 


S  '^  H  E  E3  q  ^ 


o  ■■  3.1 
o  ►..-■3 


« 
a 


a 


^   h 


£ 


S  a      a 


■»  a 
«  o 

a"- 


p. 

B 

a 

s 

I 


I 


4 


o 
I 


2     S 


;£■§ 


•3 


.s 
a  « 
*■• 

I* 

IS 


LIST   OF    LKJHTS. 


271 


-~  «  2  * 
3Sn  a» 


e 
I 


3^ 


p. 

B 

a 

s 

I 


-3 


•a 
o 
o 

a 


'65 

61 


sill 


•3a» 

"  o     -    . 

-  S  J  t-' 
IS 


i.s.S 


s 
Ja 

a 


a: 
I 


a 
s 


;3  i> 

i 

-1^ 

O 

a 

wbarl' 
)    or 
p  from 

9  s  E 

111 

aa 

2-S  = 

£«.s 

Sa 

t-%i 

=1g 

.S'-o 

3.S|< 

-s 

ej 

a          . 

i  o  ■•   . 

«•= 

^^I§ 

i:li 

l§ 

auli 
boa 
bar 
ber 

a 

S 

n 

•    t-  ~' 

h 

s  . 

«- 

»l 

ti 

. « 

^ 

a   . 

.s  »> 

..    $3.... 

.      3.50.. 

Stowi 

ton 

S.I 

s 

» 

:    S 

•    ""I 

«    -^ 

1    .5 

s 

a 

3 

e 


0. 


50. 

a| 

■a.i 
o 

n 
2.fc2§. 


!j5i 
5(20- 

&«2 

c  Us*  u 

V  b   9    U 


lift!! 


B 


M  a 

li 

=  K 


*  «  a-" 


I- 


e 
a 


k'3  a  a 


§ 


q  SS  .S  CI  U  (•  ~ 
O 


o 
SB 


U 
•< 


a 


.2  o 


a 
C 


1^ 


i->2 


|.S| 
|2i 

-"•9  » 
2|| 

ass. 


«     a 
I    S 

a 

"Sjalll-sa^ 


9_J'S»M 


llll 


u 

m 


a 
a  .— 

'''11 

»  s  S 
35  S 


«'0      S'S     'S'P   •         n 

S  ^  >K  rK 


B 


5- 


» 


■ '  "fwSWWwT  #S~ . 


AVKRAGE  TIME  OF  OPENING  AND 


Place. 


IUiImii 


1 1 11/1 II  iivir. 


Diiuip|ii'iii'uni  I  III'  barlior  Uc. 


Aiilvul  III  tli'lil  ill'. 


I>ina|i|ie.iiiini'u  ul  riclil  lir, 


I)f|hirliire  ul  lu»i  vi«-> 
t'oi'r  ice  HfaMiiii. 


Port  lUwkmhiirj-,  l'»pi' Hredin  K<-li.  :i.  ISHtl  — 

LooUburK  Hitrbor  (NK.  itriii).  <'»li«  I>>'>'l"ii I.111.  IS 

Cow  Uay,  Cape  IJnton lJi>rtt>  IVimzi  «  :  llin 

iu  liiHt  '.M  vi'iirH. 
Hydiipy,  Cbp*  Breton Ihii.  U.  IHHti 

Port  llood.Capti  Itreton '«".  I'llo  Keb.  1 

Baddeik,  Cape  Breton    Jan.  2-.' 

Oeoritetimn,  Prince  Kdwaril  Iiiliiml Dec. 26 

Charlotte  Tuwo,  Pnuie  E«l  wai  d  litlanil  Die.  21 

SanmierHiile,  Prtnre  Ei'warii  iHJnnil I»i.e.ll        

Caaeiinipeniie,  Prince  Kdn aril  Inlauil    Jnu.a,  1*87  

Kichmund  Bay,  Prime  Kilwanl  NInnd AImiiU  liec.  I.'i 


ll'IHH 


Apr.  2:1. 1«»H 

HieakH  up  with   iuiiitlii*i1\ 

mIhiI. 
Xour,  except  in  iIiic'.h 

ikpr.20,lHK6 


Apr.  15  to  May  I. 
Apr.  13    ...     "... 


Feb.n,  18»>   .. 

.Vliiiul  Mar.  IT 


Feb.  1.1  to  2«    .... 

Oenerally  in  Jan 

Jiin.  I.t  to  Feb.  1 
None 


Feb.  :;i,  IHHB l»ec  22,  l»«3  . 

Aiioiit  .Ipi.  :iO  Feb.20  

VaiivH:  alioiil  May  I Vbuiit  Feb.l. 

With  weaterly  wluila    lan.S.lPM... 


Apr.  13  to  May  1 Jan.  1  . 

None Jan.  6  . 


Apr.  21 


•tan  . . 
None 


KnilolAiir    

None l>eo. 


Halpeqiiv,  Prince  Edward  Inland Sot  until  eloaed  by  tlelil  ice 


Apr.  16 

Ajir.e,  IH.KK 

Abont  Apr.  1 :  bay  iceoften 

thick  and  bard  on  May  I. 

May  I 


...do 

Jan.  4,  low 

Apr.  1 ;  dilveit  back  harbor 

Ice. 
.fan.  IS 


..do Dec.  U  

May  10 Dec.  20  to  23 

Apr.  110  Marl    End  ol  Dec 


Soiiria,  Princu  Edward  Island >  Jan.  4  to  lU 

Plotou,  Mora  Scotia Dec.2«    

HhedUo,  New  Brnnitwick '  Dec.8  

If  iraniichi  Hay,  New  Brunawick  I  Dec.  9 

Shippegan,  New  Brunawkk 1  Dec.  8 

Caraqnette,  New  Bruni«wk'k  I  Dec.  11 

Dalbousle,  New  Bruniwick 'Dec.  5 

Ua«p«,Kew  Brunswick Dec.  10 

Cape  Hagdelen,  Quebec 1  Dec.  I.M0  J  an.  1 


Apr.  1  to  10  . 
Apr.  IB 


Apr.  SO 
Apr.  21. 
Kay  4  . 


About  Feb.  1 

But  little  Held  Ice 


May  15 Middle  or  Dec:  seldoi 

ice  to  prevL-ut  Tesnrb 
in)!  until  Jan. 

Apr.  1  to  May  1     Jan.  2 

Dec.  21 


Uaye 

Apr.15 

May  10 

Apr.  10  to  25 


None 

.  do .   .. 

None  aince  apriuK  of  1X76, 
then  May  14. 

None. 

do 

....do 

...do    


None Dec.  8  . . 

.  do Nov.iS 

June  4, 1876  Nov.  13 


None MoT.25 

...  do Sot.  18 

..  do Deo.4to0 

..do '. Nor.  25  to  Deo.  5. 


Father  Point,  Quebec . 


St  Pierre 

St.  Paula  laland. 


River  rarely  frceiea;  only 
moving  ice.. 


Once  in  40  ycara 


Apr.  2,  mean  of  4  years Not.  K,  mean  of  8  yea 


Feb.  to  Mar.,  floating  ice 
from  adjacent  coves. 


Amherst,  S.  Magdalen  Island Jan.  1 

Anticoati, Soutnweat  Point   D«c.33... 

Cape  Norman,  Newfoundland  D«c.25  to  Jan.  16. 

Canada  Bay,  Newfoundland    

White  Bay  (western  arm),  Newfoundland  Dec.  20  

Twilingate  Harbor,  Newfoundland Jan.22 

Uttle  Bay  ( BetU  Cove),  Newfoundland Jan.  1  to  20 


Uav  10 

Mar.21 

May  29, 1888 


Xzploite  Burnt  laland,  Newfoundland '  Jan.  1 

Tonlinguet,  Newfoundland '  Jan.  1  to  Feb.  20,  averaging 

•bout  Jan.  20. 

Fogo  Harbor,  Newfoundland Jan.OtolS 

Gander  Bay,  Newfoundland Jan.  1 

Oreenepond,  Newfoundland Jan.  18 


May  10 


May  6 

MayltolO. 


Dec.  0,  mean  of  4  years 


I 

Feb.  15;  depends  upon  wind.   Karelv  remains  any  length     Open  at  all  seasons . 

of  time, 
Jan.  12. May  21 Dec.  13 

Jan.16 May  12   Dec.  17 

Jan.ltolS Mar.  31  to  Apr.  20 Dec.9  

Dec.  24, 1887 Junell,lh8(«  Nov.  16 

'  Mar  10  to  June.  25 

Dec.23.to  Jan.  10 May  lU  to  June  15 


Nov.  30 


Feb.lOto20 Apr.24 Dec.7 

Jan.  10 May  1  to  10 ',  Jan.  1  to  10. 


do 


Bona^ista  Harbor,  Newfoundland I  Jan.  20 . 

Trinity  Harbor,  Newfoundland I  Jan.  31. 


Hants  Harbor,  Newfoundland Rarely  (Veezea 

Hearto  Content,  Newfoundland Jan.  S  to  Feb.  20,  averaging 

about  Feb.  1, 


Apr.  23  to  June  4,  averaging 
about  May  10, 

Apr.23.....' 

Apr.30 ". 

Mar.9 


Jan.lStoSO May  lto20 Abont  Jan.l. 

Jnn.18  May25 

Jan.l4  MayltoJunel Jan.19 


Mar.  11 


Mayll Jan.7. 


Mar.  20  . 
Mar.  35 . 


Feb.  15 i  May  20  . 

Apr.  19  ...  Apr.29  . 


Mar.  4  to  May  28,  averaging 
Apr.  10. 


Apr.  1  — '  Uncertain 

Apr.15 May  15.... 


Dec.  20 
Jan.  28. 

Deo.  28. 


Harbor  Grace,  Newfoundland Jan.  10  to  Feb.  20 Mar.4toApr.l Jan.  20  to  Feb.  20 Maylto20 


St  Johns  Haibor,  Newfoundland ;  Rarely  fWyzes  . 

Ferryland,  Newfoundland ' 

Cape  Race,  Newfoundland ' 


Mar.  30 


TrcpaMy  Harbor,  Newfoundland OccaaionaUy    blocked    by 

I      fleld  ice. 
Placentia,  Newfoundland About  Feb.l 


Lanolin  Harbor,  Newflrandland. 


Grand  Bank,  Newfonndland  . . . . 
Harbor  Breton,  Newfoundland  . 

L'a  Hune  Bay,  Newfoundland  . . 
Bnrgro,  Newfonndland  


La  Poile  Harbor.  Newfoundland. 


Channel,  Newfoundland 


Bay  of  Islands  (dumber  Kiver),  Newfoundland. 

Bonne  Bay,  Nen-founiilaud 

Rich  Point  Newfoundland 


OccaaionaUy  blocked  by 
Held  ice  10  days  at  a  time, 
and  froien  over  at  inter- 
vala  varying  from  5  to  10 
yeara. 

Never 


Apr.  1. 


Jan.  to  Feb.  IS Apr.  or  May 

Feb.  10  to  Apr.  10,  mean  of    Feb.  25  to  Apr.  30,  mean  of 

28  yeara.  28  yeara. 

Jan.  20  to  Mar.  17,  mean  of  ;  Mar.  13  to  June  7,  mean  of 

28  years.  1     28  yeara. 


I  Vessela  come  and  go  all 
I     round ;  aometimesdc 

by  fleld  Ice. 
......do 


Rarely  any,  only  with  aoath- 
erly  wind  alrer  ioe  tiM 
rounded  Cai>e  Race. 


Outer  anchorage  seldom 
frozen  for  more  than  2  or 
3  days.  Inner  anctiorage 
from  Jan.  1  to  Apr.  15. 

Abont  Deo.  I,  but  easily 
bi'oken  np. 

Never  frozen ;  occasionally 
blocked  by  drift  ice  from 
adJHcent  coves. 

Fob.  10 


Abont  Mar.l About  Apr.  1 

Feb.26 ,  Mar.  25 


Vessels  can  uenriy  always     Feb.  (rare  occurrence) Apr.  1 

enter  by  April. 
Moves  off  with    northerly 

wind,  and  disappears  in 

April. 
Mar.2U Rarely  comes : 


Dec.  24. 
Dec  15. 


Rarely  frozen. 

Dec.  26 

Jan.  I.'i 

Deo.  15. 


Greenly  Island I  Dec.  15  to  Jan.  21 

Belle  Isle 

Battle  Harbor,  Labrador 


For  a  few  days  in  Feb.  and 

and  Mar. 

Apr  24 ,Ian.l   

Apr.  15 Ian.  15 

May  20 Jan.  15. 

Mar.l  to  10 '  Jan.l  to  10 


Apr.15 

Apr.15 

May  15    .... 
June  10  to  30 


Open  at  all  seasons . . . 

Arrive  and  depart  at  al 
sons. 

Navigation  nearly  al 

open  in  bay. 
Generally  open  all  the 

round. 

Jan.l 

Jan.  1  

NOT.IO 

Nov.;  toll 


Dec.  13.  Xavluatiou  closes 
4  weekH  earlier  or  Inter, 
according  to  aeason. 


Jan.  3  to  Feb.  13 June  14. 

May  11 Jan.  to  Apr.15 ;  May  18  . 


5314 


IE  OF  OPENING  AND  CLOSING  OF  PORTS. 


I 


a  III  rit'lil  111 


I>('|iartiir»  nl  liisl  vihwI  Ii«.      AitIvhI  nf  III  it  vriwi'l  iittir 
Iniv  icv  aeaiiou.  iie  pt-unuii. 


riini|ilt'li'ly  iir  |iartlully 
climril. 


lt«-.22,1883 
Fill. 20  


May  1 Vbiiiit  Feb.  I. 

wluiU    fan.  5,  IrS))  . . 


I Jan.l.. 

Jan.  a.. 


Deo.  2U 


Apr.  5,  UM Ai  intfivaU    

Uar.13 VtliitiiviiUbytlililloc    .. 

Generally  III  Mur At  Inti-rral*    liy  tirlil    Ice, 

ni'viT  l>>  liailioi  icu. 

A|)r.24,lfHe Avi-i'HKf  ^iiiinnlliM  eiiCli  vear 

••lo.iil. 

May  1  C'iiiii|ili'li'ly  at  tliiiPit 

Apr.  24    Simii'    yrara   at    liitf-rralii, 

other  Ncara  unmiiletely. 

Ciiiii|ilfielv 

Ai>r.26 do    


lull  rrul  iri'iiiii|ili'lel.\  i  luinl. 


.Ian  1  111  .V|ir.  '.'i 

Smllliwi'si     arm     o|n-ii     nil 

WlllllT. 


Tliliknem  ol  lie. 


Ki'iiiarkK,  ami  rfi'onU  u(  prKVluu* 
J  yeara. 


Jan.  tn  A|ir 

.Ian,  ].■'  Ill  Apr.  Mt 
Jan.  2u  tn  Apr.li 


Jan.  til  Apr  ... 
1>«T.  •.«  to  Apr 


Al t  2  fii-t 

Niil'tlieaat  armOto  l2lnrlifR. 

Uarlior  lee  almul  t  liii  lien  . .    Ki-ciril  23   ypam,  open    Keui'rally  alt 

the  M'ai  ruiiiid. 
6  to  111  iDi'licii  : 

ISImheii  

.  ■  •  ilu Mean  of  30  yeara. 


do 


Dec.  U  

Dec.  20  to  2.1 

1    Eudol  Uee  ., 


Middle  of  Dee. :  neldoni  any 

ico  to  prevL-ui  TesneU  leav- 
ing UDlil  Jan. 

1     Jan.2 

Uec.2l 


Apr.24 do 

.Vpr,  2H do 

May  I  to  10 ,.    ..  do 

May  15 At  interrala  until  Feb.  1 


I»ie.  lOto  Apr.  10 

■Ian  1  III  Aiir.  in  

Ilee.  10  tn  .Mav  1;  nlilpnini; 

plaee  open  later  in  tall. 
Completi'lv  Iruin  Feb.  1   to 

May  1.  ' 


12  to  18  Inibea Mean  nf  13  .xearn' cloiingi  remalndar 

mean  of  :t3  years. 

13  incliea Mean  of  ll  yeaia. 

5  til  12  loelipa 

A  lioul  3  feet Mean  of  13  yeara. 


Pec.  8  .. 
Nov.SS 
Xov.  13 


Apr.  28 Completely 

Apr.  20 do 


Apr.30 do  . 

May7  do  . 

M«y2l do  . 


Jan.  14  to  .Vpr.  .5 
Jan.  0  to  itpr.  3  .. 


NoT.25 

NoT.18 

Deo.itoO 

Nov.  2S  to  Deo.  ft. 


fi  years. 


Xor.  28,  mean  of  8  yeara  . 


May  12 .  — do 

Mays do 

Mayll do 

Aitr.  2i>to  May  1 Generally  in  motion  all  win- 
ter. 
Apr.  21,  mean  of  7  years    . .     Completely  at  intervals 


DiC.K  to  Apr.30 

Karly  in  Dec.  to  Apr.  15.  , 
Eaily  in  l)ev.  to  May  lU  . 


Dec.  10  to  Mav  8  . . 
Dec.  IS  to  May  H  . 
Dec.  2.^10  May  10. 
Jan.  Ito  Apr.  2S  .. 


1  <o2  fi^t Mean  of  10  years. 

10to2Utncfaes Mean  uf  5  yeara;    ferry-boat    ran  in 

track  except  from  Feb.  5  to  16. 

30  to  2.')  inches Mean  of  &  yeara. 

3  to  3  feet Mean  of  58  years. 

30to3flinchea 

3  to  3  feet  Mean  of  6  years. 

4feel    

3  feet Mean  of  12  yean. 

10to30tnches 


IS  any  length    Open  at  all  aeaaons Ocoaslonally  obstract«d  by 

field  ice. 
Deo.l3 ..  \  Apr.l8 


Xavifiat  Ion  closed  lietween 
Dec.  10  and  Apr.  10; 
patha  arc  open  about  half 
of  tile  time. 


Ordinary  fluid  Ion 


r.20.. 

ifc  25 
ic  15  . 


Deo.  17 May  10 

Dec.5  Apr.lStoMayi 

Nov.  18 JuneO 


Deo.  17  to  May  10  . 

Completely 

—  do 


Jan.l  toApr.l ItoBfeet. 

Dec.toMay ISiuchis.. 


Nov.30 May  1 


Completefy 


Dec.toMay 2to3  feet 


There  is  rarely  any  heavy  Ice  nntll 
end  of  Dec.  There  Is  always  a  oban- 
iiel  of  open  water  on  north  or  south 
side  of  the  river,  depending  upon 
wind.  Wind  velocity  of  7  mliea  per 
hour  siifHcient  to  drive  ice  to  mid- 
channel.  Sometimes  open  water 
lasts  a  month  at  a  time. 


Mean  of  9  years ;  heavy  ice  from  about 
Feb.  IS  to  Apr.  20. 

Mean  of  30  years 

Mean  of  23  years. 

Field  ice  baa  remained  until  Jaly  1 


Dec.7 

1  Jun.  Ito  10 

May2S 

May  Ito  10 

MayltolO   

....do 

...do.... 

Jan.  22  to  Apr.  30 

Jan.  5  to  Mav  10 

-.  do 

2  feet 

Mean  of  10  years;  sealinit  steamers  en- 
ter all  months ;  other  steamers  can 
occasionally  enter. 
Open  at  intervals  between  Apr.  1  and 
'     May  10. 

Abont  Jan.  1 

..  do 

Fnb.l  toApr.l 

Jan.  10  tn  Apr.  27 

do   ' 

2  feet 

si 

Jan.  19 

Apr.7 

Occasionally  open. 
Mean  of  11  years. 

Jan.  7 ADr.28 

Completely 

At  intervals  from  Jan.  30 

to  May  15. 
At  intervals;  after  twenty- 

four  hours  of  aontbwest 

wind   vessels  can  enter 

hartHir. 

Completely  from  Feb.  8  to 
Mar.  g,  at  intervals  from 
Jan.  18  to  Feb.  8. 

Deo.aO  

May  1  (at  intervals  all  win- 
ter). 
Mar.S 



Ifoot 

Jan.  28 

18  inohea 

Deo.  38 

Apr.15 

Dates  variable 
Mean  of  10  years. 

Mean  of  10  years;   never  closed  for 
more  than  8  weeks  at  a  time. 

.1  Vesaels  come  and  so  all  Tear 



At  intervals  from  Jan.  20  to 
Mar.  20. 

6  to  15  inches 

round;  sometimes  delayed 
by  field  ioe. 
......do 

r.  30,  mean  of 

DC  7,  mean  of 



• 

• 

• 

« 

Dec.  24 

Mar.3 

Completely  closed  twice  in 

30  years. 
At  intervals  by  field  ice  . . . 

Onlv  ftt  IntAWAla 

Dec  15 

Apr.  30 

.            .... 

Feb.  26  to  Mar.  25  . 

Harbor  ice  1  or  2  inches 

Mail   stearaet-  unable  to  enter  only 
3  timesin30}.<4srs. 

Open  at  all  seasons 



Arrive  and  depart  at  all  aea- 
sons. 

Navigation  nearlr  alwava 

• 

At  intervals  iVom  Mar.  1  to 

6  inches 

Navisation  closed  only  5  or  8  times  in 
50  years. 

,      ope'n  in  bay. 
Oenerall V  onen  all  the  vear 

20. 
At  iiftervals  by  field  ice  . . . 

Cumnletelv ..    ..   ..... 

4inchfs 

round. 

Jan.l 

Jan.l  

May  12 

Dec.  25  to  Apr.  30 

tTan   to  Anr 

18  inches 

Mav] 

May  15 

June  10  to  20 

do     ... 

2  feet 

Never  frozen  until  arrival  of  field  ioe. 

Nov.lO 

do    

Dec.  15  to  May  20 

3  feet 

Nov.  3  to  11 

At  intervals 

Completely  at'  times  by  field 
ioe. 

3to5feet    

\ 


i:n^dkx. 


1 


i 


A. 

Page. 

Abbot  Harbor : ^^^ 

Abbot  Islana -"^ 

AbouohiiKau  River '^^^ 

Adam  IbIiukI ^^ 

Ailamaiit  Rock  and  Shoal ^^ 

Advocate  Bay  and  Harbor 73, 

Aggeriiiore  Rock 208  > 

AitkiuuPoint 234 

Alberton 'f**  j 

Alberton.  consul *"**  j 

Alchoni  Point 222  j 

Aldouin  River 214 

Allen  Island ^^  I 

Allen  Rock o^  i 

Ambrose  Rook 1^4  i 

Ametlsle 1^^ 

Amet,  directions 1^  i 

Amet  Shoals l'-*^  | 

Amet  Sound 1**^ 

Amet,  tides 200 

Amherst..  50  I 

Amherst  Fort 222  j 

Amherst  Ship  Railroad 50 

Andrew  Island - 156,157 

Andrew  Passage 156 

Anguilla  Island 24 

Annapolis 69 

Annapolis,  anchorage 69 

Annapolis,  consul 69 

Annapolis,  pilots 69 

Annapolis,  repairs 269 

Antigonish 1**9 

Antigouish,  consul 190 

Antigonish  Harbor 183 

Antigonish,  tides 190 

Apple  Head  and  River 47 

Arctic  Current 12 

Ardoise  Village 166 

ArgosCape 173,180 

Argos  Shoal •  ^^O 

A.Tgyle -•■-  "6 

5"14 18 


Arichat,  description 

Aricbat,  directions 

Arichat  Harbor 

Arichat,  priest's  Hagstaff. 

Arichat,  supplies 

Arichat,  tides ^   ■ 

Arichat,  West 

Arichat,  West,  direotionu. 

Arisaig  Village 

ArisaigPier 

Arnold  Rock  and  Shoal. . 

Artimon  Bank 

Aspatageou  Peninsula  . . . 

Augustin  Cove 

Avery  Shoal 

Avery  Rock 

Avon  River 

Avon  River,  dangers  ojf 

Aylesbury  Cape 


B. 


Page 
UW 
169 
166 
169 
168 
170 
171 
171 
191 
J91 
124 
6 
95 
227 
154 
26 
74 
76 
242 


134 


Babin  Shoal 

Baccaro  Point 51,78 

Baccaro  North  Ledge 78 

Baccaio  Outer 78 

Baccaro  South 78 

Back  Bay 35,109 

Balache  Point 

Balaclie  Rock 

Balcom  Shoal 

Bald  Cape 

Bald  Island 

Bald  Rock 126, 128, 132, 152, 161 

Bald  Tusket  Island 54,58 

Ballantyne  Cove 

Ball  Islet 

Ball  Creek 

1  Ballard  Bank 

;  Bailee  Islands 

I  Bank  Siiiut  Pierre 

Banks  Point 

I  Banquereau  Bank 


180 
182 
136 
209 
128 


190 

122 

43 

4 

68 

5 

236 

6 


.  ■ 


273 


274 


INDEX. 


[  ; 


Page. 

Bantiira  Rock 52,86 

Buntaiii  Rocks 51, 79 

yi 

137 

142 

202 

26 

26 

123 

123 

123 

30 

191 


Bantam  Sboal 

Buptiste  laland  — 
Baracbois  Head  .. 
Baracbuis  Harbor 

Bare  Island 

Bar  Itilaiul 

Bar  Islet 

Bar  Poiut , 

Bar  8boal 

Buru  Island 

Barn  Rock  


Barren  Island 124,139 

Barriugtuu 51 

BarriugtouBay 51 

Barrington  Bay,  directions 51 

Barrio  Head 188 

Barry  Beach 115 

Barse  Ground «    112 

Barse  Rock 126 

Bartlett  Ledge 80 

Basin  of  Mines 71,73 

Basin  of  Mines,    directions  and 

tides 76 

Basin  Head 237 

Bass  Island 90 

Bass  Rock 163 

Basson  Reefs 137 

Bastard  Rook sa 

Battery  Poiut 63, 94, 193, 221 

Bay  of  Fnndy,  directions 32 

Bay  of  Fundy,  f  ogs 3,32 

Bay  of  Fundy,  general  remarks. .  16 

Bay  of  Fundy,  pilots 16 

Bay  of  Fundy,  smokes 2 

Bay  of  Fundy,  tides 3 

Bay  of  Fundy,  winds 2 

Bay  of  Fundy  Shoal 155 

Bay  of  Islands 138 

Bay  of  Rocks 167 

Bay  Verte 207 

Beach  Point 51,55, 129, 147, 170 

Beak  Point 166 

Bear  Cape 219,231 

Bear  Cape,  water 232 

Bear  Cove 164 

Bear  Head 170,181 

Bear  Island 181,163 

Bear  Reef 181,231 

Bear  Reef,  mark 231 

Bear  Rock i28 

Beatsou  Rocks 66 

Beaver  Harbor 23,37,135 

Beaver  Harbor,  directions 136 


Pbs& 
Beaver  Harbor,  anchorage 37, 136 

136 
135 
135 
228 
228 
227 
228 
228 
227 
228 
239 


Seaver  Harbor,  supplies 

Beaver  Island 

Beaver  Point 

Bedeq-e 

Bedeqne,  anchorage 

Bedequo,  buoyage 

Bedeque,  consul 

Bedeque,  directions 

Bedeque  Harbor 

Bedeque,  pilots 

Bedford  Bay 

Bedford  Basin 113,118 

Beldon  Cove  and  house 39 

Bell  Poiut 220 

BullPointReef 220 

Bell  Rock 81, 115 

Belleisle  Spit 118 

Bentiuck  Shoals 171 

Bergemau  Point 205 

Bernard  Island 174 

Berry  Hea<l 150 

Betty  Island 109 

Bettj:  Point 192 

BewesShoal 167 

Bickertou  Island 143 

Bickerton  Port 144 

Bickertou  Port,  directions 144 

BIgby  Head 165 

Big  Cove 216 

Big  Unck  Island 17, 22, 94,  96 

Big  Duck,  anchorage 22 

Big  Duck.Ledge n 

Big  Fish  Island 57, 100 

Big  Fish  Rocks 57 

BigFisbShoal loO 

Big  Sheep  Island 57 

Big  Thrum  Island 105 

Big  Wood  Island  and  Rooks  ....  17 

Billhook  Island 241 

Billhook  Poiut 234 

Bingly  Shoal 146 

Birch  Island 100, 176 

Birch  Point 26, 142,175,227 

Birch  Shoal 99 

Bird  Islands 137, 176 

Bird  Rock 59 

Bisset  Island 175 

Black  Bay 35 

Black  Head 142 

Black  Ledge 54, 146 

Black  Point.. 83,  87, 103, 108, 164,  220. 231 

Black  Point  Ledge 108, 146, 152 

Black  Point  Rock 84,108 

Black  Pond 231 


>'wrW|->«n^»K«WL.^IIIii'nlfc*l.ii?^l.»flaffiliW 


iSESwC 


Tage. 

(rajje 37,136 

ies 136 

135 

135 

-i-iS 

ii-iS 

a27 

2-.'8 

228 

227 

228 

239 

113,118 

le 39 

220 

220 

81,115 

118 

171 

205 

174 

150 

109 

192 

167 

143 

144 

ons 144 

165 

216 

17,22,94,96 

22 

17 

57,100 

57 

100 

57 

105 

iooka  ....  17 

241 

234 

146 

100,176 

...26,142,175,227 

99 

137,176 

59 

175 

.   35 

142 

54,146 

J,  108, 164,  220. 231 

108,146,152 

84,108 

231 


MMMi 


INDEX. 


j.^.:.f-»^..,-..»..^^.-.a.«Mi-riata^-ffi^-,r,^tf1^1»iniir-|r^Wr<fflttW>' 


275 


Black  Shoal 

Blackniau  Shoal 

Blakeley  Cove 

Blanche  Islaud 

Blanche,  lifeboat 

Blanford  Head  and  Shoal. 

Blind  Bay,  directions 

Blind  Sister 

Bliss  Harbor,  island 

Blockhotise  Point 

Bloniidon  Cape 

Blonde  Rock 

Blonde  Rock,  tide  rip 

Blow  Breaker 

Bine  Cape . 


P»l»    ] 

Black  Prince  Shoal 1^^ 

Black  River *•* 

Black  Rock 43,71,75,85,91,106, 

112. 131, 154, 16;<,  219 

Black  Rocks 21,159 

110 
155 
123 
78 
80 
99 
107 
112 
34 
222 
74 
53 
53 
84 
188 


Pae& 

189  . 
183 
123 
240 
18 
148 
52,79 
87 
21 
109 
76 
76 
143 
70 
91 


Blue  Gull  Island  81,82 

Blue  Rock  Island   ... 

Blnflf  Head 

Boar  Head  

Boat  Harbor 

Boat  Rock  

Bob  Bluff 

Bocabeo  Bay i 

Bocknian  Island 

Bockman  Shoal 

BoUoDg  Point 

Bon  Portage  Island. 

Bony  Point 

Boom  Rock 

Bootes  Rock 

Boot  Island 

Borgle  Bluff 

Borgle  Shoal 

Bosdet  Point 


94 
96 
68 
194 
35 
132 
33 
96 

96 
131 

54 

81 
158 
159 

77 
129 
129 
171 


Boss  Point 49,208 


167 
208 
133 
236 
236 
236 


Boss  Rock 

Boss  Spit  

Botelier  Island 

Boughton  Bar 

Bonghtou  Bay 

Boughton  Island 

Boughton  Ledge 236 

236 

236 

236 

237 

236 

210 

, 175 

138 


How  man  Bank 

Bowman  Head • 

Bown  Islands 

Brackley  Point 

Bradford  Covo 

Brandy  Ledge 

Brazil  Rock 

Brazil  Rocks 

Brazil  Shoal 

Breakfast  Island 

Brick  Kiln  Island 

lirick  Kiln  Ledges 

Bridget  Shoal 

Bridgetown 

Bridgewater  Settlement 

Brig  Point 109,141 

Brig  Rock ^^^'I'^l 

Brig  Shoal 

Broad  Breaker 

Broad  Cove  ... 

Broad  Rock  . . . 

Broad  Shoal . . 

Brockelby  Hisad 226 

Brockelby  River 

Brodie  Point 

Brodie  Rocks 

Brokenback  Island 

Brokenback  Island,  anchorage 

Brooklyn  Pier 

Brother  Island 

Brothers  Island 

Brothers  Islets 24,38 

Brown  Bank 

Bruce  Point • 

Brudenell  Islet  . . 

Brudenell  Point . 

Brudenell  River  . 

Bruin  Cape 

Brul<S,  anchorage 

Brul6Cape 

Brul^  Harbor 

Brul6  Peninsula . 

Brul6  Point 

Brul^  Shoals 


Boughton  Narrows 

Boughton  Point 

Boughton  River 

Boughton  Settlements. 

Boughton  Spit 

Bouleaux  Point 

Bourgeois  Inlet 

fiowen  Ledge 


125 
128 
29 
110 
163 


226 
165 
164 
137 
137 
259 
137 
75 


236 
234 
235 
235 
209 
201 
211 
201 
202 
201 
202 


Bryer  Wand 64,66 

Bryer  Island,  NW.  Ledge  . . 
Bryer  Island,  SW.  Ledge  . . 

Buchanan  Point 

Buck  Rock 

Bucks  Harbor 

Bucks  Head 

Buctonche,  anchorage 

Buctouche,  beacons 

Buctouche,  directions. 


65 

65 

225 

17 

26 

26 

213 

213 

213 


Buctouche,  outer  bar 213,214 


I  i»ra»WMa»fif^t.M 


276 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Biictouche  River 213 

Biictouche  Koad  ai3 

Biictonche  Steeple 213 

Biidgel  Kock  and  Buoy 80, 163 

Bulk  Head  Rip 21 

Bull  Point 87 

BnllReof ho 

Bull  Rook ....  19, 20.  isS,  87, 92, 98, 1 11 ,  124, 
12-i,  137, 146, 151 


Bull  Shoal 

Bumbo  Island 

Bunker  Island 

Bunker  Island  Ledge 

Buoyage,  uniform  system  of. 

Burke  Point 

Burke  Shoal 


125 

183 

6 

62 

13 

147 

149 


Burnt  Island 109,179 

Burnt  Coat  Head 

Burnt  Point 

Byers  Cove 


74 

178 

185 


C. 

Cabbaj;e  Garden  Shoals. 

Cable  Island 

Cable  Point 

Cadden  Bay 

Cage  Shoal 

Cahil  Rock 


107 
127 
127 
87 
170 
181 

Cailitt'  Island 34,35 

Cailitf  Rocks 35 

Calais 33 

Calf  Island 25 

Calf  Point 24 

Calhoun  Fiats 49 

Cambridge  Flats 74 


Campbell  Island 171,178 

Caniperdown  Flagstafi' 

Camp  Island 

Campobello  Island 

Canada  Creek  and  Wharf 

Candlebox  Island 

Canseau  Point 

Cansean  Point,  beacon 

Causo  Bank 

Causo  Cape  

CansoQut 


115 

i:i8 

29 

71 

60 

222 

222 

0 

157 

180 


Canso  Gut,  anchorage 182, 185, 187 


Causo  Gut,  directions. 

Canso  Gut,  features 

CansoGut,  tides 

Causo  Harbor 

Canso  Harbor,  east  side  of  chan- 
nel   

Canso    Harbor,    northwest 
trance 


en- 


185 
180 
186 
158 

159 

161 


Paco 

Canso  Harbor,  oft-lying  islands..  162 
Canso  Harbor  Ship  Channel,  di- 
rections  '. ...  161 

Causo  Harbor,  tides 162 

Canso  Ledges 1^2 

Canso  Town 159 

Canso  Town,  repairs.. 270 

Cape  Breaker. 155) 

Cape  Canso 157 

Cape  Rock 92,146,157 


Cape  Roseway 

Cape  Sable , 

Cape  Sable  Island  . 

Cape, the 

Capodiette  Bay 

Cardigan  Bay 

Cardigan  Point 

Cardigan  River 

Cardigan  Shoal 

Caribou  Channel  . .. 
Caribou,  directions  . 

Caribou  Harbor 

Caribou  Island 

Caribou  Point 

Caribou  Reef 

Caribou,  tides 

Caribou,  west  gully. 
Carleton 


148 
51 

51 
211 

169 
236 
234 
236 
234 
197 
197 
196 
196 
197 
198 
197 
196 

40 


Carleton  Hot 182  227 

Caroline  Island 

Carter  Island , 

Cary  Passage 

Cascarette  Island 

Casco  Island 

Cascumpeque,  anchorage 

Cascumpeque  Bay 

Cascumpeque,  buoys 

Cascumpeque  Harbor 

Cascumpeque,  inner  bar 

Cascumpeque,  outer  bar 

Cascumpeque,  pilots 

Cascu        que,  tides 

Cassias  Point 

Cas8i<«8  Point,  anchorage 

Cassies  Point,  light 

Castor  Rock  and  Shoals 

Cat  Island 

Catch  Harbor 

Catch  Harbor  Head 

Caultield  Point 

Cavendish  Inlet 

Cerberus  Rock 

Cerberus  Kock,  buoy 

Cerberus  Kock,  directions 

Chain  Ledges 


129 
84 
178 
175 
30 
244 
243 
243 
243 
243 
243 
244 
:^43 
210 
210 
210 
144 
110 
112 
111 
203 
243 
167 
167 
167 
83 


<iMiMBWtfef4lHJfcalri 


lauds..  162 
uel,  di- 

.......  161 

162 

162 

158 

270 

158 

157 

....92,146,157 

148 

51 

51 

211 

169 

236 

2M 

236 

234 

197 

197 

196 

196 

197 

198 

197 

196 

40 

182,827 

129 

84 

178 

175 

30 

244 

243 

243 

243 

243 

243 

244 

"Mi 

210 

210 

210 

144 

110 

112 

Ill 

203 

243 

167 

167 

167 

83 


Chambers  i'oitit 

Chaiucuck  Harbor 

Chamcock  Harbor,  dock 

Chance  Harbor 

Chance  Island 

Chandler  River 

Channel  Rock 

Chapman  Brook 

Charles  Island 

Charles  Point 

Charley  Rock 

Charlo  HarVior 

Charlottetowa 

Charlottetowu,  anchorage .. 

v-'h^rlottetown,  coal 

Cliarlottetowu,  consul 

Charlottetottrn,  charges 

Charlottetown,  description 

Charlottetonrn,  directions 

Charlottetown  Harbor 

Charlottetown,  ice 

ChirlottetowD,  railroad 

Charlottetowu,  repairs 

.Charlottetown,  supplies 

Charlottetown,  telegraph 

Charlottetown,  tides 

Chebucto  Head 

Chebuoto  Head,  pilots 

Chedabucto  Bay 

Chedabucto  Bay,  north  shore  ... 

Chedabucto  Bay,  south  shore  ... 

ChAne  Point 

Ch^ne  Point,  town 

Ch6ne  Point,  railroad 

Cherry  Island 

Chester  Harbor 

Chester  Harbor,  directions..' 

Chester  Harbor,  tides 

Chester  Rock 

Chignecto  Cape 

Chignecto  Channel 

Chignecto  Channel,  directions  .. 

Chiua  Point 

Cbissetcook  Inlet 

Ghixsetcook  Inlet,  tides 

ChockleCap 

Chocktish  River 

Chocolate  Cove  and  Shoal 

Churchover  Church 

Church  Point  104 

Chute  Cove 

Chute  Cove,  anchorage 

Clam  Bay 

Clam  Cove 

Clam  Island 


INDEX.  277 

Pace.  ';  **»«* 

199     ClamPoint 51 

33     Clarke  Island 107 

33     Clarks  Ground 22 

39,192     Clay  Maud l^'O 

26     Clay  Island  Spit WO 

23     Cleopatra  Shoal '^^ 

140     Clyde  River 7i» 

71     Coachman  Ledge 98 

127     Coal  Point 19-^ 

129     Cobequid  Mountains "3 

102     CocagneBar -■-  213 

1.50     Cocagne  Harbor 212 

223  Cocagne  Island 212 

225     Cocagne  Point 212 

224  Cocagne  River 212 

224     Cocagne  Steeple 213 

224     Cockawee  Shoal 92 

223  Cookerwit  Harbor  and  Passage  .  55 

224  Coddle  Harbor 150 

222     Coddlelsland 150 

224     Codray  Shoal  122 

824     Coffins  Island 89 

270     Cold  Spring  Head 207 

224     Cole  Harbor 121,150 

224     Cole  Harbor  Head 151 

224     ColePoint 195,198 

112.114     Coles  Head 48 

115     Colquhouu  Point 192 

157     Colt  Rock 34 

172     Columbia  Rook 52 

157     ColvilleBay 237 

210  Colville  River 237 

211  Como  Wharf 65 

212  Conley  Head 43 

•30,33     Conns  House 200 

100     Conquer  All 55 

100     Conway  Inlet 243 

100     Cook  Island 163 

100     CooteHead 142 

47,72     Cordeau  Point ..  177 

46     Cornwallis  River 74 

48     CorveauRocks 164 

225     Country  Harbor 145 

122  Country  Harbor,  directions 148 

123  Country  Harbor  head 146 

95     Country  Harbor  ledges 146 

814  ■  Country  Harbor  tides 148 

30  Co  ateau  Inlet 175 

82  i  Covey  Island  and  Ledge 96 

,  109, 1'.'5     Cow  liedge  and  Shoal  66 

70  I  Cow  Point 23 

70     Cowley  Rook lU 

l-,6     Cranberry  Island 83, 157 

31  I  Cranberry  Point 37,140 

85.103  ;  Crane  Cove 154 


^ 


— -— — swipwwie 


278 


INDEX. 


f 


Page. 

Crapand,  anchorage 2*^6 

Crapaud,  buoyage 2!J6 

Crapaud,  directions a26 

Crapaud, road 226 

Crapaud,  tides 226 

Crawford  Ledge 105 

CrawleySboal 21 

Creighton  Island 171 

Creighton  Point 171 

Creighton  Shoal 171 

Crid  Islands 168 

Crid  Passage 170 

Critchet  Cove 181 

Critchet  Point 181 

Crook  Point  and  Shoals 139 

Crooked  Island  Channel 90 

Cross  Island 25,92,94 

Cross  Jack  Ledge 19 

Croucher  Island 104 

Crouoher  Shoal 103 

Crow  Harbor 164 

Crow  Harbor,  anchorage 165 

Crow  Harbor,  directions 165 

Crow  Harbor,  fisheries 164 

Crow  Harbor,  tides 1&5 

Crow  Island 176 

Crowlslet 157 

Cuckold  Rook 78 

Cnmming  Point 84 

Cumberland  Basin 47,49 

Cumberland  Basin,  directions  ...  50 

Cumberland  Basin,  tides 50 

Cumberland  Cove 227 

Currents 11 

Cutler.... 27 

Cutler  Island 158,161 

p. 

Dalhousie  Mountain 193 

Danberry  Islands 133 

Darby  Point 148 

Dark  Harbor 16,13 

Darnley  Inlet 241 

Daruley  Point 242 

Dartmouth  Point 64 

Dartmouth  Town,  patent  slips.-  113 

Dartmouth  Spit 118 

Dauphney  Head 103 

David  Rock 160 

David  Shoal 138 

Davis  Island 80 

Davis  Point 27 

Davy  Point  and  Rock 104 

Day  Cove 127 

Deadman  Bay 36 


Page» 

Deadman  Head 35 

Deep  Cove 171 

Deep  Hole 211 

Deer  Island 29,31 

Deer  Island  Point 33 

Delorier  Island 171 

De  Lute  Harbor 29 

Deming  Island  and  Point 152 

Demoiselle  Cape 48 

Dennisons  Point 27 

Derabie  Island 163 

Descousse  Harbor 176 

Descousse  Shoal 176 

Devastation  Shoal 87 

Devereux  Shoal 109 

Devil  Island 115,121 

Devil  Island,  pilots 121 

Dev  Is  Limb  Islet 53 

DigbyGut 69 

Digby  Out  and  Cape  Split,   an- 
chorages beiween,  tides 69, 71, 73 

Digby  Gut  to  Cape  Split,  coast  of  69 

Digby  Gut,  directions 69 

Digby  Gut,  tides 69 

Digby  Neck 68 

Digby  Town 69 

Digby,  charges 69 

Digby,  consul 69 

Digby,  repairs 269 

Dipper  Harbor 39 

Division  Point 54 

Dixon  Point 213 

Dixon  Rock 182 

Dochet  Island  and  Shoal 33 

Doctor  Island 196 

Doctor  Point 'J35 

Doctor  Reef 198 

Doctor  Spit 197 

Dog  Island 33 

Dogfish  Point 154 

Deliver  Cove... 151 

Deliver  Island 152 

Doolan  Pond 185 

Dorchester  Island 48 

D'OrCape 72 

D'Or  Cape,  directions 73 

Dorey  Ledge 171 

Dorkin  Island 145 

DoverBay 155 

Dover  Bay,  dangers 155 

Dover  Bay,  telegraph  cables 155 

Dover  Castl* 102,108 

Dover  Head 152 

Dover  Island 155 

Dover  Passage 155 


HUJI.i./, 


35 

171 

211 

29,31 

33 

171 

29 

152 

48 

27 

163 

176 

176 

S7 

109 

, 115,121 

121 

, 53 

69 

;,   an- 

69,71,73 

last  of  69 

69 

69 

, 68 

69 

69 

69 

269 

39 

54 

213 

182 

33 

196 

'J35 

198 

197 

33 

154 

151 

152 

, 185 

48 

72 

, 73 

171 

145 

155 

■•*■••  loo 

es....  155 

102,108 

152 

155 

, 155 


INDEX. 


Dover  Port 

Dover  Shoals 

Doyle  Island 

Doyle  Passage 

Drum  Head 

Dry  ledge 

Duck  Island 

Duck  Island,  ledges 

Duck  Island,  rooks 

Duck  Island,  shoals 

Duck  Reef 

DunbrockRock 

Duncan  Cove  and  Reef. 

Durell  Island 

Dnrphy  Wharf 

Dutchman  Rock 

Dutchman  Little  Rock . 
Dutch  Shoal 


Puge. 
106 
154 
107 
31 
148 

00    : 

126 
126 
126 
126 
115 
122 
115 
158 
82 
229 
229 
147 


279 


Pagt 


229 

129 
53 

166 
60 
60 

223 
85 

123 
23 
25 
43, 46 
92 
44 
82 

208 


Eaglelsland ^'^ 

East  Bull  Rock, 1^2 

East  Head 103.123 

East  Ironbound  Island 9' 

East  Lake '^^ 

East  Lake,  anchorage 238 

East  Lake,  reef 2:« 

East  Point 80,196,237 

East  Point,  ledge 94 

East  Point,  rock 94 

Eastport ^9 

East  River  Point 99 

East  Rock 30,16:1 


182 
192 
130 


East  Sandy  Cove 64 

East  Shoal 98 

East  Spectacle  Island 92 

East  Wolf  Island 23 

Eaatern  Bar  Island 56 

Eastern  Bull  Rock 84 

Eastern  Head  ..., 89 

Eastern  Knubble 27 

Eastern  Sbagroost 134 

Eastern  Shoals 5 

Economy  Point 73,76 

Economy  River 76 

Eddy  Point 68,181 

Eddy  Spit ll^l 

Ede  Rock H'-J 

Egg  Island 121,124,126 

Eglington  Cove 

EgUngton  Point 

Egmont  Bank 

Egmont  Bay : 

Egmont,  tides 


Egmont  Cape  ......  . 

Eisan  Point .- 

Elbow  Shoal 

Eliza  Point 

Ellen  wood  Island.... 
Ellenwood  Passage  .. 

Elliott  River 

Emulous  Ledge  ..... 

English  Poiat 

Englishman  Bay  — 
Englishman  Bay,  ice 

Enrag6Cape 

Enrag^  Point 

Entmerson  Creek .... 

Entry  Cape 

Ephraira  Banks  — 

Ephraim  Island 'f^ 

Evans  Island 

Evans  Point 

Eve  Ledge  

F. 

FaberHead ^^^ 

Fairweather  Rock l*^ 

False  Passage ^^^'1?^ 

Fanning  Rock 

Farm  Ledge 

Farmer  Ledge 

Ferry  Pier 

Ferry  Reef 

Ferry  Wharf 

Fiddle  Shoal 

Fifteen  Point • 

Fifteen  Point  Beacon 

Fifteen  Point  Charch 

Fifteen  Point  Settlement 

Fisherman  Cove 

Fisherman  Harbor ■ 

Fisherman  Harbor,  directions 

Fisherman  Island ■ 

]  Fishermans  Bank  

Fishery  Point 


16:) 

r5 

18 

225 

179 

125 

169 

229 

229 

229 

229 

:{6 

144 

144 

152 

232 

134 


Fishing  Point ^06 


237 
237 
229 
229 
230 


Fish  Island 

Fish  Shoal 

Fitzroy  Buoy 

Fitzroy  Rock 

Five  Islands 

Flag  Cove  Point 

Flag  Hill 

Flat  Head 

Flat  Island 53,97,107 

Flat  Ledge ^"^ 

Flat  Point 1^1.167 


241 

178 
221 

2a 

75 

18 
158 
180 


i  I 


\i 


1:1 

u 


i 


^^.. 


280 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Flat  River -2U0 

Flat  Wolf  Island 23 

Flea  iHlaml 3H 

Fleck  Point 146 

Fleck  Shoal 144 

Fleming  Cliff 143 

Fleming  iNland 107 

Fleming  Ledge 107 

Flint  Ledge 126 

Floss  Island 31 

Floss  Ledge 33 

Flnid  Point 154 

Flying  Point....! 146 

Folly  Point 48 

Forest  Cove 168 

Fort  Point 80,93,157 

Fort  Point  Ledge 81) 

Fortune  Bay 237 

FortuneRiver 237 

Foster  Island 24,00 

Foul  Ground 20,62 

Found  Head 45 

Fourchu  Cape. 63 

Fox  Bay 205 

Fox  Harbor 205 

Fox  Island    62,72,164 

Fox  Point 73 

Fox  Rooks 164 

Frazer  Head 75 

Freeman  Island 183 

French  Creek 215 

French  Cross  Village 70 

French  Island 192,21S 

Frenchman  Elbow 66 

Frenchman  Island 54 

Frenchman  Point 52 

French  Point 234 

French  Rock 92,151 

French  Village  Harbor 104 

Friar  Bay 29 

Friar  Head , 29 

Friar  Island 127 

Friar  Ledges Iif7 

Frog  Island id 

Frying  Pan  Islet 90,157 

Frying  Pan  Reef 160 

Frying  Pan  Rock 108 

Fuudy  Bay.  directions 32 

Fuudy  Bay,  fogs 3,32 

Fundy  Bay,  general  remarks 16 

Fundy  Bay,  pilots 16 

Fundy  Bay,  smokes 2 

Fundy  Bay,  tides 3 

Fundy  Bay,  winds 2 


O. 

Paj(e 

Gabion  Point 176 

Gabion  Shoal 176 

Gaff  Point 02 

Gallows  Point 225 

Gammon  Islets 152 

Gannet  Dry  Ledge 61 

Gannet  Ledges 156 

Gannet  Point 156 

Gannet  Rock j 10,60 

Gannet  Shoal 155 

Gannet  South  Shoal 61 

Gannet  Southwest  Shoal 61 

Garret  Cove 100 

QaiidinPoint 234 

Geddes  Shoal 134 

George  Island 104,115,157 

George  Port 70 

George  Port  anchorage 70 

George  Shoal 7 

Georgetown,  auchorage 235 

Gaorgeto wn,  can  f.ion 122 

Georgetown,  coal 233 

Georgetown,  consul..., .  233 

Georgetown,  direotionti 235 

Georgetown ,  harbor 233 

Georgetown,  railway 233 

Georgetown,  supplies 233 

Georgetown,  tides 235 

Gerard  Head ]3i 

Gerard  Island 132 

Ghost  Beach ^ igo 

Gibbon  Breakwater 70 

Giddis  Point .  213 

Gilbert  Cove (54 

Gilbert  Point «i5 

Glasgow  Harbor 159 

Glasgow  Head 157 

Glasgow  Point 178 

GoillonReef 175 

Gold  Island 137 

Gooseberry  Island 84 

GooseCreek 45 

Goose  Island 126,137,147 

Goose  Ledg« 126 

Goose  Ledges 126 

Goulet,  anchorage 176 

Gonlet  Beach I7f, 

Government  Point 85 

Governor  Buoy 221 

Governor  Island 281 

Governor  Shoals 221 

Grady  Point 17i 

Graham  Head 116,121,228 


Page 

176 

176 

0-2 

5Ri5 

152 

61 

156 

156 

....       19,60 

155 

61 

61 

100 

834 

134 

.104,115,157 

70 

70 

7 

835 

18-2 

833 

833 

835 
233 
233 
833 
835 
131  ' 

138 

180 

70 

813 

64 

65 

159 

157 

178 

175 

137 

....  84 

45 

186, 137, 147 

126 

186 

176 

176 

85 

881 

281 

221 

l-i 

116,121,228 


INDEX. 


P««e 
833 
833 
149 
110 
48 
174 


Grttbain  Ledge 

Ornhani  Point 

Graham  Shoal 

iiraiupu»  Rock 

Grande  Anse  Ledge 

Grande-grfive 

Grandigue,  anchorage 179 

Grandigiio  Bank '^^^ 

Grandigue  Ferry ^^^ 

Grandigue  Narrows 1'^ 

Grandigue  Point ^'^ 

Grandigue  Spit ^'^ 

Grand  Harbor '^'-•*^ 

Grand  Manan  Bank l^ 

Grand  Manau  Island 1^23 

Grand  Mauan  Island,  tides 

Grand  Passage 

Grand  Passage,  directions.. 

Grand  Passage,  tides 

Grand  River 

Granville  Mount. 


Grog  Rock 

GrosNez  Islet 

Grnm  Point 

(Juernsey  Cove 

Guernsey  Point '-^^^ 


18 
66 
67 
66 
241 
175 


281 

80 
167 
131 
219 
231 
133 
17 
,-6 
139 
146 


56, 


Grassy  Island 98,157 


160 
158 
233 
108 
108 
139 
99 
303 
803 


24 


Grassy  Reef 

Grave  Island 

Grave  Point 

Gravel  Island 

Gravel  Island  Shoals 

Gravel  Point 

Graves  Island  and  Shoal 

Gravois  Point 

Gravois  Hcef 

Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland  ... 

Great  Cove 

Great  Head 24,27 

Great  Spruce  Island ^^ 

Great  Tancock  Island 97 

Green  Bank ^ 

Green  Bay ^^ 

Green  Harbor ^'^ 

Green  Island 30,34,54,61,82,86,94, 

97, 144, 147, 167 

Green  Islands 21 

Green  Ledge S^L  151 

Green  Point 91,108,145 

Green  Point  Rock 

Gieeu  Point  Shoal 

Green  Ledge 

Green  Shoal 

Green  Wolf  Island 

Grey  Island 

Grey  Rocks 

Grime  Rook  and  Buoy 163,164 

Grindstone  Island 46 

Grindstone  Shoal 4fi 

Grizzle  Rock 126 


Guilford  Island 

GnllCove 

Gull  Island.... 

GiiU  Ledge 

Gull  Nest 

Gull  Rock  . .  .21, 30, 65, 82, 83,  111,  124, 133 

Gull  Shoal 1^^8 

Gulliver  Hole 

Gut  of  Canso ■ 

Guysborough  Bar,  inner  .. 
Guysborough  Bar,  outer  — 
Guysborough,  lescriptions 
Guysborough,  direction.  .. 

Guysborough  Harbor 

Guysborough  Interval 

Guysborough  Narrows 

Guysborough,  pilots 

Gnysborougl'  River 


91 

102 

151 

108 

83 

81 

80 


68 
180 
166 
106 
165 
166 
105 
166 
165 
165 
165 


Guysboro\igh,  tides 166 

H. 


Hadley  Beach  . . . 
Haddock  Harbor 
Haddock  Rock. 


166 
171 
166 

Haddock  Shoal ^'6,98 

230 
59 
164 
164 
164 


Haldimand  River 

Half  Bald  Tusket  Island 

Half  Island  Cove 

Half  Island  Cove,  anchorage. 
Half  Island  Cove  Rock. 


Half  Tide  Rock 19.35 

165 

91 

s7 

137 

106 

113 

114 

114 

114 

113 

113 

113 

269 

Halifax,  telegraph 113,116 

114 

118 

114 


Halfway  Cove 

Halfway  Rock 

HaliHutHead 

Halibut  Islands 

Halibut  Rock 

Halifax 

Halifax,  charges  ... 

Halifax,  coal 

Halifax,  consul 

Halifax,  dock 

Halifax,  population. 
Halifax,  railroad  ... 
Halifax,  repairs 


Halifax,  time  signal... 

Halifax  Harbor 

Halifax  Harbor,  buoys 

Halifax  Harbor,   prohibited  an- 
chorage  - 


115 


i 

\i 


hi 


1% 


282 


INDEX. 


r 


■  • 


P«ge. 

Halifax  Harbor,  directionii llU-131 

Halifax  Harbor,  eastern  passage .  115 

Halifax  Harbor,  pilots 111,181 

Halifax  Harbor,  tides 116 

Halifax  Island 34 

Hall  Harbor 71 

Ham  Island 97 

Harbor  Island 33, 130, 144, 147 

Harbor  Islet 138 

HurborPoint -. 146 

HarborRock 136 

HardingPoint 86 

Hardwood  Island 33, 129, 134, 136 

Harmon  Island 95 

HarrietLedge 58,60 

Hartland  Bay 94 

Hartland  Point 117,121 

Hartlin  Island 137 

Hart  Point  and  Rook 83 

HastingsPort 185 

Hastings  Port,  anchorage 185 

HastingsPort,  cliffs 185 

Hastings  Port,  supplies 185 

Hastings  Port,  telegrapb  office..  185 

Hastings  Port,  tides 185 

Hautfond  Sboals 168 

Havre  Bonche Is7 

Hawbolt  Island 139 

HawboltRock 140 

Hawkesbury  Port 184 

Hawkesbury,  anchorage 184 

Hawkesbury,  consul 184 

Ha wkesbary,  directions 184 

Ha wkesbnry  Point 184 

Hawkesbury,  repairs 270 

Hawkesbnry,  slip 184 

Hawk  Islet 177 

Hawkesbill 198 

Haymaker  Islands  and  Ledge.. .  60 

Hayman  Point 104 

Head  Harbor 29.103 

Heart  Shoal 208 

Heath  Head 167 

Heokman,  anchorage 95 

Hemeon  Head 85 

Hemloe  Island 141 

Hen  and  Chickens  Rocks 63 

Hun  ley  Ledges ,...  169 

Heiinesy  Bank 112 

Henry  Island 187 

Herbert  Port 86 

Herbert  Rocks 86 

HeroShoal 8J 

Heron  Island 108 

Heron  Point 179 


Page. 

Heron  Rock 109 

Herring  Bay 29 

Herring  Cove 115 

Herring  Point 103 

Herring  Shoal 133 

HerveyCove 337 

j  Hervey  Point S37 

j  Hervey  Reef 337 

I  Hickey  Island 24,35 

I  High  Island 107 

I  High  Duck  Island 17 

!  HillPoint 244 

Hillsborough  Bay 221 

Hillsborough  Bay,  caution 322 

Hillsborough  Bay,  east  side  of 

channel 231 

Hillsborough  Bay,  west  side  of 

channel 321 

Hillsborough  River 223 

Hobson  Nose 95 

HoganCape 167 

Hogback  Shoal 74 

Hog  Island 57,151,163 

Hog  Island  Point 130 

Holland  Cove 181 

Holland  Harbor.... 343 

Hollins  Bay,  bead  and  shoal 143 

Holly  Point 144 

Holmes  Bay 26 

Holmes  Island 58,60 

Hopkin  Rock 134 

Hopoon  Island 109 

Home  Shoal 155 

Horsehead  Shoal  166,174 

Horse  Island 103,131,136 

Horse  Islands 136 

Horse  Race 53 

Horse  Rock 103,131 

Horseshoe  Channel 341 

Horseshoe  Cove 72 

Horseshoe  Ledge 106 

Horseshoe  Shoal 116,138,341 

Horton  Bluff 74 

Horton  Flats 46 

Horton  Islet 143 

Horton  Point 303 

Horton  River 76 

Horton  Shoal 203 

Horton  Spit 203 

Hospital  Hill  110 

Hospital  Islands. 33 

Hounds  Ledge 91 

Howards  Bay 36 

Ho%ve  Point 154,237 

Howe  Port 154 


INDEX. 


283 


Page. 

IQO 

29 

115 

102 

i:i2 

237 

S37 

237 

24,25 

107 

17 

244 

m 222 

Hide  of 
221 

aide  of 

221 

223 

95 

167 

74 

57,151,163 

130 

181 

243 

loal 143 

144 

26 

58,60 

124 

109 

155 

166,174 

102,131,136 

136 

52 

102,131 

241 

72 

106 

116,138,241 

74 

46 

142 

203 

76 

203 

203 

110 

33 

91 

26 

154,237 

154 


Howe  Port,  directions. 

Hubbard  Cove 

HnbertB  Wharf 

Hunter  River 

Hnnters  Patch 

Hnntley  Rock 

Hurley  Shoal • 

Hydra  Rock 


Page. 
154 
103 
168 
240 
39 
221 
126 
173 


I. 


18p» 

188 

-.88 

88 

61 


14 

15 

143 

17o 

227 


219 
220 


Ice  - 

Ice  Blink 

Indian  Bay 

Indian  Creek 

Indian  Head 

Indian  Wand :«'.91.8-28 

Indian  Point 97.183.207,227 

Indian  Rooks 

Indian  Rocks,  buoy 

Indian  Rooks,  tides ^'^ 

Indian  Spit 

Ingersol  Creek 

Ingram  River 

Inhabitants  Bay 

Inhabitants  Harbor 

Inhabitants  Harbor,  anchor-ge. 
Inhabitants  Harbor,  directions. 

Inhabitants  Harbor,  tides 

Inhabitants  River 

luman  Point 

InmanRock 

Inner  Bald  Island 

Inner  Bass  Rock 

Inner  Diamond  Shoal 

Inner  Gull  Ledge 

Inner  Gnll  Rock 

Inner  Middle  Rock 

Inner  Sambro  Island 

Irish  Point 

Iroubound  Breaker 

Ironbouud  Ledge 

Isaac  Harbor 

Isaac  Harbor,  pilots 

Isaac  Harbor,  supplies 

Island  Harbor • 

Island  Harbor,  directions 

Island  Harbor,  pilots 

Island  Rock  

Island  Shoal 

Islo  Haute 

Isle  Hautf,  anchorage 

Isle  of  Man 

IvesPoint 

Ives  Knoll 


22H 

166 

103 

lrt2 

18:) 

183 

181 

183 

18:1 

226 

225 
.->8 

163 
21 

152 

108 

94 

111 

168 

92 

130 

149 

149 

150 

148 

148 

148 

HI 

228 

71 

71 

111 

116 

116 


Jack  Cape 

Jack  Shoal 

Jack  Shoal,  caution 

Jacket  Island 

JackoRidge 

Jackson  Point ''*2. 

Jail  Island 

Janvrin  Harbor 

Jauvrin  Point *^'^ 

Janvrin  Shoal 

JarvisBank 

Jebogne  Ledge •• 

.Tebogne  Point 

Jebogue  Point  Shoal 

;  Jebogue  River 

i  Jebogue  River,  directions 

i  Jedore  Cliff 

:  Jedore  Harbor 

I  Jedore  Harbor,  dangers  off  en- 

I      trance 

I  Jedore  Harbor,  directions 1»^ 

!  Jedore  Harbor,  supplies 

1  Jedore  Harbor,  tides 

i  Jedore  Head 

'  Jedore  Ledges 

1  Jedore  Rock ;** 

Jegogan  Harbor 

Jerome  Point 

Jerry  Island 

Jerseyman  Island 

Jig  Rock 

Joe  Point 

John  Bay  

John  Cape ■ 

John  Island 

John  River 

Johnson  Island 

Jolie  Point  and  Port ^''"^ 

Jolifte  Head ^" 

Jones,  anchorage 

Jones  Island 

Jones  Ledge 

Jordon  Point 

Jordon  River 

Jouri  main ,  anchorage 

Jourimain  Cape ^"* 


3ft 

171 
.178 

17* 

147 
61 
61 
61 
61 
6* 

123 
123 

123 


123 
126 
123 
124 


141 
175 
205 
168^ 

81 

33 
200 
200 

7« 
201 

91 


57 
56 
56 

83 

82 

209 


209 


Jonrimain  Islands 

Jourimain  Shoals "^ 


Jourimain.  tides. 


K. 


Kavanagh  Point  - 
Keato».  Point 


208 


169 
185 


284 


INDKX. 


r 


Keejier  Rock 

Kelly  Point 

Kelp  Rock 

Kelp  Shoal 

Kendall  Heinl , 

Kennetcuck  River 

Kent  Shoal 

Kildare  Cape 

KinjjHead 

Kings  Bay 

Kirby  Rock ... 

Kittee  Wittee  Shoal 

Knoll  Shoal 

Koiichiboiiguac  Hay 

KoiichibouKuac  Bar 

Kouuhihonguac  River  ... 
KoiichilmuKiiacHiH  River. 

KouchibouKnet  River 

Krout  Point 

Kyak  Brook 


Labrador  Current 

La  Have  Bank 

La  Have  Cape 

La  Have  River 

La  Have  River,  anchorage 

La  Have  River,  directions 

Lakemau  Island 

Lamb  Point 

Lauigan  Beach 

Lang  Island 

Larrabees  Cove 

Larry  River 

Latonr  Port 

Laurent  Shoal 

Lawler  Island 

Lawler  Point 

Lawrenceton  Head  and  Lake  ... 

Lazy  Bay  

Lazy  Head  

Lazy  Point 

Lear  Island 

Leary  Point 

Leblauc  Point 

Le  Blanc  Harbor 

Lennox  Island 

Lennox  Island,  settlement 

Lennox  Passage 

Lennox  Passage,  anchorages 

Lennox  Pas8age,ea8teru  entrance 
Lennox    Passage,    western    en- 
trance   

Leopard  Spit , 


158 

23 

16» 

rt4,  IW 

33 

74 

20 

244 

191 

»4 

158 

109 

234 

217 

217 

217 

216 

210 

92 

154 


12 


91 

91 

92 

92 

24 

164 

158 

141 

20 

150 

78 

208 

115 

132 

121 

205 

164 

165 

57 

107 

151 

171 

241 

241 

173 

177 

174 

178 
118 


Leprean  Basin ,. 

Lepreaii  Bay 

Lepreau  Ledges 

Lepreau  Point 

Leslie  Island , 

Lesser  Hope  Rock 

L'Etang  Harbor 

L'Etang  Harbor,  directions., 

L'Etang  Head 

L'Etting  River 

Letite  Passage 

Lewis  Head 

Lewis  Reef 

Libby  Island 

Lichtield  Rock 

Light,  Abbot  Island 

Light,  Advocate  Harbor 

Light,  Amet  Island 

Light,  Andersons  Hollow 

Light,  Annapolis 

Light,  Apple  River 

Light,  Arichat  Harbor 

Light,  Arichat  Harbor,  West. 

Light,  Baccaro  Point 

Light,  Barrington  Bay 

Light,  Battery  Point 

Light,  Bear  Cape 

Light,  Beaver  Island 

Light,  Belliveau  Cove 

Light,  Belyeas  Point 

Light,  Berry  Head 

Light,  Betty  Island 

Light,  Big  Fish  Island 

Light,  Big  Miniinegash 

Light,  Big  Tignish 

Light,  Black  Rock 

Light,  Bliss  Island 

Light,  Boars  Head 

Light,  Bon  Portage  Island... 

Light,  Brier  Island 

Light,  Brooklyn  Pier 

Light,  Buctouche  Harbor. .... 

Light,  Banker  Island 

Light,  Bnrncoat  Head 

Light,  Campobello  Island 

Light,  Canso  Harbor 

Light,  Cardigan  Bay 

Light,  Caribou  Island 

Light,  Carter  Island : 

Light,  Cascumpeque  Bay 

Light,  Cassias  Point 

Light,  Chebucto  Head 

Light.  Church  Point 

Light.  Cobequid  Bay 

Light,  CoflBn  Island 


Pig*. 

38 
38 
38 
37 
132 
86 
34 
36 
35 
35 
29 
207 
207 
25 
117 
258 
255 
263 
255 
256 
255 
264 
264 
258 
258 
260 
266 
261 
257 
254 
262 
260 
258 
267 
267 
256 
253 
257 
258 
257 
259 
265 
257 
256 
253 
26> 
266 
263 
259 
267 
265 
261 
257 
255 
259 


H 


INDEX. 


285 


Page. 

38 

38 

38 

37 

132 

86 

34 

36 

35 

35 

'29 

807 

207 

a.'. 

117 

258 

855 

263 

255 

256 

255 

264 

264 

258 

258 

260 

266 

261 

257 

254 

262 

260 

258 

267 

267 

256 

253 

257 

258 

257 

259 

265 

257 

256 

253 

26^ 

266 

263 

259 

267 

265 

261 

257 

255 

259 


Lljrlit.Cold  Spring  Heatl 

Li«l  t.C'ove  Head  IJiiy 

Light,  Cox  Point 

Light, Criiiil)eir.v  Isluiul 

Light,  Criiimud  Harbor 

Light,  Cross  Islaml 

Light,  Croiicher  Ixlaiul 

Liglit,Cro\v  Harbor 

Light,  IMruUiy  Point 

Light,  Uevil  Inhiiul 

Light,  Dighy 

Light,  Dipjier  Harbor 

Light,  Dog  Inlaiid 

Liglit,  Drews  Head 

Light,  East  Iroubonnd  Island... 

Light,  East  Point 

Light,  Egg  Island 

Light,  Egmout  Cape 

Light,  Eurag^  Cape 

Light,  Fan, joy  Point 

Light,  Fishfluke  Point 

Light,  Fish  Island 

Light,  Flewellings  Landing 

Light,  Foi-t  Point 

Light,  Fort  Folly  Point 

Light,  Fourchu  Cape 

Light,  Gannet  Rock 

Light,  George  Island 

Light,  George  Port 

Light,  Glasgow  Point 

Light,  Grandigue 

Light,  Grand  Kustico 

Light,  Green  Cove 

Light,  Green  Head 

Light,  Green  Island 260, 

Light,  Grindstone  Island 

Light,  Gull  Rock 

Light,  Guysborough 

Light,  Hackersfr  Point 

Light,  Ha wkesbnry  Port 

Light,  Herbert  Port 

Light,  Herring  Cove 

Light,  Hobson  Nose 

Light,  Hillsborough 

Light,  Hillsborough  Bay 

Light,  Hortoii 

Light,  Hubbard  Cove 

Light,  Indian  Point 

Light,  Isaac  Harbor 

Light,  Isle  Haute 

Light,  Jedore  Rock 

Light,  Jemseg 

Light,  .Jersey man  Island 

Light,  Jouriiuain  Islet 

Light,  Kingsport 


Pag.. 
■iM 
268  \ 
25t 
262, 
2(17  I 

2i>o  ; 

2(i0 
202 
267  i 
261 
25t'> 
253 
264 
253 
260 
265 
261 
267 
255 
254 
252 
268 
254 
259 
255 
257 
251 
261 
2.56 
264 
264 
268 
257 
254 
262,264 
255 
259 
262 
254 
263 
259 
261 
260 
255 
266 
2.56 
260 
267 
262 
256 
261 
254 
264 
265 
256 


Light,  Latour  Port 

Light,  La  Have  River 

Light,  Leuuo.K  Punsago 

Light,  Lepreaii  Point 

Light,  Lisconib  Inland 

Light,  Little  Channel 

Light.  Little  Hope  Islet 

Light,  Little  River 

Light,  Liverpool 

Light,  Lubec  Narrows 

Liglit,  Lunenburg 

Light, Machias  Seal  Island... 

Light,  McMaJius  Point 

Light,  Margaretv  ille 

Light,  Mark  Point 

Light,  Marshall  Cove 

Light,  Mehollan  Point 

Light, Merigoinish  Harbor  ... 

Light,  Meteghan  River 

Light,  Met  way  Port 

Light,  Midjio  Blutt" 

Light,  Mosher  Island 

Light,  Mulholland  Point 

Light,  Murray  Harbor 

Light, Musquash  Harbor  ... 

Light,  Negro  Island 

Light,  Negro  Point 

Light, New  Loudon  Harbor. 

Light,  No  Mans  Friend 

Light,  North  Point 

Light,  Oromajto  Siioal 

Light,  Oak  Point 

Light,  Ouetique  Island 

Light,  Palmers  Lauding 

Light,  Panmure  Head 

Light,  Parrsboro 

Light,  Partridge  Island 

Light,  Pea  Island 

Light,  Pease  Island 

Light,  Peggy  Point 

Light,  Peter  Island 

Light,  Petitdegrat  Inlet  — 

Light,  Piotou  Harbor 

Light,  Pictou  Island 

Light,  Poniquet  Island 

Light,  Pope  Harbor 

Light,  Prim  Point 

Light,  Pubnico  Harbor 

Light,  Pug  wash  Harbor  ... 

Light.Quaco  Head 

Light,  Quaker  Island 

Light,  Qnoddy  Head 

Light,  Richibucto  River.. . 

Light,  RichnisndBay 

Light,  Robertson  Point 


•iilte. 
-.TiH 
2.-)9 
264 
253 
•,'('.2 
2ti7 
259 
208 
i:i7 
2.-.3 
260 
251 
254 
2.')6 
2.-.2 
1«6 
210 
263 
2.57 
259 
217 
259 
253 
266 
253 
259 
253 
208 
253 
267 
253 
254 
264 
254 
266 
255 
2.53 
253 
257 
260 
257 
264 
263 
263 
263 
261 
2,57 
258 
264 
2.54 
260 
251 
2ft5 
268 
254 


SA6 


INDEX. 


P»6*    I 

Li){bt,  UoMway  Cape SW 

Light,  Round  Cnpe Mi  \ 

Liglit,  8ul»le  Capt. 2r>8 

LiKitt,  SaliU)  iHland 'itt'i 

Littlit,  Hiiiiit  Andrew UM  ' 

Litflit,  St.  GeotKe  Capo 2t¥S 

Light,  St.  Martins  Head '«>4 

Light,  St.  John   Harhor ar.:J 

Light,  St.  Mary iWi" 

Light,  St.  PeterH  Bay 264 

Light,  St.  PeterH  Harbor 8(W 

Light,  Salters  Head '255 

Light,  Sanibro  iNlund.... 2<il 

Light,  Sand  Point  254,46:1 

Light,  Sand  Spit 259 

Light,  Savage  Harbor 268 

Light,  Sea  Cow  Head 267 

Light,  .Seal  Inland. 238,264 

Light,  Shall'ners  Point 25t) 

Light,  Sharp  Cape 255 

Light,  Shediac  Harbor 265 

Light,  Sheet  Hurbor 261 

Light,  Sherbrook  Tower 261 

Light.  SiBsibon  River 257 

Light,  Sonri8  East 265 

Light,  Southwest  Head 252 

Light,  Spectacle  Isluud 259 

Light,  Spencer  Cape 254,255 

Light,  Spruce  Point 252 

Light,  Stoddart  Maud 258 

Light,  Snmuierside 267 

Light,  Swallow  Tail 252 

Light,  Terence  Bay 261 

Light,  Three  Top  Island 262 

Light,  Tracadie  Harbor 268 

Light,  Tnsket  River 258 

Light,  Walton  Harbor 256 

Light,  Wards  Point 255 

Light,  Wedge  Island 262 

Light,  Westhaver  Island 26U 

Light,  West  Head 258 

Light,  West  Ironbonud  Island..  259 

Light,  West  Point 267 

Light,  Westport 257 

Light.  Whitehead  Island 258,262 

Light,  Williams  Landing 254 

Light,  Wilniot  Bluflf 253 

Light,  Windsor 256 

Light,  Williams  Port 2,56 

Light,  Wolf  Island 252 

Light,  Wood  Island 266 

Light,  Yarmouth 257 

Light-honse  Rook bi 

Limbs  Limb  Rock 53 

Lime  Creek 206 


Liscomb  Harbor 140 

Liaconib  Harbor,  directions 141 

Liscomb  Harbor,  snppl  ies 140 

Liscoml)  Harbor,  tides 141 

Liscomb  Island  and  Bank 189,141 

Liscomb  Point 139 

Licotnli  River 140 

Liscomb  Shoal 140 

Little  Harbor 31,192 

Little  Bald  Tnsket  Island 58 

Little  Bald  Tnsket  Shoal 58 

Little  Chance  Harbor 39 

Little  Dipper  Harbor 39 

Little  Dover  Run 155 

Little  Duck  Island 98 

Little  East  River 99 

Little  Harbor 126,150,192 

Little  Harmon  Island 96 

Little  Hopelsland 86 

Little  Hope  Islet  and  Shoal 87 

Little  Jolie  Bay 87 

Little  Kennebec  River 25 

Little  Liscomb  Harbor 141 

Little  Machia^  Bay 27 

Little  Maohias  Bay,  ice 27 

Little  Mn8<iuash  Harbor 39 

Little  River 27,65,127,183,188,237 

Little  River  Island 27 

Little  River  Head 27 

Little  River,  ice 28 

Little  Rock 128 

Little  Sands 219 

Little  Stiuy  Island.... 65 

Little  Sturgeon  Cove 36 

Little  Tanoook  Island 97 

Little  Thrum  Island  and  Spit .. .  105 

Little  White  Island 140 

Liverpool  Bay  and  town 88, 89 

Liverpool, bnoy 89 

Liverpool,  consul 89 

Liverpool,  directions 89 

Liverpool,  exports.... 89 

Liverpool,  supplies 69 

Livingstone  Bay 233 

Lobster  Claws 99 

Lobster  Cove 138 

LobsterPoint 99,139 

Loch  Foyne  Shoal 53 

Locke  Island 146 

Look  Point 157 

LockwoodRock 138 

Logan  Point 193 

Logan  Rock 133 

Long  Beach 45 

LongCove 105 


140 

tloiu 141 

lies ItO 

1 141 

»nk 189.141 

13l» 

140 

140 

:U,1'J2 

and M 

oal r>8 

:»9 

, 39 

155 

, 96 

99 

126,150,192 

96 

86 

3hoal 87 

87 

r as 

r 141 

27 

B 27 

por 39 

65,127,183,188,237 

27 

27 

28 

128 

219 

65 

36 

[ 97 

.ndSpit...  105 

140 

wa 88,89 

89 

89 

89 

: 89 

89 

233 

99 

138 

99,139 

53 

146 

157 

138 

193 

133 

45 

105 


INDEX. 


page. 

Lon^Kdily,  f"K  sinuttl .-••  '■^ 

LoiiK  I-tliiud n.  18.64,  IIH,  !26. 131 

Loiin  InIuiuI  Bay ''^ 

LoiiK  L«d«'' 20,la;J 

Lon«  Point 31,86,91 

Loiij}  Sliiml ^'^'^'^•' 

LiniK  i^pit 

Loniloii  Hench 

Louse  Hiirlior  and  Island 

Low  IJeacli 

Low  Dncli  Inland 

Low  Point 

Low  Village 

Liibeo  Narrows 

Liil>ec  Town 

Lnke,  anchorage  and  islet 

Lump  Rock 

Lnnisden  Shoal 

Lunenburg 

Lunenburg,  consul 

Lunenburg,  pilots 

Lunenburg  Harbor 

Lunt-nburg  Harbor,  directions  .. 

Lurcher  Shoal 

Lurcher  Shoal,  buoy 

L>i  rcher  Shoal ,  tides 

Lynch  Island  and  Shoal •-.. . 


99 
195 
155 
6i 
17 
178 
215 
29 
29 
105 
140 
15f) 
94 
94 
94 
94 
95 
63 
63 
64 
99 


Macmaster  Island 

Ma<'nul)  Cove 

Macnali  Islantl 

Maeniiir  Point 

Macplitt"  Shoal 

MacWiUiaui  Cove 

Ma<laga8car  Rock 

Madame  Island • 

Madden  Cove 

Madeline  Point 

Mud  Moll  Reef 

Mahone  Hay  

Mahone  bay,  anchorage 

Mahone  Hay,  directions 

Mahone  Uay,  fogs 

Mahone  Harbor 

Mackerel  Harbor  directions. 

Main  Ledge 

Main  Point 

Malagnsh  Island 

Malignant  Cove 

j  Malouey  Rock 

Malpeiiue,  anchorage 


287 

P»«8. 

29 
UH 
115 
IHl 

2;i6 

230 
18'i 
167 
K) 
155 
132 
95 
101 
100 
96 
96 
96 
5 
25 
132 
191 
132 
242 


n, 

Macdonald  Point 

Macdonald  Rock 

Macdonald  Shoals 

Macdougal  Point 

Mace«i  Bay 

Maces  Bay,  directions 

Machias  Bay 

Machias  River. 


134 

124 

134 

219 

37 

38 

25 

26 

Machias  Seal  Island 17, 18 

Machias  Seal  Island,  dire "*:ot--  .  22 
Machias     Seal    Island,     Middle 

Shoal 13 

Machias  Seal  Island,  North  Rock  19 

Machias  Seal  Island,  North  Shoal  19 

Machias  Seal  Island,  8E.  Ledge. .  19 

MachiasSeallsland.SE.  Shoal..  19 

Machias  Seal  Island,  tides 22 

Maclsaac  Point 190 

Maclsaao  Rock 190 

Mackeen  Point 182 

Mackerel  Rock 79.159 

Mackerel  Shoal  

Mackinzie  Head 

Mackenzie  Point 

Mackenzie  Shoal 

Macleod  Covo 


242 
242 
241 
242 
241 
242 
242 
29 


Malpeque  Bar 2^2 

Malpcque  Church 

Malpeque,  directions 

Malpeque  Harbor • 

Malpe(iue,pilots 

Malpe(ino  Settlement 

Malpeque,  supplies 

Malpeque,  tides 

Man-of-war  Head 

Man-of.war  Island 35,36 

Man-of-war  Rock 34,81,159 

Marache  Point 168 

March  Water 241 

Mare  Rock 34,  111 

Margaretville  Point 

Margaretville,  anchorage 

Mariugouin  Cape 

Maringouin  Flats ••  ■ 

Mariugouin  Shoal 

Mark  Hill 

Mark  Island 

Mark  Point 166,174 

Marks  Island  and  Ledge 59 

Marie  Head 225 

Marmot  Rock 136 

Mars  Head 108, 110. 151 


140 
194 
205 
194 
136 


70 
70 
47 
48 
47 
21 
29 


Mars  Rock 

Marsh  Gutter  Rock. 

Marsh  Point 

Marshall  Cove 

Marsh  River 

Martinique  Cove  ... 


117 

106 

I2i 

70, 151 

217 

178 


•^iiiliiiMii 


,^4^  iT-iiii^iW^ 


288 


INDE! 


'■     I 


Paice. 

Martin  Island HO 

Mr.rtin  River,  anchorage 96 

Martin  Shoal 131 

Mary  IsJaud l'^9 

Mary  Joseph  Harbor 13tf 

Mary  Joseph  Harbor,  directions.  139 

Mary  Joseph  Harbor,  supplies  ..  138 

Mascabiu  Point 36 

Mason  Cove 130 

Mason  Island  and  Spit 96, 98 

Massacre  Island - SS 

Matthews  Hnad 45 

Mangher  BeacL  115 

McAnslin  Island 840 

McCanu  Island 35 

McCoy  Head 44 

McCumber  Point 45 

McDiarniid  Cove 142 

McDonald  Point 104 

McEnnis  Point 'i"25 

McNutts  Island  81 

Medea  Rock 210 

Mehauny  Rock 124 

Melford  Point 181 

Melville  Island 11<^ 

Meinranicook  River 49 

Meniranicook  Spit 48 

Meogeues  Islands 40 

Merigomish  Harbor 191 

Merigomlsh  Island 192 

Merigomish  Point 191 

Merigomlsh,  tides 192 

Met  way  Head •- 89 

MetwayPort 89 

Michaux  Ledges 166 

Michaux  Point "  166 

Middle  ground 7,48,107,110,117, 

128,179,223,228 

Middle  Island  Rock  90 

Middle  Ledge 90,96,145 

Middle  Patch 96 

Middle  Point 102 

Middle  Point  Rock 105 

Middle  Rock 81,84,87, 126, 163 

Middle  Shoal 97,98,104,136,190 

Midjic  Bluff 34 

Mill  Cove 29,102 

Mill  Creek 185 

Mill  River 241 

Millstone  Island 152 

Milne  Bank 238 

Miminegash,  anchorage 231 

Miminegash  Ponds 231 

Mimincgash  Reef 230 

Minister  Island 33 


Pa^e. 

Mink  Bay 37 

Mink  Cove 65 

Mink  Island 34,38,134 

Mink  Ledge 37 

Misaine  Bank 6 

Miscouche  Bank 228 

Miscouche  Spit 227 

Misery  Mount  Peninsula 145 

Mispeck  Point 40 

Mitchell  Point 135 

Mocodonie  Cape 143 

Molasses  Harbor 150 

Molies  River 214 

Molus  River 214 

Moncton 48 

MoukHead 189 

Monroe  Rock 134 

Montague  River 235 

Moncegau 65 

Moodie  Point 195 

Moose  Bay 173 

Moose  Bay,  anchorage 173 

Moose  Island 33 

Moose  Point 89,173 

Moreau  Point  Rock 95 

Morden  village 70 

Morrell  River 238 

Morrell,  anchorage 71 

MorrisPoint 112 

Moser  River 137 

Mosher  Head 92 

Mosher  Island  and  Ledge 92 

Mosquito  Sands 236 

Moulin  Point 175 

Mount  Misery  Peninsula 145 

Mountain  Island  and  Shoals 99 

Mourilyau  Mark 66 

Mouseback  Shoal 130 

Monsselier  Pass 171 

Mouton  Head 87 

Mouton  Island 87 

Mouton  Island,  lifeboat 87 

Mouton  Port 87 

Mouton  Port,  directions 88 

Mouton  Spit 88 

Moyac  Point 168 

Mudhole  Island  and  anchorage..  54 

Mudhole  Island  Shoal 54 

Mudhole  Islands 53 

Mulgrave,  anchorage 184 

Mulgrave  Port 184 

Mulgrave  Port,  repairs 370 

MuUegash  Point 202 

MuUiu  Point 203 

Muuroe  Rock 153 


Pace. 

37 

fi5 

34, 38, 134 

37 

6 

2^7 

145 

40 

135 

143 

150 

214 

214 

48 

189 

134 

235 

65 

195 

173 

173 

33 

,.     89,173 

95 

70 

238 

71 

112 

137 

92 

92 

236 

175 

145 

99 

66 

130 

171 

87 

87 

87 

87 

88 

88 

168 

54 

54 

53 

184 

184 

370 

202 

203 

153 


INDEX. 


289 


Murder  Island 

Murdoch  Ledge .' 

Murphy  Point 

Murray,  anchorage 

Murray  Bar 

Murray, buoys 

Murray,  directions 

Murray  Harbor 

Murray  Head.: 

Murray  River 

Murr  Ledges 

Musbaboou  Harbor 

Miishaboon  Harbor,  directions 

Mushaboon  Shoal 

Musquash  Harbor  and  Head  .. 

Mus(iuidol)oit  Inlet 

Muscjuidoboit  Inlet,  tides 

Musquidoboit  River 

Musquidoboit  Shoal 

Mutton  Head 

Mutton  Islands 

Myra  Dry  Ledge 

Myra  Island 


Piige. 

00 

173 

200 

230 

232 

232 

232 

232 

231 

232 

17,19 

132 

132 

133 

39, 40 

122 

123 

122 

122 

87 

55 

107 

107 


Nail  Pond 231 

Narrows,  the 113 

Nautilus  Rock 90 

Navy  Island 31,118 

Navy  Island,  anchorage 118 

Negro  Cape 79 

Negro  Harbor 79 

Negro  Harbor,  directions 80 

Negro  Head 40 

Negro  Island 79 

Negro  Point 42 

Negro  Point,  buoy 43 

Neils  Point 90 

NetRool£ 150,161 

NetShoal 130 

Neverfail  Shoal 117,132 

Newcombe  Brook 127 

New  Brunswick 1 

New  Brunswick,  discovery 1 

New  Brunswick,  minerals 1 

New   Brunswick,  population 1 

Newfoandland  Great  Bank 4 

New  Glasgow 194,240 

New  Harbor  Cove 150 

New  Harbor  Head 148 

New  Harbor  Point 97. 101 

New  London  Harbor 240 

New  London,  settlements 241 

New  London,  tides 241 


Page. 

Newtonquoddy  Bay 137 

Niohol  Island 127 

Nickerson  Rock 160 

Nicumcigum  Inlet 138 

Nicomtau  Bay 137 

Nicomtau  Bay,  directions 137 

Nine  Fathom  Bank 5 

Nixonoiate  Shoal 143 

Noddy  Island 53 

Noel  Bay 74 

Norris  Bald  Rock 109 

Norse  Island 101 

Norse  Point WO 

North  East  Breaker 140 

North  East  Coachman 98 

North  East  Harbor 80 

North  EastShoal 97 

North  Harbor 31 

North  Ledge 78 

North  Patch .' 213 

North  Point 231 

North  Point  Reef 231 

North  Rock 30,60 

NorthShoal 103 

North  Sister  Rock 126 

Northumberland  Strait 245 

Northumberland    Strait,    direc- 
tions    247 

Northumberland  Strait,  tides  ...  245 

North  West  Arm 115,118 

North  West  Arm,  Harbor 31 

North  West  Arm,  Ledge 66 

North  West  Arm  Rock 66 

Northwest  Cove 102 

North  West  Shoal  and  Beacon  . .  32 

Notch  Hill 38 

NovaScotia,  tlppearauceof  land.  1 

Nova  Scotia,  banks 4 

Nova  Scotia,  boundaries 1 

Nova  Scotia,  climate 22 

Nova  Scotia,  currents 4 

Nova  Scotia,  population 2 

O. 

Oak  Island 203,205 

Oak  Island  Bar 203 

Oak  Tree  Point 197 

O'Brien  Reef 129 

Ogiivie  Breakwater 70 

Oldinjj  Island 191 

Oiaing  Point 135 

OIil  ManRock 58,124 

Old  Proprietor  Shoal  and  Beacon .  17, 20 

Old  Store  Point....'. 232 


5314- 


-19 


290 


INDEX. 


Page,    i 

5fl  ' 

157 

167 

225 

28:. 

175 

112 

21 

152 

, 107 

12i3 

94 

124 

94 

94 

Owls  Head 45,58,102 


OW  Woman  Rock 

Oliver  Island 

Orpbeni  Rock 

Orwell  Bay 

Orweil  River 

Onetiqiie  Island 

Outer  Hank 

Outer  Diamond  Sboal. 

Outer  Gull  Ledge 

Outer  Gull  Rock 

Outer  Island 

Outer  Middle  Rock... 
Outer  Pollock  Rook  .. 

Ovens  Point 

Ovens  Point  Rocks  .. 


Page. 

Peart  Point 166 

Pease  Island  and  Ledge 58, 59 

Pecks,  anchorage 50 

Pecks  Point f>0 

Peggy  Cove 106 

Peggy  Point 102 

Peninsula  Point 172,201 


Owl  Head  Bay ;..». 

Owl  Head  Bay,  directions. 
Owl  Head  Bay,  supplies  .. 

Owl  Rock 

Oxner  Head 

OxnerRock 

Oyster  Point 


Paddy  Head 

Pain  Island 

Palmer  Cove 

Palmer  Point 

Panmure  Head  ... 
Panmnre  Island  .. 
Panmure  Ledce  . . 
Panmnre  Shoal  .. 

Panmnre  Spit 

Pan  Shoal 

Parkes  Island  .... 

Park  Lodge 

Parsboro,  repairs 
Parsboro  River.., 


126 
127 
127 
186 
92 
92 
173 


102 

34 

127 

203 

831 

233 

233 

234 

233 

139 

92 

163 

269 

76 


Peninsula  Shoals 

Pennant  Bay 

Pennant  Harbor 

Pennant  Island 

Pennant  Point 

Pereau  Creek 

Perpisawick  Head 

Perpisawick  Inlet 

Perpsisawick  Inlet,  tides 

Perpsisawick  Sboal 

Perry  Inland 

Peter  Island 66,67 

Peter  Island,  directions 67 

Petit  Coudiao  River 47,48 

Petit  Pas  Island 157 

PetitPassage 64,67 


172 
110 
110 

no 

110 
77 
122 
122 
123 
122 
62 


Partridge  Island 40, 42, 75 

Partridge  Buoy. 

Pas  Reef 

Passage  Rock  . . 
Passage  Shoal . . 
Passages 


40 

160 

126 

66 

15 

Passamaquoddy  Bay 16, 28 

Passamaqnoddy  Bay ,  tides 32 

Passamaquoddy  Bay,  directions.  32 

Pat  Shoal 122 

Patch  Rook 158 

Paterson  Point 82 

Peacock  Cove 209 

Pea  Island 35 

PeaPoint 35,125 


Petit  Passage,  directions,  tides.. 

Petitdegrat  Inlet 

Petitdegrat  Island.. .. 

Phelan  Point 

Philip  Bar 

Philip  Cove 

Philip  River 

Philip  Rocks 

Phojuix  Island 

Picard  Reef 

Pictou  Bars 

Pictoa  Bay 

Pictou,  charges 

Pictou,  coal 

Pictou,  consul 

Pictou,  directions 

Pictou  Harbor 

Pictou  Harbor,  tides . 

Pictou  Island 

Pictou  Island  Bank. . 

Pictou,  pilots 

Pictou,  repairs 

Pictou  Road ' 

Pictou,  supplieb 

Pictou,  telegraph .... 

PilletCape 

Pillet  Cape  Church., 

Pilot  Point 

Pilot  Rock 

Pinch  Gut  Island... 

Pinette  Harbor 

Pinette  Point 


68 

167 

167 

227 

205 

164 

206 

175 

131 

170 

170 

194 

194 

194 

194 

195 

192 
195 
196 
196 
194 
270 
196 
194 
193 
210 
210 
153 
169 
58 
220 
219 


Page. 

166 

0 58,59 

r.0 

50 

106 

102 

17-2,201 

172 

110 

, 110 

110 

110 

,........••  77 

, 122 

122 

les 123 

122 

62 

06,67 

IS 67 

47,48 

...   157 

64,67 

0U8,  tides..  68 

167 

167 

227 

205 

164 

806 

175 

131 

170 

170 

, 194 

194 

194 

, 194 

195 

192 

195 

196 

196 

194 

270 

195 

194 

193 

210 

210 

153 

169 

58 

220 

219 


•nr" 


INDEX. 


Pinette  Shoals 

Tink  Kock 

Pirate  Harbor 

Pirate  Island 

PiB;ati(]ui  Island. 
Pleasant  Island  .. 


Page. 

220 

160 

184 

184 

158 

33 

Pleasant  Point 115,117 

Pleasant  Shoal 117 

Plumper-Rock '^^ 

Plymouth  Settlement 58 

Pollock  Patches 124 

PolluxRock 146 

Pomquot  Banks - 189 

Pomqnet  Harbor 188 

Pomquet  Harbor,  anchorage 188 

Pouquet  Island 188 

Pomquet  Point 188 

Pomqnet  River 189 

Pomquet  Road 196 

Pom(i  uet  Settlement 189 

Pope  Harbor 13C 

Pope  Harbor,  directions 131 

Pope  Harbor,  supplies  . — 131 

Pope  Harbor,  tides 131 

Pope  Head 135 

Pope  Island 3( 

Pope  Logan  Islet 3' 

Pope  Rock 131 

Pope  Shoal 3( 

Pope  Shoals 13i 

Poplar  Island 21! 

Porcupine  Cape 18' 

Porcupine  Hill 13( 

Porcupine  Point 13' 

Port  Hill 24 

Port  Island 15 

Porter  Lake 12 

Portuguese  Cove H 

Portuguese  Shoal H 

Pot  Rock 

Potato  Island  and  Point 10 

Poulameut  Bay 17 

Poulameut  Bay,  directions 17 

Poulament  Bay,  tides 17 

Poulameut  Creek 17 

Poulament  Islet 17 

Poule  Islet It 

PouIeReef « 

Powell  Point IS 

Pownall  Bay 25 

Pownall  Point 2i 

Prangle  Point ' 

Premier  Shoal H 

Prim  Island 21 


Prim  Reef 

Priucd  Edward  Island 

Prince  Edward  Island,  climate.. 
Prince  Edward  Island,  features . 

Prince  Edward  Islaud,  fogs 

Prince  Edward  Island,  govern- 
ment  

Prince    Edward    Island,   Nor^.h 

Coast 

Prince    Edward    Island,  North 

Coast,  tides 

Prince  Edward  Island,  popula- 
tion  

Prince  Edward  Island,  railroad. 
Prince     Edward    Island,   South 

Coast 

Prince    Edward    Island,    West 

Coast 

Princes  Inlet 

Prospect  Harbor 

Prospect  Harbor,  directions 

Prospect  Harbor,  tides 

Prospect  Island 

Prospect  River  and  Town 

Provost  Cove 

Pubuico  Harbor 

Pubnico  Harbor,  directions 

Pubnico  Harbor,  water 

Puffer  Shoal 

Pugwash,  anchorage 

Pugwash  Bar 

Pugwash,  directions 

Pugwash  Harbor 

Pugwash  Point 

Pugwash  Reef 

Pugwash  River 

Pugwash  River,  tides 

Pugwash  River,  water 

Pugwash  Road 

Pumpkin  Island 21,57, 

Pumpkin  Ledge 

Pnrcell  Cove 

Purdy  Rock 

Purgatory  Point 

Fychelsland 

Pyche  Rock 

Pyche  Shoals 

Pye  Islaud 

Pye  Point , 


291 

Pane. 
221 
218  • 
218 
218 
218 

218 

244 

244 

219 
819 

219 

231 
96 
1.08 
109  • 
109 
54 
108 
227 
55 
55 
56 
110 
206 
206 
206 
206 
205 
205,207 
206 
206 
206 
205 
134, 137 
57 
118 
53 
80 
132 
126 
133 
141 
141 


Qnaco  Bay  and  Head . . . 
Quaco  Head, anchorage 
Qnaco  Head, buoys 


44 

44,46 

44 


292 


INDEX. 


Page. 
Quaco  Led^e  and  Shoal 44, 45 

98 
1»9 
136 

i:w 


Quaker  Island  aud  Shoal 

Quarry  Ptiint 

Quoddy  Head  

QuoddyHill 

Quoddy  Roads  . 


R. 


Rabbit  Island. 
Racer  Rock  ... 

Rae  Island 

Ragged  Ledge 


17B 

29 

141 

147 


Ragged  Point 149,173 

Ragged  Rocks 149 

Ram  Island 24,85,57,83,85 

Rant  Rock 132 

Rans  Shoal  21 

Raspberry  Cove 154 

Red  Bank 103 

Red  Head 37, 44, 45, 75, 149, 167, 2:50 


Red  Island 

Red  Point 

Redman  Head 

Redman  Shoal 

Reed  Rock 

Reef  Island  

Reef  Island  Ledge  and  Shoal  . . . 


166 
166 
141 
132 
118 
61 
61 


Refuse  Island 96,98 

Renonard  Point 

Rice  Point 

Richardson  Head 

Richibucto,  anchorage. 

Richibucto,  bars 

Richibucto,  buoys 

Richibucto,  (ionsal 

Richibucto,  directions  . 

Richibucto  Head 

Richibucto  Lagoons 

Richibucto,  pilots , 

Richibucto  Point 

Richibucto,  population 

Richibucto  River 

Richibucto,  tides 

Richmond  Bay , 

RiHumau  Reef 

Rifleman  Reef,  caution . 

Ri  fleman  Shoal , 

Ringdove  Shoal , 

Ritcy  Cove 


212 
221 

86 
215 
215 
216 
214 
216 
214 
215 
216 
214 
214 
214 
216 
241 
220 
220 
220 
104 

93 


Roaring  Bull  Rock 35, 62, 158, 192 

Robinson  Ball  Station 

Robin  Wharf 

Rock  Head  Shoal 

Rocky  Island 

Rocky  Ledge 


56 
170 
110 
136 
152 


Page. 

RogerHill 193 

Roger  Island 124* 

Roger  Point 181,196 

Rogers  Head 44 

Rollo  Bay 237 

Rook  Island 164 

Rook  Rock 164 

Roques  Island 24 

Roques  Island  Harbor 24 

Rose  Bay 94 

Rose  Point 94 

Rose  Shoal 146 

Roseway  Bank 7 

Roseway  Cape 81 

Ronen  Island 'M 

Round  Cape 166,176 

Round  Island 26.53,111,144,183 

Round  Island  Nubble 91» 

Round  Islet 129 

Round  Rock b7,  108 

Ron  nd  Shoal 122 

Rous  Point 99 

Royalty  Point 241 

Royalty  Sand 241 

Roy  Island 192 

Roy  Ledge 192 

Rude  Point 143 

Rude  Shoal 143 

Rugged  Island  Harbor 83 

Rugged  Island  Harbor,  directions  85 

Rugged  Rock 90 

Rnstico,  Grund 240 

Rustico,  Grund,  tides 240 

Rnstico,  Grand,  settlements 240 

Rustico,  Little 240 

S. 

Sable  Cape 51 

Sable  Cape,  tides 52 

Sable  Cove 225 

Sable  Island 8 

Sable  Island,  anchorage 10 

Sable  Island,  bars 10 

Sable  Island,  currents U 

Sable  Island,  directions 11 

Sable  Island,  establishment 9 

Sable  Island,   life-saving  appa- 
ratus   9 

Sable  Island,  productions 9 

Sable  Island,  tides 11 

Sable  River  p6 

Sackville,  anchorage 50 

Sackville  River 118 

Saddle  Island 99,110,202 

Saddle  Reef 202 


INDEX. 


293 


I'age. 

193 

U4' 

181,196 

44 

237 

164 

164 

a4 

24 

94 

94 

146 

7 

81 

:m) 

166,176 

6. 53,  111,  144, 183 

9S» 

129 

b7,108 

122 

99 

241 

241 

192 

192 

143 

143 

83 

irectious  85 

90 

240 

240 

nts 240 

240 

51 

52 

225 

.     8 

10 

10 

11 

11 

ent 9 

;;  appa- 

9 

la 9 

11 

^6 

50 

118 

99,110,202 

202 


Page.   1 

Saddle  Kook 140; 

Sail  Rooks 28  i 

St.  Ann  Point  aud  Shoals 55,56  ' 

St.  Andrew  Point 334 

St.  Andrew  Port 31 

St.  Andrew,  anchorage 33 

St.  Andrew  Port,  east  beacon  ...  31 

St.  Andrew,  pilots 16 

St.  Andrew  Shoal ■....  234  j 

St.  Catherine  River  150  j 

St.  Croix  Bay  70 

St.Croix  River 28,33 

St.  George  Bay 187 

St.  Cteorge  Cape 190.187 

St.  George  CapeChnroh 190 

St.  George  Cape,  tides 187 

St.  Jacques 229 

St.  JacqnesBar 229 

St.  Jacques  Church 229 

St.  John  Bay 40 

St.  John  Harbor 40 

St.  John  Harbor,  anchorage 41 

St.  John  Harbor,  directions 42 

St.  John  Harbor,  charges  42 

St.  John  Harbor,  coal 41,269 

St.  John  Harbor,  consul 42 

St.  John  Harbor,  fog 41 

St.  John  Harbor,  ice 41 

St. John  Harbor,  railway  .......  41 

St.  John  Harbor,  repairs 269 

St.  John  Harbor,  telegraph 41 

St.  John  Harbor,  pilots 16, 43, 66 

St.  John  Harbor,  tides 40,41,42 

St.  John  Harbor,  time  ball 41 

St.  John  Island 55 

St.  John  Ledge •  55 

St.  Margaret  Bay 102 

St.  Margaret  Bay,  directions 104, 106 

St.  Margaret  Bay,  tides 106 

St.  Martin  Head 45 

St.  Mary  Bay 64,233 

St.  Mary  Bay,  directions,  tides..  64,65 

St.  Mary  Cape   46,64,142 

St.  Mary  Ledge 19,46 

St.  Mary  River 142 

St.  Mary  River,  directions  142 

St.  Mary  River,  pilots 142 

St.  Mary  Shoal 64 

St.  Vicholas  River 214 

St.  Peter  Bay 166.174 

St.  Peter  Bay,  anchorage 174 

St.  Peter  Canal 175 

St.  Peter  Island 166 

St.  Peters  Bay 238 

St.  Peters  Harbor  238 


Page. 

St.  Peters  Island 221 

St.  Peters  River 238 

St,  Peters  Shoals 221 

St.  Peters  tides 239 

St.  Pierre  Bank 5 

St.  Stephen 269 

St.  Stephen,  coal 269 

Saladin  Point 14'J 

Salamander  Rock 137 

Salisbury 48 

Salisbury  Bay 45 

Salisbury  Island 135 

Salisbury  Shoal 45 

Salmon  Islet 123 

Salmon  Point 127 

Salmon  River 45,123, 136, 165 

Salt  Island 26 

Salt  Water  Lake 12 

Salutation  Cove 228 

Salvages  Rocks 79 

Sam  Rock 83 

Sambro  Banks "^ 

Sambro  B^nks  Buoy lH 

Sambro  Cape HI 

Sambro  Harbor HI 

Sambro  Hatbor,  directions IH 

Sambro  Island... HI 

Sambro  Island,  pilots. HI 

Sambro  Island,  fog  signals 119,261 

Sambro  Ledges HI 

Samson  Rocks 166, 174 

SanbornsCove 26 

Sand  Cove  Shoal 103 

Sand  Point' 6".82 

Sand  Shoal 140 

Sandwich  Point 116,118 

Sandy  Cove ^6 

•Sandy  Cove  Beach 130 

Sandy  Cove  Point 41,130 

Sandy  Cove  Shoal 130 

Sandy  l8l«t  136 

Sandy  Island 30 

Sandy  Point 41 

SandySpit 195 

Sapin  Ledge 217 

SanlPoint 109 

Savage  Harbor 239 

Savage  Island 244 

Savage  Point VJl 

Scabby  Islands 24 

SchoonerCove 29 

Schooner  Passage,  directions....  59 

Schooner  Passage,  anchorage  ...  60 

Schooner  Passage  Rock 59,  131 

Schooner  Rock 131 


^ 


294 


Scotsmanii  Bay 

Soott  Rocks 

8c ul pin  Rock 

Sculpin  Shoal 

Seacoal  Bay 

Sea  Cow  Head 

Seal  Cove 

Seal  Island 

Seal  Ledge 101, 

Seal  River 

Seal  Rocks 

Seeley  Cove  and  Point 

Seller  Head    >..... 

Seven  Islands 

Seven  Sisters 

Shag  Bay  and  Breakers 

Shag  Bay,  directions.. w.i 

Shag  Harbor 

Shag  Harbor,  anchorage 

Shag  Head 

Shag  Island 

Shag  Ledge 'i4, 13U, 

Shag  Reef 

Shag  Rock 80, 8S 

Shag  Rocks 

Shallop  Rock 

Shannon  Bald  Rook 

Shannon  Island 

Sharp  Cape 

Shediao  

ShediacBay 

Shediac,  charges 

Shediac, coal 

Shediac  Harbor ...'.... 

Shediac  Harbor,  directions...... 

Shediac  Island 

Shediao  Island,  beacons 

Sheiliac,  supplies 

Shediac,  telegraph 

Shediac,  tides 

Shediao,  water 

Sheep  Island 

Sheep  Ledge ., 

Sheet  Harbor 

Sheet  Harbor  Buoy 

Sheet  Harbor,  eastern  passage.. 
Sheet  Harbor,  middle  passage  .. 

Sheet  Harbor,  NG.  arm 

Sheet  Hrbor,  NW.  arm 

Sheet  Harbor,  supplies 

Sheet  Harbor,  tides , 

Sheet  Harbor,  westeru  passage. 

Sheet  Rock 

Shelbnrne  Harbor 

Sheldon  Point 


I.NPE.X. 


Page. 
71 
163,  211 
15-2 
94 
182 
227 
17,150 
52,  179 
10-J,  139 
225 
196 
37 
121 
110 
243 
107 
108 
54 
55 
107 
127 
141,  152 
142 
,  92,  151 
42 
237 
109 
109 
76 
211 
210 
212 
212 
210 
211 
210 
211 
212 
212 
212 
212 
57 
99 
133 
133 
135 
135 
133 
133 
133 
134 
134 
133 
81 
42 


Psjte. 

Shelter  Cove 131 

Shemogue  River,  great 209 

Shemogne  River,  little 209 

Shepody  River 46,  48 

Sherbrook  Tower 115 

Sherbrooke  Village 142 

Shingle  Point 80,  86 

Shingles 95 

ShipCbannel 153 

Ship  Harbor 127 

Ship  Harbor,  directions 128 

Ship  Harbor,  supplies 128 

Ship  Harbor,  tides 129 

Ship  Point 172,181 

Ship  Rock 128,181 

Ship  Stern 62 

Shoal  Bay  and  Anchorage 129 

S)ioal  Bay,  directions 129 

ShoalCove 99 

ShoalGround 112 

Shoal  Place 146 

Shoal  Point , 71 

Shorey  Cove 24 

Shot  Pouch  Patch 79 

Shot  Island 24 

Shubenacadie  River  : 74 

Shut-in  Island 105,121 

Shut-iuReef 121 

Silver  Shoal 128 

Siwibon  River ;. 65 

SistwRock 126 

Sistera  Ledges 112,126 

Sisters  Rocks 44,82 

SitemanRock 126 

Six-foot  Rock 153 

Slab  Shoal  and  Point 135 

Slann  whites  Ledge 103 

Smelt  Brook 10:J,  133 

Smith  Cove 138 

Smith  Point 139,204,233 

Smith  Rook 139 

Smithson  Rock Ill 

Smoke  Point 140 

Snake  Island 99 

SnakeSpit 99 

SnapperShoal 137 

Snares  Point 103 

Snorting  Rocks 154 

Soi  Point 107 

Soldier  Ledge 54 

Sound,  The 148 

Souris 237 

Souris,  consul 23T 

Souris,  Head 2:<7 

South  Joggins 47 


INDEX. 


295 


Page. 

131 

209 

209 

4«,  48 

115 

142 

80,86 

95 

I6:i 

187 

128 

128 

189 

172,181 

188,181 

62 

Se 129 

129 

99 

118 

146 

71 

24 

79 

24 

74 

105,181 

181 

128 

65 

126 

112,126 

44,88 

126 

153 

135 

103 

103,133 

138 

139,204,233 

139 

111 

140 

99 

99 

, 137 

103 

154 

107 

54 

148 

237 

837 

237 

47 


Page. 

South  Juggins,  repairs ^69 

South  Ledge 78,84,07 

South  Rock 60.M 

South  Shoal 5,9H,159 

Southeast  Rock 61 

Southeast  Shoal 97,109 

South  River 233 

Southwest  Breaker ^W,  112 

Southwest  Breaker  Buoy 90 

Southwest  Bull  Rook 152 

South  west  Coachman ^ 

Southwest  Island 102 

Southwest  Ledge 52,84 

Southwest  Ledges l'^4 

Southwest  Shoal 57,109 


Stoddart  Cove  and  Island. 

Stoddart  Ledge 

Stone  Head 

Stone  Horse  Rock 

Stone  Horse  Shoal 

Stone  Island 

Stony  Island 

Stony  Patch 

Stony  Ridge 

Story  Head 

Straptnb  Rook 

Strawberry  Island 

Strawberry  Island  Shoal . 

Sturgeon  Bay  

Sugar  Islands 


23 

23 

14U 

207 
207 


Southwest  Wolf  Island 

Southwest  Wolf  Island  Buoy 

Spanish  Ship  Bay 

Spear  Cape 

Spear  Shoal 

Spectacle  Island 58,87 

Spectacle  Islands 31 

Spectacle  Ledge 59 

Spectacle  Rock ^"^ 

Spectacle  Shoal  99 

Spencer  Cape 43,47,72 

Spencer  Cape,  tides 47 

Spencer  Island  and  Anchorage  . .  72 

Spicer  Cove 47 

Spithead '■»! 

SplitCape 71. '5 

Split  Cape,  tide  rip "^'i 

Split  Rock *^'^tl 

Spragues  Neck < 

Spritsail  Rock 

Spruce  Island 

Spry  Bay 

Spry  Bay,  directions 

Spry  Harbor j-. 

Spry  Point 

Squally  Point 

Squaw  Bay ---- 

Squaw  Bay,  anchorage 

Squaw  Bay,  shoal 

Stanhope  Cape 

Stanley  River 

Stanley  Shoals 

Stapleton  Shoal 

Star  Island  and  Ledges 

Starling  Rock 

Stay  Point ■ 

Steep  Head 

Stewart  Cove 

Stewart  Point 

Stiles  Landing 


PQHe. 

54 

126 

25 

90 

78 

25 

52 

166 

90 

182 

81 

103 

103 

833 

150 


Sugarloaf  Hill ^^'^^\ 

Sugarloaf  Island  and  Ledges 

Suminerside 

Snmmerside,  coal 

Sumnierside,  consul 

Sumnierside,  repairs 

Sunbnry  Cove 

Surf  Point 

Surveyor  Inlet 

Sutherland  Island 

Swanton  Point 


86 
126 
30 
131 
132 
131 
152 
47 
225 
225 
221 
239 
241 
159 
181 
97 
Kil 
38 
183 
145 
2-20 
46 


126 
288 
887 
888 
271 
229 
88 
838 
136 
237 


T. 

Tancook  Channel,  directions  — 

Tangier  Harbor 

Tangier  Harbor,  anchorage 

Tangier  Harbor,  directions 

Tangier  Harbor,  supplies 

Tangier  Island  and  River 

Tatamagonche  Bay 

Tataiuagoucbe,  anchorage 

Tataniagouche  Basin • 

Tatamagouche  River 

Tataniagouche  Village 

Taylor  Goose  Rock 

Taylor  Head — 

Taylor  Shoal 

Tenant  Point 

Terras  Point 


101 

130 

130 

130 

130 

130 

202 

202 

202 

202 

202 

133 

131 

145 

110 

2:u 

Thomas  Head 172,178 

178 

178 

123 

122 

20 

22 

174 

152 

57 


Thomas  Shoals 

Thorn  Island 

Thorn  Shoal 

Three  Fathoms  Harbor  . . . 

Three  Islands 

Three  Islands,  anchorage . 

Three  Rock  Shoals 

Three  Top  Islands 

Thrum  Island 


iMHi 


^96 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Thrum  Point 86 

Thruinoap  Islet 116,139,234 

Thrnnicap  Island 110 

ThrnuicBp  Shoal 116,234 

Tickle  Channel 179 

Tickle  Island  Shonl 1K4 

Tignish  Head 208 

Tignish  River 207,244 

Tinker  Shoal 21 

Tobacco  Island  and  Ledge 141 

Toby  Cove 165 

Toby  Island 90 

Toby  Point 166 

Tonicod  Rook  and  Shoals 146 

Tomfool  Shoals 126 

Tomlees  Head 132 

Tongue  Shoal  and  Beacon 32 

Topstoue  Le<lge 151 

Torbay 150 

Torbay,  dangers  off 150 

Torbay,  directions 151 

Torbay  Ledges 151 

Tormeutiue  Cape. 209 

Tornientine  Reefs 208 

Tornientine  Reefs,  caution 208 

Torpey  Ledge HI 

Town  Point 193 

Traoadie  Church 188 

Tracadie  Hnr>>or 188 

Tracadle  Harbors 239 

Traoadie,  Little 188 

Tracadie  R'ver 188 

Tracadie,  tides 2:J9 

Transport  Ledges 126 

Trappean  Shoal 96 

TraverseCape 227 

Treen  Bluflf 199,204 

Treen  Reef 204 

Triangle  Rocks 80 

Trinidad  Rook.... 84 

Trinity  Ledge 64 

Troop  Island 105 

Trout  Point 221 

TrontRock 222 

Truro  Town 73 

Tryon  Cape 241 

Tryon  Head 226 

Tryon  River 227 

Tryon  Shoals 226 

Tucker  Island 57 

Tucker  Point 128 

Tuff  Island 129 

Tnffln  Bank 1..  150 

Tuffln  Island 138 

Tuft  Point  .... 45 


Pa«»- 
Turbalton  Head 178,182 

Turner  Bay  and  Rock 110 

Turner  Cape 240 

Turner  Point 139 

Turner  Shoal 139 

Turpentine  Islands 59 

Turtle  Reef l!ia 

Turtle  Rock , i...  154 

Tusket  Island 58 

Tngket  Island,  passages 59 

Tusket  River 57 

Twin  Islands !  56 

Tyneniouth  Creek 44 

▼. 

Vache  Shoal l.'>4 

Vernon  River 205 

Verte  Bay 207 

Verte  Bay, directions •  208  209 

Virgin  rocks 4 

W. 

Wallace 203 

Wallace,  anchorage 205 

Wallace  Channel 203 

Wallace,  consul 203 

Wallace,  directions 204 

Wallace  Harbor 203 

Wallace   Ledge 20 

Wallace,tide8 205 

Wallace,  water 203 

Walsh  Point 156 

Walter  Island 143 

Walter  Shoal 143 

Walton  Bar 74 

Walton  Town 74 

Warren  Cove 222 

WashballRook 160,202 

Wash  Island 25 

Wasting  Islet 172 

Watering  Cove .". .  133 

Watt  Point 135 

Wangh  Shoal 199 

Webb  Cove  and  Reef 149 

Webb  Rock 143 

Webber  Cove  and  Shoal 150 

Wedge  Island 105,139,141 

Welchpool  Village 29 

WellesleyRock 118 

WestBay 75 

West  Bay,  anchorage 75 

West  Black  Ledge 139 

West  Gully 241 

West  Head 103,188 


INDEX. 


297 


...  17S,  ia2 

110 

840 

i:w 

139 

59 

152 

154 

58 

59 

57 

..'.  56 

44 

154 

205 

207 

...•208  209 

4 

203 
205 

aon 
ao:i 

204 
203 

20 
805 
803 
156 
143 
143 

74 

74 

222 

...  160,202 

25 
172 
133 
135 
199 
149 
143 
150 
105, 139, 141 

29 
118 

75 

75 

139 

241 

...  103,18$ 


Pans,    i 

West  Ironbound  Island 91, 93 

West  Ledge 20 

WMt  Point 19«,230 

West  Point,  ancborage 230 

West  Point,  tides 230 

West  Quoddy  Head 28 

West  Reef 8."W 

West  Rock. i:'9 

West  Sandy  Cove 68 

WestShoal 56,97 

WestShoalB 97 

West  Spdctaole  Island 92 

West  Spit 230 

Western  Head 83,88 


Western  Island 

Western  Islands 

Western  Sbagroust  .. 
Westbaver  Island  ... 

Westport 

Westport,  anchorage. 
Westport,  supplies . . . 
Wbale  Cove 


133 

128 

134 

96 

66 

,..  ^67 

66 

18 

Whale  Island 129,154 

Whale  Rock 84 

Wbale  Rooks 154 

Whaleback  Shoal 130 

Wharf  Point 148 

Wheatley  River 240 

Whipple  Point 66 

Whitehaven 161 

Whitehaven,  direotiona 153 

Whitehaven  Head 111,116 

Whitehaven  Head  Island..  .17, 81, 56, 158 

Whitehaven  HeadLedge 56 

Whitehaven  Horse  Island 30,35 

Whitehaven  Horse  Rock 109 

"Whitehaven  Island ..30,107,155 

Whitahaven  Islands 138 

Whitehaven  Point 88,155 

Whitehaven  Point  Ledges 155 

Whitehaven  Point  Rock  75,87,135,147, 155 

8*» 
219 
161 
197 
136 
854 


Whitehaven  Point  Shoal. 

White  Sands  

Whitman  Rook 

Widow  Point 

William  Shoal 

Williams  Port 


Page. 

Wilmot  Rock 70 

Wilson  Point 57 

Windsor 74 

Windsor,  coal 269 

Windsor,  consul 74 

Windsor,  repairs 269 

Wine  Cove 142.154 

Wine  Head 139,143 

Winter  Cove 239 

Winter  Creek 240 

Wisdom  Point 127 

WolfCreek 45 

Wolfe  Cape 230 

Wolf  Point 128 

Wolf  Rock 23 

Wolves  Islands 23 

Wood  Harbor 55 

Wood  Island 103 

Wood  Islands 219 

Wood  Islands,  anchorage 819 

Woody  Island 100 

Woody  Point 50 

Y. 

Yankee  Cove   153 

Yankee  Jack 133 

Yankee  Islet 153 

Yankee  Island  Reef 153 

Yarmouth  Harbor 63 

YanuonthHarbor,  anchorage....  63 

Yarmouth  Harbor,  charges 63 

Yarmouth  Harbor,  consul 63 

Yarmouth  Harbor,  directions ....  63 

Yarmouth  Harbor,  pilots 16 

Yarmouth  Harbor,  repairs 869 

Yarmouth  Sound 62 

Yellow  Island 25 

YellowLedge 19 

Yellow  Rook 132 

York  Redoubt 116 

York  River 223 

Zephyr  Rock 210 

Zephyr  Rock,  mark 810 

Zetland  shoal 63 

Zink  Point 100 


A 


BOOKS  FOR  PUHPOSKS  OF  N\Vl(i\TION  PUBLISHED  BY  HVDRil.lHAPHlC 

OFFICE. 


No. 


45 

99 

100 

b6 


64 


Title. 


Price. 


NORTH   ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 


tivo.     1870. 


General  Examination  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean 

Supplement  No.  1.     1H86 •  - '  j,;'i " '  *  * ' 

General  Directions  for  the  Atlantic  Ocean.    Second  edition. 

Scotia  and  Bay  of  Fundy-Gnlf  and  River  St.  Lawrence, 


>  Nov  I 


1887. 
1891. 


73 

78 

70 


34 

35 

60 
23 
52 

25 
37 

38 
42 


The  Naviiration  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.    Voi.  I. 
The  wSt  India  Wands,  including  the  Bahama  Banks  and  Islands, 

and  the  Bermnda  Islands.     1887.    Edition  exhausted 

Supplements.    1889,1890 ■;;•,;•  VVti;uVv»r' 

The  Navigation  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  the  Gulf  ol  Mexico.    Vol. 
II     CoSsta  from  the  Rio  Grande  del  Norte  to  Cape   Orange,  with 

aijjacent  islands  and  dangers.     IS'JO 

Supplement.    185U ' 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador,    1884 

Newfound  laud  and  Labrador.    Supplement.     ia8« 


Supplement  No.  2.     1891 


Sailing  Directions  for'the  Kattegat,  Sound,  and  the  Great  and  Little 
Belts  to  the  Baltic  Sea.     1881 

8allin'gTtctll''foVVhe'&Vh-ChannVi:--p^^^ 

of  England.     1872 •-•-- 

Supplement.    Second  edition.     '889  .......  .-.-•.  ••-•-•  ••••,•■; 

Sailing  directions  for  the  English  Channel.     Part  II.     1877.    Hydro- 
graphic  Office ••• 

Supplement.    Second  edition.     1889. 

Coasts  and  Ports  of  the  Bay  of  Biscay.     1876 

SuDuleinvut.    Second  edition.     1890 •••  •■■,:-":"W,'l"' 

Winds,  Currents,  and  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Cadiz   tlie  Wes  ern 
Coast  of  the  Spanish  Pentnsnla,  and  the  Strait  «f  G'^;*'/*'-  „\^'9- 
Northwest  and  West,  Coasts  of  Spain,  and  the  Coast  of  Portugal 

from  Point  Estaca  to  Cape  Trafalgar.     1874  -. :*  "A*:. 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890.     Hydrographic  Otfico  . . . . 

General  Examination  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.     1870 

Supplement  No.  1.     1887 IV.""- %f'iyu.;v.i.^' 

Mwliterranean.  Part  I.  S.  and  8E.  Coasts  of  Spam  from  Mala  Bah  a 
to  Cape  Creux.    Balearic  Islands,  and  N.  Coast  of  Africa  from  Ceuta 

to  La  Gala •": 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890..... .-.•  VA"  ""f 

Mediterlanean.    Part  II.    South  Coast  of  Frapce  ;  West  Coast  of 

Italy  ;  Tuscan  Archipelago ;  Corsica  and  Sardinia.     107B 

Supplement.    Second  edition.     1^  .•■-•a'-jr"   V  aVniiV."V„"H 

Mediterranean.    Part  III.    Coast  of  Tunis ;   Sardinia;   Sicily  and 

Malta  Channels;  Lipari  Islands ;  Sicily;  Strait  of  Messina ;  Coast 

ofTripoll;  Coast  of  Egypt ;  Syria.    1879 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890 .. V*":"*  ii"".!  "Vi 

Mediterranean.  Part  IV.  Gulf  of  Gioja  to  Cape  Santa  Maria  d. 
Leuca,  South  Coast  of  Italy,  the  Adriatic  Sea,  Ionian  Islands,  tae 
Coasts  of  Albania  and  Greece  to  Cape  Malea,  with  Cengo  Island, 

including  the  Gulfs  of  Pa tras  and  Corinth.     1883 

Snpplement.    Second  edition.     1890 


•2.0O 
.10 

2.0O 


LOO 
.10 


1.50 
.10 

LOO 
.60 
.10 

.75 
.10 

L50 
.10 

2.50 
.10 

2.50 
.10 

1.00 

1.50 
.10 

2.00 
.10 


2.50 
.10 

2.50 
.10 


2.35 
.10 


2.35 
.10 


299 


i 


800  BOOKS    FOR    FI'RPOSES    QV    NAVIGATION. 

Bookt/or  i>ur,m»e»  of  iiavigatiov  i>ubH»h,d  hy  H,,,trogmi>hio  O/nce-Coutinued. 


60- 


f,l> 


II 


53 


46 


47 


IS 


48 


h8 


61 

54 
65 


58 
89 


S4 

96 
30 

41 

41ft 
41a 


From  Cape  Spartel  to  Sierra 


NOHTH    ATLANTIC   OCKAN— COIltiUlied. 


The  Azor.«H,  Mftdoiras,  CanarieH,  ami  Cape  Verde  Islands.    8vo.     1873 

and  lrt74.     Hydro^raphio  Office 

3  Siipplementa ' 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.     Parti.  

Leone.     1873 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886.... !....!."."".'" 

Tlie  West  CoHst  of  Africa.     Part  I.     FroniCape  Sp'arteVto  'cape  Lo- ' 
pez,  inoludinK  the  Azores,  Madeiras,  Canaries,  and  Cape  Verde 

Islands.    Second  edition.     (In  preparation ) 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.     Part  II.    From  Sierra  Leone  to  Cape  Lo-' 

pez.     I87i> ' 

Snpplement  No.  1.     1886..!'!!!."''".".""i.'.'" 

Memoir  of  the  Dangers  and  Ice  in  the  North  Atlautii 


18(58  "»"«««•"  and  Ice  in  the  North  Atlantic.    (Paraplilet.) 


SOUTH  ATLANTIC  OCKAN. 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.  Part  III.  From  Cape  Lopez  to  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope,  including  tlie  Islands  in  the  Bight  of  Biafra.  and 
Ascension  and  St.  Helena  Islands.     1877      . . 

Snpplement  No.  1.    1886 '.'..'.".*".."*."."1! 

The  East  CoaHt  of  Sonth  America.  From  Cape  Orangeto  cipe  Vi'r-' 
gins,   mclnding   Falkland,  South  Georgia,  Sandwich,   and   South 

Shetland  Islands.     1889 " 

Supplement.     1891 

The  Rio  de  la  Plata.     1875 '.'.'.'.'.'. 

Snpplement  No.  1.     1886 

Navigation  of  the  Strait  of  Magellan.     1883!..".""."!.' 

Remarks  by  Captain  M.  A.  Lef&vre,  of  the  French  NavV,  on"the'voy-' 
age  of  the  Vaadreuil  through  the  Patagoniaii  Channels  and  Magel- 
Ian  Strait.    (Pamphlet.).     1874 


1867. 


PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

General  Examination  of  the  Paciflc  Ocean. 

Supplement  No.  1.    1886 

The  Navigation  of  the  Paciflc  Ocean.     1874." '  "("Edi"ti'on"  'e'xhaisted)".". 
Ihe  West  Coast  of  South  America,  including  Magellan  Strait.  Tierra 
del  1-uego,  aud  the  Outlying  Islands.     1890...... 

Supplement.     1890 \  ,    

The  West  Coast  of  Mexico  and  Central  America,  from  "the  Boundarv 
Line  between  the  United  States  and  Mexico  to  Panama,  includ- 
ing the  Guli  of  California.     1887 

Supplement.     1890 !.!!!!"! 

The  Coast  of  British  Columbia.  Fro"iJi  ju'a'n'de"  "Fiioa  Strait  "toPor't- 
limd  Canal,  including  Vanoonver  and  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 


Directorj;  for  Coast  of  Alaska  and  Be"ring  Sea."  8v'o'.'"i"869!" 'Bureau 

'     "*^^g**">"-     (Edition  exhausted) 

'         '"     '     '  ~"     Hydrographic  Office. '  (EdVtion'ex- 


1886. 


Supplement  No.  1, 

hdusted) 

The  East  Coast  of  Asia,  Vol.  1,  includi'n'gTartary.'korea.'ja'p'ani'and' 

adjacent  islands.     Hydrographio  Office.    (In  preparation)..  - 

Keported  Dangers  to  Navigation  in  the  Paciflc.    Part  I.     North  of 

the  Equator.     1«71 

Supplement.     1891.    Hydrographio*  Office! !!!!!!."." ! 

Supplement  to  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean!    is'so '! 

Supplement.     1887 

Reported  Dangers  to  Navigation  in  the  Pacific  "Ocean.    Part  II." 

Sonth  of  the  Equator.     1879 

Supplement  No. -.J.     1887 !!!!!! 

Supplement.     1891.     Hydrographio  Offloe!!!.'!!"!."! 


93.00 
.30 

8.00 
.10 


3.00 
.10 

.20 


L50 
.10 


LOO 
.10 

1.50 
.10 
.30 


.20 


L50 
.10 


1.20 
.10 


.50 
.10 


L50 


LOO 


LOO 
.10 

LOO 
.10 


\JJL. 


e— Coutinued. 


Price. 

vo.     1873 

12.00 

.20 

to  Sierra 

3.00 

.10 

Cape  Lo- 
pe Verde 

Capo  Lo- 

2.00 

.10 

»inplilet. ) 

.20 

the  Cape 
afra,  and 

l.RO 

.10 

:3»pe  Vir- 
id   South 

1.00 

.10 

1.50 

.10 

.20 

the  voy- 
d  Magel- 

.20 

1.50 

.10 

lusted)  .. 
t,  Tierra 

1.20 

.10 

oundary 

.60 

.10 

to  Port- 
Islands. 

1.50 

tion  ex- 

Sorih  of 

1.00 

.     1880.. 
Part  II.  . 

1.00 
.10 

1.00 

.10 

BOOKS    FOR   PURPOSES   OF   NAVIGATION.  8Q1 

Hook$  for  imrponen  of  narigaUon,  publinhtd  by  Ihidvoijiaphic  OJffc^— t'outinned. 


No. 


Title 


85 

24 

3l> 

30 

74 

75 
33 

32 
31 


72 

9 
13 
17 
71 
66 

57 
49 

90 
91 

8 
8« 


19 

4 

77 


14 

87 


Price. 


INDIAN   OCEAN. 

HailiiiK  Directions  of  tlie Indian  Oeeiin,  tlie  winds.  iiion«oonn,  ciirren'H , 
ami  pii»san«8,  iui-liuling  also  tlio  Java  Sea,  Sulu  Sea,  Afuera  "ji-a, 

anil  tlie  Pliilippin*)  Islands.     IH87 

Suppl«inentH.    lf«9nnd  1890 

(Jeueial  Examination    if  tho  Indian  Ocean,  witii  Directions  for  the 

Na vijjation  of  Torre  i  Straits,  etc.     1870 

Siipjilenieut  No  1.     1886 

Physical  (Jeographj  rf  the  Red  Sea,  with  Sailing  Directions.     1872.. 

LIOHT-LISTS. 

List  of  Lights  (No.  1)  of  North  and  South  America  (excepting  the 
United  States),  iucludinf^  the  West  Indies  and  Pacitic  Islands. 
8vo.     1891 

List  of  T-iKhts  (No.  5)  of  the  North,  Baltic,  and  White  Seas,  includ- 
nj{  the  Coasts  of  Denmark,  Prussia,  Russia,  Sweden,  and  Norway. 


8vo. 

List  of  Lights  (No.-  6)  of  the  British  Islands.  8vo.  (Edition  ex- 
hausted) —   

List  of  Lights  (No.  4)  of  the  Atlantic  Coast  of  Europe,  including  Spain, 
Portugal,  France,  Belgium,  and  Holland.  8vo.  (Edition  ex- 
hausted ) 

List  of  Lights  (No.  3)  of  the  West  Coast  of  Africa  and  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  including  the  West  and  North  Coasts  of  Africa,  the 
Mediterranean,  tbe  Adriatic,  the  Black  Sea,  and  the  Sea  of  A/.of. 


8vo. 


Supplement.     1890 

List  of  Lights  (No.  2)  of  the  South  and  East  Coasts  of  Africa  and  tho 
■    East  Indies,  including  tbe  East  India  Islands,  China,  Japan,  Aus- 
tralia, Tasmania,  and  New  Zealand.    8vo 

Supplement.     1890 


MISCELLANKOUS  BOOKS. 


List  of  Geographical  Positions.     1881} 

The  New  American  Practical  Navigator.   tEdition  of  1891 

Bowditch's  Useful  Tables.    1891 

Projection  Tables.     8vo.     1869 

Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  latitude  between  61°  N.  and  61°  S  . .. 
Arctic  Azimuth  Taliles  for  parallels  of  latitude  between  70°  and  88° 
1881 


Tables  for  Finding  the  Distance  of  an  Object  by  two  Bearings.     1874 . 

The  Route  of  Mail  Steamers  between  the  English  Channel  and  New 
Yoik.     1873 

The  Development  of  Great  Circle  Sailing.     1889... 

Table  of  Meridional  Parts  for  the  Terrestrial  Spheroid,  Compression 
■ggij^^^,     1889 ,,--.. ...... ...... .--.-. ...... .... .. ...... ...... .... 

Magnetism  of  Ships  and  the  Deviations  of  the  Compass.    8vo.     1867 . 

Magnetism  of  Ships  and  the  Deviations  of  the  Compass.  Comprising 
the  three  reports  of  the  Liverpool  Compass  Commission,  with  addi- 
tional papers  bv  Mr.  Archibald  Smith,  F.  R.  8.,  etc.,  and  Staff-Cap- 
tain F.J.  Evans,  R.  N.     1869 

Ship's  Compasses,  inclnditg  the  subject  of  Binnacles  and  Swinging 
Ship.    1869 

The  Way  to  Avoid  the  Center  of  our  Violent  Gales.     1868 

Practical  Hints  in  regard  to  West  India  Hurricanes.    1887 , 

Nautical  Monograph,  No.  5.  The  Great  Storm  oVl  the  Atlantic  Coast 
of  the  United  States,  March  11-14, 1888.     1888. 

General  Instructions  for  Hydrographic  Surveyors.    1868 

International  Signal  Code.  Revised  and  corrected  to  1890,  includ- 
ing the  semaphore  and  storm-signal  service  of  the  maritime  coun- 
tries, the  Life-Saving  Service  and  time-ball  system  of  the  United 
States.    189) 


$1.00 
.10 

2.00 

".'2S 


.  25 

.25 
.25 

9R 


.25 
.15 


.25 
.15 


.75 
2. 25 
L25 
1.50 
4.25 

.80 
.20 

.30 
1.00 

L20 
3.00 


3.00 

.40 
.10 
.10 
Not  for 
sale. 
.20 


3.00 


1 


302 


B00K8  FOR  PURPOSES  OF  NAVIGATION.  ♦. 


Booica  for  purposes  of  navigation,  published  by  Hydrographio  O^ce— Continaed. 


21 
93 

93 

65 

65a 
652> 
76 

97 


94 
95 


98 


! 


MISCELLANEOUS  BOOKS— Continued. 

Flags  of  Maritime  Nations.  5th  edition.  4to.  1862.  Bnreau  of 
Navigation.     (Edition  exhausted) 

Ice  and  Ice  Movemeits  in  the  Bering  Sea  and  Arctic  Basin.  (Pam- 
phlet.)    1890 

Ice  and  Ice  Movements  in  North  Atlantic  Ocean.     1890 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Ditferences  of  Longitude 
in  the  West  Indies  and  Central  America.     1877. 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Differences  of  Longitude 
on  the  East  Coast  of  South  America.     1880. 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longitude  in  the  East 
Indies,  China,  and  Japan.    1881-82. 

Report  of  Telegraphic  Determinations  of  Longitudes  in  Mexico,  Cen- 
Iral  America,  and  West  Coast  of  South  America.    1885. 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longitudes  in  Mexico, 
Central  America  the  West  Indies,  and  on  the  North  Coast  of  South 
America,  with  the  Latitudes  of  tue  several  Stations.  To  which  is 
appended  a  Report  on  Magnetic  Observations  in  Mexico  and  the 
West  Indies.    1891. 

Report  of  the  Internaiional  Meteorologic  Congress  at  Paris,  1889 

The  average  form  of  Isolated  Submarine  Peaks  and  the  interval 
which  should  obtain  between  deep-sea  soundings  taken  to  disclose 
the  character  of  the  bottom  of  the  ocean.     1^190. 

Report  on  Uniform  Svstem  for  Spelling  Foreign  Geographical  Names. 
1891. 


^1.00 

.20 

.20 

Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 


.20 
.70 


Not  for 
sale. 


U 


' '  _iiiiui]miiwMiiii-i 


mm 


E7. 


^ce— Continaed. 


Price. 

Bureau   of 

81.00 

1.      (Pam- 

.20 

.20 

Longitude 

Longitude 

n  the  East 

exico,  Cen- 

in  Mexico, 
9t  of  South 
'o  which  is 
:o  and  the 

s,  1889 

le  interval 
to  disclose 

ical  Names. 

Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 

.20 
.70 

Not  for 
sale. 

AGENTS  FOR  THE  SALE  OF  HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE  CHARTS,  SAILING 

DIRECTIONS,  ETC. 

UNITED   STATES. 

N.  C.  Wallace,  Millbridge,  Me. 

Albert  W.  Bee,  Bar  Harbor,  Me. 

Spear,  May  &  Stover,  406  Main  street,  Rockland,  Me. 

George  Bliss,  Waldoboro,  Me. 

William  O.  McCobb,  Booth  Bay,  Me. 

Charles  F.  Hayden,  Bath,  Me. 

William  Senter  &  Co.,  No.  51  Exchange  street,  Portland.  Me. 

P.  A.  Chisolm,  No.  161  Main  street,  Gloucester,  Mass. 

Henry  P.  Ives,  232  Essex  street,  Salem,  Mass. 

Chas,  C.  Hutchinson,  No.  126  Commercial  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

Samuel  Thaxter  &  Son,  No.  125  State  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

D.  W.  Stevens,  Vineyard  Haven,  Mass. 

C.  R.  Sherman  &  Son,  New  Bedford,  Mass. 

Geo.  A.  Stockwell,  Providence,  R.  L  | 

.;.  M.  K.  Southwick,  185  Thames  street,  Newport,  R.  I. 

C.  C.  Ball,  Block  Island. 

D.  B.  Hempstead,  25  Bank  street.  New  London,  Conn. 
Sergr.  P.  Daniels,  New  London,  Conn. 

Jas.  H.  Stivers,  72  Water  street,  Stoningtou,  Conn. 

R.  D.  Stevens,  custom-house,  Hartford,  Conn. 

H.  H.  Baboock,  custom  house.  New  Haven,  Conn. 

A.  H.  Kellam,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

T.  S.  &  J.  D.  Negus,  No.  140  Water  street.  New  York  City. 

R.  Merrill's  Sous,  179  Water  street,  New  York  City. 

Michael  Rupp  «fc  Co.,  No.  39  Sooth  street.  New  York  City. 

D.  Eggert's  Sons,  No.  74  Wall  street.  New  York  City. 
John  Bliss  &  Co. ,  No.  128  Front  street,  New  York  City. 
Thomas  Manning,  No.  .53  Beaver  street.  New  York  City. 

E.  Steiger  &  Co., 25  Park  Place,  New  York  City. 
Frank  M.  Porch,  custom-house,  Bridgeton,  JST.  .1. 
Riggs  &  Bro. ,  No.  221  Walnut  street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

F.J.  Sloane  &  Co.,  comer  Pratt  street  and  Speers  Wharf,  Baltimore,  Md. 

M.  V.  O'Neal,  No.  502  East  Pratt  street,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Wm.  J.  Pitts,  53  South  Gay  street,  Baltimore,  Md. 

J.  J.  Chapman,  No.  915  Pennsylvania  avenue,  Washington,  D.  C. 

W.  H.  Lowdermilk  &  Co.,  1424  F  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

J.  H.  Hickcox,  1)06  M  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

R.  Bell's  Sons,  South  Fairfax  street,  Alexandria,  Va. 

C.  F.  Greenwood  &  Bro.,  153  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Va. 

Vickery  i&  Co.,  124  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Va. 

Godfrey  Hart,  No.  24  South  Front  street,  Wilmington,  N.C. 

W.  N.  Hawriss,  with  Geo.  Harriss  &  Co.,  North  Water  street,  Wilmington, N.  C. 


304 


LIST   OP   AGENTS. 


B        I 

lie    ! 


ill 

if 


AgtnUfor  the  nale  of  Hydroyraphio  Office  charts,  sailing  directions,  etc. — Contiuaed. 

UNITED  STATES — coutiniied. 

W.  A.  Wilson,  No.  115  East  Bay  street,  Charlestou,  S.  C. 

David  Porter,  No.  I'ii  Brougbton  street,  Savannah,  Ga. 

W.  S.  Cherry  &  Co.,  No.  89  Bay  street,  Savannah,  Ga. 

Horace  Drew,  Jacksonville,  Fla. 

Robert  Kansou,  Titusville,  Fla. 

Brelsford  Bros..  Palm  Beach,  Fla. 

Alfred  Brost,  office  of  light-house  inspector,  Key  West,  Fla. 

Babbitt  &  Co.,  Franklin  street,  Tauipa,  Fla. 

C.  D.  Webster,  H3  and  85  Tarpon  a  venae,  Tarpon  Springs,  Fla. 

J.E.Grady,  Apalachicola,  Fla. 

Henry  Horsier  &  Co.,  Pensacola,  Fla. 

J.  R.Ed vrards.  Mobile,  Ala. 

Jas.  I.  Friar,  Pascagoula,  Miss. 

L.  Frigerio,  No.  161  Canal  street.  New  Orleans,  La. 

Woodward,  Wight  &.  Co.,  Nos.  38, 40, 42  Canal  street.  New  Orleans,  La. 

Chas.  F.  Trube,  Galveston,  Texas. 

Rand,  McNally  &  Co.,  148-154  Monroe  street,  Chicago,  111. 

Dodge  &  Biirbeck,  corner  Fifth  and  D  streets,  Sau  Diego,  CaL 

W.  L.  Banning,  San  Pedro,  Cal. 

Stoll  &.  Thayer,  47  South  Spring  street,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

H.  A.  C.  McPhail,  Santa  Barbara,  Cal. 

S.  S.  Arnheim,  No.  8  Stuart  street,  San  Francisco,  C^l. 

Dillou  &  Son,  No.  310  Califoraia  street,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Lunis  Weule,  No.  418  Battery  street,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Griffen  &  Reed,  Astoria,  Oregon. 

J.  K.  Gill  &.  Co.,  Nos.  28  and  30  First  street,  Portland,  Oregon. 

James  Jones,  Port  Townsend,  Wash. 

Watermau  &  Katz,  Port  Townsend,  Wash. 

E.  C.  Vaughan,  Taconia,  Wash. 

Boeringer  &  Co.,  Taconiu,  Wash. 

G.  Davies  &  Co.,  Seattle,  Wash. 

W.  H.  Pumphrey,  Seattle,  Wash. 


FOREIGN  PORTS. 

Garrett  Byrne,  St.  Johns,  Newfoundland. 
Robert  H.  Cogswell,  Halifax,  N.  S. 
J.  &  A.  McMillan.  St.  John,  N.  B. 
Hunter  <&  Grant,  Hamilton,  Ontario. 
T.  Darling  <&  Co.,  Nassau,  Bahamas. 

E.  J.  D.  Astwood,  Turks  Island. 

Edwin  W.  Wilson,  41  and  43  Obispo  street,  Havana,  Cuba. 

Juftu  B,  Carbo,,  U.  S.  vice-consul,  Cienfuegos,  Cuba. 

J.  P.  Thorsen,  St.  Thomas,  W.  I. 

James  Gall,  Kingston,  Jamaica. 

O.  .\iiciaHX,  U.  S.  consulate,  Barbados,  W.  I. 

John  A.  Donnatien,  Port  Spain,  Trinidad,  W.  I. 

R.  D.  Moliun,  Greytown,  Nicaragua. 

At  the  consulate.  Para,  Brazil. 

Arthur  B.  Dallas,  Peruambuco,  Brazil. 

John  Newton,  2  Calle  de  la  Constitucion,  Callao,  Peru. 

F.  A.  Markert,  Guaymas,  Mexico. 


r^lW" 


etc. — Contiuaed. 


na,  La. 


LIST   OP  AGENTS. 


305 


Agents  for  the  sale  of  Hydrographic  Office  oharlg,  suillng  directions,  e/c— Continue*!. 

FOREIGN  I'oiiTS— con  tinned. 

M.  VV.  Wfiitt  &■  Co.,  77  Government  street,  Vietoria,  B.C. 
Philip,  Son  &  Nephew,  41  to  T)!  South  Castio  street,  Liverpool,  England. 
Alexander  Dohhie  &  Son,  18  Clyde  Place,  Glasjjow,  Scotland. 
V.  &  M.  Lepetit,  ir»  line  de  Paris,  Havre,  France. 
G.  W.  Lohniann,  Schliefninlilo  '.Jl,  Bremen,  Germany. 
Charles  Ganpp  &  Co.,  Hongkong,  China. 
Russell  L.  Webh,  Manilla,  Philippine  Islands. 
5314 20 


MP 


y 


